0000 PDF

SINAMICS G120
Frequency converter
with the Control Units CU240B-2 CU240E-2
CU240B-2 DP CU240E-2 DP
CU240E-2 F
CU240E-2 DP-F
Operating instructions · 01 2011
SINAMICS
Answers for industry.
Inverter with CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 ___________________
Change history
Control Units ___________________

Introduction 1
___________________
Description 2
SINAMICS
___________________
Installing 3
SINAMICS G120
Inverter with CU240B-2 and ___________________
Commissioning 4
CU240E-2 Control Units
___________________
Adapt terminal strip 5
Operating Instructions
___________________
Configuring the fieldbus 6
___________________
Functions 7
___________________
Service and maintenance 8
Alarms, faults and system
___________________
messages 9
___________________
Technical data 10
___________________
Appendix A
Edition 01/2011, Firmware V4.4
Original instructions
01/2011, FW 4.4
A5E02299792B AB
Legal information
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation for the specific task, in particular its warning notices and
safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of
identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be adhered to. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG A5E02299792B AB Copyright © Siemens AG 2010,

Industry Sector Ⓟ 03/2011 2011.
Postfach 48 48 Technical data subject to change
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Change history
Important changes with respect to the manual, edition 07/2010
New functions in firmware V4.4 In Chapter

Predefined settings for the interfaces of the converter • Installing Control Unit (Page 42)
Two- and three-wire control via terminal block • Inverter control (Page 149)
Unit changeover • Application-specific functions
(Page 182)
Expanded options for controlling DC braking • Braking functions of the inverter
(Page 187)
Expansion of the automatic restart with the addition of a new • Automatic restart and flying restart
mode (Page 204)
Trace via STARTER • Commissioning with STARTER
(Page 71)
Revised descriptions In Chapter

The description of the Power Module PM240-2 and PM250- • Installing the Power Module
2 has been removed. The release of this Power Module is (Page 30)
scheduled to be with firmware V4.5.
• Technical data, Power Modules
(Page 266)
Wiring the terminal strip • Installing Control Unit (Page 42)
• Adapt terminal strip (Page 89)
Settings of the USB interface for commissioning with • Commissioning with STARTER
STARTER. (Page 71)
Slave-to-slave communications via PROFIBUS DP • Communication via PROFIBUS
(Page 102)
• Application Examples (Page 279)
Acyclic communication via PROFIBUS DP (data set 47) • Acyclic communication (Page 117)
• Application Examples (Page 279)
Function overview • Functions (Page 147)
Inverter with CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

Operating Instructions, 01/2011, FW 4.4, A5E02299792B AB 3
Change history

4 Operating Instructions, 01/2011, FW 4.4, A5E02299792B AB
Table of contents
Change history .......................................................................................................................................... 3

1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................. 11
1.1 About this manual ........................................................................................................................11
1.2 Guide through this manual...........................................................................................................12
1.3 Adapting the inverter in line with the application..........................................................................13
1.3.1 General basics .............................................................................................................................13
1.3.2 Parameter ....................................................................................................................................13
1.4 Frequently required parameters...................................................................................................14
1.5 Extended scope for adaptation ....................................................................................................16
1.5.1 BICO technology: basic principles ...............................................................................................16
1.5.2 BICO technology: example ..........................................................................................................18
2 Description............................................................................................................................................... 21
2.1 Modularity of the converter system ..............................................................................................21
2.2 Overview of Control Units ............................................................................................................24
2.3 Power Module ..............................................................................................................................24
2.4 Reactors and filters ......................................................................................................................25
3 Installing .................................................................................................................................................. 27
3.1 Procedure for installing the frequency inverter ............................................................................27
3.2 Installing reactors and filters ........................................................................................................28
3.3 Installing the Power Module.........................................................................................................30
3.3.1 Installing Power Modules .............................................................................................................30
3.3.2 Dimensions, hole drilling templates, minimum clearances, tightening torques ...........................30
3.3.3 Connection overview for Power Module ......................................................................................34
3.3.4 Connecting the line supply and motor .........................................................................................35
3.3.5 EMC-compliant connection ..........................................................................................................38
3.4 Installing Control Unit...................................................................................................................42
3.4.1 Snapping the Control Unit onto the Power Module......................................................................42
3.4.2 Interfaces, connectors, switches, terminal blocks and LEDs of the CU ......................................43
3.4.3 Terminal strips on CU240B-2 Control Units.................................................................................44
3.4.4 Terminal strips on CU240E-2 Control Units.................................................................................45
3.4.5 Select interface assignments .......................................................................................................46
3.4.5.1 Inverter with CU240B-2 Control Units..........................................................................................47
3.4.5.2 Inverter with CU240E-2 Control Units..........................................................................................49
3.4.6 Wiring terminal strips ...................................................................................................................54
4 Commissioning ........................................................................................................................................ 55
4.1 Restoring the factory setting ........................................................................................................57
4.2 Preparing for commissioning .......................................................................................................59

Table of contents
4.2.1 Collecting motor data .................................................................................................................. 59

4.2.2 Inverter factory setting................................................................................................................. 61
4.2.3 Defining requirements for the application ................................................................................... 62
4.3 Commissioning with factory settings........................................................................................... 63
4.3.1 Wiring examples for the factory settings ..................................................................................... 64
4.4 Commissioning with the BOP-2 .................................................................................................. 66
4.4.1 Display of the BOP-2................................................................................................................... 66
4.4.2 Menu structure ............................................................................................................................ 67
4.4.3 Freely selecting and changing parameters ................................................................................. 68
4.4.4 Basic commissioning................................................................................................................... 69
4.4.5 Additional settings ....................................................................................................................... 70
4.5 Commissioning with STARTER .................................................................................................. 71
4.5.1 Adapting the USB interface......................................................................................................... 72
4.5.2 Generating a STARTER project.................................................................................................. 73
4.5.3 Go online and perform the basic commissioning ........................................................................ 73
4.5.4 Making additional settings........................................................................................................... 77
4.5.5 Trace function for optimizing the drive ........................................................................................ 78
4.6 Data backup and standard commissioning ................................................................................. 81
4.6.1 Backing up and transferring settings using a memory card........................................................ 82
4.6.1.1 Saving setting on memory card .................................................................................................. 82
4.6.1.2 Transferring the setting from the memory card........................................................................... 84
4.6.1.3 Safely remove the memory card ................................................................................................. 85
4.6.2 Backing up and transferring settings using STARTER ............................................................... 86
4.6.3 Saving settings and transferring them using an operator panel ................................................. 87
4.6.4 Other ways to back up settings ................................................................................................... 87
5 Adapt terminal strip.................................................................................................................................. 89
5.1 Digital inputs................................................................................................................................ 90
5.2 Fail-safe digital input ................................................................................................................... 92
5.3 Digital outputs ............................................................................................................................. 93
5.4 Analog inputs .............................................................................................................................. 94
5.5 Analog outputs ............................................................................................................................ 97
6 Configuring the fieldbus ......................................................................................................................... 101
6.1 Communication via PROFIBUS ................................................................................................ 102
6.1.1 Configuring communication to the control................................................................................. 102
6.1.2 Setting the address ................................................................................................................... 103
6.1.3 Basic settings for communication ............................................................................................. 104
6.1.4 Cyclic communication ............................................................................................................... 105
6.1.4.1 Control and status word 1 ......................................................................................................... 106
6.1.4.2 Control and status word 3 ......................................................................................................... 109
6.1.4.3 Data structure of the parameter channel .................................................................................. 111
6.1.4.4 Slave-to-slave communication .................................................................................................. 116
6.1.5 Acyclic communication.............................................................................................................. 117
6.1.5.1 Reading and changing parameters via data set 47 .................................................................. 117
6.2 Communication via RS485........................................................................................................ 122
6.2.1 Integrating inverters into a bus system via the RS485 interface............................................... 122
6.2.2 Communication via USS ........................................................................................................... 123

Table of contents
6.2.2.1 Setting the address ....................................................................................................................123

6.2.2.2 Basic settings for communication ..............................................................................................124
6.2.2.3 Structure of a USS telegram ......................................................................................................124
6.2.2.4 User data range of the USS telegram........................................................................................126
6.2.2.5 Data structure of the USS parameter channel...........................................................................127
6.2.2.6 USS read request ......................................................................................................................132
6.2.2.7 USS write job .............................................................................................................................133
6.2.2.8 USS process data channel (PZD)..............................................................................................134
6.2.2.9 Time-out and other errors ..........................................................................................................134
6.2.3 Communication over Modbus RTU............................................................................................137
6.2.3.1 Setting the address ....................................................................................................................138
6.2.3.2 Basic settings for communication ..............................................................................................138
6.2.3.3 Modbus RTU telegram...............................................................................................................139
6.2.3.4 Baud rates and mapping tables .................................................................................................140
6.2.3.5 Write and read access via FC 3 and FC 6.................................................................................143
6.2.3.6 Communication procedure.........................................................................................................145
7 Functions ............................................................................................................................................... 147
7.1 Overview of the inverter functions..............................................................................................147
7.2 Inverter control ...........................................................................................................................149
7.2.1 Two-wire control: method 1........................................................................................................150
7.2.2 Two-wire control, method 2........................................................................................................151
7.2.3 Two-wire control, method 3........................................................................................................152
7.2.4 Three-wire control, method 1 .....................................................................................................153
7.2.5 Three-wire control, method 2 .....................................................................................................154
7.2.6 Switching over the inverter control (command data set) ...........................................................155
7.3 Command sources.....................................................................................................................158
7.4 Setpoint sources ........................................................................................................................159
7.4.1 Analog input as setpoint source.................................................................................................159
7.4.2 Motorized potentiometer as setpoint source..............................................................................160
7.4.3 Fixed speed as setpoint source .................................................................................................162
7.4.4 Running the motor in jog mode (JOG function) .........................................................................164
7.4.5 Specifying the motor speed via the fieldbus ..............................................................................165
7.5 Setpoint calculation....................................................................................................................166
7.5.1 Minimum speed and maximum speed .......................................................................................166
7.5.2 Ramp-function generator ...........................................................................................................167
7.6 Motor control ..............................................................................................................................168
7.6.1 V/f control ...................................................................................................................................169
7.6.1.1 V/f control with linear and square-law characteristic..................................................................169
7.6.1.2 Additional characteristics for the V/f control...............................................................................170
7.6.1.3 Optimizing with a high break loose torque and brief overload...................................................171
7.6.2 Vector control .............................................................................................................................173
7.6.2.1 Properties of vector control ........................................................................................................173
7.6.2.2 Commissioning vector control....................................................................................................173
7.6.2.3 Torque control ............................................................................................................................174
7.7 Protection functions ...................................................................................................................175
7.7.1 Inverter temperature monitoring.................................................................................................175
7.7.2 Motor temperature monitoring using a temperature sensor ......................................................176
7.7.3 Protecting the motor by calculating the motor temperature.......................................................178

Table of contents
7.7.4 Overcurrent protection .............................................................................................................. 178

7.7.5 Limiting the maximum DC link voltage...................................................................................... 179
7.8 Status messages....................................................................................................................... 181
7.8.1 Overview, evaluating the inverter state..................................................................................... 181
7.8.2 System runtime ......................................................................................................................... 181
7.9 Application-specific functions .................................................................................................... 182
7.9.1 Unit changeover ........................................................................................................................ 182
7.9.1.1 Changing over the motor standard ........................................................................................... 183
7.9.1.2 Changing over the unit system ................................................................................................. 184
7.9.1.3 Changing over process variables for the technology controller ................................................ 185
7.9.1.4 Changing of the units with STARTER....................................................................................... 185
7.9.2 Braking functions of the inverter ............................................................................................... 187
7.9.2.1 Comparison of electrical braking methods................................................................................ 187
7.9.2.2 DC braking ................................................................................................................................ 190
7.9.2.3 Compound braking.................................................................................................................... 193
7.9.2.4 Dynamic braking ....................................................................................................................... 195
7.9.2.5 Braking with regenerative feedback to the line ......................................................................... 197
7.9.2.6 Motor holding brake .................................................................................................................. 198
7.9.3 Automatic restart and flying restart ........................................................................................... 204
7.9.3.1 Flying restart – switching on while the motor is running ........................................................... 204
7.9.3.2 Automatic switch-on .................................................................................................................. 206
7.9.4 PID technology controller .......................................................................................................... 210
7.9.5 Load torque monitoring (system protection) ............................................................................. 211
7.9.6 Speed and load failure via digital input ..................................................................................... 213
7.9.7 Logical and arithmetic functions using function blocks ............................................................. 216
7.10 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function ..................................................................................... 220
7.10.1 Prerequisite for STO use........................................................................................................... 220
7.10.2 Permitted sensors ..................................................................................................................... 220
7.10.3 Connecting fail-safe digital inputs ............................................................................................. 221
7.10.4 F-DI signal filtering .................................................................................................................... 223
7.10.5 Forced dormant error detection ................................................................................................ 226
7.10.6 Password................................................................................................................................... 226
7.10.7 Commissioning the STO ........................................................................................................... 227
7.10.7.1 Commissioning tool................................................................................................................... 227
7.10.7.2 Resetting the safety function parameters to the factory setting................................................ 227
7.10.7.3 Defining commissioning method ............................................................................................... 228
7.10.7.4 Setting STO............................................................................................................................... 229
7.10.7.5 Activate settings ........................................................................................................................ 229
7.10.7.6 Multiple assignment of the DI.................................................................................................... 230
7.10.8 Acceptance test - following completion of commissioning........................................................ 232
7.10.8.1 Prerequisites and authorized persons ...................................................................................... 232
7.10.8.2 Complete acceptance test......................................................................................................... 232
7.10.8.3 Reduced acceptance test (only STO) ....................................................................................... 233
7.10.8.4 Documentation .......................................................................................................................... 234
7.10.8.5 Function test.............................................................................................................................. 236
7.10.8.6 Completion of the certificate...................................................................................................... 237
7.11 Switchover between different settings ...................................................................................... 239
8 Service and maintenance ...................................................................................................................... 241
8.1 Overview of replacing converter components........................................................................... 241

Table of contents
8.2 Replacing the Control Unit .........................................................................................................242

8.3 Replacing the Power Module .....................................................................................................244
9 Alarms, faults and system messages..................................................................................................... 245
9.1 Operating states indicated on LEDs ..........................................................................................246
9.2 Alarms ........................................................................................................................................248
9.3 Faults .........................................................................................................................................251
9.4 List of alarms and faults .............................................................................................................256
10 Technical data ....................................................................................................................................... 263
10.1 Technical data, CU240B-2 Control Unit.....................................................................................263
10.2 Technical data, CU240E-2 Control Unit.....................................................................................264
10.3 Technical data, Power Modules.................................................................................................266
10.3.1 Technical data, PM240 ..............................................................................................................268
A Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 279
A.1 Application Examples.................................................................................................................279
A.1.1 Configuring communication in STEP 7 ......................................................................................279
A.1.1.1 Task ...........................................................................................................................................279
A.1.1.2 Required components................................................................................................................279
A.1.1.3 Creating a STEP 7 project .........................................................................................................280
A.1.1.4 Configuring communications to a SIMATIC control ...................................................................281
A.1.1.5 Insert the frequency converter into the STEP 7 project.............................................................282
A.1.2 STEP 7 program examples........................................................................................................284
A.1.2.1 STEP 7 program example for cyclic communication .................................................................284
A.1.2.2 STEP 7 program example for acyclic communication ...............................................................286
A.1.3 Configuring slave-to-slave communication in STEP 7...............................................................290
A.2 Additional information on the inverter ........................................................................................292
A.3 Mistakes and improvements ......................................................................................................294
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 295

Table of contents

Introduction 1
1.1 About this manual
Who requires the operating instructions and what for?

These operating instructions primarily address fitters, commissioning engineers and machine
operators. The operating instructions describe the devices and device components and
enable the target groups being addressed to install, connect-up, parameterize, and
commission the inverters safely and in the correct manner.
What is described in the operating instructions?

These operating instructions provide a summary of all of the information required to operate
the inverter under normal, safe conditions.
The information provided in the operating instructions has been compiled in such a way that
it is sufficient for all standard applications and enables drives to be commissioned as
efficiently as possible. Where it appears useful, additional information for entry level
personnel has been added.
The operating instructions also contain information about special applications. Since it is
assumed that readers already have a sound technical knowledge of how to configure and
parameterize these applications, the relevant information is summarized accordingly. This
relates, e.g. to operation with fieldbus systems and safety-related applications.

Introduction
1.2 Guide through this manual
1.2 Guide through this manual

In this manual, you will find background information on your inverter, as well as a full
description of the commissioning procedure:
%DVLFV
① Should you be unfamiliar with assigning
parameters to the inverter, background
7KHSDUDPHWHUVIRUWKHLQYHUWHU information can be found here:
• Adapting the inverter in line with the
application (Page 13)
• Frequently required parameters (Page 14)
• Extended scope for adaptation (Page 16)
&RPSRQHQWVRIWKHLQYHUWHU
② Information on the inverter hardware can be
found here:
HJUHDFWRUVILOWHUVRSHUDWRUSDQHO
• Modularity of the converter system
(Page 21)
All information relating to the commissioning of

6WDUWRIFRPPLVVLRQLQJ
your inverter is located in the following
chapters:
,QVWDOODWLRQ
③ • Procedure for installing the frequency
,QVWDOOLQJDQGZLULQJWKHLQYHUWHU inverter (Page 27)
$GDSWDWLRQWRWKHDSSOLFDWLRQ ④ • Commissioning (Page 55)

%DVLFFRPPLVVLRQLQJFRQILJXULQJLQWHUIDFHV • Adapt terminal strip (Page 89)
VHWWLQJIXQFWLRQV
• Configuring the fieldbus (Page 101)
'DWDEDFNXS
2Q3&3*RSHUDWRUSDQHORUPHPRU\FDUG ⑤ • Data backup and standard commissioning
(Page 81)
(QGRIFRPPLVVLRQLQJ
0DLQWHQDQFHDQGGLDJQRVWLFV
⑥ Information regarding the maintenance and
diagnostics of your inverter is located in the
5HSODFLQJFRPSRQHQWVGLVSOD\VDODUPV following chapters:
IDXOWV
• Service and maintenance (Page 241)
• Alarms, faults and system messages
(Page 245)
7HFKQLFDOGDWD
⑦ The most important technical data for your
inverter is located in this chapter:
• Technical data (Page 263)

Introduction
1.3 Adapting the inverter in line with the application
1.3 Adapting the inverter in line with the application
1.3.1 General basics

Inverters are used to improve and extend the starting and speed response of motors.
Adapting the inverter to the drive task

The inverter must match the motor that it is controlling and the drive task to be able to
optimally operate and protect the motor.
Although the inverter can be parameterized for very specific applications, many standard
applications function satisfactorily with just a few adaptations.
Use the factory settings (where possible)

In simple applications, the inverter already functions with its factory settings.
Only basic commissioning is required ... for simple, standard applications

Most standard applications function after just a few adaptations made during the basic
commissioning.
1.3.2 Parameter
Parameters are the interface between the firmware of the inverter and the commissioning
tool, e.g. an operator panel.
Adjustable parameters
Adjustable parameters are the "adjusting screws" with which you adapt the inverter to its
particular application. If you change the value of an adjustable parameter, then the inverter
behavior also changes.
Adjustable parameters are shown with a "p" as prefix, e.g. p1082 is the parameter for the
maximum motor speed.
Display parameters
Display parameters allow internal measured quantities of the inverter and the motor to be
read.
Display parameters are shown with a "r" as prefix, e.g. p0027 is the parameter for the
inverter output current.

Introduction
1.4 Frequently required parameters
Parameters that in many cases help
Table 1- 1 How to switch to commissioning mode or restore the factory setting
Parameter Description
p0010 Commissioning parameters
0: Ready (factory setting)
1: Carry out basic commissioning
3: Perform motor commissioning
5: Technological applications and units
15: Define number of data records
30: Factory setting - initiate restore factory settings
Table 1- 2 How to determine the firmware version of the Control Unit
r0018 The firmware version is displayed:
Table 1- 3 How to select the command and setpoint sources for the inverter
p0015 Additional information is available in the section Select interface assignments (Page 46).
Table 1- 4 This is how you parameterize the up and down ramps
p1080 Minimum speed
0.00 [rpm] factory setting
p1082 Maximum speed
1500.000 [rpm] factory setting
p1120 Rampup time
10.00 [s]
p1121 Rampdown time
10.00 [s]

Introduction
Table 1- 5 This is how you set the closed-loop type
p1300 0: V/f control with linear characteristic
1: V/f control with linear characteristic and FCC
2: V/f control with parabolic characteristic
3: V/f control with parameterizable characteristic
4: V/f control with linear characteristic and ECO
5: V/f control for drives requiring a precise frequency (textile area)
6: V/f control for drive requiring a precise frequency and FCC
7: V/f control with parabolic characteristic and ECO
19: V/f control with independent voltage setpoint
20: Speed control (without encoder)
22: Torque control (without encoder)
Table 1- 6 This is how you optimize the starting behavior of the V/f control for a high break loose torque and overload
p1310 Voltage boost to compensate ohmic losses
The voltage boost is active from standstill up to the rated speed.
It is at its highest at speed 0 and continually decreases as the speed increases.
Value of the voltage boost at zero speed 0 in V:
1.732 × rated motor current (p0305) × stator resistance (r0395) × p1310 / 100%
p1311 Voltage boost when accelerating
The voltage boost is effective from standstill up to the rated speed.
It is independent of the speed and has a value in V of:
1.732 × rated motor current (p0305) × stator resistance (p0350) × p1311 / 100%
p1312 Voltage boost when starting
Setting to additionally boost the voltage when starting, however only when accelerating for the first time.

Introduction
1.5 Extended scope for adaptation
1.5.1 BICO technology: basic principles
Principle of operation of BICO technology

Open/closed-loop control functions, communication functions as well as diagnostic and
operator functions are implemented in the inverter. Every function comprises one or several
BICO blocks that are interconnected with one another.
Inputs Parameter Output
MOP enable (higher)

p1035 MOP output
speed
[rpm]
MOP enable (lower) MOP r1050
p1036
Figure 1-1 Example of a BICO block: Motorized potentiometer (MOP)
Most of the BICO blocks can be parameterized. You can adapt the blocks to your application
using parameters.
You cannot change the signal interconnection within the block. However, the interconnection
between blocks can be changed by interconnecting the inputs of a block with the appropriate
outputs of another block.
The signal interconnection of the blocks is realized, contrary to electric circuitry, not using
cables, but in the software.
p0840 ON/
DI 0 r0722.0 Index [0] OFF1
Figure 1-2 Example: Signal interconnection of two BICO blocks for digital input 0
Binectors and connectors

Connectors and binectors are used to exchange signals between the individual BICO blocks:
● Connectors are used to interconnect "analog" signals. (e.g. MOP output speed)
● Binectors are used to interconnect "digital" signals. (e.g. 'Enable MOP up' command)

Introduction
Definition of BICO technology

BICO technology represents a type of parameterization that can be used to disconnect all
internal signal interconnections between BICO blocks or establish new connections. This is
realized using Binectors and Connectors. Hence the name BICO technology. ( Binector
Connector Technology)
BICO parameters
You can use the BICO parameters to define the sources of the input signals of a block.
Using BICO parameters you define from which connectors and binectors a block reads-in its
input signals. This is how you "interconnect" the blocks stored in the devices according to
your particular application requirements. The five different BICO parameter types are shown
in the following diagram:
pxxxx
%LQHFWRULQSXW rxxxx %LQHFWRURXWSXW
%, %2
BICO block rxxxx %LQHFWRUFRQQHFWRU

rxxxx RXWSXW
&2%2
pxxxx
&RQQHFWRULQSXW rxxxx &RQQHFWRURXWSXW
&, &2
Figure 1-3 BICO symbols
Binector/connector outputs (CO/BO) are parameters that combine more than one binector
output in a single word (e.g. r0052 CO/BO: status word 1). Each bit in the word represents a
digital (binary) signal. This summary reduces the number of parameters and simplifies
parameter assignment.
BICO outputs (CO, BO, or CO/BO) can be used more than once.
When do you need to use BICO technology?
BICO technology allows you to adapt the inverter to a wide range of different requirements.
This does not necessarily have to involve highly complex functions.
Example 1: Assign a different function to a digital input.
Example 2: Switch the speed setpoint from the fixed speed to the analog input.
What precautions should you take when using BICO technology?
Always apply caution when handling internal interconnections. Note which changes you
make as you go along since the process of analyzing them later can be quite difficult.
The STARTER commissioning tool offers various screens that make it much easier for you
to use BICO technology. The signals that you can interconnect are displayed in plain text,
which means that you do not need any prior knowledge of BICO technology.

Introduction
What sources of information do you need to help you set parameters using BICO
technology?
● This manual is sufficient for simple signal interconnections, e.g. assigning a different
significance to the to digital inputs.
● The parameter list in the List Manual is sufficient for signal interconnections that go
beyond just simple ones.
● You can also refer to the function diagrams in the List Manual for complex signal
interconnections.
1.5.2 BICO technology: example
Example: Shifting a basic PLC functionality into the converter

A conveyor system is to be configured in such a way that it can only start when two signals
are present simultaneously. These could be the following signals, for example:
● The oil pump is running (the required pressure level is not reached, however, until after
five seconds)
● The protective door is closed
The task is realized by inserting free blocks between the digital input 0 and the internal
ON/OFF1 command and interconnecting them.
p20161 = 5 p20159 = 5000 [ms]
p20158 T 0
DI 0 r0722.0 Index [0] r20160 p20032 = 5 p20033 = 440
PDE 0
p20030
p20162 = 430 Index [0] p0840
& ON/
DI 1 r0722.1 Index [1] r20031 Index [0]
1 Index [2] AND 0 OFF1
1 Index [3]
Figure 1-4 Example: Signal interconnection for interlock
The signal of digital input 0 (DI 0) is fed through a time block (PDE 0) and is interconnected
with the input of a logic block (AND 0). The signal of digital input 1 (DI 1) is interconnected to
the second input of the logic block. The logic block output issues the ON/OFF1 command to
switch-on the motor.
Table 1- 7 Parameterizing an interlock
P20161 = 5 The time block is enabled by assigning to runtime group 5 (time slice of
128 ms)
P20162 = 430 Run sequence of the time block within runtime group 5 (processing before
the AND logic block)

Introduction
P20032 = 5 The AND logic block is enabled by assigning to runtime group 5 (time
slice of 128 ms)
P20033 = 440 Run sequence of the AND logic block within runtime group 5 (processing
after the time block)
P20159 = 5000.00 Setting the delay time [ms] of the time module: 5 seconds
P20158 = 722.0 Connect the status of DI 0 to the input of the time block
r0722.0 = Parameter that displays the status of digital input 0.
P20030 [0] = 20160 Interconnecting the time block to the 1st input of the AND
P20030 [1] = 722.1 Interconnecting the status of DI 1 to the 2nd AND input
r0722.1 = Parameter that displays the status of digital input 1.
P0840 = 20031 Interconnecting the AND output to the control command ON/OFF1
Explanation of the example using the ON/OFF1 command

Parameter P0840[0] is the input of the "ON/OFF1 command" block of the converter.
Parameter r20031 is the output of the AND block. To interconnect the ON/OFF1 command
with the output of the AND block, set P0840 to 20031.
p0840[0] = 20031
p20030
Index [0] p0840 ON/
& r20031 Index [0] OFF1
Index [1]
AND 0
Index [2]
Index [3]
Figure 1-5 Interconnecting two BICO blocks by setting p0840[0] = 20031
Principle when connecting BICO blocks using BICO technology

An interconnection between two BICO blocks comprises a connector or binector and a BICO
parameter. The interconnection is always established from the perspective of the input of a
particular BICO block. This means that the output of an upstream block must always be
assigned to the input of a downstream block. The assignment is always made by entering
the number of the connector/binector from which the required input signals are read in a
BICO parameter.
This interconnection logic involves the question: where does the signal come from?

Introduction

Description 2
2.1 Modularity of the converter system
Thanks to their modular design, the converters can be used in a wide range of applications
with respect to functionality and power.
The following overview describes the converter components, which you require for your
application.
Main components of the converter
Each SINAMICS G120 converter comprises a Control

Unit and Power Module.
• The Control Unit controls and monitors the Power
Module and the connected motor in various control
modes (which can be selected as required). The
Control Unit is used to control the converter locally or
centrally.
• The Power Modules are available for motors with a
power range of between 0.37 kW and 250 kW.
3RZHU0RGXOH &RQWURO8QLW

Description
Tools to commission the inverter
,23 %23
,23
+DQGKHOG
Figure 2-1 Tools to commission the inverter
Table 2- 1 Components and tools for commissioning and data backup
Component or tool Order number

Operator panel for BOP-2 - for snapping onto the frequency converter 6SL3255-0AA00-4CA1
commissioning,
• Copies drive parameters
diagnostics and
controlling • Two-line display
frequency • Guided commissioning
converters
IOP - to snap onto the frequency converter or with the handheld 6SL3255-0AA00-4JA0
• Copies drive parameters IOP Handheld:
6SL3255-0AA00-4HA0
• Plain text display
• Menu-based operation and application wizards
IOP/BOP-2 Mounting Kit IP54/UL Type 12 6SL3256-0AP00-0JA0
Tools for the PC STARTER commissioning tool (PC software) STARTER on DVD:
connected to the frequency converter via USB cable 6SL3072-0AA00-0AG0
Downloading: STARTER
(http://support.automation.sieme
ns.com/WW/view/en/10804985/1
30000)
PC Connection Kit 6SL3255-0AA00-2CA0
The kit contains a STARTER DVD and USB cable

Description
Component or tool Order number

Drive ES Basic 6SW1700-5JA00-4AA0
To commission the frequency converter via the PROFIBUS
interface. Includes STARTER
Memory card to save and transfer the MMC card 6SL3254-0AM00-0AA0

frequency converter settings SD card 6ES7954-8LB00-0AA0
Components, which you require depending on your particular application
Filters and reactors

● Line filters, Classes A and B
● Line reactors
● Braking resistors
● Output reactors
● Sine-wave filter
Further options
● Brake Relay
● Adapter for DIN rail mounting (only PM240, FSA)
● Shield connection kit (for Control Unit and Power Module)

Description
2.2 Overview of Control Units
2.2 Overview of Control Units

The Control Units differ in relation to the integrated safety functions, the type of fieldbuses,
and the number of inputs and outputs.
CU240B-2 CU240B-2 DP CU240E-2 CU240E-2 F CU240E-2 DP CU240E-2 DP-F

Fieldbus USS or PROFIBUS USS or USS or PROFIBUS PROFIBUS DP
Modbus RTU DP Modbus RTU Modbus RTU DP with PROFIsafe
Integrated safety - - STO STO, SS1, STO STO, SS1, SLS
functions SLS
Digital inputs 4 6
Fail-safe digital - 1 3 1 3
inputs *)
Analog inputs 1 2
Digital outputs 1 3
Analog outputs 1 2
*) A fail-safe digital input is created by combining two "standard" digital inputs
2.3 Power Module

Power Modules are available in various degrees of protection with a different topology in the
power range from between 0.37 kW up to 250 kW. The Power Modules are sub-divided into
various frame sizes (FS).
Power Modules with degree of protection IP20: PM240, PM250, PM260

Description
2.4 Reactors and filters
Frame size FSA FSB FSC FSD FSE FSF FSGX

PM240, 3AC 400V - power units with integrated braking chopper1)
Power range (LO) in kW 0.37 … 1.5 2.2 … 4 7.5 … 15 18.5 … 30 37 … 45 55 … 132 160 … 250
line filter, Class A ○ ● ● ● ● ◑ ◑
PM250, 3AC 400V - power units capable of energy recovery
Power range (LO) in kW --- --- 7.5 … 15 18.5 … 30 37 … 45 55 … 90 ---
line filter, Class A --- --- ● ● ● ● ---
PM260, 3AC 690V - power units capable of energy recovery
Power range (LO) in kW --- --- --- 11 … 18.5 --- 30 … 55 ---
line filter, Class A --- --- --- ○/● --- ○/● ---
Sine-wave filter --- --- --- ● --- ● ---
○ = without; ● = integrated; ◑ = from 110 kW for external mounting

1) The Power Module PM240 FSGX is supplied without braking chopper, but is prepared for installation of an optional
braking chopper
Overview
Depending on the Power Module, the following combinations with filters and reactors are
permitted:
Power Module Line-side components Load-side components

Line reactor Line filters Braking Sine-wave filter Output reactor
class B resistor
PM240 ● ● ● ● ●
PM250 - ● - ● ●
PM260 - ● - integrated -
For further details, refer to the connection example in section Procedure for installing the
frequency inverter (Page 27).

Description

Installing 3
3.1 Procedure for installing the frequency inverter
Preconditions for installation

Check that the following preconditions are fulfilled before installing:
● Are the required components, tools and small parts available?
● Are the ambient conditions permissible? See Technical data (Page 263).
Installation sequence
3UHUHTXLVLWHVIRULQVWDOODWL
RQKDYHEHHQIXOILOOHG
,QVWDOOLQJUHDFWRUV
DQGILOWHUV ① Installing reactors and filters (Page 28)
,QVWDOOLQJWKH3RZHU
0RGXOH ② Installing the Power Module (Page 30)
,QVWDOOLQJ&RQWURO8QLW
③ Installing Control Unit (Page 42)

,QVWDOODWLRQFRPSOHWHG
You will find details on the installation in the Internet: Hardware Installation Manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/30563173/133300).
You can start to commission the converter once installation has been completed.

Installing
3.2 Installing reactors and filters
Fitting inverter system components in space-saving manner

Many inverter system components are designed as base components, that is, the
component is mounted on the baseplate and the inverter mounted above it to save space.
Up to two base components can be mounted above one another.
PM240
Line supply
Line
Line filter Line
Power reactor Power reactor
Modules Modules
Line supply
Basic layout of a PM240 Power Module with line PM240 Power Module frame size FSA with line
reactor as base component reactor and class A line filter
The line-side reactors are equipped with terminals while the reactors on the Power Module side are
equipped with a prefabricated cable. In the final installation position, the mains terminals are at the
top on frame sizes FSA to FSC, and at the bottom on frame sizes FSD to FSE.
For frame size FSA, in addition to the line reactor, a class A line filter can be used. In this case, the
mains connection is at the bottom.
Power Modules of frame size FSB and higher are available with integrated class A line filters (an
external class A line filter is not required in this case).
Line Line reactor
Line Output reactor Output reactor
supply Line filter
reactor or sine-wave or sine-wave
Power filter filter
Module Power
Module
Line
supply
to the motor
to the motor
PM240: frame size FSA with line reactor and PM240 Power Module frame size FSA with line
output reactor or sine-wave filter reactor, line filter and output reactor or sine-wave
filter
In installations containing more than two base-type system components (e.g. line filter + line reactor +
output reactor), the components must be installed to the side of the Power Module whereby the line
reactor and line filter are installed under the Power Module and the output reactor to the side.

Installing
PM250
Line Line supply
Line filter supply
Output reactor or Power Line filter
Power Modules
Module sine-wave filter
to the motor
Basic layout of a PM250 Power Module with class Basic layout of a PM250 Power Module with a
B line filter as a base component class B line filter as a base component and
output reactor or sine-wave filter

Installing
3.3 Installing the Power Module
3.3.1 Installing Power Modules
Installing Power Modules with degree of protection IP20
● Install the Power Module vertically on a mounting plate in a control cabinet.

The smaller frame sizes of the converter (FSA and FSB) can also be mounted on DIN
rails using an adapter.
● When installing, observe the minimum clearances to other components in the control
cabinet.
These minimum clearances are necessary to ensure adequate cooling of the converter.
● Do not cover the ventilation openings the converter.
Installing additional components

Depending on the application, additional line reactors, filters, braking resistors, brake relays
etc., may also be used.
Please observe the mounting and installation instructions supplied with these components.
3.3.2 Dimensions, hole drilling templates, minimum clearances, tightening torques
Note
With the exception of inverters in the 160 kW … 250 kW power range, the CU240B-2 und
CU240E-2 increase the inverter's total depth by 40 mm and by a further 30 mm if using an
IOP.

Installing
Dimensions and drilling patterns for the PM240 Power Modules

'HSWK &RQWURO8QLW :LGWK
7KHUPDO
WRS GLVVLSDWLRQ
)6$)6) )6$)6*;
+HLJKW
ODWHUDO ODWHUDO
)6$)6*;
'HSWK
ERWWRP
E E
&RROLQJDLU
F
E
F
E )6*;
F
D
D
)6%)6)
D
)6$
Figure 3-1 PM240 drilling pattern
Table 3- 1 PM240, IP20 dimensions
Frame size Dimensions (mm) Clearances (mm)

Height Width Depth a b c top bottom lateral
FSA 173 73 145 160 36.5 -- 100 100 30*
FSB 270 153 165 258 133 -- 100 100 40*
FSC 334 189 185 323 167 -- 125 125 50*
FSD without filter 419 275 204 325 235 11 300 300 0
FSD with filter, Class A 512 275 204 419 235 11 300 300 0
FSE without filter 499 275 204 405 235 11 300 300 0
FSE with filter, Class A 635 275 204 541 235 11 300 300 0
FSF without filter 634 350 316 598 300 11 350 350 0
FSF with filter, Class A 934 350 316 899 300 11 350 350 0
FSGX 1533 326 547 1506 125 14.5 250 150 50
Fixing: FSA/FSB: M4 screws, 2.5 Nm / 22 lbf .in FSC: M5 screws, 2.5 Nm / 22 lbf .in FSF/FSGX: M8
FSD/FSE: M6 screws, 6 Nm/53 lbf .in screws, 13 Nm / 115 lbf .in
*) up to 40 °C without any lateral clearance

Installing
7KHUPDO 'HSWK &RQWURO8QLW :LGWK E

WRS
GLVVLSDWLRQ
F
ODWHUDO ODWHUDO )6&)6) )6&)6)
D
+HLJKW
)6&)6) )6&)6)
ERWWRP
&RROLQJ 'HSWK
DLU

FSC 334 189 185 323 167 -- 125 125 50*
FSD without filter 419 275 204 325 235 11 300 300 0
FSD with filter, Class A 512 275 204 419 235 11 300 300 0
FSE without filter 499 275 204 405 235 11 300 300 0
FSE with filter, Class A 635 275 204 541 235 11 300 300 0
FSF without filter 634 350 316 598 300 11 350 350 0
FSF with filter, Class A 934 350 316 899 300 11 350 350 0
Fixing: FSB: M4 screws, 2.5 Nm / 22 lbf .in FSD/FSE: FSC: M5 screws, 2.5 Nm / 22 lbf .in FSF/: M8
M6 screws, 6 Nm/53 lbf .in screws, 13 Nm / 115 lbf .in

Installing
'HSWK &RQWURO8QLW :LGWK E

WRS
F
ODWHUDO ODWHUDO )6')6) )6')6)
)6')6)
+HLJKW
)6')6)
D
ERWWRP
'HSWK

FSD without / with filter 419 275 204 419 235 11 300 300 30*
FSF without / with filter 634 350 316 598 300 11 350 350 0
Fixing: FSD: M6 screws, 6 Nm/53 lbf.in FSF: M8 screws, 13 Nm / 115 lbf.in

Installing
3.3.3 Connection overview for Power Module
/
/
/
3(
8 9 : 3(

/LQHUHDFWRU
8 9 : 3(
%UDNLQJ / / / 3( / / / 3(
UHVLVWRU /LQHILOWHUH[WHUQDO /LQHILOWHUH[WHUQDO

/ಬ /ಬ /ಬ 3(ಬ /ಬ /ಬ /ಬ 3(ಬ
5 5 8 9 : 3( 8 9 : 3(
3RZHU0RGXOH30 3RZHU0RGXOH30
8 9 : 3( 8 9 : 3(
&75/ 8 9 : 3( &75/ 8 9 : 3(

6LQHZDYHILOWHURU
6LQHZDYHILOWHURU
%UDNH 2XWSXWUHDFWRU %UDNH 2XWSXWUHDFWRU
5HOD\ 5HOD\
8 9 : 3( 8 9 : 3(
8 9 : 8 9 :
3( 3(
0 0
3RZHUVXSSO\RI 3RZHUVXSSO\RIWKH
WKHEUDNH EUDNH
$FFHVVRULHV
Figure 3-4 Connections for PM240 and PM250 Power Modules
In addition to the Power Modules shown above, you can also combine Control Units with a
PM260 Power Module. The PM260 connection corresponds to that of a PM250, however, a
sine-wave filter is integrated in the PM260.
The PM240, PM250 and PM260 Power Modules are available with and without integrated
class A line filters. An external filter has to be installed for all Power Modules to satisfy more
stringent EMC requirements (Class B).

Installing
3.3.4 Connecting the line supply and motor
Preconditions
Once the inverter has been properly installed, the line and motor connections can now be
established. The following warning information must be observed here.
WARNING
Line and motor connections
The inverter must be grounded on the line supply and motor side. If the inverter is not
correctly grounded, this can lead to extremely hazardous conditions which, under certain
circumstances, can result in death.
The device must be disconnected from the electrical power supply before any connections
with the device are established or in any way altered.
The inverter terminals be at hazardous voltages even after the inverter has been switched
off. After disconnecting the line supply, wait at least 5 minutes until the device has
discharged itself. Only then, carry out any installation and mounting work.
When connecting the inverter to the line supply, ensure that the motor terminal box is
closed.
Even if the LED or other indicators do not light up or remain inactive when a function is
switched from ON to OFF, this does not necessarily mean that the unit has been switched
off or is de-energized.
The short-circuit ratio of the power supply must be at least 100.
Make sure that the inverter is configured for the correct supply voltage (the inverter must
not be connected to a higher supply voltage).
If a residual-current circuit breaker is installed on the supply side of the electronic devices
to protect against direct or indirect contact, only type B is permissible. In all other cases,
other protective measures must be implemented, such as creating a barrier between the
electronic devices and the environment by means of double or reinforced insulation or
isolating them from the supply using a transformer.
CAUTION
Supply cable and signal lines
The signal lines must be routed separately from the supply cables to ensure that the
system is not affected by inductive or capacitive interference.

Installing
Note
Electrical protective equipment
Ensure that the appropriate circuit breakers / fuses for the inverter's rated current are fitted
between the line and inverter (see catalog D11.1).
Connecting the motor: Star connection and delta connection
With SIEMENS motors, you will see a 'HOWDFRQQHFWLRQ 6WDUFRQQHFWLRQ

diagram of both connection methods on
: 8 9 : 8 9
the inside of the cover of the terminal
box:
• Star connection (Y)
8 9 : 8 9 :
• Delta connection (Δ)
8
The motor rating plate provides 8
information about the correct connection
data.
9 9
: :
Examples for operating the inverter and motor on a 400 V line supply
Assumption: The motor rating plate states 230/400 V Δ/Y.
Example 1: A motor is normally operated between standstill and its rated speed (i.e. a speed
corresponding to the line frequency). In this case, you need to connect the motor in Y.
Operating the motor above its rated speed is only possible in field weakening, i.e. the motor
torque available is reduced above the rated speed.
Example 2: If you want to operate the motor with the "87 Hz characteristic", you need to
connect the motor in Δ.
With the 87 Hz characteristic, the motor's power output increases. The 87 Hz characteristic
is mainly used with geared motors.

Installing
Connecting the inverter

Motor connection
● If available, open the terminal covers of the inverter.
● Connect the motor to terminals U2, V2 and W2.
Carefully observe the regulations for EMC-compliant wiring:
EMC-compliant connection (Page 38)
● Connect the protective conductor of the motor to the terminal of the inverter.
The following cable lengths are permissible:
– Unshielded 100 m
– Shielded:
50 m for inverters without filter
25 m for inverters with filter
You will wind additional information in Catalog D11.1 for longer cable lengths
Line supply connection
● Connect the line supply to terminals U1/L1, V1/L2 and W1/L3.
● Connect the protective conductor of the line supply to terminal PE of the inverter.
● If available, close the terminal covers of the inverter.
Note
Inverters without an integrated line filter can be connected to grounded (TN, TT) and non-
grounded (IT) line supply systems. The inverters with integrated line filter are suitable
only for connection to TN line supply systems.
The permissible cable cross sections for the individual devices and power ratings are
provided in Section Technical data (Page 263).

Installing
3.3.5 EMC-compliant connection

The inverters are designed for operation in industrial environments where high values of
electromagnetic interference are expected. Safe, reliable and disturbance-free operation is
only guaranteed if the devices are professionally installed.
Inverters with degree of protection IP20 must be installed and operated in an enclosed
control cabinet.
Control cabinet design

● All metal parts and components of the control cabinet (side panels, rear panels, roof and
base plates) must be connected to the control cabinet frame through a good electrical
connection – this is best achieved using the highest possible surface area or a high
number of individual screw connections
● The PE bar and the EMC shield bar must be connected to the control cabinet frame
through a good electrical connection established through a large surface area.
● All of the metal enclosures of the devices and supplementary components installed in the
cabinet – e.g. inverter or line filter – must be connected to the control cabinet frame
through a good electrical connection through the largest possible surface area. The most
favorable design is to mount these devices and supplementary components on a bare
metal mounting plate with good conducting characteristics; this in turn is connected to the
control cabinet frame through a good electrical connection and the largest possible
surface area. It is especially important that they are connected to the PE and EMC shield
bars.
● All of the connections must be implemented so that they are durable. Screw connections
to painted or anodized metal components must either be established using special
contact (serrated) washers that cut through the insulating surface and therefore establish
a metallic conductor contact, or the insulating surface must be removed at the contact
locations.
● Coils of contactors, relays, solenoid valves and motor holding brakes must be equipped
with interference suppression elements in order to dampen high-frequency radiation
when switching-off (RC elements or varistors with AC coils and free-wheeling diodes or
varistors for DC coils). The protective circuit must be directly connected at the coil.
Cable routing and shielding

● All inverter power cables (line supply cables, connecting cables between the braking
chopper and the associated braking resistance as well as the motor cables) must be
separately routed away from signal and data cables. The minimum clearance should be
approx. 25 cm. As an alternative, the decoupling can be realized in the control cabinet
using metal partitions (separating elements) connected to the mounting plate through a
good electrical connection
● The cables from the line supply to the line filter must be routed separately away from non-
filtered power cables with a high noise level (cables between the line filter and inverter,
connecting cables between the braking chopper and the associated braking resistor as
well as motor cables)
● Signal and data cables as well as filtered line supply cables may only cross non-filtered
power cables at right angles

Installing
● All cables should be kept as short as possible

● Signal and data cables and the associated equipotential bonding cables must always be
routed in parallel with the smallest possible clearance between them
● Shielded motor cables must be used
● The shielded motor cable should be routed separately away from the cables to the motor
temperature sensors (PTC/KTY)
● Signal and data cables must be shielded.
● Especially sensitive control cables - such as setpoint and actual value cables - should be
routed without any interruption with optimum shield support at both ends
● Shields should be connected at both ends to the grounded enclosures through a good
electrical connection and through a large surface area
● Cable shields should be connected as close as possible to where the cable enters the
cabinet
● EMC shield bars should be used for power cables; the shield support elements provided
in the inverter should be used for signal and data cables
● If at all possible, cable shields should not be interrupted by intermediate terminals
● Cable shields should be retained both for power cables as well as for signal and data
cables using the appropriate EMC clamps. The shield clamps must connect the shield to
the EMC shield bar or the shield support element for control cables through a low
inductive connection through a large surface area.
3UHVVFDEOH
VFUHHQRQ
VKLHOGSODWH
8QFRYHU $
FDEOH
VFUHHQ
$
Figure 3-5 Shield support

Installing
EMC-compliant installation of Power Modules in degree of protection IP20

The EMC-compliant installation of power modules is shown in the following diagram using
two examples.

Example for a connection without a

shield plate via an external filter Example for a connection with a shield plate, directly to
the line supply
① Line supply connection

② Motor connection
③ Metal mounting plate (unpainted and with a good electrical conductivity)
④ Cable clamps for a good conductive electrical connection through a large surface area
between the shield and mounting plate or shield plate.
⑤ Shielded cable for the motor connection
⑥ Shield plate
⑦ Unshielded cable for connection directly to the line supply
⑧ Shielded cable for connection to the line supply via an external filter.
Note
An unshielded cable for the line connection should be used for Power Modules with
integrated filter. Power Modules, which are connected to the line supply via an external filter,
require a shielded cable between the line filter and Power Module.

Installing
Shielding with shield plate: Shield connection kits are available for all Power
Module frame sizes (you will find more information in
Catalog D11.1). The cable shields must be
connected to the shield plate through the greatest
possible surface area using shield clamps.
Shielding without shield plate: EMC-compliant shielding can also be implemented
without an optional shield plate. In this case, you
must ensure that the cable shields are connected to
the ground potential through the largest possible
surface area.
Braking resistor connection: The braking resistor is connected using a shielded
cable. Using a clamp, the shield should be
connected to the mounting plate or to the shield
plate through a good electrical connection and
through the largest possible surface area.

Installing
3.4 Installing Control Unit
3.4.1 Snapping the Control Unit onto the Power Module
Installing the Control Unit on an IP20 Power Module
Plugging on the CU Removing the CU

To gain access to the terminal strips, open the top and bottom front doors to the right. The
terminal strips use spring-loaded terminals.

Installing
3.4.2 Interfaces, connectors, switches, terminal blocks and LEDs of the CU
6ORWIRUPHPRU\FDUG00&RU6'FDUG
,QWHUIDFHIRURSHUDWRUSDQHO,23RU%23
86%LQWHUIDFHIRU67$57(5
6WDWXV/(' 5'<
%)
6$)(

',3VZLWFKIRUILHOGEXV
DGGUHVV
([DPSOH
%LW
$GGUHVV
%LW
31 3 +24V IN %LW
32 3 GND IN
34 3 DI COM2 %LW
10 1 AI 1+

Analog
11 1
2
AI 1-
AO 1+
%LW
26
27 2 GND
%LW
%LW
1 1 +10V OUT 2Q 2II 2Q 2II
2 2 GND
1
3 3 AI 0+
',3VZLWFKIRU$,DQG$,
Analog
4 4 AI 0-
12 1 AO 0+ WHUPLQDOVDQG
$,
13 1 GND
21 2 DO 1 POS
$,
22 2 DO 1 NEG
14 1 T1
&XUUHQW 9ROWDJH
18 15 1 T2
19 9 9 +24V OUT
20 28 2 GND
7HUPLQDOVWULS
23 69 6 DI COM1
24 5 5 DI 0
Digital In/Out
25 6 6 DI 1
ON
7HUPLQDOGHVLJQDWLRQ
1
7 7 DI 2
8
1
DI 3
DI 4
DO 0 NC
DO 0 NO
18
19
BUS
TERMINATION
1 DI 5 'HSHQGLQJRQWKHILHOGEXV 21
DO 0 COM 20 OFF ON
DO 2 NC 23
DO 2 NO 24 &8%&8(&8()
DO 2 COM 25 2))
%XVWHUPLQDWLRQ
&8%'3&8('3&8('3)
1RIXQFWLRQ
&8%&8(&8() &8%'3&8('3&8('3)
56FRQQHFWRUIRU 68%'VRFNHWIRU
FRPPXQLFDWLQJYLD FRPPXQLFDWLQJYLD
ILHOGEXVV\VWHPV 352),%86'3

&RQWDFW 'HVLJQDWLRQ
9UHIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDO
563UHFHLYLQJDQGVHQGLQJ
561UHFHLYLQJDQGVHQGLQJ
&DEOHVKLHOG
1RWFRQQHFWHG

Installing
3.4.3 Terminal strips on CU240B-2 Control Units
7HUPLQDOV ([SODQDWLRQ
9,1 99RSWLRQDOHOHFWURQLFVSRZHUVXSSO\
*1',1 5HIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDOIRUWHUPLQDO

9 9

!bN˖ !bN˖
9RXW 9RXWSXWUHODWLYHWR*1'PD[P$
*1' &RPPRQUHIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDO
$, $QDORJLQSXW99P$P$P$P$ 9 9
$, 5HIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDOIRUDQDORJLQSXW
$2 $QDORJRXWSXW9ಹ9P$ಹP$

702725 0RWRUWHPSHUDWXUHVHQVRU37&.7<RUELPHWDO1&FRQWDFW
9RXW 9RXWSXWUHIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDO*1'PD[P$
',&20 5HIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDOIRUGLJLWDOLQSXWV
', 'LJLWDOLQSXW
', 'LJLWDOLQSXW
', 'LJLWDOLQSXW
', 'LJLWDOLQSXW

'212 'LJLWDORXWSXW12FRQWDFW$9'&
'2&20 'LJLWDORXWSXWFRPPRQFRQWDFW
'21& 'LJLWDORXWSXW1&FRQWDFW
9 9
9 9
If you require more than four digital inputs, use terminals 3 and 4 (AI 0) as additional digital input DI 11.
① Wiring when using the internal power supplies. DI = high, if the switch is closed.
② Wiring when using external power supplies. DI = high, if the switch is closed.
③ Wiring when using the internal power supplies. DI = low, if the switch is closed.
④ Wiring when using external power supplies. DI = low, if the switch is closed.
CAUTION
If your application requires UL certification, please observe the note regarding the digital
output in Section Technical data, CU240B-2 Control Unit (Page 263).
Define the meanings of the inputs and outputs during basic commissioning. Further
information can be found in section Select interface assignments (Page 46).

Installing
3.4.4 Terminal strips on CU240E-2 Control Units
7HUPLQDOV ([SODQDWLRQ
9,1 99RSWLRQDOHOHFWURQLFVSRZHUVXSSO\
*1',1 5HIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDOIRUWHUPLQDO
',&20 5HIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDOIRUGLJLWDOLQSXWVDQG
$, $QDORJLQSXW99P$P$P$P$
9 9
!bN˖ !bN˖
9RXW 9RXWSXWUHODWLYHWR*1'PD[P$
$, $QDORJLQSXW99P$P$P$P$ 9 9
'2 'LJLWDORXWSXWSRVLWLYH$9'&
'2 'LJLWDORXWSXWQHJDWLYH$9'&
9RXW 9RXWSXWUHIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDO*1'PD[P$
',&20 5HIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDOIRUGLJLWDOLQSXWVDQG
', 'LJLWDOLQSXW
', 'LJLWDOLQSXW
', 'LJLWDOLQSXW
', 'LJLWDOLQSXW
', 'LJLWDOLQSXW
', 'LJLWDOLQSXW
'2&20 'LJLWDORXWSXWFRPPRQFRQWDFW
'21& 'LJLWDORXWSXW1&FRQWDFW
'2&20 'LJLWDORXWSXWFRPPRQFRQWDFW 9 9
'21& 'LJLWDORXWSXW1&FRQWDFW 9 9
The terminal strip wiring is not completely shown, only as example for each type of input and output.
If you require more than six digital inputs, use terminals 3 and 4 (AI 0) or terminals 10 and 11 (AI 1) as additional digital
inputs DI 11 or DI 12.
① Wiring when using the internal power supplies. DI = high, if the switch is closed.
② Wiring when using external power supplies. DI = high, if the switch is closed.
③ Wiring when using the internal power supplies. DI = low, if the switch is closed.
④ Wiring when using external power supplies. DI = low, if the switch is closed.
CAUTION
If your application requires UL certification, please observe the note regarding the digital
output in Section Technical data, CU240E-2 Control Unit (Page 264).
Define the meanings of the inputs and outputs during basic commissioning. Further
information can be found in section Select interface assignments (Page 46).

Installing
For a fail-safe digital input, use two "standard" digital inputs.
Terminals Designation Fail-safe digital input with Basic Safety

16 DI4 F-DI0
17 DI5
If you wish to use several fail-safe digital inputs of the converter, this is described in the
Safety Integrated Function Manual. You will find the link to the Safety Integrated Function
Manual in Section Additional information on the inverter (Page 292).
Additional information on fail-safe digital inputs is available in Chapter Permitted sensors
(Page 220).
3.4.5 Select interface assignments

The inverter offers multiple predefined settings for its interfaces.
One of these predefined settings matches your particular application

Proceed as follows:
1. Wire the inverter corresponding to your application.
2. Carry-out the basic commissioning, see Section Commissioning (Page 55).
In the basic commissioning, select the macro (the predefined settings of the interfaces)
that matches your particular wiring.
3. When required, configure communication via fieldbus, see Adapt terminal strip (Page 89).
What do you do if none of the predefined settings matches your particular application 100%?
If none of the predefined settings matches your particular application, then proceed as
follows:
1. Wire the inverter corresponding to your application.
2. Carry-out the basic commissioning, see Section Commissioning (Page 55).
In the basic commissioning, select the macro (the predefined settings of the interfaces)
that comes the closest to matching your particular application.
3. Adapt the inputs and outputs to your application, see Section Commissioning (Page 55).
4. When required, configure communication via fieldbus, see Configuring the fieldbus
(Page 101).

Installing
3.4.5.1 Inverter with CU240B-2 Control Units

The converter with CU240B-2 and CU240B-2 DP Control Units offers the following default
settings for its interfaces:
Automatic/local - Changeover between fieldbus and jog mode

Factory setting for converter with CU240B-2 DP Control Unit.
0DFUR ', /2: 352),%86'3ILHOGEXV ', +,*+ -RJJLQJYLD',DQG',

', )DXOW '2 ', -RJ )DXOW '2
', ', -RJ
', $FNQRZOHGJH ', $FNQRZOHGJH
', /2: ', +,*+
$, 6SHHG $2 $, 6SHHG $2

99 99
352),%86'3 S -RJ
7HOHJUDP S -RJ
Refer to the following Section on how you can obtain the GSD file: Configuring
communication to the control (Page 102).
Motorized potentiometer
0DFUR 0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU023 ', 212)) )DXOW '2

', 023XS
', 023GRZQ
', $FNQRZOHGJH
$, 6SHHG $2

99
Two- or three-wire control

Macro 12 is the factory setting for converters with the Control Unit CU240B-2.
0DFUR 0DFUR 0DFUR ', &RQWUROFRPPDQG )DXOW '2

', &RQWUROFRPPDQG
7ZRZLUH 0HWKRG 0HWKRG 0HWKRG ', $FNQRZOHGJH
FRQWURO ',
&RQWUROFRPPDQG 212)) 212))ULJKW 212))ULJKW
$, 6HWSRLQW 6SHHG $2
&RQWUROFRPPDQG 5HYHUVLQJ 212))OHIW 212))OHIW , 8 99 99
0DFUR 0DFUR ', &RQWUROFRPPDQG )DXOW '2

', &RQWUROFRPPDQG
7KUHHZLUHFRQWURO 0HWKRG 0HWKRG
', &RQWUROFRPPDQG
', $FNQRZOHGJH
&RQWUROFRPPDQG (QDEOH2)) (QDEOH2))
&RQWUROFRPPDQG 21ULJKW 21
, 8 99 99
&RQWUROFRPPDQG 21OHIW 5HYHUVLQJ

Installing
Communication with higher-level control via USS
0DFUR )LHOGEXV866 ', )DXOW '2

',
S %DXGUDWH ', $FNQRZOHGJH
S 3='QXPEHU ',
S 3.:QXPEHU
$, 6SHHG $2
99
866
%DXG
3='3,9YDULDEOH

Installing
3.4.5.2 Inverter with CU240E-2 Control Units

The converter with CU240E-2, CU240E-2 F, CU240E-2 DP, and CU240E-2 DP F Control
Units offers the following default settings for its interfaces:
Fixed speeds
0DFUR 7ZRZLUHFRQWUROZLWKWZRIL[HG ', 212))ULJKW )DXOW '2

', 212))OHIW
VSHHGV ', $FNQRZOHGJH
S )L[HGVSHHG ', $ODUP '2
S )L[HGVSHHG ', )L[HGVSHHG
', )L[HGVSHHG
',DQG', +,*+
)UHTXHQF\FRQYHUWHUDGGHG $, 6SHHG $2
IL[HGVSHHGIL[HGVSHHG 99
$, &XUUHQW $2
99
0DFUR 7ZRIL[HGVSHHGVZLWKVDIHW\ ', 212))IL[HGVSHHG )DXOW '2

', )L[HGVSHHG
IXQFWLRQ
', $FNQRZOHGJH
S )L[HGVSHHG ', 5HVHUYHGIRUVDIHW\
', IXQFWLRQ
',DQG', +,*+
0RWRUURWDWHVZLWK
$, 6SHHG $2
IL[HGVSHHGIL[HGVSHHG
99
$, &XUUHQW $2
99
You must enable the safety function, see Section: Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function
(Page 220).
0DFUR )RXUIL[HGVSHHGV ', 212))IL[HGVSHHG )DXOW '2

', )L[HGVSHHG
S )L[HGVSHHG ', $FNQRZOHGJH
6HYHUDO', +,*+ $, 6SHHG $2
)UHTXHQF\FRQYHUWHUDGGVFRUUHVSRQGLQJIL[HG 99
VSHHGV $, &XUUHQW $2
99
0DFUR 352),%86'3ILHOGEXV ', )DXOW '2

',
', $FNQRZOHGJH
', $ODUP '2
',
',
$, 6SHHG $2

99
$, &XUUHQW $2
99
352),%86'3
7HOHJUDP

Installing
0DFUR )LHOGEXVZLWKVDIHW\IXQFWLRQ ', )DXOW '2

',
', $FNQRZOHGJH
', $ODUP '2
', 5HVHUYHGIRUVDIHW\
', IXQFWLRQ
$, 6SHHG $2

99
$, &XUUHQW $2
99
352),%86'3
7HOHJUDP
(Page 220). Refer to the following Section on how you can obtain the GSD file: Configuring
Two safety functions

This default setting can only be used for CU240E-2 F and CU240E-2 DP F Control Units.
0DFUR 352),%86'3ILHOGEXV ', 5HVHUYHGIRUVDIHW\ )DXOW '2

', IXQFWLRQ
ZLWKWZRVDIHW\IXQFWLRQV
',
', $FNQRZOHGJH $ODUP '2
', IXQFWLRQ
$, 6SHHG $2

99
$, &XUUHQW $2
99
352),%86'3
7HOHJUDP
(Page 220). Refer to the following Section on how you can obtain the GSD file: Configuring

Installing
Automatic/local - Changeover between fieldbus and jog mode

Factory setting for converters with PROFIBUS interface:
0DFUR ', /2: 352),%86'3ILHOGEXV ', +,*+ -RJJLQJYLD',DQG',

', )DXOW '2 ', -RJ )DXOW '2
', ', -RJ
', /2: $ODUP '2 ', +,*+ $ODUP '2
', ',
', ',
$, 6SHHG $2 $, 6SHHG $2

99 99
$, &XUUHQW $2 $, &XUUHQW $2
99 99
352),%86'3 S -RJ
7HOHJUDP S -RJ

', 023XS
ZLWKVDIHW\IXQFWLRQ
', 023GRZQ
', IXQFWLRQ
$, 6SHHG $2

99
$, &XUUHQW $2
99
(Page 220).

Installing

', 023XS
', 023GRZQ
',
',
$, 6SHHG $2

99
$, &XUUHQW $2
99
Applications with analog setpoint
0DFUR 6HWSRLQWYLDDQDORJLQSXWDQGVDIHW\ ', 212)) )DXOW '2

', 5HYHUVLQJ
IXQFWLRQ
', $FNQRZOHGJH
', $ODUP '2
', IXQFWLRQ

, 8 99 99
$, &XUUHQW $2
99
(Page 220).
Process industry
0DFUR ', /2: 352),%86'3ILHOGEXV ', +,*+ 0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU

023
', )DXOW '2 ', 212)) )DXOW '2
', ([WHUQDOIDXOW ', ([WHUQDOIDXOW
', /2: $ODUP '2 ', +,*+ $ODUP '2
', ', 023XS
', ', 023GRZQ
$, 6SHHG $2 $, 6SHHG $2

99 99
99 99
352),%86'3
7HOHJUDP

Installing
0DFUR ', /2: $QDORJVHWSRLQW ', +,*+ 0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLR

PHWHU023
', 212)) )DXOW '2 ', 212)) )DXOW '2
', ([WHUQDOIDXOW ', ([WHUQDOIDXOW
', /2: $ODUP '2 ', +,*+ $ODUP '2
', ', 023XS
', ', 023GRZQ
$, 6HWSRLQW 6SHHG $2 $, 6SHHG $2

, 8 99 99 99
99 99
Two- or three-wire control

Macro 12 is the factory setting for converters with the Control Units CU240E-2 and CU240E-
2 F.
0DFUR 0DFUR 0DFUR ', &RQWUROFRPPDQG )DXOW '2

', &RQWUROFRPPDQG
7ZRZLUH 0HWKRG 0HWKRG 0HWKRG ', $FNQRZOHGJH
FRQWURO ', $ODUP '2
',
&RQWUROFRPPDQG 212)) 212))ULJKW 212))ULJKW
',
&RQWUROFRPPDQG 5HYHUVLQJ 212))OHIW 212))OHIW
, 8 99 99
$, &XUUHQW $2
99
0DFUR 0DFUR ', &RQWUROFRPPDQG )DXOW '2

', &RQWUROFRPPDQG
7KUHHZLUHFRQWURO 0HWKRG 0HWKRG
', &RQWUROFRPPDQG
&RQWUROFRPPDQG (QDEOH2)) (QDEOH2)) ',
',
&RQWUROFRPPDQG 21ULJKW 21
&RQWUROFRPPDQG 21OHIW 5HYHUVLQJ $, 6HWSRLQW 6SHHG $2
, 8 99 99
$, &XUUHQW $2
99
Communication with a higher-level control via USS
0DFUR )LHOGEXV866 ', )DXOW '2

',
S %DXGUDWH ', $FNQRZOHGJH
S 3='QXPEHU ', $ODUP '2
S 3.:QXPEHU ',
',
$, 6SHHG $2

99
$, &XUUHQW $2
99
866
%DXG
3='3,9YDULDEOH

Installing
3.4.6 Wiring terminal strips

Solid or flexible cables are permitted as signal lines. Wire end ferrules must not be used for
the spring-loaded terminals.
The permissible cable cross-section ranges between 0.5 mm² (21 AWG) and 1.5 mm² (16
AWG). When completely connecting-up the unit, we recommend cables with a cross-section
of 1mm² (18 AWG).
Route the signal lines so that you can again completely close the front doors after
connecting-up the terminal strip. If you use shielded cables, then you must connect the
shield to the mounting plate of the control cabinet or with the shield support of the inverter
through a good electrical connection and a large surface area.

Commissioning 4
You must commission the inverter after installation has been completed.
To do this, using Section "Collecting motor data (Page 59)" you must clarify whether the
motor can be operated with the inverter factory settings or an additional adaptation of the
inverter is required. The two commissioning options are shown in the following diagram.
&RPPLVVLRQLQJZLWK
&RPPLVVLRQLQJZLWK
IDFWRU\VHWWLQJV DSSOLFDWLRQVSHFLILF
DGDSWDWLRQV
&RPPLVVLRQLQJZLWK %DVLFFRPPLVVLR
IDFWRU\VHWWLQJV QLQJ
,QWHUIDFHV )LHOGEXV $GGLWLRQDOLQSXW <HV

IRUFRQWURO" RXWSXWVLJQDOVYLD
WHUPLQDOV"
)LHOGEXV $GDSWLQJWKH
FRQILJXULQJ WHUPLQDOVWULS
7HUPLQDOV 1R
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
FRPSOHWHG ,QWHUIDFHV )LHOGEXV
IRUFRQWURO"
)LHOGEXV
FRQILJXULQJ
7HUPLQDOV
$GGLWLRQDO <HV
IXQFWLRQV"
6HWWLQJIXQFWLRQV
1R
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ
FRPSOHWHG
① Commissioning with factory settings (Page 63) ④ Configuring the fieldbus (Page 101)
② Set basic commissioning with STARTER (Page 71) or BOP-2 (Page 66) ⑤ Functions (Page 147)
③ Adapt terminal strip (Page 89)
Figure 4-1 Commissioning procedure

Commissioning
NOTICE
For the basic commissioning, you determine the function of the interfaces for your inverter
via predefined settings (p0015).
If you subsequently select a different predefined setting for the function of the interfaces,
then all BICO interconnections that you changed will be lost.

Commissioning
4.1 Restoring the factory setting

There are cases where something goes wrong when commissioning a drive system e.g.:
● The line voltage was interrupted during commissioning and you were not able to
complete commissioning.
● You got confused when setting the parameters and you can no longer understand the
individual settings that you made.
● You don't know whether the inverter was already operational
In cases such as these, reset the inverter to the factory settings.
Deactivating safety functions

The parameters of the safety functions can only be reset if you first deactivate the safety
functions.
Table 4- 1 Procedure
STARTER BOP-2
1. Go online with STARTER Set the following parameters:
2. Call the safety functions screen form p9761 = … Password for the safety functions
3. Deactivate the safety functions p0010 = 95 Changing the safety functions
p9601 = 0 Deactivate safety functions
p9700 = 208 Copy parameter
p9701 = 220 Confirm setting
p0010 = 0 Exit change
Final steps:
1. Switch off the inverter supply voltage
2. Wait until all LEDs on the inverter go dark. Now switch on the inverter supply voltage
again. Your settings only become effective after this power-on reset.

Commissioning
Restoring the factory setting with STARTER or BOP-2

This function resets the settings in the inverter to the factory settings.
Note
The communication settings and the settings of the motor standard (IEC/NEMA) are retained
even after restoring the factory setting.
STARTER BOP-2
1. Go online with STARTER 1. In the "Options" menu, select the
2. In STARTER, click on the button . "DRVRESET" entry
2. Confirm the reset using the OK key

Commissioning
4.2 Preparing for commissioning
Prerequisites: before you start

Before starting commissioning, you must answer the following questions:
● What is the data for the connected motor?
● What technological requirements must the drive fulfill?
● Via which inverter interfaces does the higher-level control operate the drive?
4.2.1 Collecting motor data
Which motor are you using? [P0300]

A synchronous or
induction motor?
The inverters are preset
in the factory for
applications using 4-pole
three-phase induction
motors that correspond
to the performance data
of the inverter.
P0310 P0305 P0304
Motor data / data on the

motor rating plate 3~Mot
1LA7130-4AA10
EN 60034
If you use the STARTER No UD 0013509-0090-0031 TICI F 1325 IP 55 IM B3
commissioning tool and a 50 Hz 230/400 V Δ/Υ 60 Hz 460 V

SIEMENS motor, you 5.5kW 19.7/11.A
P0307 6.5kW 10.9 A
only have to specify the
motor Order No. In all Cos ϕ 0.81 1455/min Cos ϕ 0.82 1755/min
other cases, you must Δ/Υ 220-240/380-420 V Υ 440-480 95.75%
read-off the data from the 19.7-20.6/11.4-11.9 A 11.1-11.3 A 45kg

motor rating plate and
enter into the appropriate
parameters. P0308 P0311 P0309

Commissioning
NOTICE
Information about installation
The rating plate data that you enter must correspond to the connection type of the motor
(star connection [Y]/delta connection [Δ]), i.e. for a delta motor connection, the delta rating
plate data must be entered.
In which region of the world is the motor used? - Motor standard [P0100]
● Europe IEC: 50 Hz [kW] - factory setting
● North America NEMA: 60 Hz [hp] or 60 Hz [kW]
What is the prevailing temperature where the motor is operated? [P0625]

● Motor ambient temperature [P0625], if it differs from the factory setting = 20° C.

Commissioning
4.2.2 Inverter factory setting
Factory settings of additional important parameters
Parameter Factory setting Meaning of the factory Name of the parameter and comments
setting
p0010 0 Ready to be entered Drive, commissioning parameter filter
p0100 0 Europe [50 Hz] IEC/NEMA motor standard
• IEC, Europe
• NEMA, North America
Note: This parameter cannot cannot be changed in FW4.3.
p0300 1 Induction motor Motor type selection (induction motors / synchronous
motor)
p0304 400 [V] Rated motor voltage (in accordance with the rating plate in
V)
p0305 depends on the [A] Rated motor current (in accordance with the rating plate in
Power Module A)
p0307 depends on the [kW/hp] Rated motor power (in accordance with the rating plate in
Power Module kW/hp)
p0308 0 [cos phi] Rated motor power factor (in accordance with the rating
plate in cos 'phi'). If p0100 = 1, 2, then p0308 has no
significance.
p0310 50 [Hz] Rated motor frequency (in accordance with the rating plate
in Hz)
p0311 1395 [rpm] Rated motor speed (in accordance with the rating plate in
rpm)
p0335 0 Non-ventilated: Shaft- Motor cooling type (specify the motor cooling system)
mounted fan in the motor
p0625 20 [°C] Motor ambient temperature
p0640 200 [A] Current limit (of the motor)
p0970 0 Locked Reset drive parameters (restore to the factory settings)
P1080 0 [rpm] Minimum speed
P1082 1500 [rpm] Maximum speed
P1120 10 [s] Ramp-function generator, ramp-up time
P1121 10 [s] Ramp-function generator, ramp-down time
P1300 0 V/f control with linear Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode
characteristic

Commissioning
4.2.3 Defining requirements for the application
What type of control is needed for the application? [P1300]

A distinction is made between V/f open-loop control and vector closed-loop control.
● The V/f open-loop control is the simplest operating mode for an inverter. For example, it
is used for applications involving pumps, fans or motors with belt drives.
● For closed-loop vector control, the speed deviations between the setpoint and actual
value are less than for V/f open-loop control; further, it is possible to specify a torque. It is
suitable for applications such as winders, hoisting equipment or special conveyor drives.
What speed limits should be set? (Minimum and maximum speed)

The minimum and maximum speed with which the motor operates or is limited regardless of
the speed setpoint.
● Minimum speed [P1080] - factory setting 0 [rpm]
● Maximum speed [P1082] - factory setting 1500 [rpm]
What motor ramp-up time and ramp-down time are needed for the application?
The ramp-up and ramp-down time define the maximum motor acceleration when the speed
setpoint changes. The ramp-up and ramp-down time is the time between motor standstill and
the maximum speed, or between the maximum speed and motor standstill.
● Ramp-up time [P1120] - factory setting 10 s
● Ramp-down time [P1121] - factory setting 10 s

Commissioning
4.3 Commissioning with factory settings
Prerequisites for using the factory settings

In simple applications, commissioning can be carried out just using the factory settings.
Check which factory settings can be used and which functions need to be changed. During
this check you will probably find that the factory settings only require slight adjustment:
1. The inverter and motor must match one another; compare the data on the motor rating
plate with the technical data of the Power Module.
– The rated inverter current must, as a minimum, be the same as the motor.
– The motor power should match that of the inverter; motors can be operated in the
power range from 25 % … 100 % of the inverter power rating.
2. If you are controlling the drive using the digital and analog inputs, the inverter must be
connected as shown in the wiring example. (see Wiring examples for the factory settings
(Page 64) )
3. If you connect the drive to a fieldbus, you must set the bus address using the DIP
switches on the front of the Control Unit.

Commissioning
4.3.1 Wiring examples for the factory settings

To ensure that the factory setting can be used, you must wire the terminal strip of your
inverter as shown in the following examples.
Pre-assignment of the terminal strip for the CU240B-2
9,1 )DXOW '21&

*1',1 '212
'2&20
9287
*1' 6SHHG $2
$, 6HWSRLQW *1'
$,
', 212))
', 5HYHUVLQJ
', $FNQRZOHGJH
',
',&20
9287
*1'
702725
702725
Figure 4-2 Wiring example to use the factory settings
Pre-assignment of the terminal strip for the CU240B-2 DP
352),%86'3
', /2:
7HOHJUDP
9,1 )DXOW '21&
*1',1 '212
'2&20
9287
*1' 6SHHG $2
$, *1'
$,
', -RJ
', -RJ
', $FNQRZOHGJHPHQW
', /2:+,*+FKDQJHRYHULQWHUIDFHV
',&20
9287
*1'
702725
702725

Commissioning
Pre-assignment of the terminal strip for the CU240E-2 and CU240E-2 F
9,1 )DXOW '21&

*1',1 '212
'2&20
9287
*1' $ODUP '2
$, 6HWSRLQW '2
$,
$, '21&
$, '212
'2&20
', 212))
', 5HYHUVLQJ 6SHHG $2
', $FNQRZOHGJH *1'
', &XUUHQW $2
', *1'
',
',&20
',&20
9287
*1'
702725
702725
Pre-assignment of the terminal strip for the CU240E-2 DP and CU240E-2 DP-F
352),%86'3
', /2:
7HOHJUDP
9,1 )DXOW '21&
*1',1 '212
'2&20
9287
*1' $ODUP '2
$, '2
$,
$, '21&
$, '212
'2&20
', -RJ
', -RJ 6SHHG $2
', $FNQRZOHGJHPHQW *1'
', /2:+,*+ FKDQJHRYHU &XUUHQW $2
', LQWHUIDFHV *1'
',
',&20
',&20
9287
*1'
702725
702725

Commissioning
4.4 Commissioning with the BOP-2
The "Basic Operator Panel-2" (BOP-2) is an

operation and display instrument of the
converter. For commissioning, it is directly
plugged onto the converter Control Unit.
Plugging on the BOP- Removing the BOP-2

2
4.4.1 Display of the BOP-2
0RWRULVVZLWFKHGRQ
2SHUDWLRQYLD%23LV
DFWLYH
0HQXOHYHOV
6HWSRLQWRUDFWXDO
YDOXHSDUDPHWHU
QXPEHURUYDOXH
)DXOWRUDODUPLVDFWLYH
-RJLVDFWLYH
6HOHFWIURPPHQX
SDUDPHWHUQXPEHUDQG
YDOXH
6ZLWFKRQDQGVZLWFK
RIIWKHPRWRU
Figure 4-6 Operator control and display elements of the BOP-2

Commissioning
4.4.2 Menu structure
021,725 &21752/ ',$*126 3$5$06 6(783 (;75$6
OK ESC OK ESC OK ESC OK ESC OK ESC OK ESC
63 6(732,17 $&.1$// 67$1'$5' '595(6(7

),/7(5
92/7287 -2* )$8/76 (;3(57 72%23

),/7(5
'&/1.9 5(9(56( +,6725< )520%23

OK ESC

&855287 67$786 72&5'

)520&5'

Changing parameter values:

① Parameter number freely selectable
② Basic commissioning

Commissioning
4.4.3 Freely selecting and changing parameters

Use BOP-2 to change your inverter settings, by selecting the appropriate parameter number
and changing the parameter value. Parameter values can be changed in the "PARAMS"
menu and the "SETUP" menu.
OK
ESC OK >2 sec
OK
OK OK OK OK OK
ESC ESC ESC ESC

ESC OK >2 sec
OK OK OK OK
ESC ESC ESC
Select the parameter number Changing a parameter value

If the parameter number flashes in the display, If the parameter value flashes in the display, you
you have two options for changing the number: have two options of changing the value:
1. option: 2. option: 1. option: 2. option:
Increase or decrease Press and hold the OK Increase or decrease Press and hold the OK
the parameter number key for more than two the parameter value key for more than two
using the arrow keys seconds and change using the arrow keys seconds and enter the
until the number you the required parameter until the value you want required value digit by
want is displayed. number digit by digit. is displayed. digit.
Confirm the parameter number using the OK key. Confirm the parameter value using the OK key.
The inverter immediately saves all changes which you made using the BOP-2 so that they
are protected against power failure.

Commissioning
4.4.4 Basic commissioning
Menu Remark
Set all of the parameters of the menu "SETUP".
6(783 OK
In the BOP-2, select the menu "SETUP".
ESC
Select reset if you wish to reset all parameters to the factory setting before the basic
5(6(7 OK
commissioning. NO → YES → OK
Select the motor control mode. The most important control modes are:
&75/02' OK
S VF LIN V/f control with linear characteristic
VF QUAD V/f control with square law characteristic
SPD N EN Closed-loop speed control (vector control)
TRQ N EN Closed-loop torque control
(8586$ ② Standard: IEC or NEMA

OK
S D-91056 Erlangen
3~Mot. 1LE10011AC434AA0 E0807/0496382_02 003
IEC/EN 60034 100L IMB3 IP55
02792/7 ① Voltage 25 kg Th.Cl. 155(F) -20°C Tamb 40°C
OK
S Bearing UNIREX-N3
DE 6206-2ZC3 15g Intervall: 4000hrs
NE 6206-2ZC3 11g
027&855 ③ Current 60Hz: SF 1.15 CONT NEMA MG1-12 TEFC Design A 2.0 HP
OK
S V Hz A kW PF NOM.EFF rpm V A CL
400 50 3.5 1.5 0.73 84.5% 970 380 - 420 3.55-3.55
690 Y 50 2.05 1.5 0.73 84.5% 970 660 - 725 2.05-2.05
02732: ④ Power IEC standard (kW) 460 60 3.15 1.5 0.69 86.5% 1175 K
OK
S ⑤ power NEMA standard (HP)
027530 ⑥ Rated speed Motor data on the rating plate

OK
S
We recommend the setting STIL ROT (Identify motor data at standstill and with the motor
027,' OK rotating).
S
If the motor cannot rotate freely, e.g. where travel is mechanically limited, select the setting
STILL (Identify motor data at standstill).
Select the configuration for the inputs and outputs, as well as the correct fieldbus for your
0$&3$5 OK application. The predefined configurations can be found in the section titled Select interface
S
assignments (Page 46).
Minimum motor speed.
0,1530 OK
S
Motor ramp-up time.

5$0383 OK
S
Motor ramp-down time.

5$03':1 OK
S
Confirm that the basic commissioning has been completed (Parameter p3900):
),1,6+ OK NO → YES → OK

Commissioning
Identifying motor data

If you select the MOT ID (p1900) during basic commissioning, alarm A07991 will be issued
once basic commissioning has been completed. To enable the converter to identify the data
for the connected motor, you must switch on the motor (e.g. via the BOP-2). The converter
switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed.
CAUTION
Motor data identification for dangerous loads
Secure dangerous plant and system parts before starting the motor data identification, e.g.
by fencing off the dangerous location or lowering a suspended load to the floor.
4.4.5 Additional settings

The Section Commissioning (Page 55) shows you what still has to be set after the basic
commissioning in order to adapt the inverter to your application.

Commissioning
4.5 Commissioning with STARTER
Preconditions
You require the following to commission the converter using STARTER:
● A pre-installed drive (motor and converter)
● A computer with Windows XP, Vista or Windows 7, which is connected to the converter
via the USB cable and on which STARTER V4.2 or higher has been installed.
You can find updates for STARTER in the Internet under: Update download path for
STARTER (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10804985/133100)
Commissioning steps
Commissioning with STARTER is subdivided into the following steps:
1. Adapting the USB interface (Page 72)
2. Generating a STARTER project (Page 73)
3. Go online and perform the basic commissioning (Page 73)
4. Making additional settings (Page 77)
STARTER features a project Wizard that guides you step-by-step through the
commissioning process.
Note
The STARTER screens show general examples. You may therefore find that a screen
contains more or fewer setting options than are shown in these instructions. A
commissioning stage may also be shown using a Control Unit other than the one you are
using.

Commissioning
4.5.1 Adapting the USB interface

Switch on the converter supply voltage and start the STARTER commissioning software.
If you are using STARTER for the first time, you must check whether the USB interface is
correctly set. To do this, click in STARTER on (accessible participants). Case 1 shows
the procedure if no settings are required. In case 2, a description is provided on how you can
adapt the interface.
Case 1: USB interface OK - no setting is required

If the interface is correctly set, the following screen form shows the converter, which is
directly connected to your computer via the USB interface.
Close this screen form, without selecting the converter(s) that has/have been found. Now
create your STARTER project.
Case 2: USB interface must be set

In this case, the message box "no other nodes found" is displayed. Close the window, and
make the following settings in the "Accessible nodes" screen:
● ① Under "Access point activate "DEVICE (STARTER, Scout)"
● ② Under " PG/PC" select "S7USB"
● ③ Then click on "Update"

Close this screen form, without selecting the converter(s) that has/have been found. Now
create your STARTER project.

Commissioning
4.5.2 Generating a STARTER project
Creating a STARTER project using project wizards
• Using "Project / New with

wizard" create a new project.
• To start the wizard, click on
"Search online for drive
units ...".
• The wizard guides you through
all of the settings that you need
for your project.
4.5.3 Go online and perform the basic commissioning
Going online
• ① Select your project and go online: .

• In the next screen form, select the device or the

devices with which you want to go online.
If you want to go online via the USB interface, then
set the access point to "DEVICE".

• In the next screen form, download the hardware
configuration that you found online into your project
(PG or PC).
• STARTER shows you which converters it is accessing online and which are offline:
② The converter is offline
③ The converter is online
• ④ If you are online, open the screen form of the Control Unit.
• Start the wizard for the basic commissioning.

Commissioning
Wizard for basic commissioning

The wizard guides you step-by-step through the basic commissioning.
• In the first step of the wizard,

select the control mode.
If you are not certain which
control mode you require for your
particular application, then select
U/f control for the time being.
Help on how to select the control
mode is provided in Chapter
Motor control (Page 168).
• In the next step, select the assignment of

the converter interfaces (see also Section:
Select interface assignments (Page 46)).
Remark: The possible settings of your
Control Unit can deviate from those in the
diagram.
• In the next step, select the application for the converter:

Low overload for applications that only require a low dynamic performance, e.g.: Pumps
or fans.
High overload for applications requiring a high dynamic performance, e.g. conveyor
systems.
• In the next step, enter the motor data according to the rating plate of your motor.
The motor data for SIEMENS standard motors can be called in STARTER based on their
order number.
• In the next step, we
recommend the setting
"Identify motor data at
standstill and with the motor
rotating".
If the motor cannot freely
rotate, e.g. due to a
mechanically limited travel
section, then select the
"Identify motor data at
standstill" setting.
• In the next step, set the most important parameters that match your application, e.g. the
ramp-up and ramp-down time of the motor.

Commissioning
• In the next step, we

recommend the setting
"Calculate motor data only".
• ① In the next step, set the

check mark for "RAM to ROM
(save data in drive)" in order
to save your data in the
converter so that it is not lost
when the power fails.
• ② If you exit the wizard, the
converter outputs alarm
A07791. You must now
switch-on the motor to start
motor data identification.

Commissioning
Switch on motor for motor data identification
CAUTION
Motor data identification for dangerous loads
Secure dangerous plant and system parts before starting the motor data identification, e.g.
by fencing off the dangerous location or lowering a suspended load to the floor.
• ① Open by double-clicking on the control panel

in STARTER.
• ② Fetch the master control for the converter
• ③ Set the "Enable signals"
• ④ Switch on the motor.
The converter now starts to identify the motor
data. This measurement can take several
minutes. After the measurement the converter
switches off the motor.
• Relinquish the master control after the motor
data identification.

Commissioning
4.5.4 Making additional settings

After the basic commissioning, you can adapt the inverter to your application as described in
the Commissioning (Page 55).
STARTER offers two options:
1. Change the settings using the appropriate screen forms - our recommendation.
① Navigation bar: For each inverter function, select the corresponding screen form.
② tabs: Switch between screen forms.
If you change the settings using screen forms you do not need to know the parameter
numbers.

2. You change the settings using the parameters in the expert list.
If you wish to change the settings using the expert list, you need to know the
corresponding parameter number and its significance.
Saving settings so that they are not lost when the power fails
All of the changes that you make are temporarily saved in the inverter and are lost the next
time the power supply is switched off. For your changes to be permanently saved in the
inverter, you must save the changes using the button (RAM to ROM). Before you press
the button, you need to mark the appropriate drive in the project navigator.
Go offline
You can now exit the online connection after the data backup (RAM to ROM) with
"Disconnect from target system".

Commissioning
4.5.5 Trace function for optimizing the drive
Description
The trace function is used for converter diagnostics and helps to optimize the behavior of the
drive. Start the function in the navigation bar using "... Control_Unit/Commissioning/Device
trace".
In two settings that are independent of one another, using you can interconnect eight
signals each. Each signal that you interconnect is active as standard
You can start a measurement as often as required; the results are temporarily stored (until
you exit STARTER) under the "Measurements" tab, together with the date and time. When
terminating STARTER or under the "Measurements" tab, you can save the measurement
results in the *.trc format.
If you require more than two settings for your measurements, you can either save the
individual traces in the project or export them in the *.clg format – and if necessary, load or
import.
Recording
Recording is performed in a CU-dependent basic clock cycle. The maximum recording
duration depends on the number of recorded signals and the trace clock cycle.
You can extend the recording duration by increasing the trace clock cycle by multiplying with
an integer factor and then accepting the displayed maximum duration by . Alternatively,
you can also specify the measurement period and then you can calculate the trace clock
cycle of STARTER using .
Recording individual bits for bit parameters
You can record individual bits of a parameter (e.g. r0722) by allocating the relevant bit using
"bit track" ( ).
Mathematical function
Using the mathematical function ( ) you can define a curve, for example the difference
between the speed setpoint and the speed actual value.
Note
If you use the "record individual bits" or "mathematical functions" option, then this is
displayed under signal No. 9.

Commissioning
Trigger
You can create your own start condition (trigger) for the trace. With the factory setting
(default setting) the trace starts as soon as you press the button (Start Trace). Using the
button , you can define another trigger to start the measurement.
Using pretrigger, set the time for the recording before the trigger is set. As a consequence,
the trigger condition traces itself.
Example of a bit pattern as trigger:

You must define the pattern and value of a bit parameter for the trigger. To do so, proceed
as follows:
Using , select "Trigger to variable - bit pattern"
Using , select the bit parameter
Using , open the screen form in which you set the bits and their values for the start
condition
',
',
',
① Select the bits for the trace trigger, upper line hex format, lower row binary format
② Define the bits for the trace trigger, upper line hex format, lower row binary format
Figure 4-7 Bit pattern
In the example, the trace starts if DI0 and DI3 are high and DI2 is low. The state of the other
digital inputs is not relevant for the start of the trace.
Further, you can either set an alarm or fault as start condition.

Commissioning
Display options
In this area, you can set how the measurement results are displayed.
● Repeat measurement:
This means that you place the measurements, which you wish to perform at different
times, one above one another
● Arrange curves in tracks
This means that you define as to whether all measured values are to be displayed with a
common zero line – or whether each measured value is displayed with its own zero line.
● Measuring cursor on:
This allows you to analyze the measuring intervals in detail
Figure 4-8 Trace dialog box

Commissioning
4.6 Data backup and standard commissioning
External data backup

After commissioning, your settings are saved in the inverter so that they are protected
against power failure.
Further, we recommend that you externally save the parameter settings so that in the case
of a defect, you can simply replace the Power Module or Control Unit (see also Replacing
the Control Unit (Page 242)).
You have three different options for externally backing up data (upload):
1. Memory card
2. PC/PG with STARTER
3. Operator Panel
Series commissioning
Series commissioning means the commissioning of several identical drives in the following
steps:
1. Commission the first inverter.
2. Upload the parameters of the first inverter to an external memory.
3. Download the parameters from the external memory to a second or additional inverter.
Note
The control unit to which the parameters are transferred must be of the same type and
have the same or a higher firmware version as the source control unit (the same 'type'
means the same MLFB).
For further information, refer to the following sections.

Commissioning
4.6.1 Backing up and transferring settings using a memory card
What memory cards do we recommend?

The memory card is a removable flash memory, that offers you the following options
● Automatically or manually write parameter settings from the card into the inverter
(automatic or manual download)
● Automatically or manually write parameter settings from the inverter onto the card
(automatic or manual upload)
We recommend that you use one of the memory cards with the following order numbers:
● MMC (order number 6SL3254-0AM00-0AA0)
● SD (order number 6ES7954-8LB00-0AA0)
Using memory cards from other manufacturers

If you use other SD or MMC memory cards, then you must format the memory card as
follows:
● MMC: Format FAT 16
– Insert the card into your PC's card reader.
– Command to format the card:
format x: /fs:fat (x: Drive code of the memory card on your PC)
● SD: Format FAT 32
– Insert the card into your PC's card reader.
– Command to format the card:
format x: /fs:fat32 (x: Drive code of the memory card on your PC.)
CAUTION
You use memory cards from other manufacturers at your own risk. Depending on the
card manufacturer, not all functions are supported (e.g. download).
4.6.1.1 Saving setting on memory card

We recommend that you insert the memory card before switching on the inverter for the first
time. The inverter then automatically ensures that the actual parameter setting is saved both
in the inverter as well as on the card.
The following describes how you can save the inverter parameter setting on the memory
card subsequently.
If you wish to transfer the parameter setting from the inverter on to a memory card (Upload),
you have two options:

Commissioning
Automatic upload
The inverter power supply has been switched off.

6,1$0,&6
1. Insert an empty memory card into the inverter.

2. Then switch-on the inverter power supply again.
After it has been switched-on, the inverter copies the

6,1$0,&6
30
&8
modified parameters to the memory card
6,1$0,&6
Transfer the setting to the
empty memory card
NOTICE
If the memory card is not empty and already contains a parameter setting, the inverter will
take on the parameter setting from the memory card. The previous setting in the inverter
will be deleted.
Manual upload
If you do not wish to switch off the inverter power supply or

you do not have an empty memory card available, you will
6,1$0,&6

need to transfer the parameter setting to the memory card
as follows: 6,1$0,&6
30
&8
1. The inverter power supply has been switched on.

2. Insert a memory card into the inverter.
6,1$0,&6
STARTER BOP-2
• Start the data transfer with p0971 = 1. • Start data transfer in the menu "OPTIONS" -
• Check the value of parameter p0971. "TO CRD".
If data transfer has been completed, then the • Wait until the BOP-2 signals that data transfer
inverter sets p0971 to 0. has been completed.

Commissioning
4.6.1.2 Transferring the setting from the memory card

If you wish to transfer the parameter setting from a memory card into the inverter
(download), you have two options:
Automatic download
The inverter power supply has been switched off.

6,1$0,&6
1. Insert the memory card into the inverter.

2. Then switch-on the inverter power supply. 6,1$0,&6

30
&8
6,1$0,&6
If there is valid parameter data on the memory card, then the inverter accepts this
automatically.
Note
Inverter with enabled safety functions
After the automatic download, the inverter also accepts all of the settings of the safety
functions.
Manual download
If you do not want to switch off the power supply, then you must

transfer the parameter setting into the inverter in the following way:
6,1$0,&6

1. The inverter power supply has been switched on.
2. Insert the memory card into the inverter.
6,1$0,&6
30
&8
6,1$0,&6
STARTER BOP-2
1. Go online with STARTER 1. Start data transfer in the menu "EXTRAS" -
2. In the expert list, set p0804 = 1. "FROM CRD".
3. Check the value of parameter p0804. 2. Wait until the BOP-2 signals that data transfer
Once data transfer has been completed, then has been completed.
p0804 = 0 is automatically set.

Commissioning

You must confirm the settings of the safety functions.
STARTER BOP-2
1. Go online with STARTER Set the following parameters:
2. Call the safety functions screen form p9761 = … Password for the safety functions
3. Click on the "Change settings" button p0010 = 95 Changing the safety functions
4. Enter the password for the safety functions p9701 = 220 Confirm the settings of the safety
5. Click on the "Activate settings" button. functions
Final steps:
4.6.1.3 Safely remove the memory card
CAUTION
The file system on the memory card can be destroyed if the memory card is removed while
the inverter is switched on without first requesting and confirming this using the "safe
removal" function. The memory card will then no longer function.
Procedure with STARTER or BOP-2:

1. Set p9400 to 2.
2. Check the value of parameter p9400.
If it is permissible to remove the memory card, p9400 is set to 3.
3. Remove the memory card.

Commissioning
4.6.2 Backing up and transferring settings using STARTER
Backing up the inverter settings on PC/PG (upload)

1. Go online with STARTER: .
2. Click on the button "Load project to PG": .
3. To save data in the PG (computer), click on .
Transferring settings from the PC/PG into the inverter (download)

1. Go online with STARTER.
2. Click on the button "Load project to target system": .
3. To save data in the converter, click on "Copy RAM to ROM" .

You must confirm the settings of the safety functions. Procedure:
1. In STARTER call-up the safety functions screen form
2. Click on the "Change settings" button
3. Click on the "Activate settings" button
4. Save your settings (copy RAM to ROM)

Commissioning
4.6.3 Saving settings and transferring them using an operator panel

You start the download or upload in the "TOOLS" menu.
Download for inverters with enabled safety functions

You must confirm the settings of the safety functions.
Set the following parameters

p9761 = … Password for the safety functions
p0010 = 95 Changing the safety functions
p9701 = 220 Confirm the settings of the safety functions
Final steps:
4.6.4 Other ways to back up settings

You can backup three additional settings of the parameters in memory areas of the inverter
reserved for this purpose. You will find additional information in the List Manual under the
following parameters:
p0970 Resetting drive parameters
Load the back-up setting (number 10, 11 or 12). You overwrite your actual parameter
setting when loading.
p0971 Saving parameters
Backing up the setting (10, 11 or 12).
You can back-up up to 99 additional parameter settings on the memory card. You will find
additional information in the List Manual under the following parameters:
p0802 Data transfer with memory card as source/target
p0803 Data transfer with device memory as source/target
p0804 Start data transfer

Commissioning

Adapt terminal strip 5
Before you adapt the inputs and outputs of the inverter, you should have completed the
basic commissioning, see Chapter Commissioning (Page 55) .
In the basic commissioning, select an assignment of the inverter interfaces from several
predefined configurations, see Section Select interface assignments (Page 46).
If none of the predefined configurations completely matches your application, then you must
adapt the assignment of the individual inputs and outputs. You do this by changing the
internal interconnection of an input or output using BICO technology .
BI: pxxxx p0730

', r0722.0 BO: ryyxx.n '21&
', r0722.1 '212
', r0722.2 '2&20
p0731
', r0722.3 '2326
', r0722.4 '21(*
', r0722.5 p0732
'21&
'212

, 8
p0756[0] p0776[0] '2&20
$, CI: pyyyy p0771[0]
r0755[0] CO: rxxyy $2
$,
*1'
p0756[1] p0776[1]
, 8 p0771[1]
$, CI: pyyyy
r0755[1] $2
$,
*1'
1 Not available with Control Units CU240B-2 and CU240B-2 DP
Figure 5-1 Internal interconnection of the inputs and outputs

Adapt terminal strip
5.1 Digital inputs
5.1 Digital inputs
Digital input terminals Changing the function of the digital input

Interconnect the status parameter of the digital input with a
BI: pxxxx
', r0722.0
binector input of your choice.
', r0722.1 Binector inputs are marked with "BI" in the parameter list of the List
', r0722.2 Manual.
', r0722.3
', r0722.4
', r0722.5
1 Not available with CU240B-2 and CU240B-2 DP Control Units
Table 5- 1 Binector inputs (BI) of the inverter (selection)
BI Significance BI Significance
p0810 Command data set selection CDS bit 0 p1036 Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, lower
p0840 ON/OFF1 p1055 Jog bit 0
p0844 OFF2 p1056 Jog bit 1
p0848 OFF3 p1113 Setpoint inversion
p0852 Enable operation p1201 Flying restart enable signal source
p0855 Unconditionally release holding brake p2103 1. Acknowledge faults
p0856 Enable speed controller p2106 External fault 1
p0858 Unconditionally close holding brake p2112 External alarm 1
p1020 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 0 p2200 Technology controller enable
p1021 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 1 p3330 Two-wire/three-wire control, control
command 1
command 2
command 3
p1035 Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, raise
A complete list of the binector outputs is provided in the List Manual.
Table 5- 2 Examples:
p2103 Acknowledge fault with digital input 1

', r0722.1 722.1
p0840
Switch-on motor with digital input 2
', r0722.2 722.2 212))

5.1 Digital inputs
Advanced settings
You can debounce the digital input signal using parameter p0724.
For more information, see the parameter list and the function block diagrams 2220 ff of the
List Manual.
Analog inputs as digital inputs

When required, you can use analog inputs as additional digital inputs.
Terminals of the additional digital inputs Changing the function of the digital input
BI: pxxxx If you use an analog input as digital input, interconnect
',
$, r0722.11 the status parameter of the digital input with a binector
$, input of your choice.
',
$, r0722.12
$,

5.2 Fail-safe digital input
5.2 Fail-safe digital input

This manual describes the STO safety function with control via a fail-safe input. Additional
safety functions, additional fail-safe digital inputs of the inverter and the control of the safety
functions via PROFIsafe are described in the Safety Integrated Function Manual.
Defining a fail-safe digital input

If you use the STO safety function, then you must configure the terminal strip during the
basic commissioning for a fail-safe digital input, e.g. with p0015 = 2 (see Section Select
interface assignments (Page 46)).
The inverter combines digital inputs DI 4 and DI 5 to form a fail-safe digital input.
Terminals of the fail-safe digital Function

input
You must enable STO to select the STO safety function (Basic
', Safety) via FDI 0.
)',
',
Further information can be found in section Safe Torque Off (STO)
safety function (Page 220).
Note
Control Units CU240B-2 and CU240B-2 DP do not have a fail-safe digital input.

5.3 Digital outputs
5.3 Digital outputs
Digital output terminals Changing the function of the digital output

Interconnect the digital output with a binector output of your
p0730
BO: ryyxx.n '21&
choice.
'212 Binector outputs are marked with "BO" in the parameter list
'2&20 of the List Manual.
p0731
'2326
'21(*
p0732
'21&
'212
'2&20
Table 5- 3 Binector outputs of the inverter (selection)
0 Deactivating digital output r0052.9 Process data control

r0052.0 Drive ready r0052.10 f_actual >= p1082 (f_max)
r0052.1 Drive ready for operation r0052.11 Alarm: Motor current/torque limit
r0052.2 Drive running r0052.12 Brake active
r0052.3 Drive fault active r0052.13 Motor overload
r0052.4 OFF2 active r0052.14 Motor CW rotation
r0052.5 OFF3 active r0052.15 Inverter overload
r0052.6 Closing lockout active r0053.0 DC braking active
r0052.7 Drive alarm active r0053.2 f_actual > p1080 (f_min)
r0052.8 Setpoint/actual value discrepancy r0053.6 f_actual ≥ setpoint (f_setpoint)
A complete list of the binector outputs is provided in the List Manual.
Table 5- 4 Example:
p0731 Signal fault via digital output 1.

r0052.3 52.3 '2

Advanced settings
You can invert the signal of the digital output using parameter p0748.
List Manual.

5.4 Analog inputs
5.4 Analog inputs
Analog input terminals Changing the function of the analog input

p0756[0] 1. Define the analog input type using
, 8
$, CI: pyyyy parameter p0756 and the switch on the
$,
r0755[0] inverter (e.g. voltage input -10 V … 10 V or
current input 4 mA … 20 mA).
, 8
p0756[1] 2. Interconnect parameter p0755 with a
CI: pyyyy
$,
r0755[1]
connector input of your choice (e.g. as
$, speed setpoint).
In the parameter list of the List Manual,
connector inputs are marked with "CI".
Define the analog input type

The inverter offers a series of default settings, which you can select using parameter p0756:
AI 0 Unipolar voltage input 0 V … +10 V p0756[0] = 0

Unipolar voltage input monitored +2 V … +10 V 1
Unipolar current input 0 mA … +20 mA 2
Unipolar current input monitored +4 mA … +20 mA 3
Bipolar voltage input -10 V … +10 V 4
No sensor connected 8
AI 1 Unipolar voltage input 0 V … +10 V p0756[1] = 0
Unipolar voltage input monitored +2 V … +10 V 1
Unipolar current input 0 mA … +20 mA 2
Unipolar current input monitored +4 mA … +20 mA 3
Bipolar voltage input -10 V … +10 V 4
No sensor connected 8
In addition, you must set the switch belonging to the analog input.
, 8
You can find the switch on the Control Unit behind the lower front
doors. $,
• Voltage input: Switch position U (factory setting) $,
• Current input: Switch position I
If you change the analog input type using p0756, then the inverter automatically selects the
appropriate scaling of the analog input. The linear scaling characteristic is defined using two
points (p0757, p0758) and (p0759, p0760). Parameters p0757 … p0760 are assigned to an
analog input via their index, e.g. parameters p0757[0] … p0760[0] belong to analog input 0.

5.4 Analog inputs
S S
9ROWDJHLQSXW99 &XUUHQWLQSXWP$P$

\ \
S S
[ [

S S
[ 9 [ P$
S S
\ \

S S
Figure 5-2 Examples for scaling characteristics
Table 5- 5 Parameters for the scaling characteristic and wire break monitoring
p0757 x-coordinate of 1st characteristic point [V or mA]
p0758 y coordinate of the 1st characteristic point [% of p200x]
p200x are the parameters of the reference variables, e.g. p2000 is the reference
speed.
p0759 x-coordinate of 2nd characteristic point [V or mA]
p0760 y-coordinate of 2nd characteristic point [% of p200x]
p0761 Wire breakage monitoring response threshold
You must define your own characteristic if none of the default types match your particular
application.
Example
The inverter should convert a 6 mA … 12 mA signal into the value range -100 % … 100 %
via analog input 0. The wire break monitoring of the inverter should respond when 6 mA is
fallen below.

5.4 Analog inputs
p0756[0] = 3 Analog input type Set DIP switch for AI
Define analog input 0 as current input 0 to current input , 8
with wire break monitoring. ("I"):
After changing p0756 to the value 3, the inverter sets the scaling characteristic parameters to the
following values:
p0757[0] = 4,0; p0758[0] = 0,0; p0759[0] = 20; p0760[0] = 100
Adapt the characteristic:
p0761[0] = 6.0 Analog inputs wire break monitoring, &XUUHQWLQSXWP$P$
response threshold
p0757[0] = 6.0 Analog inputs, characteristic (x1, y1) \
S
p0758[0] = -100.0 6 mA corresponds to -100 %
p0759[0] = 12.0 Analog inputs, characteristic (x2, y2) [
S
p0760[0] = 100.0 12 mA corresponds to 100 % [ P$
S
\
S
Define the significance of the analog input

You define the analog input function by interconnecting a connector input of your choice with
parameter p0755. Parameter p0755 is assigned to the particular analog input via its index,
e.g. parameter p0755[0] is assigned to analog input 0.
Table 5- 6 Connector inputs (CI) of the inverter (selection)
CI Significance CI Significance
p1070 Main setpoint p1522 Torque limit, upper
p1075 Supplementary setpoint p2253 Technology controller setpoint 1
p1503 Torque setpoint p2264 Technology controller actual value
p1511 Supplementary torque 1
A complete list of the connector inputs is provided in the List Manual.
Table 5- 7 Example:
p2253 Analog input 0 is the source for the speed setpoint.

$, r0755 755.0
Advanced settings
When required, you can smooth the signal, which you read-in via an analog input, using
parameter p0753.
For more information, see the parameter list and in the function block diagrams 9566 ff of the
List Manual.

5.5 Analog outputs
5.5 Analog outputs
Analog output terminals Changing the function of the analog output

p0776[0] 1. Define the analog output type using parameter
p0771[0] p0776 (e.g. voltage output -10 V … 10 V or
CO: rxxyy $2 current output 4 mA … 20 mA).
*1'
2. Interconnect parameter p0771 with a
p0776[1]
p0771[1] connector output of your choice (e.g. the
$2 actual speed).
*1' In the parameter list of the List Manual,
connector outputs are marked with "CO".
Define the analog output type

The inverter offers a series of default settings, which you can select using parameter p0776:
AO 0 Current output (factory setting) 0 mA … +20 mA p0776[0] = 0

Voltage output 0 V … +10 V 1
Current output +4 mA … +20 mA 2
AO 1 Current output (factory setting) 0 mA … +20 mA p0776[1] = 0
Voltage output 0 V … +10 V 1
Current output +4 mA … +20 mA 2
If you change the analog output type, then the inverter automatically selects the appropriate
scaling of the analog output. The linear scaling characteristic is defined using two points
(p0777, p0778) and (p0779, p0780).
S S
9ROWDJHRXWSXW99 &XUUHQWRXWSXWP$P$
9 P$
\ \
S S
\ \
S S
[ [ [ [
S S S S
Figure 5-3 Examples for scaling characteristics

5.5 Analog outputs
Parameters p0777 … p0780 are assigned to an analog output via their index, e.g.
parameters p0777[0] … p0770[0] belong to analog output 0.
Table 5- 8 Parameters for the scaling characteristic
p0777 X coordinate of the 1st characteristic point [% of P200x]
P200x are the parameters of the reference variables, e.g. P2000 is the reference
speed.
p0778 Y coordinate of the 1st characteristic point [V or mA]
p0779 X coordinate of the 2nd characteristic point [% of P200x]
p0780 Y coordinate of the 2nd characteristic point [V or mA]
You must define your own characteristic if none of the default types match your particular
application.
Example:
The inverter should convert a signal in the value range -100 % … 100 % into a
6 mA … 12 mA output signal via analog output 0.
p0776[0] = 2 Analog output, type
Define analog output 0 as current output.
After changing p0776 to the value 2, the inverter sets the scaling characteristic parameters to the
following values:
p0777[0] = 0.0; p0778[0] = 4.0; p0779[0] = 100.0; p0780[0] = 20.0
Adapt the characteristic:
p0777[0] = 0.0 Analog output, characteristic (x1, y1) &XUUHQWRXWSXWP$P$
p0778[0] = 6.0 0.0 % corresponds to 6 mA P$
\
p0779[0] = 100.0 Analog output, characteristic (x2, y2) S
p0780[0] = 12.0 100 % corresponds to 12 mA
\
S
[ [
S S

5.5 Analog outputs
Defining the analog output function

You define the analog output function by interconnecting parameter p0771 with a connector
output of your choice. Parameter p0771 is assigned to the particular analog input via its
index, e.g. parameter p0771[0] is assigned to analog output 0.
Table 5- 9 Connector outputs (CO) of the inverter (selection)
CO Significance CO Significance
r0021 Actual frequency r0026 Actual DC link voltage
r0024 Output actual frequency r0027 Output current
r0025 Output actual frequency
A complete list of the connector outputs is provided in the List Manual.
Table 5- 10 Example:
p0771
Output the inverter output current via analog output 0.
|i| r0027 27 $2
List Manual.
Advanced settings
You can manipulate the signal that you output via an analog output, as follows:
● Absolute-value generation of the signal (p0775)
● Signal inversion (p0782)
Additional information is provided in the parameter list of the List Manual.

5.5 Analog outputs

Configuring the fieldbus 6
Before you connect the inverter to the field bus, you should have completed the basic
commissioning, see Chapter Commissioning (Page 55)
Fieldbus interfaces of the Control Units

The Control Units are available in different versions for communication with higher-level
controls with the subsequently listed fieldbus interfaces:
Fieldbus Profile Control Unit Interface

PROFIBUS DP (Page 102) PROFIdrive CU240B-2 DP Sub D socket
PROFIsafe CU240E-2 DP
CU240E-2 DP-F
USS (Page 123) - CU240B-2 RS485 connector
Modbus RTU (Page 137) - CU240E-2
CU240E-2 F
Data exchange via the fieldbus
Analog signals
The converter always scales signals, which are transferred via the fieldbus, to a value of
4000 hex. The significance of this numerical value depends on the category of the signal that
you are transferring.
Signal category 4000 hex corresponds to the value of the following parameters
Speeds, frequencies p2000
Voltage p2001
Current p2002
Torque p2003
Power p2004
Angle p2005
Temperature p2006
Acceleration p2007
Control and status words

Control and status words always comprise two bytes. Depending on the control type, the two
bytes are differently interpreted as higher or lower significance. An example for transferring
control and status words with a SIMATIC control is provided in Chapter STEP 7 program
example for cyclic communication (Page 284).

Configuring the fieldbus
6.1 Communication via PROFIBUS
Permissible cable lengths, routing and shielding the PROFIBUS cable

Information can be found in the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1971286).
Recommended PROFIBUS connectors

We recommend connectors with the following order numbers for connecting the PROFIBUS
cable:
● 6GK1500-0FC00
● 6GK1500-0EA02
Both connectors are suitable for all SINAMICS G120 inverters with respect to the angle of
the outgoing cable.
Note
Communication with the controller, even when the supply voltage on the Power Module is
switched off
You will have to supply the Control Unit with 24 V DC on terminals 31 and 32 if you require
communication to take place with the controller when the line voltage is switched off.
6.1.1 Configuring communication to the control

The GSD is a description file for a PROFIBUS slave. You must import the GSD of the
converter into the PROFIBUS master - i.e. into your control system - in order to configure
communication between the control system and converter.
You have two options for obtaining the GSD of your converter:
1. You can find the SINAMICS converter GSD on the Internet
2. The GSD is saved in the converter. The GSD is written to the memory card if you insert
the memory card in the converter and set p0804 to 12. Using the memory card, you can
then transfer the GSD to your PG/your PC.
In Section Application Examples (Page 279) you will find an example showing how you can
connect the converter with its GSD to a SIMATIC control via PROFIBUS.

6.1.2 Setting the address

You can set the inverter's PROFIBUS address using either DIP switches on the Control Unit
or parameter p0918.
Valid PROFIBUS addresses: 1 … 125

Invalid PROFIBUS addresses: 0, 126, 127
If you have specified a valid address using DIP switches, this address will always be the one
that takes effect and p0918 cannot be changed.
If you set all DIP switches to "OFF" (0) or "ON" (1), then p0918 defines the address.
The positions and settings of the DIP switches are described in Section: Interfaces,
connectors, switches, terminal blocks and LEDs of the CU (Page 43).
CAUTION
A bus address that has been changed is only effective after the inverter has been switched
off and back on again.

6.1.3 Basic settings for communication
Table 6- 1 The most important parameters
p0015 Macro drive device
Select the I/O configuration via PROFIBUS DP (e.g. p0015 = 7)
p0922 PROFIdrive telegram selection (factory setting for converters with PROFIBUS
interface: standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2)
Set the send and receive telegram, see Cyclic communication (Page 105)
1: Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2
350: SIEMENS telegram 350, PZD-4/4
352 SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6
353: SIEMENS telegram 353, PZD-2/2, PKW-4/4
999: Free telegram configuring with BICO
Using parameter p0922, you automatically interconnect the corresponding signals of the
converter to the telegram.
This BICO interconnection can only be changed, if you set p0922 to 999. In this case, select
your required telegram using p2079 and then adapt the BICO interconnection of the signals.
Table 6- 2 Advanced settings
p2079 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended
Contrary to p0922, using p2079, a telegram can be set and subsequently extended.
For p0922 < 999, the following applies: p2079 has the same value and is locked. All of
the interconnections and extensions contained in the telegram are locked.
For p0922 = 999, the following applies: p2079 can be freely set. If p2079 is also set to
999, then all interconnections can be set.
For p0922 = 999 and p2079 < 999, the following applies: The interconnections
contained in the telegram are locked. However, the telegram can be extended.
For further information, please refer to the Parameter Manual.

6.1.4 Cyclic communication

The PROFIdrive profile defines different telegram types. Telegrams contain the data for
cyclic communication with a defined meaning and sequence. The inverter has the telegram
types listed in the table below.
Table 6- 3 Inverter telegram types
Telegram type (p0922) Process data (PZD) - control and status words, setpoints and actual values
PZD01 PZD02 PZD03 PZD04 PZD05 PZD06 PZD07 PZD08
STW1 HSW
ZSW1 HIW
Telegram 1 STW1 NSOLL_A ⇐ The inverter receives this data from the control
Speed control ZSW1 NIST_A ⇒ The inverter sends this data to the control
PZD 2/2
Telegram 20 STW1 NSOLL_A
Speed control, VIK/NAMUR ZSW1 NIST_A_ IAIST_ MIST_ PIST_ MELD_
PZD 2/6 GLATT GLATT GLATT GLATT NAMUR
Telegram 350 STW1 NSOLL_A M_LIM STW3
Speed control ZSW1 NIST_A_ IAIST_ ZSW3
PZD 4/4 GLATT GLATT
Telegram 352 STW1 NSOLL_A PCS7 process data
Speed control, PCS7 ZSW1 NIST_A_ IAIST_ MIST_ WARN_ FAULT_
PZD 6/6 GLATT GLATT GLATT CODE CODE
Telegram 353 STW1 NSOLL_A
Speed control, ZSW1 NIST_A_
PKW 4/4 and PZD 2/2 GLATT
Telegram 354 STW1 NSOLL_A PCS7 process data
Speed control, ZSW1 NIST_A_ IAIST_ MIST_ WARN_ FAULT_
PKW 4/4 and PZD 6/6 GLATT GLATT GLATT CODE CODE
Telegram 999 STW1 Telegram length on receipt can be configured up to max. 8 words
Free interconnection via BICO ZSW1 Telegram length on transmission can be configured up to max. 8 words
PZD n/m (n,m = 1 … 8)
Table 6- 4 Explanation of the abbreviations
Abbreviation Significance Abbreviation Significance

STW1/2 Control word 1/2 PIST_GLATT Actual active power
ZSW1/2 Status word 1/2 MELD_NAMUR Control word according to the VIK-
NAMUR definition
NSOLL_A Speed setpoint M_LIM Torque limit value
NIST_A_GLATT Smoothed speed actual value FAULT_CODE Fault number
IAIST_GLATT Smoothed actual current value WARN_CODE Alarm number
MIST_GLATT Actual torque

Table 6- 5 Telegram status in the inverter
Process data Control ⇒ inverter Inverter ⇒ control

item Status of the received Bits 0…15 in the Defining the word to be Status of the sent word
word received word sent
PZD01 r2050[0] r2090.0 … r2090.15 p2051[0] r2053[0]
PZD02 r2050[1] r2091.0 … r2091.15 p2051[1] r2053[1]
PZD03 r2050[2] r2092.0 … r2092.15 p2051[2] r2053[2]
PZD04 r2050[3] r2093.0 … r2093.15 p2051[3] r2053[3]
PZD05 r2050[4] - p2051[4] r2053[4]
PZD06 r2050[5] - p2051[5] r2053[5]
PZD07 r2050[6] - p2051[6] r2053[6]
PZD08 r2050[7] - p2051[7] r2053[7]
Select telegram
Select the communication telegram using parameters p0922 and p2079. The following
dependencies apply:
● P0922 < 999:
For p0922 < 999, the inverter sets p2079 to the same value as p0922.
With this setting, the inverter defines the length and the content of the telegram. The
inverter does not permit any changes to the telegram.
● p0922 = 999, p2079 < 999:
For p0922 = 999, select a telegram via p2079.
Also with this setting, the inverter defines the length and the content of the telegram. The
inverter does not permit any changes to the telegram content. However, you can extend
the telegram.
● p0922 = p2079 = 999:
For p0922 = p2079 = 999, enter the length and the content of the telegram.
With this setting, you can define the telegram length via the central PROFIdrive
configuration in the master. You define the telegram contents via the signal
interconnections of the BICO technology. Using p2038, you can define the assignment of
the control word according to SINAMICS or VIK/NAMUR.
You will find more details on the interconnection of command and setpoint sources,
depending on the selected protocol, in the List Manual in function block diagrams 2420 to
2472.
6.1.4.1 Control and status word 1

The control and status words fulfill the specifications of PROFIdrive profile version 4.1 for
"speed control" mode.

Control word 1 (STW1)

Control word 1 (bits 0 … 10 in accordance with PROFIdrive profile and VIK/NAMUR,
bits 11 … 15 specific to inverter).
Table 6- 6 Control word 1 and interconnection with parameters in the inverter
Bit Value Significance Comments P No.

Telegram 20 All other telegrams
0 0 OFF1 Motor brakes with the ramp-down time p1121 at p0840[0] =
standstill (f < fmin) the motor is switched off. r2090.0
1 ON With a positive edge, the inverter goes into the "ready"
state, with additionally bit 3 = 1, the inverter switches on
the motor.
1 0 OFF2 Switch off motor immediately, motor coasts to a p0844[0] =
standstill. r2090.1
1 No OFF2 ---
2 0 Quick stop (OFF3) Quick stop: Motor brakes with the OFF3 ramp-down p0848[0] =
time p1135 down to standstill. r2090.2
1 No quick stop (OFF3) ---
3 0 Disable operation Immediately switch-off motor (cancel pulses). p0852[0] =
1 Enable operation Switch-on motor (pulses can be enabled). r2090.3
4 0 Lock ramp-function generator The ramp-function generator output is set to 0 (quickest p1140[0] =
possible deceleration). r2090.4
1 Operating condition Ramp-function generator can be enabled
5 0 Stop ramp-function generator The output of the ramp-function generator is "frozen". p1141[0] =
1 Ramp-function generator enable r2090.5
6 0 Inhibit setpoint Motor brakes with the ramp-down time p1121. p1142[0] =
1 Enable setpoint Motor accelerates with the ramp-up time p1120 to the r2090.6
setpoint.
7 1 Acknowledging faults Fault is acknowledged with a positive edge. If the ON p2103[0] =
command is still active, the inverter switches to"closing r2090.7
lockout" state.
8 Not used
9 Not used
10 0 PLC has no master control Process data invalid, "sign of life" expected. p0854[0] =
1 Master control by PLC Control via fieldbus, process data valid. r2090.10
11 1 ---1) Direction reversal Setpoint is inverted in the inverter. p1113[0] =

r2090.11
12 Not used
13 1 ---1) MOP up The setpoint stored in the motorized potentiometer is p1035[0] =
increased. r2090.13
14 1 ---1) MOP down The setpoint stored in the motorized potentiometer is p1036[0] =
decreased. r2090.14
15 1 CDS bit 0 Not used Changes over between settings for different operation p0810 =
interfaces (command data sets). r2090.15
1) If you change over from another telegram to telegram 20, then the assignment of the previous telegram is kept.

Status word 1 (ZSW1)

Status word 1 (bits 0 to 10 in accordance with PROFIdrive profile and VIK/NAMUR, bits 11 to
15 for SINAMICS G120 only).
Table 6- 7 Status word 1 and interconnection with parameters in the inverter
Bit Value Significance Comments P No.

Telegram 20 All other telegrams
0 1 Ready for switching on Power supply switched on; electronics initialized; p2080[0] =
pulses locked. r0899.0
1 1 Ready for operation Motor is switched on (ON1 command present), no p2080[1] =
active fault, motor can start as soon as "enable r0899.1
operation" command is issued. See control word 1,
bit 0.
2 1 Operation enabled Motor follows setpoint. See control word 1, bit 3. p2080[2] =
r0899.2
3 1 Fault present The inverter has a fault. p2080[3] =
r2139.3
4 1 OFF2 inactive Coast to standstill not activated (no OFF2) p2080[4] =
r0899.4
5 1 OFF3 inactive No fast stop active p2080[5] =
r0899.5
6 1 Closing lockout active The motor is only switched on after a further ON1 p2080[6] =
command r0899.6
7 1 Alarm active Motor remains switched on; acknowledgement is p2080[7] =
not required; see r2110. r2139.7
8 1 Speed deviation within tolerance range Setpoint/actual value deviation within tolerance p2080[8] =
range. r2197.7
9 1 Control requested The automation system is requested to assume p2080[9] =
control. r0899.9
10 1 Comparison speed reached or Speed is greater than or equal to the corresponding p2080[10] =
exceeded maximum speed. r2199.1
11 0 I, M or P limit reached Comparison value for current, torque or power has p2080[11] =
been reached or exceeded. r1407.7
12 1 ---1) Holding brake open Signal to open and close a motor holding brake. p2080[12] =
r0899.12
13 0 Alarm motor overtemperature -- p2080[13] =
r2135.14
14 1 Motor rotates forwards Internal inverter actual value > 0 p2080[14] =
0 Motor rotates backwards Internal inverter actual value < 0 r2197.3
15 1 CDS display No alarm, thermal p2080[15] =

power unit overload r0836.0 /
r2135.15
1) If you change over from another telegram to telegram 20, then the assignment of the previous telegram is kept.

6.1.4.2 Control and status word 3

The control and status words fulfill the specifications of PROFIdrive profile version 4.1 for
"speed control" mode.
Control word 3 (STW3)

Control word 3 has the following default assignment. You can change the assignment with
BICO technology.
Table 6- 8 Control word 3 and interconnection with parameters in the converter
Bit Value Meaning Comments BICO interconnection 1)

Telegram 350
0 1 Fixed setpoint, bit 0 Selects up to 16 different fixed setpoints. p1020[0] = r2093.0
1 1 Fixed setpoint, bit 1 p1021[0] = r2093.1
4 1 DDS selection, bit 0 Changes over between settings for p0820 = r2093.4
5 1 DDS selection, bit 1 different motors (drive data sets). p0821 = r2093.5
6 – Not used
7 – Not used
8 1 Technology controller enable -- p2200[0] = r2093.8
9 1 DC braking enable -- p1230[0] = r2093.9
10 – Not used
11 1 1 = Enable droop Enable or inhibit speed controller droop. p1492[0] = r2093.11
12 1 Torque control active Changes over the control mode for vector p1501[0] = r2093.12
0 Speed control active control.
13 1 No external fault -- p2106[0] = r2093.13
0 External fault is active (F07860)
14 – Not used
15 1 CDS bit 1 Changes over between settings for p0811[0] = r2093.15
different operation interfaces (command
data sets).
1) If you switch from telegram 350 to a different one, then the converter sets all interconnections p1020, … to "0".
Exception: p2106 = 1.

Status word 3 (ZSW3)

Status word 3 has the following standard assignment. You can change the assignment with
BICO technology.
Table 6- 9 Status word 3 and interconnection with parameters in the converter
Bit Value Meaning Description P No.

0 1 DC braking active -- p2051[3] =
1 1 |n_act| > p1226 Absolute current speed > stationary state detection r0053
2 1 |n_act| > p1080 Absolute actual speed > minimum speed
3 1 i_act ≧ p2170 Actual current ≥ current threshold value
4 1 |n_act| > p2155 Absolute actual speed > speed threshold value 2
5 1 |n_act| ≦ p2155 Absolute actual speed < speed threshold value 2
6 1 |n_act| ≧ r1119 Speed setpoint reached
7 1 DC link voltage ≦ p2172 Actual DC link voltage ≦ threshold value
8 1 DC link voltage > p2172 Actual DC link voltage > threshold value
9 1 Ramping completed Ramp-function generator is not active.
10 1 Technology controller output at lower Technology controller output ≦ p2292
limit
11 1 Technology controller output at upper Technology controller output > p2291
limit
12 Not used
13 Not used
14 Not used
15 Not used

6.1.4.3 Data structure of the parameter channel
Parameter channel
You can write and read parameter values via the parameter channel, e.g. in order to monitor
process data. The parameter channel always comprises four words.
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO $EEUHYLDWLRQV 3.(3DUDPHWHULGHQWLILHU

,1',QGH[
3.( ,1' 3:(
3:(3DUDPHWHUYDOXH
VW QG UGDQG WK
ZRUG ZRUG ZRUG
Figure 6-1 Structure of the parameter channel
Parameter identifier (PKE), 1st word

The parameter identifier (PKE) contains 16 bits.
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.( ,1' 3:(
VW QG UGDQG WK
ZRUG ZRUG ZRUG

630
$. 318
Figure 6-2 PKE - 1st word in parameter channel
● Bits 12 to 15 (AK) contain the request or response identifier.

● Bit 11 (SPM) is reserved and is always 0.
● Bits 0 to 10 (PNU) contain parameter numbers 1 … 1999. For parameter numbers ≥ 2000
an offset must be added that is defined in the 2nd word of the parameter channel (IND).

The meaning of the request identifier for request telegrams (control → inverter) is explained
in the following table.
Table 6- 10 Request identifier (control → inverter)
Request Description Response

identifier identifier
positive negative
0 No request 0 7/8
1 Request parameter value 1/2 ↑
2 Change parameter value (word) 1 |
3 Change parameter value (double word) 2 |
4 Request descriptive element 1) 3 |
6 Request parameter value (field) 1) 4/5 |
7 Change parameter value (field, word) 1) 4 |
8 Change parameter value (field, double word) 1) 5 |
9 Request number of field elements 6 |
11 Change parameter value (field, double word) and save in EEPROM 5 |
2)
12 Change parameter value (field, word) and save in EEPROM 2) 4 |

13 Change parameter value (double word) and save in EEPROM 2 ↓
14 Change parameter value (word) and save in EEPROM 1 7/8
1) The required element of the parameter description is specified in IND (2nd word).
2) The required element of the indexed parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
The meaning of the response identifier for response telegrams (inverter → control) is
explained in the following table. The request identifier determines which response identifiers
are possible.
Table 6- 11 Response identifier (inverter → control)
Response Description
identifier
0 No response
1 Transfer parameter value (word)
2 Transfer parameter value (double word)
3 Transfer descriptive element 1)
4 Transfer parameter value (field, word) 2)
5 Transfer parameter value (field, double word) 2)
6 Transfer number of field elements
7 Request cannot be processed, task cannot be executed (with error number)
8 No master controller status / no authorization to change parameters of the parameter
channel interface

If the response identifier is 7 (request cannot be processed), one of the error numbers listed
in the following table will be saved in parameter value 2 (PWE2).
Table 6- 12 Error numbers for the response "Request cannot be processed"
No. Description Comments

0 Impermissible parameter number (PNU) Parameter does not exist
1 Parameter value cannot be changed The parameter can only be read
2 Minimum/maximum not achieved or –
exceeded
3 Wrong subindex –
4 No field An individual parameter was addressed
with a field request and subindex > 0
5 Wrong parameter type / wrong data type Confusion of word and double word
6 Setting is not permitted (only resetting) –
7 The descriptive element cannot be changed Description cannot be changed
11 Not in the "master control" mode Change request without "master control"
mode (see P0927)
12 Keyword missing –
17 Request cannot be processed on account of The current inverter status is not
the operating state compatible with the received request
20 Illegal value Modification access with a value which is
within the value limits but which is illegal for
other permanent reasons (parameter with
defined individual values)
101 Parameter number is currently deactivated Dependent on the operating state of the
inverter
102 Channel width is insufficient Communication channel is too small for
response
104 Illegal parameter value The parameter can only assume certain
values.
106 Request not included / task is not supported After request ID 5, 10, 15
107 No write access with enabled controller The operating state of the inverter prevents
a parameter change
200/201 Changed minimum/maximum not achieved The maximum or minimum can be limited
or exceeded further during operation.
204 The available access authorization does not –
cover parameter changes.

Parameter index (IND)
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.( ,1' 3:(
VW QG UGDQG WK
ZRUG ZRUG ZRUG

6XELQGH[,1' 3DJHLQGH[
Figure 6-3 Structure of the parameter index (IND)
● For indexed parameters, select the index of the parameter by transferring the appropriate
value between 0 and 254 to the subindex within a job.
● The page index is used to switch over the parameter numbers. Use this byte to add an
offset to the parameter number that is transferred in the 1st word of the parameter
channel (PKE).
Page index: Offset of parameter number

The parameter numbers are assigned to several parameter ranges. The following table
shows which value you must transfer to the page index to achieve a particular parameter
number.
Table 6- 13 Page index setting dependent on parameter range
Parameter range Page index Hex value

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0000 … 1999 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0x00
2000 … 3999 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0x80
6000 … 7999 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0x90
8000 … 9999 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0x20
10000 … 11999 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0xA0
20000 … 21999 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0x50
30000 … 31999 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0xF0
Parameter value (PWE)

The parameter value (PWE) is transferred as a double word (32 bits). Only one parameter
value may be transferred per telegram.
A 32 bit parameter value includes PWE1 (H word, 3rd word) and PWE2 (L word, 4th word).
A 16 bit parameter value is transferred in PWE2 (L word, 4th word). In this case, PWE1 (H
word, 3rd word) must be set to 0.

Example of read request for parameter P7841[2]

To obtain the value of the indexed parameter P7841, you must fill the telegram of the
parameter channel with the following data:
● Request parameter value (field): Bits 15 … 12 in the PKE word:
Request identifier = 6
● Parameter number without offset: Bits 10 … 0 in the PKE word:
Because you can only code parameter numbers from 1 … 1999 in the PKE, you must
deduct as large an offset as possible, a number divisible by 2000, from the parameter
number, and transfer the result of this calculation to the PKE word.
In our example, this means: 7841 - 6000 = 1841
● Coding the offset of the parameter number in the page index byte of the IND word:
In this example: When offset = 6000, this corresponds to a page index value of 0x90.
● Index of parameter in the subindex byte of the IND word:
In this example: Index = 2
● Because you want to read the parameter value, words 3 and 4 in the parameter channel
for requesting the parameter value are irrelevant. They should be assigned a value of 0,
for example.
Table 6- 14 Request to read parameter P7841[2]
PKE (1st word) IND (2nd word) PWE (3rd and 4th words)
AK PNU (10 bits) Subindex Page index PWE1 PWE2
(H byte) (L byte) (H word) (L word)
0x6 0 0x731 (decimal: 1841) 0x02 0x90 0x0000 0x0000
Rules for editing requests and responses

● You can only request one parameter per transmitted telegram
● Each received telegram contains only one response
● The request must be repeated until the right response is received
● The response is assigned to a request by means of the following identifiers:
– Suitable response identifier
– Suitable parameter number
– Suitable parameter index IND, if required
– Suitable parameter value PWE, if necessary
● The complete request must be sent in a telegram. Request telegrams cannot be
subdivided. The same applies to responses.

6.1.4.4 Slave-to-slave communication

With "Slave-slave communication" ( also called "Data Exchange Broadcast") it is possible to
quickly exchange data between inverters (slaves) without the master being directly involved,
for instance to use the actual value of one inverter as setpoint for other inverters.
For slave-to-slave communication, in the control system you must define which inverter acts
as publisher (sender) or subscriber (receiver) - and which data or data areas (access points)
you wish to use for slave-to-slave communication. In the inverters that operate as subscriber,
you must define how the data transferred using slave-to-slave communication is processed.
Using parameter r2077, in the inverter, you can read-out the PROFIBUS addresses of the
inverters for which the slave-to-slave communication function is configured.
● Publisher Slave, which sends the data for slave-to-slave communication.
● Subscriber Slave, which receives the data from slave-to-slave communication from the
publisher.
● Links and access points define the data that are used for slave-to-slave communication.
You must observe the following restrictions for the slave-to-slave communication function:
● a maximum of 8 PZD are permissible for each drive
● To a publisher, a maximum of 4 links are possible
An example of how you configure slave-to-slave communication between two inverters in
STEP 7 is provided in Section: Configuring slave-to-slave communication in STEP 7
(Page 290).

6.1.5 Acyclic communication

As from performance level DP-V1, PROFIBUS communications offer acyclic data
communications apart from cyclic communications. You can parameterize and troubleshoot
(diagnostics) the inverter via acyclic data transfer. Acyclic data is transferred in parallel with
cyclic data transfer but with a lower priority.
The inverter supports the following data transfer types:
● Reading and writing parameters via "data set 47" (up to 240 bytes per write or read
request)
● Reading-out profile-specific parameters
● Data exchange with a SIMATIC HMI (Human Machine Interface)
You can find a STEP 7 program example for acyclic data transfer in Section STEP 7
program example for acyclic communication (Page 286).
6.1.5.1 Reading and changing parameters via data set 47
Reading parameter values
Table 6- 15 Request to read parameters
Data block Byte n Bytes n + 1 n

Header Reference 01 hex ... FF hex 01 hex: Read request 0
01 hex Numberof parameters (m) 01 hex ... 27 hex 2
Address, parameter 1 Attribute Number of indices 4
10 hex: Parameter value 00 hex ... EA hex
20 hex: Parameter description (for parameters without index: 00 hex)
Parameter number 0001 hex ... FFFF hex 6
Number of the 1st index 0000 hex ... FFFF hex 8
(for parameters without index: 0000 hex)
… …
Address, parameter 2 … …
… … …
Address, parameter m … …

Table 6- 16 Converter response to a read request

Header Reference (identical to a read request) 01 hex: Converter has executed the read 0
request.
81 hex: Converter was not able to completely
execute the read request.
01 hex Number of parameters (m) 2
(identical to the read request)
Values, parameter 1 Format Number of index values or - for a negative 4
02 hex: Integer8 response - number of error values
03 hex: Integer16
04 hex: Integer32
05 hex: Unsigned8
06 hex: Unsigned16
07 hex: Unsigned32
08 hex: FloatingPoint
10 hex OctetString
13 hex TimeDifference
41 hex: Byte
42 hex: Word
43 hex: Double word
44 hex: Error
Value of the 1st index or - for a negative response - error value 1 6
You can find the error values in a table at the end of this section.
… …
Values, parameter 2 …
… …
Values, parameter m …

Changing parameter values
Table 6- 17 Request to change parameters

Header Reference 01 hex ... FF hex 02 hex: Change request 0
01 hex Number of parameters (m) 01 hex ... 27 hex 2
Address, parameter 1 10 hex: Parameter value Number of indices 4
00 hex ... EA hex
(00 hex and 01 hex have the same
significance)
Parameter number 0001 hex ... FFFF hex 6
Number of the 1st index 0001 hex ... FFFF hex 8
… …
Address, parameter 2 …
… … …
Address, parameter m …
Values, parameter 1 Format Number of index values
02 hex: Integer 8 00 hex ... EA hex
03 hex: Integer 16
04 hex: Integer 32
05 hex: Unsigned 8
06 hex: Unsigned 16
07 hex: Unsigned 32
08 hex: Floating Point
10 hex Octet String
13 hex Time Difference
41 hex: Byte
42 hex: Word
43 hex: Double word
Value of the 1st index
…
Values, parameter 2 …
… …
Values, parameter m …
Table 6- 18 Response, if the converter has executed the change request

Header Reference (identical to a change request) 02 hex 0
01 hex Number of parameters (identical to a change 2
request)

Table 6- 19 Response, if the converter was not able to completely execute the change request

Header Reference (identical to a change request) 82 hex 0
01 hex Number of parameters (identical to a change 2
request)
Values, parameter 1 Format Number of error values 4
40 hex: Zero (change request for this data 00 hex, 01 hex or 02 hex
block executed)
44 hex: Error (change request for this data
block not executed)
Only for "Error"- error value 1 6
You can find the error values in the table at the end of this section.
Only if "number of error values" = 02 hex: Error value 2 8
Error value 1 defines whether the converter sends error value 2 and what it means.
Values, parameter 2 ...
... … …
Values, parameter m ...
Diagnostics
Table 6- 20 Error value in the parameter response
Error Meaning
value 1
00 hex Illegal parameter number (access to a parameter that does not exist)
01 hex Parameter value cannot be changed (change request for a parameter value that cannot be changed. Additional
diagnostics in error value 2)
02 hex Lower or upper value limit exceeded (change request with a value outside the value limits. Additional
03 hex Incorrect subindex (access to a subindex that does not exist. Additional diagnostics in error value 2)
04 hex No array (access with a subindex to non-indexed parameters)
05 hex Incorrect data type (change request with a value that does not match the data type of the parameter)
06 hex Setting not permitted, only resetting (change request with a value not equal to 0 without permission. Additional
07 hex Descriptive element cannot be changed (change request to a descriptive element that cannot be changed.
Additional diagnostics in error value 2)
09 hex Description data not available (access to a description that does not exist, parameter value is available)
0B hex No master control (change request but with no master control)
0F hex Text array does not exist (although the parameter value is available, the access is made to a text array that
does not exist)
11 hex Request cannot be executed due to the operating state (access is not possible for temporary reasons that are
not specified)
14 hex Inadmissible value (change request with a value that is within the limits but which is illegal for other permanent
reasons, i.e. a parameter with defined individual values. Additional diagnostics in error value 2)
15 hex Response too long (the length of the actual response exceeds the maximum transfer length)

Error Meaning
value 1
16 hex Illegal parameter address (illegal or unsupported value for attribute, number of elements, parameter number,
subindex or a combination of these)
17 hex Illegal format (change request for an illegal or unsupported format)
18 hex Number of values not consistent (number of values of the parameter data to not match the number of elements
in the parameter address)
19 hex Drive object does not exist (access to a drive object that does not exist)
6B hex No change access for a controller that is enabled.
6C hex Unknown unit.
6E hex Change request is only possible when the motor is being commissioned (p0010 = 3).
6F hex Change request is only possible when the power unit is being commissioned (p0010 = 2).
70 hex Change request is only possible for quick commissioning (basic commissioning) (p0010 = 1).
71 hex Change request is only possible if the converter is ready (p0010 = 0).
72 hex Change request is only possible for a parameter reset (restore to factory setting) (p0010 = 30).
73 hex Change request is only possible when Safety Integrated is being commissioned (p0010 = 95).
74 hex Change request is only possible when a technological application/unit is being commissioned (p0010 = 5).
75 hex Change request is only possible in a commissioning state (p0010 ≠ 0).
76 hex Change request is not possible for internal reasons (p0010 = 29).
77 hex Change request is not possible at download.
81 hex Change request is not possible at download.
82 hex Transfer of the control authority (master) is inhibited by BI: p0806.
83 hex Requested BICO interconnection is not possible (BICO output does not supply a float value, however the BICO
input requires a float value)
84 hex Converter does not accept a change request (converter is busy with internal calculations, see r3996)
85 hex No access methods defined.
C8 hex Change request below the currently valid limit (change request to a value that lies within the "absolute" limits,
but is however below the currently valid lower limit)
C9 hex Change request above the currently valid limit (change request to a value that lies within the "absolute" limits,
but is however above the currently valid upper limit, e.g. specified as a result of the converter power rating)
CC hex Change request not permitted (change is not permitted as the access code is not available)

6.2 Communication via RS485
6.2.1 Integrating inverters into a bus system via the RS485 interface
Connecting to a network via RS485

Connect the inverter to your fieldbus via the RS485 interface. Position and assignment of the
RS485 interface can be found in section Interfaces, connectors, switches, terminal blocks
and LEDs of the CU (Page 43). This connector has short-circuit proof, isolated pins.
56 566ODYH 566ODYH /DVW56VODYH

0DVWHU ,QYHUWHU ,QYHUWHU ,QYHUWHUQ
%XVWHUPLQDWLQJ
UHVLVWRU 2)) 2)) 21

6KLHOG
Figure 6-4 Communication network via RS485
You must switch-in the bus terminating resistor for the first and last participants. The position
of the bus terminating resistor can be found in section Interfaces, connectors, switches,
terminal blocks and LEDs of the CU (Page 43).
You can disconnect one or more slaves from the bus (by unplugging the bus connector)
without interrupting the communication for the other stations, but not the first or last.
NOTICE
When the bus is operating, the first and last bus station must be continuously connected to
the supply.
Note
Communication with the controller, even when the supply voltage on the Power Module is
switched off
You will have to supply the Control Unit with 24 V DC on terminals 31 and 32 if you require
communication to take place with the controller when the line voltage is switched off.

6.2.2 Communication via USS

Using the USS protocol (protocol of the universal serial interface), users can set up a serial
data connection between a higher-level master system and several slave systems (RS 485
interface). Master systems include programmable logic controllers (e.g. SIMATIC S7-200) or
PCs. The inverters are always slaves on the bus system.
Communication using the USS protocol takes place over the RS485 interface with a
maximum of 31 slaves.
The maximum cable length is 1200 m (3300 ft)
Information about how to connect the inverter to the USS fieldbus is provided in Section:
Integrating inverters into a bus system via the RS485 interface (Page 122).
6.2.2.1 Setting the address

You can set the inverter's USS address using either DIP switches on the Control Unit or
parameter p2021.
Valid USS addresses: 1 … 30

Invalid USS addresses: 0, 31 … 127
The positions and settings of the DIP switches are described in Section Interfaces,
CAUTION

6.2.2.2 Basic settings for communication
P0015 = 21 Macro drive unit
Selecting the I/O configuration
p2020 Value Baud rate
4 2400
5 4800
6 9600
7 19200
8 38400
9 57600
10 76800
11 93750
12 115200
13 187500
p2022 Fieldbus interface, USS PZD count
Setting the number of 16-bit words in the PZD part of the USS telegram
p2023 Fieldbus interface, USS PKW count
Setting the number of 16-bit words in the PKW part of the USS telegram:
Value PKW count
0 PKW 0 words
3 PKW 3 words
4 PKW 4 words
127 PKW variable
p2040 Fieldbus interface, monitoring time [ms]
Setting the monitoring time to monitor the received process data via fieldbus. If no
process data are received within this time, an appropriate message is output
Additional information and parameters are provided on the following pages.
6.2.2.3 Structure of a USS telegram

A USS telegram comprises a sequence of characters, which are sent in a defined sequence.
Every character within the telegram comprises 11 bits. The sequence of characters of a USS
telegram is shown in the following diagram.
Final
Header information n net data information
STX LGE ADR 1. 2. ::: n BCC
6WDUWGHOD\ 866IUDPH
%LW ELWGDWD %LW %LW

6WDUW 3HYHQ VWRS
Figure 6-5 Structure of a USS telegram

Description
Telegrams with both a variable and fixed length can be used. This can be selected using
parameters p2022 and p2023 to define the length of the PZD and the PKW within the net
data.
STX 1 byte
LGE 1 byte
ADR 1 byte
Net data PKW 8 bytes (4 words: PKE + IND + PWE1 + PWE2)
(example) PZD 4 bytes (2 words: PZD1 + PZD2)
BCC 1 byte
Start delay
The start delay must be maintained before a new master telegram is started.
STX
The STX block is an ASCII character (0x02) and indicates the beginning of a message.
LGE
LGE specifies the number of bytes that following in the telegram. It is defined as the sum of
the following bytes
● Net data
● ADR
● BCC
The actual overall telegram length is two bytes longer because STX and LGE are not
counted in LGE.

ADR
The ADR range contains the address of the slave node (e.g. of the inverter). The individual
bits in the address byte are addressed as follows:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Special Mirror Broadcast 5 Address bits
telegram telegram bit
● Bit 5 broadcast bit

Bit 5 = 0: normal data exchange. Bit 5 = 1: Address (bits 0 … 4) is not evaluated (is not
supported in SINAMICS G120!).
● Bit 6 mirror telegram
Bit 6 = 0: normal data exchange. Bit 6 = 1: The slave returns the telegram unchanged to
the master. Is used to test the bus connection.
● Bit 7 special telegram
Bit 7 = 0: normal data exchange. Bit 7 =1 to transfer telegrams that require a net data
structure different from the device profile.
BCC
BCC (Block Check Character). It is an exclusive OR checksum (XOR) over all telegram
bytes with the exception of the BCC itself.
6.2.2.4 User data range of the USS telegram

The user data range of the USS protocol is used to transmit application data. This comprises
the parameter channel data and the process data (PZD).
The user data occupy the bytes within the USS frame (STX, LGE, ADR, BCC). The size of
the user data can be configured using parameters p2023 and p2022. The structure and
sequence of the parameter channel and process data (PZD) are shown in the figure below.
3URWRFROGDWD 3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO3.: 3URFHVVGDWD3='
3.: 3.: 3.: 3.: 3.:P 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='\
3URWRFROZRUGV
3.( ,1' 3:( 3:( 3:(P 67: +6: 67:

3.:3='VWUXFWXUH =6: +,: =6:
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
'DWDE\WH 3 Q

S S
S S
S YDULDEOHOHQJWK S
Figure 6-6 USS user data structure

The length for the parameter channel is determined by parameter p2023 and the length for
the process data is specified by parameter p2022. If the parameter channel or the PZD is not
required, the appropriate parameters can be set to zero ("PKW only" or "PZD only").
It is not possible to transfer "PKW only" and "PZD only" alternatively. If both channels are
required, they must be transferred together.
6.2.2.5 Data structure of the USS parameter channel

The USS protocol defines for inverters the user data structure via which a master accesses
the slave inverter. The parameter channel is used to read and write parameters in the
inverter.
Parameter channel
You can use the parameter channel with a fixed length of 3 or 4 data words or with a variable
length.
The first data word always contains the parameter identifier (PKE) and the second contains
the parameter index.
The third, fourth and subsequent data words contain parameter values, texts and
descriptions.
Parameter identifier (PKE), 1st word

The parameter identifier (PKE) is always a 16-bit value.
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.( ,1' 3:(
VW QG UGDQGWK
ZRUG ZRUG ZRUG

630
$. 318
Figure 6-7 PKE structure
● Bits 12 to 15 (AK) contain the request or response identifier.

● Bit 11 (SPM) is reserved and always = 0.
● Bits 0 to 10 (PNU) contain parameter numbers 1 … 1999. For parameter numbers
≥ 2000, you must add an offset in the 2nd word of the parameter channel (IND).

The following table includes the request ID for telegrams between the master → inverter.
Table 6- 21 Request identifier (master → inverter)
Request Description Response identifier

identifier Positive Negative
0 No request 0 7
1 Request parameter value 1/2 7
2 Change parameter value (word) 1 7
3 Change parameter value (double word) 2 7
4 Request descriptive element 1) 3 7
6 Request parameter value 1) 2) 4/5 7
7 Change parameter value (word) 1) 2) 4 7
8 Change parameter value (double word) 1) 2) 5 7
2) Identifier 1 is identical to identifier 6, ID 2 is identical to 7, and 3 is identical to 8. We recommend
that you use identifiers 6, 7, and 8.
The following table includes the response ID for telegrams between the inverter → master.
The response ID depends on the request ID.
Table 6- 22 Response identifier (inverter → master)
Response Description
identifier
0 No response
1 Transfer parameter value (word)
2 Transfer parameter value (double word)
3 Transfer descriptive element 1)
4 Transfer parameter value (field, word) 2)
5 Transfer parameter value (field, double word) 2)
6 Transfer number of field elements
7 Request cannot be processed, task cannot be executed (with error number)

If the response ID = 7, then the inverter sends one of the error numbers listed in the
following table in parameter value 2 (PWE2).
Table 6- 23 Error numbers for the response "Request cannot be processed"
No. Description Comments

0 Impermissible parameter number (PNU) Parameter does not exist
1 Parameter value cannot be changed The parameter can only be read
2 Minimum/maximum not achieved or –
exceeded
3 Wrong subindex –
4 No field An individual parameter was addressed with
a field request and subindex > 0
5 Wrong parameter type / wrong data type Confusion of word and double word
6 Setting is not permitted (only resetting) Index is outside the parameter field[]
7 The descriptive element cannot be Description cannot be changed
changed
11 Not in the "master control" mode Change request without "master control" state
12 Keyword missing –
17 Request cannot be processed on account The actual inverter operating state is not
of the operating state compatible with the received request
20 Illegal value Modification access with a value which is
within the value limits but which is illegal for
other permanent reasons (parameter with
defined individual values)
101 Parameter number is currently deactivated Dependent on the operating state of the
inverter
102 Channel width is insufficient Communication channel is too small for
response
104 Illegal parameter value The parameter can only assume certain
values.
106 Request not included / task is not After request identifier 5,11,12,13,14,15
supported
107 No write access with enabled controller The operating state of the inverter prevents a
parameter change
200/201 Changed minimum/maximum not achieved The maximum or minimum can be limited
or exceeded further during operation.
204 The available access authorization does –
not cover parameter changes.

Parameter index (IND)
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.( ,1' 3:(
VW QG UGDQGWK
ZRUG ZRUG ZRUG

3DJHLQGH[ 6XELQGH[,1'
Figure 6-8 Structure of the parameter index (IND)
● For indexed parameters, select the index of the parameter by transferring the appropriate
value between 0 and 254 to the subindex within a job.
● The page index is used to switch over the parameter numbers. Use this byte to add an
offset to the parameter number that is transferred in the 1st word of the parameter
channel (PKE).
Page index: Offset of parameter number

The parameter numbers are assigned to several parameter ranges. The following table
shows which value you must transfer to the page index to achieve a particular parameter
number.
Table 6- 24 Page index setting dependent on parameter range
Parameter range Page index Hex value

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
0000 … 1999 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0x00
2000 … 3999 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0x80
6000 … 7999 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0x90
8000 … 9999 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0x20
10000 … 11999 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0xA0
20000 … 21999 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0x50
30000 … 31999 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0xF0

Parameter value (PWE)

You can vary the number of PWEs using parameter p2023.
Parameter channel with fixed length Parameter channel with variable length
P2023 = 4 P2023 = 127
A parameter channel with fixed length should For a variable length of parameter channel, the
contain 4 words as this setting is sufficient for all master will only send the number of PWEs
parameters (including double words). necessary for the task in the parameter channel.
P2023 = 3 The response telegram is also no longer than
necessary.
You can select this setting if you only want to
read or write 16-bit data or alarm signals.
• 16-bit data: e.g. p0210 supply voltage
• 32-bit data:
Indexed parameter, e.g. p0640[0…n]
Bit parameter, e.g. 722.0...12
The master must always transmit the
permanently set number of words in the
parameter channel. Otherwise the slave will not
respond to the telegram.
When the slave responds it must always respond
with the defined number of words.
Note
8-bit values are transmitted as 16-bit values; the higher-order byte is zero. The fields of 8-bit
values require one PWE per index.
Rules for editing requests/responses

● You can only request one parameter for each telegram sent.
● Each received telegram contains only one response.
● The master must repeat a request until it receives a suitable response.
● Request and response are assigned to one another using the following identifiers:
– Suitable response identifier
– Suitable parameter number
– Suitable parameter index IND, if required
– Suitable parameter value PWE, if necessary
● The master must send the complete request in one telegram. Request telegrams cannot
be split up. The same applies to responses.

6.2.2.6 USS read request
Example: Reading out alarm messages from the inverter.

The parameter channel comprises four words (p2023 = 4). In order to obtain the values of
the indexed parameter r2122, you must fill the telegram of the parameter channel with the
following data:
● Request parameter value (field): Bits 15 … 12 in the PKE word:
● Parameter number without offset: Bits 10 … 0 in the PKE word:
Because you can only code parameter numbers from 1 … 1999 in the PKE, you must
deduct as large an offset as possible, a number divisible by 2000, from the parameter
number, and transfer the result of this calculation to the PKE word.
In our example, this means: 2122 - 2000 = 122 = 7AH
● Offset of the parameter number in the byte page index of the word IND:
for this example: When offset = 2000, this corresponds to a page index value of 0x80
● Index of the parameter in the byte subindex of the word IND:
If you wish to read-out the last alarm, then you must enter index 0, for the third from last,
index 2 (example). You can find a detailed description on the history of the alarm
messages in the Section Alarms (Page 248) .
● Because you want to read the parameter value, words 3 and 4 in the parameter channel
for requesting the parameter value are irrelevant. They should be assigned a value of 0,
for example.
Table 6- 25 Request to read parameter r2122[2]
AK PNU Page index Subindex PWE1(H word) PWE2(L word)
(H byte) (L byte) Drive
Object
15 … 12 11 10 … 0 15 … 8 7…0 15 … 0 15 … 10 9…0
0x6 0 0x7A 0x80 0x02 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000
(dec: 122)

6.2.2.7 USS write job
Example: Define digital input 2 as source for ON/OFF in CDS1

In this case, parameter p0840[1] (source, ON/OFF) must be assigned the value 722.2 (digital
input 2).
The parameter channel comprises four words (p2023 = 4). To change the value of the
indexed parameter P0840, you must fill the telegram of the parameter channel with the
following data:
● Change parameter value (field): Enter bit 15 … 12 in PKE (1st word):
● Parameter number without offset: Enter bit 10 … 0 in PKE (1st word):
As the parameter is < 1999, it can be directly entered without an offset - converted into
hex - in the example 840 = 348H.
● Enter the offset of the parameter number in byte page index of word IND (2nd word):
in this example = 0.
● Enter the index of parameter in the byte subindex of word IND (2nd word):
for this example = 1 (CDS1)
● Enter a new parameter value in PWE1 (Word3):
in the example 722 = 2D2H.
● Drive Object: Enter bit 10 … 15 in PWE2 (4th word):
for SINAMICS G120, always 63 = 3FH
● Index of the parameter: Enter bit 0 … 9 in PWE2 (word4):
in example 2.
Table 6- 26 Request to change p0840[1]
AK PNU Page index Subindex PWE1(H word) PWE2(L word)
(H byte) (L byte) Drive
Object
15 … 12 11 10 … 0 15 … 8 7…0 15 … 0 15 … 10 9…0
0x7 0 0x348 0x0000 0x01 0x2D2 3F 0x0002
(dec: 840) (dec: 722) (fixed)
(dec: 63)

6.2.2.8 USS process data channel (PZD)
Description
Process data (PZD) is exchanged between the master and slave in this telegram range.
Depending on the direction of transfer, the process data channel contains request data for
the slave or response data to the master. The request contains control words and setpoints
for the slaves, while the response contains status words and actual values for the master.
67: +6: 67:
5HTXHVW 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='

WR866VODYH
S
=6: +,: =6:
5HVSRQVH 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='

WR866PDVWHU
S
S
Figure 6-9 Process data channel
The number of PZD words in a USS telegram is defined by parameter p2022. The first two
words are:
● Control 1 (STW1, r0054) and main setpoint (HSW)
● Status word 1 (ZSW1, r0052) and main actual value (HIW)
If P2022 is greater than or the same as 4, the additional control word (STW2, r0055) is
transferred as the fourth PZD word (default setting).
You define the sources of the PZD using parameter p2051.
For further information, please refer to the Parameter Manual.
6.2.2.9 Time-out and other errors

You require the telegram runtimes in order to set the telegram monitoring. The character
runtime is the basis of the telegram runtime:
Table 6- 27 Character runtime
Baud rate in bit/s Transmission time per bit Character run time (= 11 bits)
9600 104.170 µs 1.146 ms
19200 52.084 µs 0.573 ms
38400 26.042 µs 0.286 ms
115200 5.340 µs 0.059 ms

The telegram runtime is longer than just purely adding all of the character runtimes
(=residual runtime). You must also take into consideration the character delay time between
the individual characters of the telegram.
Residual runtime 50% of compressed

(compressed telegram) telegram residual runtime
67; /*( $'5 ::: Q %&&
67; /*( $'5 ::: Q %&&
&KDUDFWHUGHOD\WLPH &KDUDFWHUUXQWLPH
0D[LPXPUHPDLQLQJWHOHJUDPUXQWLPH
Figure 6-10 Telegram runtime as the sum of the residual runtime and character delay times
The total telegram runtime is always less than 150% of the pure residual runtime.
Before each request telegram, the master must maintain the start delay. The start delay
must be > 2 × character runtime.
The slave only responds after the response delay has expired.
67; /*( $'5 ::: Q %&& 67; /*( : : :

5HVSRQVHGHOD\
5HTXHVWIURPPDVWHU 6ODYHUHVSRQVH 5HTXHVWIURP

6WDUWGHOD\
6WDUWGHOD\
WKHPDVWHU
: : : %&& 67; /*( $'5 ::: Q %&&
Figure 6-11 Start delay and response delay
The duration of the start delay must at least be as long as the time for two characters and
depends on the baud rate.
Table 6- 28 Duration of the start delay
Baud rate in bit/s Transmission time per character (= 11 bits) Min. start delay
9600 1.146 ms > 2.291 ms
19200 0.573 ms > 1.146 ms
38400 0.286 ms > 0.573 ms
57600 0.191 ms > 0.382 ms
115200 0.059 ms > 0.117 ms
Note: The character delay time must be shorter than the start delay.

Telegram monitoring of the master

With your USS master, we recommend that the following times are monitored:
• Response delay: Response time of the slave to a request from the master
The response delay must be < 20 ms, but longer than the start delay
• Telegram runtime: Transmission time of the response telegram sent from the slave
Telegram monitoring of the converter

The converter monitors the time between two requests of the master. Parameter p2040
defines the permissible time in ms. If a time p2040 ≠ 0 is exceeded, then the converter
interprets this as telegram failure and responds with fault F01910.
150% of the residual runtime is the guide value for the setting of p2040, i.e. the telegram
runtime without taking into account the character delay times.
For communication via USS, the converter checks bit 10 of the received control word 1. If the
bit is not set when the motor is switched on ("Operation"), then the converter responds with
fault F07220.

6.2.3 Communication over Modbus RTU
Overview of communication using Modbus

The Modbus protocol is a communication protocol with linear topology based on a
master/slave architecture.
Modbus offers three transmission modes:
● Modbus ASCII
Data is transferred in ASCII code. The data can therefore be read directly by humans,
however, the data throughput is lower in comparison to RTU.
● Modbus RTU
Modbus RTU (RTU: Remote Terminal Unit): Data is transferred in binary format and the
data throughput is greater than in ASCII code.
● Modbus TCP
This type of data transmission is very similar to RTU, except that TCP/IP packages are
used to send the data. TCP port 502 is reserved for Modbus TCP. Modbus TCP is
currently undergoing definition as a standard (IEC PAS 62030 (pre-standard)).
The Control Unit supports Modbus RTU as a slave with even parity.
%LW ELWVRIGDWD %LW %LW

6WDUW 3HYHQ VWRS
Communication settings
● Communication using Modbus RTU takes place over the RS485 interface with a
maximum of 247 slaves.
● The maximum cable length is 1200 m (3281 ft).
● Two 100 kΩ resistors are provided to polarize the receive and send cables.
CAUTION
It is not permitted to change over the units!
The "Unit changeover (Page 182)" function is not permissible with this bus system!

6.2.3.1 Setting the address

You can set the inverter's Modbus RTU address using either DIP switches on the Control
Unit or parameter p2021.
Valid Modbus RTU addresses: 1 … 247

Invalid Modbus RTU addresses: 0
The positions and settings of the DIP switches are described in Section Interfaces,
CAUTION
6.2.3.2 Basic settings for communication
P0015 = 21 Macro drive unit
Selecting the I/O configuration
p2030 = 2 Fieldbus protocol selection
2: Modbus
p2020 Fieldbus baud rate
Baud rates from 4800 bit/s to 187500 bit/s can be set for communication, factory
setting = 19200 bit/s.
p2024 Modbus timing (see Section "Baud rates and mapping tables (Page 140)")
• Index 0: Maximum slave telegram processing time:
The time after which the slave must have sent a response to the master.
• Index 1: Character delay time:
Character delay time: Maximum permissible delay time between the individual
characters in the Modbus frame. (Modbus standard processing time for 1.5 bytes).
• Index2: Inter-telegram delay:
Maximum permissible delay time between Modbus telegrams. (Modbus standard
processing time for 3.5 bytes).
p2029 Fieldbus fault statistics
Displays receive faults on the fieldbus interface
p2040 Process data monitoring time
Determines the time after which an alarm is generated if no process data are
transferred.
Note: This time must be adapted depending on the number of slaves and the baud
rate set for the bus (factory setting = 100 ms).

6.2.3.3 Modbus RTU telegram
Description
For Modbus, there is precisely one master and up to 247 slaves. Communication is always
triggered by the master. The slaves can only transfer data at the request of the master.
Slave-to-slave communication is not possible. The Control Unit always operates as slave.
The following figure shows the structure of a Modbus RTU telegram.
0RGEXV5787HOHJUDPP
Initial $SSOLNDWLRQ'DWD8QLW Interframe Interframe $SSOLNDWLRQ'DWD8QLW End pause
pause 0RGEXVIUDPH delay delay 0RGEXVIUDPH
Initial pause $SSOLNDWLRQ'DWD8QLW0RGEXVIUDPH Interframe

delay
3URWRFRO'DWD8QLW3'8
Slave CRC
Function Data
code
2 Byte
≥ 3.5 bytes 1 Byte 1 Byte 0 ... 252 Bytes
CRC low CRC high
Character delay time

≥ 3.5 bytes 1 Byte 1 Byte 1 Byte 1 Byte 1 Byte 1 Byte
Figure 6-12 Modbus with delay times
The data area of the telegram is structured according to the mapping tables.

6.2.3.4 Baud rates and mapping tables
Permissible baud rates and telegram delay

The Modbus RTU telegram requires a pause for the following cases:
● Start detection
● Between the individual frames
● End detection
Minimum duration: Processing time for 3.5 bytes (can be set via p2024[2]).
A character delay time is also permitted between the individual bytes of a frame. Maximum
duration: Processing time for 1.5 bytes (can be set via p2024[1]).
Table 6- 29 Baud rates, transmission times, and delays
Baud rate in bit/s (p2020) Transmission time per Minimum pause Maximum pause
character (11 bits) between two between two bytes
telegrams (p2024[2]) (p2024[1])
4800 2.292 ms ≥ 8.021 ms ≤ 3.438 ms
9600 1.146 ms ≥ 4.010 ms ≤ 1.719 ms
19200 (factory setting) 0.573 ms ≥ 1.75 ms ≤ 0.859 ms
38400 0.286 ms ≥ 1.75 ms ≤ 0.75 ms
57600 0.191 ms ≥ 1.75 ms ≤ 0.556 ms
76800 0.143 ms ≥ 1.75 ms ≤ 0.417 ms
93750 0.117 ms ≥ 1.75 ms ≤ 0.341 ms
115200 0.095 ms ≥ 1.75 ms ≤ 0.278 ms
187500 0.059 ms ≥ 1.75 ms ≤ 0.171 ms
Note
The factory setting for p2024[1] and p2024[2] is 0. The particular values are pre-assigned
depending on the protocol selection (p2030) or the baud rate.
Modbus register and Control Unit parameters

Since the Modbus protocol can only handle register or bit numbers for addressing the
memory, assignment to the appropriate control words, status words and parameters is
performed on the slave side.
The converter supports the following addressing ranges:
Addressing range Remark

40001 … 40065 Compatible with Micromaster MM436
40100 … 40522

The valid holding register addressing range extends from 40001 to 40522. Access to other
holding registers generates the fault "Exception Code".
The registers 40100 to 40111 are described as process data. A telegram monitoring time
can be activated in p2040 for these registers.
Note
R"; "W"; "R/W" in the column Modbus access stands for read (with FC03); write (with FC06);
read/write.
Table 6- 30 Assigning the Modbus register to the parameters of the Control Unit
Modbus Description Modbus Unit Scaling On/Off text Data / parameter

Reg. access factor or value range
No.
Process data
Control data
40100 Control word R/W -- 1 Process data 1
40101 Main setpoint R/W -- 1 Process data 2
Status data
40110 Status word R -- 1 Process data 1
40111 Main actual value R -- 1 Process data 2
Parameter data
Digital outputs
40200 DO 0 R/W -- 1 HIGH LOW p0730, r747.0, p748.0
40201 DO 1 R/W -- 1 HIGH LOW p0731, r747.1, p748.1
40202 DO 2 R/W -- 1 HIGH LOW p0732, r747.2, p748.2
Analog outputs
40220 AO 0 R % 100 -100.0 … 100.0 r0774.0
40221 AO 1 R % 100 -100.0 … 100.0 r0774.1
Digital inputs
40240 DI 0 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.0
40241 DI 1 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.1
40242 DI 2 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.2
40243 DI 3 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.3
40244 DI 4 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.4
40245 DI 5 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.5
Analog inputs
40260 AI 0 R % 100 -300.0 … 300.0 r0755 [0]
40261 AI 1 R % 100 -300.0 … 300.0 r0755 [1]
40262 AI 2 R % 100 -300.0 … 300.0 r0755 [2]
40263 AI 3 R % 100 -300.0 … 300.0 r0755 [3]
Converter identification


No.
40300 Powerstack number R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0200
40301 Converter firmware R -- 0.0001 0.00 … 327.67 r0018
Converter data
40320 Rated power of the power unit R kW 100 0 … 327.67 r0206
40321 Current Limit R/W % 10 10.0 … 400.0 p0640
40322 Rampup time R/W s 100 0.00 … 650.0 p1120
40323 Ramp-down time R/W s 100 0.00 … 650.0 p1121
40324 Reference speed R/W RPM 1 6.000 … 32767 p2000
Converter diagnostics
40340 Speed setpoint R RPM 1 -16250 … r0020
16250
40341 Speed actual value R RPM 1 -16250 … r0022
16250
40342 Output frequency R Hz 100 - 327.68 … r0024
327.67
40343 Output voltage R V 1 0 … 32767 r0025
40344 DC link voltage R V 1 0 … 32767 r0026
40345 Actual value of current R A 100 0 … 163.83 r0027
40346 Actual torque value R Nm 100 - 325.00 … r0031
325.00
40347 Actual active power R kW 100 0 … 327.67 r0032
40348 Energy consumption R kWh 1 0 … 32767 r0039
40349 Control priority R -- 1 HAN AUTO r0807
D
Fault diagnostics
40400 Fault number, Index 0 R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0947 [0]
40408 Alarm number R -- 1 0 …32767 r2110 [0]
40499 PRM ERROR code R -- 1 0 …99 --
Technology controller
40500 Technology controller enable R/W -- 1 0…1 p2200, r2349.0
40501 Technology controller MOP R/W % 100 -200.0 … 200.0 p2240


No.
Technology controller adjustment
40510 Time constant for actual value filter of R/W -- 100 0.00 … 60.0 p2265
the technology controller
40511 Scaling factor for actual value of the R/W % 100 0.00 … 500.00 p2269
technology controller
40512 Proportional amplification of the R/W -- 1000 0.000 … 65.000 p2280
40513 Integral time of the technology R/W s 1 0 … 60 p2285
controller
40514 Time constant D-component of the R/W -- 1 0 … 60 p2274
40515 Max. limit of technology controller R/W % 100 -200.0 … 200.0 p2291
40516 Min. limit technology controller R/W % 100 -200.0 … 200.0 p2292
PID diagnostics
40520 Effective setpoint acc. to internal R % 100 -100.0 … 100.0 r2250
technology controller MOP ramp-
function generator
40521 Actual value of technology controller R % 100 -100.0 … 100.0 r2266
after filter
40522 Output signal technology controller R % 100 -100.0 … 100.0 r2294
6.2.3.5 Write and read access via FC 3 and FC 6
Function codes used

For data exchange between the master and slave, predefined function codes are used for
communication via Modbus.
The Control Unit uses the Modbus function code 03, FC 03, (read holding registers) for
reading and the Modbus function code 06, FC 06, (preset single register) for writing.
Structure of a read request via Modbus function code 03 (FC 03)

All valid register addresses are permitted as a start address. If a register address is invalid,
exception code 02 (invalid data address) is returned. An attempt to read a write-only register
or a reserved register is replied to with a normal telegram in which all values are set to 0.
Using FC 03, it is possible to address more than 1 register with one request. The number of
addressed registers is contained in bytes 4 and 5 of the read request.
Number of registers
If more than 125 registers are addressed, exception code 03 (Illegal data value) is returned.
If the start address plus the number of registers for an address are outside of a defined
register block, exception code 02 (invalid data address) is returned.

Table 6- 31 Structure of a read request for slave number 17
Example
Byte Description
11 h 0 Slave address
03 h 1 Function code
00 h 2 Register start address "High" (register 40110)
6D h 3 Register start address "Low"
00 h 4 No. of registers "High" (2 registers: 40110; 40111)
02 h 5 Number of registers "Low"
xx h 6 CRC "Low"
xx h 7 CRC "High"
The response returns the corresponding data set:
Table 6- 32 Slave response to the read request
Example
Byte Description
04 h 2 No. of bytes (4 bytes are returned)
11 h 3 Data of first register "High"
22 h 4 Data of first register "Low"
33 h 5 Data of second register "High"
44 h 6 Data of second register "Low"
xx h 7 CRC "Low"
xx h 8 CRC "High"
Structure of a write request via Modbus function code 06 (FC 06)

The start address is the holding register address. If an incorrect address is entered (a
holding register address does not exist), exception code 02 (invalid data address) is
returned. An attempt to write to a "read-only" register or a reserved register is replied to with
a Modbus error telegram (Exception Code 4 - device failure). In this instance, the detailed
internal error code that occurred on the last parameter access via the holding registers can
be read out via holding register 40499.
Using FC 06, precisely one register can always be addressed with one request. The value
which is to be written to the addressed register is contained in bytes 4 and 5 of the write
request.

Table 6- 33 Structure of a write request for slave number 17
Example
Byte Description
00 h 2 Register start address "High" (write register 40100)
63 h 3 Register start address "Low"
55 h 4 Register data "High"
66 h 5 Register data "Low"
xx h 6 CRC "Low"
xx h 7 CRC "High"
The response returns the register address (bytes 2 and 3) and the value (bytes 4 and 5) that
was written to the register.
Table 6- 34 Slave response to the write request
Example
Byte Description
00 h 2 Register start address "High"
63 h 3 Register start address "Low"
55 h 4 Register data "High"
66 h 5 Register data "Low"
xx h 6 CRC "Low"
xx h 7 CRC "High"
6.2.3.6 Communication procedure
Procedure for communication in a normal case

Normally, the master sends a telegram to a slave (address range 1 ... 247). The slave sends
a response telegram to the master. This response telegram mirrors the function code, and
the slave enters its own address in the telegram, which enables the master to assign the
slave.
The slave only processes orders and telegrams which are directly addressed to it.
Communication errors
If the slave detects a communication error on receipt (parity, CRC), it does not send a
response to the master (this can lead to "setpoint timeout").

Logical error
If the slave detects a logical error within a request, it responds to the master with an
"exception response". In the response, the highest bit in the function code is set to 1. If the
slave receives, for example, an unsupported function code from the master, the slave
responds with an "exception response" with code 01 (Illegal function code).
Table 6- 35 Overview of exception codes
Exception Modbus name Remark

code
01 Illegal function code An unknown (not supported) function code was sent to the
slave.
02 Illegal Data Address An invalid address was requested.
03 Illegal data value An invalid data value was detected.
04 Server failure Slave has terminated during processing.
Maximum processing time, p2024[0]

For error-free communication, the slave response time (time within which the Modbus master
expects a response to a request) must have the same value in the master and the slave
(p2024[0] in the converter).
Process data monitoring time (setpoint timeout), p2040

The alarm "Setpoint timeout" (F1910) is issued by the Modbus if p2040 is set to a value > 0
ms and no process data are requested within this time period.
The alarm "Setpoint timeout" only applies for access to process data (40100, 40101, 40110,
40111). The alarm "Setpoint timeout" is not generated for parameter data (40200 … 40522).
Note
This time must be adapted depending on the number of slaves and the baud rate set for the
bus (factory setting = 100 ms).

Functions 7
Before you set the inverter functions, you should have completed the following
commissioning steps:
● Commissioning (Page 55)
● If necessary: Adapt terminal strip (Page 89)
● If necessary: Configuring the fieldbus (Page 101)
7.1 Overview of the inverter functions
6HWSRLQWFDOFXODWLRQ ~
6HWSRLQWVRXUFHV
5DPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU =
$QDORJLQSXWV
/LPLWLQJ
)LHOGEXV
)L[HGVHWSRLQWV 0RWRUFRQWURO
0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU 0 =
-RJPRGH 7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU 9IFRQWURO ~
9HFWRUFRQWURO
0
&RPPDQGVRXUFHV 6WDWXV
,QYHUWHUFRQWURO
'LJLWDOLQSXWV 'LJLWDORXWSXWV
)LHOGEXV $QDORJRXWSXWV
,QWHUIDFHV
)LHOGEXV
0RWRUDQGLQYHUWHUSURWHFWLRQ 0DWFKLQJWKHDSSOLFDWLRQ
,QWHUIDFHV
%UDNLQJ
2YHUFXUUHQW
)O\LQJUHVWDUW
2YHUYROWDJH
$XWRPDWLFUHVWDUW
2YHUWHPSHUDWXUH
)UHHIXQFWLRQEORFNV
6\VWHPSURWHFWLRQ
8QLWFKDQJHRYHU
)DLOVDIHFRPPDQGVRXUFHV 6DIHW\IXQFWLRQV
)DLOVDIHGLJLWDOLQSXWV
)DLOVDIHVWDWXV
352),VDIH
352),VDIH
Figure 7-1 Overview of inverter functions

Functions
7.1 Overview of the inverter functions
Functions relevant to all applications Functions required in special applications only

The functions that you require in each application are shown The functions whose parameters you only need to adapt
in a dark color in the function overview above. when actually required are shown in white in the function
You set these functions during the basic commissioning, so overview above.
that in many cases, the motor can be operated without
having to make any additional settings.
Inverter control is responsible for all of the other The production functions avoid overloads and
inverter functions. Among other things, it defines operating states that could cause damage to the
how the inverter responds to external control motor, inverter and driven load. The motor
signals. temperature monitoring, for example, is set
Inverter control (Page 149) here.
Command sources (Page 158)
The command source defines where the control The status messages provide digital and analog
signals are received from to switch on the motor, signals at the Control Unit outputs or via the
e.g. via digital inputs or a fieldbus. fieldbus. Examples include the current speed of
Protection functions (Page 175) the motor or fault message issued by the
inverter.
Status messages (Page 181)
The setpoint source defines how the speed The functions matching the application allow
setpoint for the motor is specified, e.g. via an you to control a motor holding brake or
analog input or a fieldbus. implement a higher-level pressure or
Setpoint sources (Page 159) temperature control using the technology
controller, for example.
Application-specific functions (Page 182)
The setpoint calculation uses a ramp-function The safety functions are used in applications
generator to prevent speed steps occurring and that must fulfill special requirements in terms of
to limit the speed to a permissible maximum functional safety.
value. Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function
Setpoint calculation (Page 166) (Page 220)
The motor closed-loop control ensures that the
motor follows the speed setpoint.
0 Motor control (Page 168)

Functions
7.2 Inverter control

If you are controlling the inverter using digital inputs, you use parameter p0015 during basic
commissioning to define how the motor is switched on and off and how it is changed over
from clockwise to counter-clockwise rotation.
Five different methods are available for controlling the motor. Three of the five methods just
require two control commands (two-wire control). The other two methods require three
control commands (three-wire control).
Table 7- 1 Two-wire control and three-wire control
Behavior of the motor

Control commands Typical
application
&ORFNZLVH 6WRS &RXQWHU 6WRS

URWDWLRQ FORFNZLVH
URWDWLRQ
Two-wire control, method 1 Local control in

0RWRURQRII
1. Switch the motor on and off conveyor
W (ON/OFF1). systems.
5HYHUVLQJ
2. Reverse the motor direction of
W rotation.
0RWRURQRII Two-wire control, method 2 and Traction drives

FORFNZLVH two-wire control, method 3 with control via
URWDWLRQ
W 1. Switch the motor on and off joystick
0RWRURQRII
FRXQWHU (ON/OFF1), clockwise rotation.
FORFNZLVH
W 2. Switch the motor on and off
URWDWLRQ
(ON/OFF1), counter-clockwise
rotation.
(QDEOH
Three-wire control, method 1 Traction drives
PRWRURII 1. Issue enable for switching on motor with control via
W and switch off motor (OFF1). joystick
0RWRURQ
FORFNZLVH 2. Switch on motor (ON), clockwise
URWDWLRQ
W rotation.
0RWRURQ 3. Switch on motor (ON), counter-
FRXQWHU
FORFNZLVH clockwise rotation.
URWDWLRQ W
(QDEOH Three-wire control, method 2 -

PRWRURII 1. Issue enable for switching on motor
W and switch off motor (OFF1).
0RWRURQ
2. Switch on motor (ON).
W 3. Reverse the motor direction of
5HYHUVLQJ
rotation.
W

Functions
7.2.1 Two-wire control: method 1

You switch the motor on and off using a control command (ON/OFF1). while the other
control command reverses the motor direction of rotation.
212))
5HYHUVLQJ W
W
6HWSRLQW
0RWRUVSHHG
&ORFNZLVHURWDWLRQ
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH W
URWDWLRQ
,QYHUWHGVHWSRLQW 2)) 2))
Figure 7-2 Two-wire control, method 1
Table 7- 2 Function table
ON/OFF1 Reversing Function

0 0 OFF1: The motor stops.
1 0 ON: Clockwise rotation of motor.
1 1 ON: Counter-clockwise rotation of motor.
Table 7- 3 Parameter
p0015 = 12 Macro drive unit (factory setting for inverters without PROFIBUS interface)
Controlling the motor using the digital inputs DI 0 DI 1
of the inverter: ON/OFF1 Reversing
Advanced setting
Interconnecting control commands with digital inputs of your choice (DI x).
p0840[0 … n] = 722.x BI: ON/OFF1 (ON/OFF1)
p1113[0 … n] = 722.x BI: Setpoint inversion (reversing)
Example
p0840 = 722.3 DI 3: ON/OFF1.
Also see Section Digital inputs (Page 90).

Functions
7.2.2 Two-wire control, method 2

You switch the motor on and off using a control command (ON/OFF1) and at the same time
select clockwise motor rotation. You also use the other control command to switch the motor
on and off, but in this case you select counter-clockwise rotation for the motor.
The inverter only accepts a new control command when the motor is at a standstill.
212)) &RPPDQGLJQRUHG
&ORFNZLVHURWDWLRQ
W
&RPPDQGLJQRUHG
212))
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH
URWDWLRQ W
2)) 6HWSRLQW 2))
0RWRUVSHHG
&ORFNZLVHURWDWLRQ
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH W
URWDWLRQ
,QYHUWHGVHWSRLQW 2))
ON/OFF1 ON/OFF1 , Function

clockwise counter-
rotation clockwise
rotation
1 1 ON: The motor direction of rotation is based on the signal that
takes on the status "1" first.
p0015 = 17 Macro drive unit
Controlling the motor using the DI 0 DI 1
digital inputs of the inverter: ON/OFF1 clockwise ON/OFF1 , counter-
rotation clockwise rotation
Advanced setting
p3330[0 … n] = 722.x BI: 2-3-WIRE Control Command 1 (ON/OFF1 clockwise rotation)
p3331[0 … n] = 722.x BI: 2-3-WIRE Control Command 2 (ON/OFF1 , counter-clockwise rotation)
Example
p3331 = 722.0 DI 0: ON/OFF1 Counter-clockwise rotation

Functions
7.2.3 Two-wire control, method 3

You switch the motor on and off using a control command (ON/OFF1) and at the same time
select clockwise motor rotation. You also use the other control command to switch the motor
on and off, but in this case you select counter-clockwise rotation for the motor.
Unlike method 2, the inverter will accept the control commands at any time, regardless of the
motor speed.
212))
&ORFNZLVHURWDWLRQ
W
212))
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH
URWDWLRQ W
2)) 6HWSRLQW 2))
0RWRUVSHHG
&ORFNZLVHURWDWLRQ
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH W
URWDWLRQ
ON/OFF1 clockwise ON/OFF1 , counter- Function

Controlling the motor using the DI 0 DI 1
digital inputs of the inverter: ON/OFF1 ON/OFF1 , counter-
clockwise rotation clockwise rotation
Advanced setting
p3330[0 … n] = 722.x BI: 2-3-WIRE Control Command 1 (ON/OFF1 clockwise rotation)
p3331[0 … n] = 722.x BI: 2-3-WIRE Control Command 2 (ON/OFF1 , counter-clockwise rotation)
Example
p3331[0 … n] = 722.2 DI 2: ON/OFF1 Counter-clockwise rotation

Functions
7.2.4 Three-wire control, method 1

With one control command, you enable the two other control commands. You switch the
motor off by canceling the enable (OFF1).
You switch the motor's direction of rotation to clockwise rotation with the positive edge of the
second control command. If the motor is still switched off, switch it on (ON).
You switch the motor's direction of rotation to counter-clockwise rotation with the positive
edge of the third control command. If the motor is still switched off, switch it on (ON).
(QDEOH
2))
&RPPDQGLJQRUHG W
21
&ORFNZLVHURWDWLRQ
W
21
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH
URWDWLRQ W
6HWSRLQW
0RWRUVSHHG
&ORFNZLVHURWDWLRQ
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH W
URWDWLRQ
Figure 7-5 Three-wire control, method 1
Enable/OFF1 ON clockwise ON , counter- Function

0 0 or 1 0 or 1 OFF1: The motor stops.
1 0→1 0 ON: Clockwise rotation of motor.
1 0 0→1 ON: Counter-clockwise rotation of motor.
1 1 1 OFF1: The motor stops.
Controlling the motor DI 0 DI 1 DI 2
using the digital inputs Enable/OFF1 ON clockwise ON , counter-
of the inverter: rotation clockwise rotation
Advanced setting
p3330[0 … n] = 722.x BI: 2-3-WIRE Control Command 1 (enable/OFF1)
p3331[0 … n] = 722.x BI: 2-3-WIRE Control Command 2 (ON clockwise rotation)
p3332[0 … n] = 722.x BI: 2-3-WIRE Control Command 3 (ON , counter-clockwise rotation)
Example
p3332 = 722.0 DI 0: ON Counter-clockwise rotation.

Functions
7.2.5 Three-wire control, method 2

With one control command, you enable the two other control commands. You switch the
motor off by canceling the enable (OFF1).
You switch on the motor with the positive edge of the second control command (ON).
The third control command defines the motor's direction of rotation (reversing).
(QDEOH
2))
&RPPDQGLJQRUHG W
21
W
5HYHUVLQJ
W
6HWSRLQW 2))
0RWRUVSHHG
&ORFNZLVHURWDWLRQ
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH W
URWDWLRQ
,QYHUWHGVHWSRLQW 2))
Figure 7-6 Three-wire control, method 2
Enable/OFF1 ON Reversing Function

0 0 or 1 0 or 1 OFF1: The motor stops.
1 0→1 0 ON: Clockwise rotation of motor.
1 0→1 1 ON: Counter-clockwise rotation of motor.
Controlling the motor using DI 0 DI 1 DI 2
the digital inputs of the Enable/OFF1 ON Reversing
inverter:
Advanced setting
p3330[0 … n] = 722.x BI: 2-3-WIRE Control Command 1 (enable/OFF1)
p3331[0 … n] = 722.x BI: 2-3-WIRE Control Command 2 (ON)
p3332[0 … n] = 722.x BI: 2-3-WIRE Control Command 3 (reversing)
Example
p3331 = 722.0 DI 0: ON.

Functions
7.2.6 Switching over the inverter control (command data set)

In several applications, the inverter must be able to be operated from different, higher-level
control systems.
Example: Switchover from automatic to manual operation

A motor is switched on and off and its speed varied either from a central control system via a
fieldbus or from a local control box.
Command data set (CDS)

This means that you can set the inverter control in various ways and toggle between the
settings. For instance, as described above, the inverter can either be operated via a fieldbus
or via the terminal strip.
The settings in the inverter, which are associated with a certain control type of the inverter,
are known as a command data set.
Example:
Command data set 0: Controlling the inverter via the fieldbus
Command data set 1: Controlling the inverter via terminal strip
~
6HWSRLQWFDOFXODWLRQ =
6HWSRLQWVRXUFHV
0RWRUFRQWURO =
7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU
0
~
0
,QYHUWHUFRQWURO 6WDWXV
,QWHUIDFHV
&RPPDQGVRXUFHV
&'6
&'6
,QWHUIDFHV
0RWRUDQGLQYHUWHUSURWHFWLRQ 0DWFKLQJWKHDSSOLFDWLRQ
)DLOVDIHFRPPDQGVRXUFHV 6DIHW\IXQFWLRQV )DLOVDIHVWDWXV
Figure 7-7 Command data sets (CDS): Different setting of the inverter control

Functions
You select the command data set using parameter p0810. To do this, you must interconnect
parameter p0810 with a control command of your choice, e.g. a digital input.
&RPPDQGGDWDVHW
3DUDPHWHUZLWKLQGH[>@
&RQWUROZRUG p0840[0]
212))
%LW r2090.0

,QYHUWHU
p2103[0]
$FNQRZOHGJH FRQWURO
352),%86 r2090.7

p0854[0]
&RQWURO3/&
r2090.10

&'6 7RWKH
p1036[0] LQYHUWHU
023GRZQ
r2090.14 IXQFWLRQV

&RPPDQGGDWDVHW
3DUDPHWHUZLWKLQGH[>@
p1055[1]
-RJ
'LJLWDOLQSXW r722.0 ,QYHUWHU
p1056[1] FRQWURO
-RJ
'LJLWDOLQSXW r722.1
p2103[1]
$FNQRZOHGJH
'LJLWDOLQSXW r722.2 &'6
p0810
&RPPDQGGDWDVHWVHOHFWLRQ
'LJLWDOLQSXW r722.3
Figure 7-8 Example for the various command data sets
You obtain the interconnection as in the example above, if you configured the interfaces of
the inverter with p0015 = 7 in the basic commissioning, also see Section Select interface
assignments (Page 46).
An overview of all the parameters that belong to the command data sets is provided in the
List Manual.
Note
It takes approximately 4 ms to toggle between command data sets.

Functions
Advanced settings
If you require more than two command data sets, then define the number of command data
sets (2, 3 or 4) using parameter p0170.
Table 7- 12 Defining the number of command data sets
p0010 = 15 Drive commissioning: Data sets
p0170 Number of command data sets (factory setting: 2)
P0170 = 2, 3 or 4
p0010 = 0 Drive commissioning: Ready
r0050 Displaying the number of the CDS that is currently active
You require two bits to be able to make a clear selection for more than two command data
sets.
Table 7- 13 Selecting a command data set
p0810 Command data set selection CDS bit 0
p0810 Command data set selection CDS bit 1
r0050 Displaying the number of the CDS that is currently active
A copy function is available making it easier to commission more than one command data
set.
Table 7- 14 Parameters for copying the command data sets
P0809[0] Number of the command data set to be copied (source)
P0809[1] Number of the command data set to which the data is to be copied (target)
P0809[2] = 1 Copying is started
Once copying has been completed, the inverter sets p0809[2] to 0.

Functions
7.3 Command sources
7.3 Command sources

The command source is the interface via which the inverter receives its control commands.
When commissioning, you define this using macro 15 (p0015).
Note
The "Get master control" or "Manual/Auto changeover" function can also be used to specify
commands and setpoints via STARTER or the Operator Panel.
Change command source

If you subsequently change the command source using macro 15, then you must carry out
commissioning again.
You also have the option to adapt the pre-assignment - which you selected using macro 15 -
to the requirements of your particular system. You can obtain detailed information about this
in the Sections Adapt terminal strip (Page 89) andConfiguring the fieldbus (Page 101).

Functions
7.4 Setpoint sources

The setpoint source is the interface via which the inverter receives its setpoint. The following
options are available:
● Motorized potentiometer simulated in the inverter.
● Inverter analog input.
● Setpoints saved in the inverter:
– Fixed setpoints
– Jog
● Inverter fieldbus interface.
Depending on the parameterization, the setpoint in the inverter has one of the following
meanings:
● Speed setpoint for the motor.
● Torque setpoint for the motor.
● Setpoint for a process variable.
The inverter receives a setpoint for a process variable, e.g. the level of liquid in a
container, and calculates its speed setpoint using the internal technology controller.
7.4.1 Analog input as setpoint source

If you use an analog input as setpoint source, then you must adapt this analog input to the
type of connected signal (± 10 V, 4 … 20 mA, …). Additional information is available in
Section Analog inputs (Page 94).
Procedure
You have two options for interconnecting the setpoint source with an analog input:
1. Using p0015, select a configuration that is suitable for your application.
Please refer to the section titled Select interface assignments (Page 46) to find out which
configurations are available for your inverter.
2. Interconnect main setpoint p1070 with an analog input of your choice.
Table 7- 15 Analog inputs as setpoint source
Parameter Setpoint source

r0755[0] Analog input 0
r0755[1] Analog input 1
Example: You interconnect analog input 0 as the setpoint source with p1070 = 755[0].

Functions
7.4.2 Motorized potentiometer as setpoint source

The 'motorized potentiometer' (MOP) function simulates an electromechanical potentiometer
for entering setpoints. You can continuously adjust the motorized potentiometer (MOP) using
the control signals "raise" and "lower". The control signals are received via the digital inputs
of the inverter or from the operator panel that has been inserted.
Typical applications
● Entering the speed setpoint during the commissioning phase.
● Manual operation of the motor should the higher-level control fail.
● Entering the speed setpoint after changeover from automatic operation to manual
operation.
● Applications with largely constant setpoint and without higher-level control.
Principle of operation
212))
023XS W
3
023GRZQ W
3
W
023U
QPD[3
3 3 2))GRZQUDPS

QPD[3
Figure 7-9 Function chart of motorized potentiometer
Motorized potentiometer parameters
Table 7- 16 Basic setup of motorized potentiometer
p1047 MOP ramp-up time (factory setting 10 s)
p1048 MOP ramp-down time (factory setting 10 s)
p1040 Start value of MOP (factory setting 0 rpm)
Determines the start value [rpm] that becomes effective when the motor is switched
on

Functions
Table 7- 17 Extended setup of motorized potentiometer
p1030 Configuration of the MOP, parameter value with four independently adjustable bits
00 to 03 (factory setting 00110 bin)
Bit 00: Save setpoint after switching off motor
0: After the motor is switched on, p1040 is specified as the setpoint
1: Setpoint is saved after the motor is switched off and set to the saved value once it
is switched on
Bit 01: Configure ramp-function generator in automatic mode (1-signal via BI: p1041)
0: No ramp-function generator in automatic mode (ramp-up/-down time = 0)
1: With ramp-function generator in automatic mode
In manual mode (0-signal via BI: p1041) the ramp-function generator is always active
Bit 02: Configure initial rounding
0: No initial rounding
1: With initial rounding. The initial rounding is a sensitive way of specifying small
setpoint changes (progressive reaction when keys are pressed).
Bit 03: Store setpoint in power-independent manner
0: No power-independent saving
1: Setpoint is saved in the event of a power failure (bit 00 = 1)
Bit 04: Ramp-function generator always active
0: Setpoint is only calculated with enabled pulses
1: Setpoint is calculated independent of the pulse enable (this setting is required if the
energy-saving mode has been selected).
p1035 Signal source to increase setpoint (factory setting 0)
Automatically pre-assigned during commissioning, e.g. with the button on the
Operator Panel
p1036 Signal source to reduce setpoint (factory setting 0)
Automatically pre-assigned during commissioning, e.g. with the button on the
operator panel
p1037 Maximum setpoint (factory setting 0 rpm)
Automatically pre-assigned during commissioning
p1038 Minimum setpoint (factory setting 0 rpm)
Automatically pre-assigned during commissioning
p1039 Signal source to invert minimum and maximum setpoints (factory setting 0)
p1044 Signal source for set value (factory setting 0)
For more information about the motorized potentiometer, see the List Manual (function
diagram 3020 and the parameter list).
Interconnecting the motorized potentiometer with the setpoint source

You have two options for interconnecting the motorized potentiometer with the setpoint
source:
2. Interconnect the main setpoint with the motorized potentiometer by setting p1070 to
1050.

Functions
Example of parameterization of the motorized potentiometer
Table 7- 18 Implementing a motorized potentiometer using digital inputs
p0015 = 9 Macro drive unit: Configure inverter on MOP as the setpoint source
• The motor is switched on and off via digital input 0.
• The MOP setpoint is increased via digital input 1.
• The MOP setpoint is decreased via digital input 2.
p1040 = 1 MOP start value
0 Each time the motor is switched on a setpoint corresponding to 10 rpm is specified
p1047 = 5 MOP ramp-up time:
The MOP setpoint is increased from zero to maximum (p1082) in 5 seconds
p1048 = 5 MOP ramp-down time:
The MOP setpoint is reduced from maximum (p1082) to zero in 5 seconds
7.4.3 Fixed speed as setpoint source

In many applications after switching on the motor, all that is needed is to run the motor at a
constant speed or to switch between different speeds. Examples of this simplified
specification of speed setpoint are:
● Conveyor belt with two different speeds.
● Grinding machine with different speeds corresponding to the diameter of the grinding
wheel.
If you use the technology controller in the inverter, then you can enter process variables that
remain constant over time using a fixed setpoint, e.g.:
● Closed-loop control of a constant flow with a pump.
● Closed-loop control of a constant temperature using a fan.
Procedure
You can set up to 16 various fixed setpoints and select these either via digital inputs or the
fieldbus. The fixed setpoints are defined using parameters p1001 to p1004 and can be
assigned to the corresponding command sources (e.g. the digital inputs) using parameters
p1020 to p1023.

Functions
The various fixed setpoints can be selected in two ways:

1. Direct selection:
Precisely one fixed speed setpoint is assigned to each selection signal (e.g. a digital
input). As several selection signals are selected, the associated fixed speed setpoints are
added together to from a total setpoint.
Direct selection is particularly well suited to controlling the motor using the inverter's
digital inputs.
2. Binary selection:
Precisely one fixed speed setpoint is assigned to each possible combination of selection
signals.
Binary selection should preferably be used with a central control and when linking the
inverter to a fieldbus.
Table 7- 19 Parameters for direct selection of fixed setpoints
p1016 = 1 Direct selection of fixed setpoints (factory setting)
p1001 Fixed setpoint 1Factory setting: 0 rpm)
p1020 Signal source for selection of fixed setpoint 1 (factory setting: 722.3, i.e. selection via
digital input 3)
digital input 4)
digital input 5)
p1023 Signal source for selection of fixed setpoint 4 (factory setting: 0, i e. selection is locked)
Table 7- 20 Function diagram of direct selection of fixed setpoints
Fixed setpoint selected by BICO interconnection of The resultant fixed setpoint corresponds
selection signals (example) to the parameter values of …
Digital input 3 (DI 3) p1020 = 722.3 p1001
DI 3 and DI 4 p1001 + p1002
DI 3 and DI 5 p1001 + p1003
DI 3, DI 4 and DI 5 p1001 + p1002 + p1003
DI 3, DI 4, DI 5 and DI 6 p1001 + p1002 + p1003 + p1004
You will find further information about the fixed setpoints and binary selection in function
block diagrams 3010 and 3011 in the List Manual.

Functions
Example: Selecting two fixed speed setpoints using digital input 2 and digital input 3
The motor is to run at two different speeds:
● The motor is switched on with digital input 0
● When digital input 2 is selected, the motor is to run at a speed of 300 rpm.
● When digital input 3 is selected, the motor is to accelerate to a speed of 2000 rpm.
● When digital input 1 is selected, the motor should go into reverse
Table 7- 21 Parameter settings for the example
p0015 = 12 Macro drive unit: Configure inverter with terminal strip as the command and
setpoint source.
• The motor is switched on and off via digital input 0.
• The setpoint source is analog input 0.
p1001 = 300.000 Defines the fixed setpoint 1 in [rpm]
p1002 = 2000.000 Defines the fixed setpoint 2 in [rpm]
p1016 = 1 Direct selection of fixed setpoints
p1020 = 722.2 Interconnection of fixed setpoint 2 with DI 2.
r0722.2 = parameter that displays the status of digital input 2.
p1021 = 722.3 Interconnection of fixed setpoint 3 with status of DI 3.
r0722.3 = parameter that displays the status of digital input 3.
p1070 = 1024 Interconnect main setpoint with fixed speed setpoint
7.4.4 Running the motor in jog mode (JOG function)

Using the "jog" function (JOG function), you can switch the motor on and off using a control
command or the operator panel. The speed to which the motor accelerates for "Jog" can be
set.
The motor must be switched-off before you issue the "jog" control command. "Jog" has no
effect when the motor is switched on.
The "Jog" function is typically used to manually switch-on a motor after switching over from
automatic to manual operation.
Setting jogging
The "Jog" function has two different speed setpoints, e.g. for motor counter-clockwise
rotation and clockwise rotation.
With an operator panel, you can always select the "Jog" function. If you wish to use
additional digital inputs as control commands, you must interconnect the particular signal
source with a digital input.

Functions
Table 7- 22 Parameters for the "Jog" function
p1055 Signal source for jogging 1 - jog bit 0 (factory setting: 0)
If you wish to jog via a digital input, then set p1055 = 722.x
p1056 Signal source for jogging 2 - jog bit 1 (factory setting: 0)
If you wish to jog via a digital input, then set p1056 = 722.x
p1058 Jogging 1 speed setpoint (factory setting, 150 rpm)
p1059 Jogging 2 speed setpoint (factory setting, 150 rpm)
7.4.5 Specifying the motor speed via the fieldbus

If you enter the setpoint via a fieldbus, you must connect the inverter to a higher-level
control. For additional information, see chapter Configuring the fieldbus (Page 101).
Interconnecting the fieldbus with the setpoint source

You have two options for using the fieldbus as the setpoint source:
2. Interconnect main setpoint p1070 with the fieldbus.
Table 7- 23 Fieldbus as setpoint source
Parameter Setpoint source

r2050[x] Receive word no. x from RS485 interface
r2090[x] Receive word no. x from PROFIBUS interface

Functions
7.5 Setpoint calculation

The setpoint processing modifies the speed setpoint, e.g. it limits the setpoint to a maximum
and minimum value and using the ramp-function generator prevents the motor from
executing speed steps.
3RVLWLYH 5DPSXS 5DPS

/LPLWDWLRQ WLPH GRZQWLPH
6SHHGVHWSRLQWIURP 6SHHGVHWSRLQWIRU
VHWSRLQWVRXUFH PRWRUFRQWURO
5DPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
QHJDWLYH
/LPLWDWLRQ
Figure 7-10 Setpoint processing in the inverter
7.5.1 Minimum speed and maximum speed

The speed setpoint is limited by both the minimum and maximum speed.
When the motor is switched on, it accelerates to the minimum speed regardless of the speed
setpoint. The set parameter value applies to both directions of rotation. Beyond its limiting
function, the minimum speed serves as a reference value for a series of monitoring
functions.
The speed setpoint is limited to the maximum speed in both directions of rotation. The
inverter generates a message (fault or alarm) when the maximum speed is exceeded.
The maximum speed also acts as an important reference value for various functions (e.g. the
ramp-function generator).
Table 7- 24 Parameters for minimum and maximum speed
P1080 Minimum speed
P1082 Maximum speed

Functions
7.5.2 Ramp-function generator

The ramp-function generator in the setpoint channel limits the speed of changes to the
speed setpoint. The ramp-function generator does the following:
● The soft acceleration and braking of the motor reduces the stress on the mechanical
system of the driven machine.
● Acceleration and braking distance of the driven machine (e.g. a conveyor belt) are
independent of the motor load.
Ramp-up/down time
The ramp-up and ramp-down times of the ramp- Q

QPD[
function generator can be set independently of each 3
other. The times that you select depend purely on 6HWSRLQW
the application in question and can range from just
a few 100 ms (e.g. for belt conveyor drives) to
several minutes (e.g. for centrifuges).
W
When the motor is switched on/off via ON/OFF1, 3 3
the motor also accelerates/decelerates in

accordance with the times set in the ramp-function
generator.
Ramp-up time (p1120)

Duration of acceleration (in seconds) from zero speed to the maximum speed P1082
Ramp-down time (P1121)

Duration of deceleration (in seconds) from the maximum speed P1082 to standstill
The quick-stop function (OFF3) has a separate ramp-down time, which is set with P1135.
Note
If the ramp-up/down times are too short, the motor accelerates/decelerates with the
maximum possible torque and the set times will be exceeded.
For more information about this function, see the List Manual (function diagram 3060 and the
parameter list).
Extended ramp-function generator

In the extended ramp-function generator, the acceleration process can be made "softer"
using initial and final rounding via parameters p1130 … p1134. Here, the ramp-up and ramp-
down times of the motor are increased by the rounding times.
Rounding does not affect the ramp-down time in the event of a quick stop (OFF3).
For more information, see the List Manual (the parameter list and function diagram 3070).

Functions
7.6 Motor control
7.6 Motor control

For induction motors, there are two different open-loop control or closed-loop control
0 techniques:
● Open-loop control with V/f-characteristic (V/f control)
● Field-oriented control (vector control)
Criteria for selecting either V/f control or vector control

V/f control is perfectly suitable for almost any application in which the speed of induction
motors is to be changed. Examples of typical applications for V/f control include:
● Pumps
● Fans
● Compressors
● Horizontal conveyors
Commissioning vector control takes more time than when commissioning V/f control. When
compared to V/f control, vector control offers the following advantages:
● The speed is more stable for motor load changes.
● Shorter accelerating times when the setpoint changes.
● Acceleration and braking are possible with an adjustable maximum torque.
● Improved protection of the motor and the driven machine as a result of the adjustable
torque limiting.
● The full torque is possible at standstill.
● Torque control is only possible with vector control.
Examples of typical applications in which vector control is used:
● Hoisting gear and vertical conveyors
● Winders
● Extruders
It is not permissible to use vector control in the following cases:

● If the motor is too small in comparison to the inverter (the rated motor power may not be
less than one quarter of the rated inverter power)
● If several motors are connected to one inverter
● If a power contactor is used between the inverter and motor and is opened while the
motor is powered up
● If the maximum motor speed exceeds the following values:
Inverter pulse frequency 2 kHz 4 kHz and higher

Pole number of the motor 2-pole 4-pole 6-pole 2-pole 4-pole 6-pole
Maximum motor speed [rpm] 9960 4980 3320 14400 7200 4800

Functions
7.6 Motor control
7.6.1 V/f control

V/f control sets the voltage at the motor terminals on the basis of the specified speed
setpoint. The relationship between the speed setpoint and stator voltage is calculated using
characteristic curves. The required output frequency is calculated on the basis of the speed
setpoint and the number of pole pairs of the motor (f = n * number of pole pairs / 60, in
particular: fmax = p1082 * number of pole pairs / 60). The inverter provides the two most
important characteristics (linear and square-law). User-defined characteristic curves are also
supported.
V/f control is not a high-precision method of controling the speed of the motor. The speed
setpoint and the speed of the motor shaft are always slightly different. The deviation
depends on the motor load. If the connected motor is loaded with the rated torque, the motor
speed is below the speed setpoint by the amount of the rated slip. If the load is driving the
motor (i.e. the motor is operating as a generator), the motor speed is above the speed
setpoint.
The characteristic is selected during commissioning, using p1300.
7.6.1.1 V/f control with linear and square-law characteristic
V/f control with linear characteristic (p1300 = 0):
Mainly used in applications in which the motor torque 8

must be independent of the motor speed. Examples of 8RXWSXWPD[
such applications include horizontal conveyors or U
compressors.
IPD[ I
V/f control with parabolic characteristic (p1300 = 2)
Used in applications in which the motor torque 8

increases with the motor speed Examples of such 8RXWSXWPD[
applications include pumps and fans. U
V/f control with square-law characteristic reduces the

losses in the motor and inverter due to lower currents
than when a linear characteristic is used.
IPD[ I
Note
V/f control with a square-law characteristic must not be used in applications in which a high
torque is required at low speeds.

Functions
7.6 Motor control
7.6.1.2 Additional characteristics for the V/f control

In addition to linear and square-law characteristics, there are the following additional
versions of the V/f control that are suitable for special applications.
Linear V/f characteristic with Flux Current Control (FCC) (P1300 = 1)

Voltage losses across the stator resistance are automatically compensated. This is
particularly useful for small motors since they have a relatively high stator resistance. The
prerequisite is that the value of the stator resistance in P350 is parameterized as accurately
as possible.
V/f control with parameterizable characteristic (p1300 = 3)
Variable V/f characteristic that supports the 8

torque response of synchronous motors
8RXWSXWPD[
(SIEMOSYN motors). U
8S
8S
8S
8S
U
IS IPD[ I
IS
IS
IS
Linear V/f characteristic with ECO (p1300 = 4), quadratic V/f characteristic with ECO (p1300 = 7)
ECO mode is suitable for applications with a low dynamic response and constant speed
setpoint, and allows energy savings of up to 40%.
When the setpoint is reached and remains unchanged for 5 s, the inverter automatically
reduces its output voltage to optimize the motor's operating point. ECO mode is deactivated
in the event of setpoint changes or if the inverter's DC-link voltage is too high or too low.
In ECO mode set the slip compensation (P1335) to 100 %. In the event of minor fluctuations
in the setpoint, you have to raise the ramp-function generator tolerance using p1148.
Note: Sudden load variations can cause the motor to stall.

Functions
7.6 Motor control
V/f control for drives requiring a precise frequency (textile industry) (p1300 = 5),
V/f control for drives requiring a precise frequency and FCC (p1300 = 6)
These characteristics require the motor speed to remain constant under all circumstances.
This setting has the following effects:
● When the maximum current limit is reached, the stator voltage is reduced but not the
speed.
● Slip compensation is locked.
For more information about this function, see function diagram 6300 in the List Manual.
V/f control with independent voltage setpoint

The interrelationship between the frequency and voltage is not calculated in the inverter, but
is specified by the user. With BICO technology, P1330 defines the interface via which the
voltage setpoint is entered (e.g. analog input → P1330 = 755).
7.6.1.3 Optimizing with a high break loose torque and brief overload
The ohmic losses in the motor stator resistance and the motor cable play a more significant
role the smaller the motor and the lower the motor speed. You can compensate for these
losses by raising the V/f characteristic.
There are also applications where the motor temporarily needs more than its rated current in
the lower speed range or during acceleration in order to adhere to the speed setpoint.
Examples of such applications are:
● Driven machines with a high break loose torque
● Utilizing the brief overload capability of the motor when accelerating
Voltage increase in V/f control (boost)
Voltage losses resulting from long motor cables 8

and the ohmic losses in the motor are
8RXWSXWPD[
compensated for using parameter p1310. An U
increased break loose torque when starting and 3
3
accelerating is compensated using parameter
p1312 and/or p1311.
The voltage boost is active for every
characteristic type of the V/f control. The figure 3
opposite shows the voltage boost using the

example of a linear V/f characteristic. IPD[ I

Functions
7.6 Motor control
Note
Only increase the voltage boost in small steps until satisfactory motor behavior is reached.
Excessively high values in p1310 ... p1312 can cause the motor to overheat and switch off
(trip) the inverter due to overcurrent .
Table 7- 25 Optimizing the starting characteristics for a linear characteristic
P1310 Permanent voltage boost (factory setting 50 %)
The voltage boost is active from standstill up to the rated speed.
It is at its highest at speed 0 and continually decreases as the speed increases.
Value of voltage boost at zero speed in V:
1.732 × rated motor current (p0305) × stator resistance (r0395) × p1310 / 100 %.
P1311 Voltage boost on acceleration
The voltage boost on acceleration is independent of speed and occurs when the setpoint
is increased. It disappears as soon as the setpoint is reached.
Value in V: 1.732 × rated motor current (p0305) × stator resistance (r0395) x p1311 /
100 %
P1312 Voltage boost at start up
The voltage boost at start-up results in an additional voltage boost when accelerating,
but only the first time the motor accelerates after it has been switched on.
The voltage boost in V is: 1.732 x rated motor current (p0305) × stator resistance (r0395)
x p1312 / 100%
You will find more information about this function in the parameter list and in function
diagram 6300 of the List Manual.

Functions
7.6 Motor control
7.6.2 Vector control
7.6.2.1 Properties of vector control

Using a motor model, the vector control calculates the load and the motor slip. As a result of
this calculation, the inverter controls its output voltage and frequency so that the motor
speed follows the setpoint, independent of the motor load.
Vector control is possible without directly measuring the motor speed. This closed-loop
control is also known as sensorless vector control.
7.6.2.2 Commissioning vector control

Vector control only functions error-free if, during the basic commissioning, the motor data
were correctly parameterized and a motor data identification was performed with the motor in
the cold state.
You can find the basic commissioning in the following sections:
● Commissioning with the BOP-2 (Page 66)
● Commissioning with STARTER (Page 71)
Optimizing vector control

● Carry out the automatic speed controller optimization using (p1960 = 1)
Table 7- 26 The most important vector control parameters
P1300 = 20 Control type: Vector control without speed encoder
p0300 … Motor data is transferred from the rating plate during basic commissioning and
p0360 calculated with the motor data identification
p1452 … Speed controller parameters
p1496
p1511 Additional torque
p1520 Upper torque limit
p1521 Lower torque limit
p1530 Motoring power limit
p1531 Regenerative power limit
Additional information about this function is provided in the parameter list and in function
diagrams 6030 onwards in the List Manual.
You will find more information On the Internet:
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/7494205):

Functions
7.6 Motor control
7.6.2.3 Torque control

Torque control is part of the vector control and normally receives its setpoint from the speed
controller output. By deactivating the speed controller and directly entering the torque
setpoint, the closed-loop speed control becomes closed-loop torque control. The inverter
then no longer controls the motor speed, but the torque that the motor generates.
Typical applications for torque control

The torque control is used in applications where the motor speed is specified by the
connected driven load. Examples of such applications include:
● Load distribution between master and slave drives:
The master drive is speed controlled, the slave drive is torque controlled.
● Winding machines
Commissioning the torque control

The torque control only functions error-free if, during the basic commissioning, you correctly
parameterized the motor data and performed the motor data identification with the motor in
the cold state.
You can find the basic commissioning in the following sections:
● Commissioning with the BOP-2 (Page 66)
● Commissioning with STARTER (Page 71)
Table 7- 27 The most important torque control parameters
P1300 = … Control type:
20: Vector control without speed encoder
22: Torque control without speed encoder
P0300 … Motor data is transferred from the rating plate during basic commissioning and
P0360 calculated with the motor data identification
P1511 = … Additional torque
P1520 = … Upper torque limit
P1521 = … Lower torque limit
P1530 = … Motoring power limit
P1531 = … Regenerative power limit
Additional information about this function is provided in the parameter list and in function
diagrams 6030 onwards in the List Manual.

Functions
7.7 Protection functions

The frequency inverter offers protective functions against overtemperature and overcurrent
for both the frequency inverter as well as the motor. Further, the frequency inverter protects
itself against an excessively high DC link voltage when the motor is regenerating.
7.7.1 Inverter temperature monitoring

The inverter temperature is essentially determined by the resistive losses of the output
current and the switching losses which occur when pulsing the Power Module. The inverter
temperature falls when either the output current or the pulse frequency of the Power Module
is reduced.
I2t monitoring (A07805 - F30005)

The Power Module's I2t monitoring controls the inverter utilization by means of a current
reference value. The utilization is specified in r0036 [%].
Monitoring the chip temperature of the power unit (A05006 - F30024)

The temperature difference between the power chip (IGBT) and heat sink is monitored using
A05006 and F30024. The measured values are specified in r0037[1] [°C].
Heat sink monitoring (A05000 - F30004)

The power unit heat sink temperature is monitored using A05000 and F30004. The values
are specified in r0037[0] [°C].
Inverter response
P0290 Power unit overload response
(factory setting for SINAMICS G120 inverters with Power Module PM260: 0;
factory setting for all of the inverters: 2)
Setting the reaction to a thermal overload of the power unit:
0: Reduce output current (in vector control mode) or speed (in V/f mode)
1: No reduction, shutdown when overload threshold is reached (F30024)
2: Reduce pulse frequency and output current (in vector control mode) or pulse
frequency and speed (in V/f mode)
3: Reduce pulse frequency
P0292 Power unit temperature warning threshold (factory setting: Heat sink [0] 5°C, power
semiconductor [1] 15°C)
The value is set as a difference to the shutdown temperature.

Functions
7.7.2 Motor temperature monitoring using a temperature sensor

You can use one of the following sensors to protect the motor against overtemperature:
● PTC sensor
● KTY 84 sensor
● ThermoClick sensor
The motor's temperature sensor is connected to the Control Unit.
Temperature measurement via PTC

The PTC sensor is connected to terminals 14 and 15.
● Overtemperature: The threshold value to switch over to an alarm or fault is 1650 Ω. After
the PTC responds, alarm A07910 or shutdown with fault F07011 is initiated
corresponding to the setting in p0610.
● Short-circuit monitoring: Resistance values < 20 Ω indicate a temperature sensor short-
circuit
Temperature measurement using KTY 84

The device is connected to terminals 14 (anode) and 15 (cathode) in the forward direction of
the diode. The measured temperature is limited to between -48 °C and +248°C and is made
available for further evaluation.
● When the alarm threshold is reached (set via p0604; factory setting: 130 °C), alarm
A7910 is triggered. Response -> p0610)
● Fault F07011 is output (depending on the setting in p0610) if
– the fault threshold temperature (settable in p0605) is reached
– the alarm threshold temperature (settable in p0604) is reached and is still present after
the delay time as expired.
Wire-break and short-circuit monitoring via KTY 84

● Wire break: Resistance value > 2120 Ω
● Short circuit: Resistance value < 50 Ω
As soon as a resistance outside this range is measured, A07015 "Alarm temperature sensor
fault" is activated and after the delay time expires, F07016 "Motor temperature sensor fault"
is output.
Temperature monitoring via ThermoClick sensor

The ThermoClick sensor responds at values ≥100 Ω. After the ThermoClick sensors has
responded, either alarm A07910 or shutdown with fault F07011 is initiated corresponding to
the setting in p0610.

Functions
Parameters to set the motor temperature monitoring with sensor
Table 7- 28 Parameters for detecting the motor temperature via a temperature sensor
P0335 Specify the motor cooling
0: Self-ventilated - with fan on the motor shaft (IC410* or IC411*) - (factory setting)
1: Forced ventilation - with a separately driven fan (IC416*)
2: Self-ventilated and inner cooling* (open-circuit air cooled)
3: Forced ventilated and inner cooling* (open-circuit air cooled)
P0601 Motor temperature sensor type Terminal no.
0: No sensor (factory setting) 14 PTC+
1: PTC thermistor (→ P0604) KTY anode
2: KTY84 (→ P0604) ThermoClick
4: ThermoClick sensor
15 PTC-
KTY cathode
ThermoClick
P0604 Motor temperature alarm threshold (factory setting 130 °C)
The alarm threshold is the value at which the inverter is either shut down or Imax is
reduced (P0610)
P0605 Motor temperature fault threshold (Factory setting: 145 °C)
P0610 Motor overtemperature response
Determines the response when the motor temperature reaches the alarm threshold.
0: No motor response, only an alarm
1: Alarm and reduction of Imax (factory setting)
reduces the output speed
2: Fault message and shutdown (F07011)
P0640 Current limit (input in A)
*According to EN 60034-6

Functions
7.7.3 Protecting the motor by calculating the motor temperature

The temperature calculation is only possible in the vector control mode (P1300 ≥ 20) and
functions by calculating a thermal motor model.
Table 7- 29 Parameter to sense the temperature without using a temperature sensor
Parameters Description
P0621 = 1 Motor temperature measurement after restarting
0: No temperature measurement (factory setting)
1: Temperature measurement after the motor is switched on for the first time
2: Temperature measurement each time that the motor is switched on
P0622 Magnetization time of the motor for temperature measurement after starting (set
automatically as the result of motor data identification)
P0625 = 20 Ambient motor temperature
Enter the ambient motor temperature in°C at the instant that the motor data is
acquired (factory setting: 20°C).
The difference between the motor temperature and motor environment (P0625) must
lie within a tolerance range of approx. ± 5 °C.
7.7.4 Overcurrent protection

During vector control, the motor current remains within the torque limits set there.
During U/f control, the maximum current controller (Imax controller) protects the motor and
inverter against overload by limiting the output current.
Method of operation of Imax controller

If an overload situation occurs, the speed and stator voltage of the motor are reduced until
the current is within the permissible range. If the motor is in regenerative mode, i.e. it is
being driven by the connected machine, the Imax controller increases the speed and stator
voltage of the motor to reduce the current.
Note
The inverter load is only reduced if the motor torque decreases at lower speeds (e.g. for
fans).
In the regenerative mode, the current only decreases if the torque decreases at a higher
speed.

Functions
Settings
You only have to change the factory settings of the Imax controller if the drive tends to
oscillate when it reaches the current limit or it is shut down due to overcurrent.
Table 7- 30 Imax controller parameters
P0305 Rated motor current
P0640 Motor current limit
P1340 Proportional gain of the Imax controller for speed reduction
P1341 Integral time of the Imax controller for speed reduction
r0056.13 Status: Imax controller active
r1343 Speed output of Imax controller
Shows the amount to which the I-max controller reduces the speed.
For more information about this function, see function diagram 1690 in the List Manual.
7.7.5 Limiting the maximum DC link voltage
How does the motor generate overvoltage?

An induction motor operates as a generator if it is driven by the connected load. A generator
converts mechanical power into electrical power. The electric power flows back into the
inverter and causes VDC in the inverter to increase.
Above a critical DC link voltage both the inverter as well as the motor will be damaged.
Before the voltage can reach critical levels, however, the inverter switches the motor off with
the fault message "DC link overvoltage".
Protecting the motor and inverter against overvoltage

The VDCmax controller prevents – as far as the application permits – the DC link voltage from
reaching critical levels.
The VDCmax controller is not suitable for applications in which the motor is permanently in the
regenerative mode, e.g. in hoisting gear or when large flywheel masses are braked. Further
information on inverter braking methods can be found in Section Braking functions of the
inverter (Page 187).

Functions
There are two different groups of parameters for the VDCmax controller, depending on whether
the motor is being operated with U/f control or vector control.
Table 7- 31 VDCmax controller parameters
Parameter for Parameter for Description

V/f control vector control
p1280 = 1 p1240 = 1 VDC controller or VDC monitoring configuration(factory setting: 1)1:
Enable VDCmax controller
r1282 r1242 VDCmax controller switch-on level
Shows the value of the DC-link voltage above which the VDCmax
controller is active
p1283 p1243 VDCmax controller dynamic factor (factory setting: 100 %) scaling of
the control parameters P1290, P1291 and P1292
p1290 p1250 VDCmax controller proportional gain (factory setting: 1)
p1291 p1251 VDCmax controller reset time (factory setting p1291: 40 ms, factory
setting p1251: 0 ms)
p1292 p1252 VDCmax controller rate time (factory setting p1292: 10 ms, factory
setting p1252: 0 ms)
p1294 p1254 VDCmax-controller automatic recording ON-signal level(factory
setting p1294: 0, factory setting p1254: 1)Activates or deactivates
automatic detection of the switch-on levels of the VDCmaxcontroller.
0: Automatic detection disabled
1: Automatic detection enabled
p0210 p0210 Unit supply voltage
If p1254 or p1294 = 0, the inverter uses this parameter to
calculate the intervention thresholds of the VDCmax controller.
Set this parameter to the actual value of the input voltage.
For more information about this function, see the List Manual (function diagrams 6320 and
6220).

Functions
7.8 Status messages
7.8 Status messages
7.8.1 Overview, evaluating the inverter state

Information about the inverter state (alarms, faults, actual values) can be output via inputs
and outputs and also via the communication interface.
Details on evaluating the inverter state via inputs and outputs are provided in Section Adapt
terminal strip (Page 89).
The evaluation of the inverter state via the communication interface is realized using the
inverter status word. Details on this are provided in the individual sections of Chapter
Configuring the fieldbus (Page 101).
7.8.2 System runtime

By evaluating the system runtime of the inverter, you can decide whether you must replace
components subject to wear such as fans, motors and gear units.
The system runtime is started as soon as the Control Unit power supply is switched-on. The
system runtime stops when the Control Unit is switched off.
The system runtime comprises r2114[0] (milliseconds) and r2114[1] (days):
System runtime = r2114[1] × days + r2114[0] × milliseconds
If r2114[0] has reached a value of 86,400,000 ms (24 hours), r2114[0] is set to the value 0
and the value of r2114[1] is increased by 1.
Using system runtime, you can track the sequence of faults and alarms over time. When a
corresponding message is triggered, parameter values r2114 are transferred unchanged to
the corresponding parameters of the alarm or fault buffer, see chapter entitled Alarms, faults
and system messages (Page 245).
Parameters Description
r2114[0] System runtime (ms)
r2114[1] System runtime (days)
You cannot reset the system runtime.

Functions
7.9 Application-specific functions

The inverter offers a series of functions that you can use depending on your particular
application, e.g.:
● Unit changeover
● Braking functions
● Automatic restart and flying restart
● Basic process control functions
● Logical and arithmetic functions using function blocks that can be freely interconnected
Please refer to the following sections for detailed descriptions.
7.9.1 Unit changeover
Description
With the unit changeover function, you can adapt the inverter to the line supply (50/60 Hz)
and also select US units or SI units as base units.
Independent of this, you can define the units for process variables or change over to
percentage values.
Specifically, you have the following options:
● Changing over the motor standard (Page 183) IEC/NEMA (adaptation to the line supply)
● Changing over the unit system (Page 184)
● Changing over process variables for the technology controller (Page 185)
NOTICE
The motor standard, the unit system as well as the process variables can only be
changed offline.
The procedure is described in Section Changing of the units with STARTER (Page 185).

Functions
Note
Restrictions for the unit changeover function
• The values on the rating plate of the inverter or motor cannot be displayed as
percentage values.
• Using the unit changeover function a multiple times (for example, percent → physical
unit 1 → physical unit 2 → percent) may lead to the original value being changed by
one decimal place as a result of rounding errors.
• If the unit is changed over into percent and the reference value is then changed, the
percentage values relate to the new reference value.
Example:
– For a reference speed of 1500 rpm, a fixed speed of 80% corresponds to a speed
of 1200 rpm.
– If the reference speed is changed to 3000 rpm, then the value of 80% is kept and
now means 2400 rpm.
Reference variables for unit changeover

p2000 Reference frequency/speed
p2001 Reference voltage
p2002 Reference current
p2003 Reference torque
r2004 Reference power
p2005 Reference angle
p2007 Reference acceleration
7.9.1.1 Changing over the motor standard

You change over the motor standard using p0100. The following applies:
● p0100 = 0: IEC motor (50 Hz, SI units)
● p0100 = 1: NEMA motor (60 Hz, US units)
● p0100 = 2: NEMA motor (60 Hz, SI units)

Functions
The parameters listed below are affected by the changeover.
Table 7- 32 Variables affected by changing over the motor standard
P no. Designation Unit for p0100 =

0*) 1 2
r0206 Power Module rated power kW HP kW
p0307 Rated motor power kW HP kW
p0316 Motor torque constant Nm/A lbf ft/A Nm/A
r0333 Rated motor torque Nm lbf ft Nm
r0334 Motor torque constant, actual Nm/A lbf ft/A Nm/A
p0341 Motor moment of inertia kgm2 lb ft2 kgm2
p0344 Motor weight (for thermal motor type) kg Lb kg
r1969 Speed_cont_opt moment of inertia determined kgm2 lb ft2 kgm2
*) Factory setting
7.9.1.2 Changing over the unit system

You change over the unit system using p0505. The following selection options are available:
● P0505 = 1: SI units (factory setting)
● P0505 = 2: SI units or % relative to SI units
● P0505 = 3: US units
● P0505 = 4: US units or % relative to US units
Note
Special features
The percentage values for p0505 = 2 and for p0505 = 4 are identical. In order to perform
internal calculations and output values that are changed back over to physical variables,
however, an important factor is whether the changeover process relates to SI or US units.
In the case of variables for which changeover to % is not possible, the following applies:
p0505 = 1 ≙ p0505 = 2 and p0505 = 3 ≙ p0505 = 4.
In the case of variables whose units are identical in the SI system and US system, and
which can be displayed as a percentage, the following applies:
p0505 = 1 ≙ p0505 = 3 and p0505 = 2 ≙ p0505 = 4.
Parameters affected by changeover
The parameters affected by changing over the unit system are grouped according to unit.
An overview of the unit groups and the possible units can be found in the List Manual in
the Section "Unit group and unit selection".

Functions
7.9.1.3 Changing over process variables for the technology controller
Note
We recommend that the units and reference values of the technology controller are
coordinated and harmonized with one another during commissioning.
Subsequent modification in the reference variable or the unit can result in incorrect
calculations or displays.
Changing over process variables of the technology controller

You change over the process variables of the technology controller using p0595. For
physical values, you define the reference variable in p0596.
The parameters affected by changing over units of the technology controller belong to unit
group 9_1. For details, please refer to the section titled "Unit group and unit choice" in the
List Manual.
7.9.1.4 Changing of the units with STARTER

The converter must be in the offline mode in order to change over the units.
STARTER shows whether you change settings online in the converter or change offline in
the PC ( / ).
You switch over the mode using the adjacent

*RRIIOLQH
buttons in the menu bar. GLVFRQQHFW
(VWDEOLVKWKHRQOLQH
FRQQHFWLRQ

Functions
Procedure
● Go to the "Units" tab in the configuration screen form to change over the units.

③ Changing over the unit system

④ Selecting process variables of the technology controller
⑤ adapting to the line supply
Figure 7-11 Unit changeover
● Save your settings

● Go online.
In this case, the converter detects that other units or process variables have been set
offline than are actually in the converter; the converter displays this in the following
screen form:
● Accept these settings in the converter.

Functions
7.9.2 Braking functions of the inverter

A differentiation is made between mechanically braking and electrically braking a motor:
● Mechanical brakes are generally motor holding brakes that are closed when the motor is
at a standstill. Mechanical operating brakes, that are closed while the motor is rotating
are subject to a high wear and are therefore often only used as an emergency brake.
If your motor is equipped with a motor holding brake, then you should use the inverter
functions to control this motor holding brake, see Section Motor holding brake
(Page 198).
● The motor is electrically braked by the inverter. An electrical braking is completely wear-
free. Generally, a motor is switched off at standstill in order to save energy and so that
the motor temperature is not unnecessarily increased.
7.9.2.1 Comparison of electrical braking methods
Regenerative power
If an induction motor electrically brakes the connected load and the mechanical power
exceeds the electrical losses, then it operates as a generator. The motor converts
mechanical power into electrical power. Examples of applications, in which regenerative
operation briefly occurs, include:
● Grinding disk drives
● Fans
For certain drive applications, the motor can operate in the regenerative mode for longer
periods of time, e.g.:
● Centrifuges
● Hoisting gear and cranes
● Conveyor belts with downward movement of load (vertical or inclined conveyors)
Depending on the Power Module used, the inverter offers the following options to convert the
regenerative power of the motor into heat or to feed it back into the line:
● DC braking (Page 190)
for Power Module PM240, PM250 and PM260
● Compound braking (Page 193)
for Power Module PM240
● Dynamic braking (Page 195)
for Power Module PM240
● Braking with regenerative feedback to the line (Page 197)
for Power Module PM250 and 260

Functions
Main features of the braking functions
DC braking
The motor converts the regenerative power into
heat.
• Advantage: The motor brakes without the a
,QYHUWHU
inverter having to process the regenerative
energy
• Disadvantages: significant increase in the
motor temperature; no defined braking
characteristics; no constant braking torque; no
braking torque at standstill; regenerative a
power is lost as heat; does not function when
the line supply fails
Compound braking
0RWRU
The motor converts the regenerative power into 0
heat.
%UDNH
• Advantage: Defined braking characteristics, SRZHU
/RDG
the motor brakes without the inverter having to
convert any regenerative energy
• Disadvantages: significant motor temperature
rise; no constant braking torque; regenerative
power is dissipated as heat; does not function
when the line supply fails
Dynamic braking
The inverter converts the regenerative
power into heat using a braking resistor.
a
%UDNLQJ ,QYHUWHU
• Advantages: defined braking

characteristics; no additional motor
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU
temperature increase; constant

FKRSSHU
braking torque; in principle, also %UDNLQJUHVLVWRU

functions when the power fails
• Disadvantages: Braking resistor
required; regenerative power is ,QYHUWHU a
dissipated as heat
0RWRU
0
%UDNH
SRZHU
/RDG

Functions
Braking with regenerative feedback into the line

supply
The inverter feeds the regenerative power back into
the line supply. /LQH a
,QYHUWHU
• Advantages: Constant braking torque; the
regenerative power is not converted into heat, but
is regenerated into the line supply; can be used in
all applications; continuous regenerative
,QYHUWHU
operation is possible - e.g. when lowering a crane
load a
• Disadvantage: Does not function when power
fails
0RWRU
0
%UDNH
SRZHU
/RDG
Braking with regenerative feedback into

the line supply
Braking method depending on the application
Table 7- 33 What braking method is suitable for what application?
Application examples Electrical braking methods Power Modules that can be

used
Pumps, fans, mixers, Not required PM240, PM250, PM260
compressors, extruders
Grinding machines, conveyor DC braking, compound braking PM240
belts
Centrifuges, vertical conveyors, Dynamic braking PM240
hoisting gear, cranes, winders Braking with regenerative feedback PM250, PM260
into the line supply

Functions
7.9.2.2 DC braking
DC braking is used for applications without regenerative feedback into the line supply, where
the motor can be more quickly braked by impressing a DC current than along a braking
ramp.
Typical applications for DC braking include:
● Centrifuges
● Saws
● Grinding machines
● Conveyor belts
Whether DC braking or ramp-down with an OFF1 command is more effective depends on
the motor properties.
With DC braking, the inverter outputs an internal OFF2 command for the time that it takes to
demagnetize the motor - and then impresses the braking current for the duration of the DC
braking.
The following operating modes are available for DC braking.
'&EUDNLQJZKHQWKHVWDUWVSHHGIRU'&EUDNLQJLVIDOOHQEHORZ '&EUDNLQJZKHQDIDXOWRFFXUV
3UHFRQGLWLRQ3 DQGS 3UHFRQGLWLRQ)DXOWQXPEHUDQGIDXOWUHDFWLRQDVVLJQHG
YLDSDQGS
Q Q 2))
2)) 2))
S
S
W W
S S S S
U )DXOWDFWLYH
W
'&EUDNLQJDFWLYH '&EUDNLQJDFWLYH
U U
W W
$FWLYDWLQJ'&EUDNLQJLQGHSHQGHQWRIWKHVSHHGXVLQJ '&EUDNLQJZKHQWKHPRWRULVVZLWFKHGRII
DFRQWUROFRPPDQG 3UHFRQGLWLRQ3 RUS DQGS
3UHFRQGLWLRQS
Q 2)) Q 2))
2))
S
W W
S S S
'&EUDNLQJVHOHFWHG 2))2))
U U
W W
'&EUDNLQJDFWLYH '&EUDNLQJDFWLYH
U U
W W

Functions
DC braking when the start speed for DC braking is fallen below

DC braking is automatically activated as soon as the motor speed falls below the start speed
for DC braking. However, the motor speed must have first exceeded the start speed for DC
braking. Once the DC braking time is complete, the inverter switches to normal operation. If
p1230 is set to 0, DC braking can also be canceled before the time defined in p1233.
DC braking when a fault occurs

If a fault occurs, where the configured response is DC braking, then the inverter first brakes
the motor along the down ramp until the start speed for DC braking is reached, and then
starts DC braking.
Activating DC braking independent of the speed using a control command

DC braking starts independent of the motor speed, as soon as the control command for
braking (e.g. via DI3: P1230 = 722.3) is issued. If the braking command is revoked, the
inverter returns to normal operation and the motor accelerates to its setpoint.
Note: The value of p1230 is displayed in r1239.11.
DC braking when the motor is switched off

If the motor is switched off with OFF1 or OFF3, the inverter first brakes the motor along the
down ramp until the start speed for DC braking is reached, and then starts DC braking. The
motor is then switched into a torque-free condition (OFF2).
Note
In the following operating modes, it is possible that the motor is still rotating after DC braking.
This is the reason that in these operating modes "Flying restart (Page 204)" must be
activated:
• DC braking when the start speed for DC braking is fallen below
• Activating DC braking independent of the speed using a control command
• DC braking when the motor is switched off
The DC braking function can only be set for induction motors.
CAUTION
DC braking converts some of the kinetic energy of the motor and load into heat in the motor
(temperature rise). The motor will overheat if the braking operation lasts too long or the
motor is braked too often.

Functions
DC braking parameters
Table 7- 34 Parameters for configuring DC braking
p1230 Activate DC braking (BICO parameter)
The value for this parameter (0 or 1) can be either entered directly or specified by
means of an interconnection with a control command.
p1231 Configure DC braking
• p1231 = 0, no DC braking
• p1231 = 4, general enabling of DC braking
• p1231 = 5, DC braking for OFF1/3, independent of p1230
• P1231 = 14, enables DC braking for the case that the motor speed falls below the
start speed for DC braking.
Table 7- 35 Parameters for configuring DC braking in the event of faults
p2100 Set fault number for fault reaction (factory setting: 0)
Enter the fault number for which DC braking should be activated, e.g.: p2100[3] = 7860
(external fault 1).
p2101 = 6 Fault reaction setting (factory setting: 0)
Assigning the fault response: p2101[3] = 6.
The fault is assigned an index of p2100. The associated fault response must be assigned the same
index in p2101.
In the List Manual of the inverter - in the "Faults and alarms" list - possible fault responses are listed
for every fault. The entry "DCBRAKE" means that for this particular fault, DC braking can be set as
fault response.
Table 7- 36 Additional parameters for setting DC braking
p1232 DC braking braking current (factory setting: 0 A)
Setting the braking current for the DC braking.
p1233 DC braking duration (factory setting: 1 s)
p1234 DC braking start speed (factory setting: 210000 rpm)
DC braking starts – assuming that it has been correspondingly parameterized
(p1230/p1231) – as soon as the actual speed falls below this threshold.
p0347 Motor de-excitation
The parameter is calculated via p0340 = 1, 3.
The inverter can trip due to an overcurrent during DC braking if the de-excitation time is
too short.

Functions
7.9.2.3 Compound braking

Compound braking is typically used for applications in which the motor is normally operated
at a constant speed and is only braked down to standstill in longer time intervals, e.g.:
● Centrifuges
● Saws
:LWKRXWFRPSRXQGEUDNLQJ :LWKFRPSRXQGEUDNLQJ
6SHHG
W W $GGLWLYH'&
0RWRUFXUUHQW
W W
'&OLQNYROWDJH
U
W W
Figure 7-12 Motor brakes with and without active compound braking
Compound braking prevents the DC link voltage increasing above a critical value. The
inverter activates compound braking depending on the DC link voltage. Above a DC link
voltage threshold (r1282), the inverters adds a DC current to the motor current. The DC
current brakes the motor and prevents an excessive increase in the DC link voltage.
Note
Compound braking is only active in conjunction with the V/f control.
Compound braking does not operate in the following cases:
• The "flying restart" function is active
• DC braking is active
• Vector control is selected

Functions
Parameterizing compound braking
Table 7- 37 Parameters to enable and set compound braking
P3856 Compound braking current (%)
With the compound braking current, the magnitude of the DC current is defined, which
is additionally generated when stopping the motor for operation with V/f control to
increase the braking effect.
P3856 = 0
Compound braking locked
P3856 = 1 … 250
Current level of the DC braking current as a % of the rated motor current (P0305)
Recommendation: p3856 < 100 % × (r0209 - r0331) / p0305 / 2
r3859.0 Status word, compound braking
r3859.0 = 1: Compound braking is active
CAUTION
Compound braking converts part of the kinetic energy of the motor and load into motor heat
(temperature rise). The motor can overheat if braking lasts too long or the drive is braked
too frequently.

Functions
7.9.2.4 Dynamic braking

Dynamic braking is typically used in applications in which dynamic motor behavior is
required at different speeds or continuous direction changes, e.g.:
● Vertical and inclined conveyors
● Hoisting gear
The inverter controls the braking chopper depending on its DC link voltage. The DC link
voltage increases as soon as the inverter absorbs the regenerative power when braking the
motor. The braking chopper converts this power into heat in the braking resistor. This
therefore prevents the DC link voltage increasing above the limit value VDC link, max.
6SHHG
U
W
0RWRUSRZHU
PRWRUL]HG
UHJHQHUDWLYH W
'&OLQNYROWDJH8DC
U
8DC, max
W
%UDNLQJPRGXOHDFWLYH
Figure 7-13 Simplified representation of dynamic braking with respect to time
Braking resistor connection

● Connect the braking resistor to terminals R1 and R2 of the Power Module
● Ground the braking resistor directly to the control cabinet's grounding bar. It is not
permissible that the braking resistor is grounded via the PE terminals on the Power
Module.
● If you must observe the EMC guidelines, pay special attention to the shielding.

Functions
● Evaluate the braking resistor's temperature monitoring (terminals T1 and T2) such that
the motor is switched off when the resistor experiences overtemperature.
You can do this in the following two ways:
– Use a contactor to disconnect the converter from the line as soon as the temperature
monitoring responds.
– Connect the contact of the temperature monitoring function of the braking resistor with
a free digital input of your choice on the converter. Set the function of this digital input
to the OFF2 command.
/
/
/
3(
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU
6KLHOGVXSSRUWLQWKH
FRQWUROFDELQHW
7 7
9 ', 5 5 8 9 : 3(

S
2))
&RQWURO8QLW 3RZHU0RGXOH 8 9 : 3(
0
Figure 7-14 Braking resistor connection (example: Temperature monitoring via DI 3)
You will find more information about the braking resistor in the installation instructions for
Power Module PM240
WARNING
If an unsuitable braking resistor is used, this could result in a fire and severely damage the
converter.
The temperature of braking resistors increases during operation. For this reason, avoid
coming into direct contact with braking resistors. Maintain sufficient clearances around the
braking resistor and ensure that there is adequate ventilation.
Parameterizing the dynamic braking

Deactivate the VDCmax controller. The VDCmax controller is described in Section Limiting the
maximum DC link voltage (Page 179).
The dynamic braking does not have to be parameterized any further.

Functions
7.9.2.5 Braking with regenerative feedback to the line

Regenerative braking is typically used in applications where braking energy is generated
either frequently or for longer periods of time, e.g.:
● Centrifuges
● Unwinders
● Cranes and hoisting gear
Pre-requisite for regenerative braking is the Power Module PM250 or PM260.
The inverter can feed back up to 100% of its power into the line supply (referred to "High
Overload" base load, see Section Technical data, Power Modules (Page 266)).
Parameterization of braking with regenerative feedback to the line
Table 7- 38 Settings for braking with regenerative feedback to the line
Limiting the regenerative feedback for V/f control (P1300 < 20)
p0640 Motor overload factor
Limiting the regenerative power is not directly possible with V/f control, but can be
achieved indirectly by limiting the motor current.
If the current exceeds this value for longer than 10 s, the inverter shuts down the motor
with fault message F07806.
Limiting feedback with vector control (P1300 ≥ 20)
P1531 Regenerative power limit
The maximum regenerative load is entered as negative value via p1531.
(-0.01 … -100000.00 kW).
Values higher than the rated value of the power unit (r0206) are not possible.

Functions
7.9.2.6 Motor holding brake

The motor holding brake prevents the motor turning when it is switched off. The inverter has
internal logic to control a motor holding brake.
The motor holding brake control inside the inverter is suitable for the following typical
applications:
● Horizontal, inclined and vertical conveyors
● Pumps
● Fans
Connecting the motor holding brake

The Brake Relay serves as an interface between the Power Module and the motor's brake
coil.
The Brake Relay can be mounted on a mounting plate, the cabinet wall or the inverter's
shield connection kit. For more information, refer to Installation instructions for the Brake
Relay (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/23623179).
Connect the Brake Relay to the Power Module using the cable form provided.
Table 7- 39 Connecting the Brake Relay to the Power Module
Brake Relay Power Module FSA … FSC Power Module FSD … FSF
0.37 kW … 15 kW 18.5 kW … 110 kW
)O\LQJOHDGWR
3RZHU0RGXOH
&RQQHFWLRQWREUDNHFRLO
LQVLGHWKHPRWRU
*URXQG(DUWK
The Brake Relay's control The Brake Relay's control The Brake Relay's control
connection is marked "CTRL". connection ① is on the front connection ① is on the lower
panel of the Power Module. side of the Power Module.
The Power Module has a
cable guide ② for the control
cable

Functions
Connect the motor holding brake to the terminals of the Brake Relay.
3RZHU0RGXOH
3RZHUVXSSO\
PRWRUEUDNH
&75/
0
a
%UDNH5HOD\
Figure 7-15 Connecting the motor holding brake
Further information can be found in the Hardware Installation Manual for your Power Module.

Functions
Principle of operation after OFF1 and OFF3 command
0RWRUVZLWFKHGRQ 21
2))2))
0RWRUPDJQHWL]HG W
U
W
S
2SHUDWLRQ U
W
6SHHGVHWSRLQW U
3
W
S
6SHHG U
S
W
S
2SHQEUDNH U
S W
S
%UDNHRSHQHG
0 0
W
Figure 7-16 Controlling the motor holding brake when the motor is switched on and off
The motor brake is controlled as shown in the following diagram:

1. After the ON command (switch on motor), the inverter magnetizes the motor. At the end
of the magnetizing time (p0346), the inverter issues the command to open the brake.
2. The motor remains at a standstill until the end of the brake opening time p1216. The
motor holding brake must open within this time.
3. At the end of the brake opening time the motor accelerates to its speed setpoint.
4. After the OFF command (OFF1 or OFF3) the motor brakes to a standstill.
5. If the speed setpoint and the current speed fall below threshold p1226, the monitoring
time p1227 or p1228 is started.
6. As soon as the first of the two monitoring times (p1227 or p1228) has elapsed, the
inverter issues the command to close the brake. The motor comes to a standstill but
remains switched on.
7. At the end of the brake closing time p1217, the motor is switched off.
The motor holding brake must close within this time.

Functions
Principle of operation after OFF2 or STO command

For the following signals, the brake closing time is not taken into account:
● OFF2 command
● For fail-safe applications, in addition, after "Safe Torque Off" (STO)
After these control commands, the signal to close the motor holding brake is immediately
output independent of the motor speed. The inverter does not monitor the motor speed until
the brake closes.
0RWRUVZLWFKHGRQ 21
2))672
0RWRUPDJQHWL]HG W
U
W
S
2SHUDWLRQ U
W
6SHHGVHWSRLQW U
W
2SHQEUDNH U
S W
%UDNHRSHQHG
0 0
W
Figure 7-17 Controlling the motor holding brake after an OFF2 command or STO

Functions
Commissioning
WARNING
The following applications require special settings of the motor holding brake. In these
cases, the motor holding brake control may only be commissioned by experienced
personnel:
• All applications that involve moving and transporting people
• Hoisting gear
• Elevators
• Cranes
● Before commissioning, secure any dangerous loads (e.g. loads on inclined conveyors)
● Suppress the motor holding brake control, e.g. by disconnecting the control cables
● When opening the motor holding brake, ensure that a torque is established that prevents
the load from briefly dropping.
– Check the magnetizing time p0346; the magnetizing time is pre-assigned during
commissioning and must be greater than zero
– V/f control (p1300 = 0 to 3):
Set the boost parameters p1310 and p1311.
Define the motor torque when switching on using p1351 and p1352.
– Vector control (p1300 ≥ 20):
Define the motor torque when switching on using p1475.
● Assigning parameters for the opening and closing times of the motor holding brake.
It is extremely important that electromechanical brakes are controlled with the correct
timing in order to protect the brakes against long-term damage. The exact values can be
found in the technical data of the connected brake. Typical values:
– Depending on the brake size, brake opening times lie between 25 ms and 500 ms.
– Depending on the brake size, brake closing times lie between 15 ms and 300 ms.
● Reestablish the control of the motor holding brake.
r0052.12 ("Motor holding brake open") controls the brake.

Functions
Table 7- 40 Control logic parameters of the motor holding brake
p1215 = 1 Enable motor holding brake
0 Motor holding brake locked (factory setting)
1 Motor holding brake just like the sequence control
2: Motor holding brake permanently open
3: Motor holding brake just like the sequential control, connected via BICO
p1216 Motor holding brake opening time (factory setting 0.1 s)
p1216 > braking signal relay runtimes + brake release time
p1217 Motor holding brake closing time (factory setting 0.1 s)
p1217 > braking signal relay runtimes + brake closing time
r0052.12 "Open motor holding brake" command
p0346 Magnetizing time (factory setting 0 s)
During this time the induction motor is magnetized. The inverter calculates this
parameter using p0340 = 1 or 3.
p0855 Open motor holding brake (imperative) (factory setting 0)
p0858 Close motor holding brake (imperative) (factory setting 0)
p1226 Stationary state detection speed threshold (factory setting 20 rpm)
When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, when the speed falls below this threshold,
standstill is detected and the monitoring time p1227 or p1228 is started
p1227 Stationary state detection monitoring time (factory setting 300 s)
p1228 Pulse deletion delay time (factory setting 0.01 s)
p1351 Starting frequency of motor holding brake (factory setting 0%)
Setting the frequency set value at the slip compensation output when starting with
motor holding brake.
When the parameter p1351 is set to > 0, slip compensation is automatically switched
on.
p1352 Starting frequency for motor holding brake (factory setting 1351)
Setting the signal source for the frequency set value at the slip compensation output
when starting with motor holding brake.
p1475 Speed controller torque set value for motor holding brake (factory setting 0)
Setting the signal source for the torque set value when starting with motor holding
brake.

Functions
7.9.3 Automatic restart and flying restart
7.9.3.1 Flying restart – switching on while the motor is running

If you switch on the motor while it is still running, then with a high degree of probability, a
fault will occur due to overcurrent (overcurrent fault F07801). Examples of applications
involving an unintentionally rotating motor directly before switching on:
● The motor rotates after a brief line interruption.
● A flow of air turns the fan impeller.
● A load with a high moment of inertia drives the motor.
After the ON command, the 212))

"flying restart" function initially
synchronizes the inverter output W
6SHHG 6SHHGVHWSRLQW
frequency to the motor speed
and then accelerates the motor 0RWRUPDJQHWL]LQJ
up to the setpoint.
,QYHUWHURXWSXWIUHTXHQF\
Principle of operation of the "flying restart" function
If the inverter simultaneously drives several motors, then you must only use the "flying
restart" function if the speed of all of the motors is always the same (group drive with a
mechanical coupling).
Table 7- 42 Basic setting
P1200 Flying restart operating mode (factory setting: 0)
0 Flying restart is locked
1 Flying restart is enabled, look for the motor in both directions, start in direction of
setpoint
4 Flying restart is enabled, only search in direction of setpoint

Functions
P1201 Flying restart enable signal source (factory setting: 1)
Defines a control command, e.g. a digital input, through which the flying restart function
is enabled.
P1202 Flying restart search current (factory setting 100 %)
Defines the search current with respect to the motor magnetizing current (r0331), which
flows in the motor while the flying restart function is being used.
P1203 Flying restart search speed factor (factory setting 100 %)
The value influences the speed with which the output frequency is changed during the
flying restart. A higher value results in a longer search time.
If the inverter does not find the motor, reduce the search speed (increase p1203).

Functions
7.9.3.2 Automatic switch-on

The automatic restart includes two different functions:
1. The inverter automatically acknowledges faults.
2. After a fault occurs or after a power failure, the inverter automatically switches-on the
motor again.
This automatic restart function is primarily used in applications where the motor is controlled
locally via the inverter's inputs. In applications with a connection to a fieldbus, the central
control should evaluate the feedback signals of the drives, specifically acknowledge faults or
switch-on the motor.
The inverter interprets the following events as power failure:
● The inverter signals fault F30003 (DC link undervoltage), as the line supply voltage of the
inverter has briefly failed.
● The inverter power supply has failed for a long enough time so that the inverter has been
switched-off.
WARNING
When the "automatic restart" function is active (p1210 > 1), the motor automatically
starts after a power failure. This is especially critical after longer power failures.
Reduce the risk of accidents in your machine or system to an acceptable level by
applying suitable measures, e.g. protective doors or covers.
Commissioning the automatic restart

● If it is possible that the motor is still rotating for a longer period of time after a power
failure or after a fault, then in addition, you must activate the "flying restart" function, see
Flying restart – switching on while the motor is running (Page 204).
● Using p1210, select the automatic restart mode that best suits your application.
$XWRPDWLFUHVWDUW$5PRGH
1R$5 $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOWV $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOWV 'RQRWDFNQRZOHGJHIDXOWV $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOWV

DXWRPDWLFDOO\ DXWRPDWLFDOO\LI212)) DXWRPDWLFDOO\ DXWRPDWLFDOO\
FRPPDQG
'RQRWVZLWFKRIIPRWRU 6ZLWFKRQPRWRUDXWRPDWL 6ZLWFKRQPRWRUDXWRPDWL 6ZLWFKRQPRWRUDXWRPDWL

DXWRPDWLFDOO\ FDOO\ FDOO\ FDOO\
$IWHUSRZHU $IWHUSRZHU $IWHUSRZHU $IWHUSRZHU

IDLOXUH IDLOXUHDQG IDLOXUH IDLOXUHDQG
IDXOWV IDXOWV
S S S S S S S
Figure 7-18 Selecting the automatic restart mode

Functions
● Set the parameters of the automatic restart function.

The method of operation of the parameters is explained in the following diagram and in
the table.
)DXOW )DXOWDIWHU
SRZHUIDLOXUH
RULQRSHUDWLRQ ([WHUQDOIDXOW
&RXQWHULVGHFUH W
6WDUWDWWHPSWV &RXQWHU S
FRXQWHU PHQWHGE\ ,IFRXQWHUWKHQIDXOW
)
W
$XWRPDWLF
DFNQRZOHGJPHQW
$XWRPDWLF21 W
FRPPDQG S S
0RWRUVSHHG W
W:6XPRIWKHWLPHVIRUIO\LQJUHVWDUW
W: V W: V DQGPDJQHWL]LQJWKHPRWRU
W
VWVWDUWDWWHPSW QGVWDUWDWWHPSW
0RQLWRULQJWLPH XQVXFFHVVIXO VXFFHVVIXO
S>@ $WOHDVWRQHVWDUWDWWHPSWPXVWKDYHEHHQVXFFHVVIXO
ZLWKLQWKLVWLPH
,IQRWIDXOW)
0RQLWRULQJWLPH W
S>@ $IWHUWKLVWLPHH[SLUHVWKH
LQYHUWHUUHVHWVWKHDWWHPSWHG
VWDUWVFRXQWHU
W
1 The inverter automatically acknowledges faults under the following conditions:
• p1210 = 1 or 26: always.
• p1210 = 4 or 6: If the command to switch on the motor is available at a digital input or via the
fieldbus (ON/OFF1 command = HIGH).
• p1210 = 14 or 16: never.
2 The inverter attempts to automatically switch-on the motor under the following conditions:
• p1210 = 1: never.
• p1210 = 4, 6, 14, 16, or 26: If the command to switch on the motor is available at a digital input
or via the fieldbus (ON/OFF1 command = HIGH).
3 The start attempt is successful if flying restart has been completed and the motor has been
magnetized (r0056.4 = 1) and one additional second has expired without a new fault having
occurred.
Figure 7-19 Time response of the automatic restart

Functions
Table 7- 44 Setting the automatic restart
Parameter Explanation
p1210 Automatic restart mode (factory setting: 0)
0: Disable automatic restart
1: Acknowledge all faults without restarting
4: Restart after power failure without further restart attempts
6: Restart after fault with further restart attempts
14: Restart after power failure after manual fault acknowledgement
16: Restart after fault after manual fault acknowledgement
26: Acknowledgement of all faults and restart with ON command
p1211 Automatic restart start attempts (factory setting: 3)
This parameter is only effective for the settings p1210 = 4, 6, 14, 16, 26.
You define the maximum number of start attempts using p1211. After each successful
fault acknowledgement, the inverter decrements its internal counter of start attempts by
1.
For p1211 = n, up to n + 1 start attempts are made. Fault F07320 is output after n + 1
unsuccessful start attempts.
The inverter sets the start attempt counter back again to the value of p1211, if one of
the following conditions is fulfilled:
• After a successful start attempt, the time in p1213[1] has expired.
• After fault F07320, withdraw the ON command and acknowledge the fault.
• You change the start value p1211 or the mode p1210.
p1212 Automatic restart wait time start attempt (factory setting: 1.0 s)
This parameter is only effective for the settings p1210 = 4, 6, 26.
Examples for setting this parameter:
1. After a power failure, a certain time must elapse before the motor can be switched-
on, e.g. because other machine components are not immediately ready. In this case,
set p1212 longer than the time, after which all of the fault causes have been
removed.
2. In operation, the inverter develops a fault condition. The lower you select p1212,
then the sooner the inverter attempts to switch-on the motor again.

Functions
Parameter Explanation
p1213[0] Automatic restart monitoring time
for restart (factory setting: 60 s)
With this monitoring function, you limit the time in which the inverter may attempt to
automatically switch-on the motor again.
The monitoring function starts when a fault is identified and ends with a successful start
attempt. If the motor has not successfully started after the monitoring time has expired,
fault F07320 is signaled.
Set the monitoring time longer than the sum of the following times:
+ P1212
+ time that the inverter requires to start the motor on the fly.
+ Motor magnetizing time (p0346)
+ 1 second
You deactivate the monitoring function with p1213 = 0.
p1213[1] Automatic restart monitoring time
to reset the fault counter (factory setting: 0 s)
Using this monitoring time, you prevent that faults, which continually occur within a
certain time period, are automatically acknowledged each time.
The monitoring function starts with a successful start attempt and ends after the
monitoring time has expired.
If the inverter has made more than (p1211 + 1) successful start attempts within
monitoring time p1213[1], the inverter cancels the automatic restart function and signals
fault F07320. In order to switch on the motor again, you must acknowledge the fault and
issue a new ON command.
Additional information is provided in the parameter list of the List Manual.
Advanced settings
If you with to suppress the automatic restart function for certain faults, then you must enter
the appropriate fault numbers in p1206[0 … 9].
Example: P1206[0] = 07331 ⇒ No restart for fault F07331.
Suppressing the automatic restart only functions for the setting p1210 = 6, 16 or 26.
WARNING
In the case of communication via the field bus interface, the motor restarts with the setting
p1210 = 6 even if the communication link is interrupted. This means that the motor cannot
be stopped via the open-loop control. To avoid this dangerous situation, you must enter the
fault code of the communications error in parameter p1206.
Example: A communication failure via PROFIBUS is signaled using fault code F01910. You
should therefore set p1206[n] = 1910 (n = 0 … 9).

Functions
7.9.4 PID technology controller

The technology controller permits all types of simple process controls to be implemented.
You can use the technology controller for e.g. pressure controllers, level controls or flow
controls.
5DPSIXQFWLRQ
JHQHUDWRU 3,'FRQWUROOHU
6HWSRLQW 6SHHG
WHFKQRORJ\ VHWSRLQW &ORVHGORRS
VSHHG
FRQWURO
7HFKQRORJ\DFWXDOYDOXH
/HYHO
VHQVRU 3XPS
Figure 7-20 Example: technology controller as a level controller
The technology controller specifies the speed setpoint of the motor in such a way that the
process variable to be controlled corresponds to its setpoint. The technology controller is
designed as a PID controller, which makes it highly flexible.
The technology controller setpoint is entered via an analog input or via the fieldbus.
Table 7- 45 Technology controller parameters
P2200 = … Enable technology controller
P2201 … r2225 Fixed speeds for the technology controller
P2231 … P2248 Motorized potentiometer for the technology controller
P2251 … r2294 General adjustment parameters of the technology controller
P2345 = … Changing the fault reaction for the technology controller
Additional information about this function is provided in the parameter list and in the function
diagrams 7950 … 7958 in the List Manual.

Functions
7.9.5 Load torque monitoring (system protection)

In many applications, it is advisable to monitor the motor torque:
● Applications where the load speed can be indirectly monitored by means of the load
torque. For example, in fans and conveyor belts too low a torque indicates that the drive
belt is torn.
● Applications that are to be protected against overload or locking (e.g. extruders or
mixers).
● Applications in which no-load operation of the motor represents an impermissible
situation (e.g. pumps).
Load torque monitoring functions

The converter monitors the torque of the motor in different ways:
1. No-load monitoring:
The converter generates a message if the motor torque is too low.
2. Blocking protection:
The converter generates a message if the motor speed cannot match the speed setpoint
despite maximum torque.
3. Stall protection:
The converter generates a message if the converter control has lost the orientation of the
motor.
4. Speed-dependent torque monitoring
The converter measures the actual torque and compares it with a parameterized
speed/torque characteristic.
7RUTXH>1P@
3WRUTXHWKUHVKROG WRS
3WRUTXHWKUHVKROG ERWWRP
6SHHG>USP@
3VSHHG 3PD[LPXPVSHHG
WKUHVKROG
3VSHHGWKUHVKROG
3VSHHGWKUHVKROG

Functions
Table 7- 46 Parameterizing the monitoring functions
No-load monitoring
P2179 Current limit for no-load detection
If the converter current is below this value, the message "no load" is output.
P2180 Delay time for the "no load" message
Blocking protection
P2177 Delay time for the "motor locked" message
Stall protection
P2178 Delay time for the "motor stalled" message
P1745 Deviation of the setpoint from the actual value of the motor flux as of which the "motor
stalled" message is generated
This parameter is only evaluated as part of encoderless vector control.
Speed-dependent torque monitoring
P2181 Load monitoring, response
Setting the response when evaluating the load monitoring.
0: Load monitoring disabled
>0: Load monitoring enabled
P2182 Load monitoring, speed threshold 1
P2185 Load monitoring torque threshold 1, upper
P2186 Load monitoring torque threshold 1, lower
P2192 Load monitoring, delay time
Delay time for the message "Leave torque monitoring tolerance band"
For more information about these functions, see the List Manual (function diagram 8013 and
the parameter list).

Functions
7.9.6 Speed and load failure via digital input

With this function you can directly monitor not only the motor speed but also the speed of the
driven load. Examples include:
● Gearbox monitoring, e.g. in traction drives or hoisting gear
● Drive belt monitoring, e.g. in fans or conveyor belts
● Monitoring for blocked driven load
Speed or velocity monitoring functions

There are two ways of directly monitoring speed in your application:
1. Load failure monitoring: The inverter evaluates whether the sensor signal is present.
2. Speed deviation monitoring: The inverter calculates a speed from the signal of the
connected sensor and compares it with the internal motor control signal.
A sensor (e.g. a proximity switch) is required for speed monitoring. The inverter evaluates
the sensor signal via a digital input.
Load failure monitoring
39
S
',[ U[ WRVLJQDOHYDOXDWLRQ
Figure 7-21 Load failure monitoring by means of a digital input
Table 7- 47 Setting load failure monitoring
p2193 = 1 to 3 Load monitoring configuration (factory setting: 1)
0: Monitoring is disabled
1: Torque and load failure monitoring
2: Speed and load failure monitoring
3: Load failure monitoring
p2192 Load monitoring delay time (factory setting 10 s)
If, after the motor is switched on, the "LOW" signal is present on the associated
digital input for longer than this time, a load failure is assumed (F07936)
p3232 = 722.x Load monitoring failure detection (factory setting: 1)
Interconnect the load monitoring with a digital input of your choice.

Functions
Speed deviation monitoring

This function is only available for Control Units CU240E-2, CU240E-2 DP, CU240E-2 F and
CU240E-2 DP-F. The monitoring sensor is connected to digital input 3.
The inverter can process a pulse sequence of up to 32 kHz.
39 S S
3UREH
S &RQYHUVLRQ S
', U U WRVSHHGFRPSDULVRQ
3XOVHVLQWKH
VSHHG
S S
Figure 7-22 Speed deviation monitoring by means of digital input DI3
The speed is calculated from the pulse signal of the digital input in the "probe".
The calculated speed is compared with the actual speed value from the motor control and, if
an (adjustable) deviation is detected, a response (also adjustable) is triggered.

Functions
Table 7- 48 Setting speed deviation monitoring
P2193 = 2 Load monitoring configuration (factory setting: 1)
2: Speed and load failure monitoring.
P2192 Load monitoring delay time (factory setting 10 s)
Setting of the delay time for evaluating load monitoring.
P2181 Load monitoring response (factory setting 0)
Setting of the response for evaluating load monitoring.
P3231 Load monitoring speed deviation (factory setting 150 rpm)
Permissible speed deviation of load monitoring.
P0580 = 23 Probe input terminal (factory setting 0)
Interconnection of speed calculation with DI 3.
P0581 Probe edge (factory setting 0)
Setting the edge for evaluation of the probe signal to measure actual speed value
0: 0/1 edge
1: 1/0 edge
P0582 Probe pulses per revolution (factory setting 1)
Setting of the number of pulses per revolution.
P0583 Maximum probe measuring time (factory setting 10 s)
Setting the maximum measuring time for the probe. If there is no new pulse before the
maximum measuring time elapses, the actual speed value in r0586 is set to zero.
With the next pulse, the time is restarted.
P0585 Probe gear factor (factory setting 1)
The inverter multiplies the measured speed by the gear factor and then displays it in
r0586.
P0490 Invert probe (factory setting 0000bin)
The 3rd bit of the parameter value inverts the input signals of digital input 3 for the
probe.
p3230 = 586 Load monitoring actual speed value (factory setting 0)
Interconnection of the speed calculation result with speed monitoring evaluation.

Functions
7.9.7 Logical and arithmetic functions using function blocks

Additional signal interconnections in the inverter can be established by means of free
function blocks. Every digital and analog signal available via BICO technology can be routed
to the appropriate inputs of the free function blocks. The outputs of the free function blocks
are also interconnected to other functions using BICO technology.
Among others, the following free function blocks are available:
● Logic modules AND, OR, XOR, NOT
● Arithmetic blocks ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, AVA (device for forming absolute values), NCM
(numeric comparator), PLI (polyline)
● Time modules MFP (pulse generator), PCL (pulse shortening), PDE (ON delay), PDF
(OFF delay), PST (pulse stretching)
● Memories: RSR (RS flip-flop), DSR (D flip-flop)
● Switches NSW (numeric change-over switch) BSW (binary change-over switch)
● Controllers LIM (limiter), PT1 (smoothing element), INT (integrator), DIF (differentiating
element)
● Limit value monitoring LVM
You will find an overview of all of the free function blocks and their parameters in the List
Manual, in Chapter "Function diagrams" in the section "Free function blocks" (function
diagrams 7210 ff).
Activating the free blocks

None of the free function blocks in the inverter are used in the factory setting. In order to be
able to use a free function block, you must perform the following steps:
● In the parameter list, select the function block from the function diagrams - there you will
find all of the parameters that you require to interconnect the block
● Assign the block to a runtime group
● Define the run sequence within the runtime group - this is only required if you have
assigned several blocks to the same runtime group.
● Interconnect the block's inputs and outputs with the corresponding signals on the inverter.
The runtime groups are calculated at different intervals (time slices). Please refer to the
following table to see which free function blocks can be assigned to which time slices.

Functions
Table 7- 49 Runtime groups and possible assignments of the free function blocks
Runtime groups 1 … 6 with associated time slices

Free function blocks 1 2 3 4 5 6
8 ms 16 ms 32 ms 64 ms 128 ms 256 ms
Logic modules ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
AND, OR, XOR, NOT
Arithmetic blocks - - - - ✓ ✓
ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, AVA, NCM, PLI
Time modules - - - - ✓ ✓
MFP, PCL, PDE, PDF, PST
Memories ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
RSR, DSR
Switches - - - - ✓ ✓
NSW
Switches ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
BSW
Controllers - - - - ✓ ✓
LIM, PT1, INT, DIF
Limit value monitoring - - - - ✓ ✓
LVM
✓: The block can be assigned to the runtime group

-: The block cannot be assigned to this runtime group
Analog signal scaling

If you interconnect a physical quantity, e.g. speed or voltage to the input of a free function
block using BICO technology, then the signal is automatically scaled to a value of 1. The
analog output signals of the free function blocks are also available as scaled quantities (0 ≙
0 %, 1≙ 100 %).
As soon as you have interconnected the scaled output signal of a free function block to
functions, which require physical input quantities - e.g. the signal source of the upper torque
limit (p1522) - then the signal is automatically converted into the physical quantity.
The quantities with their associated scaling parameters are listed in the following:
• Speeds P2000 Reference speed (≙100%)

• Voltage values P2001 Reference voltage (≙100%)
• Current values P2002 Reference current (≙100%)
• Torque values P2003 Reference torque (≙100%)
• Power values P2004 Reference power (≙100%)
• Angle P2005 Reference angle (≙100%)
• Acceleration P2007 Reference acceleration (≙100%)
• Temperature 100 °C ≙ 100 %

Functions
Scaling examples
● Speed:
Reference speed p2000 = 3000 rpm, actual speed 2100 rpm. As a consequence, the
following applies to the scaled input quantity: 2,100 / 3,000 = 0.7.
● Temperature:
Reference quantity is 100 °C. For an actual temperature of 120 °C, the input value is
obtained from 120 °C / 100 °C = 1.2.
Note
Limits within the function blocks should be entered as scaled values. The scaled value
can be calculated as follows using the reference parameter: Scaled limit value = physical
limit value / value of the reference parameter.
The assignment to reference parameters is provided in the parameter list in the individual
parameter descriptions.
Example: Logic combination of two digital inputs

You want to switch on the motor via digital input 0 and also via digital input 1:
1. Activate a free OR block by assigning it to a runtime group, and define the run sequence.
2. Interconnect the status signals of the two digital inputs DI 0 and DI 1 via BICO to the two
inputs of the OR block.
3. Finally, interconnect the OR block output with the internal ON command (P0840).
Table 7- 50 Parameters for using the free function blocks
P20048 = 1 Assignment of block OR 0 to runtime group 1 (factory setting: 9999)
The block OR 0 is calculated in the time slice with 8 ms
P20049 = 60 Definition of run sequence within runtime group 1 (factory setting: 60)
Within one runtime group, the block with the smallest value is calculated first.
P20046 [0] = 722.0 Interconnection of first OR 0 input (factory setting: 0)
The first OR 0 input is linked to digital input 0 (r0722.0)
P20046 [1] = 722.1 Interconnection of second OR 0 input (factory setting: 0)
The second OR 0 input is linked to digital input 1 (r0722.1)
P0840 = 20047 Interconnection of OR 0 output (factory setting: 0)
The OR 0 output (r20047) is connected with the motor's ON command

Functions
Example: AND operation

An example of an AND logic operation, explained in detail, including the use of a time block
is provided in the BICO technology: example (Page 18)chapter.
You can find additional information in the following manuals:
● Function Manual "Description of the Standard DCC Blocks"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/29193002)
● Function Manual "Free Function Blocks"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/35125827)

Functions
7.10 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function

These operating instructions describe the commissioning of the STO safety function when it
is controlled via a fail-safe digital input.
You will find a detailed description of all safety functions and control using PROFIsafe in the
Safety Integrated Function Manual, see Section Additional information on the inverter
(Page 292).
7.10.1 Prerequisite for STO use

In order to use the STO safety function, your machine should have already performed a risk
assessment (e.g. in compliance with EN ISO 1050, "Safety of machinery - Risk assessment -
Part 1: Principles"). The risk assessment must confirm that the inverter is permitted for use in
accordance with SIL 2 or PL d.
7.10.2 Permitted sensors
The fail-safe inputs of the

converter are designed for
connecting sensors with two NC
contacts.
It is not possible to directly connect
sensors with two NO contacts and
antivalent contacts (1 NO contact
and 1 NC contact). Permitted sensors
The fail-safe digital inputs are configured for both directly connecting safety sensors, e.g.
emergency stop control devices or light curtains, as well as for connecting pre-processing
safety relays, e.g. fail-safe controls.
On the following pages, you will find examples of interconnecting the fail-safe digital input
from "Basic safety", in accordance with PL d to EN 13849-1 and SIL2 to IEC 61508. You can
find further examples and information in the Safety Integrated Function Manual.

Functions
7.10.3 Connecting fail-safe digital inputs

On the following pages, you will find examples of connecting the fail-safe digital input from
"Basic safety", in accordance with PL d according to EN 13849-1 and SIL2 according to IEC
61508 for the case that all of the components are installed in a control cabinet.
&RQWURO8QLW
9287

)',

',&20
',&20
*1'
Figure 7-23 Connecting a sensor, e.g. Emergency Stop mushroom pushbutton or limit switch
9'&
&RQWURO8QLW
9
266'
266'
8V

)',

6,0$7,&)6 6,0$7,&)6
5* 5* ',&20
6HQGHU (PSI¦QJHU
',&20
8V
9

0
Figure 7-24 Connecting an electronic sensor, e.g. SIMATIC FS-400 light curtain
9'&
&RQWURO8QLW
$ < <

)',
7.&%
',&20
',&20
< < $ <
Figure 7-25 Connecting a safety relay, e.g. SIRIUS 3TK28

Functions
9'&
6,0$7,&
60 &RQWURO8QLW

)',
$[
',&20
',&20

0
Figure 7-26 Connecting an F digital output module, e.g. SIMATIC F digital output module
You can find additional connection options and connections in separate control cabinets in
the Safety Integrated Function Manual, see Section Additional information on the inverter
(Page 292).

Functions
7.10.4 F-DI signal filtering

The inverter checks the signals of the fail-safe digital input for consistency. Consistent
signals at both inputs always assume the same signal state (high or low).
Discrepancy
With electromechanical sensors (e.g. emergency stop buttons or door switches), the two
sensor contacts never switch at exactly the same time and are therefore temporarily
inconsistent (discrepancy). A long-term discrepancy points toward a fault in the wiring of a
fail-safe input, e.g. a wire break.
An adjustable filter in the inverter prevents faults caused by temporary discrepancy. Within
the filter tolerance time (parameters p9650 and p9850), the inverter suppresses the
discrepancy monitoring of the fail-safe inputs.
7HPSRUDU\GLVFUHSDQF\ 3HUPDQHQWGLVFUHSDQF\
,QSXWVLJQDOV ,QSXWVLJQDOV
'LVFUHSDQF\
)', )',
7ROHUDQFHWLPH W 7ROHUDQFHWLPH W
6DIHW\IXQFWLRQ 6DIHW\IXQFWLRQ
$FWLYH $FWLYH
W 6LJQDOGLVFUHSDQF\ W
Figure 7-27 Filter for suppressing discrepancy monitoring
The filter does not increase the inverter response time. The inverter activates its safety
functions as soon as one of the two F-DI signals changes its state from high to low.
Bit pattern test of fail-safe outputs and contact bounces of sensors

The inverter normally responds immediately to signal changes at its fail-safe input. This is
not required in the following cases:
1. When you interconnect the fail-safe input of the inverter with an electromechanical
sensor, contact bounce may result in signal changes occurring, to which the inverter
responds.

Functions
2. Several control modules test their fail-safe outputs using bit pattern tests (on/off tests), in
order to identify faults due to either short or cross circuiting. When you interconnect the
fail-safe input of the inverter with a fail-safe output of a control module, the inverter
responds to these test signals.
A signal change during a bit pattern test usually lasts 1 ms.
,QSXWVLJQDOV
)', %LWSDWWHUQWHVW
W
6DIHW\IXQFWLRQ
$FWLYH
,QDFWLYH
W
)DXOW)
W
Figure 7-28 Inverter response to a bit pattern test
If the signal to control STO is not "stable", then the inverter responds with a fault.
(Definition of a stable signal: Following a change to the F-DI input signals, the inverter
triggers an internal monitoring time. Up until the end of the time interval 5 x p9650, both input
signals must have a constant signal level. A constant signal level is a high or a low state, for
a period of at least p9650).

Functions
An adjustable signal filter in the inverter suppresses temporary signal changes using bit
pattern test or contact bounce.
,QSXWVLJQDOV
)', %LWSDWWHUQWHVW
W
'HERXQFHWLPH 'HERXQFHWLPH
6DIHW\IXQFWLRQ
$FWLYH
,QDFWLYH
W
Figure 7-29 Filter for suppressing temporary signal changes
Note
The filter increases the inverter response time. The inverter only activates its safety function
after the debounce time has elapsed (parameters p9651 and p9851).
Note
Debounce times for standard and safety functions
The debounce time p0724 for "standard" digital inputs has no influence over the fail-safe
input signals. Conversely, the same applies: The F-DI debounce time does not influence the
signals of the "standard" inputs.
If you use an input as a standard input, set the debounce time at p0724.
If you use an input as fail-safe input, set the debounce time as described above.

Functions
7.10.5 Forced dormant error detection

To fulfill the requirements of standards EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1 and IEC 61508 regarding
timely error detection, the inverter must regularly test its safety-relevant circuits to ensure
that they function correctly - this must be performed at least once every year.
After the power supply has been connected, the inverter checks its circuits to switch-off the
torque each time the STO function is selected.
The inverter monitors the regular test of its safety-relevant circuits using a time module.
S
3RZHU21
U
5HVHW 7

672 U
$
Figure 7-30 Forced dormant error detection monitoring
r9660 contains the remaining time until the monitoring responds. The inverter signals Alarm
A01699 after the monitoring time expires.
You define the monitoring time while commissioning the system depending on your particular
application.
Examples for the times when forced dormant error detection is performed:
● When the drives are at a standstill after the system has been switched on.
● When the protective door is opened.
● At defined intervals (e.g. every 8 hours).
● In automatic mode (time and event dependent).
If alarm A01699 signals that the monitoring time has expired, then you must initiate the
forced dormant error detection at the next opportunity. These alarms do not affect the
operation of your machine.
7.10.6 Password
The safety functions are protected against unauthorized changes by a password.
Note
If you want to change the parameters of the safety functions, but do not know the password,
please contact customer support.
The factory setting for the password is "0". During commissioning, choose your password
from the permissible range 1 … FFFF FFFF.

Functions
7.10.7 Commissioning the STO
7.10.7.1 Commissioning tool

We strongly recommend that you commission the safety functions using the STARTER PC
tool.
Table 7- 51 STARTER commissioning tool (PC software)
Download Order number

STARTER PC Connection Kit
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view The kit contains a STARTER DVD and USB
/en/10804985/130000) cable
6SL3255-0AA00-2CA0
7.10.7.2 Resetting the safety function parameters to the factory setting

Proceed as follows if you wish to reset the safety function parameters to the factory setting,
without influencing the standard parameters:
● Go online with STARTER.
● Open the screen form of the safety functions.
● Click on the "Restore Safety factory settings" button.
● Enter the password,for the safety functions.

● Confirm that the parameters have been saved (RAM to ROM).
● Go offline with STARTER.
● Switch off the converter supply voltage.
● Wait until all LEDs on the converter go dark. Now switch on the converter power supply
again (power on reset).

Functions
Procedure
● Go online with STARTER.
● In STARTER, call up the screens displaying the fail-safe functions and click on "Change
settings":
7.10.7.3 Defining commissioning method

● Select "STO via terminal".
● If you require the status signal "STO active" in your higher-level controller, interconnect it
accordingly.
● Click the button to call up the advanced settings for STO.

Functions
7.10.7.4 Setting STO

● You can adapt the STO function according to your requirements in the following screen.
● Set the following in the above screen:

– ① ② F-DI input filter (debounce time) and monitoring for simultaneous operation
(discrepancy):
The method of functioning of the two filters is described in the section entitled F-DI
signal filtering (Page 223).
– ③ ④ Time interval for forced dormant error detection:
Information regarding forced dormant error detection can be found in the Forced
dormant error detection (Page 226) section.
● Close the screen.
7.10.7.5 Activate settings

● Click "Copy parameters" and then click "Activate settings":
● You are prompted to allocate a password if the password = 0 (factory setting).

If you try to set a password that is not permissible, the old password will not be changed.
Further information can be found in the section Password (Page 226).
● Confirm the prompt for saving your settings (copy RAM to ROM).

Functions
● Switch off the inverter supply voltage.

● Wait until all LEDs on the inverter go dark. Now switch on the inverter supply voltage
7.10.7.6 Multiple assignment of the DI

● Check whether the digital inputs used as fail-safe input are also assigned a further
function.
NOTICE
Both, the assignment of digital inputs with the selection of a safety function or with a
"standard" function can lead to an unexpected behavior of the motor.
● Remove multiple assignments of the digital inputs:
Figure 7-31 Example: automatic assignment of digital inputs DI 4 and DI 5 with STO

Functions
Figure 7-32 Remove pre-assignment of digital inputs DI 4 and DI 5
● When you use the data set changeover CDS, you must delete the multiple assignment of
the digital inputs for all CDS.

Functions
7.10.8 Acceptance test - following completion of commissioning
7.10.8.1 Prerequisites and authorized persons

Requirements for acceptance tests are derived from the EC Machinery Directive and
ISO 13849-1.
● Check the safety-related functions and machine parts following commissioning.
● Issue an "Acceptance certificate" which describes the test results.
Prerequisites for the acceptance test

● The machine is properly wired.
● All safety equipment such as protective door monitoring devices, light barriers or
emergency-off switches are connected and ready for operation.
● Commissioning of the open-loop and closed-loop control must be complete. These
include, for example:
– Configuration of the setpoint channel.
– Position control in the higher-level controller.
– Drive control.
Authorized persons
Authorization within the scope of the acceptance test is a person authorized by the machine
manufacturer who, on account of his or her technical qualifications and knowledge of the
safety functions, is in a position to perform the acceptance test in the correct manner.
7.10.8.2 Complete acceptance test

A complete acceptance test includes the following:
1. Documentation
– Description of the machines and overview/block diagram
– Safety functions of the drive
– Description of safety equipment
2. Function test
– Test of the shutdown paths
– Test of safety functions used
3. Conclusion of the report
– Inspection of safety function parameters
– Recording of the checksums
– Verify the data backup
– Countersignatures

Functions
7.10.8.3 Reduced acceptance test (only STO)

A complete acceptance test is only necessary following first commissioning. An acceptance
test with a reduced scope is sufficient for expansions of safety functions.
The reduced acceptance tests must be carried out separately for each individual drive, as far
as the machine allows.
Reduced acceptance test for function extensions
Table 7- 52 Scope of the acceptance test depending on specific measures
Measure Acceptance test

Documentation Function test Completion of the certificate
Replacing the Control Unit or Supplement: Yes. Supplement:
the Power Modules. New checksums and
• Hardware data
countersignature
• Configuration
• Firmware Versions
Hardware replacement of Supplement: Yes. No.
safety-related distributed I/O Limitation to replaced
• Hardware data
devices (e.g. emergency off components.
switch). • Configuration
• Firmware Versions
Firmware - upgrading the Supplement: Yes. Supplement:
Control Unit. New checksums and
• Version data
countersignature.
• New safety functions
Functional expansion of the Supplementary safety functions Yes. Supplement:
machine (additional drive). for each drive and function Testing the additional New checksums and
table. functions. countersignature.
Functional expansion of a drive Supplement to the safety Yes. Supplement.
(e.g. enable STO). functions for each drive and Testing the additional New checksums and
function table. functions. countersignature.
Transfer of converter Supplement to the machine Yes. No, if data are identical
parameters to other identical description (checking of the Testing the interfaces (checking of checksums).
machines by means of series firmware versions). FDI or PROFIsafe.
commissioning.

Functions
7.10.8.4 Documentation
Machine overview
Enter your machine's data into the following table.
Designation …
Type …
Serial number …
Manufacturer …
End customer …
Overview image of the machine:
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
Converter data
Document the hardware and firmware versions for each safety-related converter of your
machine.
MLFB and hardware Converter firmware Version of the safety functions

version of the converter version
Designation of … r0018 = … r9770[0] r9770[1] r9770[2] r9770[3]
the 1st drive …
r9590[0] r9590[1] r9590[2] r9590[3]
Designation of …
the 2nd drive
… …

Functions
Function table
Fill in the following table for your machine.
Mode of operation Safety device Drive Controlling the safety Status of the safety
function function
… … … … …
… … …
… … … … …
… … …
Table 7- 53 Example:
Mode of operation Safety device Drive Controlling the safety Status of the safety
function function
Production Protective door closed and 1 - not active
locked 2 - not active
Protective door unlocked 1 F-DI 0 STO active
2 PROFIsafe STO active
Setup Protective door closed and 1 - not active
locked 2 PROFIsafe STO active
Protective door unlocked 1 F-DI 0 STO active
2 PROFIsafe STO active

Functions
7.10.8.5 Function test

The following is checked during the function test:
● The hardware is functioning properly.
● The digital inputs of the inverter are assigned correctly to the safety function.
● The PROFIsafe address of the inverter has been set correctly.
● The safety function has been parameterized correctly.
● Routine for the dormant error detection of the switch-off signal paths of the inverter.
Note
Perform the acceptance test with the maximum possible velocity and acceleration.
Table 7- 54 "Safe Torque Off" (STO) function
No. Description Status

1. Initial state:
• The inverter is in "Ready" state (p0010 = 0).
• The inverter indicates neither faults nor alarms for safety functions (r0945, r2122, r2132).
• STO is not active.

2. Switch on the motor (ON command).
3. Ensure that the correct motor is running.
4. Select STO while the motor is running
Note: Test each configured activation, e.g. via digital inputs and PROFIsafe.
5. Check the following:
• If a mechanical brake is not available, the motor coasts down.
A mechanical brake brakes the motor and holds it to ensure that it remains at a standstill.
• The inverter indicates neither faults nor alarms for safety functions.
• The inverter indicates:

"STO is selected" (r9773.0 = 1).
"STO is active" (r9773.1 = 1).
6. Deselect STO.
7. Check the following:
• The inverter indicates neither faults nor alarms for safety functions.
• The inverter indicates:

"STO is not selected" (r9773.0 = 0).
"STO is not active" (r9773.1 = 0).
• The inverter is in "Closing lockout" state (p0046.0 = 1).

8. Switch the motor off (OFF1 command) and then on again (ON command).
9. Ensure that the correct motor is running.

Functions
7.10.8.6 Completion of the certificate

Document your machine's data for each drive based on the following specifications.
Parameters of the safety functions

The function test does not detect all faults in the parameter assignment of safety functions,
e.g. forced dormant error detection time or filtering time of fail-safe inputs. Therefore, check
all parameters once more.
All parameter values checked

Designation of the 1st drive
Designation of the 2nd drive
…
Checksums of the safety functions

The converter calculates checksums across all parameters and safety functions.
When you change the safety function settings, the converter calculates new checksums.
This means that subsequent changes in your machine can be tracked.
In addition to the individual checksums of the parameters, the converter calculates and
saves the following values:
1. The "total" checksum across all checksums.
2. Time of the last parameter changed.
Labeling the drive Checksums

Processor 1 Processor 2 Total Time stamp
Designation of the p9798 p9898 r9781[0] r9782[0]
1st drive
p9799 p9899
… …

Functions
Data backup
Storage medium Holding area

Type Designation Date
Parameter
PLC program
Circuit diagrams
Countersignatures
Commissioning engineer
This confirms that the tests and checks have been carried out properly.
Date Name Company/dept. Signature
Machine manufacturer
This confirms that the parameters recorded above are correct.
Date Name Company/dept. Signature

Functions
7.11 Switchover between different settings

In several applications, the inverter must be able to be operated with different settings.
Example:
You connect different motors to one inverter. Depending on the particular motor, the inverter
must operate with the associated motor data and the appropriate ramp-function generator.
Drive data sets (DDS)

Your can parameterize several inverter functions differently and then switch over between
the different settings.
The associated parameters are indexed (index 0, 1, 2 or 3). Using control commands select
one of the four indices and therefore one of the four saved settings.
The settings in the inverter with the same index are known as drive data set.
6HWSRLQWFDOFXODWLRQ ~
6HWSRLQWVRXUFHV
5DPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU =
/LPLWLQJ
)L[HGVHWSRLQWV 0RWRUFRQWURO
0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU 0 =
-RJPRGH 7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU 9IFRQWURO ~
9HFWRUFRQWURO
0
&RPPDQGVRXUFHV 6WDWXV
,QYHUWHUFRQWURO
,QWHUIDFHV
0RWRUSURWHFWLRQ 0DWFKLQJWKHDSSOLFDWLRQ
,QWHUIDFHV
2YHUFXUUHQW %UDNLQJ
2YHUYROWDJH )O\LQJUHVWDUW
2YHUWHPSHUDWXUH 6\VWHPSURWHFWLRQ
)DLOVDIHFRPPDQGVRXUFHV 6DIHW\IXQFWLRQV )DLOVDIHVWDWXV
Figure 7-33 DDS switchover in the inverter

Functions
Using parameter p0180 you can define the number of command data sets (2, 3 or 4).
Table 7- 55 Selecting the number of command data sets
p0010 = 15 Drive commissioning: Data sets
p0180 Drive data sets (DDS) number(factory setting: 1)
p0010 = 0 Drive commissioning: Ready
Table 7- 56 Parameters for switching the drive data sets:
p0820 Drive data set selection DDS bit 0
p0821 Drive data set selection DDS bit 1
p0826 Motor changeover, motor number
r0051 Displaying the number of the DDS that is currently effective
For an overview of all the parameters that belong to the drive data sets and can be switched,
see the Parameter Manual.
Note
You can only switch over the motor data of the drive data sets in the "ready for operation"
state with the motor switched-off. The switchover time is approx. 50 ms.
If you do not switch over the motor data together with the drive data sets (i.e. same motor
number in p0826), then the drive data sets can also be switched over in operation.
Table 7- 57 Parameters for copying the drive data sets
p0819[0] Source drive data set
p0819[1] Target drive data set
p0819[2] = 1 Start copy operation

Service and maintenance 8
8.1 Overview of replacing converter components
In the event of a permanent function fault, you can replace the converter's Power Module or
Control Unit independently of one another. In the following cases, you may immediately
switch on the motor again after the replacement.
Replacing the Power Module Replacing the Control Unit with external backup of the
settings, e.g. on a memory card
Replacement: Replacement: Replacement: Replacement:
• Same type • Same type • Same type • Same type
• Same power rating • Higher power rating • Same firmware version • higherfirmware version
(e.g. replace FW V4.2 by
FW V4.3)
6,1$0,&6

)LUPZDUH9HUVLRQ
)LUPZDUH9HUVLRQ
&8
6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6
&8
30
30
30
&8
30

30
30
&8
&8
&8

6,1$0,&6
6,1$0,&6
6,1$0,&6
6,1$0,&6
6,1$0,&6
6,1$0,&6

Power Module and motor The converter automatically loads the settings on the
must be adapted to one memory card into the new CU.
another (ratio of motor and If you have saved the settings of your converter on another
Power Module rated power > medium, e.g. on an operator panel or on a PC, then after
1/8) the replacement, the settings must be loaded into the
converter.
WARNING
In all other cases, you must recommission the drive.

Service and maintenance
8.2 Replacing the Control Unit

After commissioning has been completed, we recommend that you back up your settings on
an external storage medium, e.g.: on a memory card or the operator panel.
If you do not back up your data, you have to recommission the drive when you replace the
Control Unit.
Procedure for replacing a Control Unit with a memory card

● Disconnect the line voltage of the Power Module and (if installed) the external 24 V
supply or the voltage for the relay outputs DO 0 and DO 2 of the Control Unit.
● Remove the signal cables of the Control Unit.
● Remove the defective CU from the Power Module.
● Plug the new CU on to the Power Module. The new CU must have the same order
number and the same or a higher firmware version as the CU that was replaced.
● Remove the memory card from the old Control Unit and insert it in the new Control Unit.
● Reconnect the signal cables of the Control Unit.
● Connect up the line voltage again.
● The converter adopts the settings from the memory card, saves them (protected against
power failure) in its internal parameter memory, and switches to "ready to start" state.
● Switch on the motor and check the function of the drive.

Procedure for replacing a Control Unit without a memory card

● Disconnect the line voltage of the Power Module and (if installed) the external 24 V
supply or the voltage for the relay outputs DO 0 and DO 2 of the Control Unit.
● Remove the signal cables of the Control Unit.
● Remove the defective CU from the Power Module.
● Plug the new CU on to the Power Module.
● Reconnect the signal cables of the Control Unit.
● Connect up the line voltage again.
● The converter goes into the "ready-to-switch-on" state.
● If you have backed up your settings:
– Load the settings from the operator panel or via STARTER into the converter.
– For converters of the same type and the same firmware version, you can now switch-
on the motor. Check the function of the drive
– For different converter types, then the converter outputs alarm A01028. This alarm
indicates that the settings that have been loaded are not compatible with the
converter. In this case, clear the alarm with p0971 = 1 and recommission the drive.
● If you have not backed up your settings, then you must recommission the drive.

If you replace an inverter with enabled safety functions, then you also need to confirm the
safety function settings on the new inverter. You will find the procedure in Section: Data
backup and standard commissioning (Page 81).
Acceptance test
If you activated the safety functions in the inverter, after replacing the inverter you must
perform an acceptance test for the safety functions.
● Switch off the inverter supply voltage.
● Wait until all LEDs on the inverter go dark. Now switch on the inverter power supply again
(power on reset).
● If you commissioned the inverter for the first time, carry out a complete acceptance test,
see Complete acceptance test (Page 232).
● In all other cases, after downloading the parameters into the inverter, carry-out a reduced
acceptance test. The reduced acceptance test is described in Section Reduced
acceptance test (only STO) (Page 233).

8.3 Replacing the Power Module
8.3 Replacing the Power Module
Procedure for replacing a Power Module

● Disconnect the Power Module from the line supply.
● If being used, switch off the 24 V supply of the Control Unit.
DANGER
Risk of electrical shock!
Hazardous voltage is still present for up to 5 minutes after the power supply has been
switched off.
It is not permissible to carry out any installation work before this time has expired!
● Remove the connecting cables of the Power Module.

● Remove the Control Unit from the Power Module.
● Replace the old Power Module with the new Power Module.
● Snap the Control Unit onto the new Power Module.
● Connect up the new Power Module using the connecting cables.
● Switch on the line supply and, if being used, the 24 V supply for the Control Unit.
● If necessary, recommission the drive (also see Overview of replacing converter
components (Page 241)).
Acceptance test of the safety functions

If you have activated the safety functions in the inverter, after replacing the Power Module,
the following steps are required:
● Acknowledge the fault code issued by the inverter.
● Perform a reduced acceptance test. The necessary measures are described in the
Chapter Reduced acceptance test (only STO) (Page 233).

Alarms, faults and system messages 9
The converter has the following diagnostic types:
● LED
The LED at the front of the converter immediately informs you about the most important
converter states right at the converter.
● Alarms and faults
The converter signals alarms and faults via the fieldbus, the terminal strip (when
appropriately set), on a connected operator panel or STARTER.
Alarms and faults have a unique number.
If the converter no longer responds

Due to faulty parameter settings, e.g. by loading a defective file from the memory card, the
converter can adopt the following condition:
● The motor is switched off.
● You cannot communicate with the converter, either via the Operator Panel or other
interfaces.
In this event proceed as follows:
● Remove the memory card if one is inserted in the converter.
● Repeat the power on reset until the converter outputs fault F01018:
– Switch off the converter supply voltage.
– Wait until all LEDs on the converter go dark. Now switch on the converter supply
voltage again.
● If the converter signals fault F01018, repeat the power on reset one more time.
● The converter must now have been restored to its factory settings.
● Recommission the converter.

Alarms, faults and system messages
9.1 Operating states indicated on LEDs

The LED RDY (Ready) is temporarily orange after the power supply voltage is switched-on.
As soon as the color of the LED RDY changes to either red or green, the LEDs signal the
inverter state.
Signal states of the LED

In addition to the signal states "on" and "off" there are two different flashing frequencies:
V
6ORZIODVKLQJ
4XLFNIODVKLQJ
Table 9- 1 Inverter diagnostics
LED Explanation
RDY BF
GREEN - on --- There is presently no fault
GREEN - slow --- Commissioning or reset to factory settings
RED - fast --- There is presently a fault
RED - fast RED - fast Incorrect memory card
Table 9- 2 Communication diagnostics via RS485
LED BF Explanation
On Receive process data
RED - slow Bus active - no process data
RED - fast No bus activity
Table 9- 3 Communication diagnostics via PROFIBUS DP
LED BF Explanation
off Cyclic data exchange (or PROFIBUS not used, p2030 = 0)
RED - slow Bus fault - configuration fault
RED - fast Bus fault
- no data exchange
- baud rate search
- no connection

Table 9- 4 Diagnostics of the safety functions
SAFE LED Meaning

YELLOW - on One or more safety functions are enabled, but not active.
YELLOW - slow One or more safety functions are active; no safety function faults have
occurred.
YELLOW - rapid The converter has detected a safety function fault and initiated a STOP
response.

9.2 Alarms
9.2 Alarms
Alarms have the following properties:
● They do not have a direct effect in the inverter and disappear once the cause has been
removed
● They do not need have to be acknowledged
● They are signaled as follows
– Status display via bit 7 in status word 1 (r0052)
– at the Operator Panel with a Axxxxx
– via STARTER, if you click on TAB at the bottom left of the STARTER screen
In order to pinpoint the cause of an alarm, there is a unique alarm code and also a value for
each alarm.
Alarm buffer
For each incoming alarm, the inverter saves the alarm, alarm value and the time that the
alarm was received.
$ODUPFRGH $ODUPYDOXH $ODUPWLPH $ODUPWLPH

UHFHLYHG UHPRYHG
$ODUP U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@
, )ORDW 'D\V PV 'D\V PV
Figure 9-1 Saving the first alarm in the alarm buffer
r2124 and r2134 contain the alarm value - important for diagnostics - as "fixed point" or
"floating point" number.
The alarm times are displayed in r2145 and r2146 (in complete days) as well as in r2123 and
r2125 (in milliseconds referred to the day of the alarm).
The inverter uses an internal time calculation to save the alarm times. More information on
the internal time calculation can be found in Chapter System runtime (Page 181).
As soon as the alarm has been removed, the inverter writes the associated instant in time
into parameters r2125 and r2146. The alarm remains in the alarm buffer even if the alarm
has been removed.
If an additional alarm is received, then this is also saved. The first alarm is still saved. The
alarms that have occurred are counted in p2111.

UHFHLYHG UHPRYHG
$ODUP U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@
$ODUP >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
Figure 9-2 Saving the second alarm in the alarm buffer
The alarm buffer can contain up to eight alarms. If an additional alarm is received after the
eighth alarm - and none of the last eight alarms have been removed - then the next to last
alarm is overwritten.

9.2 Alarms

UHFHLYHG UHPRYHG
$ODUP U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@

$ODUP >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
$ODUP >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
$ODUP >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
$ODUP >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
$ODUP >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
$ODUP >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
/DVWDODUP >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
Figure 9-3 Complete alarm buffer
Emptying the alarm buffer: Alarm history

The alarm history traces up to 56 alarms.
The alarm history only takes alarms that have been removed from the alarm buffer. If the
alarm buffer is completely filled - and an additional alarm occurs - then the inverter shifts all
alarms that have been removed from the alarm buffer into the alarm history. In the alarm
history, alarms are also sorted according to the "alarm time received", however, when
compared to the alarm buffer, in the inverse sequence:
● the youngest alarm is in index 8
● the second youngest alarm is in index 9
● etc.
0RYLQJDODUPVWKDW $ODUPKLVWRU\IRUDODUPV
$ODUPEXIIHU KDYHEHHQ WKDWKDYHEHHQUHPRYHG
HOLPLQDWHGLQWRWKH
>@ DODUPKLVWRU\ >@ PRVWUHFHQWDODUP
>@ >@
>@ >@
>@ >@
>@
>@
>@
>@
>@ 'HOHWLQJWKH
ROGHVWDODUPV
>@
>@
>@
$ODUPEXIIHULVIXOO
Figure 9-4 Shifting alarms that have been removed into the alarm history
The alarms that have still not been removed remain in the alarm buffer and are resorted so
that gaps between the alarms are filled.

9.2 Alarms
If the alarm history is filled up to index 63, each time a new alarm is accepted in the alarm
history, the oldest alarm is deleted.
Parameters of the alarm buffer and the alarm history
Table 9- 5 Important parameters for alarms
r2122 Alarm code
Displays the numbers of alarms that have occurred
r2123 Alarm time received in milliseconds
Displays the time in milliseconds when the alarm occurred
r2124 Alarm value
Displays additional information about the alarm
r2125 Alarm time removed in milliseconds
Displays the time in milliseconds when the alarm was removed
p2111 Alarm counter
Number of alarms that have occurred after the last reset
When setting p2111 = 0, all of the alarms that have been removed from the alarm
buffer [0...7] are transferred into the alarm history [8...63]
r2145 Alarm time received in days
Displays the time in days when the alarm occurred
r2132 Actual alarm code
Displays the code of the alarm that last occurred
r2134 Alarm value for float values
Displays additional information about the alarm that occurred for float values
r2146 Alarm time removed in days
Displays the time in days when the alarm was removed
Extended settings for alarms
Table 9- 6 Extended settings for alarms
You can change up to 20 different alarms into a fault or suppress alarms:
p2118 Setting the message number for the message type
Select the alarms for which the message type should be changed
p2119 Setting the message type
Setting the message type for the selected alarm
1: Fault
2: Alarm
3: No message
You will find details in function block diagram 8075 and in the parameter description of the
List Manual.

9.3 Faults
9.3 Faults
A fault displays a severe fault during operation of the inverter.
The inverter signals a fault as follows:
● at the Operator Panel with Fxxxxx
● at the Control Unit using the red LED RDY
● in bit 3 of the status word 1 (r0052)
● via STARTER
To delete a fault message, you need to remedy the cause of the fault and acknowledge the
fault.
Every fault has a clear fault code and also a fault value. You need this information to
determine the cause of the fault.
Fault buffer of actual values

For each fault received, the inverter saves the fault code, fault value and the time of the fault.
)DXOWFRGH )DXOWYDOXH )DXOWWLPH )DXOWWLPH

UHFHLYHG UHPRYHG
U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@
VWIDXOW
, )ORDW 'D\V PV 'D\V PV
Figure 9-5 Saving the first fault in the fault buffer
r0949 and r2133 contain the fault value - important for diagnostics - as "fixed point" or
"floating point" number.
The "fault time received" is in parameter r2130 (in complete days) as well as in parameter
r0948 (in milliseconds referred to the day of the fault). The "fault time removed" is written into
parameters r2109 and r2136 when the fault has been acknowledged.
The inverter uses its internal time calculation to save the fault times. More information on the
internal time calculation can be found in Chapter System runtime (Page 181).
If an additional fault occurs before the first fault has been acknowledged, then this is also
saved. The first alarm remains saved. The fault cases that have occurred are counted in
p0952. A fault case can contain one or several faults.

UHFHLYHG UHPRYHG
VWIDXOW U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@
QGIDXOW >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
Figure 9-6 Saving the second fault in the fault buffer

9.3 Faults
The fault buffer can accept up to eight actual faults. The next to last fault is overwritten if an
additional fault occurs after the eighth fault.

UHFHLYHG UHPRYHG
VWIDXOW U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@

QGIDXOW >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
UGIDXOW >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
WKIDXOW >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
WKIDXOW >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
WKIDXOW >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
WKIDXOW >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
/DVWIDXOW >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
Figure 9-7 Complete fault buffer
Fault acknowledgement
In most cases, you have the following options to acknowledge a fault:
● Switch-off the inverter power supply and switch-on again.
● Press the acknowledgement button on the operator panel
● Acknowledgement signal at digital input 2
● Acknowledgement signal in bit 7 of control word 1 (r0054) for Control Units with fieldbus
interface
Faults that are triggered by monitoring of hardware and firmware inside the inverter can only
be acknowledged by switching off and on again. You will find a note about this restricted
option to acknowledge faults in the fault list of the List Manual.
Emptying the fault buffer: Fault history

The fault history can contain up to 56 faults.
The fault acknowledgement has no effect as long as none of the fault causes of the fault
buffer have been removed. If at least one of the faults in the fault buffer has been removed
(the cause of the fault has been removed) and you acknowledge the faults, then the
following happens:
1. The inverter accepts all faults from the fault buffer in the first eight memory locations of
the fault history (indices 8 ... 15).
2. The inverter deletes the faults that have been removed from the fault buffer.
3. The inverter writes the time of acknowledgement of the faults that have been removed
into parameters r2136 and r2109 (fault time removed).

9.3 Faults
6KLIWRUFRS\ )DXOWKLVWRU\
IDXOWVLQWRWKH
1HZHVWIDXOWV 2OGHVWIDXOWV
)DXOWEXIIHU IDXOWKLVWRU\
>@ >@ >@ >@ 'HOHWH

ROGHVWIDXOWV
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@
$FNQRZOHGJH
IDXOW
Figure 9-8 Fault history after acknowledging the faults
After acknowledgement, the faults that have not been removed are located in the fault buffer
as well as in the fault history. For these faults, the "fault time coming" remains unchanged
and the "fault time removed" remains empty.
If less than eight faults were shifted or copied into the fault history, the memory locations with
the higher indices remain empty.
The inverters shifts the values previously saved in the fault history each by eight indices.
Faults, which were saved in indices 56 … 63 before the acknowledgement, are deleted.
Deleting the fault history

If you wish to delete all faults from the fault history, set parameter p0952 to zero.

9.3 Faults
Parameters of the fault buffer and the fault history
Table 9- 7 Important parameters for faults
r0945 Fault code
Displays the numbers of faults that have occurred
r0948 Fault time received in milliseconds
Displays the time in milliseconds when the fault occurred
r0949 Fault value
Displays additional information about the fault
p0952 Fault cases, counter
Number of fault cases that have occurred since the last acknowledgement
The fault buffer is deleted with p0952 = 0.
r2109 Fault time removed in milliseconds
Displays the time in milliseconds when the fault occurred
r2130 Fault time received in days
Displays the time in days when the fault occurred
r2131 Actual fault code
Displays the code of the oldest fault that is still active
r2133 Fault value for float values
Displays additional information about the fault that occurred for float values
r2136 Fault time removed in days
Displays the time in days when the fault was removed
The motor cannot be switched-on

If the motor cannot be switched-on, then check the following:
● Is a fault present?
If yes, then remove the fault cause and acknowledge the fault
● Does p0010 = 0?
If not, the inverter is e.g. still in a commissioning state.
● Is the inverter reporting the "ready to start" status (r0052.0 = 1)?
● Is the inverter missing enabling (r0046)?
● Are the command and setpoint sources for the inverter (p0015) correctly parameterized?
In other words, where is the inverter getting its speed setpoint and commands from
(fieldbus or analog input)?
● Do the motor and inverter match?
Compare the data on the motor's nameplate with the corresponding parameters in the
inverter (P0300 ff).

9.3 Faults
Extended settings for faults
You can change the fault response of the motor for up to 20 different fault codes:
p2100 Setting the fault number for fault response
Selecting the faults for which the fault response should be changed
p2101 Setting, fault response
Setting the fault response for the selected fault
You can change the acknowledgement type for up to 20 different fault codes:
p2126 Setting the fault number for the acknowledgement mode
Selecting the faults for which the acknowledgement type should be changed
p2127 Setting, acknowledgement mode
Setting the acknowledgement type for the selected fault
1: Can only be acknowledged using POWER ON
2: IMMEDIATE acknowledgment after removing the fault cause
You can change up to 20 different faults into an alarm or suppress faults:

p2118 Setting the message number for the message type
Selecting the message for which the message type should be selected
p2119 Setting the message type
Setting the message type for the selected fault
1: Fault
2: Alarm
3: No message
You will find details in function diagram 8075 and in the parameter description of the List
Manual.

9.4 List of alarms and faults

Axxxxx Alarm
Fyyyyy: Fault
Table 9- 9 The most important alarms and faults of the safety functions
Number Cause Remedy

F01600 STOP A initiated Select STO and then deselect again
F01650 Acceptance test required Carry out acceptance test and create test certificate.
Switch the Control Unit off and then on again.
F01659 Write task for parameter rejected Cause: A parameter reset was selected. The fail-safe parameters have not
yet been reset, as the safety functions are enabled
Remedy: block safety functions or reset fail-safe parameters (p0970 = 5),
then reset the drive parameters once again.
A01666 Static 1 signal on the F-DI for Setting F-DI to logical 0 signal
secure acknowledgement
A01698 Commissioning mode active for This message is withdrawn after the safety functions have been
safety functions commissioned
A01699 Shutdown path test required After the next time that the "STO" function is deselected, the message is
withdrawn and the monitoring time is reset
F30600 STOP A initiated Select STO and then deselect again
Table 9- 10 Faults, which can only be acknowledged by switching the inverter off and on again (power on reset)
Number Cause Remedy

F01000 Software fault in CU Replace CU.
F01001 Floating Point Exception Switch CU off and on again.
F01015 Software fault in CU Upgrade firmware or contact technical support.
F01018 Power-up aborted more than once After this fault has been output, the module is booted with the factory
settings.
Remedy: Back up factory setting with p0971=1. Switch CU off and on
again. Recommission the inverter.
F01040 Parameters must be saved Save parameters (p0971).
Switch CU off and on again.
F01044 Loading of memory data card Replace memory card or CU.
defective
F01105 CU: Insufficient memory Reduce number of data records.
F01205 CU: Time slice overflow Contact technical support.
F01250 CU hardware fault Replace CU.
F01512 An attempt has been made to Create scaling or check transfer value.
establish an conversion factor for
scaling which is not present
F01662 CU hardware fault Switch CU off and on again, upgrade firmware, or contact technical
support.
F30022 Power Module: Monitoring UCE Check or replace the Power Module.
F30052 Incorrect Power Module data Replace Power Module or upgrade CU firmware.

Number Cause Remedy

F30053 Error in FPGA data Replace the Power Module.
F30662 CU hardware fault Switch CU off and on again, upgrade firmware, or contact technical
support.
F30664 CU power up aborted Switch CU off and on again, upgrade firmware, or contact technical
support.
F30850 Software fault in Power Module Replace Power Module or contact technical support.
Table 9- 11 The most important alarms and faults
Number Cause Remedy

F01018 Power-up aborted more than once 1. Switch the module off and on again.
2. After this fault has been output, the module is booted with the factory
settings.
3. Recommission the converter.
A01028 Configuration error Explanation: Parameterization on the memory card has been created with
a different type of module (order number, MLFB)
Check the module parameters and recommission if necessary.
F01033 Unit switchover: Reference Set the value of the reference parameter not equal to 0.0 (p0304, p0305,
parameter value invalid p0310, p0596, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004).
F01034 Unit switchover: Calculation of the Select the value of the reference parameter so that the parameters
parameter values after reference involved can be calculated in the per unit notation (p0304, p0305, p0310,
value change unsuccessful p0596, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004).
F01122 Frequency at the probe input too Reduce the frequency of the pulses at the probe input.
high
A01590 Motor maintenance interval lapsed Carry out maintenance and reset the maintenance interval (p0651).
A01900 PROFIBUS: Configuration Explanation: A PROFIBUS master is attempting to establish a connection
telegram faulty with a faulty configuration telegram.
Check the bus configuration on the master and slave side.
A01910 Setpoint timeout The alarm is generated when p2040 ≠ 0 ms and one of the following
F01910 causes is present:
• The bus connection is interrupted
• The MODBUS master is switched off
• Communications error (CRC, parity bit, logical error)
• An excessively low value for the fieldbus monitoring time (p2040)
A01920 PROFIBUS: Cyclic connection Explanation: The cyclic connection to PROFIBUS master is interrupted.
interrupt Establish the PROFIBUS connection and activate the PROFIBUS master
with cyclic operation.
F03505 Analog input, wire break Check the connection to the signal source for interrupts.
Check the level of the signal supplied.
The input current measured by the analog input can be read out in r0752.
A03520 Temperature sensor fault Check that the sensor is connected correctly.
A05000 Power Module overtemperature Check the following:
A05001 - Is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
A05002 - Are the load conditions and duty cycle configured accordingly?
A05004 - Has the cooling failed?
A05006

Number Cause Remedy

F06310 Supply voltage (p0210) incorrectly Check the parameterized supply voltage and if required change (p0210).
parameterized Check the line voltage.
F07011 Motor overtemperature Reduce the motor load.
Check ambient temperature.
Check the wiring and connection of the sensor.
A07012 I2t Motor Module overtemperature Check and if necessary reduce the motor load.
Check the motor's ambient temperature.
Check thermal time constant p0611.
Check overtemperature fault threshold p0605.
A07015 Motor temperature sensor alarm Check that the sensor is connected correctly.
Check the parameter assignment (p0601).
F07016 Motor temperature sensor fault Make sure that the sensor is connected correctly.
Check the parameterization (p0601).
Deactivate the temperature sensor fault (p0607 = 0).
F07086 Unit switchover: Parameter limit Check the adapted parameter values and if required correct.
F07088 violation
F07320 Automatic restart aborted Increase the number of restart attempts (p1211). The actual number of
start attempts is shown in r1214.
Increase the wait time in p1212 and/or monitoring time in p1213.
Connect an ON command (p0840).
Increase the monitoring time of the power unit or switch off (p0857).
Reduce the wait time for resetting the fault counter p1213[1] so that fewer
faults are registered in the time interval.
A07321 Automatic restart active Explanation: The automatic restart (AR) is active. During voltage recovery
and/or when remedying the causes of pending faults, the drive is
automatically switched back on.
F07330 Search current measured too low Increase search current (p1202), check motor connection.
A07400 VDC_max controller active If it is not desirable that the controller intervenes:
• Increase the ramp-down times.
• Deactivate the VDC_max controller (p1240 = 0 for vector control, p1280
= 0 for U/f control).
A07409 U/f control, current limiting The alarm automatically disappears after one of the following measures:
controller active
• Increase the current limit (p0640).
• Reduce the load.
• Slow down the up ramp for the setpoint speed.
F07426 Technology controller actual value • Adapt the limits to the signal level (p2267, p2268).
limited
• Check the actual value scaling (p2264).

Number Cause Remedy

F07801 Motor overcurrent Check current limits (p0640).
Vector control: Check current controller (p1715, p1717).
U/f control: Check the current limiting controller (p1340 … p1346).
Increase acceleration ramp (p1120) or reduce load.
Check motor and motor cables for short circuit and ground fault.
Check motor for star-delta connection and rating plate parameterization.
Check power unit / motor combination.
Select flying restart function (p1200) if switched to rotating motor.
A07805 Drive: Power unit overload I2t • Reduce the continuous load.
• Adapt the load cycle.
• Check the assignment of rated currents of the motor and power unit.
F07806 Regenerative power limit exceeded Increase deceleration ramp.
Reduce driving load.
Use power unit with higher energy recovery capability.
For vector control, the regenerative power limit in p1531 can be reduced
until the fault is no longer activated.
F07807 Short circuit detected • Check the converter connection on the motor side for any phase-
phase short-circuit.
• Rule out that line and motor cables have been interchanged.
A07850 External alarm 1 … 3 The signal for "external alarm 1" has been triggered.
A07851 Parameters p2112, p2116 and p2117 determine the signal sources for the
A07852 external alarm 1… 3.
Remedy: Rectify the cause of this alarm.
F07860 External fault 1 … 3 Remove the external causes for this fault.
F07861
F07862
F07900 Motor blocked Check that the motor can run freely.
Check the torque limits (r1538 and r1539).
Check the parameters of the "Motor blocked" message (p2175, p2177).
F07901 Motor overspeed Activate precontrol of the speed limiting controller (p1401 bit 7 = 1).
Increase hysteresis for overspeed signal p2162.
F07902 Motor stalled Check whether the motor data has been parameterized correctly and
perform motor identification.
Check the current limits (p0640, r0067, r0289). If the current limits are too
low, the drive cannot be magnetized.
Check whether motor cables are disconnected during operation.
A07903 Motor speed deviation Increase p2163 and/or p2166.
Increase the torque, current and power limits.
A07910 Motor overtemperature Check the motor load.
Check the motor's ambient temperature.
Check the KTY84 sensor.
Check the overtemperatures of the thermal model (p0626 ... p0628).
A07920 Torque/speed too low The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope curve.
A07921 Torque/speed too high

Number Cause Remedy

A07922 Torque/speed out of tolerance • Check the connection between the motor and the load.
• Adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load.
F07923 Torque/speed too low • Check the connection between the motor and the load.
F07924 Torque/speed too high • Adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load.
A07927 DC braking active Not required
A07980 Rotary measurement activated Not required
A07981 No enabling for rotary Acknowledge pending faults.
measurement Establish missing enables (see r00002, r0046).
A07991 Motor data identification activated Switch on the motor and identify the motor data.
F30001 Overcurrent Check the following:
• Motor data, if required, carry out commissioning
• Motor connection method (Υ / Δ)
• U/f operation: Assignment of rated currents of motor and Power
Module
• Line quality
• Make sure that the line commutating reactor is connected properly
• Power cable connections
• Power cables for short-circuit or ground fault
• Power cable length
• Line phases
If this doesn't help:
• U/f operation: Increase the acceleration ramp
• Reduce the load
• Replace the power unit
F30002 DC-link voltage overvoltage Increase the ramp-down time (p1121).
Set the rounding times (p1130, p1136).
Activate the DC link voltage controller (p1240, p1280).
Check the line voltage (p0210).
Check the line phases.
F30003 DC-link voltage undervoltage Check the line voltage (p0210).
F30004 Converter overtemperature Check whether the converter fan is running.
Check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
Check whether the motor is overloaded.
Reduce the pulse frequency.
F30005 I2t converter overload Check the rated currents of the motor and Power Module.
Reduce current limit p0640.
When operating with U/f characteristic: Reduce p1341.
F30011 Line phase failure Check the converter's input fuses.
Check the motor cables.
F30015 Motor cable phase failure Check the motor cables.
Increase the ramp-up or ramp-down time (p1120).

Number Cause Remedy

F30021 Ground fault • Check the power cable connections.
• Check the motor.
• Check the current transformer.
• Check the cables and contacts of the brake connection (a wire might
be broken).
F30027 Time monitoring for DC link pre- Check the supply voltage at the input terminals.
charging Check the line voltage setting (p0210).
F30035 Overtemperature, intake air • Check whether the fan is running.
F30036 Overtemperature, inside area • Check the fan filter elements.
• Check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
F30037 Rectifier overtemperature See F30035 and, in addition:
• Check the motor load.
• Check the line phases
A30049 Internal fan defective Check the internal fan and if required replace.
A30502 DC link overvoltage • Check the unit supply voltage (p0210).
• Check the dimensioning of the line reactor.
A30920 Temperature sensor fault Check that the sensor is connected correctly.
F30059 Internal fan defective Check the internal fan and if required replace.
For further information, please refer to the List Manual.


Technical data 10
10.1 Technical data, CU240B-2 Control Unit
Feature Data
Operating voltage Supply from the Power Module or an external 24 V DC supply (20.4 V ... 28.8 V, 1 A) via control
terminals 31 and 32
Heat loss 5.0 W plus power loss of output voltages
Output voltages 18 V to 30 V (max. 200 mA)
10 V ±0.5 V (max. 10 mA)
Setpoint resolution 0.01 Hz
Digital inputs • 4 digital inputs, DI 0 … DI 3, isolated;
• Low < 5 V, high > 11 V, maximum input voltage 30 V, current consumption 5.5 mA
• Response time: 10 ms without debounce time (p0724)
Analog input AI 0: 12-bit resolution, differential input, 0 V … 10 V, 0 mA … 20 mA and -10 V … +10 V
Reaction time: 13 ms ± 1 ms
Can be configured as additional digital input: Low < 1.6 V, High > 4.0 V
Reaction time: 13 ms ± 1 ms without debounce time (p0724)
Digital output DO 0: Relay output 30 V DC / max. 0.5 A with resistive load, update time 2 ms
For applications, which require UL certification, the voltage at DO 0 must not exceed 30 V DC
referred to ground potential and must be supplied via a grounded class 2 power supply.
Analog output AO 0: 0 V … 10 V or 0 mA … 20 mA, reference potential: "GND", resolution 16 bit, update time: 4
ms
Temperature sensor • PTC: Short-circuit monitoring 22 Ω, switching threshold 1650 Ω
• KTY84
• ThermoClick sensor with dry contact
USB interface Mini-B
Dimensions (WxHxD) 73 mm × 199 mm × 46 mm
Weight 0.49 kg
Memory cards MMC (we recommend a card with Order No. 6SL3254-0AM00-0AA0).
SD (Secure Digital Memory Card, we recommend the card with Order No.
6ES7954-8LB00-0AA0).
SDHC (SD High Capacity) cannot be used.
Operating temperature 0 °C … 55 °C (operation without inserted operator panel)
0 °C … 50 °C (operation with inserted operator panel)
Observe any possible restrictions as a result of the Power Module.

Technical data
10.2 Technical data, CU240E-2 Control Unit
Feature Data
Operating voltage Supply from the Power Module or an external 24 V DC supply (20.4 V … 28.8 V, 0.5 A) via
control terminals 31 and 32
Heat loss 5.0 W plus power loss of output voltages
Output voltages 18 V to 30 V (max. 200 mA)
10 V ±0.5 V (max. 10 mA)
Setpoint resolution 0.01 Hz
Digital inputs • 6 digital inputs, DI 0 … DI 5, isolated;
• Low < 5 V, high > 11 V, maximum input voltage 30 V, current consumption 5.5 mA
• Response time: 10 ms without debounce time (p0724)
Pulse input Digital input 3, maximum pulse frequency 32 kHz
Analog inputs (differential AI 0, AI 1: 12-bit resolution, differential inputs, 0 V … 10 V, 0 mA … 20 mA and -10 V … +10 V,
inputs, resolution 12 bits) reaction time: 13 ms ± 1 ms
Can be configured as additional digital inputs: Low < 1.6 V, High > 4.0 V.
Reaction time: 13 ms ± 1 ms without debounce time (p0724).
Digital outputs / relay • DO 0: Relay output, 30 V DC / max. 0.5 A with resistive load
outputs
• DO 1: Transistor output, 30 V DC / max. 0.5 A with resistive load, protection against
incorrect voltage polarity
• DO 2: Relay output, 30 V DC / max. 0.5 A with resistive load
Update time of all DO: 2 ms
For applications, which require UL certification, the voltage at DO 0 and at DO 2 must not
exceed 30 V DC referred to ground potential and must be supplied via a grounded class 2
power supply.
Analog outputs AO 0, AO 1: 0 V … 10 V or 0 mA … 20 mA, reference potential: "GND", resolution 16 bit,
update time: 4 ms
Temperature sensor • PTC: Short-circuit monitoring 22 Ω, switching threshold 1650 Ω
• KTY84
• ThermoClick sensor with dry contact
Fail-safe digital input • DI4 and DI5 form a fail-safe digital input
(Basic Safety)
• Maximum input voltage 30 V, 5.5 mA
• Response time:
– Typical: 5 ms + debounce time p9651 (6 ms, if p9651 = 0)
– Worst-case scenario: 15 ms + debounce time p9651 (16 ms, if p9651 = 0)
You will find the "Extended Safety" data in the Safety Integrated Function Manual, see section
Additional information on the inverter (Page 292).
PFH 5 × 10E-8
USB interface Mini-B
Dimensions (WxHxD) 73 mm × 199 mm × 46 mm
Weight 0.49 kg

Technical data
Feature Data
Memory cards MMC (we recommend a card with Order No. 6SL3254-0AM00-0AA0).
SD (Secure Digital Memory Card, we recommend the card with Order No.
6ES7954-8LB00-0AA0).
SDHC (SD High Capacity) cannot be used.
Operating temperature 0 °C … 55 °C (operation without inserted operator panel)
0 °C … 50 °C (operation with inserted operator panel)
Observe any possible restrictions as a result of the Power Module.

Technical data
10.3 Technical data, Power Modules
Permissible converter overload

There are two different power data specifications for the Power Modules: "Low Overload"
(LO) and "High Overload" (HO), depending on the expected load.
3HUPLVVLEOHRYHUORDG 3HUPLVVLEOHRYHUORDG
)RUORZRYHUORDG/2XSWRN: )RUKLJKRYHUORDG+2XSWRN:

RYHUORDGIRUV
RYHUORDGIRUV
RYHUORDGIRUV
RYHUORDGIRUV
%DVHORDGIRUV
%DVHORDGIRUV
%DVHORDG/2
%DVHORDG+2
W W
3HUPLVVLEOHRYHUORDG 3HUPLVVLEOHRYHUORDG
)RUORZRYHUORDG/2XSWRN: )RUKLJKRYHUORDG+2XSWRN:

RYHUORDGIRUV
RYHUORDGIRUV
RYHUORDGIRUV
RYHUORDGIRUV
%DVHORDGIRUV
%DVHORDGIRUV
%DVHORDG/2
%DVHORDG+2
W W
Figure 10-1 Duty cycles, "High Overload" and "Low Overload"
Note
The base load (100% power or current) of "Low Overload" is greater than the base load of
"High Overload".
We recommend the "SIZER" engineering software to select the inverter based on duty
cycles. See Additional information on the inverter (Page 292).

Technical data
Definitions
• LO input current 100 % of the permissible input current for a load cycle according to
Low Overload (LO base load input current).
• LO output current 100 % of the permissible output current for a load cycle according
to Low Overload (LO base load output current).
• LO power Power of the inverter for LO output current.
• HO input current 100 % of the permissible input current for a load cycle according to
High Overload (HO base load input current).
• HO output current 100 % of the permissible output current for a load cycle according
to High Overload (HO base load output current).
• HO power Power of the inverter for HO output current.
If the power data comprise rated values without any further specifications they always refer
to an overload capability corresponding to Low Overload.
NOTICE
UL-certified fuses must be used
In order that the system is in compliance with UL, UL certified fuses, circuit breakers or self-
protected combination motor controllers must be used.

Technical data
10.3.1 Technical data, PM240
Note
The given input currents are valid for operation without a line reactor for a line voltage of 400
V with Vk = 1 % referred to the rated power of the inverter. If a line reactor is used, the
specified values are reduced by a few percent.
General data, PM240 - IP20
Feature Version
Line voltage 3-ph. 380 V … 480 V AC ± 10 %
The actual permissible line voltage depends on the installation altitude.
Input frequency 47 Hz … 63 Hz
Power factor λ 0,7 ... 0,85
Starting current Less than the input current
Pulse frequency (factory 4 kHz for 0.37 kW ... 90 kW
setting) 2 kHz for 110 kW ... 250 kW
The pulse frequency can be increased in 2 kHz steps. A higher pulse frequency reduces
the permissible output current.
Electromagnetic compatibility The devices are suitable for environmental classes C1 and C2 in conformance with
IEC61800-3. For details, see the Hardware Installation Manual, Appendix A2
Braking methods DC braking, compound braking, dynamic braking with integrated braking chopper
Degree of protection IP20
Operating temperature
● without power reduction LO operation of all power 0 °C … +40 °C (32 °F … 104 °F)
ratings 0 °C … +50 °C (32 °F … 122 °F)
HO operation: 0 °C … +40 °C (32 °F … 104 °F)
● with power reduction 0.37 kW ... 110 kW up to 60 °C (140° F), for details, refer to the Hardware
HO operation: 132 kW … 200 Installation Manual
kW
all power ratings, HO/LO
Storage temperature -40 °C … +70 °C (-40 °F … 158 °F)
Relative humidity < 95 % RH - condensation not permissible
Environmental requirements Protected according to environmental class 3C2 to EN 60721-3-3 against damaging
chemical substances
Shock and vibration Do not allow the inverter to fall and avoid it being subject to hard shocks. Do not install
the inverter in an area where it could be continuously subject to vibration.
Electromagnetic radiation Do not install the inverter close to sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Installation altitude
● without power reduction 0.37 kW ... 132 kW up to 1000 m (3300 ft) above sea level
160 kW ... 250 kW up to 2000 m (6500 ft) above sea level
● with power reduction all power ratings up to 4000 m (13000 ft) above sea level, for details refer to the
Hardware Installation Manual.
Standards UL, cUL, CE, C-tick, SEMI F47
In order that the system is UL-compliant, UL-certified fuses, overload circuit-breakers or
intrinsically safe motor protection devices must be used.

Technical data
Power-dependent data, PM240 - IP20
Table 10- 1 PM240 frame size A, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V, ± 10 %
Order number Without filter 6SL3224-0BE13-7UA0 6SL3224-0BE15-5UA0 6SL3224-0BE17-5UA0

Values based on Low Overload
● LO power 0.37 kW 0.55 kW 0.75 kW
● LO input current 1.6 A 2.0 A 2.5 A
● LO output current 1.3 A 1.7 A 2.2 A
Values based on High Overload
● HO power 0.37 kW 0.55 kW 0.75 kW
● HO input current 1.6 A 2.0 A 2.5 A
● HO output current 1.3 A 1.7 A 2.2 A
General values
● Power loss 0.097 kW 0.099 kW 0.102 kW
● Fuse 10 A 10 A 10 A
● Cooling air requirement 4.8 l/s 4.8 l/s 4.8 l/s
● Cable cross-section for line and
motor connection 1 … 2.5 mm2 1 … 2.5 mm2 1 … 2.5 mm2
● Torque for line and motor and
motor connection 1.1 Nm 1.1 Nm 1.1 Nm
● Weight 1.2 kg 1.2 kg 1.2 kg
Table 10- 2 PM240 frame size A, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V, ± 10 %
Order number Without filter 6SL3224-0BE21-1UA0 6SL3224-0BE21-5UA0

● LO power 1.1 kW 1.5 kW
● LO input current 3.8 A 4.8 A
● LO output current 3.1 A 4.1 A
● HO power 1.1 kW 1.5 kW
● HO input current 3.8 A 4.8 A
● HO output current 3.1 A 4.1 A
General values
● Power loss 0.108 kW 0,114 kW
● Fuse 10 A 10 A
● Cooling air requirement 4.8 l/s 4.8 l/s
motor connection 1 … 2.5 mm2 1 … 2.5 mm2
motor connection 1.1 Nm 1.1 Nm
● Weight 1.2 kg 1.2 kg

Technical data
Table 10- 3 PM240 frame size B, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V, ± 10 %
Order number with filter 6SL3224-0BE22-2AA0 6SL3224-0BE23-0AA0 6SL3224-0BE24-0AA0

without filter 6SL3224-0BE22-2UA0 6SL3224-0BE23-0UA0 6SL3224-0BE24-0UA0
● LO power 2.2 kW 3 kW 4 kW
● HO power 2.2 kW 3 kW 4 kW
General values
● Fuse 16 A 16 A 16 A
● Cooling air requirement 24 l/s 24 l/s 24 l/s
motor connection 1.5 … 6 mm2 1.5 … 6 mm2 1.5 … 6 mm2
Table 10- 4 PM240 frame size C, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V, ± 10 %

● LO output current 18 A 25 A 32 A
● HO power 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 11 kW
● HO output current 13.2 A 19 A 26 A
General values
● Fuse 20 A 32 A 35 A
motor connection 4 … 10 mm2 4 … 10 mm2 4 … 10 mm2

Technical data
Table 10- 5 PM240 frame size D, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V, ± 10 %

● LO input current 46 A 53 A 72 A
● HO power 15 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW
● HO input current 40 A 46 A 56 A
● HO output current 32 A 38 A 45 A
General values
● Fuse 50 A 63 A 80 A
motor connection 6 Nm 6 Nm 6 Nm
● Weight with filter 16 kg 16 kg 16 kg
● Weight without filter 13 kg 13 kg 13 kg
Table 10- 6 PM240 frame size E, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V, ± 10 %
Order number with filter 6SL3224-0BE33-0AA0 6SL3224-0BE33-7AA0

without filter 6SL3224-0BE33-0UA0 6SL3224-0BE33-7UA0
● LO power 37 kW 45 kW
● LO input current 88 A 105 A
● LO output current 75 A 90 A
● HO power 30 kW 37 kW
● HO input current 73 A 90 A
● HO output current 60 A 75 A
General values
● Power loss 1.04 kW 1.2 kW
● Fuse 100 A 125 A
● Cooling air requirement 110 l/s 110 l/s
motor connection 25 … 35 mm2 25 … 35 mm2
motor connection 6 Nm 6 Nm
● Weight with filter 23 kg 23 kg
● Weight without filter 16 kg 16 kg

Technical data
Table 10- 7 PM240 frame size F, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V, ± 10 %

● LO power 55 kW 75 kW 90 kW
● HO power 45 kW 55 kW 75 kW
General values
● Fuse 160 A 200 A 250 A
● Weight without filter 36 kg 36 kg 36 kg
Order number Without filter 6SL3224-0BE38-8UA0 6SL3224-0BE41-1UA0

● HO power 90 kW 110 kW
General values
● Power loss 2.4 kW 2.5 kW
● Fuse 250 A 315 A
motor connection 35 … 120 mm2 35 … 120 mm2
● Weight 39 kg 39 kg

Technical data
Table 10- 9 PM240 frame size GX, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V, ± 10 %
Order number Without filter 6SL3224-0BE41-3UA0 6SL3224-0BE41-6UA0 6SL3224-0BE42-0UA0

General values
● Fuse 355 A 400 A 630 A
motor connection 95 ... 240 mm2 120 ... 240 mm2 185 ... 240 mm2
● Weight 176 kg 176 kg 176 kg

Technical data
Feature Version
Line voltage 3-ph. 380 V … 480 V AC ± 10 %
The actual permissible line voltage depends on the installation altitude
Modulation depth 93 % (the maximum output voltage is 93 % of the input voltage)
Power factor λ 0.9
Pulse frequency (factory setting) 4 kHz
The pulse frequency can be increased up to 16 kHz in 2 kHz steps. A higher
pulse frequency reduces the permissible output current.
Electromagnetic compatibility The devices are suitable for environmental classes C1 and C2 in conformance
with IEC61800-3. For details, see the Hardware Installation Manual, Appendix
A2
Braking method DC braking, energy recovery (up to 100% of the output power)
● without power reduction LO operation: 0 °C … +40 °C (32 °F … 104 °F)
● with power reduction HO/LO up to 60 °C (140° F), for details see the Hardware Installation
Manual
Relative humidity < 95 % RH - condensation not permissible
Environmental requirements Protected according to environmental class 3C2 to EN 60721-3-3 against
damaging chemical substances
Shock and vibration Do not allow the inverter to fall and avoid it being subject to hard shocks. Do
not install the inverter in an area where it could be continuously subject to
vibration.
● without power reduction Up to 1000 m (3300 ft) above sea level
● with power reduction up to 4000 m (13000 ft) above sea level, for details see the Hardware
Installation Manual.
Standards UL, CE, CE, SEMI F47
In order that the system is UL-compliant, UL-certified fuses, overload circuit-
breakers or intrinsically safe motor protection devices must be used.

Technical data
Table 10- 10 PM250 frame size C, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V, ± 10 %
Order number 6SL3225-0BE25-5AA0 6SL3225-0BE27-5AA0 6SL3225-0BE31-1AA0

● LO power 7.5 kW 11.0 kW 15 kW
● HO power 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 11.0 kW
General values
● Power loss Available soon Available soon Available soon
● Fuse 20 A 32 A 35 A
motor connection 2.5 … 10 mm2 4 to 10 mm2 6 to 10 mm2
Table 10- 11 PM250 frame size D, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V, ± 10 %

● LO power 18.5 kW 22.0 kW 30 kW
● HO power 15.0 kW 18.5 kW 22.0 kW
General values
● Fuse 50 A 63 A 80 A
● Weight 15 kg 15 kg 16 kg

Technical data
Table 10- 12 PM250 frame size E, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V, ± 10 %
Order number 6SL3225-0BE33-0AA0 6SL3225-0BE33-7AA0

● HO power 30.0 kW 37.0 kW
General values
● Power loss 1 kW 1.3 kW
● Fuse 100 A 125 A
motor connection 25 … 35 25 … 35
● Weight 21 kg 21 kg

● HO power 45.0 kW 55.0 kW 75 kW
General values
● Power loss 1.5 kW 2 kW 2.4 kW
● Fuse 160 A 200 A 250 A
● Weight 51.0 kg 51.0 kg 51.0 kg

Technical data
Feature Version
Line voltage 3-ph. 660 V … 690 V AC ± 10%
The permissible line voltage depends on the installation altitude
The power units can also be operated with a minimum voltage of 500 V –10 %. In this
case, the power is linearly reduced as required.
Power factor λ 0.9
Pulse frequency 16 kHz
Electromagnetic compatibility The devices are suitable for environmental classes C1 and C2 in conformance with
IEC61800-3. For details, see the Hardware Installation Manual, Appendix A2
Braking method DC braking, energy recovery (up to 100% of the output power)
● without power reduction LO operation: 0 °C … +40 °C (32 °F … 104 °F)
● with power reduction HO/LO up to 60 °C (140° F), for details see the Hardware Installation
Manual
Relative humidity < 95% RH - condensation not permissible
Environmental requirements Protected according to environmental class 3C2 to EN 60721-3-3 against damaging
chemical substances
Shock and vibration Do not allow the inverter to fall and avoid it being subject to hard shocks. Do not
install the inverter in an area where it could be continuously subject to vibration.
● without power reduction Up to 1000 m (3300 ft) above sea level
● with power reduction up to 4000 m (13000 ft) above sea level, for details see the Hardware Installation
Manual.
Standards CE, C-TICK

Technical data
Table 10- 14 PM260 frame size D, 3-ph. 660 V AC… 690 V, ± 10% (500 V - 10%)
Order number with filter 6SL3225- 0BH27-5AA1 6SL3225- 0BH31-1AA1 6SL3225- 0BH31-5AA1
without filter 6SL3225- 0BH27-5UA1 6SL3225- 0BH31-1UA1 6SL3225- 0BH31-5UA1
● LO power 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW
● HO power 7.5 kW 11 kW 15 kW
General values
● Power loss No data No data No data
● Fuse 25 A 35 A 35 A
motor connection 2.5 … 16 mm2 2.5 … 16 mm2 2.5 … 16 mm2
● Torque for line and
● without filter 22 kg 22 kg 22 kg
Table 10- 15 PM260 frame size F, 3-ph. 660 V AC… 690 V, ± 10% (500 V - 10%)
Order number with filter 6SL3225- 0BH32-2AA1 6SL3225- 0BH33-0AA1 6SL3225- 0BH33-7AA1
without filter 6SL3225- 0BH32-2UA1 6SL3225- 0BH33-0UA1 6SL3225- 0BH33-7UA1
General values
● Power loss No data No data No data
● Fuse 63 A 80 A 100 A
● Torque for line and
● without filter 56 kg 56 kg 56 kg

Appendix A
A.1 Application Examples
A.1.1 Configuring communication in STEP 7
A.1.1.1 Task
Using a suitable example, the following section provides information on how you connect an
inverter to a higher-level SIMATIC control via PROFIBUS.
What prior knowledge is required?

In this example, it is assumed that readers know now to basically use an S7 control and the
STEP 7 engineering tool and is not part of this description.
A.1.1.2 Required components

The example in this manual is based on the following hardware:
Table A- 1 Hardware components (example)
Component Type Order no. Qty

Control
Power supply PS307 2 A 6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0 1
S7 CPU CPU 315-2DP 6ES7315-2AG10-0AB0 1
Memory card MMC 2MB 6ES7953-8LL11-0AA0 1
DIN rail DIN rail 6ES7390-1AE80-0AA0 1
PROFIBUS connector PROFIBUS connector 6ES7972-0BB50-0XA0 1
PROFIBUS cable PROFIBUS cable 6XV1830-3BH10 1
Converter
SINAMICS G120 Control Unit CU240E-2 DP 6SL3244-0BB12-1PA1 1
SINAMICS G120 Power Module Any - 1
PROFIBUS connector PROFIBUS connector 6GK1500-0FC00 1

Appendix
In order to configure communication you also require the following software packages:
Table A- 2 Software components
Component Type (or higher) Order no. Qty

SIMATIC STEP 7 V5.3 + SP3 6ES7810-4CC07-0YA5 1
STARTER V4.2 6SL3072-0AA00-0AG0 1
A.1.1.3 Creating a STEP 7 project

PROFIBUS communication between the inverter and a SIMATIC control is configured using
the SIMATIC STEP 7 and HW Config software tools.
Procedure
● Create a new STEP 7 project and assign a project name, e.g. "G120_in_S7". Add an S7
300 CPU.
Figure A-1 Inserting a SIMATIC 300 station into a STEP 7 project
● Select the SIMATIC 300 station in your project and open the hardware configuration (HW
Config) by double clicking on "Hardware".
● Add an S7 300 mounting rail to your project by dragging and dropping it from the
"SIMATIC 300" hardware catalog. Locate a power supply at slot 1 of the mounting rail
and a CPU 315-2 DP at slot 2.

Appendix
When you add the SIMATIC 300, a window is displayed in which you can define the network.
● Create a PROFIBUS DP network.
Figure A-2 Inserting a SIMATIC 300 station with PROFIBUS DP network
A.1.1.4 Configuring communications to a SIMATIC control

The inverter can be connected to a SIMATIC control in two ways:
1. Using the inverter GSD
2. Using the STEP 7 object manager
This somewhat more user-friendly method is only available for S7 controls and installed
Drive ES Basic (see Section Modularity of the converter system (Page 21)).
The following section describes how to configure the inverter using the GSD.

Appendix
A.1.1.5 Insert the frequency converter into the STEP 7 project

● Install the GSD of the converter in STEP 7 via HW Config (Menu "Tools - Install GSD
files").
Once the GSD has been installed, the converter appears under "PROFIBUS DP -
Additional field devices" in the hardware catalog of HW Config.
● Drag and drop the converter into the PROFIBUS network. Enter the PROFIBUS address
set at the converter in HW Config.
● The telegram type defines which data is exchanged between the control and converter.
Insert the required telegram type from the HW catalog by dragging and dropping into slot
1 of the converter.
You can find more information on the telegram types in Chapter Cyclic communication
(Page 105).
Sequence when assigning the slots

1. PROFIsafe module (if one is being used)
Information on connecting the converter via PROFIsafe can be found in the "Safety
Integrated Function Manual".
2. PKW channel (if one is used)
3. Standard, SIEMENS or free telegram (if one is used)
4. Slave-to-slave module
If you do not use one or several of the modules 1, 2 or 3, configure the remaining modules
starting with the 1st slot.

Appendix
Note regarding the universal module

It is not permissible to configure the universal module with the following properties:
● PZD length 4/4 words
● Consistent over the complete length
With these properties, the universal module has the same DP identifier (4AX) as the "PKW
channel 4 words" and is therefore identified as such by the higher-level control. As a
consequence, the control does not establish cyclic communication with the inverter.
Remedy: Change the length to 8/8 bytes in the properties of the DP slave. As an alternative,
you can also change the consistency to "unit".
Final steps
● Save and compile the project in STEP 7.
● Establish an online connection between your PC and the S7 CPU and download the
project data to the S7 CPU.
● In the inverter, select the telegram type, which you configured in STEP 7, using
parameter P0922.
The inverter is now connected to the S7 CPU. This therefore defines the communication
interface between the CPU and the inverter. An example of how you can supply this
interface with data can be found in the next section.

Appendix
A.1.2 STEP 7 program examples
A.1.2.1 STEP 7 program example for cyclic communication
1HWZRUN &RQWUROZRUGDQGVHWSRLQW The control and inverter communicate via

&RQWUROZRUG(KH[ standard telegram 1. The control specifies
6HWSRLQWKH[ control word 1 (STW1) and the speed setpoint,
/ :( while the inverter responds with status word 1
7 0: (ZSW1) and its actual speed.
/ :
In this example, inputs E0.0 and E0.6 are linked
7 0:
to the -bit ON/OFF1 or to the "acknowledge fault"
1HWZRUN $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW bit of STW 1.
Control word 1 contains the numerical value
047E hex. The bits of control word 1 are listed in
8 ( the following table.
0
The hexadecimal numeric value 2500 specifies
1HWZRUN 6ZLWFKWKHPRWRURQDQGRII the setpoint frequency of the inverter. The
maximum frequency is the hexadecimal value
4000 (also see Configuring the fieldbus
8 ( (Page 101)).
0
The control cyclically writes the process data to
1HWZRUN :ULWHSURFHVVGDWD logical address 256 of the inverter. The inverter
also writes its process data to logical
address 256. You define the address area in HW
/ 0: Config, seeInsert the frequency converter into
7 3$:
the STEP 7 project (Page 282).
/ 0:
7 3$:
1HWZRUN 5HDGSURFHVVGDWD
6WDWXVZRUG0:
$FWXDOYDOXH0:
/ 3(:
7 0:
/ 3(:
7 0:

Appendix
Table A- 3 Assignment of the control bits in the inverter to the SIMATIC flags and inputs
HEX BIN Bit in Significance Bit in Bit in Bit in Inputs

STW1 MW1 MB1 MB2
E 0 0 ON/OFF1 8 0 E0.0
1 1 ON/OFF2 9 1
1 2 ON/OFF3 10 2
1 3 Operation enable 11 3
7 1 4 Ramp-function generator enable 12 4
1 5 Start ramp-function generator 13 5
1 6 Setpoint enable 14 6
0 7 Acknowledge fault 15 7 E0.6
4 0 8 Jog 1 0 0
0 9 Jog 2 1 1
1 10 PLC control 2 2
0 11 Setpoint inversion 3 3
0 0 12 Irrelevant 4 4
0 13 Motorized potentiometer ↑ 5 5
0 14 Motorized potentiometer ↓ 6 6
0 15 Data set changeover 7 7

Appendix
A.1.2.2 STEP 7 program example for acyclic communication
2% &\FOLFFRQWUROSURJUDP M9.0 Starts reading parameters

M9.1 Starts writing parameters
M9.2 displays the read process
1HWZRUN 5HDGLQJDQGZULWLQJSDUDPHWHUV M9.3 displays the write process
The number of simultaneous requests for acyclic
communication is limited. More detailed
UHDGSDUDPHWHUV information can be found in the Data set
2
8 0
communication
81 0 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vie
w/en/15364459).
2
8 0
81 0

5 0
63% 5'
ZULWHSDUDPHWHUV
2
8 0
81 0

2
8 0
81 0

5 0
63% :5
%($
5' 123
&$// )&
%($
:5 123
&$// )&

Appendix
)& 3$5B5' 1HWZRUN 5HDGUHTXHVWSDUW
1HWZRUN 3DUDPHWHUVIRUUHDGLQJ &$// 6)&

5(4 0
,2,' %
/$''5 :
/ 0% 5(&180 %)
7 '%'%% 5(&25' 3'%'%;%<7(
/ % 5(7B9$/ 0:
7 '%'%% %86< 0
7 '%'%%
8 0
/ 0%
5 0
7 '%'%%
6 0

/ 0: 1HWZRUN 5HDGGHOD\DIWHUDUHDGUHTXHVW
7 '%'%:
/ 0%
7 '%'%%
/ 0:
7 '%'%:
8 0

81 0
/ 0:
/ 67V
7 '%'%:
66 7
/ 0%
8 0
7 '%'%%
5 7
/ 0:
8 7
7 '%'%:
0

/ 0: 1HWZRUN 5HDGUHTXHVWSDUW
7 '%'%:
/ 0%
7 '%'%%
/ 0: &$// 6)&
7 '%'%: 5(4 0
,2,' %
/ 0: /$''5 :
7 '%'%: 5(&180 %)
/ 0% 5(7B9$/ 0:
7 '%'%% %86< 0
/ 0: 5(&25' 3'%'%;%<7(
7 '%'%:
8 0
5 0
Figure A-3 Reading parameters

Appendix
Explanation of FC 1
Table A- 4 Request to read parameters
Data block DB 1 Byte n Bytes n + 1 n

Header Reference MB 40 01 hex: Read request 0
01 hex Numberof parameters (m) MB 62 2
Address, Attribute 10 hex: Parameter value Number of indices MB 58 4
parameter 1 Parameter number MW 50 6
Number of the 1st index MW 63 8
SFC 58 copies the specifications for the parameters to be read from DB 1 and sends them to
the converter as a read request. No other read requests are permitted while this one is being
processed.
After the read request and a waiting time of one second, the control takes the parameter
values from the converter via SFC 59 and saves them in DB 2.

Appendix
)& 3$5B:5 1HWZRUN :ULWHUHTXHVW
1HWZRUN 3DUDPHWHUVIRUZULWLQJ &$// 6)&

5(4 0
,2,' %
/$''5 :
/ 0% 5(&180 %)
7 '%'%% 5(&25' 3'%'%;%<7(
/ % 5(7B9$/ 0:
7 '%'%% %86< 0
/ %
8 0
7 '%'%%
5 0
/ 0%
6 0
7 '%'%%

/ 0:
7 '%'%:
/ 0:
7 '%'%:
/ 0:
7 '%'%:
/ 0%
7 '%'%%
/ 0%
7 '%'%%
Figure A-4 Writing parameters
Explanation of FC 3
Table A- 5 Request to change parameters
Data block DB 3 Byte n Bytes n + 1 n

Header Reference MB 42 02 hex: Change request 0
01 hex Number of parameters MB 44 2
Address, 10 hex: Parameter value Number of indices 00 hex 4
Values, Format MB 25 Number of index values MB 27 10
parameter 1 Value of 1st index MW35 12
SFC 58 copies the specifications for the parameters to be written from DB 3 and sends them
to the converter. No other write requests are permitted while this one is being processed.

Appendix
A.1.3 Configuring slave-to-slave communication in STEP 7

Two drives communicate via standard telegram 1 with the higher-level control. In addition,
drive 2 receives its speed setpoint directly from drive 1 (actual speed).
352),%86'3PDVWHUV\VWHP
' U L YH S X E O L V K H U ' U L YH V X E V F U L E H U
6 W D Q G D U G W H O H J U D P 3 = ' 7H O H J U D P I R U I U H H S D U D P H W H U L ] D W L R Q
$: 3='
3='S>@ &RQWUROZRUG
(: 3='
3='S>@ 6WDWXVZRUG
$: 3='
3='S>@ QRWXVHG
(: 3='S>@
3=' $FWXDOYDOXH
6ODYHWRVODYHFRPPXQLFDWLRQ
&RQWURO
$: 3='S>@
3=' &RQWUROZRUG
(: 3='
3='S>@ 6WDWXVZRUG 3='
3='S>@ QRWXVHG
$: 3='
3='S>@ 0DLQVHWSRLQWS
(: 3='S>@
3=' $FWXDOYDOXH 3='S>@
3=' 0DLQVHWSRLQWS
Figure A-5 Communication with the higher-level control and between the drives with slave-to-slave
communication
Settings in the control
In HW Config in drive 2 (Subscriber), insert a slave-to-

slave communication object, e.g. "Slave-to-slave,
PZD2".
With a double-click, open the dialog box to

make additional settings for the slave-to-slave
communication.

Appendix
① Activate the tab "Address

configuration".
② Select line 1.
③ Open the dialog box in which you

define the Publisher and the address
area to be transferred.
① Select DX for direct data exchange

② Select the PROFIBUS address of drive 1
(publisher).
③ In the address field, select the start
address specifying the data area to be
received from drive 1. In the example, these
are the status word 1 (PZD1) and the speed
actual value with the start address 256.
Close both screen forms with OK. You have now defined the value range for slave-to-slave
communication.
In the slave-to-slave communication, drive 2 receives the sent data and writes this into the
next available words, in this case, PZD3 and PZD4.
Settings in drive 2 (subscriber)

Drive 2 is preset in such a way that it receives its setpoint from the higher-level control. In
order that drive 2 accepts the actual value sent from drive 1 as setpoint, you must set the
following:
● In drive 2 ,set the PROFIdrive telegram selection to "Free telegram configuration with
BICO" (p0922 = 999).
● In drive 2, set the source of the main setpoint to p1070 = 2050.3.

Appendix
A.2 Additional information on the inverter
Table A- 6 Manuals for your inverter
Depth of Manual Contents Available Download or order number

the languages
information
+ Getting Started Installing and commissioning English, Download manuals
Control Units CU230P-2; the inverter. German, (http://support.automation.sie
CU240B-2; CU240E-2 Italian, mens.com/WW/view/en/2233
+ Getting Started Installing the Power Module French, 9653/133300)
SINAMICS G120 Power Spanish
Module Order numbers:
++ Operating instructions (this manual) SD Manual Collection (DVD)
+++ Function Manual for Safety Configuring PROFIsafe. English, • 6SL3298-0CA00-0MG0

Integrated Installing, commissioning and German
operating fail-safe functions of
the inverter.
+++ List Manual Graphic function block
Control Units CU240B-2; diagrams.
CU240E-2 Complete list of all
parameters, alarms and faults.
+++ Hardware Installation Installing power modules,
Manual reactors and filters.
• PM240 Power Module Maintaining power modules.
• PM250 Power Module
• PM260 Power Module
+++ Operation and installation For inverter accessories, e.g.
instructions operator panel, reactors or
filters.

Appendix
Table A- 7 Support when configuring and selecting the converter
Manual or tool Contents Languages Download or order number

Catalog D 11.1 Ordering data and technical English, Everything about SINAMICS G120
information for the standard German, (www.siemens.en/sinamics-g120)
SINAMICS G converters Italian,
French,
Spanish
Online catalog (Industry Ordering data and technical English,
Mall) information for all SIEMENS German
products
SIZER The overall configuration tool for English, You obtain SIZER on a DVD
SINAMICS, MICROMASTER German, (Order number: 6SL3070-0AA00-0AG0)
and DYNAVERT T drives, motor Italian, French and in the Internet:
starters, as well as SINUMERIK, Download SIZER
SIMOTION controls and (http://support.automation.siemens.com/W
SIMATIC technology W/view/en/10804987/130000)
Configuration Manual Selecting geared motors, motors English, You can obtain the Configuration Manual
and converters using calculation German from your local sales office.
examples
If you have further questions

You can find additional information on the product and more in the Internet under: Product
support (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/4000024).
In addition to our documentation, we offer our complete knowledge base on the Internet at:
Here, you will find the following information:
● Actual product information (Update), FAQ (frequently asked questions), downloads.
● The Newsletter contains the latest information on the products you use.
● The Knowledge Manager (Intelligent Search) helps you find the documents you need.
● Users and specialists from around the world share their experience and knowledge in the
Forum.
● You can find your local representative for Automation & Drives via our contact database
under "Contact & Partner".
● Information about local service, repair, spare parts and much more can be found under
"Services".

Appendix
A.3 Mistakes and improvements
A.3 Mistakes and improvements

If you come across any mistakes when reading this manual or if you have any suggestions
for how it can be improved, then please send your suggestions to the following address or by
E-mail:
Siemens AG
Drive Technologies
Motion Control Systems
Postfach 3180
91050 Erlangen, Germany
E-mail (mailto:documentation.standard.drives@siemens.com)

Index
Binectors, 16
Bit pattern test, 223
Block, 16
8 Blocking protection, 211, 212
Boost parameter, 171
87 Hz characteristic, 36 BOP-2
Display, 66
Menu, 67
A Brake Relay, 198
Acceptance test, 232 Braking
Authorized person, 232 Regenerative, 197
Complete, 243 Braking chopper, 195
Preconditions, 232 Braking method, 189
reduced, 233, 243, 244 Braking resistor, 195
Requirements, 232 Break loose torque, 15
Test scope, 233 Bus fault, 246
Acceptance test certificate, 232
Acyclic data transfer, 117
Adjustable parameters, 13 C
Alarm, 245, 248 Catalog, 293
Alarm buffer, 248 CDS, 155
Alarm code, 248 CDS (Command Data Set), 231
Alarm history, 249 Centrifuge, 187, 190, 193, 197
Alarm time, 248 Changing parameters
Alarm value, 248 BOP-2, 68
Ambient temperature, 60, 178 STARTER, 77
Analog input, 44, 45, 46 Characteristic
Function, 89 ECO mode, 170
Analog inputs, 64, 65 Linear, 169
Analog output, 44, 45, 46 parabolic, 169
Function, 89 square-law, 169
Analog outputs, 64, 65 Checksum, 237
Analog setpoint, 52 Circuit diagram, 238
Authorized person, 232 Clockwise, 149
Automatic mode, 155 Command Data Set, 231
Automatic restart, 206 Command source, 148
Selecting, 14, 158
Command sources, 46
B Commissioning
Back up Guidelines, 55
Parameter, 242 Commissioning tools, 22
Back up parameters, 242 Compound braking, 193, 194
Basic Safety, 46, 92 Compressor, 168
via F-DI, 228 Configuring support, 293
BF (Bus Fault), 246 Configuring the fieldbus, 46
BICO block, 16 Configuring the interfaces, 46
BICO parameters, 17 Configuring the terminal strip, 46
BICO technology, 17, 89 Connectors, 16

Index
Consistency, 223 Filter, 223

Consistent signals, 223 Tolerance time, 223
Contact bounce, 223 Display parameters, 13
Control Data Set, CDS, 155 Down ramp, 14
Control mode, 15, 62 Download, 23, 84, 86, 87
Control terminals, 64, 65 DP-V1 (PROFIBUS), 117
Control Unit Drive Data Set, DDS, 239
Updating, 233 Drive Data Sets, 239
Control Units, 21 Drive ES Basic, 23, 281
Control word, 106, 109 DS 47, 117, 288
Control word 1, 107
Control word 3, 109
Controlling the motor, 149 E
Conveyor belt, 190
Electromagnetic interference, 38
Conveyor systems, 74
Electromechanical sensor, 220
Copy
Elevator, 202
Series commissioning, 233
Emergency stop control device, 220
Copy parameters
End customer, 234
Energy recovery option, 197
Correction manual, 294
Extended Safety, 92
Counterclockwise, 149
Extruders, 168
Countersignatures, 238
Crane, 187, 197, 202
Current input, 94
F
Customer support, 226
Factory assignment, 64, 65
Factory pre-assignment, 64, 65
D Factory setting
Terminal strip, 47
Data backup, 84, 86, 87, 238
Factory settings, 57, 58, 227
Data exchange fieldbus, 101
Restoring the, 57, 58, 227
Data set 47, 117, 288
Fail-safe digital input, 92
Data set changeover, 231
Fans, 74, 168, 187, 198
Data transfer, 84, 86, 87
Fault, 246
DC braking, 109, 191, 192
Acknowledge, 251, 252
DC link overvoltage, 179
Fault buffer, 251
DC link voltage, 179
Fault case, 251
Default settings, 61
Fault code, 251
Delta connection (Δ), 36, 60
Fault history, 252
DI (Digital Input), 92, 230
Fault time, 251
Digital input, 44, 45, 46
received, 251
Fail-safe, 46
removed, 251
Function, 89
Fault value, 251
Digital inputs, 64, 65
F-DI (Fail-safe Digital Input), 92
Multiple assignment, 230
F-digital output module, 222
Digital output, 44, 45, 46
FFC (Flux Current Control), 170
Function, 89
Field weakening, 36
Digital outputs, 64, 65
Filter, 223
Functions of the, 93
Contact bounce, 223
DIP switch
Discrepancy, 223
Analog input, 94
On/off test, 223
Direction reversal, 149
Firmware
Discrepancy, 223

Index
Updating, 233 Inverter control, 148

Firmware version, 14, 234
Fixed speed, 49
Flow control, 210 J
Flying restart, 204, 205
JOG function, 164
Forced dormant error detection, 226
Jogging, 47, 51
Formatting, 82
Frame size, 24
Frame sizes, 24
K
FS (Frame Size), 24
Function blocks KTY 84 temperature sensor, 176
Free, 216, 218
Function table, 235
Function test L
STO, 236
LED
Functional expansions, 233
BF, 246
Functions
RDY, 246
BOP-2, 67
SAFE, 247
Overview, 147
LED (light emitting diode), 245
Technological, 148
Level control, 210
Light curtain, 220, 221
Line filter, 25, 28
G
Line reactor, 25, 28
Getting Started, 292 Load failure, 213
Grinding machine, 187, 190, 193 Logbook, 237
GSD, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 281
GSD (Generic Station Description), 102
M
Machine manufacturer, 232
H
Machine overview, 234
Hardware configuration, 280 Manual Collection, 292
Hardware Installation Manual, 292 Manual mode, 155
Hoisting gear, 168, 187, 195, 197, 202 Manuals
Holding brake, 187 Download, 292
Horizontal conveyor, 193 Function Manual for Safety Integrated, 292
Horizontal conveyors, 168, 195, 198 Inverter accessories, 292
Hotline, 293 Overview, 292
HW Config, 280 Manufacturer, 234
HW Config (hardware configuration), 280 Maximum current controller, 178
Maximum speed, 14, 62, 166
Memory card
I Formatting, 82
MMC, 82
I2t monitoring, 175
SD, 82
Identifying motor data, 69, 76, 173, 174
Menu
Imax controller, 178
BOP-2, 67
Inclined conveyors, 168, 187, 195, 198
Operator panel, 67
IND, 114, 130
Minimum speed, 14, 62, 166
Industry Mall, 293
Mistakes manual, 294
Installation, 292
MLFB (order number), 234
Interfaces, 22
MMC (memory card), 82
Interlock, 18

Index
Mode of operation, 235 PC Connection Kit, 22, 227

MOP (motorized potentiometer), 47, 160 Permitted sensors, 220
MotID (motor data identification), 69 PID controller, 210
Motor connection, 37 PKE, 111, 127
Motor control, 148 PKW (parameter, ID, value), 105
Motor holding brake, 187, 200, 201, 202 PLC functionality, 18
Motor standard, 183 PLC program, 238
Motor temperature sensor, 44, 45, 64, 65, 177 Power failure, 206
Motorized potentiometer, 47, 51, 52, 160 Power Module, 21, 24
Multiple assignment Technical data, 268, 274, 277
Digital inputs, 230 Power on reset, 57, 85, 86, 87, 227, 230, 243, 245
Pressure control, 210
Probe, 214
N Process industry, 52
Process variables of the technology controller, 185
No-load monitoring, 211, 212
PROFIdrive, 105
PROFIsafe, 282
Protection functions, 148
O
PTC temperature sensor, 176
OFF1 command, 149 Pump, 168, 198
ON command, 149 Pumps, 74
On/off test, 223 PWE, 114, 131
Operating instructions, 292 PZD (process data), 105
Operator panel
Display, 66
Menu, 67 Q
Operator Panel
Questions, 293
BOP-2, 22
Handheld, 22
IOP, 22
R
Mounting Kit IP54, 22
Output reactor, 25, 28 Ramp-down time, 14, 62, 167
Overload, 15, 178 Rampup time,
Overview RDY (Ready), 246
Manuals, 292 Reactors, 25
Overview of the functions, 147 Regenerative power, 187
Overvoltage, 179 Reset
Parameter, 57, 58, 227
Run sequence, 216
P Runtime group, 216
Page index, 114, 130
Parameter channel, 111, 127
S
IND, 114, 130
PKE, 111, 127 SAFE, 247
PWE, 114, 131 Safety function, 49, 50, 51, 52, 148
Parameter identifier, 111, 127 Safety Integrated Function Manual, 220
Parameter index, 114, 130 Safety relay, 220, 221
Parameter Manual, 292 Saw, 190, 193
parameter number Scaling fieldbus, 101
Offset of, 114, 130 Scaling, analog input, 94
Parameter types, 13 Scaling, analog output, 97
Password, 226 SD (memory card), 82

Index
Sensor T
Electromechanical, 221
Technical data
Serial number, 234
Power Module, 268, 274, 277
Technology controller, 109, 210
Setpoint calculation, 148
Telegram 20, 52
Setpoint processing, 166
Telegram 352, 49
Setpoint source, 148
Telegram types, 105, 282
Selecting, 159, 161, 16514
Temperature calculation, 178
Selecting, 159, 161, 16514
Temperature measurement via KTY, 176
Selecting, 159, 161, 16514
Temperature measurement via PTC, 176
Selecting, 159, 161, 16514
Temperature monitoring, 175, 178
Setpoint sources, 46
Temperature monitoring via ThermoClick, 176
Short-circuit monitoring, 176
Temperature sensor, 44, 45, 46, 64, 65
Signal interconnection, 16, 17
Terminal strip
SIMATIC, 279, 281
Assignment, 64, 65
Sine-wave filter, 25
Pre-assignment, 64
SIZER, 293
Terminal strip CU240B-2, 64
Speed monitoring, 213
Terminal strip CU240B-2 DP, 64
Deviation, 213
Terminal strip CU240E-2, 65
Load failure, 213
Terminal strip CU240E-2 DP, 65
Stall protection, 211, 212
Test signals, 224
Standard telegram 1, 47, 50, 51
ThermoClick temperature sensor, 176
Star connection (Y), 36, 60
Three-wire control, 47, 53, 149
STARTER, 77
Time slices, 216
Download, 22
Time stamp, 237
Order number, 22
Torque monitoring
STARTER commissioning tool, 227
Speed-dependent, 211, 212
STARTER PC tool, 227
Two-wire control, 47, 52, 53, 149
Starting characteristics
Optimization, 171
Status messages, 148
U
Status word, 106, 109
Status word 1, 108 UL-certified fuses, 267
Status word 3, 110 Unit changeover, 182
STEP 7 object manager, 281 Unit system, 184
STO Unwinders, 197
Function test, 236 Up ramp, 14
Storage medium, 81 Updating
STW (control word), 105 Control Unit, 233
STW1 (control word 1), 107 Firmware, 233
STW3 (control word 3), 109 Upload, 23, 82, 86, 87
Sub-chassis components, 28 Using the factory settings, 63
Subindex, 114, 130 USS, 48, 53
Suggestions for improvement manual, 294
Support, 293
Swap V
Control Unit, 233
V/f control, 15, 62, 169
Hardware, 233
additional characteristics), 170
Power Module, 233
Vector control, 15, 62
Synchronous motor, 170
Sensorless, 173
System components, 28
System runtime, 181

Index
Version
Firmware, 234
Hardware, 234
Safety function, 234
Vertical conveyors, 168, 195, 198
Voltage boost, 15, 172
voltage input, 94
W
Winders, 168, 197
Wire break, 223
Wire-break monitoring, 95, 176
Z
ZSW (status word), 105
ZSW1 (status word 1), 108
ZSW3 (status word 3), 110

Siemens AG We reserve the right to make technical
Industry Sector changes.
Drive Technologies © Siemens AG 2011
Postfach 3180
91050 ERLANGEN
GERMANY
www.siemens.com/sinamics-g120
SINAMICS G120
Frequenzumrichter
SINAMICS G120
SINAMICS G120D
Function Manual · 08/2011
SINAMICS
Answers for industry.
Frequency converter Introduction 1
___________________
___________________
Safety Notes 2
___________________
Product Line 3
SINAMICS Parameter
___________________
Assignment/Addressing 4
SINAMICS G120, SINAMICS
G120D ___________________
BICO Technology 5
Frequency converter
___________________
Common Inverter Functions 6
Function Manual
Functions only available with
___________________
G120 inverters 7
___________________
Fail-Safe Functions 8
Power module dependent
___________________
functions 9
___________________
List of Abbreviations A
Edition 08/2011, Firmware version V3.2
08/2011 - FW 3.2
A5E01137279B AD
Legal information
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the relevant information is not taken into account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG A5E01137279B AD Copyright © Siemens AG 2007, /,

Industry Sector Ⓟ 08/2011 2008, /, 2011.
Postfach 48 48 Technical data subject to change
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents
1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................ 7
1.1 Documents for the Inverter ............................................................................................................7
1.2 Description of Document Classes..................................................................................................8
2 Safety Notes .............................................................................................................................................. 9
3 Product Line ............................................................................................................................................ 13
3.1 Global System Overview..............................................................................................................13
3.2 Function Overview .......................................................................................................................13
4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing ......................................................................................................... 19
4.1 Overview of Parameters ..............................................................................................................19
4.2 Write parameters .........................................................................................................................20
4.3 Monitoring parameters .................................................................................................................20
4.4 Parameter Attributes ....................................................................................................................21
5 BICO Technology .................................................................................................................................... 27
5.1 BICO Technology Overview.........................................................................................................27
5.2 Using BICO technology................................................................................................................27
6 Common Inverter Functions..................................................................................................................... 31
6.1 Motor Data Identification ..............................................................................................................31
6.2 Motorized Potentiometer (MOP) ..................................................................................................34
6.3 Positioning Ramp Down...............................................................................................................38
6.4 JOG..............................................................................................................................................41
6.5 Monitoring Functions....................................................................................................................44
6.5.1 General monitoring functions and messages ..............................................................................44
6.5.2 Load torque monitoring ................................................................................................................47
6.5.3 Power Module Protection.............................................................................................................49
6.5.3.1 General Overload Monitoring.......................................................................................................49
6.5.3.2 Power Module Thermal Monitoring ..............................................................................................50
6.5.4 Thermal Motor Protection and Overload Responses...................................................................52
6.5.4.1 Thermal motor protection without sensor ....................................................................................55
6.5.4.2 Thermal motor protection with a PTC thermistor .........................................................................57
6.5.4.3 Thermal motor protection with a KTY84 sensor ..........................................................................57
6.5.4.4 Thermal motor protection with a ThermoClick sensor .................................................................58
6.6 Restart Functions.........................................................................................................................59
6.6.1 Automatic restart..........................................................................................................................59
6.6.2 Flying restart ................................................................................................................................62
6.7 Data Sets .....................................................................................................................................66
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 3
Table of contents
6.8 Electro-Mechanical Brakes ......................................................................................................... 74

6.8.1 Motor Holding Brake ................................................................................................................... 75
6.8.2 Instantaneous brake.................................................................................................................... 80
6.9 Setpoint Channel......................................................................................................................... 82
6.9.1 Summation and modification of frequency setpoint .................................................................... 83
6.9.2 Ramp-function generator ............................................................................................................ 86
6.9.3 OFF/Braking Functions ............................................................................................................... 90
6.9.4 Manual and Automatic Operation ............................................................................................... 94
6.9.5 FFBs and Fast FFBs ................................................................................................................... 96
6.9.6 Wobble Generator..................................................................................................................... 105
6.10 Control Functions ...................................................................................................................... 108
6.10.1 Open-loop and closed-loop control overview............................................................................ 108
6.10.2 V/f Control ................................................................................................................................. 108
6.10.2.1 Voltage boost ............................................................................................................................ 113
6.10.2.2 Slip compensation..................................................................................................................... 116
6.10.2.3 V/f resonance damping ............................................................................................................. 117
6.10.2.4 V/f control with FCC .................................................................................................................. 118
6.10.2.5 Current limiting (Imax controller)............................................................................................... 120
6.10.3 Vector Control ........................................................................................................................... 122
6.10.3.1 Vector Control without Speed Encoder..................................................................................... 124
6.10.3.2 Vector control with speed encoder............................................................................................ 132
6.10.3.3 Speed controller ........................................................................................................................ 138
6.10.3.4 Closed-loop torque control ........................................................................................................ 143
6.10.3.5 Closed-loop torque control (SLVC) ........................................................................................... 145
6.10.3.6 Switch-over from Frequency to Torque Control ........................................................................ 147
6.10.3.7 Limiting the torque setpoint ....................................................................................................... 149
7 Functions only available with G120 inverters ......................................................................................... 153
7.1 2-/3-Wire Control....................................................................................................................... 153
7.1.1 Siemens standard control (P0727 = 0) ..................................................................................... 155
7.1.2 2-wire control (P0727 = 1)......................................................................................................... 157
7.1.3 3-wire control (P0727 = 2)......................................................................................................... 158
7.1.4 3-wire control (P0727 = 3)......................................................................................................... 159
7.2 Setpoint via Fixed Frequencies................................................................................................. 161
7.3 PID Controller............................................................................................................................ 165
7.3.1 PID dancer roll control............................................................................................................... 170
7.3.2 PID Motorized Potentiometer .................................................................................................... 174
7.3.3 Setpoint via PID Fixed Frequencies.......................................................................................... 175
7.4 Digital inputs (DI)....................................................................................................................... 178
7.5 Digital outputs (DO)................................................................................................................... 181
7.6 Analog inputs (A/D converter) ................................................................................................... 183
7.7 Analog outputs (D/A converter)................................................................................................. 185
8 Fail-Safe Functions................................................................................................................................ 187
8.1 Overview of the fail-safe functions ............................................................................................ 187
8.1.1 Permissible applications for the fail-safe functions ................................................................... 189
8.1.2 Application examples for fail-safe functions.............................................................................. 191
8.1.3 Dependency of Failsafe and OFF commands .......................................................................... 193
Frequency converter
4 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Table of contents
8.2 Monitoring the fail-safe functions ...............................................................................................194

8.3 Limiting values for SS1 and SLS ...............................................................................................196
8.4 Safe Torque Off .........................................................................................................................203
8.5 Safe Stop 1 ................................................................................................................................207
8.6 Safely Limited Speed .................................................................................................................212
8.6.1 Safely Limited Speed, Mode 0 ...................................................................................................216
8.7 Safe Brake Control.....................................................................................................................245
9 Power module dependent functions....................................................................................................... 247
9.1 Electronic Brakes .......................................................................................................................247
9.1.1 DC braking .................................................................................................................................248
9.1.2 Compound braking.....................................................................................................................252
9.2 Dynamic Brakes .........................................................................................................................254
9.2.1 Dynamic braking ........................................................................................................................254
9.2.2 Regenerative braking.................................................................................................................259
9.3 DC Link Voltage Controller ........................................................................................................261
9.3.1 Closed-loop Vdc control.............................................................................................................261
9.3.2 Vdc_max controller ....................................................................................................................262
9.3.3 Kinetic buffering .........................................................................................................................263
A List of Abbreviations .............................................................................................................................. 265
A.1 Abbreviations .............................................................................................................................265
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 269
Frequency converter
Table of contents
Frequency converter
Introduction 1
1.1 Documents for the Inverter
Available technical documentation

Comprehensive information and support tools are available from the Service and Support
internet site
● http://support.automation.siemens.com
You find there the following types of documentation:
● Getting Started
● Operating Instructions
● Hardware Installation Manual
● Function Manual
● Parameter Manual
● Product Information
Further internet addresses

You can download the respective documents for your inverter under the following links:
● SINAMICS G110
http://www.siemens.com/sinamics-g110
● SINAMICS G120
http://www.siemens.com/sinamics-g120
● SINAMICS G120D
http://www.siemens.com/sinamics-g120d
Application examples
You find various application examples to the inverters under the following link:
● http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20208582/136000
Frequency converter
Introduction
1.2 Description of Document Classes
1.2 Description of Document Classes
Description of the documents

The following section describes the available document types for your inverter:
Brochure
The Brochure is advertising literature designed to introduce the product to the marketplace. It
contains a basic outline of the product with a brief overview of the technical capabilities of
the product.
Catalog
The Catalog presents information that allows the customer to select an appropriate inverter
including all available options. It contains detailed technical specifications, ordering and
pricing information to allow the customer to order the appropriate items for their application
or plant.
Getting Started
The Getting Started presents warnings, dimension drawings and a brief set up information
for the customer.
Operating Instructions
The Operating Instructions gives information about the features of the inverter. It gives
detailed information about commissioning, control modes, system parameters,
troubleshooting, technical specifications and the available options of the product.
Hardware Installation Manual

The Hardware Installation Manual gives information for the Power Modules regarding the
features of the product. It gives detailed information on installation, technical specifications,
dimension drawings and the available options from the product.
Function Manual
The Function Manual is a list of detailed information about the inverter's functions. It contains
descriptions of the internal components, modules and gates as well as examples for usage.
Moreover associated parameters and miscellaneous logic operations of the controls are
given.
Parameter Manual
The Parameter Manual contains a detailed description of all the parameters that can be
modified to adapt the inverter to specific applications. The Parameter Manual also contains a
series of function diagrams to diagrammatically portray the nature and interoperability of the
system parameters.
Frequency converter
Safety Notes 2
Safety Instructions
The following Warnings, Cautions and Notes are provided for your safety and as a means of
preventing damage to the product or components in the connected machines. This section
lists Warnings, Cautions and Notes, which apply generally when handling the inverter,
classified as General, Transport and Storage, Commissioning, Operation, Repair and
Dismantling and Disposal.
Specific Warnings, Cautions and Notes that apply to particular activities are listed at the
beginning of the relevant sections in this manual and are repeated or supplemented at
critical points throughout these sections.
Please read the information carefully, since it is provided for your personal safety and will
also help prolong the service life of your inverter and the equipment to which it is connected.
Frequency converter
Safety Notes
General
WARNING
This equipment contains dangerous voltages and controls potentially dangerous rotating
mechanical parts. Non-compliance with the warnings or failure to follow the instructions
contained in this manual can result in loss of life, severe personal injury or serious damage
to property.
Protection in case of direct contact by means of SELV / PELV is only permissible in areas
with equipotential bonding and in dry indoor rooms. If these conditions are not fulfilled,
other protective measures against electric shock must be applied e.g. protective insulation.
Only suitably qualified personnel should work on this equipment, and only after becoming
familiar with all safety notices, installation, operation and maintenance procedures
contained in this manual. The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent
upon its proper handling, installation, operation and maintenance.
As the earth leakage for this product can be greater than 3.5 mA a.c., a fixed earth
connection is required and the minimum size of the protective earth conductor shall comply
with the local safety regulations for high leakage current equipment.
If an RCD (also referred to as an ELCB or a RCCB) is fitted, the Power Module will operate
without nuisance tripping provided that:
- A type B RCD is used.
- The trip limit of the RCD is 300 mA.
- The neutral of the supply is grounded.
- Only one Power Module is supplied from each RCD.
- The output cables are less than 15 m screened or 30 m unscreened.
The power supply, DC and motor terminals, the brake and thermistor cables can carry
dangerous voltages even if the inverter is inoperative. Wait at least five minutes to allow the
unit to discharge after switching off the line supply before carrying out any installation work.
It is strictly prohibited for any mains disconnection to be performed on the motor-side of the
system; any disconnection of the mains must be performed on the mains-side of the
Inverter.
When connecting the line supply to the Inverter, make sure that the terminal case of the
motor is closed.
This equipment is capable of providing internal motor overload protection according to
UL508C. Refer to P0610 and P0335, i²t is ON by default.
When changing from the ON to OFF-state of an operation if an LED or other similar display
is not lit or active; this does not indicate that the unit is switched-off or powered-down.
The inverter must always be grounded.
Isolate the line supply before making or changing connections to the unit.
Ensure that the inverter is configured for the correct supply voltage. The inverter must not
be connected to a higher voltage supply.
Static discharges on surfaces or interfaces that are not generally accessible (e.g. terminal
or connector pins) can cause malfunctions or defects. Therefore, when working with
inverters or inverter components, ESD protective measures should be observed.
Take particular notice of the general and regional installation and safety regulations
regarding work on dangerous voltage installations (e.g. EN 50178) as well as the relevant
regulations regarding the correct use of tools and personal protective equipment (PPE).
Frequency converter
Safety Notes
CAUTION
Children and the general public must be prevented from accessing or approaching the
equipment!
This equipment may only be used for the purpose specified by the manufacturer.
Unauthorized modifications and the use of spare parts and accessories that are not sold or
recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment can cause fires, electric shocks and
injuries.
NOTICE
Keep this manual within easy reach of the equipment and make it available to all users.
Whenever measuring or testing has to be performed on live equipment, the regulations of
Safety Code BGV A2 must be observed, in particular § 8 "Permissible Deviations when
Working on Live Parts". Suitable electronic tools should be used.
Before installing and commissioning, please read these safety instructions and warnings
carefully and all the warning labels attached to the equipment. Make sure that the warning
labels are kept in a legible condition and replace missing or damaged labels.
Frequency converter
Safety Notes
Frequency converter
Product Line 3
3.1 Global System Overview
Inverter families
The function manual contains the function description of the following inverter families.
● SINAMICS G120
● SINAMICS G120D
All the inverters are modular build. That means, within a series there is a range of Control
Units that can be combined with different variants of Power Modules.
Power Modules and Control Units of different ranges must not be interchanged.
3.2 Function Overview

This section gives an overview about the available functions, depending on the type of
frequency inverters.
Common inverter functions

The Inverter provide the following functions:
● Motor Data Identification
● Motorized potentiometer
● JOG function
Frequency converter
Product Line
● Monitoring functions
– General monitoring functions and messages
– Load torque monitoring
– Power Module Protection
General Overload Monitoring
Power Module Thermal Monitoring
– Thermal Motor Protection and Overload Responses
Thermal motor model
Motor Temperature Identification after Restart
Temperature sensors
● Restart functions
– Automatic restart
– Flying restart
● Data Sets
● Electro-mechanical brake functions
– Motor Holding Brake
– Instantaneous Brake
● BICO Technology
● Setpoint channel
– Summation and modification of frequency setpoint
– Ramp-function generator
– OFF/Braking Functions
– Manual and Automatic Operation
– FFBs and Fast FFBs
– Wobble Generator
Frequency converter
Product Line
● Positioning ramp down

● Control functions
– V/f Control
Voltage boost
Slip compensation
V/f resonance damping
V/f control with FCC
Current limiting (Imax controller)
– Vector Control
Vector control without speed encoder
Vector control with speed encoder
Speed controller
Speed controller (SLVC)
Closed-loop torque control
Closed-loop torque control (SLVC)
Switch-over from Frequency to Torque Control
Limiting the torque setpoint
Functions only available with G120 inverters

● 2-/3-wire control
● Fixed frequencies
● PID Controller
– PID dancer roll control
– PID Motorized Potentiometer
– Setpoint via PID Fixed Frequencies
● Digital Input Functions
● Digital Output Functions
● Analog Input Functions
● Analog Output Functions
Frequency converter
Product Line
Fail-safe functions
Table 3- 1 Fail-safe functions
SINAMICS G120 SINAMICS G120D

CU240S CU240S DP CU240S DP-F CU240S PN CU240D DP CU240D DP-F
STO --- --- X --- --- X
SS1 --- --- X --- --- X
SLS --- --- X --- --- X
SBC --- --- X --- --- ---
Power Module functions
Table 3- 2 Power Module relating functions

PM240 PM250 PM260 PM250D
Closed-loop Vdc control X --- --- ---
Electronic brakes X --- --- ---
Dynamic braking via chopper resistor X --- --- ---
Dynamic braking via regenerative braking --- X X X
VDC controller X --- --- ---
Interfaces
The following table defines the realizable function sources for each device.
Table 3- 3 Control Unit communication interfaces

Option port X X X X --- ---
(BOP/STARTER)
via r0019
USS on RS232 -- X X X X X
via r2032
USS on RS485 X --- --- --- --- ---
via r2036
PROFIBUS DB --- X X --- X X
via r2090
PROFInet --- --- --- X --- ---
via r8890
Frequency converter
Product Line
Table 3- 4 Control Unit interfaces

MMC X X X X X X
Digital inputs 9 9 6 6 6 6
Safe Digital --- ---- 2 --- --- ---
inputs
Digital outputs 3 3 3 3 2 2
Analog inputs 2 2 2 2 --- ---
Analog outputs 2 2 2 2 --- ---
Encoder X X X X X X
PTC/KTY X X X X --- ---
Table 3- 5 Power Module interfaces

PM240 PM250 PM260 PM250D
PTC/KTY in motor cable --- --- --- X
EM Brake 24 V X X X ---
EM Brake 180 V --- --- --- X
DC+ / DC- terminals X --- --- ---
Brake chopper X --- --- ---
Frequency converter
Product Line
Frequency converter
Parameter Assignment/Addressing 4
4.1 Overview of Parameters
Overview of parameters
The inverter is adapted to a particular application using the corresponding parameters. This
means that each parameter is identified by a parameter number and specific attributes (e.g.
monitoring parameter, write parameter, BICO attribute, group attribute etc.). Within any one
particular inverter system, the parameter number is unique.
Parameters can be accessed using the following operator units:
● BOP
● PC-based commissioning (start-up) tool STARTER.
There are two main types of parameters; those that can be altered and those that are read-
only.
3DUDPHWHU
5HDGU :ULWH5HDG3
ಯQRUPDOರ ಯQRUPDOರ
5HDGSDUDPHWHUV %,&2RXWSXW :ULWH5HDGSDUDPHWHUV %,&2LQWSXW
Figure 4-1 Parameter types
Frequency converter
Parameter Assignment/Addressing
4.2 Write parameters
4.2 Write parameters
Description
Parameters which can be written into and displayed are indicated by the prefix "P".
These parameters directly influence the behavior of a function. The value of this parameter is
saved in non-volatile memory (EEPROM) as long as the appropriate option was selected
(non-volatile data save). Otherwise, these values are saved in the volatile memory (RAM) of
the processor, which are lost after power failure or power-off/power-on operations.
Examples of the standard notation used throughout our manuals is given below.
Notation examples:
P0970 parameter 970
P0748.1 parameter 748, bit 01
P0819[1] parameter 819 index 1
P0013[0 ... 19] parameter 13 with 20 indices (indices 0 to 19)
4.3 Monitoring parameters
Description
Parameters which can only be monitored are indicated by the prefix "r".
These parameters are used to display internal quantities, for example states and actual
values.
Notation examples:
r0002 monitoring parameter 2
r0052.3 monitoring parameter 52, bit 03
r0947[2] monitoring parameter 947 index 2
r0964[0 ... 4] monitoring parameter 964 with 5 indices (indices 0 to 4)
Frequency converter
4.4 Parameter Attributes
Overview
In the Parameter Manual, the header line of each parameter shows all the attributes and
groups for that specific parameter. The figure below shows the details for parameter P0700
and r1515.
,QGH[ %,&2LIH[LVW
3>@ 6HOFWLRQRIFRPPDQGVRXUFH&RPPDQGVRXUFHVH
&86'3
&86'3)
$FFHVVOHYHO 3*URXS&RPPDQGV 'DWDW\SH8QVLJQHG
4XLFNFRPP12 $FWLY<(6 'DWDVHW&'6
&DQEHFKDQJHG7 8QLW
0LQ 0D[ )DFWRU\VHWWLQJ

&830YDULDQWV
Figure 4-2 Description of attributes for parameter P0700
%,&2LIH[LVW
U &2$GGLWLRQDOWRUTXHVHWSRLQW&2$GGWUTVHW
*
$FFHVVOHYHO 3*URXS&ORVHGORRSFRQWURO 'DWDW\SH)ORDWLQJ3RLQW
8QLW
Figure 4-3 Description of attributes for parameter r1515
Index
Using the index, a parameter (e.g. p0013[20]) is defined with several consecutive elements
(in this case, 20). Each individual index is defined using a numerical value.
When transferred to a parameter this means that an indexed parameter can have several
values. The values are addressed using the parameter number including the index value
(e.g. p0013[0], p0013[1], p0013[2], p0013[3], p0013[4], ...).
Indexed parameters are used, for example:
● Drive Data Sets (DDS)
● Command Data Sets (CDS)
● Sub functions.
Frequency converter
BICO
The following types of connectable parameters are available. A description of BICO
technology is given in the section "BICO Technology".
Table 4- 1 Parameter attributes - BICO
BICO Description
BI Binector Input
BO Binector Output
CI Connector Input
CO Connector Output
CO/BO Connector Output/Binector Output
Access level
The access level is controlled using parameter P0003. In this case, only those parameters
are visible at the BOP, where the access level is less than or equal to the value assigned in
parameter P0003. On the other hand, for STARTER, only access levels 0 and 3 are relevant.
For example, parameters with access level 3 cannot be changed, if the appropriate access
level has not been set.
The following access levels are implemented in the inverters:
Table 4- 2 Parameter attributes - access level
Access level Description

0 User-defined Parameter Manual (refer to P0013)
1 Standard access to the most frequently used parameters
2 Extended access, e.g. to inverter I/O functions
3 Expert access only for experienced users
4 Service access only for authorized service personnel – with password
protection.
Note
In STARTER, all user parameters (access stage 3) are always displayed using the expert list
– independent of the setting p0003 = 0, 1, 2 or 3.
When changing parameters using STARTER, or via a higher-level control system, parameter
value changes always become immediately effective.
Frequency converter
Can be changed
"P" parameters can only be changed depending on the inverter state. The parameter value is
not accepted if the instantaneous state is not listed in the parameter attribute "Can be
changed". For instance, the quick commissioning parameter P0010 with the attribute "CT"
can only be changed in quick commissioning "C" or ready "T" but not in operation "U".
Table 4- 3 Parameter attributes - Can be changed
State Description
C Quick commissioning
U Operation (Drive running)
T Drive ready to run
Data types
The data type of a parameter defines the maximum possible value range. Five data types
are used for the inverter. They either represent an unsigned integer value (U16, U32) or a
floating-point value (float). The value range is frequently restricted by a minimum and
maximum value (min, max) or using inverter/motor quantities.
Table 4- 4 Parameter attributes - Data types
Data type Description

U16 Unsigned, integer value with a size of 16 bits
U32 Unsigned, integer value with a size of 32 bits
I16 Signed integer 16-bit value
I32 Signed integer 32-bit value
Float A simple precise floating point value according to the IEEE standard format
max. value range: -3.39e+38 –+3.39e+38
Frequency converter
Unit
The values of parameters support the following units:
Table 4- 5 Parameter attributes - Unit
Unit Description Unit Description

- No dimension m/s Meters per second
% Percentage Nm Newton meter
A Ampere W Watt
V Volt kW Kilowatt
Ohm Ohm Hp Horse power
us Microseconds kWh Kilowatt hours
ms Milliseconds °C Degrees Celsius
s Seconds m Meter
Hz Hertz kg Kilograms
kHz Kilohertz ° Degrees (angular degrees)
1/min Revolutions per minute [RPM]
Grouping
The parameters are sub-divided into groups according to their functionality. This increases
the transparency and allows a quicker and more efficient search for specific parameters.
Furthermore, parameter P0004 can be used to control the specific group of parameters that
are displayed on the BOP.
Table 4- 6 Parameter attributes - Grouping
Grouping Description Main parameter area:

ALWAYS 0 all parameters
INVERTER 2 inverter parameters 0200 … 0299
MOTOR 3 motor parameters 0300 … 0399 and
0600 … 0699
ENCODER 4 speed encoder 0400 … 0499
TECH_APL 5 technical applications/units 0500 … 0599
COMMANDS 7 control commands, digital I/O 0700 … 0749 and
0800 … 0899
TERMINAL 8 Analog inputs/outputs 0750 … 0799
SETPOINT 10 Setpoint channel and ramp-function gen. 1000 … 1199
Safety integrated 11 Fail-safe functions 9000 … 9999
FUNC 12 Inverter functions 1200 … 1299
CONTROL 13 Motor open-loop/closed-loop control 1300 … 1799
COMM 20 Communications 2000 … 2099
ALARMS 21 Faults, warnings, monitoring functions 0947 … 2199
TECH 22 Technology controller (PID controller) 2200 … 2399
Frequency converter
Active
This attribute is only of importance in conjunction with an BOP. The "Yes" attribute indicates
that this value is immediately accepted when it is changed. Especially parameters which are
used for optimization functions have this property (e.g. constant voltage boost P1310 or filter
time constants). On the other hand, for parameters with the attribute "First confirm", the
value is only accepted after first pressing the key . These include, for example,
parameters where the parameter value can have different settings/meanings (e.g. selecting
the frequency setpoint source P1000).
Table 4- 7 Parameter attributes - Active
Active Description
Yes The value becomes valid immediately.
First confirm
The value becomes valid after pressing
Note
Parameter values that are changed using STARTER or a higher-level control do not have to
be acknowledged.
Quick commissioning
This parameter attribute identifies as to whether the parameter is included in the quick
commissioning (QC) (P0010 = 1).
Table 4- 8 Parameter attributes - Quick commissioning
QC Description
No The parameter is not included in the quick commissioning
Yes The parameter is included in the quick commissioning
Frequency converter
Value range
The value range, which is first specified by the data type, is restricted by minimum and
maximum values depending on the quantities of the inverter/motor. The values min and max
are permanently saved in the inverter and cannot be changed by the user. To support
commissioning each write parameter has a default value called factory setting.
Table 4- 9 Parameter attributes - Value range
Value range Description

- No value entered (e.g.: "r parameter")
Min Minimum value
Max Maximum value
Def Default value
Data sets
A detailed description for the data sets is given in the respective section
Table 4- 10 Data sets
BICO Description
CDS Command data set
DDS Drive data set
Frequency converter
BICO Technology 5
5.1 BICO Technology Overview
Interconnecting signals (BICO)

A state-of-the-art inverter must be able to interconnect internal and external signals (setpoint
or actual values and control or status signal). This interconnection functionality must have a
high degree of flexibility in order to be able to adapt the inverter to new applications. Further,
a high degree of usability is required, which also fulfills standard applications. To fulfill these
requirements BICO technology and fast parameterization using parameters P0700/P1000
are used.
5.2 Using BICO technology
Description
Using BICO technology, process data can be freely interconnected using the "standard"
inverter parameterization.
For this all values which can be freely interconnected are defined as "Connectors" ,
e.g. frequency setpoint, frequency actual value, current actual value, etc.
All digital signals which can be freely interconnected are defined as "Binectors"
eg. status of a digital input, ON/OFF, message function when a limit is violated etc.
There are many input and output quantities as well as quantities within the closed-loop
control which can be interconnected in an inverter. It is possible to adapt the inverter to the
various requirements using BICO technology.
Binectors
A binector is a digital (binary) signal without any units, it can take the value 0 or 1. Binectors
always refer to functions and are sub-divided into binector inputs and binector outputs (see
the table below). In this case, the binector input is always designated using a "P" parameter
(e.g. P0840 BI: ON/OFF1), while the binector output is always represented using an "r"
parameter (e.g. r1025 BO: FF status).
Frequency converter
BICO Technology
As can be seen from the examples above, the binector parameters have the following
abbreviations in front of the parameter names:
BI: Binector Input, signal sink ("P" parameters)
The BI parameter can be interconnected with a binector output as a source, by entering the
parameter number of the binector output (BO parameter) as a value in the BI parameter.
BO: Binector Output, signal source ("r" parameters)
The BO parameter can be used as a source for BI parameters. For a particular
interconnection the BO parameter number must be entered into the BI parameter.
Example
Combine the ON/OFF1 command with selecting a fixed frequency.
%,212))
)XQFWLRQ %2))6WDWXV 3 )XQFWLRQ
U
3
Figure 5-1 Binector output (BO) ==> Binector input (BI)
When selecting a fixed frequency the fixed frequency status bit (r1025) is internally set from
0 to 1.
The source for the ON/OFF1 command is parameter P0840 (default DI0). If the fixed
frequency status bit is connected as source for P0840 (P0840 = 1025) the inverter starts with
activating a fixed frequency and stops with OFF1 with deactivating.
Binector symbols
Table 5- 1 Binector symbols
Abbreviation and symbol Name Function

BI Binector input 'DWDIORZ
(signal sink) 3[[[[
)XQFWLRQ
%,
BO Binector output 'DWDIORZ
(signal source) U[[[[
)XQFWLRQ
%2
Frequency converter
BICO Technology
Connectors
A connector has a value (16 or 32 bit), which can include a normalized quantity (without
dimension) as well as a quantity with associated units. Connectors always refer to functions
and are sub-divided into connector inputs and connector outputs. Essentially it is the same
as for the binectors, the connector inputs are characterized by a "P" parameter (e.g. P0771
CI: AO (analog output)); while the connector outputs are always represented using an "r"
parameter (e.g. r0021 CO: Act. frequency).
As can be seen from the examples above, connector parameters have the following
abbreviations in front of the parameter names:
CI: Connector Input, signal sink ("P" parameters)
The CI parameter can be interconnected with a connector output as a source, by entering
the parameter number of the connector output (CO parameter) as a value in the CI
parameter.
CO: Connector Output, signal source
The CO parameter can be used as source for CI parameters. For a particular
interconnection, the CO parameter number must be entered in the CI parameter.
Example
Associate parameter r0755 (Displays analog input, scaled using ASPmin and ASPmax) with an
internal value (main frequency setpoint) to calculate internally scaled value. Thus
interconnect the CO Parameter r0755 (Scaled analog input) with CI parameter P1070 (Main
setpoint).
&,0DLQVHWSRLQW
)XQFWLRQ &2$FW$,DIWHUVFDOH>K@ 3 )XQFWLRQ
U >@
3 >@
Figure 5-2 Connector output (CO) ==> Connector input (CI)
Connector symbols
Table 5- 2 Connector symbols

CI Connector input 'DWDIORZ
(signal sink)
3[[[[
)XQFWLRQ
&,
CO Connector output 'DWDIORZ
(signal source)
U[[[[
)XQFWLRQ
&2
Frequency converter
BICO Technology
Connector and Binector Outputs

Further, there are "r" parameters where several binector outputs are combined in a word
(e.g. r0052 CO/BO: Status word 1). This feature reduces, on one hand, the number of
parameters and simplifies parameterization using the serial interface (data transfer). These
parameters are further characterized by the fact that they do not have any units and each bit
represents a digital (binary) signal.
As can be seen from the examples of parameters, these combined parameters have the
following abbreviation in front of the parameter names:
CO/BO: Connector Output/Binector Output, signal source ("r")
CO/BO parameters can be used as a source for CI parameters and BI parameters:
● In order to interconnect all of the CO/BO parameters, the parameter number must be
entered into the appropriate CI parameter (e.g. P2016[0] = 52).
● When interconnecting a single digital signal, in addition to the CO/BO parameter number,
the bit number must also be entered into the CI parameter (e.g. P0731 = 52.3)
Example
&,3='WR&%
3 )XQFWLRQ
3

&2%2$FWVWDWXVZRUG
)XQFWLRQ U
U
%,)XQFWLRQWRGLJLWDORXWSXW
3 )XQFWLRQ

3
Figure 5-3 Connector output/Binector output (CO/BO)
Connector and Binector Output symbols
Table 5- 3 Connector and binector output symbols

Binector/connector output 'DWDIORZ
CO
(signal source) U[[[[
BO
)XQFWLRQ
&2%2
In order to interconnect two signals, a BICO setting parameter (signal sink) must be
assigned to the required BICO monitoring parameter (signal source).
Note
BICO parameters of the type CO, BO or CO/BO can be multiple used.
Frequency converter
Common Inverter Functions 6
6.1 Motor Data Identification
Description
The Inverter has a measuring technique which is used to determine the motor parameters:
Equivalent circuit diagram (ECD) ➙ P1900 = 2

Measures Equivalent circuit diagram (ECD) ➙ P1900 = 3
+ Magnetizing characteristic (includes
P1900 = 2)
For control-related reasons, it is essential that the motor data identification is performed.
Without performing the motor data identification it is only possible to estimate ECD data
using information from the motor rating plate. For example, the stator resistance is extremely
important for the stability of the closed-loop Vector control and for the voltage boost of the V/f
characteristic. The motor data identification routine should be executed, especially if long
feeder cables or if third-party motors are being used.
If the motor data identification routine is being started for the first time, then the following
data is determined, starting from the rating plate data (rated [nominal] data) with P1900 = 2:
● ECD data
● Motor cable resistance
● IGBT on-state voltage and compensation of IGBT gating dead times.
Frequency converter
Common Inverter Functions
The rating plate data represents the initialization values for the identification. This is the
reason that it is necessary to have the correct input from the rating plate data when
determining the data specified above.
,QYHUWHU &DEOH 0RWRU
6WDWRUUHV 5RWRUOHDNLQGXFW
>˖@
2QVWDWHYROWDJH *DWLQJGHDGWLPH 3' 3'
>9@ >XV@ &DEOHUHVLVWDQFH 6WDWRUOHDNLQGXFW 5RWRUUHVLVWDQFH
3 3 >˖@ >˖@
3' 3' 3'
5FDEOH 5V /˰6 /˰5 55
0DLQLQGXFWDQFH
/0
&FDEOH
3'
Figure 6-1 Equivalent circuit diagram (ECD)
In addition to the ECD data, the motor magnetizing characteristic (see the figure above) can
be determined using the motor data identification (P1900 = 3). If the motor-inverter
combination is operated in the field-weakening range (which is above the nominal frequency
of the motor), then this characteristic should be determined, especially when Vector control
is being used. As a result of this magnetizing characteristic, the Inverter can, in the field-
weakening range, accurately calculate the current which is generated in the field and in-turn
achieve a higher torque accuracy.
˓>@
3
3

3
3

3 3 3 3 L w>@
L >$@
Lw>@ w
U
Figure 6-2 Magnetizing characteristic
The motor data identification is carried-out with the motor at a standstill and it takes,
including the data calculation per selection (P1900 = 2 or 3), between 20 seconds and 4
minutes to complete, depending on the motor size. While the motor data identification is
active A0541 is displayed.
Frequency converter
The motor data identification routine must be carried-out with the motor in the cold condition
so that the motor resistance values saved can be assigned to the parameter of the ambient
temperature P0625. Only then is the correct temperature adaptation of the resistances
possible during operation.
The motor data identification routine operates with the results of the "Complete
parameterization" P0340 = 1 or the motor equivalent diagram data which was last saved.
The results become increasingly better the more times that the identification routine is
executed (up to 3 times).
WARNING
It is not permissible to carry-out the motor identification routine for loads which are
potentially hazardous (e.g. suspended loads for crane applications). Before starting the
motor data identification routine, the potentially hazardous load must be secured (e.g. by
lowering the load to the floor or clamping the load using the motor holding brake).
When starting the motor data identification routine, the rotor can move into a preferred
position. This is more significant for larger motors.
Note
The equivalent circuit data (P0350, P0354, P0356, P0358, P0360) and the motor cable
resistance (P0352) have to be entered as phase values.
It is recommended that the resistance of the motor supply cable (p0352) is entered before
starting the standstill measurement (p1900) so it can be included when the stator resistance
(p0350) is calculated.
Entering the cable resistance improves the accuracy of thermal resistance adaptation,
particularly when long supply cables are used. This governs behavior at low speeds,
particularly during sensorless vector control.
It is not necessary to lock the motor rotor for the motor data identification routine but if
possible it should be done, e.g. by closing the motor holding brake.
Before starting the motor identification, the correct ambient temperature value should be
entered in P0625 (default 20 °C).
The following formula can be applied to check the correctness of the motor rating plate data:
PN = √3 ∗ VNΥ ∗ INΥ ∗ cosϕ ∗ η ≈ √3 ∗ VNΔ ∗ INΔ ∗ cosϕ ∗ η
Where:
PN rated motor power
VN Υ, VN Δ rated motor voltage (star/delta)
IN Υ, IN Δ rated motor current (star/delta)
cosϕ power factor
η efficiency
If problems occur while the motor data identification is active, e.g. the current controller
oscillates, the rating plate data should be re-checked and an approximately correct
magnetizing current entered in P0320. The motor data identification routine should then be
re-started by calling P1900 = 2 or P1900 = 3.
A step-by-step description is given in section "Quick Commissioning".
Frequency converter
6.2 Motorized Potentiometer (MOP)
Data
Parameter range: P1031 … r1050

Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP3100
Description - Operation
The motorized potentiometer (MOP) function emulates an electromechanical potentiometer
to enter setpoints. The MOP value, adjusted using the "MOP UP" (P1035) and
"MOP DOWN" (P1036) command is stored in r1050 and can be connected as main or
additional setpoint.
The MOP functionality can be selected using digital inputs, operator panel, or a
communication interface.
The behavior of the MOP also depends on the duration of the "MOP UP" (P1035) and
"MOP DOWN" (P1036) command:
● P1035 / P1036 (MOP UP / MOP DOWN) = 1 for < 1 s:
Frequency changes in steps of 0.1 Hz.
● P1035 / P1036 (MOP UP / MOP DOWN) = 1 for > 1 s:
Frequency ramps up (down) with the time of P1047 (P1048) but not faster than 2 s.
Table 6- 1 Overview of MOP behavior
Motorized potentiometer Function

MOP UP MOP DOWN
0 0 Setpoint frozen
0 1 decrease setpoint
1 0 increase setpoint
1 1 Setpoint frozen
Frequency converter
'LJLWDOLQSXWV 3
U[

W
%2367$57(5
U 3

866RQ56 W
U 3
866RQ56
U W
I
352),%86 3
U
352),QHW
U
3
W
3 3
3
IDFW
U
3
Figure 6-3 Details of MOP behavior
Input values
Table 6- 2 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting

P1035 = … MOP UP
possible sources: 722.x (digital inputs), 19.13 (BOP, default), 2032.13 (USS on RS232),
2036.13 (USS on RS485), 2091.13 (PROFIBUS DP) r8890.13 (PROFInet)
P1036 = … MOP DOWN
possible sources: 722.x (digital inputs), 19.14 (BOP, default), 2032.14 (USS on RS232),
2036.14 (USS on RS485), 2091.14 (PROFIBUS DP) r8890.14 (PROFInet)
P1041 = … Select MOP setpoint source,
0 = manual (default): MOP setpoint via P1035 and P1036,
1 = automatic (MOP setpoint via P1042)
P1042 = … MOP auto setpoint
Setpoint from automatic motorized potentiometer (selected via P1041) (default = 0).
P1043 = … MOP accept ramp generator setpoint
A positive edge via this parameter sets the setpoint source for MOP signal to P1044.
0 = inactive (default )
1 = active
P1044 = … MOP ramp generator setpoint
MOP setpoint activated via a positive edge on P1043. That value becomes active immediately
at the MOP output without the ramp up time set in P1047, default = 0.
Frequency converter
Table 6- 3 Additional commissioning parameters

P1031 = … MOP mode
0: Last MOP setpoint not saved in P1040,
MOP UP/DOWN requires an ON command to become active (default).
1: Last MOP setpoint saved in P1040,
MOP UP/DOWN requires an ON command to become active.
2: Last MOP setpoint not saved in P1040,
MOP UP/DOWN active without additional no ON command.
3: Last MOP setpoint saved in P1040,
MOP UP/DOWN active without additional no ON command.
P1032 = … Inhibit reverse direction of MOP
0: setpoint inversion allowed (default)
1: setpoint inversion inhibited
P1040 = … Setpoint of the MOP
-650 … 650 Hz: Determines MOP setpoint (default = 5 Hz)
P1047 = … MOP ramp-up time
0 … 1000 s: Sets the ramp up time from standstill up to maximum motor frequency for the
MOP ramp generator (default = 10 s).
P1048 = … MOP ramp-down time
0 … 1000 s: Sets the ramp down time from maximum motor frequency down to standstill for
the MOP ramp generator (default = 10 s).
Output value
r1045 MOP ramp generator input frequency

input frequency of ramp generator
r1050 Actual Output frequency of the MOP
Additional parameters regarding the MOP function

P1080 = … Min. frequency
0 (default) … 650 Hz: Lower limit of the motor frequency, irrespective of frequency setpoint.
P1082 = … Max. frequency
0 … 650 Hz, (50 Hz default): Upper limit of the motor frequency, irrespective of the frequency
setpoint.
Frequency converter
Examples
Table 6- 4 MOP setpoint sources
Function Source
BOP Serial Interface, e.g PROFIBUS Digitial inputs
P1035 (MOP UP) = 19.13 = 2090.13 = 722.4 (DI4)
P1036 (MOP DOWN) = 19.14 = 2090.14 = 722.5 (DI5)
Table 6- 5 MOP setpoint as main setpoint or additional setpoint
Function Source
P1070 (Main setpoint) = r1050 (Output freq MOP)
P1075 (Additional setpoint)
Frequency converter
6.3 Positioning Ramp Down
Data

Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: -
Description
The positioning ramp down can be used for applications where it is necessary that a residual
distance is moved-through up to the stop dependent on an external event (e.g. BERO
switch). In this case, the inverter generates a continuous braking ramp by selecting OFF1
depending on the actual load speed and velocity. The motor will ramp down along this
calculated braking ramp to cover the parameterised distance (see figure below).
0RWRU *HDU
I
V 3 ವI2))ವW3
2))
I2))
W
W3
Figure 6-4 Positioning ramp down
Frequency converter
To parameterize the position ramp down, enter the remaining distance that must be run
through in P2488, referring to the load. In order to carry-out the residual distance calculation
on the load side, the mechanical arrangement of the axis (gearbox ratio, linear or rotary axis)
must be appropriately parameterized (see figure below).
'LVSRVLWLRQ 3DUDPHWHU
VOLQ
0RWRUUHYROXWLRQV 3
/RDG L
/RDGUHYROXWLRQV 3
0RWRU *HDU
] 1RRIUHYROXWLRQV
] VFUHZOHDG 3
L >XQLW@
Q0RWRU Q/RDG
/RDG
0RWRU *HDU VURW 0RWRUUHYROXWLRQV 3
L
/RDGUHYROXWLRQV 3
L
Q0RWRU Q/RDG
Figure 6-5 Rotary or linear axis
Using this data, the frequency inverter calculates the ratio between the distance and the
motor revolutions and can therefore consider the movement on the load side.
Note
The "Switch-off frequency" (P2167) can have an influence on the final positioning result.
Frequency converter
Input values

P2480 = … Enable positioning ramp down manually
Defines the source signal for enabling/disabling positioning
P2481 = … Gearbox ratio input
0.01 ... 9999.99, default 1.00
Defines ratio between number of motor shaft revolutions to equal one revolution of the gearbox
input shaft
P2482 = … Gearbox ratio output
0.01 ... 9999.99, default 1.00
Defines ratio between number of motor shaft revolutions to equal one revolution of the gearbox
output shaft
P2484 = … No. of shaft turns = 1 Unit
0.01 ... 9999.99, default 1.00
Sets the number of rotations of the motor shaft required to represent 1 unit of user selected
unit
P2487 = … Positional error trim value
-99 ... 200, default 0
Offset error corretion due to mechanical error
P2488 = … Distance / No. of revolutions
0.01 ... 9999.99, Number of units (P2484) for down ramp (default = 1.00)
Sets the required distance or number of revolutions
Output value
r2489 Tracking Values

Index:
1: Remaining number of shaft revolutions
2: Accumulated shaft revolutions during the positioning ramp down
3: Accumulated encoder increments during the positioning ramp down
Frequency converter
6.4 JOG
6.4 JOG
Data
Parameter range: P1055 … P1061

Warnings: A0923
Faults: -
Description
The JOG function allows:
● to check the functionality of the motor and inverter after commissioning has been
completed (first traversing motion, checking the direction of rotation, etc.)
● to bring a motor or a motor load into a specific position
● to traverse a motor, e.g. after a program has been interrupted
The JOG function has the commands "Jog enable", "Jog right" and JOG left". It can be
performed via digital inputs, BOP or serial interface.
Table 6- 7 Overview of Jog function
JOG enable JOG right JOG left

0 0/1 0/1 No reaction
1 0 1 Inverter accelerates to JOG frequency left (P1059)
1 1 0 Inverter accelerates to JOG frequency right
(P1058)
1 1 1 Frequency frozen at the current value with alarm
A0293
Frequency converter
6.4 JOG
ಯರ
-2*HQDEOH
W
3 ಯರ
$ $
',
ಯರ
-2*ULJKW
%23 W
3 ಯರ

56
56
ಯರ
-2*OHIW
)LHOGEXV W
3 ಯರ

I
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Figure 6-6 JOG counter-clockwise and JOG clockwise
Pressing the appropriate key accelerates the motor to the frequency in P1058 (JOG right) or
P1059 (JOG left) at the ramp rate set in P1060. When the key is released, the motor stops,
decelerating at the rate set in P1061. If JOG right and JOG left signals are given at the same
time, there is no reaction, and a warning A0923 is raised.
Input values

P1055 = … Enable JOG right
possible sources: 722.x (digital inputs) / 2032.8 (option port) / r2090.8 (serial interface)
P1056 = … Enable JOG left
P1057 = … JOG enable
0 disabled, 1 enabled (default)
Frequency converter
6.4 JOG

P1058 = … JOG frequency right
0 Hz … 650 Hz, default 5 Hz.
P1059 = … JOG frequency left
0 Hz … 650 Hz, default 5 Hz.
P1060 = … JOG ramp-up time
0 s ... 650 s, default 10 s
P1061 = … JOG ramp-down time
0 s ... 650 s, default 10 s
Example
JOG function via option port (BOP)
Command source via PROFIBUS communication

P1055 = 2090.8 JOG right via PROFIBUS
P1056 = 2090.9 JOG left via PROFIBUS
Note
The JOG function as used in the described inverter does not correspond to the definition in
the PROFIdrive profile.
Frequency converter
6.5 Monitoring Functions
6.5.1 General monitoring functions and messages
Data

r0052, r0053, r2197, r2198
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP4100, FP4110
Description
The described inverter has an extensive range of monitoring functions and messages which
can be used for open-loop process control. The control can either be implemented in the
inverter or using an external control (e.g. PLC). The interlocking functions in the inverter as
well as the output of signals for external control are implemented using BICO technology.
The status of the individual monitoring functions and messages are emulated in the following
CO/BO parameters:
r0019 CO/BO: BOP control word

r0050 CO/BO: Active command data set
r0052 CO/BO: Status word 1
r0053 CO/BO: Status word 2
r0054 CO/BO: Control word 1
r0055 CO/BO: Supplementary (additional) control word
r0056 CO/BO: Status word – closed-loop motor control
r0403 CO/BO: Encoder status word
r0722 CO/BO: Status, digital inputs
r0747 CO/BO: Status, digital outputs
r1407 CO/BO: Status 2 – closed-loop motor control
r2197 CO/BO: Messages 1
r2198 CO/BO: Messages 2
r9722 CO/BO: SI status word (only available with Fail-safe CUs)
Frequently used monitoring functions/messages including parameter number and bit are
shown in the table below.
Frequency converter
Table 6- 10 Extract of monitoring functions and messages
Functions/states Parameter/bit number Function chart

Inverter ready 52.0 -
Inverter ready to run 52.1 -
Inverter running 52.2 -
Inverter fault active 52.3 -
OFF2 active 52.4 -
OFF3 active 52.5 -
On inhibit active 52.6 -
Inverter warning active 52.7 -
Deviation setpoint – actual value 52.8 -
PZD control 52.9 -
|f_act| >= P1082 (f_max) 52.10 / 2197.6 FP4110
Warning: Motor current limit 52.11 -
Brake active 52.12 -
Motor overload 52.13 -
Motor runs right 52.14 -
Inverter overload 52.15 -
DC brake active 53.0 -
|f_act| > P2167 (f_off) 53.1 FP4110
|f_act| > P1080 (f_min) 53.2 FP4100
i_act ≧ P2170 53.3 / 2197.8 FP4110
f_act > P2155 (f_1) 53.4 / 2197.2 FP4100
f_act ≦ P2155 (f_1) 53.5 / 2197.1 FP4100
f_act >= setpoint (f_set) 53.6 / 2197.4 -
Vdc_act < P2172 53.7 / 2197.9 FP4110
Vdc_act > P2172 53.8 / 2197.10 FP4110
Ramping finished 53.9 -
PID output R2294 == P2292 (PID_min) 53.10 FP5100
PID output R2294 == P2291 (PID_max) 53.11 FP5100
|f_act| <= P1080 (f_min) 2197.0 FP4100
f_act > zero 2197.3 FP4110
|f_act| <= P2167 (f_off) 2197.5 FP4110
f_act == setpoint (f_set) 2197.7 FP4110
No-load operation 2197.11 -
|f_act| <= P2157 (f_2) 2198.0 -
|f_act| > P2157 (f_2) 2198.1 -
|f_act| <= P2159 (f_3) 2198.2 -
|f_act| > P2159 (f_3) 2198.3 -
|f_set| < P2161 (f_min_set) 2198.4 -
f_set > 0 2198.5 -
Motor blocked 2198.6 -
Motor stalled 2198.7 -
Frequency converter

|i_act r0068| < P2170 2198.8 FP4100
|m_act| > P2174 & setpoint reached 2198.9 -
|m_act| > P2174 2198.10 -
Load torque monitoring: Warning 2198.11 -
Load torque monitoring: Fault 2198.12 -
Table 6- 11 Messages of SI status word (only available with Fail-safe CUs)

Safe torque off (STO) selected r9772.0
Safe torque off (STO) activated r9772.1
Safe stop 1 (SS1) selected r9772.2
Safety monitoring ramp active r9772.3
Safely limited speed (SLS) selected r9772.4
SLS limit reached r9772.5
Passivated STO active, drive fault r9772.8
Safe Brake closed r9772.14
Dynamisation required r9772.15
Note
On the BOP the bit numbers are displayed in hex-format (0..9, A..F).
Frequency converter
6.5.2 Load torque monitoring
Data

r2198
Warnings: A0952
Faults: F0452
Function chart number: –
Description
This function allows the mechanical force transmission

between motor and motor load to be monitored. Typical 'ULYH
applications include, for example pulley belts, flat belts VKDIW
or chains, or pulleys for toothed wheels of motor shafts 'HIOHFWLRQ

which then transmit circumferential velocities and UROO
circumferential forces (see figure). Shaft drive with flat belts
The load torque monitoring function can detect whether the motor load is locked or the force
transmission has been interrupted.
For the load torque monitoring function, the actual frequency/torque characteristic is
compared with the programmed frequency/torque characteristic (refer to P2182 … P2190). If
the actual value lies outside the programmed tolerance bandwidth, then, depending on
parameter P2181, either warning A0952 or fault F0452 is generated. Parameter P2192 can
be used to delay the output of the warning or fault message. This avoids erroneous alarms
which could be caused by brief transient states (see figure below).
Frequency converter
7RUTXH>1P@
3
3
3
3
$FWXDO
3 WRUTXH
3
3
)UHTXHQF\
3 3 3 >+]@
3
$
%LW W
3 3
Figure 6-7 Load torque monitoring (P2181 = 1)
The frequency/torque tolerance bandwidth is defined by the gray shaded area in the figure
below. The bandwidth is determined by the frequency values P2182 … P2184 including the
max. frequency P1082 and the torque limits P2186 … P2189. When defining the tolerance
bandwidth it should be ensured that a specific tolerance is taken into account in which the
torque values are allows to vary corresponding to the application.
7RUTXH>1P@ 3
0D[IUHTXHQF\
3
8SSHUWRUTXHWKUHVKROG
3
/RZHUWRUTXHWKUHVKROG
3
3
3
3
)UHTXHQF\
3 >+]@
3 7KUHVKROGIUHTXHQF\ 3
7KUHVKROGIUHTXHQF\ 7KUHVKROGIUHTXHQF\
Figure 6-8 Frequency and torque tolerance bandwidth
Frequency converter
6.5.3 Power Module Protection
6.5.3.1 General Overload Monitoring
Data
Parameter range: P0640, r0067, r1242, P0210

Warnings: A0501, A0502, A0503
Faults: F0001, F0002, F0003, F0020
Description
Just the same as for motor protection, the inverter provides extensive protection for the
power components. This protection concept is sub-divided into two levels:
● Warning and response
● Fault and shutdown
Using this concept, a high utilization of the Power Module components can be achieved
without the inverter being immediately shut down.
The monitoring thresholds for the faults and shutdowns are permanently saved in the
inverter and cannot be changed by the user. On the other hand, the threshold levels for
"Warning and response" can be modified by the user to optimize the system. These values
have default settings so that the "Fault and shutdown" thresholds do not respond.
Frequency converter
6.5.3.2 Power Module Thermal Monitoring
Data

r0036 … r0037
Warnings: A0504 … A0506
Faults: F0004 … F0006, F0012, F0022
Description
Similar to motor protection, the main function of the thermal power module monitoring is to
detect critical states. Parametrizable responses are provided for the user which allows the
motor system to still be operated at the power limit avoiding immediate shutdown. However,
the possibility of assigning parameters only involves interventions below the shutdown
threshold which cannot be changed by users.
The described inverter has the following thermal monitoring functions:
● i2t monitoring
The i2t monitoring is used to protect components which have a long thermal time constant
in comparison to the semiconductors. An overload with reference to i2t is present if the
inverter utilization r0036 indicates a value greater than 100% (utilization as a % refers to
rated operation).
● Heatsink temperature
The heatsink temperature of the power semiconductors (IGBT) is monitored and
displayed in r0037[0].
● Chip temperature
Significant temperature differences can occur between the junction of the IGBT and the
heatsink. These differences are taken into account by the chip temperature monitoring
and are displayed in r0037[1].
When an overload occurs regarding one of these three monitoring functions, initially, a
warning is output. The warning threshold P0294 (i2t monitoring) and P0292 (heatsink
temperature and chip temperature monitoring) can be parameterized relative to the
shutdown values.
Frequency converter
Example
At the same time that the warning is output, the parameterized responses are initiated using
P0290 (default: P0290 = 2). Possible responses include:
● Reducing the pulse frequency (P0290 = 2 or 3)
This is an extremely effective method to reduce losses in the power module, as the
switching losses represent a very high proportion of the overall losses. In many
applications, a temporary reduction of the pulse frequency can be tolerated in favor of
maintaining the process
Disadvantage
The current ripple is increased when the pulse frequency is reduced. This can result in an
increase of the torque ripple at the motor shaft (for low moments of inertia) and an increase
in the noise level. When the pulse frequency is reduced this has no influence on the dynamic
response of the current control loop as the current control sampling time remains constant!
● Reducing the output frequency (P0290 = 0 or 2)
This is advantageous if it is not desirable to reduce the pulse frequency or if the pulse
frequency is already set to the lowest level. Further, the load should have a characteristic
similar to that of a fan, e.g. a square-law torque characteristic for decreasing speed.
When the output frequency is reduced, this significantly reduces the inverter output
current and in turn reduces the losses in the power module.
● No reduction (P0290 = 1)
This option should be selected if neither a reduction in the pulse frequency nor a
reduction in the output current is being considered. In this case, the inverter does not
change its operating point after the warning threshold has been exceeded so that the
motor can continue to be operated until the shutdown values are reached. After the
shutdown threshold has been reached, the inverter shuts down (trips) with fault F0004.
The time which expires up to shutdown is however not defined and depends on the
magnitude of the overload. Only the warning threshold can be changed in order to obtain
an earlier warning and, if required, externally intervene in the motor process (e.g. by
reducing the load, lowering the ambient temperature).
Note
If the inverter fan fails, this would be indirectly detected by the measurement of the
heatsink temperature.
A wire breakage or short circuit of the temperature sensor(s) is also monitored.
Frequency converter
6.5.4 Thermal Motor Protection and Overload Responses
Data
Parameter range: P0335, P0601 … P0640

P0344
P0350 … P0360
r0035
Warnings: A0511
Faults: F0011, F0015
Function chart number: –
Description
The thermal motor protection defends the motor effectively against overheating and ensures
high motor utilization even if the motor operates at its thermal limits. It can be used with or
without a temperature sensor.
Thermal motor protection can be realized using one of the following variants:
● using the thermal motor model without sensor (P0601 = 0)
● using a PTC thermistor (P0601 = 1)
● using a KTY84 sensor (P0601 = 2)
● using a ThermoClick sensor (P0601 = 4)
When the motor is operated at its rated speed and the motor temperature will be calculated
after power on (P0621 = 1/2) thermal protection without sensor can be used.
When the motor is operated below its rated speed or if the motor temperature is not
calculated after power on (P0621 = 0), one of the above mentioned temperature sensors
should be used.
Frequency converter
)DXOW
)
3
9 U
%LW
7KHUPR&OLFN
7V
6LJQDO 1RVHQVRU
$'& 0RWRU
ORVV 37& LW

GHWHFWLRQ .7< ุ WHPS

37& UHDFWLRQ
.7< U
˽
3
9 3

(TXLYDOHQWFLUXLWGDWD
7KHUPDO U
PRWRU 3

3RZHUGLVVLSDWLRQ3YPRW U
PRGHO
U
Figure 6-9 Thermal motor protection
Features of thermal motor protection

Common Features
● Motor protection independent from inverter protection
● Separate calculation of the motor temperature for each data set
● Selectable overtemperature reaction via P0610.
Features of thermal motor protection without sensor
● Motor temperature calculation using the thermal motor model
● Adjustable temperature warning threshold (default: P0604 = 130 °C)
● Adjustable trip threshold (P0604 * 1.1)
Features of thermal motor protection with a PTC thermistor
● Measured trip threshold instead of calculated threshold
Features of thermal motor protection with a KTY84 sensor
● Improved protection by evaluation of the KTY84 sensor (advantage: having precise initial
temperature after a line supply failure)
● Adjustable temperature warning threshold (default: P0604 = 130 °C)
● Adjustable trip threshold (P0604 * 1.1)
Features of thermal motor protection with a ThermoClick sensor
● Measured trip threshold instead of calculated threshold
Frequency converter
Parameters to establish thermal motor protection
Table 6- 12 Main parameters for thermal motor protection

P0601 = … Motor temperature sensor
0: No sensor (default); 1: PTC thermistor; 2: KTY84; 4: ThermoClick sensor
P0604 = … Threshold motor temperature (0° C … 200°C, default: 130 °C)
Warning threshold for motor temperature protection. The trip temperature is 10 % higher as the
value in P0604. If the actual motor temperature exeeds the trip temperature, the inverter reacts
as defined in P0610.
This settings are not effective with a PTC thermistor or a ThermoClick sensor
P0610 = … Motor I2t temperature reaction
0: No reaction, warning only; 1: Warning and Imax reduction (result: reduced frequency and trip
with F0011);
2: Warning and trip (F0011) (default)
P0621 = … Motor temp. ident after restart (0: No identification ; 1: Temperature identification only after
power on; 2 : Temperature identification after every power on( default)
P0625 = … Ambient motor temperature (-40 °C … 80 °C, default: 20 °C)
Ambient temperature of motor at motor data identification. Only change when motor is cold.
After changing Motor Identification has to be performed.
Table 6- 13 Additional parameters

r0035 Act. motor temperature
p0344 Motor weight (1 kg … 6500 kg, default: 9,4 kg)
Used in thermal motor model. Normally calculated via P0340, can be changed manually.
P0622 = … Magnetizing time for temp id after start up (0 ms … 2000 ms, default: 0 ms)
Magnetization time for stator resistance identification.
p0640 = … Motor overload factor
Frequency converter
6.5.4.1 Thermal motor protection without sensor
Description
If the motor temperature without sensor is selected (P0601 = 0), the motor data and ambient
temperature, entered during quick commissioning are used to calculate the motor
temperature according a build in thermal motor model. This procedure permits reliable and
stable operation for standard Siemens motors. For motors from third-party manufacturers it
is possible that the calculation can be optimized by adapting the motor weight (P0344).
The trip threshold can be changed via the warning threshold (P0604, default 130 °C,
according thermal class B), where the following applies: Trip threshold = P0604 * 1.1.
If the trip threshold is reached the inverter reacts according the setting of P0610.
Additional information about temperature rise classes
In motor technology, temperature rise issues play a Extract from IEC85 thermal classes:
decisive role when dimensioning electrical machinery.
Different temperature limits apply for the various 7KHUPDO 0D[SHUPLVVLEOH
FODVV WHPSHUDWXUH
materials used in electric motors. Depending on the
< r&
insulating material being used, a differentiation is made
$ r&
according to thermal classes (refer to the motor rating
( r&
plate) with defined limit temperatures. An excerpt from
% r&
IEC85 is provided in the table. ) r&
+ r&
Motor temperature calculation using the thermal motor model

The temperature calculation uses a thermal motor model to calculate the temperatures of
various locations in the motor.
Note
To get precise values we always recommend to perform a Motor Data Identification after
Quick Commissioning so that the electrical equivalent circuit diagram data are determined.
This allows a calculation of the losses which occur in the motor which have an impact on the
accuracy of the thermal motor model.
The motor temperature calculation is used for each variant of thermal motor protection
except using a KTY84 sensor. In this case the values given by the KTY84 sensor are used
independent of the P0621settings.
Frequency converter
The calculation can be adjusted using P0621 as follows:

● P0621 = 0: No calculation. The value of P0625 (Ambient Motor Temperature) will be
used.
● P0621 = 1: The motor temperature will be calculated the first time the motor starts after
the power supply has been switched on.
● P0621 = 2: The motor temperature will be calculated each time the motor starts.
Temperature calculating procedure
After power supply is available and a motor ON command is issued, the motor will be
magnetized first. If "Motor temperature calculation" is deactivated (P0621 = 0), the motor
immediately starts to rotate. If it is activated (P0621 = 1/2), the system waits until
magnetization has been completed and until the motor current remains constant over one
period (P0622). If it is constant the value is taken to calculate the winding resistance. This is
then entered in r0623.
If the motor is cold, the value of r0623 must approximately correspond to the value of P0350;
it must be appropriately higher if the motor is not cold. (at 130 °C approximately 150 %).
Note
In the following cases, the motor temperature cannot be calculated and an average
temperature of aproximately 47 °C will be used for calculation:
 V/f operation
 Fault when measuring the current, e.g. the current isn’t sufficiently constant
 Due to a flying restart the speed is too high.
Frequency converter
6.5.4.2 Thermal motor protection with a PTC thermistor
Description
The PTC is connected to the control terminals 14 and 15 of 108

537&
the inverter.
107
PTC monitoring is activated with the parameter setting
P0601 = 1. If the resistance value, connected at the 106
terminals, exceeds 1500 Ω the inverter reacts according the 105

setting of P0610.
104
If the PTC thermistor recognizes a sensor wire breakage
(> 2000 Ω) or a short-circuit (< 10 Ω), the inverter trips with 103
F0015.
102
101
10 50 100 150 200 250
737&
6.5.4.3 Thermal motor protection with a KTY84 sensor
Description
WARNING
The KTY84 temperature sensor is polarized. Therefore KTY+ must be connected to

terminal 14 and KTY- to terminal 15 of the frequency inverter.
Otherwise the thermal motor protection does not work well. This can lead to extremely
dangerous overheating of the motor without tripping with F0011 to prevent the motor from
burning.
If the motor temperature monitoring with KTY84 is

activated (P0601 = 2), the sensor temperature is written 5.7<
into parameter r0035 instead of the value, calculated by NΩ
the motor model.

The trip threshold can be changed via the warning
threshold (P0604, default 130 °C), where the following
applies:
Trip threshold = P0604 * 1.1.
If the trip threshold is reached the inverter reacts

according the setting of P0610.
If the KTY84 sensor recognizes a sensor wire breakage

or a short-circuit, the inverter trips with F0015. 7.7<
Frequency converter
6.5.4.4 Thermal motor protection with a ThermoClick sensor
Using a ThermoClick sensor (P0601 = 4)

The thermoClick sensor is connected to the control terminals 14 and 15 of the inverter.
ThermoClick sensor monitoring is activated with the parameter setting P0601 = 4. If the
switching threshold of the thermoClick sensor is reached, the inverter reacts according the
settings in P0610.
With a thermoClick sensor a short circuit will not be detected. A wire breakage will be
identified as motor overtemperature and the inverter reacts according the setting in P0610.
Frequency converter
6.6 Restart Functions
6.6.1 Automatic restart
Data
Parameter range: P1210, P1211

Description
The "automatic restart" function allows the inverter, to quit faults automatically and start
again, without a new run command on the next power up.
The "automatic restart" function requires a RUN command, both prior to the power failure
and on power up, to operate.
The automatic restart function has to be parametrized via P1210 (Automatic restart behavior)
and P1211 (number or restart attempts). The restart attempts can be set from 0 … 10
(default = 3). The number is internally decremented after each unsuccessful attempt. After all
attempts have been made automatic restart is cancelled with the message F0035. After a
successful start attempt, the counter is again reset to the initial value.
Note
The automatic restart function should not be used when the inverter is conected via a
fieldbus system to a higher level control system. If, in this case, a line undervoltage or a line
supply failure occurs we recommend to switch the inverter off and on again if the line supply
is available again.
Frequency converter
CAUTION
*) Automatic restart with external 24 V supply
If the Control Unit is powered by an external 24 V supply and the line supply fails, the
Power Module will lose power, but the Control Unit will remain active. If this situation
occurs, the Control Unit will not perform an automatic restart. This situation could result in
the inverter being in an undetermined state and may not react as predicted.
Command source for automatic restart
The automatic restart function has been designed to ignore command source time-outs.
That is, if the command source is, for example, a PLC and the PLC times-out an automatic
restart will not be initiated.
On power failures (line supply failure), a differentiation is made between the following
conditions:
● Line undervoltage
"Line undervoltage" is an extremely short supply interruption. A BOP e.g. - if installed -
hasn't gone dark. The LED SF will not be on due to a line undervoltage.
● Line supply failure
A "Line supply failure" represents a longer line supply interruption. If, in case of a line
supply failure, the line supply returns the LED SF will be on.
Table 6- 14 Overview of Automatic restart function
Automatic Restart Number of restart

(P1210) attempts (P1211)
0 disabled --
1 disabled Trip reset after power on
2 disabled Restart after line supply failure
3 enabled Restart after line supply failure/undervoltage or fault
4 disabled Restart after line undervoltage
5 disabled Restart after line supply failure and fault
6 enabled Restart after line supply failure/undervoltage or fault
Note
In case of using a BOP, a pending Automatic Restart is displayed via .
Frequency converter
The automatic restart function P1210 is shown in the table below as a function of external
states/events.
Table 6- 15 Overview of Automatic restart behavior
P121 ON always active Inverter ON and no RUN command

0 Fault F0003 for All other faults for All faults + F0003 No line supply
for line supply failure
Line supply Line Line supply Line
failure
failure undervoltage failure undervoltage
0
1RDFWLRQ 1RDFWLRQ 1RDFWLRQ 1RDFWLRQ 1RDFWLRQ 1RDFWLRQ
1
)DXOWDFN 1RDFWLRQ )DXOWDFN 1RDFWLRQ )DXOWDFN 1RDFWLRQ
2 )DXOWDFN 1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ 1RDFWLRQ 1RDFWLRQ 5HVWDUW
UHVWDUW VHH&DXWLRQ
3 )DXOWDFN )DXOWDFN )DXOWDFN )DXOWDFN )DXOWDFN
1RDFWLRQ
UHVWDUW UHVWDUW UHVWDUW UHVWDUW UHVWDUW
4 )DXOWDFN )DXOWDFN
1RDFWLRQ 1RDFWLRQ 1RDFWLRQ 1RDFWLRQ
UHVWDUW UHVWDUW
5 )DXOWDFN 1RDFWLRQ )DXOWDFN )DXOWDFN
1RDFWLRQ 5HVWDUW
UHVWDUW VHH&DXWLRQ UHVWDUW UHVWDUW
6 )DXOWDFN )DXOWDFN )DXOWDFN )DXOWDFN )DXOWDFN
5HVWDUW
UHVWDUW UHVWDUW UHVWDUW UHVWDUW UHVWDUW
WARNING
When the automatic restart function is activated and line supply failure lasts for a period of
e.g. 5 s or longer it may be assumed that the inverter is powered-down. However, when the
line supply returns, the inverter can automatically start to run again without any operator
intervention.
If the operating range of the motor is entered in this status, this can result in death, severe
injury or material damage.
Note
In addition the "Flying restart" function must be activated if, for an automatic restart, the
inverter is to be connected to a motor which may already be spinning.
Frequency converter
6.6.2 Flying restart
Data
Parameter range: P1200, P1202, P1203

r1204, r1205
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Description
The "Flying restart" function, enabled through P1200, allows the inverter to be switched to a
spinning motor. Whereas with high possibility a fault with overcurrent F0001 would occur by
not using this function, as the flux must first be established in the motor and the V/f control or
closed-loop Vector control must be set corresponding to the actual motor speed. The inverter
frequency is synchronized with the motor frequency using the flying restart function.
When the inverter is normally powered-up it is assumed that the motor is stationary, the
inverter accelerates it from a standstill and the speed is ramped-up to the entered setpoint.
However, in many cases these conditions are not fulfilled, e.g. a fan motor - when the
inverter is powered-down the air flowing through the fan can cause it to rotate in any
direction.
WARNING
Drive starts automatically
Keep everybody informed after enabling this function. The drive will start automatically.
Frequency converter
Flying restart without speed encoder

Depending on parameter P1200, after the demagnetization time has expired P0347, flying
restart is started with the maximum search frequency fsearch,max (see figure below).
U
I I ຘ I 3 ຘ ຘ3
VHDUFK PD[ PD[ VOLS VWDQGDUG
This is realized either after the line supply returns when the automatic restart function has
been activated or after the last shutdown with the OFF2 command (pulse inhibit).
● V/f characteristic (P1300 < 20):
The search frequency is reduced, as a function of the DC link current with the search rate
which is calculated from parameter P1203. In so doing, the parametrizable search current
P1202 is impressed. If the search frequency is close to the rotor frequency, the DC link
current suddenly changes because the flux in the motor establishes itself. Once this state
has been reached, the search frequency is kept constant and the output voltage is
changed to the voltage value of the V/f characteristic with the magnetization time P0346
(see figure below).
● Closed-loop Vector control without encoder (SLVC):
Starting from the initial value, the search frequency approaches the motor frequency with
the impressed current P1202. The motor frequency has been found if both frequencies
coincide. The search frequency is then kept constant and the flux setpoint is changed to
the rated flux with the magnetization time constant (dependent on P0346).
After the magnetization time P0346 has expired, the ramp-function generator is set to the
speed actual value and the motor is operated with the actual reference frequency.
I
IVHDUFKPD[ 6HWSRLQWIUHTXHQF\
W
'HPDJQHWL]DWLRQ )O\LQJUHVWDUW 0DJQHWL]DWLRQ 5DPSXS
WLPH 3 WLPH
3 3 3
Figure 6-10 Flying restart
Frequency converter
Flying restart with speed encoder

Depending on parameter P1200, after the demagnetization time P0347 expires, the flying
restart is started with the maximum search frequency fsearch,max.
1. After the line supply returns with the automatic restart active
2. After the last shutdown using the OFF2 command (pulse inhibit)
● V/f characteristic (P1300 < 20):
For V/f control, the output voltage of the inverter is linearly increased from 0 to the V/f
characteristic value within the magnetization time P0346.
● Closed-loop Vector control with speed encoder (VC):
For the closed-loop Vector control, the necessary magnetization current is established
within the magnetization time P0346.
After the magnetization time P0346 has expired, the ramp-function generator is set to the
speed actual value and the motor is operated at the actual setpoint frequency.
Table 6- 16 Overview of Flying restart function
P1200 Flying restart active Search direction

0 Disabled -
1 Always Start in the direction of the setpoint
2 For line supply on and fault Start in the direction of the setpoint
3 For fault and OFF2 Start in the direction of the setpoint
4 Always Only in the direction of the setpoint
5 For line supply on, fault and OFF2 Only in the direction of the setpoint
6 For fault and OFF2 Only in the direction of the setpoint
Frequency converter
Input values

P1200 = … Flying start
0 disabled (default), 1 - 6 enabled

P1202 = … Motor-current: Flying start
10 % ... 200 %, default 100 %
P1203 = … Search rate: Flying start
10 % ... 200 %, default 100 %
WARNING
When "Flying restart" is activated (P1200 > 0), although the motor is at a standstill and the
setpoint is 0, it is possible that the motor can be accelerated as a result of the search
current!
If the operating range of the motor is entered when the motor is in this state, this can result
in death, severe injury or material damage.
Note
If a higher value is entered for the search velocity P1203 this results in a flatter search curve
and therefore to an extended search time. A lower value has the opposite effect.
For "Flying restart", a braking torque is generated which can cause motors, with low
moments of inertia, to brake.
For group motors, "Flying restart" should not be activated due to the different characteristics
of the individual motors when coasting down.
Frequency converter
6.7 Data Sets
6.7 Data Sets
Description
For many applications it is advantageous if several parameters can be simultaneously
changed, during operation or in the ready state, using an external signal.
This functionality can be elegantly implemented using indexed parameters. In this case, as
far as the functionality is concerned, the parameters are combined to form groups/data sets
and are indexed. By using indexing, several different settings can be saved for each
parameter which can be activated by changing-over the data set (e.g. toggling between
indexes).
The following data sets apply:
● Command Data Set CDS
● Drive Data Set DDS
Three independent settings are possible for each data set. These settings can be made
using the index of the particular parameter:
● CDS0 … CDS2
● DDS0 … DDS2
Command Data Set

Those parameters (connector and binector inputs) which are used to control the inverter and
enter a setpoint, are assigned to the command data set (CDS). The signal sources for the
control commands and setpoints are interconnected using BICO technology. For that the
connector and binector inputs are assigned corresponding to the connector and binector
outputs as signal sources. A command data set includes:
Command sources and binector inputs for control commands (digital signals) e.g.
Selects the command source P0700
ON/OFF1 P0840
OFF2 P0844
JOG Enable P1057
Enable JOG right P1055
Enable JOG left P1056
Setpoint sources and connector inputs for setpoints (analog signals) e.g.
Selection of frequency setpoint P1000
Selection of main setpoint P1070
Selection of additional setpoint P1075
Frequency converter
6.7 Data Sets
The parameters, combined in a command data set, are designated with [x] in the Parameter
Manual in the index field.
Index
Pxxxx[0] Command data set 0 (CDS0)
Note
A complete list of all of the CDS parameters is contained in the Parameter Manual.
It is possible to parameterize up to three command data sets. This makes it easier to toggle
between various pre-configured signal sources by selecting the appropriate command data
set. A frequent application involves, for example, the ability to toggle between automatic and
manual operation.
Note
The parameters will be altered during data set switchover in the state "Ready" and "Run".
The following parameters will not be changed in the state "run:
P0350, P0352, P0354, P0356, P0358, P0360, P0362, P0363, P0364, P0365, P0366, P0367,
P0368, P0369, P0700, P0701, P0702, P0703, P0704, P0705, P0706, P0707, P0708, P0709,
P0712, P0713, P0719, P0800, P0801, P0840, P0842, P0844, P0845, P0848, P0849, P0852,
P1000, P1020, P1021, P1022, P1023, P1035, P1036, P1055, P1056, P1070, P1071, P1075,
P1076, P1110, P1113, P1124, P1140, P1141, P1142, P1330, P1500, P1501, P1503, P1511,
P1522, P1523, P2103, P2104, P2106, P2220, P2221, P2222, P2223, P2235, P2236.
The described inverter has an integrated copy function which is used to transfer command
data sets.
This can be used to copy CDS parameters corresponding to the particular application.
P0809 is used to control the copy operation as follows:
Copy operation controlled with P0809

P0809[0] Number of the command data set which is to be copied (source)
P0809[1] Number of the command data set into which data is to be copied (target)
P0809[2] Copying is started, if P0809[2] = 1
Copying has been completed, if P0809[2] = 0
Frequency converter
6.7 Data Sets
3>@ &RS\IURP&'6
3>@ &RS\WR&'6
3>@ 6WDUWFRS\ >@ >@ >@
3
3
3
3
3

3
3
3
&'6 &'6 &'6
Figure 6-11 Copying from a CDS
The command data sets are changed-over using the BICO parameters P0810 and P0811,
whereby the active command data set is displayed in parameter r0050 (see figure below).
Changeover is possible both in the "Ready" as well as in the "Run" states.
6HOHFWLRQRI&'6
%,&'6ELW &2%2$FW&WUO:G

3 U
U

%,&'6ELW &2%2$FW&WUO:G
3 U
U
W
6ZLWFKRYHUWLPH 6ZLWFKRYHUWLPH
&'6DFWLYH DSSUR[PV DSSUR[PV
U

W
Figure 6-12 Changing-over a CDS
The currently active command data set (CDS) is displayed using parameter r0050:
selected active
CDS CDS
r0055 r0054 r0050
Bit15 Bit15
CDS0 0 0 0
CDS1 0 1 1
CDS2 1 0 2
CDS2 1 1 2
Figure 6-13 Active command data set (CDS)
Frequency converter
6.7 Data Sets
Example
The command source (e.g. terminals → BOP) or setpoint (frequency) source (e.g. AI → MOP)
should be changed-over using a terminal signal (e.g. DI3) as a function of an external event
(e.g. the higher-level control system fails). A typical example in this case is a mixer, which
may come to an uncontrolled stop when the control fails.
&RPPDQGVRXUFH 7HUPLQDO!%23
6HWSRLQWIUHTXHQF\VRXUFH $,!023
P0810 = 722.3
DI3
P0700[0] = 2 0
Terminals Sequence control
P0700[1] = 1 1
BOP
P1000[0] = 2 0
AI Setpoint Motor
channel control
P1000[1] = 1 1
MOP
Figure 6-14 Changing-over between the control and setpoint source
CDS0: Command source via terminals and setpoint source via analog input (AI)
CDS1: Command source via BOP and setpoint source via MOP
CDS changeover is realized using digital input 3 (DI3)
Commissioningsteps:
1. Carry-out commissioning for CDS0 (P0700[0] = 2 and P1000[0] = 2)
2. Connect P0810 (P0811 if required) to the CDS changeover source
(P0704[0] = 99, P0810 = 722.3)
3. Copy from CDS0 to CDS1 (P0809[0] = 0, P0809[1] = 1, P0809[2] = 1)
4. Adapt CDS1 parameters (P0700[1] = 1 and P1000[1] = 1)
Frequency converter
6.7 Data Sets
Drive data set

The drive data set (DDS) contains various setting parameters which are of significance for
the open-loop and closed-loop control of a motor:
Drive and encoder data, e.g.

Select motor type P0300
Rated motor voltage P0304
Main inductance P0360
Select encoder type P0400
Various closed-loop control parameters, e.g.

Fixed frequency 1 P1001
Min. frequency P1080
Ramp-up time P1120
Control mode P1300
The parameters, combined in a drive data set, are designated with an [x] in the Parameter
Manual in the index field:
Index
Pxxxx[0] Drive data set 0 (DDS0)
Note
A complete list of all of the DDS parameters is contained in the Parameter Manual.
It is possible to parameterize several drive data sets. This makes it easier to toggle between
various inverter configurations (control mode, control data, motors) by selecting the
appropriate drive data set (see figure below).
Note
The parameters will be altered during data set switchover in the state "Ready" and "Run".
The following parameters will not be changed in the state "run": P0300, P0304, P0305,
P0307, P0308, P0309, P0310, P0311, P0314, P0320, P0335, P0340, P0400, P0405, P0408,
P0410, P0491, P0492, P0500, P1082, P1240, P1256, P1300, P1320, P1322, P1324, P1820,
P2000, P2001, P2002, P2003, P2004, P2181.
Frequency converter
6.7 Data Sets
Just like the command data sets, it is possible to copy drive data sets within the described
inverter. P0819 is used to control the copy operation as follows:
Copy operation controlled with P0819

P0819[0] Number of the drive data set which is to be
copied (source)
P0819[1] Number of the drive data set into which data is to
be copied (target)
P0819[2] Copying is started, if P0819[2] = 1
Copying has been completed, if P0819[2] = 0
3>@ &RS\IURP''6
3>@ &RS\WR''6 >@ >@ >@
3>@ 6WDUWFRS\ 3
3
3
3
3

3
3
3
''6 ''6 ''6
Figure 6-15 Copying from a DDS
Drive data sets are changed-over using the BICO parameter P0820 and P0821 whereby the
active drive data set is displayed in parameter r0051 (see figure below). Drive data sets can
only be changed-over in the "Ready" state and this takes approximately 50 ms.
Frequency converter
6.7 Data Sets
'ULYHUXQQLQJ
'ULYHUHDG\
W
6HOHFWLRQRI''6
%,''6ELW &2%2$FW&WUO:G

3 U
U

%,''6ELW &2%2$FW&WUO:G
3 U
U
W
''6DFWLYH 6ZLWFKRYHUWLPH 6ZLWFKRYHUWLPH
U>@ DSSUR[PV DSSUR[PV

W
Figure 6-16 Changing-over a DDS
The currently active drive data set (DDS) is displayed using parameter r0051[1]:
selected active
DDS DDS
r0055 r0055 r0051 [0] r0051 [1]
Bit05 Bit04
DDS0 0 0 0 0
DDS1 0 1 1 1
DDS2 1 0 2 2
DDS2 1 1 2 2
Figure 6-17 Active drive data set (DDS)
Frequency converter
6.7 Data Sets
Example
The inverter should be switched-over from motor 1 to motor 2.
0 0RWRU
.
*
0 0RWRU
.
Figure 6-18 Changeover from motor 1 to motor 2
Commissioning steps with 2 motors (motor 1, motor 2):

1. Carry-out commissioning at DDS0 with motor 1; adapt the remaining DDS0 parameters.
2. Connect P0820 (P0821 if required) to the DDS changeover source
(e.g. via DI4: P0705[0] = 99, P0820 = 722.4).
3. Changeover to DDS1 (check using r0051).
4. Carry-out commissioning at DDS1 with motor 2; adapt the remaining DDS1 parameters.
Frequency converter
6.8 Electro-Mechanical Brakes
Functions of the electro-mechanical brake
WARNING
Dimensioning the electro-mechanical motor brake
The electro-mechanical brake must be dimensioned that, in case of a fault, the complete
motor can be braked to zero from any possible operational speed. If no electro-mechanical
brake is present, the machine manufacturer must adopt other suitable measures to protect
against motion after the energy supply to the motor has been cut (e.g. to protect against
sagging loads).
The electro-mechanical brake can be used as motor holding brake or as an instantaneous

brake.
● As motor holding brake it is used to prevent the motor from unintended rotation (e.g.
lifting or lowering the load in lifting applications) by applying torque in order to
compensate brake release times. The motor holding brake functionality is triggered by an
OFF1 or OFF3 command. For details see section " Motor Holding Brake (Page 75) ".
● As an instantaneous brake it slows down the motor from any speed down to zero speed
as fast as possible. The related brake release times are not considered in the case. The
instantaneous brake function is triggered by an OFF2 command. The OFF2 command
can be given manually or triggered automatically by an internal fault condition on the
inverter. On Fail-safe inverters this braking function can also be triggered by the Safe
Torque Off (STO) command or the passivated STO fault condition. (refer to the section
" Safe Brake Control (Page 245) ")
To keep the electro-mechanical brake open, it must be energized. When power is lost, or
removed from the brake, the brake closes and the motor shaft is held in position.
Note
If an electro-mechanical brake is attached, parameter P1215 needs to be enabled, otherwise
it will not be possible to run the motor!
Frequency converter
6.8.1 Motor Holding Brake
Data
Parameter range: P0346, P1080, P1215 … P1218

r0052 bit 12
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Description
For motors which must be secured when powered-down to prevent undesirable movement,
the inverter brake sequence control (enabled through P1215) can be used to control the
motor holding brake.
Before opening the brake, the pulse inhibit must be removed and a current impressed which
keeps the motor in that particular position. In this case, the impressed current is defined by
the min. frequency P1080. A typical value in this case is the rated motor slip r0330. The
rated rated motor slip r0330 indicates the value in percent of slip against synchronous run.
Thus you have to determine the slip frequency in Hz as shown in the example below:
P0310 x (r0330/100) = slip frequency
● P0310 = 50 Hz
● r0330 = 5 %
50 x (5/100) = 50 x 0.05 = 2.5 Hz
Slip frequency 5 % = 2.5 Hz
In order to protect the motor holding brake from continuous damage, the motor may only
continue to move after the brake has been released (brake release times are between 35 ms
and 500 ms). This delay must be taken into account in parameter P1216 "Holding brake
release delay" (see figure below).
Frequency converter
If the motor is switched off using OFF1 or OFF3 the motor ramps down until the minimum
frequency, P1080, is reached before the status signal r0052 bit 12 "Brake active" is reset.
The motor operates at this frequency until the brake has been applied (closing times of
brakes are between 15 ms and 300 ms). The actual time is specified using min (P1217,
P1227) ("Holding time after ramp down", "Zero speed detection monitoring time").
21
2))2)) W
0RWRUH[FLWDWLRQ
ILQLVKHG
U%LW W
3
I
IPLQ
3
W
3 3
U%LW 3RLQW 3RLQW

W
%UDNH 2SHQ
6WDWXV
&ORVHG W
%UDNH5HOHDVH7LPH %UDNH&ORVLQJ7LPH
Figure 6-19 P1215 Motor Holding Brake OFF1/Off3
Frequency converter
If the motor is switched off using an OFF2 command, the status signal r0052 bit 12 "Brake
active" is reset, independent of the motor state. This means that the brake closes
immediately after an OFF2 command if the brake closing time has finished. (instantaneous
brake).
Inactive
OFF2
Active t
21
2))2)) t
Motor excitation
finished
r0056 Bit04 t
p0346
f
fmin
(p1080)
t
p1216
5&%LW
1
0 t
RSHQ
Brake-
Status
FORVHG t
Brake Release Time Brake Closing Time
Figure 6-20 Motor holding brake after ON/OFF2
Frequency converter
The mechanical brake is controlled using the status signal r0052 bit 12 "Brake active" of the
brake control. This signal is connected to terminal A and B of the power module.
WARNING
It is not sufficient to select the status signal r0052 bit 12 "Brake active" in P0731 … P0733.
In order to activate the motor holding brake, in addition, parameter P1215 must also be set
to 1.
If the inverter controls the motor holding brake, then a series commissioning may not be
carried-out for potentially hazardous loads (e.g. suspended loads for crane applications)
unless the load has been secured. Potentially hazardous loads can be secured as follows
before series commissioning is started:
 Lower the load to the floor, or
 Clamp the load using the motor holding brake
(Caution: During the series commissioning, the inverter must be prevented from
controlling the motor holding brake).
Note
Motors have optional holding brakes which are not designed to be used as brakes for normal
operation. The holding brakes are only designed for a limited number of emergency braking
operations / motor revolutions with the brake closed (refer to the Catalog data).
When commissioning a motor with integrated holding brake it is therefore absolutely
imperative that it is ensured that the holding brake functions perfectly. A "clicking noise" in
the motor indicates that the brake has been correctly released.
Before the motor holding brake is applied, a torque must be established that maintains the
motor at the required position. The pulses, from the inverter, must be enabled to allow the
necessary torque to be generated. The torque is defined by the minimum frequency in
parameter P1080. A typical value for this is the rated motor slip r0330. Additionally, this
torque can be modified using the following parameters:
● V/f control – boost parameter P1310
● SLVC – boost parameters P1610 and P1611
● VC – supplementary torque setpoint P1511
The motor holding brake can be permanently damaged, if the motor shaft is moved when the
motor holding brake is applied. It is imperative that the release of the motor holding brake is
timed correctly.
Frequency converter
Opening the Motor Holding Brake via P1218

In a conveyor system it is sometimes necessary to position the conveyor system manually.
To achieve this you can override the brake active signal (r0052.12) using P1218, even if the
motor has been switched off or has not reached it's minimum frequency (P1080).
If the motor holding brake is active, due to a safe-stop, P1218 will be ignored.
WARNING
Since this procedure will override the active brake signal and force the brake to open, even
if the motor is switched off, the user must ensure that any load held by the motor is secured
before performing the override.
Input values

P1215 = … Holding brake enable
0 disabled (default), 1 enabled

P0346 = … Magnetization time
0 ... 20 s, default 1 s
0 ... 650 Hz, default 0 Hz: Min. motor run frequency irrespective of frequency setpoint
P1216 = … Holding brake release delay
0 ... 20 s, default 0.1 s
P1217 = … Holding time after ramp down
0 ... 20 s, default 0.1 s
P1218 = … MHB override
0 ... 1, default 0
P1227 = … Zero speed detection monitoring time
0 ... 300 s, default 4 s
Output value

r0052.12 Brake active status
Frequency converter
6.8.2 Instantaneous brake
Data
Parameter range: P0346, P1080, P1215 … P1217

r0052 bit 12
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Description
The instantaneous brake is an electro-mechanical one, being able to brake down the motor
from any speed to a standstill. It is activated after an OFF2 command and additional in the
case of a fail-safe application after a Safe Torque Off (STO) or a passivated STO fault
condition (refer to section " Safe Brake Control (Page 245) ").
The behavior of the instantaneous brake function is described below.
212))
Inactive
OFF2
Active t
Motor excitation
finished
U%LW t
P0346
IPLQ
3
t
3
U%LW
1
0 t
%UDNH Open
6WDWXV Closed t
Brake Release Time Brake Closing Time
Figure 6-21 Instantaneous Brake
Frequency converter
Input values

P1215 = … Holding brake enable
0 disabled (default), 1 enabled

P0346 = … Magnetization time
0 ... 20 s, default 1 s
0 ... 650 Hz, default 0 Hz: Min. motor run frequency irrespective of frequency setpoint
P1216 = … Holding brake release delay
0 ... 20 s, default 0.1 s
P1217 = … Holding time after ramp down
0 ... 20 s, default 0.1 s
Output value

r0052.12 Brake active status
WARNING
Dimensioning the electro-mechanical motor brake
The electro-mechanical brake must be dimensioned that, in case of a fault, the complete
motor can be braked to zero from any possible operational speed.
Frequency converter
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Description
The setpoint channel (see figure below) forms the coupling element between the setpoint
source and the closed-loop motor control. The inverter has a special characteristic which
allows the setpoint to be entered simultaneously from two setpoint sources. The generation
and subsequent modification (influencing the direction, suppression frequency, up/down
ramp) of the complete setpoint is carried-out in the setpoint channel.
023
$GGLWLRQDO
$,
VHWSRLQW
0RWRU
)) 680 $)0 /LPLW 5)* FRQWURO
56 0DLQ
56 VHWSRLQW
)LHOGEXV
$,
0RWRU
6HWSRLQWVRXUFH 6HWSRLQWFKDQQHO
FRQWURO
Figure 6-22 Setpoint channel
Frequency converter
6.9.1 Summation and modification of frequency setpoint
Data

Warnings: -
Fault: -
Description
For applications where the control quantities are generated from central control systems, fine
tuning is often required locally on-site (correction quantity). This can be elegantly realized
using the summation point where the main and supplementary (additional) setpoints are
added in the setpoint channel. In this case, both quantities are simultaneously read-in
through two separate or one setpoint source and summed in the setpoint channel.
Depending on external circumstances, the supplementary setpoint can be dynamically
disconnected or switched-in to the summation point (see figure below). This functionality can
be used to advantage, especially for discontinuous processes.
&,0DLQVHWSRLQW
3&

&,0DLQVHWSVFDO
3&
U

$)0 /LPLW 5)* 0RWRUFRQWURO

%,'LVDEDGGVHWS
3&

&,$GGVHWSVFDO
3&

&,$GGVHWSRLQW
3&

Figure 6-23 Summation
The inverter has the following possibilities to select the setpoint source:
1. P1000 – selecting the frequency setpoint source
2. BICO parameterization
– P1070 CI: Main setpoint
– P1075 CI: Additional setpoint
Further, the main setpoint as well as the supplementary (additional) setpoint can be scaled
independently of one another. In this case, for example, a user can simply implement an
override function using the appropriate parameterization.
Frequency converter
A scan sequence is generally associated with a forwards and a backwards motion. When
selecting the reversing functionality, after reaching the end position, a direction of rotation
reversal can be initiated in the setpoint channel (see figure below).
On the other hand, if a direction of rotation reversal or a negative frequency setpoint is to be
prevented from being entered using the setpoint channel, then this can be inhibited using
BICO parameter P1110.
U 3 3 3 3 3 3

680 6NLS /LPLW 5)*

3
Figure 6-24 Modifying the frequency setpoint
Motors can have one or several resonance points in the range from 0 Hz up to the reference
frequency. These resonance points result in oscillations which, under worst case conditions,
can damage the motor load. Using skip frequencies, the inverter allows these resonant
frequencies to be passed through as quickly as possible. This means that the skip
frequencies increase the availability of the motor load over the long term.
Input values

P1070 = … Main setpoint
possible source: 755 (Analog input 0) / 1024 (FF) / 1050 (MOP)
P1071 = … Main setpoint scaling
P1074 = … Disable additional setpoint
possible sources: 722.x (digital inputs)
P1075 = … Additional setpoint
P1076 = … Additional setpoint scaling
P1110 = … Inhibit neg. freq. setpoint
0: Disabled (Default)
1: Enabled
P1113 = … Reverse
Frequency converter

0 ... 650 Hz, default 0 Hz
P1082 = … Max. frequency
P1091 = … Skip frequency
P1092 = … Skip frequency 2
P1101 = … Skip frequency bandwidth
Output value
r1078 Total frequency setpoint
r1079 Selected frequency setpoint
r1084 Resultant max. frequency
r1114 Freq. Setp. After dir. Ctrl.
Frequency converter
6.9.2 Ramp-function generator
Data

r1119, r1170
P1130 … P1142
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Description
The ramp-function generator (RFG) is used to limit the acceleration when the setpoint
changes according to a step function. This therefore helps to reduce the stressing on the
mechanical system of the machine. An acceleration ramp and a braking ramp can be set
independently of one another using the ramp-up time P1120 and the ramp-down time
P1121. This allows a controlled transition when the setpoint is changed (see figure below).
I
IPD[
:LWKRXWURXQGLQJ
I
I W
3 3
I
IPD[
I
I
3 3 3 3 W
:LWKURXQGLQJ
WXS WGRZQ
'HSHQGHQF\ 5DPSXSWLPH 5DPSGRZQWLPH
DOZD\VIRU P1130+ P1131 P1132+ P1133

f 2 - f 1 = P1082 t up = + P1120 t down = + P1121
2 2
P1130+ P1131
IRU > P1120
2 P1130 + P1131 f 2 - f1 P1132 + P1133 f 2 - f1
t up = ( + P1120)⋅ t down = ( + P1121)⋅
DQG p1132 + P1133 2 P1082 2 P1082
> P1121
2
P1130+ P1131
IRU ≤ P1120
2 P1130+ P1131 f 2 - f1 P1132+ P1133 f 2 - f1
t up = + P1120⋅ t down = + P1121⋅
DQG P1132+ P1133 2 P1082 2 P1082
≤ P1121
2
Figure 6-25 Ramp-function generator
Frequency converter
In order to avoid torque surges at the transitions (constant velocity phase ←→

accelerating/braking phase), additional rounding-off times P1130 … P1133 can be
programmed. This is especially important for applications (e.g. transporting or pumping
liquids or for cranes) which require an especially "soft", jerk-free acceleration and braking.
If the OFF1 command is initiated while the motor is accelerating, then rounding-off can be
activated or deactivated using parameter P1134 (see figure below). These rounding-off times
are defined using parameters P1132 and P1133.
3ಹ3!
I
6HWSRLQWUHDFKHG
IVHW
6HWSRLQWQRWUHDFKHG
3
3 3 3 3 3 3
I
6HWSRLQWUHDFKHG
IVHW
6HWSRLQWQRWUHDFKHG
3
3 3 3 3 3 3

21
2)) W
Figure 6-26 Rounding-off after an OFF1 command
In addition to the rounding-off times, the ramp-function generator can be influenced using
external signals. The ramp-function generator provides the following functionality using BICO
parameters P1140, P1141 and P1142 (see table below).
The ramp-function generator itself is enabled after the pulses have been enabled (inverter
enable) and after the excitation time has expired (P0346). After limiting to the maximum
speeds for the positive and negative directions of rotation (P1082 or 0 Hz for the direction of
rotation inhibit) the setpoint speed for the control is obtained (r1170).
While the V/f characteristic operates up to 650 Hz, the control (vector mode) is limited to a
maximum frequency of 200 Hz (r1084).
Frequency converter
Table 6- 25 BICO parameters for ramp-function generator
P1140 BI: RFG enable The ramp-function generator output is set to 0 if the binary signal
= 0.
P1141 BI: RFG start The ramp-function generator output keeps its actual value if the
binary signal = 0.
P1142 BI: RFG enable setpoint If the binary signal = 0, then the ramp-function generator input is
set to 0 and the output is reduced to 0 through the ramp-function
generator ramp.
Note
The maximum frequency of the setpoint channel is set using parameter P1080.
In V/f mode the maximum frequency is 650 Hz.
In vector mode the maximum frequency is 200 Hz (r1084).
Input values

P1120 = … Ramp-up time
0 ... 650 s, default 10 s
P1121 = … Ramp-down time
0 ... 650 s, default 10 s
P1130 = … Ramp-up initial rounding time
0 ... 40 s, default 0 s
P1131 = … Ramp-up final rounding time
0 ... 40 s, default 0 s
P1132 = … Ramp-down initial rounding time
0 ... 40 s, default 0 s
P1133 = … Ramp-down final rounding time
0 ... 40 s, default 0 s
P1113 = … Reverse
Frequency converter

P1134 = … Rounding type
0: Continuous smoothing (default)
1: Discontinuous smoothing
P1135 = … OFF3 ramp-down time
0 ... 650 s, default 5 s
P1140 = … RFG enable
P1141 = … RFG start
P1142 = … RFG enable setpoint
Output value
r1119 Freq. Setpoint before RFG
r1170 Frequency setpoint after RFG
Frequency converter
6.9.3 OFF/Braking Functions
Data
Parameter range: P1121, P1135, P2167, P2168

P0840 … P0849
r0052 bit 02
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Description
Both the inverter and the user have to respond to a wide range of situations and stop the
inverter if needed. Thus operating requirements as well as inverter protective functions (e.g.
electrical or thermal overload), or rather man-machine protective functions, have to be taken
into account. Due to the different OFF/braking functions (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) the inverter
can flexibly respond to the mentioned requirements.
OFF1
The OFF1 command is strongly coupled to the ON command. When the ON command is
withdrawn, then OFF1 is directly activated. The motor is braked by OFF1 with the ramp-
down time P1121. In case the output frequency falls below the parameter value P2167 and
the time in P2168 has expired, then the inverter pulses are cancelled.
IDFW
3
IPD[
I 2))
3
W
3
WGRZQ2))
U%LW
3
2SHUDWLRQ
I
3XOVH WGRZQ2)) 3ವ
W 3
FDQFHOODWLRQ
Figure 6-27 OFF1 brake function
Frequency converter
Note
You can configure the OFF1 command via the function "positioning ramp down". In this
case, OFF1 generates a continuous braking ramp depending on the actual load speed and
velocity.
OFF1 can be entered using a wide range of command sources via BICO parameter P0840
(BI: ON/OFF1) and P0842 (BI: ON/OFF1 with reversing).
BICO parameter P0840 is pre-assigned by defining the command source using P0700.
The ON and the following OFF1 command must have the same source.
If the ON/OFF1 command is set for more than one digital input, then only the digital input
that was last set, is valid, e.g. DI3 is active.
OFF1 is low active.
When simultaneously selecting the various OFF commands, the following priority applies:
 OFF2 (highest priority)
 OFF3
 OFF1.
OFF1 can be combined with DC current braking or compound braking.
When the motor holding brake MHB (P1215) is activated, for an OFF1, P2167 and P2168
are not taken into account.
OFF2
The inverter pulses are immediately cancelled by the OFF2 command. Thus the motor
coasts down and it is not possible to brake in a controlled fashion.
IDFW
3
IPD[ 2))
W
U%LW
2SHUDWLRQ
3XOVH W
FDQFHOODWLRQ
Frequency converter
Note
The OFF2 command can have one or several sources. The command sources are defined
using BICO parameters P0844 (BI: 1. OFF2) and P0845 (BI: 2. OFF2).
As a result of the pre-assignment (default setting), the OFF2 command is set to the OP. This
source is still available even if another command source is defined (e.g. terminal as
command source → P0700 = 2 and OFF2 is selected using DI2 → P0702 = 3).
OFF2 is low-active.
 OFF3
 OFF1.
OFF3
The braking characteristics of OFF3 are identical with those of OFF1 with the exception of
the autonomous OFF3 ramp-down time P1135. If the output frequency falls below parameter
value P2167 and if the time in P2168 has expired, then the inverter pulses are cancelled as
for the OFF1 command.
IDFW
3
IPD[
I 2))
3
W
3
WGRZQ2))
U%LW
3
2SHUDWLRQ
I
3XOVH WGRZQ2)) 3ವ
W 3
FDQFHOODWLRQ
Frequency converter
Note
OFF3 can be entered using a wide range of command sources via BICO parameters P0848
(BI: 1. OFF3) and P0849 (BI: 2. OFF3).
OFF3 is low active.
 OFF3
 OFF1.
Input values

P0840 = … ON/OFF1
possible source: 722.x (digital input) / 2032.0 (option port) / 2090.0 (serial interface)
P0842 = … ON reverse/OFF1
possible source: 722.x (digital input)
P0844 = … 1. OFF2
P0845 = … 2. OFF2
P0848 = … 1. OFF3
P0849 = … 2. OFF3
0 ... 650 s, default 10 s
P1135 = … OFF3 ramp-down time
0 ... 650 s, default 5 s
P2167 = … Switch-off frequency f_off
0 ... 10 Hz, default 1 Hz: Defines the threshold of the monitoring function |f_act| > P2167
P2168 = … Delay time T_off
0 ... 10000 ms, default 10 ms: Defines time inverter operating below switch-off freq. (P2167)
before switch off occurs.
Output value
r0052.2 Drive running
Frequency converter
6.9.4 Manual and Automatic Operation
Data

P0810, P0811
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Description
It is necessary to change-over from the automatic mode into the manual mode to load and
unload production machines and to feed new materials (e.g. batch processing). The machine
operator carries-out the preparatory activities for subsequent automatic operation in the
manual mode. In the manual mode, the machine operator locally controls the machine
(enters the ON/OFF command as well as also the setpoint). A changeover is only made into
the automatic mode after the set-up has been completed. In the automatic mode, the control
(open-loop) of the machines and production processes are handled by a higher-level control
system (e.g. PLC). This operation is maintained until it is necessary to again load and unload
the machine or feed new material into the machine or production process.
Indexed parameters P0700 or P1000 and BICO parameters P0810 and P0811 are used to
changeover (toggle between) the manual/automatic modes. The command source is defined
using P0700 and the setpoint source is defined using P1000, whereby index 0 (P0700[0] and
P1000[0]) defines the automatic mode and index 1 (P0700[1] and P1000[1]) the manual
mode. BICO parameters P0810 and P0811 are used to changeover (toggle between) the
automatic and manual modes. These BICO parameters can be controlled from any control
source. In so doing, in addition to P0700 and P1000, also all of the other CDS parameters
are changed over (manual/automatic changeover is generalized as a CDS changeover).
Frequency converter
3
3
&RPPDQGVRXUFH 3>@ &PG

UHPRWH
7HUPLQDOV
3
3>@ &PG 6HTXHQFHFRQWURO

ORFDO
%23
&PG
&'6
5656
)LHOGEXV
6HWSRLQWVRXUFH
3>@ 6HWSRLQW
023
UHPRWH
3
6HWSRLQW 0RWRU
3>@ 6HWSRLQW FRQWURO
$, FKDQQHO
ORFDO

)) 6HWSRLQW
&'6
Figure 6-30 Changing-over using the BICO parameters P0810 and P0811
Input values

P0700 = … Selection of command source
0: Factor default setting
1: BOP
2: Terminal
4: USS on RS232
6: Fieldbus (default, depending on the type of Frequency inverter)
P0810 = … CDS bit 0 (Hand/Auto)
possible source (0 = default):
722.x: Digital inputs
2032.15: USS on RS232
2036.15: USS on RS485
2090.15: Fieldbus
P0811 = … CDS bit 1
possible source (0 = default):
722.x: Digital inputs
2033.15: USS on RS232
2037.15: USS on RS485
2091.15: Fieldbus
P1000 = … Selection of frequency setpoint
0: No Main setpoint
1: MOP setpoint
2: Analog setpoint (default, depending on the type of Frequency inverter)
3: Fixed frequency
4: USS on RS232
6: Fieldbus (default, depending on the type of Frequency inverter)
7: Analog setpoint 2
10: No main setpoint + MOP setpoint
...
77: Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint 2
Frequency converter
6.9.5 FFBs and Fast FFBs
Data

Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP4800 … FP4830
Cycle time: 128 ms (FFB)
8 ms (Fast FFB)
Description
For many applications, interlocking logic is required in order to control (open-loop) the
inverter. This interlocking logic couples several states (e.g. access control, plant/system
state) to form a control signal (e.g. ON command). Previously this was implemented using
either a PLC or relays. This represented additional costs for the plant or system. In addition
to logic operations, increasingly, arithmetic operations and storage elements are required in
inverters which generate a new unit from several physical quantities. This simplified PLC
functionality is integrated in the inverter using the following following components:
● Freely programmable function blocks (FFB)
● Fast freely programmable function blocks (Fast FFB)
Differences of FFB and Fast FFB

FFB and Fast FFB work like two independent functions, but the same block cannot be used
in both functions in the same time.
The function FFB is called within the 128 ms time slice (cycle time). In the function FFB all of
the blocks can be used. The following blocks can be used only within the 128 ms time slice:
● Timers-blocks
● ADD-blocks
● SUB-blocks
● MUL-blocks
● DIV-blocks
● CMP-blocks
Frequency converter
The function Fast FFB is called within the 8 ms time slice. In Fast FFB only the following
blocks are available:
● AND -blocks
● OR-blocks
● XOR-blocks
● NOT-blocks
● Flip-Flops
Enabling
The FFB and Fast FFB are enabled in two steps:
1. General enable P2800:
The function FFB is enabled using parameter P2800 (P2800 =1).
The function Fast FFB is enabled using parameter P2803 (P2803 = 1)
2. Specific enable P2801, P2802:
– FFB
Using parameter P2801 or P2802, the particular function block is enabled (P2801[x] or
P2802[x] = 1...3) and the sequence in which they are executed is also defined.
– Fast FFB
Using parameter P2801 the particular function block is enabled (P2801[x] = 4...6)
Priority
Additionally, adapt to the application, the chronological sequence in which the blocks are
executed, can also be controlled. This is especially important so that the blocks executed in
the sequence which is technologically correct. Parameter 2801 and P2802 are used for the
individual enable function as well as to define the priority in which the blocks are executed.
The following priority levels can be assigned:
● 0 = Inactive
● 1 = Level 1 (FFB)
● 4 = Level 4 (Fast FFB)
Frequency converter
The figure below indicates that the priority decreases from the top towards the bottom
(priority 1 → level) or from the right to left (priority 2 → line).
3ULRULW\
/RZ +LJK
/HYHO
3ULRULW\
/HYHO
/HYHO
/HYHO
/RZ
/HYHO
/HYHO
,QDFWLYH
3>@56))
3>@56))
3>@56))
3>@'))
3>@'))
3>@&03
3>@&03
3>@ 7LPHU
3>@ 7LPHU
3>@ 7LPHU
3>@ 7LPHU
3>@127
3>@127
3>@',9
3>@08/
3>@08/
3>@$''
3>@;25
3>@;25
3>@$1'
3>@;25
3>@$''
3>@$1'
3>@127
3>@68%
3>@',9
3>@68%
3>@$1'
3>@25
3>@25
3>@25
Figure 6-31 Free function block priorities
Input values

P2800 = … Enable FFBs
0: Disabled (default)
1: Enabled
P2801 = … Activate FFBs/Fast FFBs
0: Not active (default)
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
3: Level 3
4: Level 4 (Fast FFB)
P2802 = … Activate FFBs
0: Not active (default)
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
3: Level 3
P2803 = … Enable Fast FFBs
0: Disable (default)
1: Enable
Frequency converter

P2810 = … AND 1
Index: [0] = BI 0 , [1] = BI 1
P2800 P2801[0]
A B C
P2810
A 0 0 0
C
Index0
Index1
B & r2811 0
1
1
0
0
0
1 1 1
P2812 = … AND 2
Index: [0] = BI 0 , [1] = BI 1
P2814 = … AND 3
Index: [0] = BI 0 , [1] = BI 1
P2816 = … OR 1
Index: [0] = BI 0 , [1] = BI 1
P2800 P2801[3]
A B C
P2816
0 0 0
A C
Index0
Index1
B 1 r2817 0
1
1
0
1
1
1 1 1
P2818 = … OR 2
Index: [0] = BI 0 , [1] = BI 1
P2820 = … OR 3
Index: [0] = BI 0 , [1] = BI 1
P2822 = … XOR 1
Index: [0] = BI 0 , [1] = BI 1
P2800 P2801[6]
A B C
P2822
0 0 0
Index0 A C
Index1
B =1 r2823 0
1
1
0
1
1
1 1 0
P2824 = … XOR 2
Index: [0] = BI 0 , [1] = BI 1
P2826 = … XOR 3
Index: [0] = BI 0 , [1] = BI 1
P2828 = … NOT 1
defines input of NOT 1
P2800 P2801[9]
P2828
A C A C
Index0
1 r2829
0 1
1 0
P2830 = … NOT 2
P2832 = … NOT 3
Frequency converter

P2834 = … D-FlipFlop 1
Index: [0] = BI: set, [1] = BI: D input, [2] = BI: store pulse, [3] = BI: reset
P2800 P2801[12]
P2834
SET (Q=1)
Index0
Index1 D Q r2835
Index2
Index3
STORE
Q r2836
RESET (Q=0)
POWER ON
1
SET RESET D STORE Q Q
1 0 x x 1 0
0 1 x x 0 1
1 1 x x Qn-1 Q n-1
0 0 1 1 0
0 0 0 0 1
POWER-ON 0 1
P2837 = … D-FlipFlop 2
Index: [0] = BI: set, [1] = BI: D input, [2] = BI: store pulse, [3] = BI: reset
P2840 = … RS-FlipFlop 1
Index: [0] = BI: set, [1] = BI: reset
P2800 P2801[14]
P2840
SET
Index 0 (Q=1) Q r2841
Index 1
POWER ON 1 RESET
(Q=0) Q r2842
SET RESET Q Q
0 0 Q n-1 Qn-1
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 Q n-1 Qn-1
POWER-ON 0 1
P2849 = … Timer 1
defines input signal of timer 1
P2850 (0.000) P2851(0)
P2800 P2802.0 Delay Time Mode
ON Delay
T 0/10
0
OFF Delay
1/11
0 T
P2849 In
Index0
Out r2852
ON/OFF Delay
2/12
T T
NOut
Pulse Generator
1 r2853
T 3/13
Frequency converter

P2850 = … Delay time of timer 1
defines delay time of timer 1
P2851 = … Mode timer 1
0: ON delay (sec)
1: OFF delay (sec)
2: ON/OFF delay (sec)
3: pulse generator (sec)
10: ON delay (min)
11: OFF delay (min)
12: ON/OFF delay (min)
13: pulse generator (min)
P2854 = … Timer 2
see P2851 for modes
P2859 = … Timer 3
see P2851 for modes
P2864 = … Timer 4
see P2851 for modes
P2869 = … ADD 1
Index: [0] = CI 0, [1] = CI 1
P2800 P2802[4]
P2869
x1 200%
Index 0 Result r2870
Index 1 x2
-200 %
x1 + x2
Result = x1 + x2
If: x1 + x2 > 200% → Result = 200%
x1 + x2 < -200%→ Result = -200%
P2871 = … ADD 2
Index: [0] = CI 0, [1] = CI 1
P2873 = … SUB 1
Index: [0] = CI 0, [1] = CI 1
P2800 P2802[6]
P2873
x1 200%
Index 0 Result r2874
Index 1 x2
-200 %
x1 + x2
Result = x1 - x2
If: x1 - x2 > 200% → Result = 200%
x1 - x2 < -200% → Result = -200%
P2875 = … SUB 2
Index: [0] = CI 0, [1] = CI 1
Frequency converter

P2877 = … MUL 1
Index: [0] = CI 0, [1] = CI 1
P2800 P2802[8]
P2877
x1 200%
Index 0 Result
x2 r2878
Index 1
-200 %
x1 ∗ x 2
x1∗ x2
100% Result =
100%
x1∗ x2
If: > 200% → Result = 200%
100%
x1∗ x2
< -200%→ Result = -200%
100%
P2879 = … MUL 2
Index: [0] = CI 0, [1] = CI 1
P2881 = … DIV 1
Index: [0] = CI 0, [1] = CI 1
P2800 P2802[10]
P2881
x1 200%
Index 0 Result
x2 r2882
Index 1
-200 %
x1 ∗ 100%
X2 x1∗ 100%
Result =
x2
x1∗ 100%
If: > 200% → Result = 200%
x2
x1∗ 100%
< -200% → Result = -200%
x2
P2883 = … DIV 2
Index: [0] = CI 0, [1] = CI 1
P2885 = … CMP 1
Index: [0] = CI 0, [1] = CI 1
P2800 P2802[12]
P2885
Index 0 x1
Out
CMP r2886
Index 1 x2
Out = x1 ≥ x2
x1 ≥ x2 → Out = 1
x1 < x2 → Out = 0
P2887 = … CMP 2
Index: [0] = CI 0, [1] = CI 1
P2889 = … Fixed setpoint 1 in [%]
-200 ... 200 %, default 0 %
Connector Setting in %
P2889
P2890
Range : -200% ... 200%
P2890 = … Fixed setpoint 2 in [%]

-200 ... 200 %, default 0 %
Frequency converter
Output value
r2811 AND 1
r2813 AND 2
r2815 AND 3
r2817 OR 1
r2819 OR 2
r2821 OR 3
r2823 XOR 1
r2825 XOR 2
r2827 XOR 3
r2829 NOT 1
r2831 NOT 2
r2833 NOT 3
r2835 Q D-FF1
r2836 NOT-Q D-FF1
r2838 Q D-FF2
r2839 NOT-Q D-FF2
r2841 Q RS-FF1
r2842 NOT-Q RS-FF1
r2844 Q RS-FF2
r2845 NOT-Q RS-FF2
r2847 Q RS-FF3
r2848 NOT-Q RS-FF3
r2852 Timer 1
r2853 Nout timer 1
r2857 Timer 2
r2858 Nout timer 2
r2862 Timer 3
r2863 Nout timer 3
r2867 Timer 4
r2868 Nout timer 4
r2870 ADD 1
r2872 ADD 2
r2874 SUB 1
r2876 SUB 2
r2878 MUL 1
r2880 MUL 2
r2882 DIV 1
r2884 DIV 2
r2886 CMP 1
r2888 CMP 2
Frequency converter
Example 1
Enabling the FFBs: P2800 = 1

Enabling individual FFB including assigning a priority:
P2801[0] = 1 AND 1
P2801[1] = 2 AND 2
P2801[2] = 3 AND 3
P2802[12] = 2 CMP 1
P2802[13] = 3 CMP 2
The FFBs are calculated in the following sequence: AND 3 → CMP 2 → AND 2 → CMP 1 → AND 1
Example 2
Enabling the FFBs: P2800 = 1

Enabling individual FFB including assigning a priority:
P2801[3] = 2 OR 1
P2801[4] = 2 OR 2
P2802[3] = 3 Timer 4
P2801[0] = 1 AND 1
The FFBs are calculated in the following sequence: Timer 4 → OR 1 → OR 2 → AND 1
Example 3 Fast FFB
Enabling the Fast FFBs: P2803 = 1

Enabling individual Fast FFB including assigning a priority:
P2801[3] = 6 OR 1
P2801[4] = 5 OR 2
P2801[0] = 4 AND 1
The Fast FFBs are calculated in the following OR 1 → OR 2 → AND 1
sequence:
The function blocks are interconnected using BICO technology. In so doing, the function
blocks can be connected with one another as well as to other signals and quantities as long
as these signals or quantities have the appropriate attribute (BO, BI, CO and CI).
Frequency converter
6.9.6 Wobble Generator
Data
Parameter range: P2940, P2945 - P2949

r2955
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Cycle time: 2 ms
Description
The wobble generator executes predefined periodical disruptions superimposed on the main
setpoint for technological usage in the fibre industry. Both, the positive and the negative
pulse jump can be parameterized, and the wobble function can be activated via P2940. The
wobble signal is added to the main setpoint as an additional setpoint. The wobble function is
only active, when the setpoint is reached. While ramping up or down, the wobble signal will
not be added. The wobble signal is also limited by the maximum frequency.
Frequency converter
Function
The wobble generator can be started and parameterized via the parameters shown below. It
is independent of the setpoint direction, thus only the absolute value of the setpoint is
relevant. During the change of the setpoint the wobble function is inactive. The frequency
values of the wobble functions are limited by the maximal frequency (P1082). If the wobble
function is deactivated, the wobble signal is set to 0 immediately.
Note
The wobble signal is blocked during
- DC braking
- flying restart
- vdc max controller active
I-max controller active
'LJLWDOLQSXWV
U[ 3

%2367$57(5 W
U 3
866RQ56
U W
866RQ56
U
3
352),%86
U 3
352),QHW
U
3
3
6HWSRLQWIUHTXHQF\
3
3

3 3
Figure 6-32 Wobble function disturb signal
Frequency converter
Input values
Table 6- 31 Main function parameter

P2940 = … Release Wobble function
Defines the source to release the wobble function, e.g. DI or any BO parameter (0 = default)

P2945 = … Signal frequency
0.1 ... 120 RPM, default 60 RPM: Sets the frequency of the wobble-signal
P2946 = … Signal amplitude
0 ... 0.2, default 0: Sets the value for the amplitude of the wobble-signal
P2947 = … Wobble negative pulse jump
0 ... 1, default 0: Sets the value for negative pulse jump at the end of the positive signal period
P2948 = … Wobble positive pulse jump
0 ... 1, default 0: Sets the value for positive pulse jump at the end of the negative signal period
P2949 = … Signal pulse width
0 ... 100 %, default 50 %: Sets the value for the pulse width of the wobble-signal
Output value
r2955 Wobble function: signal output
Frequency converter
6.10 Control Functions
6.10.1 Open-loop and closed-loop control overview
Overview
There are several open-loop and closed-loop techniques for closed-loop speed and torque
control for inverters with induction and synchronous motors. These techniques can be
roughly classified as follows:
● V/f characteristic control (known as: V/f control)
● Field-orientated closed-loop control technique (known as: Vector control)
The field-orientated control technique – Vector control – can be further sub-divided into two
groups:
● Vector control without speed feedback (sensorless Vector control (SLVC))
● Vector control with speed feedback (Vector control (VC))
These techniques differ from one another both regarding the control ability and in the
complexity of the technique, which in turn are obtained as a result of the requirements
associated with a particular application. For basic applications (e.g. pumps and fans), to a
large extent, V/f control is used. Vector control is mainly used for sophisticated applications
(e.g. winders), where a good control and behavior in noisy conditions are required regarding
the speed and torque. If these requirements are also present in the range from 0 Hz to
approx. 1 Hz, then the speed/torque accuracy without encoder is not sufficient. In this case,
Vector control with speed feedback must be used.
6.10.2 V/f Control
Data
Parameter range: P1300

P1310 … P1350
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Frequency converter
Description
The V/f characteristic represents the simplest control technique. In this case the stator
voltage of the induction motor or synchronous motor is adjusted proportionally to the stator
frequency. This technique has proven itself for a wide range of "basic" applications, such as
● Pumps, fans
● Belt motors
and similar processes.
The goal of V/f control is to keep the flux Φ constant in the motor. In this case, this is
proportional to the magnetizing current Iμ and the ratio between voltage V and frequency f.
Φ ~ Iμ ~ V/f
The torque M, developed by induction motors, is proportional to the product (precisely the
Vectorial product Φ x I) of flux and current.
M~Φ*I
In order to generate the maximum possible torque from a given current, the flux must be held
constant at its nominal value. That means, the value of the magnetizing current must be
constant even if the stator frequency changes. This can be achieved approximately if the
stator voltage U is changed proportional to the stator frequency. The V/f characteristic
control is derived from these basic principles.
803˓
83
5DWHGPRWRU
0Q˓Q RSHUDWLQJSRLQW
83
0˓
IQ IPD[
Figure 6-33 Operating ranges and characteristics of an induction motor when fed from an inverter
There are several versions of the V/f characteristic as shown in the table below.
Frequency converter
Table 6- 33 V/f characteristics (parameter P1300)
Parameter Significance Use/property

value
0 Linear Standard case 9
characteristic 9Q
3
I
IQ
1 FCC Can give a more efficient and better load response than other V/f
modes because the FCC characteristic automatically compensates
the voltage losses of the stator resistance for static (steady-state) or
dynamic loads (flux current control FCC). This is used especially for
small motors which have a relatively high stator resistance.
2 Square-law This is a characteristic which takes into
characteristic consideration the torque characteristic of 9
the motor load (e.g. fan/pump): 9Q

a) Square-law characteristic
(f2 characteristic)
b) Energy saving as the lower voltage
also results in lower currents and losses. 3
I
IQ
3 Programmable Characteristic which takes into

9
9PD[
characteristic consideration the torque characteristic of U

9Q
the motor/driven load (e.g. synchronous

3
3
motor).
3
3
3
3
I
I I I I IQ IPD[
+] 3 3 3 3 3
5 Application This is a characteristic which takes into consideration the special

adaptation technological issues of an application (e.g. textile applications),
a) Where the current limiting (Imax controller) only influences the
output voltage and not the output frequency, and
b) By inhibiting the slip compensation
6 Application This is a characteristic which takes into consideration the special
adaptation technological issues of an application (e.g. textile applications),
with FCC a) Where the current limiting (Imax controller) only influences the
output voltage and not the output frequency, and
b) By inhibiting the slip compensation
19 Independent The user can enter the output voltage of the inverter, independently
voltage input of the frequency, using a BICO parameter P1330 via the interfaces
(e.g. analog input → P1330 = 755).
Frequency converter
Input values

P1300 = … Control mode
0: V/f with linear characteristic (default)
1: V/f with FCC
2: V/f with quadratic characteristic
3: V/f with programmable characteristic
4: reserved
5: V/f for textile applications
6: V/f with FCC for textile applications
20: Sensorless vector control
21: Vector control with sensor
22: Sensorless vector torque-control
23: Vector torque-control with sensor
P1335 = … Slip compensation
0 ... 600 %, default 0 %

P1310 = … Continuous boost
0 ... 250 %, default 50 %
P1311 = … Acceleration boost
0 ... 250 %, default 0 %
P1312 = … Starting boost
0 ... 250 %, default 0 %
P1316 = … Boost end frequency
P1320 = … Programmable V/f freq. Coord. 1
P1321 = … Programmable V/f volt. Coord. 1
0 ... 3000 V, default 0 V
0 ... 3000 V, default 0 V
0 ... 3000 V, default 0 V
P1330 = … Voltage setpoint
P1333 = … Start frequency for FCC
P1334 = … Slip compensation activation range
Frequency converter

P1336 = … Slip limit
0 ... 600 %, default 250 %
P1338 = … Resonance damping gain V/f
0 ... 10, default 0
P1340 = … Imax controller prop. gain
0 ... 0.499, default 0
P1341 = … Imax controller integral time
0 ... 50 s, default 0.3 s
P1345 = … Imax voltage ctrl. Prop. gain
0 ... 5.499, default 0.250
P1346 = … Imax voltage ctrl. Integral time
0 ... 50 s, default 0.3 s
P1350 = … Voltage soft start
0: OFF (default)
1: ON
Output value
r1315 Total boost voltage

r1337 V/f slip frequency
r1343 Imax controller freq. Output
Displays effective frequency limitation of the inverter.
If I_max controller not in operation, parameter normally shows max. frequency P1082.
r1334 Imax controller volt. Output
Displays amount by which the I_max controller is reducing the inverter output voltage.
Frequency converter
6.10.2.1 Voltage boost
Data

r0056 bit 05
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Description
For low output frequencies, the V/f characteristics only give a low output voltage. The ohmic
resistances of the stator winding play a role at low frequencies, which are neglected when
determining the motor flux in V/f control. This means that the output voltage can be too low in
order to:
● implement the magnetization of an induction motor,
● to hold the load
● to equalize losses (ohmic losses in the winding resistances) in the system or
● to provide a breakaway/accelerating/braking torque.
The output voltage can be increased (boosted) in the inverter using the parameters as
Note
Especially at low frequencies, the motor temperature is additionally increased as a result of
the voltage boost (the motor overheats)!
The voltage value at 0 Hz is determined from the product of rated motor current P0305,
stator resistance P0350 and the appropriate parameters P1310 … P1312.
If a wrong stator resistance is used, the current applied to the motor is not the same as
specified in P1310 … P1312. This may cause overcurrent (F0001).
Using very high boost values may cause the motor to stuck at a low frequency due to the
Imax controller (very high boost may cause overcurrent failure).
Frequency converter
Table 6- 36 Voltage boost
Parameter Voltage boost Explanation

P1310 Constant voltage The voltage boost is effective over the complete frequency rage whereby the
boost value continually decreases at high frequencies.
9 /LQHDU9I
9PD[
9Q
3 JH
R OWD
X WY
WS
DFWXDO9%RRVW 2X
9&RQ%RRVW
I
9
DO
UP
1R
3
9&RQ%RRVW
I
I%RRVWHQG IQ IPD[
3 3 3
P1311 Voltage boost when The voltage boost is only effective when accelerating or braking.
accelerating or braking /LQHDU9I
9
9PD[
9Q
3
JH
R OWD
X W Y
DFWXDO9%RRVW WS
2X I
9&RQ%RRVW 9
DO
UP
1R
3
9&RQ%RRVW
I
I%RRVWHQG IQ IPD[
3 3 3
Frequency converter
Parameter Voltage boost Explanation

P1312 Voltage boost when The voltage boost is only effective when accelerating for the first time (standstill)
starting 9
/LQHDU9I
9PD[
9Q
3
H
OWDJ
WYR
DFWXDO9%RRVW WSX
2X I
9&RQ%RRVW 9
DO
UP
1R
3
9&RQ%RRVW
I
I%RRVWHQG IQ IPD[
3 3 3
Input values

P1310 = … Continuous boost
0 ... 250 %, default 50 %: Defines boost level relative to rated motor current (P0305)
P1312 = … Starting boost
0 ... 250 %, default 0 %: Applies a constant linear offset relative to rated motor current (P0305)

P1311 = … Acceleration boost
0 ... 250 %, default 0 %: Applies boost relative to rated motor current (P0305)
Output value
r0056 bit 5 Status of motor control - Starting boost active
Frequency converter
6.10.2.2 Slip compensation
Data

Warnings: -
Faults: -
Description
In the V/f characteristic operating mode the motor frequency is always lower than the inverter
output frequency by the slip frequency fs. If the load (the load is increased from M1 to M2) is
increased with a constant output frequency, then the slip increases and the motor frequency
decreases (from f1 to f2). This behavior, typical for an induction motor, can be compensated
using slip compensation P1335. This therefore eliminates the speed reduction, caused by
the load, by boosting (increasing) the inverter output frequency (see figure below).
:LWKRXWVOLSFRPSHQVDWLRQ :LWKVOLSFRPSHQVDWLRQ
0 0
0 0
0 0
I I
ෙI ෙI
I I I I IRXW0
IRXW0
Figure 6-34 Slip compensation
Input values

P1335 = … Slip compensation
0 ... 600 %, default 0 %
Frequency converter
6.10.2.3 V/f resonance damping
Data

Warnings: -
Faults: -
Description
Resonance effects result in an increased noise level and also can damage or destroy the
mechanical system. These resonance effects can occur for:
● Geared motors
● Reluctance motors
● Large motors
(low stator resistance → poor electrical damping)
The V/f resonance damping function is working between 6 % and 80 % of the rated motor
frequency when enabled.
Contrary to the "skip frequency" function and parameters P1091 … P1094, where the
resonance frequency is passed through as quickly as possible, for the V/f resonance
damping (P1338), the resonance effects are dampened from a control-related perspective.
The advantage of this function is that by using this active damping, operation is possible in
the resonance range.
The V/f resonance damping is activated and adjusted using parameter P1338. This
parameter represents a gain factor that is a measure for the damping of the resonance
frequency. The following oscillogram indicates the effect of the resonance damping function
using as an example a reluctance motor with gearbox. The phase output currents are
displayed for an output frequency of 45 Hz.
:LWKRXW9IUHVRQDQFHGDPSLQJ3 9IUHVRQDQFHGDPSLQJDFWLYH3
Figure 6-35 Resonance damping
Frequency converter
Input values

P1338 = … Resonance damping gain V/f
0 ... 10, default 0: Scales di/dt of the active current
6.10.2.4 V/f control with FCC
Data

Warnings: -
Faults: -
Description
The inverters have a current measurement function, which permits the output current to be
precisely determined referred to the motor voltage. This measurement guarantees the output
current to be sub-divided into a load component and a flux component. Using this sub-
division, the motor flux can be controlled and can be appropriately adapted and optimized in-
line with the prevailing conditions.
FCC operation is only activated after the FCC starting frequency P1333 has been exceeded.
The FCC starting frequency P1333 is entered as a percentage to the rated motor frequency
P0310. For a rated motor frequency of 50 Hz and a factory setting of P1333 = 10 %, this
results in an FCC starting frequency of 5 Hz. The FCC starting frequency may not be
selected too low as this has a negative impact on the control characteristics and can result in
oscillation and system instability.
Frequency converter
The "V/f with FCC" control type (P1300 = 1) has proven itself in many applications. It has the
following advantages with respect to the standard V/f control:
● Higher motor efficiency
● Improved stabilizing characteristics
– higher dynamic response
– improved behavior to disturbances/control.
Note
Contrary to closed-loop vector control, for the V/f open-loop control mode with FCC, it
is not possible to specifically influence the motor torque. This is the reason that it isn’t
always possible to avoid the motor stalling – even when using "V/f with FCC".
An improvement in the stabilizing behavior and in the motor efficiency can be
expected when using the closed-loop vector control when compared to V/f control with
FCC.
Input values

1: V/f with FCC
4: reserved
P1333 = … Start frequency for FCC
0 ... 100 %, default: 10 %: Defines start frequency at which FCC is enabled as [%] of rated
motor frequency (P0310)
Frequency converter
6.10.2.5 Current limiting (Imax controller)
Data

r0056 bit 13
Warnings: A0501
Faults: F0001
Description
In the V/f characteristic mode, the inverter has a current limiting controller in order to avoid
overload conditions (I_max controller, see figure below). This controller protects the inverter
and the motor against continuous overload by automatically reducing the inverter output
frequency by fImax (r1343) or the inverter output voltage by VImax (r1344). By reducing the
frequency and following the voltage, the stressing on the inverter is reduced and it is
protected against continuous overload and damage.
If a regenerative Power Module (PM250, PM260 or G120D) is connected and the motor
operates in regenerative mode (r0032 < 0) the frequency will increase.
,PD[FWUOSUSJDLQ ,PD[FWUOLQWWLPH
>V@
3' 3'
.S
7Q
0RWRU7HPSHUDWXUH &2,PD[FWUO)RXWS
,QYHUWHU7HPSHUDWXUH I,BPD[
U
LtWLQYHUWHU
30RWRU ,PD[FRQWUROOHUVHWSRLQW
UDWHGFXUUHQW ෥ .S
7Q
U &2,PD[FWUO9RXWS
0RWRURYOIDFW>@ 8,BPD[
>@ &22XWSFXUOLPLW>$@ U
3'
&XUUHQWIHHGEDFN
U
&22XWSXWFXUUHQW>$@
,PD[YROWSUSJDLQ ,PD[YROWLQWWLPH
>V@ >V@
3' 3'
Figure 6-36 I_max controller
Frequency converter
Note
The inverter load is only reduced when the frequency is reduced if the load decreases at
lower speeds (e.g. square-law torque –speed characteristic of the motor load).
In regenerative mode the current will only decrease if the torque decreases with a higher
frequency
Input values

P1340 = … I_max controller prop. gain
0 ... 0.499, default 0: Proportional gain of the I_max controller
P1341 = … I_max controller integral time
0 ... 50 s, default 0.3 s: Integral time constant of the I_max controller
0 : The I_max controller is OFF
P1345 = … I_max voltage ctrl. Prop. gain
0 ... 5.499, default 0.250: Proportional gain of the I_max voltage controller
P1346 = … I_max voltage ctrl. Integral time
0 ... 50 s, default 0.3 s: Integral time constant of the I_max voltage controller
Output value
r0056 bit13 Status of motor control - I_max controller active/torque limit reached
r1343 I_max controller freq. Output
Displays effective frequency limitation of the inverter.
If I_max controller not in operation, parameter normally shows max. frequency P1082.
r1344 I_max controller volt. Output
Displays amount by which the I_max controller is reducing the inverter output voltage.
Frequency converter
6.10.3 Vector Control
Description
Field-orientated Vector control (known as: Vector control) significantly improves torque
control when compared to V/f control. The Vector control principle is based on the fact that
for a specific load situation or required torque, the required motor current is impressed with
respect to the motor flux so that the appropriate torque is obtained. If the stator current is
emulated in a circulating coordinate system, linked with the rotor flux Φ, then it can be
broken-down into the flux-generating current component id in-line with the rotor flux and into
a torque-generating current component iq, vertical to the rotor flux. These components are
corrected to track their setpoints in the current controller using their own dedicated PI
controllers and are equal quantities in steady-state operation.
0HDVXUHGVWHDG\VWDWHWUDMHFWRULHV
L6W
5RWRUD[LV
˶
LT
˶
LE
)OX[D[LV
LG
LP5 ˶P5
LD 6WDWRUD[LV
Figure 6-37 Current vector diagram in a steady-state condition
In the steady-state condition, the field-generating current component id is proportional to the

flux Φ and the torque is proportional to the product of id and iq.
M ~ Φ * iq
Φ ~ id,stat
M ~ id * iq
When compared to V/f control, Vector control has the following advantages:
● Stable during load and setpoint changes
● Short rise times for setpoint changes (→ better control performance)
● Short rise times for load changes (→ better noise/disturbance characteristics)
● Accelerating and braking are possible with a max. adjustable torque
● The motor and motor machine are protected using the adjustable torque limit, both when
motoring and regenerating
● The motor and braking torque are controlled independently of the speed
● Full holding torque is possible at 0 speed.
Frequency converter
These advantages are, under certain circumstances, already achieved without using speed
feedback.
The Vector control can be used both with and without speed encoder.
The following criteria provide a basis as to when a speed actual value encoder is required:
● High speed accuracy is required
● High requirements are placed on the dynamic response
– Improved control performance
– Improved immunity to disturbances.
● The torque is to be controlled over a control range greater than 1:10
● A defined and/or a changing torque has to be maintained for speeds below approx. 10 %
of the rated motor frequency P0310.
When it comes to entering a setpoint, the Vector control (see table below) is sub-divided into:
● Closed-loop speed control, and
● Closed-loop torque/current control (known as: Closed-loop torque control).
Table 6- 43 Vector control versions
Vector control (closed-loop) Without encoder With encoder

Closed-loop speed control P1300 = 20 and P1501 = 0 P1300 = 21 and P1501 = 0
Closed-loop torque control P1300 = 22 or P1300 = 23 or
P1300 = 20 and P1501 = 1 P1300 = 21 and P1501 = 1
When closed-loop speed control is used, the closed-loop torque control is secondary. This
type of cascaded closed-loop control has proven itself in practice regarding commissioning
and increased transparency.
Frequency converter
6.10.3.1 Vector Control without Speed Encoder
Data

Warnings: -
Faults: -
Description
When Vector control is used without a speed encoder (SLVC) then the position of the flux
and the actual frequency must be determined using the motor model.
CAUTION
If, for example, due to an overload of the motor the inverter loses orientation. It will not be
possible to switch off using an OFF1 or an OFF3 command. In this case it is necessary to
initiate an OFF2 command or disable the pulses using P0054.3.
In this case, the model is supported by the accessible currents and voltages. At low
frequencies (≈ 0 Hz), the model is not able to determine the speed. Inability of the model to
determine the speed at ≈ 0 Hz, uncertainty in model parameters and measurement
inaccuracy are the reasons why there is a changeover from closed-loop to open-loop
controlled operation in this range.
The changeover between closed-loop controlled and open-loop controlled operation is
controlled using the time and frequency conditions (P1755, P1756, P1758) (see figures
below). The system does not wait for the time condition, if the setpoint frequency at the
ramp-function generator input and the actual frequency simultaneously lie below fopen loop.
3>@
IRSHQORRS 3>+]@
>@
Frequency converter
Example for fset < 0,5 x fopen loop and fact > fopen loop
IDFW
IFORVHGORRS 3>+]@
IRSHQORRS
IRSHQORRS
IVHW
W
U
6/9&RSHQORRS
U
6/9&FORVHGORRS W
Figure 6-38 Changeover condition during ramp down for SLVC
Coming form open loop control, the control mode changes to closed loop control depending
on the time and frequency condition (P1755, P1756, P1759, see figure below). The time set
in P1759 will be ignored if the actual frequency exceeds the value of P1755.
Example for fset > fclosed loop and fact < fopen loop
IDFW
IVHW
IFORVHGORRS
3>+]@
IRSHQORRS
U
6/9&RSHQORRS
U
6/9&FORVHGORRS W
3
Figure 6-39 Changeover condition during ramp up for SLVC
Frequency converter
Example for changeover condition during ramp up to a negative setpoint: |fset| > 0,5 x fopen
loop
IDFW
3>+]@
IFORVHGORRS
IRSHQORRS
IRSHQORRS
IRSHQORRS
IRSHQORRS
IFORVHGORRS
3>+]@
W
U
6/9&RSHQORRS
U
6/9&FORVHGORRS W
3 3
Figure 6-40 Changeover condition during ramp down to negative setpoint for SLVC
Note
In the open-loop controlled mode, the speed actual value is the same as the setpoint. For
suspended loads or when accelerating, parameter P1610 (constant torque boost) and P1611
(torque boost when accelerating) must be modified in order to allow the motor to provide the
steady-state and/or dynamic load torque. If P1610 is set to 0 %, then only the magnetizing
current r0331 is impressed for a value of 100 % of the rated motor current P0305. In order
that the motor does not stall when accelerating, P1611 can be increased or the acceleration
pre-control can be used for the speed controller. This is also practical in order that the motor
is not thermally overloaded at low speeds.
Frequency converter
For Vector control without speed actual value encoder the inverter has, in the low frequency
range, the following outstanding features with respect to other AC inverters:
● Closed-loop controlled operation down to ≈ 1 Hz
● Can start in the closed-loop controlled mode (immediately after the motor has been
energized)
● The low frequency range (0 Hz) is passed-through in closed-loop controlled operation.
6WDUW
I I =HURFURVVLQJ
&ORVHGORRS &ORVHGORRS
3 3
2SHQORRS 2SHQORRS
W W
3
Figure 6-41 Starting and passing through 0 Hz in closed-loop control
The following advantages are obtained as a result of closed-loop controlled operation down
to approx. 1 Hz (this can be selected using parameter P1755) as well as the possibility to
immediately start closed-loop controlled at 0 Hz or to reverse closed-loop controlled (this can
be set using parameter P1750):
● No changeover operation is required within the closed-loop control (smooth behavior –no
frequency dips)
● Continuous closed-loop speed-torque control is possible down to approx. 1 Hz.
Note
For closed-loop controlled reversing or closed-loop controlled starting from 0 Hz it must
be taken into account that when staying too long (> 2 s or > P1758) in the range around
0 Hz, that the closed-loop control automatically changes over from closed-loop into the
open-loop controlled mode.
Frequency converter
Input values

P1400 = … Configuration of speed control
Bit 0: Automatic Kp adaption
Bit 1: Integral freeze (SLVC)
P1442 = … Filter time for actual speed
0 ... 32000 s, default: 2 s
P1452 = … Filter time for actual speed (SLVC)
0 ... 32000 s, default: 2 s
P1488 = … Droop input source
0: Droop disabled
1: Torque setpoint
2: Speed controller output
3: Speed controller integral output
P1492 = … Enable droop
possible sources: 722.x (digital input) / 2033.11 (option port) / 2091.11 (serial interface)
P1496 = … Scaling accel. precontrol
0 ... 400 %, default 0 %
P1499 = … Scaling accel. Torque control
0 ... 400 %, default 100 %
P1500 = … Selection of torque setpoint
0: No Main setpoint
2: Analog setpoint
4: USS on RS232
...
P1501 = … Change to torque control
Selects command source from which it is possible to change between speed and torque
control
P1503 = … Torque setpoint
Selects source of torque setpoint for torque control
P1530 = … Motoring power limitation
0 ... 8000 N, default 0.75 N: Defines fixed value for the max. permissible motoring active power
(motoring power limitaton)
P1531 = … Regenerative power limitation
-8000 ... 0 N, default -0.75 N: Enters fixed value for the max. permissible regenerative active
power (regenerative power limitation)
P1750 = … Control word of motor model
Bit 00: Start SLVC open loop
Bit 01: Zero crossing SLVC open loop
Frequency converter

P1470 = … Gain speed controller (SLVC)
0 ... 2000, default 3
P1472 = … Integral time n-ctrl. (SLVC)
25 ... 32001 s, default 400 s
P1477 = … Set integrator of n-ctrl
Selects command source for enabling of integrator setting
P1478 = … Set integrator value n-ctrl
Selects source for integral part of speed controller
P1489 = … Droop scaling
0 ... 0.5 %, default 0.05 %
P1511 = … Additional torque setpoint
Selects source of additional torque setpoint for torque and speed control
-99999 ... 99999 Nm, default 5.13 Nm
-99999 ... 99999 Nm, default -5.13 Nm
Selects source of upper torque limitation: default 1520
Selects source of lower torque limitation: default 1521
P1525 = … Scaling lower torque limit
-400 ... 400 %, default 100 %
P1570 = … Fixed value flux setpoint
50 ... 200 %, default 100 %: Defines fixed value of setpoint relative to rated motor flux
P1574 = … Dynamic voltage headroom
0 ... 150 V, default 10 V
P1580 = … Efficiency optimization
0 ... 100 %, default 0 %: Enters degree of efficiency optimization
P1582 = … Smooth time for flux setpoint
4 ... 500 s, default 15 s
P1596 = … Int. Time field weak. controller
20 ... 32001 s, default 50 s
P1610 = … Continuous torque boost (SLVC)
0 ... 200 %, default 50 %: Value relative to rated motor torque r0333
P1611 = … Acc. Torque boost (SLVC)
0 ... 200 %, default 0 %: Value relative to rated motor torque r0333
P1654 = … Smooth time for lsq setpoint
2 ... 20 s, default 6 s
P1715 = … Gain current controller
0 ... 5, default 0.25
P1717 = … Integral time current controller
1 ... 50 s, defualt 4.1 s
P1740 = … Gain for oscillation damping
0 ... 10, default 0
P1745 = … Flux variance limit in stall
0 ... 1000 %, default 5 %
Frequency converter

P1755 = … Start-freq. Motor model (SLVC)
0.1 ... 250 Hz, default 5 Hz: Enters start frequency of sensoreless vector control
P1756 = … Hyst.-freq. Motor model (SLVC)
10 ... 100 %, default 50 %: Hysteresis frequency in percent of start-frequency (P1755)
P1758 = … T (wait) transit to feed-fwd-mode
100 ... 2000 ms, default 1500 ms: Sets waiting time for chance from closed-loop to open-loop
control mode.
P1759 = … T(wait) transit to closed loop
0 … 2000 ms, default 0 ms: sets waiting time for change from open-loop to closed-loop control
mode.
P1764 = … Kp of n-adaption (SLVC)
0 ... 2.5, default 0.2
P1767 = … Tn of n-adaption (SLVC)
1 ... 200 s, default 4 s: Enters speed adaption controller integral time
P1780 = … Control word of Rs/Rr-adaption
Bit 00: Enable thermal Rs/Rr-adapt.
Bit 01: Enable observer Rs-adapt.
Bit 02: Enable observer Xm-adapt.
Output value
r1407 Status 2 of motor control
Bit 00: V/f control enabled
Bit 01: SLVC enabled
Bit 02: Torque ccontrol enabled
Bit 05: Stop l-comp. Speed control
Bit 06: Set l-comp. Speed controller
Bit 08: Upper torque limit active
Bit 09: Lower torque limit active
Bit 10: Droop active
Bit 15: DDS change active
r1438 Freq. Setpoint to controller
r1445 Actual filtered frequency
r1482 Integral output of n-ctrl
r1490 Droop frequency
r1508 Torque setpoint
r1515 Additional torque setpoint
r1518 Acceleration torque
r1526 Upper torque limitation
r1527 Lower torque limitation
r1536 Max. trq. Motoring current
r1537 Max. trq. Regenerative current
r1538 Upper torque limit (total)
r1539 Lower torque limit (total)
r1583 Flux setpoint (smoothed)
Frequency converter
r1597 Output field weak . controller
r1598 Flux setpoint (total)
r1718 Output of lsq controller
r1719 Integral output of lsq ctrl.
r1723 Output of lsd controller
r1724 Integral output of lsd ctrl.
r1725 Integral limit of lsd ctrl.
r1728 Decoupling voltage
r1746 Actual flux variance
r1751 Status word of motor model
Bit 00: Transit to SLVC open loop
Bit 01: N-adaption enabled
Bit 02: Transit to SLVC closed loop
Bit 03: Speed controller enabled
Bit 04: Current injection
Bit 05: Start flux decrease
Bit 14: Rs adapted
Bit 15: Xh adapted
r1770 Prop. Output of n-adaption
r1771 Int. Output of n-adaption
r1778 Flux angle difference
Frequency converter
6.10.3.2 Vector control with speed encoder
Data

P0400 … P0494
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Description
For Vector control with speed encoder (VC), a pulse encoder, e.g. an encoder with 1024
pulses per revolution is required. In addition to the correct wiring, the pulse encoder must be
activated, corresponding to the encoder type, using the parameter range P0400 … P0494.
Note
Even when using speed control with encoder it may be necessary to adapt the calculations
of the motor model using the integral and proportional part of speed adaptation
(r1770/r1771). The limits can be adjusted via P1752 and P1756:
Whereby:
No speed adaption if r0066 (Output Frequency) < P1752 *(P1756 %/100 %)
Speed adaption via ramp function if
P1752 *(P1756 %/100 %) < r0066 (Output Frequency) < P1752
Full speed adaption if P1752 < r0066 (Output Frequency)

+]
3 3
3>@
3 3>+]@

3 3>+]@
Frequency converter
3DUDPHWHU 7HUPLQDO 7UDFN (QFRGHURXWSXW
P0400 = 2 A
VLQJOHHQGHG
B
AN
GLIIHUHQWLDO
B
BN
Figure 6-42 P0400 settings for a pulse encoder
Frequency converter
Advantages of Vector control with encoder:

● The speed can be closed-loop controlled down to 0 Hz (e.g. at standstill)
● Stable control behavior over the complete speed range
● Constant torque in the rated speed range
● When compared to closed-loop speed control without encoder, the dynamic response for
motors with encoder is significantly higher as the speed is directly measured and is
incorporated in generating the model of current components id, iq.
Input values

P0400 = … Select encoder type
2: Quadrature encoder without zero pulse
12: Quadrature encoder with zero pulse
P0405 = … Enables selection of various pulse types
Bit 04: Invert Z-pulse
Bit 05: Z-pulse = Z-pulse & A-pulse & B-pulse
P0408 = … Encoder pulses per revolution
2 ... 20000, default 1024
P0410 = … Reverses internal direction sense
0: Encoder Normal Rotation
1: Encoder Reverse Rotation
P0491 = … Reaction on speed signal loss
0: Trip the drive
1: Warn and switch to SLVC if in SVC
P0492 = … Allowed speed difference
0 ... 100%, default 10%: Used for low and high speed encoder loss detection
P0494 = … Delay speed loss reaction
0 ... 65000 s, default 10 s: Selects the delay between loss of encoder at low speed and
reaction to the encoder loss
P1400 = … Configuration of speed control
Bit 0: Automatic Kp adaption
Bit 1: Integral freeze (SLVC)
P1442 = … Filter time for actual speed
0 ... 32000 s, default: 2 s
P1452 = … Filter time for actual speed (SLVC)
0 ... 32000 s, default: 2 s
P1488 = … Droop input source
0: Droop disabled
1: Torque setpoint
2: Speed controller output
3: Speed controller integral output
Frequency converter

P1492 = … Enable droop
possible sources: 722.x (digital input) / 2033.11 (option port) / 2091.11 (serial interface)
P1496 = … Scaling accel. precontrol
0 ... 400%, default 0%
P1499 = … Scaling accel. Torque control
0 ... 400%, default 100%
P1500 = … Selection of torque setpoint
0: No Main setpoint
2: Analog setpoint
4: USS on RS232
...
control
P1503 = … Torque setpoint
Selects source of torque setpoint for torque control

P1460 = … Gain speed controller
0 ... 2000, default: 3
P1462 = … Integral time speed controller
25 ... 32001 s, default: 400 s
P1477 = … Set integrator of n-ctrl
Selects command source for enabling of integrator setting
P1478 = … Set integrator value n-ctrl
Selects source for integral part of speed controller
P1489 = … Droop scaling
0 ... 0.5%, default 0.05%
P1511 = … Additional torque setpoint
Selects source of additional torque setpoint for torque and speed control
-99999 ... 99999 Nm, default 5.13 Nm
-99999 ... 99999 Nm, default -5.13 Nm
Frequency converter

-400 ... 400%, default 100%
P1570 = … Fixed value flux setpoint
50 ... 200%, default 100%: Defines fixed value of setpoint relative to rated motor flux
P1574 = … Dynamic voltage headroom
0 ... 150 V, default 10 V
P1580 = … Efficiency optimization
0 ... 100%, default 0%: Enters degree of efficiency optimization
P1582 = … Smooth time for flux setpoint
4 ... 500 s, default 15 s
P1596 = … Int. Time field weak. controller
20 ... 32001 s, default 50 s
P1610 = … Continuous torque boost (SLVC)
0 ... 200%, default 50%: Value relative to rated motor torque r0333
P1611 = … Acc. Torque boost (SLVC)
0 ... 200%, default 0%: Value relative to rated motor torque r0333
P1654 = … Smooth time for lsq setpoint
2 ... 20 s, default 6 s
P1715 = … Gain current controller
0 ... 5, default 0.25
P1717 = … Integral time current controller
1 ... 50 s, defualt 4.1 s
P1740 = … Gain for oscillation damping
0 ... 10, default 0
P1752= … Start frequency of the n adaption in vector control with encoder
0.1 ... 250 Hz, default 5 Hz
P1756 Activation/deactivation of speed adaption in vector control with encoder
10 ... 100 %, default 50 %
Output value
r0403 Encoder Status word
Bit 00: Encoder module active
Bit 01: Encoder error
Bit 02: Signal o.k.
Bit 03: Encoder Low Speed Loss
Bit 04: Speed Measurement using one encoder pulse edge
r1438 Freq. Setpoint to controller
r1445 Actual filtered frequency
r1482 Integral output of n-ctrl
r1490 Droop frequency
Frequency converter
r1508 Torque setpoint
r1515 Additional torque setpoint
r1518 Acceleration torque
r1526 Upper torque limitation
r1527 Lower torque limitation
r1536 Max. trq. Motoring current
r1537 Max. trq. Regenerative current
r1538 Upper torque limit (total)
r1539 Lower torque limit (total)
r1583 Flux setpoint (smoothed)
r1597 Output field weak . controller
r1598 Flux setpoint (total)
r1718 Output of lsq controller
r1719 Integral output of lsq ctrl.
r1723 Output of lsd controller
r1724 Integral output of lsd ctrl.
r1725 Integral limit of lsd ctrl.
r1728 Decoupling voltage
r1770 Prop. output of n-adaption
r1771 Int. output of n-adaption
Frequency converter
6.10.3.3 Speed controller
Data

SLVC: P1470, P1472, P1452
VC: P1460, P1462, P1442
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Description
Both of the control techniques (SLVC and VC) have the same speed controller structure
which includes the following components:
● PI controller
● Speed controller pre-control
● Droop
The sum of the output quantities forms the speed setpoint, which is reduced to the
permissible level using the torque setpoint limiting function.
Speed controller (SLVC: P1470, P1472, P1452 VC: P1460, P1462, P1442)
The speed controller (see figure below) receives its setpoint r0062 from the setpoint channel,
the actual value r0063 either directly from the speed actual value encoder for VC or through
the motor model for SLVC. The system error is amplified by the PI controller and, together
with the pre-control, forms the torque setpoint.
For increasing load torques, when the droop function is active, the speed setpoint is
proportionally reduced so that the load on an individual motor within a group (where two or
several motors are mechanically coupled) is reduced when excessively high torques occur.
Frequency converter
'URRS
3UHFRQWURO
U
6SHHGFRQWURO U .S 7Q
U U U U
ದ 3,

6SHHG
)UHTVHWSRLQW ದ FRQWUROOHU 7RUTXH
U 7L VHWSRLQW
U U
U
$FWIUHTXHQF\ 7L .S 7Q
6/9& 3 3 3
RQO\DFWLYHLISUHFRQWUROLVHQDEOHG3! 9& 3 3 3
Figure 6-43 Speed controller
If the moment of inertia was entered, the speed controller (Kp,Tn) can be calculated using the
automatic parameterization (P0340 = 4). The controller parameters are defined according to
the symmetrical optimum as follows:
Tn = 4 * T σ
Kp = ｽ * r0345 / Tσ = 2 * r0345 / Tn
Tσ = sum of the low delay times
If oscillations occur with these particular settings, then the speed controller gain Kp should be
manually reduced. It is also possible to increase the speed actual value smoothing (this is
the usual procedure for gearbox play or high-frequency torsional oscillations) and then re-call
the controller calculation as the value is incorporated in the computation of Kp and Tn.
The following interrelationships apply for the optimization routine:
● If Kp is increased then the controller becomes faster and the overshoot is reduced.
However, the signal ripple and oscillations in the speed controller loop are increased.
● If Tn is reduced, then the controller also becomes faster. However, the overshoot
increases.
When manually adjusting the speed control, the simplest procedure is to initially define the
possible dynamic response using Kp (and the speed actual value smoothing) in order to then
reduce the integral action time as far as possible. In this case it is important to ensure that
the closed-loop control must also remain stable in the field-weakening range.
When oscillations occur in the closed-loop speed control, it is generally sufficient to increase
the smoothing time in P1452 for SLVC or P1442 for VC (or to reduce the controller gain) in
order to dampen oscillations.
Frequency converter
The integral output of the speed controller can be monitored using r1482 and the unlimited
controller output can be monitored using r1508 (torque setpoint).
Note
When compared to closed-loop control with encoder, the dynamic response for sensorless
motors is significantly reduced. This is because the speed can only be derived from the
inverter output quantities for current and voltage which have the appropriate noise level.
Speed controller pre-control (P1496, P0341, P0342)

The control behavior of the speed control loop can be improved if the speed controller of the
inverter also generates values for the current setpoints (corresponds to the torque setpoint)
from the speed setpoint. The torque setpoint mv, is calculated as follows:
GωVHW GωVHW
PY 3 ˆ 3 3 3
GW GW
This is entered into the current controller through an adaptation element directly as an
additive control quantity (this is enabled using P1496).
The motor moment of inertia P0341 is directly calculated during the quick commissioning or
the complete parameterization (P0340 = 1). The factor P0342 between the total moment of
inertia and motor moment of inertia must be manually determined.
'URRS
3UHFRQWURO 3 3
U
.S 7Q
3
U 3, U U

ಥ 6SHHG
&RQWUROOHU
! ಥ
)UHTVHWSRLQW 7RUTXH
7L VHWSRLQW
U U
$FWIUHTXHQF\
7L .S 7Q
6/9& 3 3 3
9& 3 3 3
Figure 6-44 Speed controller with pre-control
Frequency converter
When correctly adapted, the speed controller only has to correct noise
quantities/disturbances in its control loop and this is achieved with a relatively low
manipulated quantity change. On the other hand, speed setpoint changes bypass the speed
controller and are therefore executed faster.
The effect of the pre-control quantity can be adapted, depending on the particular
application, using the pre-control factor P1496. Using P1496 = 100 %, the pre-control is
calculated according to the motor and load moment of inertia (P0341, P0342). In order that
the speed controller does not work against the torque setpoint which is entered, a balancing
filter is automatically used. The time constant of the balancing filter corresponds to the
equivalent delay time of the speed control loop. The speed controller pre-control is correctly
set (P1496 = 100 %, calibrated using P0342), if the I component of the speed controller
(r1482) does not change during a ramp-up or ramp-down in the range n > 20 % * P0310.
This means, using the pre-control, it is possible to approach a new speed setpoint without
overshoot (prerequisite: The torque limiting does not intervene and the moment of inertia
remains constant).
If the speed controller is pre-controlled, then the speed setpoint (r0062) is delayed with the
same smoothing (P1442 or P1452) as the actual value (r1445). This ensures that when
accelerating, there is no setpoint – actual value difference (r0064) at the controller input
which would have been exclusively caused by the signal propagation time.
When the speed pre-control is activated, it must be ensured that the speed setpoint is
continuously entered and without any significant noise level (avoid torque surges). An
appropriate signal can be generated by smoothing the analog signal P0753 or by activating
the rounding-off function of the ramp-function generator P1130 to P1133.
Note
The ramp-up and ramp-down times (P1120, P1121) of the ramp-function generator in the
setpoint channel should only be set so fast that when accelerating and braking, the motor
speed can follow the setpoint. This then guarantees the optimum functioning of the speed
controller pre-control.
The starting time r0345 is a measure for the overall moment of inertia of the machine and
describes that time in which the unloaded motor can accelerate from standstill to the rated
motor speed P0311 with the rated motor torque r0333.
U ຘ ˭ຘ Q ຘ ˭ຘ 3
0RW UDWHG
7VWDUWLQJ ˆຘ 3ຘ 3 ຘ
ຘ 0 ຘ U
0RW UDWHG
If these secondary conditions match the particular application, then the starting time can be
used as the shortest value for the ramp-up and ramp-down times.
Frequency converter
Droop (P1488 … P1492)

The droop (enabled using P1488) means that with increasing load torque, the speed setpoint
is proportionally reduced.
'URRS 3
3

PV
U

3 U
3UHFRQWURO
.S 7Q
U
3,
ದ U U
6SHHG
)UHTVHWSRLQW &RQWUROOHU U
ದ
7L 7RUTXH
U U VHWSRLQW
$FWIUHTXHQF\ 7L .S 7Q

RQO\DFWLYHLISUHFRQWUROLVHQDEOHG3! 6/9& 3 3 3
RQO\DFWLYHZLWK6/9& 9& 3 3 3
Figure 6-45 Speed controller with droop
Droop is the simplest method to implement load sharing control. However, this load sharing
control can only be used if the motors are operated more or less under steady-state
conditions (e.g. at constant speed). For motors, which are frequently accelerated and braked
with high speed changes, this technique is only conditionally suitable.
The most simple load sharing control is, e.g., used for applications where two or several
motors are mechanically coupled or operate on a common shaft and which have to fulfill the
requirements above. In this case, the droop controls torsional stressing associated with the
mechanical coupling by changing the speeds of the individual motors (excessive torques are
reduced for an individual motor).
Prerequisite
● All of the motors must be operated with closed-loop Vector speed control (with or without
speed actual value encoder)
● The ramp-up and ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator must be identical for
all of the motors.
Frequency converter
6.10.3.4 Closed-loop torque control
Data

P1400 … P1780
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP7200, FP7210, FP7700, FP7710
Description
For sensorless closed-loop speed control SLVC (P1300 = 20) or for closed-loop speed
control with sensor VC (P1300 = 21), it is possible to changeover to closed-loop torque
control (slave motor) using BICO parameter P1501. It is not possible to changeover between
closed-loop speed and torque control if the closed-loop torque control is directly selected
using P1300 = 22 or 23. The torque setpoint and supplementary torque setpoint can be
selected using parameter P1500 and also using BICO parameter P1503 (CI: Torque
setpoint) or P1511 (CI: Supplementary torque setpoint). The supplementary torque acts both
for the closed-loop torque control as well as for the closed-loop speed control (see figure
below). As a result of this feature, a pre-control torque for the speed control can be
implemented using the supplementary torque setpoint.
Note
For safety reasons, it is presently not possible to assign fixed torque setpoints.
Frequency converter
'URRS
3UHFRQWURO
.3 7Q
3,
ಥ
VSHHG U U
)UHTVHWSRLQW FRQWUROOHU
ಥ
7L
7RUTXH
U U VHSRLQW
$FWIUHTXHQF\
&,7RUTXHVHWSRLQW
3&

%,යWRUTXHFWUO
3&

&,$GGWUTVHWS
3&

7L .3 7Q
RQO\DFWLYHLISUHFRQWUROLVHQDEOHG3!
6/9& 3 3 3
9& 3 3 3
Figure 6-46 Closed-loop speed and torque control
The sum of both torque setpoints is limited in the same way as the torque setpoint of the
speed control. Above the maximum speed (plus 3%), a speed limiting controller reduces the
torque limits in order to prevent the motor accelerating any further.
A "real" closed-loop torque control (with automatically set speed) is only possible in the
closed-loop controlled range but not in the open-loop controlled range. In the open-loop
controlled range, the torque setpoint changes the setpoint speed through a ramp-up
integrator (integration time ~ P1499 * P0341 * P0342). This is the reason that sensorless
closed-loop torque control in the area around standstill (0 speed) is only suitable for
applications which require an accelerating torque and not a load torque (e.g. traversing
motors). For closed-loop torque control with sensors, this restriction does not apply.
If the closed-loop torque control is active, and a fast stop command (OFF3) is output, then
the system automatically changes-over to closed-loop speed control and braking of the
motor is started. If a normal stop command (OFF1) is output, there is no changeover.
Instead, the system waits until a higher-level control has brought the motor to a standstill, in
order to inhibit the pulses. This is necessary in order to allow the master and slave motors to
be shut down together. For P1300 = 22 or 23, for OFF1, the motor is directly powered-down
(as for OFF2).
Frequency converter
6.10.3.5 Closed-loop torque control (SLVC)
Description

P1400 … P1780
Warnings: -
Faults: -
For sensorless closed-loop speed control (P1300 = 20) it is possible to changeover to
closed-loop torque control (slave motor) using BICO parameter P1501. It is not possible to
changeover between closed-loop speed and torque control if the closed-loop torque control
is directly selected using P1300 = 22. The torque setpoint and supplementary torque
setpoint can be selected using parameter P1500 and also using BICO parameter P1503 (CI:
Torque setpoint) or P1511 (CI: Supplementary torque setpoint). The supplementary torque
acts both for the closed-loop torque control as well as for the closed-loop speed control (see
figure below). As a result of this feature, a pre-control torque for the speed control can be
implemented using the supplementary torque setpoint.
Note
For safety reasons, it is presently not possible to assign fixed torque setpoints.
'URRS
3UHFRQWURO

3 3
3,
ಥ
VSHHG U U
)UHTVHWSRLQW FRQWUROOHU
ಥ
3
7RUTXH
U U VHSRLQW
$FWIUHTXHQF\
&,7RUTXHVHWSRLQW
3&

%,යWRUTXHFWUO
3&

&,$GGWUTVHWS
3&

RQO\DFWLYHLISUHFRQWUROLVHQDEOHG3!
Figure 6-47 Closed-loop speed and torque control
Frequency converter
The sum of both torque setpoints is limited in the same way as the torque setpoint of the
speed control. Above the maximum speed (plus 3%), a speed limiting controller reduces the
torque limits in order to prevent the motor accelerating any further.
A "real" closed-loop torque control (with automatically set speed) is only possible in the
closed-loop controlled range but not in the open-loop controlled range. In the open-loop
controlled range, the torque setpoint changes the setpoint speed through a ramp-up
integrator (integration time ~ P1499 * P0341 * P0342). This is the reason that sensorless
closed-loop torque control in the area around standstill (0 speed) is only suitable for
applications which require an accelerating torque and not a load torque (e.g. traversing
motors).
If the closed-loop torque control is active, and a fast stop command (OFF3) is output, then
the system automatically changes-over to closed-loop speed control and braking of the
motor is started. If a normal stop command (OFF1) is output, there is no changeover.
Instead, the system waits until a higher-level control has brought the motor to a standstill, in
order to inhibit the pulses. This is necessary in order to allow the master and slave motors to
be shut down together. For P1300 = 22, for OFF1, the motor is directly powered-down (as for
OFF2).
CAUTION
If, for example, due to an overload of the motor the inverter loses orientation. It will not be
possible to switch off using an OFF1 or an OFF3 command. In this case it is necessary to
initiate an OFF2 command or disable the pulses using P0054.3.
Frequency converter
6.10.3.6 Switch-over from Frequency to Torque Control
Data

Warnings: -
Faults: -
Description
CAUTION
Don't use SS1 or SLS in conjunction with torque control
Torque control should not be used in conjunction with the fail-safe functions SS1 and SLS,
because the speed ramp functions, necessary for SS1 and SLS are not available together
with the torque control. So, if activating SS1 or SLS in case of torque control, a passivated
STO will be generated immediately (after the time, calculated in section "Limiting values for
SS1 and SLS" has been passed) if the output frequency exceeds the safety envelope.
The STO can be used with torque control without any restrictions.
The torque control is switched-on via parameter P1501 during operation or selected with
parameter P1300 = 22, 23.
Table 6- 48 Torque control
Control mode P1501 = ON

Closed-loop P1300 = 20, 21 OFF1 command is not recognized.
speed control + fail-safe functions SLS, SS1 A safety fault is generated when the output
frequency leaves the safety envelope.
Torque control P1300 = 22, 23 OFF1 command recognized as OFF2.
+ fail-safe functions SLS, SS1 A safety fault is generated when the output
frequency leaves the safety envelope.
Frequency converter
Input values
Parameter Description (Parameter name and factory setting (if not variable) in bold) Setting
1: V/f with FCC
4: reserved
control
Frequency converter
6.10.3.7 Limiting the torque setpoint
Data

P0640, r0067
r1407 bit 08, r1407 bit 09
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP7700, FP7710 (CU240S)
Description
All of the following limits act on the torque setpoint which is either entered at the speed
controller output for closed-loop speed control or as torque input for closed-loop torque
control. The minimum is used from the various limits. This minimum is cyclically computed in
the inverter and displayed in parameters r1538, r1539.
● r1538 Upper torque limit
● r1539 Lower torque limit
This means that these cyclic values limit the torque setpoint at the speed controller
output/torque input and indicate the instantaneously maximum possible torque. If the torque
setpoint is limited in the inverter, then this is displayed using the following diagnostic
parameters
● r1407 bit 08 Upper torque limit active
● r1407 bit 09 Lower torque limit active
Torque limiting
The value specifies the maximum permissible torque whereby different limits are
parametrizable for motoring and regenerative operation.
● P1520 CO: Upper torque limit value
● P1521 CO: Lower torque limit value
● P1522 CI: Upper torque limit value
● P1523 CI: Lower torque limit value
● P1525 Scaling, lower torque limit value
The currently active torque limit values are displayed in the following parameters:
● r1526 CO: Upper torque limit value
● r1527 CO: Lower torque limit value
Frequency converter
_0_ 3RZHU 6WDOO

OLPLWDWLRQ OLPLWDWLRQ
7RUTXH
OLPLWDWLRQ

U aಧ aಧ
I I
U
3
3
_IDFW_
&RQVWDQW &RQVWDQW IVWDOO 6WDOO
WRUTXH SRZHU SRZHU
Figure 6-48 Torque limits
Power limits
This value specifies the maximum permissible power, whereby different limits can be
parameterized for motoring and regenerative operation.
● P1530 Motor power limit
● P1531 Regenerative power limit
Stall limiting
The stall limiting (locked rotor limiting) is internally calculated for the drive from the motor
data.
Current limiting
The current limiting additionally limits the maximum torque which the motor can provide. If
the torque limit is increased, more torque is only available if a higher current can flow. It may
be necessary to also adapt the current limit. The current limiting is influenced by:
● P0640
● Thermal motor protection
● Thermal inverter protection
After limiting, the instantaneous maximum possible inverter current is displayed in parameter
r0067 (limited output current).
Frequency converter
Input values

P0640 = … Motor overload factor [%]
10 ... 400 %, default 200 %: Defines motor overload current limit relative to rated motor current
(P0305)

-99999 ... 99999 Nm, default 5.13 Nm
-99999 ... 99999 Nm, default -5.13 Nm
-400 ... 400 %, default 100 %
Output value
r0067 Act. Output current limit

r1407 bit 8 Status 2 of motor control - Upper torque limit active
r1407 bit 9 Status 2 of motor control - Lower torque limit active
Frequency converter
Frequency converter
Functions only available with G120 inverters 7
7.1 2-/3-Wire Control
Data

P0701 … P0713
P0840, P0842, P1113
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Description
2-/3-wire control allows to start, stop and reverse the inverter in one of the following ways:
1. 2-wire control with Siemens standard control
using ON/OFF1 and REV as permanent signals
2. 2-wire control with Siemens standard control
using ON/OFF1 and ON_REV/OFF1 as permanent signals
3. 2-wire control
using ON_FWD and ON_REV as permanent signals
4. 3-wire control
using STOP as permanent signal, FWD and REVP as pulses
5. 3 wire control
using OFF1/HOLD and REV as permanent signal, ON as pulse signal
The different types of 2-/3-wire control have to be established via P0727. A detailed
description is given in the following section. The signal source can be set via the parameters
P0840, P0842 and P1113.
Note
Automatic restart function
When a 2-/3-wire control methods is selected via P0727, the automatic restart function
(P1210) is disabled. If the automatic restarted function is required, the user must specifically
enable this function. For further details, please see the Parameter Manual.
Frequency converter
When any of the control functions are selected using P0727, the values 1, 2 and 12 for the
digital inputs (P0701 … and P0712, P0713 for AI used as DI) are redefined as shown in the
table below.
Table 7- 1 Redefined values of digital inputs
P0727 = 0 P0727 = 1 P0727 = 2 P0727 = 3

Siemens Standard 2-wire control 3-wire control 3-wire control
Value 1 of digital input ON/OFF1 ON_FWD STOP ON_PULSE
meaning of P0840
Value 2 of digital input ON_REV/OFF1 ON_REV FWDP OFF1/HOLD
meaning of P0842
Value 3 of digital input REV REV REVP REV
meaning of P1113
"P" denotes "Pulse"; "FWD" denotes "Forward"; "REV" denotes "Reverse"
Command sources for 2-/3-wire control

To use the 2-/3-wire control the sources for ON/OFF1 (P0840), ON_REV/OFF1 (P0842) and
REV (P1113) respective the redefined values have to be set accordingly.
Input values

P0727 = … Selection of 2/3-wire method
0: Siemens (start/dir) - (Method 1 and Method 2)
1: 2-wire (fwd/rev) - (Method 3)
2: 3-wire (fwd/rev) - (Method 4)
3: 3-wire (start/dir) - (Method 5)
P0840 = … ON/OFF1 command source
possible sources: 722.0 (DI0) default, or any binary output parameter (BO).
P0842 = … ON reverse/OFF1 command source
possible sources: 722.x (DIx), or any binary output parameter (BO).
P1113 = … REV command source
possible sources: 722.1 (DI1) default, or any binary output parameter (BO).
Frequency converter
7.1.1 Siemens standard control (P0727 = 0)
Description
With the default settings (P0727 = 0) the following variants of 2-wire control are available:
1. ON/OFF1 and REV.
2. ON/OFF1 and ON_REV/OFF1.
ON/OFF1 and REV

This method allows the inverter to be started and stopped using the ON/OFF1 command and
the direction of the inverter changed using the REV command. These commands can be
assigned to any of the digital inputs through parameters P0701 … P0709 (and P0712,
P0713 for AI used as DI) or BICO connections.
The REV commands can be given at any time, independent of the frequency output of the
inverter.
Function
On receiving an ON/OFF1 command the inverter will run the motor in a forward direction and
ramp-up the motor to the frequency setpoint.
When a REV command is issued, the inverter will ramp-down the frequency through 0 Hz
and run the motor in the reverse direction. When the REV command is removed the inverter
will ramp-up through 0 Hz and run in a forward direction until the frequency setpoint is reach.
When the ON/OFF1 command is removed, the inverter will stop the motor by performing an
OFF1.
The REV command initiated by itself cannot start the motor.
212)) $FWLYH
&RQWURO
FRPPDQGV
5(9 $FWLYH $FWLYH
,QYHUWHU
IUHTXHQF\
R 7LPH
IRXW
R 2))
Figure 7-1 Siemens standard control using ON/OFF1 and REV
Frequency converter
ON/OFF1 and ON_REV/OFF1

This method allows the inverter to run the motor in a forward direction (run right) using the
ON/OFF1 command and in the opposite direction (run left) using the ON_REV/OFF1.
However, for a direction reversal the drive will first have to decelerate with OFF1 and when
reaching 0 Hz the reverse signal can be applied.
Function
The ramp down phase can be interrupted by start command in the same direction: if the
drive was operating in forward and OFF1 was applied, an ON/OFF1 will work correctly and
accelerate again the drive up to the setpoint speed. The same is valid for reverse and
ON_REV/OFF1
Giving a start command for the opposite direction of which the inverter frequency output is
ramping down, the drive ignores the new setting and the drive will ramp down to 0 Hz and
then remain at standstill.
Without any control signal enabled the drive will ramp down to a stop and remain at
standstill.
&RPPDQGLJQRUHG
212)) $FW $FWLYH
&RQWURO
&RPPDQGLJQRUHG
FRPPDQGV
21B5(92)) $FWLYH
,QYHUWHU
R
IUHTXHQF\ R
R 7LPH
IRXW
R 2))
Figure 7-2 Siemens standard control using ON/OFF1 and ON_REV/OFF1
2-wire control using ON/OFF1 and REV as permanent signals

(P0727 = 0, Siemens standard)
ON/OFF1 REV Function

0 0 Inverter ramps down to standstill with OFF1 from any frequency
1 0 Inverter accelerates to setpoint
1 1 Inverter accelerates to inverse setpoint
Frequency converter
2-wire control using ON/OFF1 and ON_REV/OFF1 as permanent signals

(P0727 = 0, Siemens standard)
ON/OFF1 ON_REV/ Function

OFF1
0 0 Inverter ramps down to standstill with OFF1 from any frequency (a signal,
set while the inverter ramps down, will be ignored)
1 1 First active signal has priority, second signal is ignored
7.1.2 2-wire control (P0727 = 1)
Description
This method uses two permanent signals, ON_FWD and ON_REV which start/stop the
inverter and determine the direction of the motor.
The advantage of this method of control is that ON_FWD and ON_REV can be switched at
any time, independently of the setpoint or frequency output or direction of rotation, and there
is no requirement of the motor to ramp-down to 0 Hz before the command is performed.
Function
With a permanent ON_FWD signal, the drive is ON and runs in forward direction.
With a permanent ON_REV signal, the drive is ON and runs in reverse direction.
If both signals are active simultaneously, the drive will perform an OFF1 and ramp down to
standstill.
If both signals are disabled the drive is in OFF1 state.
21B):' $FW $FWLYH $FW $FW

&RQWURO
FRPPDQGV
21B5(9 $FWLYH $FWLYH
,QYHUWHU
IUHTXHQF\ R
R
R R
IRXW R 7LPH
R 2))
Figure 7-3 2-wire control using ON_FWD and ON_REV
Frequency converter
2-wire controlusing ON_FWD and ON_REV as permanent signals (P0727 = 1)
ON_FWD ON_REV Function

7.1.3 3-wire control (P0727 = 2)
Description
This method uses three commands to control the operation of the motor:
1. STOP: This signal is permanently necessary to start the motor via FWDP or REVP.
2. FWDP: Causes the motor to run in a forward direction (run right).
3. REVP: Causes the motor to run in the reverse direction (run left).
Function
The STOP signal uses negative logic: Opening the contact or maintaining it open causes an
OFF1 condition and the drive stops. The STOP contact will need to be maintained closed to
start and run the inverter.
Then a positive edge of the FWDP or REVP contact latches and starts the inverter.
A positive edge of the FWDP contact will set the forward direction.
A positive edge of the REVP contact will change to the reverse direction.
FWDP and REVP closed simultaneously will cause an OFF1.
The ramp down can be interrupted by a single new pulse FWDP or REVP.
A positive edge of the FWDP or REVP contacts while the drive is operating in the respective
direction will not cause any change.
Only by opening the STOP contact the drive will switch off regularly, apart from the special
case that both signals FWDP and REVP are present.
Frequency converter
6723 $FWLYH $FWLYH

&RPPDQGLJQRUHG
&RQWURO ):'3
FRPPDQGV
5(93 $FWLYH
,QYHUWHU
IUHTXHQF\
R R
IRXW 7LPH
R 2))
Figure 7-4 3-wire control using FWDP, REVP and STOP
3-wire control using STOP as permanent signal, FWD and REVP as pulses (P0727 = 2)
STOP FWDP REVP Function

0 0/1 0/1 Inverter ramps down to standstill with OFF1 from any frequency
1 0 0 Inverter operates according the previous set pulse (FWDP/REVP)
1 0 1 Inverter accelerates to inverse setpoint
1 1 0 Inverter accelerates to setpoint
1 1 1 Inverter ramps down to standstill with OFF1 from any frequency
7.1.4 3-wire control (P0727 = 3)
Description
There are three signals associated with this function:
ON_PULSE: Causes the motor to run in a forward direction if OFF1/HOLD is active.

OFF1/HOLD: This signal needs to be permanently active to start the motor via an
ON_PULSE. Opening of the contact causes the motor to stop with
OFF1.
REV: This signal causes the motor to change to reverse direction if
OFF1/HOLD and ON_PULSE are active.
Frequency converter
Function
The switch OFF1/HOLD uses negative logic: the contact will need to be maintained closed in
order to switch the inverter ON or keep it running.
A positive edge of the ON_PULSE switch latches and starts the inverter if it was OFF before.
The direction can be determined and changed at any time using the REV signal The REV
signal needs to be permanently active.
Opening or closing the ON_PULSE switch while the drive runs has no effect.
Only enabling (e.g. Opening) OFF1/HOLD will unlatch the run-state and then stop the
inverter.
&RPPDQGLJQRUHG
21B38/6( $FWLYH
&RQWURO 2))+2/' $FWLYH $FWLYH

FRPPDQGV
5(9 $FWLYH $FWLYH
,QYHUWHU
IUHTXHQF\
R R
IRXW 7LPH
R 2))
Figure 7-5 3-wire control using ON_PULSE, OFF1/HOLD and REV
3-wire control using STOP as permanent signal, FWD and REVP as pulses (P0727 = 3)
OFF1/ ON_ REV Function

HOLD PULSE
0 0/1 0/1 Inverter ramps down to standstill with OFF1 from any frequency
1 1 0 Inverter accelerates to setpoint
1 1 1 Inverter accelerates to inverse setpoint
Frequency converter
7.2 Setpoint via Fixed Frequencies
Data
Parameter range: P1001 - r1025

Warnings: -
Faults: -
Description
The fixed frequency functionality allows entering a frequency setpoint to the drive. It can be
selected using the Fixed Frequencies (P1001 … P1101) or using the PID Fixed Frequencies
(P2201 … P2223), see section "Setpoint via PID Fixed Frequencies".
This is an alternative method of entering a setpoint instead of using the analog inputs, the
serial communications interface, the JOG function or a motorized potentiometer.
There are two modes to select fixed frequencies, which are set via the parameter P1016:
● Direct selection (P1016 = 1)
● Binary selection (P1016 = 2)
ON command combined with fixed frequency

The fixed frequency status bit r1025 (binector output) allows to combine the fixed frequency
selection with an ON command. For this, P0840 must be set to r1025.
CAUTION
Please note that the meaning of P0840 may change with using the 2-/3-wire control
functionality.
When using digital inputs the signal source can be selected using one of the following
methods:
● Standard method (default)
● BICO method
Note
The standard method has priority over the BICO method. This means the digital inputs
DI3 … DI6 must be set to another value than 15, 16, 17, 18 before BICO connection can
be performed.
Frequency converter
Direct selection (P1016 = 1)

With the default settings, in this mode, the fixed frequency can be selected using permanent
signals for the fixed frequency sources, selected using P1020 ... P1023 (default DI3 ... DI6).
If several fixed frequencies are active simultaneously, the frequencies are added together.
This means if DI3, DI4 and DI6 are active then the resultant frequency is FF1+FF2+FF4.
This allows up to 15 combinations for the selection of fixed frequencies.
The values for the FF1 … FF4 are given in P1001 … P1004.
P1016 = 1
P1020
DI3 r0722 722:3
P0704 = 15 or P0704 = 99
P1021
DI4 r0722 722:4
P0705 = 16 or P0705 = 99
P1022
DI5 r0722 722:5
P0706 = 17 or P0706 = 99 1 r1025
P1023
DI6 r0722 722:6
P0707 = 18 or P0707 = 99
0 +
r1024
P1001
0 +
P1002
0 +
P1003
0
P1004
Figure 7-6 Direct selection of fixed frequencies - functional overview
Frequency converter
Binary-coded selection (P1016 = 2)

Using this technique up to 15 different fixed frequencies can be selected using permanent
signals for the fixed frequency sources, selected using P1020 … P1023. The frequencies are
indirectly selected using the binary coding of the status of the fixed frequency sources as
Table 7- 3 Example of selecting fixed frequencies using binary
FF number Frequency P1023 P1022 P1021 P1020

FF1 P1001 0 0 0 1
FF2 P1002 0 0 1 0
FF3 P1003 0 0 1 1
FF4 P1004 0 1 0 0
… … … … … …
FF14 P1014 1 1 1 0
FF15 P1015 1 1 1 1
P1016 = 2
P1020
DI3 r0722 722:3
P0704 = 15 or P0704 = 99
P1021
DI4 r0722 722:4
P0705 = 16 or P0705 = 99
P1022
DI5 r0722 722:5
P0706 = 17 or P0706 = 99 1 r1025
P1023
DI6 r0722 722:6
P0707 = 18 or P0707 = 99
)L[HG)UHT
>+]@ 0001
3'

r1024

)L[HG)UHT
>+]@ 1111
3'
Figure 7-7 Binary selection of fixed frequencies - functional overview
Frequency converter
Input values

Select source for fixed frequency selection, e.g. digital inputs (P0722.x) or any binary output parameter (BO).
P1001 - Fixed frequency 1 - 15
P1015 = … possible values: - 650 Hz … 650 Hz, default settings 0 Hz … 65 Hz in 5 Hz-steps
P1016 = … Fixed frequency mode
1 direct selection (default), 2 binary-coded selection
P1020 = … Fixed freq. Selection Bit 0
e.g 722.x (digital inputs) / r2091.00 (serial interface)
Output values

r1024 Actual fixed frequency
P1016 = 0: Sum of selected fixed frequencies
P1016 = 1: Fixed frequency of binary-coded value
r1025 Fixed frequency status
0 = no fixed frequency selected
1 = at least one fixed frequency selected
Examples via digital inputs or serial interface
Table 7- 4 Selection of fixed frequencies with direct selection (P1016 = 0)
Method Input settings

Standard P0704 = 15: DI3 as source for FF selection Bit 0 (P1020)
method - P0705 = 16: DI4 as source for FF selection Bit 1(P1021)
using digital P0706 = 17: DI5 as source for FF selection Bit 2 (P1022)
inputs P0707 = 18: DI5 as source for FF selection Bit 3 (P1023)
P1020 = 722.3: FF selector Bit 0 (DI3) // P1021 = 722.4: FF selector Bit 1 (DI4)
P1022 = 722.5: FF selector Bit 2 (DI5) // P1021 = 722.4: FF selector Bit 3 (DI6)
BICO P0704 - P0707 ≠ 15, 16, 17, 18, BICO parameterization enabled,
method - P1020 = 2091.0: FF selector Bit 0 -> serial interface control word 2, Bit 0 ,
using serial P1021 = 2091.1: FF selector Bit 1 -> serial interface control word 2, Bit 1
interface P1022 = 2091.2: FF selector Bit 2 -> serial interface control word 2, Bit 2
P1023 = 2091.3: FF selector Bit 3 -> serial interface control word 2, Bit 3
Frequency converter
7.3 PID Controller
7.3 PID Controller
Data

Warnings: A0936
Function chart number: FP3300, FP3310, FP3400, FP5000, FP5100
Features: cycle time: 8 ms
Description
The integrated PID controller (technology controller) calculates a frequency setpoint that can
be used to control process quantities such as pressure or level. The setpoint can be used as
main setpoint or as additional setpoint.
As main setpoint it can be used for the following applications:
● Closed-loop pressure control for extruders
● Closed-loop water level control for pump motors
● Closed-loop temperature control for fan motors.
As additional setpoint the following applications are possible:
● Closed-loop dancer roll position control for winder applications and similar control tasks.
Application Control structure
PID PID PID Motor

p2* PID AFM RFG
1 setpoint RFG limit control
−
PID
p2
feedback
p2 PID control
SUM Motor
v2* AFM RFG
setpoint control
v2 v1
x2* PID PID PID
2 PID
setpoint RFG limit
x2 −
PID
x2
feedback Dancer control
Setpoint via
RFG PID-RFG
SUM PID controller
1)
P2200 = 1:0 ON: - ON: active
1
P2251 = 0 − PID control
OFF1/3: active OFF1/3: -
P2200 = 1:0 2) ON: active ON: active
2 Dancer control
P2251 = 1 OFF1/3: active OFF1/3: active
1) change only taken when drive stopped
2) will take change with drive running
Figure 7-8 PID application examples
Frequency converter
7.3 PID Controller
The technology controller setpoints and actual values can be entered using the PID
motorized potentiometer (PID-MOP), PID fixed setpoint (PID-FF), analog inputs (AI) or
through the serial interface as shown in the figure below. The appropriate parameterization
of the BICO parameter defines which setpoints or actual values are to be used.
%2367$57(5
U 3

'LJLWDOLQSXWV 0RWRU
3,' 3,' 3,' FRQWURO
U[ 3 3,'
680 5)* 37
866RQ56 ಥ
ෙ3,' 3,'2XWSXW
U
3,' 3,'
3
866RQ56 37 6&/
U
3
352),%86 3
U
352),QHW
U
Figure 7-9 Structure of the technology controller
Input values

P2200 = … Enable PID controller
0: disabled (default)
1: enabled
P2235 = … Enable PID-MOP (UP-cmd)
possible sources: 19.13 (BOP), 722.x (Digital Input), 2032.13 (USS on RS232), 2036.13 (USS
on RS485), 2090.13 (PROFIBUS), r8890.13 (PROFInet)
P2236 = … Enable PID-MOP (DOWN-cmd)
possible sources: 19.14 (BOP), 722.x (Digital Input), 2032.14 (USS on RS232), 2036.14 (USS
on RS485), 2090.14 (PROFIBUS), 8890.14 (PROFInet)

P2251 = … PID mode
0: PID as setpoint (default)
1: PID as trim source
P2253 = … PID setpoint
possible sources: 755.0 (Analog input 0), 2224 (Act. fixed PID setpoint), 2250 (Output setpoint
of PID-MOP)
P2254 = … PID trim source
of PID-MOP)
P2255 = … PID setpoint gain factor
0 … 100, default 100
Frequency converter
7.3 PID Controller

P2256 = … PID trim gain factor
0 … 100, default 100
P2257 = … Ramp-up time for PID setpoint
0 … 650 s , default 1 s
P2258 = … Ramp-down time for PID setpoint
0 … 650 s, default 1 s
P2263 = … PID controller type
0: D component on feedback signal (default)
1: D component on error signal
P2264 = … PID feedback
of PID-MOP)
P2265 = … PID feedback filter timeconstant
P2267 = … Max. value for PID feedback
-200 … 200 %, default 100 %
P2268 = … Min. value for PID feedback
-200 … 200 %, default 100 %
P2269 = … Gain applied to PID feedback
0 … 500 %, default 100 %
P2270 = … PID feedback function selector
1: Square root
2: Square
3: Cube
P2271 = … PID transducer type
1: Inversion of PID feedback signal
P2274 = … PID derivative time
P2280 = … PID proportional gain
0 … 65, default 3
P2285 = … PID integral time
P2291 = … PID output upper limit
-200 … 200 %, default 100 %
P2292 = … PID output lower limit
-200 … 200 %, default 0 %
P2293 = … Ramp-up/-down time of PID limit
P2295 = … Gain applied to PID output
-100 … 100 %, default 100 %
P2350 = … PID autotune enable
0: PID autotuning disabled (default)
1: PID autotuning via Ziegler Nichols (ZN) standard
2: PID autotuning as 1 plus some overshoot (O/S)
3: PID autotuning as 2 little or no overshoot (O/S)
4: PID autotuning PI only, quarter damped response
Frequency converter
7.3 PID Controller

P2354 = … PID tuning timeout length
60 … 65000 s, default 240 s
P2355 = … PID tuning offset
Output value
r2224 Act. fixed PID setpoint

r2225 PID Fixed frequency status
r2250 Output setpoint of PID-MOP
r2260 PID setpoint after PID-RFG
P2261 PID setpoint filter timeconstant
r2262 Filtered PID setp. after RFG
r2266 PID filtered feedback
r2272 PID scaled feedback
r2273 PID error
r2294 Act. PID output
Example
Permanent PID controller should fulfill the following secondary conditions:
● PID controller enabled and
● PID setpoint input via PID fixed frequencies and
● PID actual value via the analog input.
Table 7- 7 Parameterization
Permanent PID controller enabled P2200 = 1.0

Setpoint input via PID-FF P2253 = 2224
Actual value input via analog input AI P2264 = 755
Setpoint input via PID P2251 = 0
The additional setpoint is added to the main setpoint (PID-SUM) and the sum is fed to the
setpoint-actual value summation point through the PID ramp-function generator (PID-RFG).
The source of the supplementary setpoint (BICO parameter P2254), the ramp-up/ramp-down
times of the PID ramp-function generator (P2257, P2258) as well as the filter time (P2261)
can be adapted to the particular application by appropriately parametrizing the
corresponding parameters.
Similar to the PID setpoint branch, the actual value branch of the technological controller has
a filter (PID-PT1) which can be set using parameter P2265. In addition to the smoothing, the
actual value can be modified using a scaling unit (PID-SCL).
The technology controller can be parameterized as either P, I, PI or PID controller using
parameters P2280, P2285 or P2274.
Frequency converter
7.3 PID Controller
3
3
3 3 3
.S 7Q \
3,' G
VHWSRLQW [ 0RWRU
GW
FRQWURO

U
3 U U
3,'
3
IHHGEDFN
U
3
Figure 7-10 PID controller
For specific applications, the PID output quantity can be limited to defined values. This can
be achieved using the fixed limits - P2291 and P2292. In order to prevent the PID controller
output exercising large steps at power-on, these PID output limits are ramped-up with ramp
time P2293 from 0 to the corresponding value P2291 (upper limit for the PID output) and
P2292 (lower limit for the PID output). As soon as these limits have been reached, the
dynamic response of the PID controller is no longer limited by this ramp-up/ramp-down time
(P2293).
Frequency converter
7.3 PID Controller
7.3.1 PID dancer roll control
Data
Parameter range: P1070, P1075, P1120, P1121, P2200,

P2251 … P2285
Warnings: -
Fault: -
Description
For various continuous production processes, for example, in the paper and pulp industry or
in the manufacture of cables, it is necessary to control (closed-loop) the velocity of stations
along the production process to ensure the continuous material web is not subject to any
unwanted tension levels. It is important that no folds or creases are formed. For applications
such as these, it is practical to provide a type of material buffer in the form of a loop with a
defined tension. This provides a de-coupling between the individual inverter locations. This
loop represents the difference between the material fed-in and that fed-out and therefore
indicates the process quality.
Using the PID dancer roll control, with inverter it is possible to ensure that continuous
material webs have a constant tension.
Y Y
$SSOLFDWLRQ
[
680 0RWRU
Y $)0 5)*
VHWSRLQW FRQWURO
6WUXFWXUH
3,' 3,' 3,'

[ 3,'
VHWSRLQW 5)* OLPLW

3,'
[
IHHGEDFN
Figure 7-11 PID dancer roll control
The velocity v1 is assumed to be an independent disturbance; the input velocity v2 should be

controlled using motor rolls A2 so that the length x2 of the loop corresponds, as far as
possible, to the setpoint.
Note
When selecting the closed-loop dancer roll control it should be noted that neither PID-MOP
nor PID-FF should be used - but instead the MOP (motorized potentiometer) or the FF (fixed
frequencies).
Frequency converter
7.3 PID Controller
The structure and important parameters for the PID dancer roll control are shown below.
3
3
3
023
3 680 $)0 5)*
$,
3
3
3
3
3
3
)) 0RWRU
3,' 3,' 3,' 3,' FRQWURO
866RQ 3 680 5)* 37
56 B
3,'2XWSXW
3
3
Δ3,'
866RQ
56
3,' 3,'
)LHOGEXV 3
37 6&/ 3

3 3
$, 3
Figure 7-12 Structure of the closed-loop PID dancer roll control
Frequency converter
7.3 PID Controller
Input values

P1070 = … Main setpoint
1024: Fixed setpoint (FF)
1050: MOP
755.0: Analog input 0
2015.1: USS on RS232
2018.1: USS on RS485
2050.1: Fieldbus (default)
P1074 = … Disable additional setpoint
possible sources: P755.x (Digital input)
P1120 = … Ramp-up time
0 … 650 s, default 10 s
0 … 650 s, default 10 s
P2200 = … Enable PID controller
1: PID controller always active
722.x: Digital input x
P2251 = … PID mode
0: PID as setpoint (default)
1: PID as trim
P2253 = … PID setpoint
possible sources: P755.0 (Analog input 0) / r2224 (Fixed setpoint) / r2250 (active setpoint)
P2254 = … PID trim source
P2264 = … PID feedback

P2255 = … PID setpoint gain factor
0 … 100, default 100
P2256 = … PID trim gain factor
0 … 100, default 100
P2265 = … PID feedback filter timeconstant
P2271 = … PID transducer type
1: Inversion of PID feedback signal
P2280 = … PID proportional gain
0 … 65, default 3
P2285 = … PID integral time
Frequency converter
7.3 PID Controller
Output value

r2260 CO: PID setpoint after PID-RFG
P2261 PID setpoint filter timeconstant
r2262 CO: Filtered PID setp. after RFG
r2266 CO: PID filtered feedback
r2272 CO: PID scaled feedback
r2273 CO: PID error
Additional parameters regarding the PID controller function

P2257 = … Ramp-up time for PID setpoint
P2258 = … Ramp-down time for PID setpoint
P2263 = … PID controller type
0: D component on feedback signal (default)
1: D component on error signal
P2267 = … Max. value for PID feedback
-200 … 200 %, default 100 %
P2268 = … Min. value for PID feedback
-200 … 200 %, default 100 %
P2269 = … Gain applied to PID feedback
0 … 500 %, default 100 %
P2270 = … PID feedback function selector
1: Square root
2: Square
3: Cube
P2274 = … PID derivative time
Frequency converter
7.3 PID Controller
7.3.2 PID Motorized Potentiometer
Data

Warnings: -
Faults: -
Description
The PID controller has a PID motorized potentiometer (PID-MOP) which can be separately
adjusted. Its functionality is identical with the motorized potentiometer, whereby the
PID parameters are set in the range from P2231 … r2250.
Table 7- 10 Correspondence between the parameters
PID motorized potentiometer Motorized potentiometer

P2231 PID-MOP mode P1031 MOP mode
P2232 Inhibit rev. direct. of PID-MOP P1032 Inhibit reverse direction of MOP
P2235 Enable PID-MOP (UP-cmd) P1035 Enable MOP (UP-command)
P2236 Enable PID-MOP (DOWN-cmd) P1036 Enable MOP (DOWN-command)
P2240 Setpoint of PID-MOP P1040 Setpoint of the MOP
P2241 PID-MOP select set point P1041 MOP select set point
automatically/manually automatically/manually
P2242 PID-MOP auto setpoint P1042 MOP auto setpoint
P2243 BI: PID-MOP accept ramp generator P1043 MOP accept ramp generator setpoint
setpoint
P2244 PID-MOP ramp generator setpoint P1044 MOP ramp generator setpoint
P2247 PID-MOP ramp up time (acceleration P1047 MOP ramp up time (acceleration
time) of the rfg time) of the rfg
P2248 PID-MOP ramp down time P1048 MOP ramp down time (acceleration
(acceleration time) of the rfg time) of the rfg
r2245 PID-MOP input frequency of the r1045 MOP input frequency of the ramp
ramp generator generator
r2250 Output setpoint of PID-MOP r1050 Act. Output freq. of the MOP
Frequency converter
7.3 PID Controller
Note
Differences between MOP and PID-MOP:
The MOP setpoint is given as a frequency value (default 5 Hz), the PID MOP setpoint as a
percentage of the reference parameters P2000 … P2004 (default 10 %).
The MOP command source can be changed via P0700. The PID-MOP can only be changed
via BICO signals.
Examples
Table 7- 11 PID-MOP setpoint sources
Function Source
Option port, e.g. BOP PROFIBUS Digital inputs
P2235 Enable PID-MOP UP = 19.13 = r2090.13 = 722.4 (DI4)
P2236 Enable PID-MOP DOWN = 19.14 = r2090.14 = 722.5 (DI5)
See also
Motorized Potentiometer (MOP) (Page 34)
7.3.3 Setpoint via PID Fixed Frequencies
Data

Warnings: -
Faults : -
Description
The functionality of the PID fixed frequencies is identical with the function "setpoint via fixed
frequencies".
The use of the Fixed Frequencies and PID Fixed Frequency at the same time is not possible.
Frequency converter
7.3 PID Controller
Table 7- 12 Correspondence between the parameters
PID fixed frequencies Fixed frequencies

P2201 - Fixed PID setpoint 1 - 15 P1001 - Fixed frequency 1 - 15
P2215 P1015
P2216 Fixed PID setpoint mode P1016 Fixed frequency mode
P2220 Fixed PID setp. select Bit 0 P1020 Fixed freq. Selection Bit 0
r2224 Act. fixed PID setpoint r1024 Actual fixed frequency
r2225 PID Fixed frequency status r1025 Fixed frequency status
Input values

P2201 - Fixed PID setpoint 1 - 15
P2215 = … -200 … 200 Hz: Defines Fixed PID setpoint 1 - 15 (0% = default)
P2216 = … Fixed PID setpoint mode
1 direct selection (default) 2 binary selection
P2220 = … Fixed PID setp. select Bit 0
(722.3 = default)
(722.4 = default)
(722.5 = default)
(722.6 = default)
Output value

r2224 Act. fixed PID setpoint
P1016 = 0: Sum of selected fixed frequencies
P1016 = 1: Fixed frequency of binary-coded value
r2225 PID Fixed frequency status
0 = no fixed frequency selected
1 = at least one fixed frequency selected
Frequency converter
7.3 PID Controller
Example direct selection
Table 7- 14 Direct selection (P2216 = 1) using digital inputs

PID-FF0 0 Hz 0 0 0 0
PID-FF1 P2201 0 0 0 1
PID-FF2 P2202 0 0 1 0
PID-FF3 P2203 0 1 0 0
PID-FF4 P2204 1 0 0 0
PID-(FF1+FF2) 0 0 1 1
PID-(FF1+FF2+FF3) 0 1 1 1
PID-(FF1+FF2+FF3+FF4) 1 1 1 1
P2216 = 1
P2220
DI3 r0722 722:3
P0704 = 15 or P0704 = 99
1
...
r2225
...
...
0 +
r2224
P2201
...
Figure 7-13 Directly selected PID fixed setpoint using DI3
Example binary selection
Table 7- 15 Binary selection (P2216 = 2) using digital inputs

PID-FF0 0 Hz 0 0 0 0
PID-FF1 P2201 0 0 0 1
PID-FF2 P2202 0 0 1 0
… … … … … …
PID-FF14 P2214 1 1 1 0
PID-FF15 P2215 1 1 1 1
Frequency converter
7.4 Digital inputs (DI)
Data
Quantity: 6 … 9 + 2 (depends on CU variant)

Parameter range: P0701 … P0712, P0713
r0720 … P0724
Features:
 cycle time: 2 ms
 switch-on threshold: ≥ 15 V
 switch-off threshold: ≤5V
 electrical features: G120: electrically isolated, short-circuit proof
Description
External control signals are required for an inverter to be able to operate autonomously.
These signals can be entered using a serial interface as well as using digital inputs (see
figure below). The SINAMICS G120 has depending on CU variant up to 9 digital inputs which
can be expanded by using the 2 analog inputs. The digital inputs can be freely programmed
to create a function. Regarding the programming, it is possible to directly assign the function
using parameters P0701 … P0713 or to freely program the function using BICO technology.
',FKDQQHOHJ',
3
3
'HERXQFHWLPH',

3
)XQFWLRQ
9 7
U 3[[[[%,
U
&2%2%LQLQSYDO
9
Figure 7-14 Digital inputs
The number of available digital inputs is displayed in parameter r0720. The logical states of
the digital inputs can be de-bounced using P0724 and read-out using parameter r0722
(BICO monitoring parameter). Further, this parameter is used for BICO parameterization of
the digital inputs (refer to BICO parameterization in the following section).
Frequency converter
Digital inputs and analog inputs used as digital inputs

Following digital inputs are available:
 CU240S and CU240S DP: DP P0701 … P0709,

P0712, P0713 analog inputs used as digital inputs
 CU240S DP-F: DP P0701 … P0706,
P0712, P0713 analog inputs used as digital inputs
To use P0712 or P0713 as analog input set the parameter value = 0. To use it as digital
input, set the parameter according the commands listed in the following table.
Table 7- 16 Possible settings of the digital inputs and analog inputs used as digital inputs
Parameter Significance
Value
0 Digital input disabled
1 ON/OFF1
2 ON_REV/OFF1
3 OFF2 – coast to standstill
4 OFF3 – quick ramp-down
9 Fault acknowledge
10 JOG right
11 JOG left
12 Reverse
13 MOP up (increase frequency)
14 MOP down (decrease frequency)
15 Fixed frequency selector Bit 0
25 Enable DC braking
27 Enable PID
29 External trip
33 Disable additional frequency setpoint
99 Enable BICO parameterization
Frequency converter
Example
An ON/OFF1 command is to be accomplished using digital input DI0.
● P0700 = 2 Control enabled using the terminal strip (digital inputs)
● P0701 = 1 ON/OFF1 using digital input 0 (DI0).
Note
If an analog input has been configured as a digital input, the following limit values apply:
 Voltage > 4 V = logical 1
 Voltage < 1.6 V = logical 0
BICO parameterization
If the setting 99 (BICO) is entered into parameters P0701 … P07013, then the BICO wiring is
enabled for the appropriate digital input. The output parameter number of the function (the
parameter, included in the parameter text BO) should be entered into the command source
(the parameter which contains the code BI in the parameter text).
Example
A relay is to be controlled directly using DI0.
● P0700 = 2 Control enabled using digital inputs
● P0701 = 99 Enable BICO parameterization on DI0
● P0731[0] = 722.0 Relay 1 controlled directly.
This can be useful when the normal relay functions and digital inputs are not required so the
user can use them for their own purposes.
Note
Only experienced users should use the BICO parameterization and for applications where
the possibilities provided by P0701 … P07013 are no longer adequate.
If P0701 … P07013 are set to 99, then the command source can only be changed by the use
of P0700. For example, changing P0701 from 99 to 1 will not change the command source
or alter the existing BICO settings.
Frequency converter
7.5 Digital outputs (DO)
Data
Quantity: 3
Parameter range: r0730 … P0748
Features:
Description
Three output relays are provided which can be programmed to indicate a variety of states of
the inverter, such as faults, warnings, current limit conditions, etc.
Some of the more popular settings are pre-selected (see table below), but others can be
allocated using the BICO internal connection feature.
Relay:
max. opening/closing time: 5/10 ms
voltage/current 30 V DC/0.5 A maximum
,QYHUW'2V
3 &2%26WDWH'2V
U
%,)FWRI'2 U
3>@

&20

12
,QYHUW'2V
&2%26WDWH'2V 1&
3
U
%,)FWRI'2 U
3>@

&20
12
,QYHUW'2V
3 &2%26WDWH'2V
U
%,)FWRI'2 U
3>@

&20

12

1&

Figure 7-15 Digital outputs
Frequency converter
The states, which are to be output, are defined using the "BI" parameters P0731 (digital
output 0), P0732 (digital output 1) and P0733 (digital output 2). For the definition, the "BO"
parameter number or "CO/BO" parameter number and the bit number of the particular state
should be entered into P0731 … P0733. Frequently used states including the parameter
number and bit are shown in the table below.
Table 7- 17 Parameters P0731 to P0733 (frequently used functions/states)
Parameter value Significance

52.0 Drive ready
52.1 Drive ready to run
52.2 Drive running
52.3 Drive fault active
52.4 OFF2 active
52.5 OFF3 active
52.6 ON inhibit active
52.7 Drive warning active
52.8 Deviation, setpoint/actual value
52.9 PZD control
52.10 f_act >= P1082 (f_max)
52.11 Warning: Motor current limit
52.12 Brake active
52.13 Motor overload
52.14 Motor runs right
52.15 Inverter overload
53.0 DC brake active
53.1 f_act < P2167 (f_off)
53.2 f_act > P1080 (f_min)
53.3 Actual current r0027 ≥ P2170
53.6 f_act ≥ setpoint (f_set)
Note
On the OP the bit numbers are displayed in hex-format (0..9, A..F).
For complete list of all of the binary status parameters (refer to "CO/BO" parameters) in the
Parameter Manual.
Frequency converter
7.6 Analog inputs (A/D converter)
Data
Quantity: 2
Features:
 resolution: 10 bits
 accuracy: 1 % referred to 10 V / 20 mA
 electrical features: incorrect polarity protection, short-circuit proof
Description
Analog setpoints, actual values and control signals are read into the inverter using the
appropriate analog inputs and are converted into digital signals or values using the A/D
converter.
The setting as to whether the analog input is a voltage input (10 V) or a current input (20 mA)
must be selected via P0756 and via the DIP switches on the housing of the Control Unit. For
failure-free operation, the DIP switches and the P0756 must be set. For details, refer to the
Operating Instructions of your inverter.
Note
The bipolar voltage input is only possible with analog input 0 (AI0).
Depending on the AI type or source, the appropriate connection must be made. Using, as an
example, the internal 10 V voltage source, a connection is shown in the figure below.
9 9
9 9
$, P$ $,

!N˖ $ $
$, $,
' '
$, $,
$ $
$, $,
' '
Figure 7-16 Example of a connection for AI voltage and current input
Frequency converter
The AI channel has several function units (filter, scaling, dead zone, see figure below).
3
3
3
3
U 3
',3VZLWFK 3 3 3
)XQFWLRQ
./
$, $, $ $, $, $,
VFDOLQJ GHDG]RQH U 3[[[[
./ W\SH ' W\SH
$,
U
U
U;
Figure 7-17 AI channel
Note
When the filter time constant P0753 (AI-PT1) is increased, this smooths the AI input signal
therefore reducing the ripple. When this function is used within a control loop, this smoothing
has a negative impact on the control behavior and immunity to noise (the dynamic
performance deteriorates).
Note
The analog inputs can be used as digital inputs with the switching thresholds: high > 4 V,
low < 1.6 V. Setting P0712 and P0713 > 0 assign digital input functions to the analog inputs.
The following figure shows a connecting example:
9
&8
9
$,
$
$,
'
$,
$
$,
'
Frequency converter
7.7 Analog outputs (D/A converter)
Data
Quantity: 2
Parameter range: r0770 … P0785
Features:
 resolution: 12 bit
 accuracy: 1 % referred to 20 mA
Description
Two analog outputs are provided which can be programmed to indicate a variety of
variables. Some of the more popular settings are pre-selected (see table below), but others
(BICO outputs) can be allocated using the BICO internal connection feature.
Table 7- 18 Pre-set analog outputs
r0020 CO: Frequency setpoint before RFG
r0021 CO: Actual filtered frequency
r0024 CO: Actual filtered output frequency
r0025 CO: Actual filtered output voltage
r0026 CO: Actual filtered DC-link voltage
r0027 CO: Actual filtered output current
… …
r0052 CO/BO: Actual status word 1
r0053 CO/BO: Actual status word 2
r0054 CO/BO: Actual control word 1
… …
Frequency converter
In order to adapt the signal, the D/A converter channel has several function units (filter,
scaling, dead zone) which can be used to modify the digital signal before conversion (see
figure below).
3
3
3
3
U
3 3
3
P$
$2 $2 '
)XQFWLRQ U[[[[ 3 $2
VFDOLQJ GHDG]RQH
$ $2
1 U
0 U
Figure 7-18 D/A converter channel
Note
The analog output 0 (AO0) can be changed-over from current output (P0776 = 0) to voltage
output (P0776 = 1).
The analog output 1 (AO1) only provide current output (0 … 20 mA). The 0 … 10 V voltage
signal can be generated by connecting a 500 Ω resistor across the outputs. The voltage drop
across the resistor can be read using parameter r0774 if the parameter P0776 is changed-
over from current output (P0776 = 0) to voltage output (P0776 = 1). The D/A scaling
parameters P0778, P0780 and the D/A converter dead zone must still be entered in mA (0
… 20 mA).
With setting parameter P0775 = 1 it is possible to detect negative values on the input side of
the D/A converter channel. If enabled, this parameter will take the absolute value of the
value to be outputed (the AO-linear characteristic is mirrored on the y axis). If the value was
originally negative then the corresponding bit in r0785 is set.
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions 8
8.1 Overview of the fail-safe functions
Overview
WARNING
Installation and protection level of frequency inverters in fail-safe systems
All installation areas for frequency inverters with fail-safe functions as well as outside
installed components of the according fail-safe system, if correctly installed, must comply
with the minimum protection level of IP54 [see EN 60529 (IEC 60529)].
Change of frequency inverters with fail-safe functions
When carrying out a swap of frequency inverters, it is not allowed to replace a frequency
inverter with fail-safe functions with a Standard frequency inverter. Replacing a frequency
inverter with fail-safe functions with a Standard frequency inverter disables all fail-safe
functions that have been implemented and therefore can lead to personal injury and
damage to the machine. A replacement of fail-safe components with standard components
has to be considered as a completely new application and re-commissioned as such.
Dimensioning of the Motor
If regenerative loads occur in the application, the motor must be dimensioned so that its slip
in super-synchronous operation always remains below the rated slip.
Dimensioning of the Motor holding brake
The motor holding brake must be dimensioned that in case of a fault the complete drive can
be braked to zero from any possible operational speed. If no holding brake is present, the
machine manufacturer must adopt other suitable measures of protection against motion
after the power to the motor has been cut (e.g. to protect against sagging loads).
Regenerative load with SLS
With the fail-safe functions "safely limited speed" (SLS) and "safe stop 1" (SS1) operation
with permanent regenerative loads is not permitted.
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
Note
In order to verify the parameters for the fail-safe functions, an acceptance test must always
be carried-out after commissioning, reset and also when changing a completely backed-up
data set of the parameters for the fail-safe functions. This acceptance test must be
appropriately logged and documented. For more details refer to section "Acceptance Test
and Acceptance Log" in the Operating Instructions.
The frequency inverter with fail-safe functions has specific fail-safe functions integrated into
its system. These are:
● Safe Torque Off (STO)
● Safe Stop 1 (SS1)
● Safely limited Speed (SLS)
● Safe Brake Control (SBC) (only CU240S DP-F)
Fail-safe functions are only available on the following components:
● SINAMICS G120 with
– CU240S DP-F
– CU240S PN-F
● SINAMICS G120D with CU240D DP-F
On standard inverters fail-safe features are not available.
The parameters for fail-safe functions are held on two separate processors within the
frequency inverter. Each processor holds a unique copy of the parameterized fail-safe
function.
These unique copies of the fail-safe parameters are accomplished by double-parameters.
Double-parameters have their own unique number, but have identical functionality.
Each processor controls one separate and isolated control mechanism which is continually
monitored by the system to ensure it is operating correctly. Should a discrepancy occur, then
the passivatied STO is activated.
Note
PROFIsafe via PROFInet
When using fail-safe functions with a CU240S PN-F or a CU240D PN-F see also:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/25412441
See also
Excel tool (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/21627074)
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
8.1.1 Permissible applications for the fail-safe functions
Restrictions when using fail-safe functions

The fail-safe function "Safe torque off" (STO) and "Safe brake control" SBC can be used
without restriction for all applications.
The fail-safe functions "Safe stop 1" (SS1) and "Safely limited speed" (SLS) are permissible
for all applications where there can be no acceleration of the load after the frequency inverter
has been shut down.
The fail-safe, drive-autonomous inverter functions

With its integrated, drive-autonomous fail-safe functions, the inverter is also ideal for use in
applications with increased safety requirements corresponding to SIL2 in accordance with
IEC 61508 and Cat.3 pursuant to EN 954-1:
● Safely limited speed:
The frequency inverter monitors whether a set ouptut frequency limit value is exceeded,
without additional external components
● Safe Stop 1:
The frequency inverter reduces the ouptut frequency using a braking ramp until it reaches
a standstill, and continually monitors this braking process without additional external
components
● Safe torque off:
The frequency inverter switches the motor to a torque-free state.
Prerequisites for using fail-safe functions

For each machine, a risk assessment must have been carried out (e.g., in accordance with
EN ISO 1050, "Safety of machinery – Principles for risk assessment"). This risk assessment
provides both the functional requirements for safety-related controls and the required
classification, e.g., in accordance with SIL (Safety Integrity Level).
In order to make use of the frequency inverter’s fail-safe functions the closed-loop control
must work perfectly. The drive (drive = inverter + motor + brake + driven machine) must be
set up in such a way that all operations of the driven machine are properly controlled and the
inverter remains below its limit values (for current, temperature, voltage, etc.). The inverter’s
power and parameter settings must be suited to both the connected motor and to the
application.
When the system has been successfully commissioned, it is necessary to check the typical
operating conditions and those related to the limit values, in the form of an acceptance test.
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
Types of closed-loop control

Assuming that the above prerequisites are met, all fail-safe functions ("Safe torque off",
"Safe stop 1" and "Safely limited speed") are permissible and certified for V/f control and
vector control.
Applications with safe evaluation of the inverter feedback

In applications where safe machine functions may only be carried out if the ouptut frequency
is below a certain threshold value, it is essential that the feedback from the inverter be
evaluated accurately. An example of this kind of application would be bolting a protective
door in a drive that is still spinning.
The frequency inverter does not have any safe output signals. However, on a safe PLC, for
example, the inverter feedback can still be safely evaluated with reference to the following
inverter signals:
● Evaluation of the inverter operating state as required by the SS1 function.
Once requested, the SS1 function requires the inverter to feed back an STO function at
the end of the ramp time for SS1. If this does not occur, it must be assumed that the drive
has not come to a standstill.
● Evaluation of the inverter operating state as required by the SLS function mode 1
Once requested, the SLS function mode 1, requires the inverter to report that the reduced
speed has been reached at the end of the SS1 ramp time. If this does not occur, it must
be assumed that the drive has not reached the reduced speed.
● Evaluation of inverter fault messages
Additionally, the fail-safe function inverter faults and standard function inverter faults
(r0052, bit03/r9772, bit08) should always be evaluated. No faults are expected to occur
during a safe function, but if a fault is signaled, it must be assumed that the fail-safe
function has malfunctioned.
Tolerances and reaction times

Frequency monitoring is carried out with 15 % tolerance because fail-safe functions SS1 and
SLS are executed without an encoder.
The minimum frequency for reliable processing is 1 Hz.
The typical device-internal reaction time to the activation of a fail-safe functions can be taken
as follows:
SINAMICS G120, CU240S DP-F:
● Typical reaction time to a digital signal: 20 ms + P9650 (debounce time) + P9651 (filter
time)
● Typical reaction time after receiving a PROFIsafe telegram: 20 ms
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
For the total reaction time within the system or machine, the following must be taken into
account alongside the time stated above:
● The time taken to detect a signal (depending on the sensor being used)
● The time taken to process the signal (depending on the CPU being used, if one is
required, and its program scope)
● If necessary, the time taken to transfer the signal via PROFIsafe (depending on the bus
system being used, the number and type of bus nodes, and the baud rate)
An Excel tool helps with estimating this reaction time.
The fault reaction times of the internal monitoring of functions SS1 and SLS depend on the
currently applicable output frequency of the inverter. For details, please refer to the
Operating Manual.
These minimum tolerance and reaction times should be taken into account when configuring
the system, e.g., in the layout of the safety clearances for the components.
Connecting a mechanical brake

Connecting a mechanical brake is recommended in the case of applications with functions
SS1 and SLS modes 0 and 1, where dangerous states can occur as a result of external
events such as a power failure. In the event of a fault, the inverter controls its brake directly,
thereby reducing the risk of undefined machine states.
8.1.2 Application examples for fail-safe functions
Permissible applications
Permissible speed characteristic after the inverter has been shut down
IDFW
LQLWLDWLRQRI2))
Figure 8-1 Application of all safety functions permissible
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
Forbidden applications
This is particularly pertinent to applications with overhauling loads. With an overhauling load,
the friction torque of the mechanical components (motor, gearbox, etc.) is not enough to
prevent the mechanical system from accelerating when the drive is switched off (see Figs.
below).
IDFW
LQLWLDWLRQRI2))
W
Figure 8-2 Overhauling load – not all safety functions are permissible
IDFW
LQLWLDWLRQRI2))
Figure 8-3 Overhauling load – not all safety functions are permissible
Examples of overhauling loads

These are:
● hoisting gears (due to gravitation) and
● winders (due to a second drive).
WARNING
Fail-safe functions SS1 and SLS must not be used:

 with overhauling loads
 in conjunction with torque control.
Fail-safe function inverter faults F0396 … F0399 can be masked if standard function
inverter faults exist. In this case, an acceptance test with a full load should be carried
out.
Regenerative operation of the motors (which can occur in the case of, braking with function
SS1 for example) is permitted if there is no overhauling load.
There are no restrictions for the STO and SBC function. Of course, for risk assessment and
machine design purposes, it should be remembered that an overhauling load can only be
stopped by means of a suitable brake when the motor has been switched to a torque-free
state.
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
8.1.3 Dependency of Failsafe and OFF commands
Overview
A fail-safe function can be intercepted by OFF command or by another failsafe command.
The following table gives an overview how the commands are prioritized.
)LUVWDFWLYH)DLOVDIHRU2))FFRPPDQG
3DVVLYDWHG672
UDPS
6/60RGH
6/60RGH
6/60RGH
6/60RGH
6/60RGH
2))
2))
2))
672
66
3DVVLYDWHG672 ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ;
,QWHUUXSWDEOHE\IROORZLQJ)DLOVDIHRU2))FRPPDQG
672 ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ;
66 ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ;
6/60RGH 0 0 0
6/60RGH 0 0 0
6/60RGH 0 0 0
6/60RGH 0 0 0
2)) 0 S672 0 0 0
2)) 0 0 S672 0 0 0 ; ;
2)) 0 S672 0 0 0 ;
Figure 8-4 Fail-safe commands, interrupted by an OFF command or another fail-safe command
Explanation to the table:

0 0 means the safety monitoring is still active, even if an OFF command is given. That
means, if the speed raises due to any reason above the SLS monitoring a passivated STO
will be activated.
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
8.2 Monitoring the fail-safe functions
Overview
There are three monitoring procedures:
● Time controlled request for forced dynamization
● Forced dynamization
● Process dynamization
The dynamization process is designed to detect hidden software and hardware faults of the
two shutdown paths. The forced dynamization consists of a processor self-test of both
processores within the inverter (standard processor and fail-safe processor) and a hardware
test. The hardware test includes a test to ensure, that if parameterised, the Safe Brake
Control is functioning correctly.
Time controlled request for forced dynamization

In fail-safe applications it is necessary to initiate a safe torque off with forced dynamization at
regular intervals. The intervall has to be set via P9659, minimum is once a year.
When the time, set in P9659 (hours or fractions of hours), has expired, a warning A1699 is
issued by the system. This warning can only be cleared by carrying out forced dynamization.
If the forced dynamization was successful, the timer is reset to the value in P9659 and the
inverter is ready to run. If the forced dynamization fails, the timer remains at 0 and the
inverter is disabled from running.
The time remaining until the next forced dynamization becomes necessary is displayed in
r9660.
At each successful forced dynamization r9660 is reset to the value of P9659.
Forced dynamization
The forced dynamization process delays the switch-on process, but ensures that all fail-safe
features of the inverter are functioning correctly. It is enabled per default and can be
changed via P9601.1 / P9801.1 (1 = enabled, 0 = disabled).
The forced dynamization process is automatically initiated at the following events,
independent from the settings of P9601 and P9801:
● On power-up of the inverter.
● When the passivated Safe Torque Off (passivated STO) function is deactivated
● When commissioning of fail-safe functions is left.
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
Should the delay be unacceptable for the user application, it can be disabled via
P9601/P9801 for the following events:
● When the Safe Torque Off (STO) is left
● When Safe Stop 1 (SS1) is left after STO was reached
CAUTION
When carrying-out the forced dynamization, the shutdown paths of the motor brake are
also tested. This results in a brief opening command (2 ms to 28 ms) at the motor brake.
The mechanical part of the EM brake generally requires longer than 30 ms to open. This
means that this dynamic operation generally has no influence on the motor shaft itself.
WARNING
The customer is responsible to use only EM brakes with opening times longer than
30 ms.
Process dynamization
The process dynamization is always carried out at STO initialisation or SS1 end. The test
includes both shutdown paths and the EM-brake switching circuit but does not perform a
processor self-test or a complete test of the Safe Brake Control.
WARNING
Dynamization of the shutdown paths
For safety reasons, it is necessary to initiate a forced dynamization procedure at intervals of
maximal 8760 hours (one year) in order to check its operability. Thus, 8760 hours after the
last activation of the forced dynamization the inverter sets a status bit that specifies this
requirement.
The process control must then initiate a forced dynamization at the next opportunity, for
example, when the drive has in any case a short phase with zero speed. The setting and
clearing of the status bit and the dynamization must be logged as process data by the
higher-level control.
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
8.3 Limiting values for SS1 and SLS
Maximum fault reaction time

The maximum fault reaction time during active safe braking ramp (used in SS1 and SLS) is
given as delay from crossing the parameterized envelope until triggering a passivated STO.
2XWSXW
IUHTXHQF\
SDVVLYDWHG672OLPLW
)UHTXHQF\
VHWSRLQW
HQYHORSH
HQYHORSH IDXOWUHDFWLRQ
GHOD\ WLPH
˂WHQYHORSH ˂WUHDFWWLPH
W
Figure 8-5 Maximum shut-down time
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
Description
When parameterizing the limiting envelope for SLS and SS1 with P9680/P9880 and
P9691/P9891 the following minimum tolerances should be considered to provide maximum
robustness of the drive:
I ˂)
˂)VOLS
)PD[
˂)KLJK
˂)
)PD[ 3
P
HQYHORSH
)WRO
33
˂)VOLS
˂)
P' 6/6
P' 66
˂)ORZ
˂)
)PLQ6/6
33
)PLQ66
33
Figure 8-6 Safety limits for SLS and SS1
1. The minimum monitoring speed tolerance P9691 should be set to

P9691 ≥ 1.15 ∙ P9690 + ∆Fslip
thus defining the minimum frequency tolerance as
∆F = P9691 - P9690 - ∆Fslip
where ∆Fslip is given as ∆Fslip = r0330∙ P0310/100%
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
This prevents sporadic trips caused by measurement inaccuracies and additional slip
compensation. Note that according to the above formula, P9691 must be set, even if SLS
is not parameterized.
2. The resulting frequency tolerance ∆Fhigh due to the minimum frequency tolerance at high
frequencies is then given as
∆Fhigh ≥ 0.15 ∙ Fmax - ∆F
where Fmax defines the maximum process frequency at initiation of SLS or SS1.
3. The resulting frequency tolerance ∆ Flow due to the minimum frequency tolerance at low
frequencies is then given as
˂)ORZ싩 P ˂)
'
where the gradient m is defined as

P
3

The denominator D in the above formula is calculated as follows:
SLS parameterized D = 2 ∙ P9690

SS1 parameterized D = 2 ∙ P9682
SLS and SS1 parameterized D = 2 ∙ min [P9682, P9690]
1. The valid delay ∆Fdelay is then given as maximum of
∆Fdelay = max [∆Flow, ∆Fhigh]
2. Finally the minimum braking ramp delay can be calculated as

˂)GHOD\
3싩
P
The safe frequency envelope results from a time delay (P9680) in t-direction and an
additional frequency tolerance ∆F (caused by measurement inaccuracies) and ∆Fslip (caused
by slip compensation) in F-direction.
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
Example of how to calculate the limit values for SS1 and SLS
The following example illustrates how the fail-safe formulae are calculated for the 1LA7060-
4AB10-Z motor and for the fail-safe parameter factory settings. The motor technical data and
values for calculating the necessary fail-safe parameters are given in the tables below.
Table 8- 1 Technical data
Parameter Parameter text Value

P0300 Select motor type 1 (induction motor)
P0304 Rated motor voltage 230/400 V ∆/Y
P0305 Rated motor current 0.73/0.42 A
P0307 Rated motor power 0.12 kW
P0308 Rated motor cosPhi 0.75
P0310 Rated motor frequency 50 Hz
P0311 Rated motor speed 1350 1/min
r0313 Motor pole pairs 2
Table 8- 2 Fail-safe parameter factory settings
Parameter Parameter text Value

P9681 SI braking ramp; 10 s
Ramp-down time
P9682 SI minimum speed for standstill 5.0 Hz
detection
P9690 SI setpoint for SLS 10.0 Hz
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
● Upper tolerance range for SLS P9691

The slip frequency is calculated as follows:
Fslip = r0330 ∙ P0310
where the rated motor slip r0330 is
– r0330 = (P0310 - P0311 ∙ r0313/60)/P0310 ∙ 100% →
– Fslip = (50 [Hz] - 1350 [rpm] ∙ 2/60)/50 [Hz] ∙ 100% ∙ 50 [Hz] →
Fslip = 5 [Hz] or 10 [%] of 50 [Hz] (P2000 = 50 [Hz])
The upper tolerance range for SLS P9691 is therefore:
P9691 ≥ 1.15 ∙ P9690 + Fslip
or
P9691 ≥ 1.15 ∙ 10 [Hz] + 5 [Hz]
P9691 ≥ 16.5 [Hz]
At this point, parameter P9691 should be selected, e.g.
P9691 = 16.5 [Hz] (or 17 [Hz]).
The minimum frequency tolerance is calculated as follows:
∆F = P9691 - P9690 - Fslip
or
∆F = 16.5 [Hz] - 10 [Hz] - 5 [Hz] = 1.5 [Hz]
● Resulting frequency tolerance ∆Fhigh
The following formula is used to determine the upper frequency tolerance ∆Fhigh:
∆Fhigh ≥ 0.15 ∙ Fmax - ∆F
If, for example, Fmax = 50 [Hz], then:
∆Fhigh ≥ 0.15 ∙ 50 [Hz] - 1.5 [Hz]
∆Fhigh ≥ 6 [Hz]
● Resulting frequency tolerance ∆Flow
The following formula is used to determine the lower frequency tolerance ∆Flow:
∆Flow ≥ m/D - ∆F
The rise m is calculated as follows:
m = 200/P9681 = 200 [Hz]/10 [s] = 20 [Hz/s]
Value D is calculated as follows for each of the items below:
SLS parameterized D = 2 ∙ P9690 = 2 ∙ 10 [Hz] = 20 [Hz]
SS1 parameterized D = 2 ∙ P9682 = 2 ∙ 5 [Hz] = 10 [Hz]
SLS and SS1 parameterized D = 2 ∙ min [P9682, P9690]
D = 2 ∙ min [5 [Hz], 10[Hz]] = 10 [Hz]
Let us consider a situation in which both the SLS and SS1 functions are parameterized.
In this case, the formula for the resulting frequency tolerance ∆Flow is as follows:
∆Flow ≥ m/D - ∆F
∆Flow ≥ 20 [Hz/s]/10 [Hz] - 1.5 [Hz]
∆Flow ≥ 0.5 [Hz]
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
● Delay ∆Fdelay
Please note that ∆Flow and ∆Fhigh are capable of assuming both negative values and a
value of 0. Therefore, it is important to compare ∆Fdelay with 0 and to determine the
maximum value.
The formula is as follows:
∆Fdelay = max [∆Flow, ∆Fhigh, 0] = max [0.5 [Hz], 6 [Hz], 0] = 6 [Hz]
● Minimum delay of braking ramp
The minimum delay of braking ramp is calculated as follows:
P9680 ≥ ∆Fdelay/m
P9680 ≥ 6 [Hz]/20 [Hz/s]
P9680 ≥ 0.3 [s]
Parameter P9680 must be set to 300 [ms].
Thus, the results of our calculations are as follows:
Upper tolerance range P9691 = 16.5 [Hz]
Minimum delay of braking ramp P9680 = 300 [ms]
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
Fault reaction time

A passivated STO is always triggered immediately after the parameterized safe envelope
frequency is exceeded. However, note that the output frequency may deviate (is usually
higher) from the set point frequency due to normal operating states (slip compensation, PID,
etc.) or internal drive faults.
Therefore, as the envelope starting frequency is related to the output frequency the
paramterized envelope may be shifted as shown in the next figure.
I
2XWSXW VKLIWHGHQYHORSH
IUHTXHQF\
PD[LPXPDSSOLFDWLRQUHODWHG
UHDFKDEOHIUHTXHQF\)PD[UHDFKHG
SDVVLYDWHG
672OLPLW
)PD[
)UHTXHQF\
VHWSRLQW
HQYH
HQYHORSH ORSH IDXOWUHDFWLRQ
GHOD\ VKLIW WLPH
˂WHQYHORSH ˂WVKLIW ˂WUHDFWWLPH
W
Figure 8-7 Maximum fault reaction time
The maximum envelope shift corresponds to the fault reaction time ∆treaction time (maximum
passivated STO limit) wich is given as:
) )
ෙWUHDFWLRQWLPH PD[UHDFK PD[
P
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
8.4 Safe Torque Off
8.4 Safe Torque Off
Data

P9603/P9803, bit 04, bit 05 or bit 07 (PROFIsafe)
P9761, P9799/P9899, r9798/r9898, P3900
Warnings A1691, A1692, A1696, A1699
Faults F1600, F1616
Description
Safe Torque Off (STO) is the simplest fail-safe function and its purpose is to safely remove
any torque from the motor. Once the motor is at a standstill, STO triggers a switch-on lock
which prevents the inverter from restarting the motor. Shutting down the triggering pulses of
the Power Module effectively causes the motor to coast down. The mechanical brake is
closed immediately if connected.
If Safe Brake Control is activated, its status is indicated in the following figures via r9772.14:
● r9772.14 = 0 -> brake open
● r9772.14 = 1 -> brake closed
When the STO function is initiated the inverter performs the following actions:
1. The triggering pulses on the Power Module are disabled.
2. The mechanical brake is closed immediately (if connected).
3. The status LED STO starts flashing.
4. The status LED ES is switched on, indicating the end-of-state has been reached.
When the STO signal is removed the inverter performs the following actions:
Note
The pulse-lock must be released by applying a rising edge signal (OFF1/ON).
1. The process dynamization is always carried out.

2. The forced dynamization procedure is carried out (if parametrized by P9601 and P9801).
3. The forced dynamization timer (P9660) is reset to the value in P9659 (if the forced
dynamization procedure was carried out successfully).
4. The safe brake control opens the brake, if not closed by holding brake function (P1215).
5. The status LED STO is switched on and ES is switched off.
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
8.4 Safe Torque Off
These actions are shown in the figure below.
Activation Deactivation Starting drive

of STO of STO via OFF1/ON
frequency
Output
frequency Frequency
setpoint
drive coasts down
time
PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
Status-
r9772.14
word
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-8 Safe Torque Off function
Note
The state of the fail-safe functions is announced by r9772.
CAUTION
Reaction time
The reaction time for an STO is 20 ms.
Fault reaction time
An internal failure during an STO will be detected within 20 ms and leads immediately to a
passivated STO.
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
8.4 Safe Torque Off
Passivated Safe Torque Off (passivated STO)

The passivated STO is always initiated when a detected fault requires, that the drive must be
brought to a standstill. The drive can be returned to operation only when the fault has been
explicitly acknowledged and a forced dynamization procedure has been carried out.
The passivated STO state is left by the following procedure:
1. Turning the drive off by sending an OFF1-signal.
2. Acknowledging all active faults.
3. Sending an ON-signal after the dynamization procedure was carried out successfully.
Activation of Deactivation of Starting drive via
passivated STO passivated STO - ON
- set OFF1
frequency
- Acknowledge
Output
frequency Frequency
setpoint
fault
drive coasts down
time
PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
Status-
r9772.14
word
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-9 Passivated STO function
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
8.4 Safe Torque Off
CAUTION
After STO or passivated STO it is possible (but almost unlikely) that the field generating
components become faulty in a way that they will generate one single rising edge of a
rotating field causing the motor to jerk for a defined maximum electrical angle of 60 °.
The resulting rotating angle at the motor shaft is smaller than the maximum electrical
angle due to inertia and the number of pole pairs.
Note
A passivated STO is always initiated by a safety fault condition within the drive.
Therefore, the drive always performs a forced dynamization procedure before it is
allowed to restart.
The passivated STO function has the highest priority and cannot be intercepted by any
other function.
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
8.5 Safe Stop 1
8.5 Safe Stop 1
Data

P9680/P9880
P9681/P9881
P9682/P9882
P9761, P9799/P9899, r9798/r9898, P3900
Warnings A1691, A1692, A1696, A1699
Faults F1600, F1616
Description
Contrary to STO, the output frequency of the inverter has an influence on the behavior of the
SS1 (Safe Stop 1) function. When SS1 is initiated the output frequency of the inverter is
scanned, if it is lower than the minimum frequency for standstill detection set in
P9682/P9882, the STO function is initiated immediately to bring the motor to a standstill. If
the inverter output frequency is higher than the minimum frequency for standstill detection,
then the motor is slowed down using the safe braking-ramp time set in P9681 and P9881.
See figure below.
The SS1 function can be intercepted by one of the following commands:
● Passivated STO
● OFF2 (SS1 monitoring still active)
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
8.5 Safe Stop 1
Activation STO Deactivation Starting drive

of SS1 activated of SS1 via OFF1/ON
frequency Output Frequency
frequency setpoint
Standstill detection
(P9682, P9882)
drive coasts down
time
PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
Status-
r9772.14
word
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-10 Safe Stop 1 (SS1) function
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
8.5 Safe Stop 1
CAUTION
The frequency setpoint can increase related to the following functions

 PID Trim
 Vdc max controller
only active in conjunction with V/f control
 Slip compensation
 Resonance damping
 Imax
As the frequency is monitored after adding these values, this increase should be taken into
account by the user when parameterizing the safe frequency envelope.
)UHTXHQF\
PRQLWRULQJ
)UHTXHQF\
)UHTXHQF\
VHWSRLQWWR
VHWSRLQW
+ + + - + 3RZHU
IURP5)*
VWDFN$6,&
3,'DVWULP 3 3 3 ,PD[
9GFPD[ 6OLS 5HVRQDQFH
FRQWUROOHU FRPSHQVDWLRQ GDPSLQJ
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
8.5 Safe Stop 1
When SS1 is activated, the following actions are performed by the inverter:
1. Both shutdown paths initiate a fail-safe monitored brake ramp function.
2. The motor is slowed down by the safe brake ramp function.
3. The status LED SS1 starts flashing.
4. When the minimum speed for standstill detection is reached, the STO function is
activated.
5. The mechanical brake is closed (if connected).
6. The status LED ES is switched on.
The SS1 function can be interrupted by either an OFF2 command or the STO function.
When SS1 is deactivated before the "minimum speed for standstill detection" (P9682/P9882)
is reached, the following actions are performed by the inverter:
1. The monitoring of the output frequency is deactivated.
2. The drive accelerates to the frequency setpoint
3. The status LED SS1 changes from flashing to on state.
When SS1 is deactivated after the "minimum speed for standstill detection" (P9682/P9882)
is reached, the following actions are performed by the inverter:
Note
The pulse-lock must be released by applying a rising edge signal (OFF1/ON).
1. STO is deactivated.
2. The forced dynamisation procedure is carried out (if parameterized by P9601/P9801).
3. The forced dynamisation timer (P9660) is reset to the value in P9659 (if the forced
dynamisation procedure was carried out successfully).
4. The brake opens, if it is not held closed due to motor holding brake state.
5. The status LED SS1 changes from flashing to on state.
6. The status LED ES is switched off.
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
8.5 Safe Stop 1
Note
The state of the fail-safe functions is announced by r9772.
Note
The fail-safe function SS1 should not be activated during following processes are active:
 Search process in flying restart
 Motor data identification
 Speed control optimization
It is recommended not to use the torque control (P1300 = 22, 23 or P1501 > 0) as a
control mode for the fail-safe function SS1.
CAUTION
Reaction time
The reaction time for an SS1 is 20 ms.
Fault reaction time
The reaction times after failure occurred until the passivated STO is triggered must be
given in the user manual:
 Fault reaction time during STO:
During an STO an internal failure is detected within 20 ms by the inverter which
immediately triggers a passivated STO.
 Fault reaction time during SS1 and SLS:
During an SS1 and an SLS the internal failure detection time is related to the inverter
output frequency. A failure is always detected when the monitored stator frequency
at the inverter output exceeds the safe frequency envelope. The first frequency
measurement value which lies outside the safe area triggers a passivated STO. The
maximum reaction time for a passivated STO during SS1 and SLS is 8 ms, whereas
the inverter can reach a maximum speed of 650 Hz before shutting down. However,
this speed can only be reached for one half frequency cycle.
E.g. the maximum reaction time at 650 Hz is 8 ms + 1/650 Hz/2 = 8.7 ms, the
maximum reaction time at 10 Hz is 8 ms + 1/10 Hz/2 = 58 ms.
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Data

P9680/P9880
P9681/P9881
P9690/P9890
P9691/P9891
P9692/P9892
P9761, P9799/P9899, r9798/r9898, P3900
Warnings A1691, A1692, A1696, A1699
Faults F1600, F1616
Description
The purpose of the Safely Limited Speed (SLS) function is to monitor the output frequency to
ensure that it does not exceed the SLS monitoring set by parameters P9691 and P9891.
Should the SLS monitoring be exceeded a braking process will be initiated which is
monitored using the safe braking ramp function. If a stationary state is detected, the
passivated STO will be initiated to bring the motor to a safe standstill. If the braking functions
fail, which is detected as a fault, the passivated STO function is initiated and cannot be
cleared without explicit acknowledgment of the fault.
The SLS function can be intercepted by the following commands:
● Safe Stop 1 (SS1)
● OFF1
● OFF2
● OFF3
Details see section "Dependency of Failsafe and OFF commands"
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
If the standard OFF commands are used with fail-safe functions, the interaction of the
commands on the system are automatically monitored in the background by the fail-safe
system (e.g. the commands, which are not fail-safe, cannot cause the inverter to accelerate
in an unsafe way as the passivated STO function will be triggered automatically).
Note
The fail-safe function SLS should not be activated during following processes are active:
 Search process in flying restart
 Motor data identification
 Speed control optimization
It is recommended not to use the torque control (P1300 = 22, 23 or P1501 > 0) as a control
mode for the fail-safe function SLS.
CAUTION
Reaction time
The reaction time for an SLS is 20 ms.
Fault reaction time
The reaction times after failure occurred until the passivated STO is triggered must be
given in the user manual:
 Fault reaction time during STO:
During an STO an internal failure is detected within 20 ms by the inverter which
immediately trig-gers a passivated STO.
 Fault reaction time during SS1 and SLS:
During an SS1 and an SLS the internal failure detection time is related to the inverter
output frequency. A failure is always detected when the monitored stator frequency at
the inverter output exceeds the safe frequency envelope. The first frequency
measurement value which lies outside the safe area triggers a passivated STO. The
maximum reaction time for a passivated STO during SS1 and SLS is 8 ms, whereas the
inverter can reach a maximum speed of 650 Hz before shutting down. However, this
speed can only be reached for one half frequency cycle.
E.g. the maximum reaction time at 650 Hz is 8 ms + 1/650 Hz/2 = 8.7 ms, the maximum
reaction time at 10 Hz is 8 ms + 1/10 Hz/2 = 58 ms.
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
Modes of behavior
The SLS function has four modes of behavior giving the user a choice of functionality to suit
their specific application. These modes of behavior of the SLS function are controlled by
setting the required values in parameters P9692 and P9892.
CAUTION
Due to monitoring reasons, the so called "accuracy limit for SLS" with a value of 1 Hz is set.
If - in SLS mode 0, 1 or 2 - the output frequency under-runs this value, an STO is triggered
immediately. In SLS mode 3 a 5-s timer starts and after that an STO will be triggered if the
frequency is still below 1 Hz.
WARNING
If due to dynamic loads the frequency runs above the SLS limit (P9691/P9891) a
passivated STO is triggered; if it falls below the accuracy limit in case of SLS 0, 1 or 2 an
STO is triggered immediately, in case of SLS mode 3 it will be triggered, if after 5 s the
frequency is still below 1 Hz. Therefore when designing the plant, dynamic load changes
must be taken into account to prevent an unintented activation of fail-safe functions.
Furthermore the acceptance test should be performed under worst-case load conditions.
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
CAUTION
In SLS modes 0 and 1, the frequency setpoint can increase related to the following
functions
 PID Trim
 Vdc max controller
only active in conjunction with V/f control
 Slip compensation
 Resonance damping
 Imax
As the frequency is monitored after adding these values, this increasement should be taken
into account by the user when parameterising the safe frequency envelope.
)UHH]HVDIHW\ )UHTXHQF\
IUHTXHQF\ PRQLWRULQJ
)UHTXHQF\
)UHTXHQF\
VHWSRLQWWR
VHWSRLQW
+ + + - + 3RZHU
IURP5)*
VWDFN$6,&
3,'DVWULP 3 3 3 ,PD[
9GFPD[ 6OLS 5HVRQDQFH
FRQWUROOHU FRPSHQVDWLRQ GDPSLQJ
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6.1 Safely Limited Speed, Mode 0
SLS Mode 0, P9692 = P9892 = 0

If, after initiation of SLS, the output frequency exceeds the SLS monitoring set with P9691
and P9891, then the passivated STO function is initiated to bring the motor to a standstill.
If the output frequency is below the SLS monitoring, all control signals that can affect the
output frequency are blocked. No external control of the output frequency is possible.
Once the output frequency is locked at its present value, if the motor again falls below this
frequency (for example additional load on the motor), it is not interpreted as a fault condition
and no action is taken. See the following table.
If the Safe Brake Control is activated, its status is indicated in the following figures via
r9772.14:
● r9772.14 = 0 -> brake open
● r9772.14 = 1 -> brake closed.
During SLS mode 0 is active the fault reaction time for a passivated STO is given according
to the formula:

5HDFWLRQWLPH PV
IRXW

Output frequency = fout
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 0, case 1: SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891) > Frequency setpoint > SLS setpoint
Activation of SLS =>  SLS monitoring activated
 SLS-LED flashing
 ES-LED on
 Frequency setpoint deactivated
 Monitored ramp down to SLS setpoint
When SLS setpoint is reached =>  SLS monitoring on
Deactivation of SLS =>  SLS monitoring off
 Frequency setpoint activated
 SLS monitoring off
 SLS-LED and ES-LED off
Activation SLS setpoint Deactivation

of SLS reached of SLS
Frequency
frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring Envelope
(P9691, P9891) Output
frequency
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
monitored ramp
(leading to SLS setpoint)
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
time
PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
Status-
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-11 SLS Mode 0, case 1: SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891) > Frequency setpoint > SLS
setpoint
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 0, case 2: SLS setpoint > Frequency setpoint > standstill detection
(p9682/p9882)
 ES-LED on
 SLS monitoring off
Activation Deactivation
of SLS of SLS
frequency
Envelope
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891) Frequency
setpoint
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890) Output
frequency
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
time
Status- PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-12 SLS Mode 0, case 2: SLS setpoint > Frequency setpoint > standstill detection
(p9682/p9882)
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 0, case 3: Standstill detection (p9682/p9882) > Frequency setpoint > accuracy
limit
 ES-LED on
of SLS of SLS
frequency
Envelope
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
SLS setpoint
setpoint
(P9682, P9882) Output
frequency
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
time
PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
Status-
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-13 SLS Mode 0, case 3: Standstill detection (p9682/p9882) > Frequency
setpoint > accuracy limit
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 0, cases 1 to 3:

If output frequency increases SLS tolerance (e.g. due to trim or slip
compensation) =>
 passivated STO is triggered
 SF-LED on
 STO-LED off
 SS1-LED off
 SLS-LED off
Deactivation of SLS =>
 No action
To start again, the passivated STO must be acknowledged and a new
on command is necessary to ramp up to frequency setpoint.
Activation STO Deactivation Starting drive via

of SLS activated of SLS - OFF1
fault - acknowledge
- ON
frequency
Envelope
SLS monitoring
setpoint
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
Output
frequency
passivated STO
(drive coasts down)
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
time
Status- PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-14 SLS Mode 0, cases 1 to 3
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 0, case 4: Accuracy limit > Frequency setpoint

 STO activated
 ES-LED on
 SLS-LED on
 ES-LED off
To start again, STO must be acknowledged and a new ON command is
necessary to ramp up to frequency setpoint.

of SLS of SLS via OFF1/ON
frequency
Envelope
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
Output
frequency setpoint
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
STO (drive coasts down)
time
PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
Status-
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-15 SLS Mode 0, case 4: accuracy limit > Frequency setpoint
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 0, case 5.1: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891), primary fault
 Monitored ramp down to standstill
detection
When standstill detection is  passivated STO activated
reached =>
Deactivation of SLS =>  To start again, the passivated STO must
be acknowledged and a new on command
is necessary to ramp up to frequency
setpoint.
Output Activation SLS SLS setpoint STO Deactivation Starting drive via Frequency
frequency of SLS monitoring reached activated of SLS - OFF1 setpoint
reached - acknowledge
fault
- ON
frequency
Envelope
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891) monitored ramp
(leading to passivated STO)
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
Standstill detection passivated STO

(P9682, P9882) (drive coasts down)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
time
PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
Status-
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-16 SLS Mode 0, case 5.1: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891), primary
fault
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 0, case 5.2: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891,) secondary
fault
 Monitored ramp down to standstill
detection
When output frequency runs  Frequency setpoint inactive
above SS1 ramp down monitoring  passivated STO activated immediately
before standstill detection is
reached
setpoint.
Output Activation SLS STO Deactivation Starting drive via Frequency

frequency of SLS monitoring activated of SLS - OFF1 setpoint
reached - acknowledge
fault - ON
frequency
Envelope
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891) fault
(secondary)
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
Standstill detection monitored ramp passivated STO

(P9682, P9882) (leading to passivated STO) (drive coasts down)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
time
PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
Status-
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-17 SLS Mode 0, case 5.2: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891), secondary
fault
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
Note
It must be taken into account that with detecting a fault during the fail-safe function SLS
mode 0 is active, first it will be tried to brake down the drive at the safe brake ramp.
The brake time is determined by parameters P9681/P9881. As the drive at this time is in a
fail-safe mode, it is not possible to interrupt the braking ramp by another function (e.g. STO).
It is recommended to parameterize the shortest possible ramp time for the application.
SLS Mode 1, P9692 = P9892 = 1

In addition to the speed limit set in parameters P9691 and P9891, a further SLS setpoint can
be set in parameters P9690 and P9890. This additional SLS setpoint is used to set the
output frequency to a specific frequency, instead of bringing the motor to a standstill.
If the output frequency of the inverter falls below the SLS setpoint set in P9690 and P9890,
the motor is allowed to run at that speed. See the following table.
If Safe Brake Control is activated, its status is indicated in the following figures via r9772.14:
● r9772.14 = 0 -> brake open
● r9772.14 = 1 -> brake closed.
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 1, case 1: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891)

 Ramp down with SS1 to standstill
detection
 ES-LED on
setpoint.
Output Activation SLS SLS setpoint Deactivation Frequency

frequency of SLS monitoring reached of SLS setpoint
reached
frequency
Envelope
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
monitored ramp
Standstill detection (leading to SLS setpoint)
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
time
Status- PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-18 SLS Mode 1, case 1: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891)
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 1, case 2: SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891) > Frequency setpoint > SLS setpoint
 Ramp down with SS1 to SLS setpoint
 ES-LED on
 activate freq. setpoint and ramp to freq.
setpoint
Activation SLS setpoint Deactivation

of SLS reached of SLS
Frequency
frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring Envelope
(P9691, P9891) Output
frequency
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
monitored ramp
(leading to SLS setpoint)
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
time
PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
Status-
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-19 SLS Mode 1, case 2: SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891) > Frequency setpoint > SLS
setpoint
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
(p9682/p9882)
 ES-LED on
setpoint
of SLS of SLS
frequency
Envelope
SLS monitoring
setpoint
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890) Output
frequency
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
time
PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
Status-
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
(p9682/p9882)
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 1, case 4: Standstill detection (p9682/p9882) > Frequency setpoint > accuracy
limit
 ES-LED on
setpoint
of SLS of SLS
frequency
Envelope
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
SLS setpoint
setpoint
(P9682, P9882) Output
frequency
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
time
PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
Status-
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-21 SLS Mode 1, case 4: Standstill detection (p9682/p9882) > Frequency
setpoint > accuracy limit
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 1, case 5: accuracy limit > Frequency setpoint

 ES-LED on
setpoint

of SLS of SLS via OFF1/ON
frequency
Envelope
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
Output
setpoint
frequency
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
time
PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
Status-
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 1, case 6: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891), primary fault
 STO activated
 ES-LED on
setpoint.
Output Activation STO Deactivation Starting drive via Frequency

frequency of SLS activated of SLS - OFF1 setpoint
- acknowledge
frequency
fault - ON
Envelope
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
passivated STO
(drive coasts down)
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
time
PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
Status-
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-23 SLS Mode 1, case 6: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891), primary fault
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
(p9682/p9882), primary fault
When output frequency runs  passivated STO activated immediately
above SLS monitoring
setpoint.

fault - acknowledge
- ON
frequency
Envelope
SLS monitoring
setpoint
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890) Output
frequency
passivated STO
(drive coasts down)
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
time
Status- PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
(p9682/p9882), primary fault
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 2, P9692 = P9892 = 2

In SLS mode 2, only the monitoring ramp (envelope) is activated.
WARNING
Safe brake ramp not activated
SLS mode 2 means that the safe brake ramp is not activated, therefore it is the users
responsibility to ensure that the motor is ramped down to or below the SLS setpoint.
Note
If in the SLS mode 2 one of the functions Pre-Control (P1496 > 0), VC or SLVC (P1300 > 19)
is active, dynamic setpoint jumps can lead to a passivated STO.
If the output frequency exceeds the SLS monitoring set in P9691 and P9891, the motor must
be ramped down using an external control channel (e.g. a PLC, potentiometer or USS etc.).
If the control channel tries to set the output frequency to exceed the SLS monitoring, this will
be interpreted as a fault condition and the motor will be stopped and passivated. To start the
motor again, the fault condition needs to be explicitly acknowledged. See the following table.
r9772.14:
● r9772.14 = 0 -> brake open
● r9772.14 = 1 -> brake closed.
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 2, case 1: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring

 SLS-, STO- and SS1-LED off
 To start again, the passivated STO must
be acknowledged and a new ON
command is necessary to ramp up to
frequency setpoint.
Output Activation Deactivation Starting drive via Frequency

frequency of SLS of SLS - OFF1 setpoint
frequency
fault - acknowledge
- ON
Envelope
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
passivated STO
(drive coasts down)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
time
PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
Status-
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-25 SLS Mode 2, case 1: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 2, case 2: SLS monitoring > Frequency setpoint > accuracy limit
 SLS-LED off
of SLS of SLS
frequency
Envelope
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Output
frequency Frequency
setpoint
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
time
Status- PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-26 SLS Mode 2, case 2: SLS monitoring > Frequency setpoint > accuracy limit
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 2, case 3: accuracy limit > Frequency setpoint

If frequency setpoint falls below accuracy limit, a passivated STO is triggered
immediately
 SLS-LED off
 To start again, the passivated STO must
be acknowledged and a new ON
command is necessary to ramp up to
frequency setpoint.
Activation STO Deactivation Starting drive

of SLS activated of SLS via OFF1/ON
frequency
Envelope
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Output Frequency
frequency setpoint
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
time
Status- PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 2, case 4: SLS monitoring > Frequency setpoint

If frequency setpoint runs above SLS monitoring an STO is triggered
immediately
 To start again, STO must be
acknowledged and a new ON command is
necessary to ramp up to frequency
setpoint.

frequency
- acknowledge
- ON
fault
Envelope
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Frequency
setpoint
passivated STO
(drive coasts down)
Output
frequency
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
time
Status- PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-28 SLS Mode 2, case 4: SLS monitoring > Frequency setpoint
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 3, P9692 = P9892 = 3

Mode 3 is similar to mode 2. Contrary to mode 2 reversing of direction is possible as well as
starting with an ON command while SLS Mode 3 monitoring is active.
WARNING
Safe brake ramp not activated
In mode 3 the safe brake ramp is not activated. Therefore it is the users responsibility to
ensure that the motor is ramped down to or below the SLS setpoint
Note
If in the SLS mode 3 one of the functions Pre-Control (P1496 > 0), VC or SLVC (P1300 > 19)
is active, dynamic setpoint jumps can lead to a passivated STO.
If the output frequency exceeds the SLS monitoring set in P9691 and P9891, the motor must
be ramped down using an external control channel (e.g. a PLC, potentiometer or USS etc.).
If the control channel tries to set the output frequency to exceed the SLS monitoring, this will
be interpreted as a fault condition and the motor will be stopped and passivated. To start the
motor again, the fault condition needs to be explicitly acknowledged. See the following table.
r9772.14:
● r9772.14 = 0 -> brake open
● r9772.14 = 1 -> brake closed.
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 3, case 1: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring

 SLS-, STO- and SS1-LED off
 To start again, the passivated STO must be acknowledged
and a new ON command is necessary to ramp up to frequency
setpoint.
Output Activation Deactivation Starting drive via Frequency

frequency of SLS of SLS - OFF1 setpoint
frequency
fault - acknowledge
- ON
Envelope
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
passivated STO
(drive coasts down)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
time
PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
Status-
r9772.13
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-29 SLS Mode 3, case 1: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 3, case 2: SLS monitoring > Frequency setpoint > accuracy limit
 SLS-LED off
of SLS of SLS
frequency
Envelope
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Output
frequency Frequency
setpoint
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
time
PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
Status-
r9772.13
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-30 SLS Mode 3, case 2: SLS monitoring > Frequency setpoint > accuracy limit
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 3, case 3: activation of SLS, followed by an OFF1/OFF3 command =>

Frequency setpoint drops below accuracy limit => STO, followed by
deactivation of SLS and renewed activation of SLS => restart requires
ON command
OFF1/OFF3 command  Frequency setpoint drops below accuracy limit
 STO activated if frequency drops below accuracy limit
 SLS-LED off
 To start again, a new ON command is necessary. If - after 5 s -
the output frequency is above accuracy limit the inverter
operates in SLS mode 3 otherwise an STO will be triggered
immediately.
$FWLYDWLRQ 7LPHU 672 $FWLYDWLRQ

RI6/6 DFWLYDWHG DFWLYDWHG RI6/6
2))2)) 'HDFWLYDWLRQ 21
IUHTXHQF\
&RPPDQG RI6/6 &RPPDQG
(QYHORSH (QYHORSH
6/6PRQLWRULQJ
33
2XWSXW V V
IUHTXHQF\
)UHTXHQF\
VHWSRLQW
$FFXUDF\OLPLW
+]
+]
WLPH
352),VDIH
672%LW
VWDWH
66%LW
6/6%LW
U
6WDWXV
ZRUG
U
U
6)
672
66
/('
6/6
(6
Figure 8-31 SLS Mode 3, case 3: Frequency setpoint drops below accuracy limit after activation of SLS
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 3, case 4: activation of SLS, followed by an OFF1/OFF3 command =>

Frequency setpoint drops below accuracy limit => STO, followed by
activation and deactivation of STO through the user => restart
requires ON command
OFF1/OFF3 command  Frequency setpoint drops below accuracy limit
 STO activated if frequency drops below accuracy limit
Activation of STO =>  SLS monitoring still activated
 Envelope still activated
Deactivation of STO =>  STO is deactivated
 Timer is started
 To start again, a new ON command is necessary. If - after 5 s -
the output frequency is above accuracy limit the inverter
operates in SLS mode 3 otherwise an STO will be triggered
immediately.
$FWLYDWLRQ 7LPHU 672 'HDFWLYDWLRQRI

RI6/6 DFWLYDWHG DFWLYDWHG 672
2))2)) $FWLYDWLRQRI 21
IUHTXHQF\
&RPPDQG 672 &RPPDQG
(QYHORSH
6/6PRQLWRULQJ
33
2XWSXW V V
IUHTXHQF\
)UHTXHQF\
VHWSRLQW
$FFXUDF\OLPLW
+]
+]
WLPH
352),VDIH
672%LW
VWDWH
66%LW
6/6%LW
U
6WDWXV
ZRUG
U
U
6)
672
66
/('
6/6
(6
Figure 8-32 SLS Mode 3, case 4: Frequency setpoint drops below accuracy limit with user activation of STO
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 3, case 5: Activation of SLS with SLS monitoring > frequency setpoint >
accuracy limit - followed by setpoint inversion
Setpoint inversion, with |SLS monitoring| > |fsetnew| > |accuracy limit|. If it takes 5 s or more
from accuracy limit (1 Hz) to the inverse accuracy limit (-1Hz) the inverter trips, otherwise it
will operate without tripping.
t<5s
Activation New Deactivation
of SLS setpoint of SLS
frequency
Envelope
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Output
frequency
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
0 Hz
time
Accuracy limit
-1 Hz
Frequency
-SLS monitoring setpoint
(-P9691, -P9891)
PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
Status-
r9772.13
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-33 SLS Mode 3, case 5: Activation of SLS with zero crossing
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 3, case 6: Activation of SLS with SLS monitoring > frequency setpoint >
accuracy limit - followed by new setpoint
New setpoint. If the new setpoint is below the accuracy limit a 5 s timer starts. If the setpoint
is still below the accuracy limit the inverter trips with STO.
act freq
New < Acc lim Deactivation
Activation setpoint STO of SLS
of SLS < 1 Hz Starting Drive via
activated
frequency
OFF1 /ON
Envelope
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
=5s
Output
frequency
Frequency
setpoint
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
0 Hz
time
PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
Status-
r9772.13
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-34 SLS Mode 3, case 6: New setpoint (< accuracy limit) after activation of SLS
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
SLS Mode 3, case 7: SLS monitoring > Frequency setpoint

If frequency setpoint runs above SLS monitoring an STO is triggered immediately
 To start again, passivated STO must be acknowledged and a
new ON command is necessary to ramp up to frequency
setpoint.

frequency
- acknowledge
- ON
fault
Envelope
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Frequency
setpoint
passivated STO
(drive coasts down)
Output
frequency
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
time
PROFIsafe
STO (Bit 0.0)

state
SS1 (Bit 0.1)

SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
Status-
r9772.13
word
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
LED
SLS
ES
Figure 8-35 SLS Mode 3, case 7: SLS monitoring > Frequency setpoint
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
8.7 Safe Brake Control
Data
Parameter range: P0003, P0010, P1215

P9601/P9801
P9602/P9802
P9761, P9799/P9899, r9798/r9898, P3900
Warnings A1691, A1692, A1696, A1699
Faults F1600, F1616, F1630
Description
The Safe Brake Control Function (SBC) was implemented to generate a fail-safe signal to
control an EM brake.
Prerequisite: P1215 = 1 and the optional Safe Brake Control Relay
To activate the Safe Brake Control function, the following parameters must be set:
P9602 = P9802 = 1 (factory setting is 0).
In case of P9602 = P9802 = 1 a feedback signal of the Safe Brake Control is monitored. This
tests the signal circuitry not the EM brake itself.
This test signal does not interfere with the normal function of the mechanical brake. If the
mechanical brake is fitted and the test fails, a fault condition will be indicated by the inverter.
Note
When carrying-out the forced dynamization, the shutdown paths of the motor brake are also
tested. This results a brief opening command (2 ms to 28 ms) in the motor brake.
The mechanical part of the brake generally requires longer than 30 ms to open. This means
that this dynamic operation generally has no influence on the motor shaft itself. However it is
the user's responsibility to use brakes with opening times > 30 ms.
The SBC will be activated in the following cases:

● STO
● passivated STO
● SS1
The SBC state is indicated in r9772.14. If SBC is disabled by P9602 = P9802 = 0 then
r9772.14 is 0 (brake open) even if the brake is closed from a non-safe brake control (e.g.
MHB). The fault F1630 will occur in case an error happens.
Frequency converter
Fail-Safe Functions
Frequency converter
Power module dependent functions 9
9.1 Electronic Brakes
Overview
The inverters have three electronic braking technologies:
● DC braking
● Compound braking
These brakes can actively brake the motor and avoid a possible DC link overvoltage
condition. The figure below shows the inter-dependency of the electronic braking functions.
QR &RPSRXQG QR '\QDPLF QR
'&EUDNLQJ
EUDNLQJ EUDNLQJ
3!
3! 3!
"
" "
\HV \HV \HV
'&EUDNLQJ &RPSRXQGEUDNLQJ '\QDPLFEUDNLQJ

'LVDEOHG
HQDEOHG HQDEOHG HQDEOHG
Figure 9-1 Inter-dependency of electronic brakes
Frequency converter
Power module dependent functions
9.1.1 DC braking
Data

P1232, P1234
r0053 Bit00
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Description
The motor decelerates along a parameterized braking ramp if an OFF1 or OFF3 command is
output. A "flat" ramp must be selected so that the inverter is not tripped (shutdown) due to
the high regenerative energy which would cause a DC link overvoltage condition. The DC
brake should be activated while the OFF1 or OFF3 command is present if the motor is to be
braked faster. For DC braking, instead of continually reducing the output frequency/voltage
during the OFF1 or OFF3 phase, from a selectable frequency, a DC voltage/current is input
(refer to sequence 1).
The motor can be brought to a standstill in the shortest time using DC current braking (DC
brake). DC braking is selected as follows:
● After OFF1 or OFF3 (the DC brake is released via P1233) ‒ Sequence 1
● Directly selected using BICO parameter P1230 ‒ Sequence 2
For DC braking, a DC current is impressed in the stator winding which results in a significant
braking torque for an induction motor. The magnitude, duration and frequency at which
braking starts can be set for the braking current and therefore braking torque by setting the
appropriate parameters. The DC brake can therefore support a braking operation from
approx. < 10 Hz or prevents / minimizes the increase in the DC link voltage for regenerative
braking. This is realized because energy is directly absorbed in the motor. The essential
advantage and the main application of the DC brake is the fact that a holding torque can be
generated at standstill (0 Hz). For instance, this is important forapplications where after
positioning, any motion in the mechanical system / product itself can result in waste.
DC braking is especially used for:
● Centrifuges
● Saws
● Conveyor belts
Frequency converter
Sequence 1
1. Enabled using P1233
2. DC braking is activated with the OFF1 or OFF3 command (see figure below)
3. The inverter frequency is ramped down along the parameterized OFF1 or OFF3 ramp
down to the frequency at which DC braking is to start - P1234. This means that the kinetic
energy of the motor can be reduced without endangering the inverter. However, if the
ramp-down time is too short, there is a danger that a fault will be output as a result of an
overvoltage condition in DC link - F0002.
4. The inverter pulses are inhibited for the duration of the de-magnetizing time P0347.
5. The required braking current P1232 is then impressed for the selected braking time
P1233. The status is displayed using signal r0053 bit 00.
The inverter pulses are inhibited after the braking time has expired.

21
2))2)) W
3
2))
W
_I_
2))
3
'&EUDNLQJ
W
'&EUDNLQJDFWLYH
U
%LW W
3
Figure 9-2 DC braking after OFF1/OFF3
Frequency converter
Sequence 2
1. Enabled and selected using BICO parameter P1230 (see figure below).
2. The inverter pulses are inhibited for the duration of the de-magnetizing time P0347.
3. The requested braking current P1232 is impressed as long as DC braking is enabled
(P1230 = 1) and the motor is braked. This state is displayed using signal r0053 bit 00.
4. After DC braking has been cancelled, the motor accelerates back to the setpoint
frequency until the motor speed matches the inverter output frequency. If there is no
match, then there is danger that a fault will be output as a result of overcurrent - F0001.
This can be avoided by activating the flying restart function.
5. If any fault occurs during P1230 = 1 the DC current is set to zero. The motor doesn't ramp
up even the fault is acknowledged. A new ON command is necessary.
6. If the DC brake is enabled again, the braking current P1232 is impressed as long as
P1230 = 1.
2

21
$FNQRZOHGJH W
)DXOWVWDWH

W
%,(QDEOH'&%UDNH
.
3&

೿I೿ W
IBVHW
I
'&EUDNLQJ '&EUDNLQJ
IBDFW
W
L 3 3
W
'&EUDNLQJDFWLYH
U
%LW
W
1RWH'&EUDNHFDQEHDSSOLHGLQGULYHVWDWHVU RU
Figure 9-3 DC braking after external selection
Frequency converter
Note
1. The "DC braking" function is only practical for induction motors!
2. DC braking is not suitable to hold suspended loads!
3. For DC current braking, the motor kinetic energy is converted into thermal energy in
the motor. The motor can overheat if braking lasts too long!
4. While DC braking, there is no other way of influencing the motor speed using an
external control. When parameterizing and setting the motor system, then as far as
possible, it should be tested using real loads!
Frequency converter
9.1.2 Compound braking
Data

Warnings: -
Faults: -
Description
For compound braking (this is enabled using P1236) DC braking is superimposed with
regenerative braking (where the motor regenerates into the line supply as it brakes along a
ramp). If the DC link voltage exceeds the compound switch-in threshold VDC-Comp (see figure
below), then a DC current is impressed as a function of P1236. In this case, braking is
possible with a controlled (closed-loop) motor frequency and minimum regenerative
feedback. Effective braking is obtained without having to use additional components by
optimizing the ramp-down time (P1121 for OFF1 or when braking from f1 to f2, P1135 for
OFF3) and using compound braking P1236.
3 3!
:LWKRXW&RPSRXQGEUDNLQJ :LWK&RPSRXQGEUDNLQJ
_I_ _I_
IBVHW IBVHW
IBDFW IBDFW
W W
L L
W W
9'&OLQN 9'&OLQN
9'&&RPS
W W
3 9'&&RPS ෬෭෬3

3ำ9'&&RPS ෬U
Figure 9-4 Compound braking
Frequency converter
The compound braking switch-in threshold VDC-Comp is calculated as a function of parameter

P1254 (Auto detect VDC switch-on levels) either directly using the line supply voltage P0210
or indirectly using the DC link voltage and r1242 (refer to the formula in the figure above).
WARNING
For compound braking, regenerative braking is superimposed on the DC braking (braking

along a ramp). This means that components of the kinetic energy of the motor and motor
load are converted into thermal energy in the motor. This can cause the motor to overheat if
this power loss is too high or if the brake operation takes too long!
Note
Only active in conjunction with V/f control.
Compound braking is deactivated, if:
 flying restart is active,
 DC braking is active, and
 Vector control is selected.
The compound switch-in threshold VDC-Comp is dependent on P1254:
VDC-Comp(P1254 = 0) ≠ VDC-Comp(P1254 ≠ 0)
Frequency converter
9.2 Dynamic Brakes
9.2 Dynamic Brakes
Overview
The inverters have two dynamic braking technologies:
● Chopper resistor
● Regenerative braking
Power Module functions
Table 9- 1 Power Module relating functions
SINAMCIS G120 SINAMICS G120D

PM240 PM250 PM260 PM250D
Dynamic braking via X --- --- ---
chopper resistor
Dynamic braking via --- X X X
regenerative braking
9.2.1 Dynamic braking
Data

Warnings: A0535
Faults: F0022
Description
For several motor applications, in certain operating states, the motor can regenerate.
Examples of these applications include:
● Cranes
● Traction motors
● Conveyor belts which transport loads downwards.
Frequency converter
9.2 Dynamic Brakes
When the motor is in the regenerative mode, the energy from the motor is fed back into the
DC link of the motor through the inverter. This means that the DC link voltage increases and
when the maximum threshold is reached, the inverter is shutdown (tripped) with fault F0002.
This shutdown (trip) can be avoided by using dynamic braking. Contrary to DC and
compound braking, this technique requires that an external braking resistor is installed.
The advantages of dynamic resistor braking include:
● The regenerative energy is not converted into heat in the motor.
● It is significantly more dynamic and can be used in all operating states (not only when an
OFF command is output).
&KRSSHUUHVLVWRU
* '&35 '&35
&KRSSHU
a FRQWURO
a a
Figure 9-5 Connecting the chopper (braking) resistor
The braking energy in the DC link is converted into heat when dynamic braking is activated
(enabled using P1237). The energy is converted into heat using the voltage-controlled
chopper resistor (ballast resistor). When regenerative energy is fed back to the DC link and
in consequence the DC link threshold VDC, Chopper is exceeded, then the chopper resistor is
switched in using an electronic semiconductor switch.
Switch-in threshold of the chopper resistor:
If P1254 = 0: VDC, Chopper = 1.13 ⋅ 2 ⋅ Vline supply = 1.13 ⋅ 2 ⋅ P0210
Otherwise: VDC, Chopper = 0.98 ⋅ r1242
The chopper switch-in threshold VDC chopper is calculated as a function of parameter P1254
(Auto detect VDC switch-on levels), either directly using the line supply voltage P0210 or
indirectly using the DC link voltage and r1242.
Frequency converter
9.2 Dynamic Brakes
9'&DFW
[
[ W&KRSSHU21 yW&KRSSHU
ದ ෙ9 9

9'&&KRSSHU

3
'XW\F\FOH $ODUP
PRQLWRULQJ $

0DLQV
9 9 9
ෙ9 9 9 9
Figure 9-6 Mode of operation of the dynamic braking
The regenerative (braking) energy is converted into thermal energy using the chopper
resistor. A braking module (chopper control) is integrated in the DC link for this purpose. The
chopper of the braking module switches the resistor with a mark-space ratio corresponding
to the regenerative power to be dissipated. The braking module is only active if, as a result of
the regenerative operation, the DC link voltage lies above the chopper switch-in threshold
VDC chopper. This means that the braking module is not active in normal operation when
motoring.
The chopper resistor is only designed for a specific power and a certain load duty cycle and
can only absorb a limited amount of braking energy within a specific time period. The
chopper resistors, specified in the catalog, have load duty cycle as shown in the figure
below.
3RZHU

3
3'%
W>V@

3'% FRQWLQXRXVSRZHU
3 y3'% SHUPLVVDEOHSRZHUIRUVHYHU\V
Figure 9-7 Load duty cycle - chopper resistors
This load duty cycle is saved in the inverter for P1237 = 1 (→ 5 %). If the values are
exceeded due to the load required, then when the maximum acceptable braking energy is
reached, the load duty cycle monitoring controls the chopper so that the value is reduced to
the value entered in parameter P1237. This means that the energy to be dissipated in the
chopper resistor is reduced, which means that the DC link voltage quickly increases due to
the regenerative energy available and the inverter is shutdown (tripped) due to a DC link
overvoltage condition.
Frequency converter
9.2 Dynamic Brakes
If the continuous power or the load duty cycle for a resistor is too high, then the continuous
rating can be quadrupled using four resistors in a bridge circuit configuration (see figure
below). In this case, in addition, the load duty cycle must be increased using parameter
P1237 from P1237 = 1 (→ 5 %) to P1237 = 3 (→ 20 %). When using the bridge circuit, the
overtemperature switch of the resistors should be connected in series and incorporated in
the fault circuit. This guarantes, that when a resistor overheats, the complete system/inverter
is shut down.
5 5
5 5 5
'&35 '&35 '&35 '&35
&KRSSHU &KRSSHU
FRQWURO FRQWURO
3 3

Figure 9-8 Increasing the level of braking energy which can be absorbed
The continuous power and the load duty cycle are modified using parameter P1237. If the
load duty cycle monitoring switches from the peak power (100 %) to the continuous power,
then this is dissipated for an unlimited length of time in the braking resistor. Contrary to the
braking resistor, as listed in the catalog, the chopper control can be permanently operated
with 100 % power.
D
3 W21 W2)) WF\FOH 3'%
3

3'%

W
W21 W2))
WF\FOH ,QILQLWH ,QILQLWH
E
3
3'%
W
W
W3 W2))
Figure 9-9 Chopper load duty cycle
Frequency converter
9.2 Dynamic Brakes
The braking module is integrated in the inverter and the braking resistor can be connected
using the external terminals DC-P/R1 and R2 (for more details refer to Operating Instructions
of the corresponding Power Module). Where the DC-P/R1 is the positive terminal for the
braking resistor and R2 is the negative terminal for the braking resistor.
WARNING
Braking resistors, which are to be mounted on the inverter, must be designed so that they
can tolerate the power dissipated.
If an unsuitable braking resistor is used there is a danger of fire and that the associated
inverter will be significantly damaged.
The chopper control, integrated in the inverter is designed for the braking resistor value
assigned in Catalog; e.g.:
 Power Module PM240 6SL3224-0BE24-0AA0
 brake resistor 6SL3201-0BE12-0AA0
 brake resistor value 160 Ω
A brake resistor with a lower resistance value will destroy the inverter. In this case, an
external braking unit must be used.
When operational, the temperature of braking resistors increases – do not touch! Ensure
that there is sufficient clearance around the unit and there is adequate ventilation.
A temperature protection switch must be used to protect the units against overheating.
Note
The switch-on threshold VDC chopper of the dynamic resistor braking is dependent on P1254
VDC chopper(P1254 = 0) ≠ VDC chopper(P1254 ≠ 0).
External braking modules (chopper units) including braking resistor can be used with all of
the sizes of inverters. When engineering the system, the particular braking module/resistor
must be taken into consideration.
Frequency converter
9.2 Dynamic Brakes
9.2.2 Regenerative braking
Data

P1082, P1531
r1537
Faults: F0028
Description
For certain drive applications, the motor can operate as a generator in specific operating
states. Typical examples of these types of applications include:
● Cranes
● Traversing drives
● Conveyor belts where the material is being transported downwards
For regenerative motor operation, the motor energy is fed back into the line supply via the
inverter and the line-commutated rectifier of the inverter. The regenerative power capability
depends on the motor speed and on current or voltage limitation parameters.
The maximum regenerative power is limited to 100 % nominal power (HO) of the inverter. It
depends furthermore - especially at low frequencies - on the current limitation value (see
figure "Regenerative Power").
The advantages of regenerative braking include

● The kinetic energy is not converted into heat in the motor
● The kinetic energy does not have to be converted into heat in an external resistor
● It has a significantly higher dynamic response and can be used in all operating states (not
only for an OFF command)
● It allows precise braking along a down ramp
● Continuous regenerative operation is possible - e.g. for cranes
Regeneration with V/f control mode (P1300 < 20)

The regenerative power can be limited via P0640. If the regenerative power exceeds its limit
for more than 5 s the inverter will trip with F0028.
Regeneration with vector control mode

The regenerative power can be limited via P1531. If the regenerative power exceeds the limit
the drive will not be able to hold its setpoint.
Frequency converter
9.2 Dynamic Brakes
The following graph shows the limiting parameters.
QRUPDOL]HGSRZHUDQG
YROWDJHOLPLWDWLRQV
FXUUHQWOLPLWDWLRQ
PRWRUUHJHQHUDWLYHYROWDJH
SURSRUWLRQDOVSHHG
PD[UHJHQ
SRZHU
UHJHQHUDWLYHSRZHU
GHSHQGLQJRQFXUUHQW
OLPLWDWLRQ 2XWSXWIUHTXHQF\
%DVHVSHHG
RU+]
Figure 9-10 Regenerative Power
Note
If regenerative feedback into the line supply is required at the rated frequency the maximum
frequency (P1082) must be greater than the rated motor frequency (P0310).
CAUTION
If the power fed back into the line supply exceeds the rated power of the inverter, the
inverter will trip with F0028.
The customer must make sure that for his application the inverter is correctly rated based
on the regenerative power limit.
Frequency converter
9.3 DC Link Voltage Controller
9.3.1 Closed-loop Vdc control
Overview
In addition to DC, compound and dynamic braking, it is possible to prevent a DC link
overvoltage condition using the closed-loop DC link voltage controller. With this technique,
the output frequency is automatically modified during operation so that the motor does not go
too far into the regenerative mode.
Using the DC link voltage controller, it is also possible to prevent the inverter from being shut
down (tripped) during brief line supply dips – which cause a DC link undervoltage condition.
Also in this case, the output frequency is automatically modified by the DC link voltage
controller during operation. Contrary to an overvoltage condition, in this case the motor is
operated with increased regenerative operation in order to support and buffer the DC link
voltage.
DC link overvoltage
● Cause
The motor regenerates and feeds too much energy back into the DC link.
● Remedy
The DC link voltage is further reduced using the Vdc_max controller by reducing the
regenerative torque down to zero.
DC link undervoltage
● Cause:
Line supply voltage failure or dip (blackout or brownout)
● Remedy
A regenerative torque is entered for the operational motor which compensates the
existing losses and therefore stabilizes the voltage in the DC link. This technique is
carried-out using the Vdc_min controller and is known as kinetic buffering.
Frequency converter
9.3.2 Vdc_max controller
Data
Parameter range: P1240, r0056 bit 14

r1242, P1243
P1250 – P1254
Warnings: A0502, A0910, A0911
Faults: F0002
Description
A brief regenerative load can be handled using this function (enabled using P1240) without
the inverter being shut down (tripped) with fault message F0002 ("DC link overvoltage"). In
this case, the frequency is controlled (closed-loop) so that the motor doesn't go too far into
regenerative operation.
If the inverter regenerates too much when braking the machine due to a fast ramp-down time
P1121, then the braking ramp/ramp time is automatically extended and the inverter is
operated at the DC link voltage limit r1242 (see figure below). If the DC link again falls below
the threshold r1242, then the Vdc_max controller withdraws the extension of the braking
ramp.
9'&
U
W
9'&BPD[FRQWUROOHUDFWLYH
$

U%LW
W
_I_
IDFW
IVHW
Figure 9-11 Vdc_max controller
On the other hand, if the Vdc_max controller increases the output frequency (e.g. for a
steady-state regenerative load), then the Vdc_max controller is disabled by an internal
inverter monitoring function and the warning A0910 is output. If the regenerative load
continues, the inverter is protected using fault F0002.
Frequency converter
In addition to controlling the DC link (closed-loop), the Vdc_max controller supports the
stabilizing processes of the speed at the end of an acceleration phase. This is especially the
case if there is an overshoot and the motor therefore briefly goes into regenerative operation
(damping effect).
Note
If the DC link voltage exceeds the power-on threshold r1242 (switch-on level of Vdc_max.) of
the Vdc_max controller in the "Ready" state, then the Vdc_max controller is de-activated and
warning A0910 is output.
Cause: The line supply voltage does not match the application situation
Remedy: Refer to parameters P1254 and P0210.
If, in the "Run" state, the DC link voltage exceeds the power-on threshold r1242 and if the
Vdc_max controller output is limited by parameter P1253 for approx. 200 ms, then the
Vdc_max controller is de-activated and the warning A0910 and, where relevant, fault F0002
are output.
Cause: Line supply voltage P0210 or ramp-down time P1121 too low
The moment of inertia of the motor load is too high
Remedy: Refer to parameters P1254, P0210, P1121
Use a braking resistor
9.3.3 Kinetic buffering
Data

r0056 bit 15
P1245, r1246, P1247
P1250
P1256, P1257
Warnings: A0503
Faults: F0003
Description
Brief line supply failures can be buffered using the kinetic buffering function (enabled using
P1240). Line supply failures are buffered using the kinetic energy (i.e. moments of inertia) of
the motor load. In this case the prerequisite is that the motor load has a sufficiently high
moment of inertia - i.e. has sufficient kinetic energy.
Frequency converter
Using this technique, the frequency is controlled (closed-loop), so that energy is fed to the
inverter from the regenerating motor thus covering the system losses. The losses during the
line supply failure still remain which means that the motor speed decreases. When using
kinetic buffering it has to be taken into consideration that the motor speed is reduced.
9'&
3RZHUIDLOXUH
ຘ 3

3
ຘ ຘ 3

3
3RZHUUHVWRUDWLRQ
9GFBPLQ
W
.,%DFWLYH
U
%LW W
,I,
I
I I
W E ຘ 3
3
I
W
WE
Figure 9-12 Kinetic buffering (Vdc_min controller)
When the line supply returns, the energy feed is again from the line side and the output
frequency of the inverter returns to the selected setpoint along the ramp defined by the
ramp-function generator.
Note
When the DC link voltage falls below the minimum VDC_min, fault F0003 "Undervoltage" is
output and the inverter is shut down. The shutdown threshold VDC_min depends on the
inverter type and line supply voltage.
The DC link undervoltage shutdown threshold is 430 V.
Frequency converter
List of Abbreviations A
A.1 Abbreviations
Abbreviations
Table A- 1 Abbreviations
Abbreviations State
A
AC Alternating Current
A/D Analog digital converter
ADR Address
AFM Additional frequency modification
AG Automation Unit
AI Analog input
AK Request Identifier
AO Analog output
AOP Advanced operation panel
ASIC Application-specific integrated circuit
ASP Analog setpoint
ASVM Asymmetric space vector modulation
B
BCC Block check character
BCD Binary-coded decimal code
BI Binector input
BIA Berufsgenossenschaftliches Institut für Arbeitssicherheit
BICO Binector/connector
BO Binector output
BOP Basic Operator Panel
C
C Commissioning
CB Communication board
CCW Counter-clockwise
CDS Command data set
CE Communauté Européenne
CI Connector input
CM Configuration management
CMD Command
CO Connector output
CO/BO Connector output/Binector output
COM Common (terminal is connected to NO or NC)
Frequency converter
List of Abbreviations
A.1 Abbreviations
Abbreviations State
CT Commissioning, ready to run
CU Control Unit
CUT Commissioning, run, ready to run
CW Clockwise
D
DAP Device Access Point
D/A Digital analog converter
DC Direct current
DDS Drive data set
DI Digital input
DIP DIP switch
DO Digital output
DP Distributed I/Os
DP-V1 Acyclic data transfer (extended PROFIBUS function)
DS Drive state
E
ECD Equivalent circuit diagram
EEC European Economic Community
EEPROM Electrical erasable programmable read-only memory
ELCB Earth leakage circuit breaker
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromagnetic force
ES Engineering System
FAQ Frequently asked question
F
Fast FFB Fast freely programmable function blocks
FB Function block
FCC Flux current control
FCL Fast current limiting
FF Fixed frequency
FFB Freely programmable function blocks
FOC Field orientated control
FREQ Frequency
FSA Frame size A
FSB Frame size B
FSC Frame size C
FSD Frame size D
FSE Frame size E
FSF Frame size F
G
GSD Device Data File (Geräte Stamm Datei)
GSG Getting Started Guide
GUI ID Global unique identifier
H
HIW Main actual value
Frequency converter
A.1 Abbreviations
Abbreviations State
HMI Human machine interface
HO High Overload (Constant Torque)
HSW Main setpoint
HTL High-voltage transistor logic
I
I/O In-/output
IBN Commissioning
IGBT Insulated gate bipolar transistor
IND Sub-index
J
JOG JOG
K
KIB Kinetic buffering
L
LCD Liquid crystal display
LED Light emitting diode
LGE Length
LO Light Overload (Variable Torque)
LWL Fiber Optic conductor
M
MHB Motor holding brake
MLP Multi-Language Pack
MOP Motor operated potentiometer
MMC Micro Memory Card
N
NC Normally closed
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NO Normally open
O
OLM Optical Link Module
OLP Optical Link Plug
OM Object Manager
OPI Operating Instructions
P
PAP Parameter Access Point
PID Proportional, integral, derivative controller
PKE Parameter ID
PKW Parameter channel (Parameter/Kennung/Wert)
PLC Programmable logic control
PM Power module
PM-IF Power module interface
PNU Parameter Number
PNO PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation
PPO Parameter process data object
PTC Positive temperature coefficient
Frequency converter
A.1 Abbreviations
Abbreviations State
PWE Parameter value
PWM Pulse-width modulation
Pxxxx Write parameter
PZD Process data area (Prozeßdaten)
Q
QC Quick commissioning
R
RAM Random-access memory
RCCB Residual current circuit breaker
RCD Residual current device
RFG Ramp-function generator
RFI Radio frequency interference
ROM Read-only memory
RPM Revolutions per minute
rxxxx read-only parameters of analogue signals
S
SBC Safe Break Control
SLVC Sensorless vector control
SLS Safe-Limited Speed
SOL Serial option link
SS1 Safe Stop 1
STO Safe Torque Off
STW Control word
STX Start of text
SVM Space vector modulation
T
TTL Transistor-transistor logic
U
USS Universal serial interface
V
V/f Voltage/frequency
VC Vector control
VT Variable torque
W
WEA Automatic restart
Z
ZSW Status word
ZUSW Additional setpoint
Frequency converter
Index
Time controlled forced, 194
2 E
2-wire control, 153, 155 electro-mechanical brake, 74
Electronic brakes, 247
A
F
Analog inputs, 183
Analog outputs, 185 Fail-safe functions, 187
Automatic restart, 59 Fast FFB, 96
Fast free function blocks, 96
FFB, 96
B Fixed frequencies, 161
Flying restart, 62
BICO parameterization, 180 Flying restart with speed encoder, 64
BICO technology, 27 Flying restart without speed encoder, 63
Binector Connector Technology, 27 Forced dynamization, 194
brake Free function blocks, 96
electro-mechanical, 74 frequency control
instant, 80 switch-over to torque control, 147
motor holding, 75
H
C
Heatsink temperature, 50
Chip temperature, 50
Closed-loop control, 108
Closed-loop DC link voltage controller, 261 I
Closed-loop torque control, 143, 145
Compound braking, 252 I_max controller, 120
Current limiting, 120, 150 i2t monitoring, 50
Inputs and outputs, 178
instant brake, 80
D
Data sets, 66 J
DC braking, 248
DC link overvoltage, 261 JOG, 41
DC link undervoltage, 261
Digital inputs, 178
Fixed frequencies, 161 K
Digital outputs, 181 Kinetic buffering, 263
Droop, 142
Dynamic brakes, 254
Dynamic braking, 254 L
dynamization
Forced, 194 Limiting the torque setpoint, 149
Process, 195 Line supply failure, 60
Frequency converter
Index
Line undervoltage, 60 S
Load torque monitoring, 47
Safe Brake Control, 245
Safe Stop 1 function, 207
SafeTorque Off function, 203
M
Safety notes
Maximum fault reaction time, 196 General Warnings, Cautions and Notices, 10
Modification - frequency setpoint, 83 Safety Instructions, 9
Monitoring functions / messages, 44 Setpoint channel, 82
Monitoring parameters, 20 Siemens standard Control, 155
Monitoring the fail-safe functions, 194 Slip compensation, 116
Motor data identification, 31 SLS
Motor holding brake, 75 mode 0, 216
mode 1, 224
mode 2, 232, 237
O Speed controller, 138
speed encoder
Open-loop control, 108
Flying restart with, 64
Overload responses, 50
Flying restart without, 63
Stall limiting, 150
switch-over from frequency to torque control, 147
P
Parameter
Attributes, 21 T
Index, 21
Thermal monitoring functions, 50
Parameter attribute
Time controlled forced dynamization, 194
Access level, 22
torque control
Active, 25
switch-over from frequency control, 147
BICO, 22
Torque limiting, 149
Can be changed, 23
Data type, 23
Grouping, 24
V
Quick commissioning, 25
Unit, 24 V/f control, 109
Value range, 26 Vdc_max controller, 262
Parameters Vector control, 122
Data sets, 26 with speed encoder, 132
PID controller, 165 without speed encoder, 124
PID dancer roll control, 170 Voltage boost, 113
PID fixed setpoint, 175
PID motorized potentiometer, 174
Positioning ramp down, 38
power module monitor temperature and overload, 50
Power module protection, 49
Process dynamization, 195
R
Ramp-function generator, 86
Regenerative braking, 259
Frequency converter
Siemens AG We reserve the right to make technical
Industry Sector changes.
Drive Technologies © Siemens AG 2011
Postfach 3180
91050 ERLANGEN
GERMANY
www.siemens.com/sinamics-g120
SINAMICS G120
Control Units CU240B-2
Control Units CU240E-2
Parameter Manual · 01/2011
SINAMICS
s
s
1
Parameters
2
SINAMICS Function diagrams
3
Faults and Alarms
SINAMICS G120 A
Appendix
Control Units CU240B/E-2
B
Parameter Manual C
Index
Valid for Firmware version

Control Units
CU240B-2 4.4
CU240B-2 DP 4.4
CU240E-2 4.4
CU240E-2 DP 4.4
CU240E-2 F 4.4
CU240E-2 DP F 4.4
A5E02631767B AC
01/2011
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to
prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual
by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These
notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger.
Danger
Warning
Caution
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not
taken.
Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not
taken.
Notice
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of dan-
ger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning
relating to property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning
and operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of
the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to
commission, ground and label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety prac-
tices and standards.
Prescribed Usage of Siemens Products

Note the following:
Warning
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and
only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or
recommended by Siemens.
Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly as
well as careful operation and maintenance.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights
of the owner.
Copyright Siemens AG 2011 All Rights Reserved Disclaimer of Liability
The distribution and duplication of this document or the utilization and We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure
transmission of its contents are not permitted without express written consistency with the hardware and software described. Since
permission. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full
rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed
design, are reserved. regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 4848
90327 NUREMBERG © Siemens AG 2011
GERMANY Technical data subject to change.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft SINAMICS G120 / Control Units CU240B/E-2 Parameter Manual (LH11)
Contents
1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.1 Introduction to Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.1.1 Explanation of list of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.1.2 Numerical ranges of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.2 List of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.3 Command and Drive Data Sets – Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-464
1.3.1 Command Data Sets (CDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-464
1.3.2 Drive Data Sets (DDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-466
1.3.3 Motor Data Sets (MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-471
1.3.4 Power unit Data Set (PDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-473
1.4 Connector/Binector (BICO)-Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-474
1.4.1 Binector Input Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-474
1.4.2 Connector Input Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-476
1.4.3 Binector Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-478
1.4.4 Connector Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-479
1.4.5 Connector/Binector Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-483
1.5 Quick commissioning (p0010 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-485
2 Function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-487

2.1 Contents: function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-488
2.2 Explanations for the function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-493
2.3 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-498
2.4 Input/Output Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-506
2.5 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-517
2.5.1 Fieldbus Interface (USS, Modbus) (CU240B/E-2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-518
2.5.2 PROFIdrive / PROFIBUS (CU240B/E-2 DP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-525
2.6 Internal control/status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-539
2.7 Braking Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-557
2.8 Safety Integrated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-559
2.9 Setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-572
2.10 V/f control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-582
2.11 Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-586
2.12 Free Function Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-606
2.13 Technology functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-627
2.14 Technology controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-629
2.15 Signals and monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-634
2.16 Faults and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-644
© Siemens AG 2011 All Rights Reserved Contents-5

SINAMICS G120 / Control Units CU240B/E-2 Parameter Manual (LH11), 01/2011
Contents
2.17 Data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-649
3 Faults and Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-653

3.1 Faults and Alarms – Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-654
3.1.1 General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-654
3.1.2 Fault reactions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-656
3.1.3 Acknowledgement of faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-657
3.2 List of Faults and Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-658
A Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-733
A.1 ASCII Table (excerpt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-734
A.2 List for motor code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-734
B List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-735
C Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-741
Contents-6 © Siemens AG 2011 All Rights Reserved

Parameters 1
Contents
1.1 Introduction to Parameters 1-8
1.2 List of Parameters 1-16
1.3 Command and Drive Data Sets – Overview 1-464
1.4 Connector/Binector (BICO)-Parameters 1-474
1.5 Quick commissioning (p0010 = 1) 1-485
© Siemens AG 2011 All Rights Reserved 1-7

SINAMICS G120 Control Units CU240B/E-2 Parameter Manual (LH11), 01/2011
Parameters
Introduction to Parameters
1.1 Introduction to Parameters
1.1.1 Explanation of list of parameters
The layout of the parameter description is as follows (example only).
Index BICO (if available)

r0068[0...1] CO: Absolute current actual value / I_act abs val
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: - Scaling: p2002 Data set: -
Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505
Min Max Factory setting
- [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms]
Fig. 1-1 Read-only parameter
Index BICO (if available)

p0700[0...n] Command source selection / Cmd src sel
CU240E-2 Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2 F Can be changed: T Scaling: - Data set: CDS, p0170
Unit group:- Unit selection: -
0 184 0
CU/PM variants
Fig. 1-2 Write parameter
Parameter number
Indicates the relevant parameter number. The numbers used are 4 to 5-digit num-
bers. Numbers prefixed with an “r” indicate that the parameter is a “read-only”
parameter, which displays a particular value but cannot be changed directly by
specifying a different value via this parameter number.
All other parameters are prefixed with a “p”. The values of these parameters can
be changed directly in the range indicated by the “Min” and “Max” settings in the
header. If these values have a physical unit, it is shown in brackets.
[index] indicates that the parameter is an indexed parameter and specifies the
range of indices available.
.0...15 indicates that the parameter has several bits, which can be evaluated or
connected individually.
CU/PM variants
Indicates for which Control Units and/or Power Modules the parameter is valid. If
no CUs or PMs are listed the parameter is valid for all variants.
1-8 © Siemens AG 2011 All Rights Reserved

Parameters
Parameter text (Long name/Short name)

Indicates the name of the relevant parameter.
Certain parameter names include the following abbreviated prefixes: BI, BO, CI,
CO and CO/BO followed by a colon.
These abbreviations have the following meanings:
P9999 Binector Input, i.e. parameter selects the source of a
BI = (0) binary signal
r9999
Binector Output, i.e. parameter connects as a binary
BO =
signal
r9999 Connector Input, i.e. parameter selects the source of an
CI = (999:9) analog signal
Connector Output, i.e. parameter connects as an analog
CO = r9999 [99]
signal
CO/BO =
r9999 Connector/Binector Output, i.e. parameter connects as
r9999
an analog signal and/or as a binary signal
CoBo.pdf
To make use of BICO you will need access to the full parameter list. At this level
many new parameter settings are possible, including BICO functionality. BICO
functionality is a different, more flexible way of setting and combining input and
output functions.
The BICO system allows complex functions to be programmed. Boolean and
mathematical relationships can be set up between inputs (digital, analog, serial
etc.) and outputs (inverter current, frequency, analog output, relays, etc.).
At BI and CI parameters the parameter number is specified under Factory setting
with which this parameter is connected. In this case the Min and Max values have
dashes.
Access level
Indicates the level of user access. For the parameters of all variants of Control
Units CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 there is only one freely accessible access level
effective. The parameters with the declaration "Access level 1“ to "Access level
3“ belong to them. Parameters with "Access level 4“ are service parameters and
password protected.

Parameters
Data type
The data types available are shown in the table below.
Table 1-1 Available data types
Notation Meaning
Unsigned8 (U8) 8-bit unsigned
Integer16 (I16) 16-bit integer
Integer32 (I32) 32-bit integer
FloatingPoint32 (Float) 32-bit floating point number
The information of the data types for binector and connector inputs can be com-
posed of two specifications (discreated by a slash):
 First specification: data type of the parameter
 Second specification: data type of the signal source preferably to be con-
nected (binector or connector output)
Depending on the data type of the BICO input parameter (signal sink) and BICO
output parameter (signal source) the following combinations are possible when
creating BICO interconnections:
Table 1-2 Possible combinations of BICO interconnections
BICO input parameter
CI parameter BI parameter
BICO output parameter Unsigned32 / Unsigned32 / Unsigned32 / Unsigned32 /

Integer16 Integer32 FloatingPoint32 Binary
CO: Unsigned8 x x – –
CO: Integer16 x x r2050 –
CO: Integer32 x x – –
CO: FloatingPoint32 x x x –
BO: Unsigned8 – – – x
BO: Integer16 – – – x
BO: Integer32 – – – x
BO: FloatingPoint32 – – – –
Legend: x: BICO interconnection permitted
–: BICO interconnection not permitted

Parameters
Scaling
Specification of the reference value with which a signal value is automatically con-
verted for a BICO interconnection.
Reference quantities, corresponding to 100 %, are required for the statement of
physical units as percentages. These reference quantities are entered in param-
eters p2000 ... p2007.
In addition to p2000 ... p2007 the following scalings are used:

 PERCENT 1.0 = 100 %
 4000H 4000 hex = 100 %
Calculated
Specifies whether the parameter is influenced by automatic calculations.
p0340 defines the following calculations:
 p0340 = 1 contains the calculations of p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5.
 p0340 = 2 calculates the motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360, p0625).
 p0340 = 3 contains the calculations of p0340 = 4, 5.
 p0340 = 4 only calculates the controller parameters.
 p0340 = 5 only calculates the controller limits.
Note:
For p3900 > 0, also p0340 = 1 is automatically called.
After p1900 = 1, 2, p0340 = 3 is automatically called.
Parameters referring to p0340 in the specification "Calculated" are dependent on

the applied Power Module and motor. In this case, the values of "Factory setting"
do not correspond to the actual values because these values are calculated
during the commissioning. This also applies to the motor parameters.

Parameters
Can be changed
Inverter state in which the parameter is changeable. Three states are possible:
 Commissioning C(x)
 Run U
 Ready to run T
In these states the parameter can be changed. One, two or all three states may
be specified. If all three states are specified, it is possible to change the parameter
setting in all three inverter states. (x) shows, that the parameter is only change-
able when p0010 = x.
Data Set
Parameters which are dependent on a data set are identified as follows:
 CDS (Command Data Set)
They are always indexed with [0 ... n] (with n = 0 ... 3 depending on setting in
p0170).
[0] = Command Data Set 0
[1] = Command Data Set 1
etc.
 DDS (Drive Data Set)
p0180).
[0] = Drive Data Set 0
[1] = Drive Data Set 1
etc.
 MDS (Motor Data Set) and PDS (Power unit Data Set)
p0180). The Motor Data Sets and Power unit Data Sets are allocated to the Drive
Data Sets, i.e. they are automatically addressed with the selection of a Drive Data
Set (e.g. Drive Data Set 1 includes Motor Data Set 1 and Power unit Data Set 1).
Data sets can only be applied and cleared when p0010 = 15 is set.

Parameters
"Unit group" and "Unit selection"

For parameters where the unit can be switched, the specifications for "Unit group"
and "Unit selection" determine the group to which this parameter belongs and with
which parameter the unit can be switched over.
The standard unit of a parameter is specified in square parentheses after the val-
ues for "Min", "Max", and "Factory setting".
Min
Indicates the minimum value to which the parameter can be set.
Max
Indicates the maximum value to which the parameter can be set.
Factory setting
Indicates the default value, i.e. the value which applies if the user does not specify
a particular value for the parameter (see also "Calculated“).
Example:
Unit group: 7_1, unit selection: p0505
The parameter belongs to unit group 7_1 and the unit can be switched over using
p0505.
All the potential unit groups and possible unit selections are listed below.
Table 1-3 Unit group (p0100)
Unit group Unit selection for p0100 = Reference value

at %
0 1 2
7_4 Nm lbf ft Nm -
14_6 kW HP kW -
25_1 kgm2 lb ft2 kgm2 -
27_1 kg lb kg -
28_1 Nm/A lbf ft/A Nm/A -
29_1 N/Arms lbf/Arms N/Arms -

at %
1 2 3 4
2_1 Hz % Hz % p2000
3_1 rpm % rpm % p2000
5_1 Vrms % Vrms % p2001
5_2 V % V % p2001
5_3 V % V % p2001
6_2 Arms % Arms % p2002
6_5 A % A % p2002

Parameters
Table 1-4 Unit group (p0505), continued

at %
1 2 3 4
7_1 Nm % lbf ft % p2003

7_2 Nm Nm lbf ft lbf ft -
14_5 kW % HP % r2004
14_10 kW kW HP HP -
21_1 °C °C °F °F -
21_2 K K °F °F -
39_1 1/s2 % 1/s2 % p2007

at %
Value Unit
9_1 The values that can be set and the technological units are shown in
p0595 (see Chapter 1.2).
Description
Explanation of the parameter function.
Values
List of possible parameter values.
Recommendation
Information about recommended settings.
Index
The name and meaning of each individual index is specified for indexed para-
meters, except indexed parameters which belong to a data set (see "Data Set").
Bit array
For parameters with bit arrays, for each bit the following information is provided:
 Bit number and signal name
 Meaning at signal states 0 and 1
 Function diagram (FP) (optional). The signal is shown on this function dia-
gram.
Dependency
Conditions which need to be fulfilled with regard to this parameter. Also includes
special effects which can occur between this parameter and others.

Parameters
1.1.2 Numerical ranges of parameters
Note:
The following numerical ranges of the parameters describe a general overview of SINAMICS
parameters. The specific parameters are listed in Chapter 1.2.
Table 1-6 Numerical ranges of parameters
Range Description
from to
0000 0099 Operation and visualization
0100 0199 Commissioning
0200 0299 Power Module
0300 0399 Motor
0500 0599 Technology and units
0600 0699 Thermal motor protection and motor model, maximum current
0700 0799 Command sources and terminals on Control Unit
0800 0839 CDS, DDS data sets (e.g. switch over, copy)
0840 0879 Sequence control (e.g. source for ON/OFF1)
0880 0899 Control and status words
0900 0999 PROFIBUS/PROFIdrive
1000 1199 Setpoint channel
1200 1299 Functions (e.g. motor holding brake)
1300 1399 V/f control
1400 1799 Closed-loop control
1800 1899 Gating unit
1900 1999 Power Module and motor identification
2000 2099 Communication (PROFIBUS)
2100 2199 Faults and alarms, monitoring functions
2200 2399 Technology controller
3100 3299 Messages
3800 3860 Compound braking
3900 3999 Management parameters
7800 7899 EEPROM read/write parameters
8500 8599 Data and macro management
8800 8899 PROFIdrive
8900 8999 PROFINET, USB
9300 9399 Safety Integrated
9400 9499 Parameter consistency and storage
9900 9949 Topology
9950 9999 Diagnostics (internal)
20000 20399 Free Function Blocks (FFB)

Parameters
List of Parameters
1.2 List of Parameters
Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4402100, Language: eng

Objects: CU240B-2, CU240B-2 DP, CU240E-2, CU240E-2 DP, CU240E-2 DP F, CU240E-2 F
r0002 Drive operating display / Drv op_display

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Data set: -
Units group: - Unit selection: -

0 200 -
Description: Operating display for the drive.
Value: 0: Operation - everything enabled
10: Operation - set "enable setpoint" = "1" (p1142)
12: Operation - RFG frozen, set "RFG start" = "1" (p1141)
13: Operation - set "enable RFG" = "1" (p1140)
14: Operation - MotID, excit. running
16: Operation - withdraw braking with OFF1 using "ON/OFF1" = "1"
17: Operation - braking with OFF3 can only be interrupted with OFF2
18: Operation - brake on fault, remove fault, acknowledge
19: Operation - DC braking active (p1230, p1231)
21: Ready for operation - set "Operation enable" = "1" (p0852)
22: Ready for operation - de-magnetizing running (p0347)
31: Ready for switching on - set "ON/OFF1" = "0/1" (p0840)
35: Switching on inhibited - carry out first commissioning (p0010)
41: Switching on inhibited - set "ON/OFF1" = "0" (p0840)
42: Switching on inhibited - set "OC/OFF2" = "1" (p0844, p0845)
43: Switching on inhibited - set "OC/OFF3" = "1" (p0848, p0849)
45: Switching on inhibited - rectify fault, acknowledge fault, STO
46: Switching on inhibited - exit comm mode (p0010)
70: Initialization
200: Wait for booting/partial booting
Dependency: Refer to: r0046
Notice: For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed.
Note: OC: Operating condition
RFG: Ramp-function generator
COMM: Commissioning
MotID: Motor data identification
p0003 Access level / Acc_level

Can be changed: C, U, T Scaling: - Data set: -

3 4 3
Description: Sets the access level to read and write parameters.
Value: 3: Expert
4: Service
Note: Access level 3 (experts):
Expert know-how is required for these parameters (e.g. BICO parameterization).
Access level 4 (service):
For these parameters, it is necessary that authorized service personnel enter the appropriate password (p3950).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter / Drv comm. par_filt

CU240B-2 Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240B-2 DP Can be changed: C(1), T Scaling: - Data set: -

0 49 1
Description: Sets the parameter filter to commission a drive.
Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
Value: 0: Ready
1: Quick commissioning
2: Power unit commissioning
3: Motor commissioning
5: Technological application/units
15: Data sets
29: Only Siemens internal
30: Parameter reset
Notice: When the parameter is reset to a value of 0, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note: The drive can only be powered up outside the drive commissioning (inverter enable). To realize this, this parameter
must be set to 0.
By setting p3900 to a value other than 0, the quick commissioning is completed, and this parameter is automatically
reset to 0.
Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1.
Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time, the motor parameters suitable for the power unit have
been defined, and the control parameters have been calculated accordingly, p0010 is automatically reset to 0.
p0010 = 3 is used for the subsequent commissioning of additional drive data sets (creating data sets: see p0010 =
15).
p0010 = 29, 39, 49: Only for internal Siemens use!

Parameters
List of Parameters

PM230 Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16
CU240E-2 Can be changed: C(1), T Scaling: - Data set: -
CU240E-2 DP Units group: - Unit selection: -
CU240E-2 DP F
CU240E-2 F

0 49 1
Value: 0: Ready
15: Data sets
30: Parameter reset
must be set to 0.
reset to 0.
15).

Parameters
List of Parameters

PM250 Can be changed: C(1), T Scaling: - Data set: -
PM260 Units group: - Unit selection: -
CU240E-2
CU240E-2 DP
CU240E-2 DP F
CU240E-2 F

0 95 1
Value: 0: Ready
15: Data sets
30: Parameter reset
95: Safety Integrated commissioning
must be set to 0.
reset to 0.
15).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0014 Buffer memory mode / Buf mem mode

Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Data set: -

0 2 0
Description: Sets the mode for the buffer memory.
Value: 0: Save in a non-volatile fashion (RAM)
1: Buffer memory active (non-volatile)
2: Clear buffer memory
Dependency: If p0014 = 1, changes in the same parameter, as well as in following parameters will not be copied to the buffer
memory:
Refer to: p0040, p0340, p0650, p0802, p0803, p0804, p0952, p0969, p0970, p0971, p0972, p1900, p1910, p1960,
p2111, p3900, p3981
Refer to: A01066, A01067
Caution: For p0014 = 2, entries in the buffer memory are lost and cannot be retrieved.
Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note: The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.
Re p0014 = 0:
Parameter changes are saved in the volatile memory (RAM).
Non-volatile storage from RAM to ROM is carried out in the following cases:
- p0971 = 1
- change from p0014 = 0 to 1
Re p0014 = 1:
With this setting, alarm A01066 followed by alarm A01067 can occur if parameters are continually changed via a
fieldbus system.
Parameter changes are entered in the volatile memory (RAM) and also in the non-volatile buffer memory.
In the following cases, the entries in the buffer memory are transferred into the ROM and then the buffer memory is
cleared:
- p0971 = 1
- power down/power up the Control Unit
- change from p0014 = 1 to 0
Re p0014 = 2:
The procedure to clear the entries in the buffer memory is initiated.
p0014 is automatically set to 0 after the entries have been cleared.
p0015 Macro drive unit / Macro drv unit

CU240B-2 Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2 Can be changed: C, C(1) Scaling: - Data set: -
CU240E-2 F Units group: - Unit selection: -

0 999999 12
Description: Runs the corresponding macro files.
The selected macro file must be available on the memory card/device memory.
Example:
p0015 = 6 --> the macro file PM000006.ACX is run.
Dependency: Refer to: p0700, p1000, p1500, r8570
Caution: When executing a specific macro, the corresponding programmed settings are made and become active.
Note: The macros in the specified directory are displayed in r8570. r8570 is not in the expert list of the commissioning
software.
Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0015 Macro drive unit / Macro drv unit

CU240B-2 DP Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2 DP Can be changed: C, C(1) Scaling: - Data set: -
CU240E-2 DP F Units group: - Unit selection: -

0 999999 7
Description: Runs the corresponding macro files.
The selected macro file must be available on the memory card/device memory.
Example:
p0015 = 6 --> the macro file PM000006.ACX is run.
Dependency: Refer to: p0700, p1000, p1500, r8570
Note: The macros in the specified directory are displayed in r8570. r8570 is not in the expert list of the commissioning
software.
Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product.
r0018 Control Unit Firmware-Version / CU FW version

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32

0 4294967295 -
Description: Displays the firmware version of the Control Unit.
Dependency: Refer to: r0197, r0198
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
r0020 Speed setpoint smoothed / n_set smth

Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505

- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the currently smoothed speed setpoint at the input of the speed controller or U/f characteristic (after the
interpolator).
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The speed setpoint is available smoothed (r0020) and unsmoothed (r0060).

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0021 CO: Actual speed smoothed / n_act smooth


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the motor speed.
The speed actual value is available smoothed (r0021, r0022) and unsmoothed (r0063).
r0022 Speed actual value rpm smoothed / n_act rpm smooth


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the motor speed.
r0022 is identical to r0021, however, it always has units of rpm and contrary to r0021 cannot be changed over.
The speed actual value is available smoothed (r0021, r0022) and unsmoothed (r0063).
r0024 Output frequency smoothed / f_outp smooth


- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Displays the smoothed converter frequency.
The output frequency is available smoothed (r0024) and unsmoothed (r0066).
r0025 CO: Output voltage smoothed / U_outp smooth


- [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms]
Description: Displays the smoothed output voltage of the power unit.
The output voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072).

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0026 CO: DC link voltage smoothed / Vdc smooth


- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the DC link voltage.
Notice: When measuring a DC link voltage < 200 V, for the Power Module (e.g. PM240) a valid measured value is not sup-
plied. In this case, when an external 24 V power supply is connected, a value of approx. 24 V is displayed in the dis-
play parameter.
The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070).
r0026 sets itself to the lower value of the pulsating DC link voltage.
r0027 CO: Absolute actual current smoothed / I_act abs val smth

Description: Displays the smoothed absolute actual current value.
Notice: This smoothed signal is not suitable for diagnostics or evaluation of dynamic operations. In this case, the
unsmoothed value should be used.
The absolute current actual value is available smoothed (r0027) and unsmoothed (r0068).
r0028 Modulation depth smoothed / Mod_depth smth


- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the modulation depth.
The modulation depth is available smoothed (r0028) and unsmoothed (r0074).
r0029 Current actual value field-generating smoothed / Id_act smooth


Description: Displays the smoothed field-generating actual current.
The field-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076).

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0030 Current actual value torque-generating smoothed / Iq_act smooth


Description: Displays the smoothed torque-generating actual current.
The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030) and unsmoothed (r0078).
r0031 Actual torque smoothed / M_act smooth


- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the smoothed torque actual value.
The active current actual value is available smoothed (r0031) and unsmoothed (r0080).
r0032 CO: Active power actual value smoothed / P_actv_act smth

Can be changed: - Scaling: r2004 Data set: -

- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the active power.
Notice: This smoothed signal is not suitable for diagnostics or evaluation of dynamic operations. In this case, the
unsmoothed value should be used.
Note: Power delivered at the motor shaft.
The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms) and unsmoothed (r0082).

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0033 Torque utilization smoothed / M_util smooth

Can be changed: - Scaling: PERCENT Data set: -

- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the smoothed torque utilization as a percentage.
The torque utilization is obtained from the required smoothed torque in reference to the torque limit, scaled using
p2196.
Dependency: This parameter is only available for vector control. For U/f control r0033 = 0 %.
The torque utilization is available smoothed (r0033) and unsmoothed (r0081).
For M_set total (r0079) > 0, the following applies:
- Required torque = M_set total
- Actual torque limit = M_max upper effective (r1538)
For M_set total (r0079) <= 0, the following applies:
- Required torque = - M_set total
- Actual torque limit = - M_max lower effective (r1539)
For the actual torque limit = 0, the following applies: r0033 = 100 %
For the actual torque limit < 0, the following applies: r0033 = 0 %
r0034 CO: Motor utilization / Motor utilization


- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the motor utilization from the thermal I2t motor model.
Dependency: The motor utilization is only determined for permanent-magnet synchronous motors and if the I2t motor model is
activated.
The motor utilization is formed from the ratio between the I2t motor model temperature (minus 40 Kelvin) and the
reference value p0605 (motor overtemperature, fault threshold) - 40 Kelvin. If p0605 is reduced, r0034 increases
and the motor temperature remains the same.
Refer to: p0611, p0612, p0615
A value of r0034 = -200.0 % indicates an invalid display, for example, because the thermal I2t motor model was not
activated or was incorrectly parameterized.
r0035 CO: Motor temperature / Mot temp


- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the actual temperature in the motor.
Note: For r0035 not equal to -200.0 °C, the following applies:
- this temperature display is valid.
- a KTY sensor is connected.
- for induction motors, the thermal motor model is activated (p0601 = 0).
For r0035 equal to -200.0 °C, the following applies:
- this temperature display is not valid (temperature sensor error).
- A PTC sensor or bimetallic NC contact is connected.
- for synchronous motors, the thermal motor model is activated (p0601 = 0).

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0036 CO: Power unit overload I2t / PU overload I2t


- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the power unit overload determined using the I2t calculation.
A current reference value is defined for the I2t monitoring of the power unit. It represents the current that can be
conducted by the power unit without any influence of the switching losses (e.g. the continuously permissible current
of the capacitors, inductances, busbars, etc.).
If the I2t reference current of the power unit is not exceeded, then an overload (0 %) is not displayed.
In the other case, the degree of thermal overload is calculated, whereby 100% results in a trip.
Dependency: Refer to: p0290, p0294
Refer to: F30005
r0037[0...19] CO: Power unit temperatures / PU temperatures


- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the temperatures in the power unit.
Index: [0] = Inverter
[1] = Depletion layer
[2] = Reserved
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Interior of power unit
[5] = Inverter 1
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
[8] = Reserved
[9] = Reserved
[10] = Reserved
[11] = Reserved
[12] = Reserved
[13] = Depletion layer 1
[14] = Reserved
[15] = Reserved
[16] = Reserved
[17] = Reserved
[18] = Reserved
[19] = Reserved
Note: The value of -200 indicates that there is no measuring signal.
r0038 Power factor smoothed / Cos phi smooth


- - -
Description: Displays the smoothed actual power factor.
Significance for the motor: Motor power factor
Significance for the infeed: Power factor at the connection point (p3470, p3471)

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0039 Energy consumption / Energy consumption


- [kWh] - [kWh] - [kWh]
Description: Displays the electrical energy used since the last reset.
Dependency: Refer to: p0040
p0040 Reset energy consumption display / Energy usage reset


0 1 0
Description: Setting to reset the energy consumption display (r0039).
Procedure:
Set p0040 = 0 --> 1
The display is reset and the parameter is automatically set to zero.
r0041 Energy usage saved / Energy usage saved


- [kWh] - [kWh] - [kWh]
Description: Displays the saved energy referred to 100 operating hours.
p0045 Smoothing time constant, display values / T_smth display


0.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms] 4.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant for the following display values:
r0063[1], r0068[1], r0080[1], r0082[1].

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0046.0...31 CO/BO: Missing enable sig / Missing enable sig


- - -
Description: Displays missing enable signals that are preventing the closed-loop drive control from being commissioned.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal FP
00 OFF1 enable missing Yes No -
03 Operation enable missing Yes No -
04 DC braking enable missing Yes No -
10 Ramp-function generator enable missing Yes No -
11 Ramp-function generator start missing Yes No -
12 Setpoint enable missing Yes No -
16 OFF1 enable internal missing Yes No -
19 Pulse enable internal missing Yes No -
20 DC braking internal enable missing Yes No -
21 PU enab. missing Yes No -
26 Drive inactive or not operational Yes No -
27 De-magnetizing not completed Yes No -
28 Brake open missing Yes No -
30 Speed controller inhibited Yes No -
31 Jog setpoint active Yes No -

Parameters
List of Parameters
Note: The value r0046 = 0 indicates that all enable signals for this drive are present.
Bit 00 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0840 is a 0 signal.
- there is a "switching on inhibited".
- the signal source in p0844 or p0845 is a 0 signal.
- the signal source in p0848 or p0849 is a 0 signal.
Bit 04 =1 (DC brake active) when:
- the signal source in p1230 has a 1 signal
Bit 11 = 1 (enable signal missing) if the speed setpoint is frozen, because:
- the speed setpoint is entered from jogging and the two signal sources for jogging, bit 0 (p1055) and bit 1 (p1056)
have a 1 signal.
- there is an OFF1 fault response. The system is only enabled if the fault is removed and was acknowledged and
the "switching on inhibited" withdrawn with OFF1 = 0.
- commissioning mode is selected (p0010 > 0).
- there is an OFF2 fault response.
- the drive is not operational.
- OFF3 has still not been completed or an OFF3 fault response is present.
Bit 19 = 1 (internal pulse enable missing), if:
- sequence control does not have a finished message.
Bit 20 = 1 (internal DC brake active), if:
- the drive is not in the state "Operation" or in "OFF1/3".
- the internal pulse enable is missing (r0046.19 = 0).
- the power unit does not issue an enable signal (e.g. because DC link voltage is too low).
- the holding brake opening time (p1216) has still not expired.
- hibernation is active.
- the drive is not operational.
- de-magnetization not completed.
- the holding brake is closed or has still not been opened.
Bit 30 = 1 (speed controller inhibited), if one of the following reasons is present:
- the pole position identification is active.
- motor data identification is active (only certain steps).
- the speed setpoint from jog 1 or 2 is entered.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0047 Motor data ident. routine and speed controller optimization / MotID and n_opt

0 300 -
Description: Displays the actual status for the motor data identification (stationary measurement) and the speed/velocity control-
ler optimization (rotating measurement).
Value: 0: No measurement
115: Measurement q leakage inductance (part 2)
120: Speed controller optimization (vibration test)
140: Calculate speed controller setting
150: Measurement, moment of inertia
170: Measurement, magnetizing current and saturation characteristic
195: Measurement q leakage inductance (part 1)
200: Rotating measurement selected
220: identification, leakage inductance
230: Identification, rotor time constant
240: Identification, stator inductance
250: Identification, stator inductance LQLD
270: Identification, stator resistance
290: Identification, valve lockout time
300: Stationary measurement selected
Note: Re r0047 = 300:
This value is also displayed if encoder calibration p1990 is selected.
r0050.0...1 CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS effective / CDS effective


- - -
Description: Displays the effective Command Data Set (CDS).
00 CDS eff., bit 0 ON OFF -
01 CDS eff., bit 1 ON OFF -
Dependency: Refer to: p0810, p0811, r0836
Note: The Command Data Set selected using a binector input (e.g. p0810) is displayed using r0836.
r0051.0...1 CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS effective / DDS effective


- - -
Description: Displays the effective Drive Data Set (DDS).
00 DDS eff., bit 0 ON OFF -
01 DDS eff., bit 1 ON OFF -
Note: When selecting the motor data identification routine and the rotating measurement, the drive data set changeover is
suppressed.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0052.0...15 CO/BO: Status word 1 / ZSW 1


- - -
Description: Displays status word 1.
00 Rdy for switch on Yes No -
01 Ready Yes No -
02 Operation enabled Yes No -
03 Fault present Yes No -
04 Coast down active (OFF2) No Yes -
05 Quick Stop active (OFF3) No Yes -
06 Switching on inhibited active Yes No -
07 Alarm present Yes No -
08 Deviation, setpoint/actual speed No Yes -
09 Control request Yes No -
10 Maximum speed reached Yes No -
11 I, M, P limit reached No Yes -
12 Motor holding brake open Yes No -
13 Alarm motor overtemperature No Yes -
14 Motor rotates forwards Yes No -
15 Alarm drive converter overload No Yes -
Caution: p2080 is used to define the signal sources of the PROFIdrive status word interconnection.
Note: The following status bits are displayed in r0052.
Bit 00: r0899 Bit 0
Bit 01: r0899 Bit 1
Bit 02: r0899 Bit 2
Bit 03: r2139 Bit 3 (or r1214 Bit 10, if p1210 > 0)
Bit 04: r0899 Bit 4
Bit 05: r0899 Bit 5
Bit 06: r0899 Bit 6
Bit 07: r2139 Bit 7
Bit 08: r2197 Bit 7
Bit 09: r0899 Bit 7
Bit 10: r2197 Bit 6
Bit 11: r0056 Bit 13 (negated)
Bit 12: r0899 Bit 12
Bit 14: r2197 Bit 3

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - -
Description: Displays status word 2.
00 DC braking active Yes No -
01 |n_act| > p1226 (n_standstill) Yes No -
02 |n_act| > p1080 (n_min) Yes No -
03 I_act >= p2170 Yes No -
04 |n_act| > p2155 Yes No -
05 |n_act| <= p2155 Yes No -
06 |n_act| >= r1119 (n_set) Yes No -
07 Vdc <= p2172 Yes No -
08 Vdc > p2172 Yes No -
09 Ramp-up/ramp-down completed Yes No -
10 Technology controller output at the lower Yes No -
limit
11 Technology controller output at the upper Yes No -
limit
Caution: p2081 is used to define the signal sources of the PROFIdrive status word interconnection.
Note: The following status bits are displayed in r0053:
Bit 00: r1239 Bit 8
Bit 03: r2197 Bit 8
Bit 04: r2197 Bit 2
Bit 05: r2197 Bit 1
Bit 06: r2197 Bit 4
Bit 07: r2197 Bit 9
Bit 08: r2197 Bit 10
Bit 10: r2349 Bit 10
Bit 11: r2349 Bit 11

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0054.0...15 CO/BO: Control word 1 / STW 1


- - -
Description: Displays control word 1.
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No -
01 OC / OFF2 Yes No -
03 Operation enable Yes No -
04 Ramp-function generator enable Yes No -
05 Continue ramp-function generator Yes No -
06 Speed setpoint enable Yes No -
07 Acknowledge fault Yes No -
08 Jog bit 0 Yes No 3030
10 Master ctrl by PLC Yes No -
11 Direction reversal (setpoint) Yes No -
13 Motorized potentiometer raise Yes No -
14 Motorized potentiometer lower Yes No -
15 CDS bit 0 Yes No -
Note: The following control bits are displayed in r0054:
Bit 00: r0898 Bit 0
Bit 01: r0898 Bit 1
Bit 02: r0898 Bit 2
Bit 03: r0898 Bit 3
Bit 04: r0898 Bit 4
Bit 05: r0898 Bit 5
Bit 06: r0898 Bit 6
Bit 07: r2138 Bit 7
Bit 08: r0898 Bit 8
Bit 09: r0898 Bit 9
Bit 10: r0898 Bit 10
Bit 11: r1198 Bit 11
Bit 13: r1198 Bit 13
Bit 14: r1198 Bit 14
Bit 15: r0836 Bit 0
Re bit 10:
If p0700 = 2 is set, bit 10 always shows "1".

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0055.0...15 CO/BO: Supplementary control word / Suppl STW


- - -
Description: Displays supplementary control word.
00 Fixed setp bit 0 Yes No -
04 DDS select. bit 0 Yes No -
05 DDS select. bit 1 Yes No -
08 Technology controller enable Yes No -
09 DC braking enable Yes No -
11 Droop enable Yes No -
12 Torque control active Yes No -
13 External fault 1 (F07860) No Yes -
15 CDS bit 1 Yes No -
Note: The following control bits are displayed in r0055:
Bit 00: r1198 Bit 0
Bit 01: r1198 Bit 1
Bit 02: r1198 Bit 2
Bit 03: r1198 Bit 3
Bit 04: r0837 Bit 0
Bit 05: r0837 Bit 1
Bit 09: r1239 Bit 11
Bit 11: r1406 Bit 11
Bit 12: r1406 Bit 12
Bit 13: r2138 Bit 13
Bit 15: r0836 Bit 1

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0056.0...15 CO/BO: Status word, closed-loop control / ZSW cl-loop ctrl

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16
PM240 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Data set: -

- - -
Description: Displays the status word of the closed-loop control.
00 Initialization completed Yes No -
01 De-magnetizing completed Yes No -
02 Pulse enable present Yes No -
03 Soft starting present Yes No -
04 Magnetizing completed Yes No -
05 Voltage boost when starting Active Inactive 6300
06 Acceleration voltage Active Inactive 6300
07 Frequency negative Yes No -
08 Field weakening active Yes No -
09 Voltage limit active Yes No 6714
10 Slip limit active Yes No 6310
11 Frequency limit active Yes No -
12 Current limiting controller voltage output Yes No -
active
13 Current/torque limiting Active Inactive 6060
14 Vdc_max controller active Yes No 6220,
6320
15 Vdc_min controller active Yes No 6220,
6320

PM260 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Data set: -

- - -
Description: Displays the status word of the closed-loop control.
00 Initialization completed Yes No -
01 De-magnetizing completed Yes No -
02 Pulse enable present Yes No -
03 Soft starting present Yes No -
04 Magnetizing completed Yes No -
05 Voltage boost when starting Active Inactive 6300
06 Acceleration voltage Active Inactive 6300
07 Frequency negative Yes No -
08 Field weakening active Yes No -
09 Voltage limit active Yes No 6714
10 Slip limit active Yes No 6310
11 Frequency limit active Yes No -
12 Current limiting controller voltage output Yes No -
active
13 Current/torque limiting Active Inactive 6060

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0060 CO: Speed setpoint before the setpoint filter / n_set before filt.

- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the actual speed setpoint at the input of the speed controller or U/f characteristic (after the interpolator).
Note: The speed setpoint is available smoothed (r0020) and unsmoothed (r0060).
r0062 CO: Speed setpoint after the filter / n_set after filter

- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the actual speed setpoint after the setpoint filters.
r0063[0...2] CO: Speed actual value / n_act


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the actual speed of the closed-loop speed control and the U/f control.
Index: [0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
[2] = Calculated from f_set - f_slip
Note: The speed actual value r0063[0] is additionally displayed - smoothed with p0045 - in r0063[1].
The speed (r0063[2]) calculated from the output frequency and slip can only be compared with the speed actual
value (r0063[0]) in the steady-state.
r0064 CO: Speed controller system deviation / n_ctrl system dev


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the actual system deviation of the speed controller.
r0065 Slip frequency / f_Slip


- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Displays the slip frequency for induction motors (ASM).

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0066 CO: Output frequency / f_outp


- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Displays the output frequency of the power unit.
Note: The output frequency is available smoothed (r0024) and unsmoothed (r0066).
r0067 CO: Output current, maximum / I_outp max


Description: Displays the maximum output current of the power unit.
Dependency: The maximum output current is determined by the parameterized current limit and the motor and converter thermal
protection.
Refer to: p0290, p0640


Description: Displays actual absolute current.
Notice: The value is updated with the current controller sampling time.
Note: Absolute current value = sqrt(Iq^2 + Id^2)
The absolute value of the current actual value is available smoothed (r0027 with 300 ms, r0068[1] with p0045) and
unsmoothed (r0068[0]).
r0069[0...6] CO: Phase current actual value / I_phase act value


- [A] - [A] - [A]
Description: Displays the measured actual phase currents as peak value.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
[3] = Phase U offset
[4] = Phase V offset
[5] = Phase W offset
[6] = Total U, V, W
Note: In indices 3 ... 5, the offset currents of the 3 phases, which are added to correct the phase currents, are displayed.
The sum of the 3 corrected phase currents is displayed in index 6.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0070 CO: Actual DC link voltage / Vdc act val


- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the measured actual value of the DC link voltage.
Notice: When measuring a DC link voltage < 200 V, for the Power Module (e.g. PM240) a valid measured value is not sup-
plied. In this case, when an external 24 V power supply is connected, a value of approx. 24 V is displayed in the dis-
play parameter.
Note: The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070).
r0071 Maximum output voltage / U_output max


Description: Displays the maximum output voltage.
Dependency: The maximum output voltage depends on the actual DC link voltage (r0070) and the maximum modulation depth
(p1803).
Note: As the (driven) motor load increases, the maximum output voltage drops as a result of the reduction in DC link volt-
age.
r0072 CO: Output voltage / U_output


Description: Displays the actual output voltage of the power unit.
Note: The output voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072).
r0073 Maximum modulation depth / Modulat_depth max


- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the maximum modulation depth.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0074 CO: Modulat_depth / Modulat_depth


- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the actual modulation depth.
Note: For space vector modulation, 100% corresponds to the maximum output voltage without overcontrol.
Values above 100 % indicate an overcontrol condition - values below 100% have no overcontrol.
The phase voltage (phase-to-phase, rms) is calculated as follows:(r0074 x r0070) / (sqrt(2) x 100 %).
The modulation depth is available smoothed (r0028) and unsmoothed (r0074).
r0075 CO: Current setpoint field-generating / Id_set


Description: Displays the field-generating current setpoint (Id_set).
Note: This value is irrelevant for the U/f control mode.
r0076 CO: Current actual value field-generating / Id_act


Description: Displays the field-generating current actual value (Id_act).
The field-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076).
r0077 CO: Current setpoint torque-generating / Iq_set


Description: Displays the torque/force generating current setpoint.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0078 CO: Current actual value torque-generating / Iq_act


Description: Displays the torque-generating current actual value (Iq_act).
The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030 with 300 ms) and unsmoothed (r0078).
r0079 CO: Torque setpoint / M_set total


- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the torque setpoint at the output of the speed controller.
r0080[0...1] CO: Torque actual value / M_act


- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the actual torque value.
Note: The torque actual value is available smoothed (r0031 with 100 ms, r0080[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed
(r0080[0]).
r0081 CO: Torque utilization / M_Utilization


- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the torque utilization as a percentage.
The torque utilization is obtained from the required smoothed torque referred to the torque limit.
Dependency: This parameter is only available for vector control. For U/f control r0081 = 0 %.
Refer to: r0033
Note: The torque utilization is available smoothed (r0033) and unsmoothed (r0081).
The torque utilization is obtained from the required torque referred to the torque limit as follows:
- Positive torque: r0081 = (r0079 / r1538) * 100 %
- Negative torque: r0081 = (-r0079 / -r1539) * 100 %

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0082[0...2] CO: Active power actual value / P_act

Can be changed: - Scaling: r2004 Data set: -

- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]
Description: Displays the instantaneous active power.
[2] = Electric power
Note: The mechanical active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms, r0082[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed
(r0082[0]).
r0083 CO: Flux setpoint / Flex setp


- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the flux setpoint.
r0084[0...1] CO: Flux actual value / Flux act val


- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the flux actual value.
[1] = Smoothed
r0087 CO: Actual power factor / Cos phi act


- - -
Description: Displays the actual active power factor.
r0089[0...2] Actual phase voltage / U_phase act val


- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the actual phase voltage.
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
Note: The values are determined from the transistor power-on duration.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0094 CO: Transformation angle / Transformat_angle


- [°] - [°] - [°]
Description: Displays the transformation angle.
Note: The transformation angle corresponds to the electrical commutation angle.
p0100 IEC/NEMA mot stds / IEC/NEMA mot stds

Can be changed: C(1) Scaling: - Data set: -

0 2 0
Description: Defines whether the motor and drive converter power settings (e.g. rated motor power - p0307) are expressed in
[kW] or [hp].
Depending on the selection, the rated motor frequency (p0310) is either set to 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
For p0100 = 0, 2, the following applies: The power factor (p0308) should be parameterized.
For p0100 = 1, the following applies: The efficiency (p0309) should be parameterized.
Value: 0: IEC-Motor (50 Hz, SI units)
1: NEMA motor (60 Hz, US units)
2: NEMA motor (60 Hz, SI units)
Dependency: If p0100 is changed, all of the rated motor parameters are reset. Only then are possible unit changeovers made.
The units of all motor parameters are changed that are involved in the selection of IEC or NEMA (e.g. r0206, p0307,
r0333, r0334, p0341, p0344, r1969).
Refer to: r0206, p0210, p0300, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0308, p0309, p0310, p0311, p0314, p0320, p0322, p0323,
p0335, r0337, p1800
Note: The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (p0010 = 30, p0970).
p0170 Number of Command Data Sets (CDS) / CDS count


2 4 2
Description: Sets the number of Command Data Sets (CDS).
Dependency: Refer to: p0010, r3996
Notice: When the data sets are created, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note: It is possible to toggle between command parameters (BICO parameters) using this data set changeover.
p0180 Number of Drive Data Sets (DDS) / DDS count


1 4 1
Description: Sets the number of Drive Data Sets (DDS).
Notice: When the data sets are created, short-term communication interruptions may occur.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0197 Bootloader vers / Bootloader vers


- - -
Description: Displays the bootloader version.
Note: Example:
r0198[0...1] BIOS/EEPROM data version / BIOS/EEPROM vers


- - -
Description: Displays the BIOS and EEPROM data version.
r0198[0]: BIOS version
r0198[1]: EEPROM data version
Note: Example:
p0199[0...24] Drive object name / DO name

Can be changed: C Scaling: - Data set: -

0 65535 0
Description: Freely assignable name for a drive object.
In the commissioning software, this name cannot be entered using the expert list, but is specified in the configura-
tion assistant. The object name can be subsequently modified in the Project Navigator using standard Windows
resources.
r0200[0...n] Power unit code number actual / PU code no. act

Can be changed: - Scaling: - Data set: PDS

- - -
Description: Displays the unique code number of the power unit.
Note: r0200 = 0: No power unit data found

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0201[0...n] Power unit code number / PU code no

Can be changed: C(2) Scaling: - Data set: PDS

0 65535 0
Description: Sets the actual code number from r0200 to acknowledge the power unit being used.
When commissioned for the first time, the code number is automatically transferred from r0200 into p0201.
Note: The parameter is used to identify when the drive is being commissioned for the first time.
The power unit commissioning can only be exited (p0201 = r0200), if the actual and acknowledged code numbers
are identical (p0010 = 2).
When the code number is changed, the connection voltage (p0210) is checked and, if necessary, adjusted.
r0203[0...n] Actual power unit type / PU actual type


2 400 -
Description: Displays the type of power unit found.
Value: 2: MICROMASTER 440
3: MICROMASTER 411
4: MICROMASTER 410
5: MICROMASTER 436
6: MICROMASTER 440 PX
7: MICROMASTER 430
100: SINAMICS S
101: SINAMICS S (value)
102: SINAMICS S (combi)
112: PM220 (SINAMICS G120)
118: SINAMICS G120 Px
120: PM340 (SINAMICS S120)
133: SINAMICS G120C
150: SINAMICS G
200: SINAMICS GM
250: SINAMICS SM
260: SINAMICS SM120
300: SINAMICS GL
350: SINAMICS SL
400: SINAMICS DCM
Note: For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0204[0...n] Power unit hardware properties / PU HW property


- - -
Description: Displays the properties supported by the power unit hardware.
01 RFI filter available Yes No -
07 F3E regenerative feedback into the line sup- Yes No -
ply
08 Internal Braking Module Yes No -
12 Safe Brake Control (SBC) supported No Yes -
14 Internal LC output filter Yes No -
p0205 Power unit application / PU application

Can be changed: C(1, 2) Scaling: - Data set: -

0 1 1
Description: The duty cycles can be overloaded provided that the drive converter is operated with its base load current before
and after the overload. This is based on a load duty cycle of 300 s.
Value: 0: Load duty cycle with high overload for vector drives
1: Load duty cycle with low overload for vector drives
Notice: The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (see p0010 = 30, p0970).
When the power unit use is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note: When the parameter is changed, all of the motor parameters, the technological application and the control mode
are pre-assigned according to the selected application. The parameter has not influence when calculating the ther-
mal overload.
p0205 can only be changed to the settings that are saved in the power unit EEPROM.
p0205 Power unit application / PU application

PM250, PM260 Can be changed: C(1, 2) Scaling: - Data set: -

0 1 0
Description: The duty cycles can be overloaded provided that the drive converter is operated with its base load current before
and after the overload. This is based on a load duty cycle of 300 s.
Value: 0: Load duty cycle with high overload for vector drives
1: Load duty cycle with low overload for vector drives
Notice: The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (see p0010 = 30, p0970).
When the power unit use is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note: When the parameter is changed, all of the motor parameters, the technological application and the control mode
are pre-assigned according to the selected application. The parameter has not influence when calculating the ther-
mal overload.
p0205 can only be changed to the settings that are saved in the power unit EEPROM.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0206[0...4] Rated power unit power / PU P_rated


- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]
Description: Displays the rated power unit power for various load duty cycles.
Index: [0] = Rated value
[1] = Load duty cycle with low overload
[2] = Load duty cycle with high overload
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Reserved
Dependency: IECdrives (p0100 = 0): Units kW
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): Units hp
r0207[0...4] Rated power unit current / PU PI_rated


Description: Displays the rated power unit power for various load duty cycles.
Index: [0] = Rated value
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Reserved
r0208 Rated power unit line supply voltage / PU U_rated


Description: Displays the rated line supply voltage of the power unit.
r0208 = 400 : 380 - 480 V +/-10 %
r0208 = 500 : 500 - 600 V +/-10 %
r0208 = 690 : 660 - 690 V +/-10 %
r0209[0...4] Power unit, maximum current / PU I_max


Description: Displays the maximum output current of the power unit.
Index: [0] = Catalog
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Reserved

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0210 Drive unit line supply voltage / V_connect

Can be changed: C(2), T Scaling: - Data set: -

1 [V] 63000 [V] 400 [V]
Description: Sets the drive unit supply voltage (rms value of the phase-to-phase line supply voltage).
Dependency: Set p1254, p1294 (automatic detection of the Vdc switch-on levels) = 0.
The switch-in thresholds of the Vdc_max controller are then directly determined using p0210.
Warning: In the case of regenerative power units (PM250, PM260), the regenerative power limit for U/f control current limita-
tion control is calculated as a proportion of the supply voltage p0210. Therefore, p0210 should not be set to a value
higher than the actual line voltage.
Caution: If the line supply voltage is higher than the entered value, the Vdc controller may be automatically de-activated in
some cases to prevent the motor from accelerating. In this case, an appropriate alarm is output.
Note: Setting ranges for p0210 as a function of the rated power unit voltage:
U_rated = 230 V:
- p0210 = 200 ... 240 V
U_rated = 400 V:
- p0210 = 380 ... 480 V
U_rated = 500 V:
- p0210 = 500 ... 600 V
U_rated = 690 V:
- p0210 = 660 ... 690 V
The pre-charging switch-in threshold for the DC link voltage (Vdc) is calculated from p0210:
Vdc_pre = p0210 * 0.82 * 1.35
The undervoltage thresholds for the DC link voltage (Vdc) are calculated from p0210 as a function of the rated
power unit voltage:
U_rated = 400 V:
- U_min = p0210 * 0.78 > 360 V
U_rated = 500 V:
- U_min = p0210 * 0.76
U_rated = 690 V:
- U_min = p0210 * 0.74 > 450 V

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0230 Drive filter type, motor side / Drv filt type mot

0 4 0
Description: Sets the type of the filter at the motor side.
Value: 0: No filter
1: Motor reactor
2: dv/dt filter
3: Sine-wave filter, Siemens
4: Sine-wave filter, third-party
Dependency: The following parameters are influenced using p0230:
p0230 = 1:
--> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance
p0230 = 3:
--> p0234 (power unit sine-wave filter capacitance) = filter capacitance
--> p0290 (power unit overload response) = inhibit pulse frequency reduction
--> p1082 (maximum speed) = Fmax filter / pole pair number
--> p1800 (pulse frequency) >= nominal pulse frequency of the filter
--> p1802 (modulator modes) = space vector modulation without overcontrol
p0230 = 4:
--> p0290 (power unit overload response) = inhibit pulse frequency reduction
--> p1802 (modulator modes) = space vector modulation without overcontrol
The user must set the following parameters according to the data sheet of the sine-wave filter and also the user
must check whether they are permitted.
--> p0234 (power unit sine-wave filter capacitance) = filter capacitance
--> p1082 (maximum speed) = Fmax filter / pole pair number
--> p1800 (pulse frequency) >= nominal pulse frequency of the filter
Refer to: p0233, p0234, p0290, p1082, p1800, p1802
Note: If the power unit (e.g. PM260) is equipped with an internal sine-wave filter, the parameter cannot be changed.
if a filter type cannot be selected, then this filter type is not permitted for the Motor Module.
p0230 = 1:
Power units with output reactor are limited to output frequencies of 150 Hz.
p0230 = 3:
Power units with sine-wave filter are limited to output frequencies of 200 Hz.
r0231[0...1] Power cable length, maximum / Cable length max


- [m] - [m] - [m]
Description: Displays the maximum permissible cable lengths between the drive unit and motor.
Index: [0] = Unshielded
[1] = Shielded
Note: The display value is used to provide information for service and maintenance.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0233 Power unit motor reactor / PU mot reactor

Can be changed: C(2), U, T Scaling: - Data set: -

0.000 [mH] 1000.000 [mH] 0.000 [mH]
Description: Enter the inductance of a filter connected at the power unit output.
Dependency: This parameter is automatically pre-set when you select a filter via p0230 if a SIEMENS filter is defined for the
power unit.
Refer to: p0230
Note: When exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 = 1, the parameter value is set to the value of the defined SIE-
MENS filter or to zero. For this reason, the parameter value of a third-party filter only has to be entered outside the
commissioning phase (p0010 = 0) and then the controller calculation (p0340 = 3) is carried out.
The parameter cannot be changed if the power unit (e.g. PM260) is equipped with an internal sine-wave filter.
p0234 Power unit sine-wave filter capacitance / PU sine filter C

Can be changed: C(2), U, T Scaling: - Data set: -

0.000 [µF] 1000.000 [µF] 0.000 [µF]
Description: Enters the capacitance of a sine-wave filter connected at the power unit output.
Dependency: This parameter is automatically pre-set when you select a filter via p0230 if a SIEMENS filter is defined for the
power unit.
Refer to: p0230
Note: The parameter value includes the sum of all of the capacitances of a phase connected in series (phase - ground).
When exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 = 1, the parameter value is set to the value of the defined SIE-
MENS filter or to zero. For this reason, the parameter value of a third-party filter only has to be entered outside the
commissioning phase (p0010 = 0).
The parameter cannot be changed if the power unit (e.g. PM260) is equipped with an internal sine-wave filter.
r0238 Internal power unit resistance / PU R internal


- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the internal resistance of the power unit (IGBT and line resistance).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0278 DC link voltage undervoltage threshold reduction / Vdc U_under red

Can be changed: T Scaling: - Data set: -

-80 [V] 0 [V] 0 [V]
Description: Sets the absolute value by which the threshold to initiate the undervoltage fault (F30003) is reduced.
Refer to: F30003
Notice: When using a Control Supply Module (CSM) for 24 V supply from the DC link, the minimum continuous DC link volt-
age may not lie below 430 V. DC link voltages in the range 300 ... 430 V are permissible up to a duration of 1 min.
For chassis power units, this parameter has no significance.
Note: The resulting shutdown threshold can be read in r0296 and is dependent on the selected rated voltage (p0210) and
the power unit being used.
p0287[0...1] Ground fault monitoring thresholds / Gnd flt threshold


0.0 [%] 100.0 [%] [0] 6.0 [%]
[1] 16.0 [%]
Description: Sets the shutdown thresholds for the ground fault monitoring.
The setting is made as a percentage of the maximum power unit current (r0209).
Index: [0] = Threshold at which pre-charging starts
[1] = Threshold at which pre-charging stops
Dependency: Refer to: F30021
r0289 CO: Maximum power unit output current / PU I_outp max


Description: Displays the actual maximum output current of the power unit taking into account derating factors.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0290 Power unit overload response / PU overld response


0 3 2
Description: Sets the response to a thermal overload condition of the power unit.
The following quantities can result in a response to thermal overload:
- heat sink temperature (r0037.0)
- chip temperature (r0037.1)
- power unit overload I2T (r0036)
Possible measures to avoid thermal overload:
- reduce the output current limit r0289 and r0067 (for closed-loop speed or torque control) or the output frequency
(for U/f control) indirectly via the output current limit and the intervention of the current limiting controller).
- reduce the pulse frequency.
A reduction, if parameterized, is always realized after an appropriate alarm is output.
Value: 0: Reduce output current or output frequency
1: No reduction, shutdown when overload threshold is reached
2: Reduce I_output or f_output and f_pulse (not using I2t)
3: Reduce the pulse frequency (not using I2t)
Dependency: If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), then only responses can be selected without
pulse frequency reduction (p0290 = 0, 1).
If a fault or alarm is present, then r2135.13 or r2135.15 is set.
Refer to: r0036, r0037, p0230, r2135
Refer to: A05000, A05001, A07805
Caution: If the thermal overload of the power unit is not sufficiently reduced by the actions taken, the drive is always shut
down. This means that the power unit is always protected irrespective of the setting of this parameter.
Note: The setting p0290 = 0, 2 is only practical if the load decreases with decreasing speed (e.g. for applications with vari-
able torque such as for pumps and fans).
Under overload conditions, the current and torque limit are reduced, and therefore the motor is braked and forbid-
den speed ranges (e.g. minimum speed p1080 and suppression [skip] speeds p1091 ... p1094) can be passed
through.
For p0290 = 2, 3, the I2t overload detection of the power unit does not influence the responses.
When the motor data identification routine is selected, p0290 cannot be changed.
p0292[0...1] Power unit temperature alarm threshold / PU T_alrm thresh


0 [°C] 25 [°C] [0] 5 [°C]
[1] 15 [°C]
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for power unit overtemperatures. The value is set as a difference to the tripping (shut-
down) temperature.
Drive:
If this threshold is exceeded, an overload alarm is generated and the system responds as parameterized in p0290.
Infeed:
When the threshold value is exceeded, only an overload alarm is output.
Index: [0] = Heat sink temperature
[1] = Power semiconductor (chip) temperature
Dependency: Refer to: r0037, p0290
Refer to: A05000

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0294 Power unit alarm with I2t overload / PU I2t alrm thresh

10.0 [%] 100.0 [%] 95.0 [%]
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for the I2t power unit overload.
If this threshold is exceeded, an overload alarm is generated and the system responds as parameterized in p0290.
Refer to: A07805
Note: The I2t fault threshold is 100 %. If this value is exceeded, fault F30005 is output.
p0295 Fan run-on time / Fan run-on time


0 [s] 600 [s] 0 [s]
Description: Sets the fan run-on time after the pulses for the power unit have been canceled.
Note: - Under certain circumstances, the fan can continue to run for longer than was set (e.g. as a result of the exces-
sively high heat sink temperature).
- For values less than 1 s, a 1 s run on time for the fan is active.
- for a PM230 power unit, sizes D - F the parameter is ineffective.
r0296 DC link voltage undervoltage threshold / Vdc U_lower_thresh


- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: If the DC link voltage falls below this threshold, the power unit is shut down due to a DC link undervoltage condition
(F30003).
Refer to: F30003
r0297 DC link voltage overvoltage threshold / Vdc U_upper_thresh


- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: If the DC link voltage exceeds the threshold specified here, the drive unit is tripped due to DC link overvoltage.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0300[0...n] Motor type selection / Mot type sel

Can be changed: C(1, 3) Scaling: - Data set: MDS

0 204 0
Description: Selecting the motor type.
The first digit of the parameter value always defines the general motor type and corresponds to the third-party
motor belonging to a motor list:
1 = Rotating induction motor
2 = Rotating synchronous motor
The type information must be entered to filter motor-specific parameters and to optimize the operating characteris-
tics and behavior. For example, for synchronous motors, power factor (p0308) is neither used nor displayed (in the
BOP/IOP).
Value: 0: No motor
1: Induction motor (rotating)
2: Synchronous motor (rotating, permanent-magnet)
17: 1LA7 standard induction motor
204: 1LE4 synchronous motor
Dependency: When selecting a motor type from the 1LA7 series, parameters p0335, p0626, p0627, and p0628 of the thermal
motor model are pre-assigned as a function of p0307 and p0311.
Note: Once the Control Unit has been powered up for the first time or if the factory settings have been defined accord-
ingly, the motor type is pre-configured to induction motor (p0300 = 1).
If a motor type has not been selected (p0300 = 0), then the drive commissioning routine cannot be exited.
p0301[0...n] Motor code number selection / Mot code No. sel


0 65535 0
Description: The parameter is used to select a motor from a motor parameter list.
When changing the code number (with the exception to the value 0), all of the motor parameters are pre-assigned
from the internally available parameter lists.
Dependency: Code numbers can only be selected for motor types that correspond to the motor type selected in p0300.
Refer to: p0300
Note: The motor code number can only be changed if the matching catalog motor was first selected in p0300.
When selecting a catalog motor (p0300 >= 100), drive commissioning can only be exited if a code number is
selected.
p0304[0...n] Rated motor voltage / Mot U_rated


0 [Vrms] 20000 [Vrms] 0 [Vrms]
Description: Sets the rated motor voltage (rating plate).
Caution: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Infor-
mation in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: When the parameter value is entered the connection type of the motor (star-delta) must be taken into account.
Once the Control Unit has booted for the first time or if the factory settings have been restored, the parameter is
pre-assigned to match the power unit.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0305[0...n] Rated motor current / Mot I_rated


0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the rated motor current (rating plate).
Notice: If p0305 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is pre-assigned
accordingly.
Note: When the parameter value is entered the connection type of the motor (star-delta) must be taken into account.
p0307[0...n] Rated motor power / Mot P_rated


0.00 [kW] 100000.00 [kW] 0.00 [kW]
Description: Sets the rated motor power (rating plate).
Dependency: IECdrives (p0100 = 0): Units kW
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): Units hp
NEMA drives (p0100 = 2): Unit kW
Refer to: p0100
Note: Once the Control Unit has booted for the first time or if the factory settings have been restored, the parameter is
p0308[0...n] Rated motor power factor / Mot cos_phi_rated


0.000 1.000 0.000
Description: Sets the rated motor power factor (cos phi, rating plate).
For a parameter value of 0.000, the power factor is internally calculated and displayed in r0332.
Dependency: This parameter is only available for p0100 = 0, 2.
Refer to: p0100, p0309, r0332
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0309[0...n] Rated motor efficiency / Mot eta_rated


0.0 [%] 99.9 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Sets the rated motor efficiency (rating plate).
For a parameter value of 0.0, the power factor is internally calculated and displayed in r0332.
Dependency: This parameter is only available for NEMA motors (p0100 = 1).
Refer to: p0100, p0308, r0332
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors.
p0310[0...n] Rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated


0.00 [Hz] 650.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets the rated motor frequency (rating plate).
Dependency: The number of pole pairs (r0313) is automatically re-calculated when the parameter is changed (together with
p0311), if p0314 = 0.
The rated frequency is restricted to values between 1.00 Hz and 650.00 Hz.
Refer to: p0311, r0313, p0314
Notice: If p0310 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated
with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010
= 3).
Note: Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time or if the factory settings have been defined accordingly,
the parameter is defined in accordance with the power unit.
p0311[0...n] Rated motor speed / Mot n_rated


0.0 [rpm] 210000.0 [rpm] 0.0 [rpm]
Description: Sets the rated motor speed (rating plate).
For p0311 = 0, the rated motor slip of induction motors is internally calculated and displayed in r0330.
It is especially important to correctly enter the rated motor speed for vector control and slip compensation for U/f
control.
Dependency: If p0311 is changed and for p0314 = 0, the pole pair (r0313) is re-calculated automatically.
Refer to: p0310, r0313, p0314
with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010
= 3).
Note: Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time or if the factory settings have been defined accordingly,

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0313[0...n] Motor pole pair number, actual (or calculated) / Mot PolePairNo act
Can be changed: - Scaling: - Data set: MDS

- - -
Description: Displays the number of motor pole pairs. The value is used for internal calculations.
r0313 = 1: 2-pole motor
r0313 = 2: 4-pole motor, etc.
Dependency: For p0314 > 0, the entered value is displayed in r0313.
For p0314 = 0, the pole pair number (r0313) is automatically calculated from the rated power (p0307), rated fre-
quency (p0310) and rated speed (p0311).
Refer to: p0307, p0310, p0311, p0314
Note: For the automatic calculation, the pole pair number is set to the value of 2 if the rated speed or the rated frequency
is zero.
p0314[0...n] Motor pole pair number / Mot pole pair No.


0 255 0
Description: Sets the motor pole pair number.
p0314 = 1: 2-pole motor
r0314 = 2: 4-pole motor, etc.
Dependency: For p0314 = 0, the pole pair number is automatically calculated from the rated frequency (p0310) and the rated
speed (p0311) and displayed in r0313.
with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly.
For induction motors, the value need only be input if the rated data of a generator is entered therefore resulting in a
negative rated slip. In this case, the number of pole pairs in r0313 is too low by 1 and must be manually corrected.
p0316[0...n] Motor torque constant / Mot kT

Can be changed: C(1, 3), U, T Scaling: - Data set: MDS

0.00 [Nm/A] 400.00 [Nm/A] 0.00 [Nm/A]
Description: Sets the torque constant of the synchronous motor.
p0316 = 0: The torque constant is calculated from the motor data.
p0316 > 0: The selected value is used as torque constant.
Note: This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0318[0...n] Motor stall current / Mot I_standstill

Can be changed: C(3) Scaling: - Data set: MDS

0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the stall current for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Note: The parameter is used for the I2t monitoring of the motor (refer to p0611).
This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx).
p0320[0...n] Motor rated magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rated

Can be changed: C(3), U, T Scaling: - Data set: MDS

0.000 [Arms] 5000.000 [Arms] 0.000 [Arms]
Description: Induction motors:
Sets the rated motor magnetizing current.
For p0320 = 0.000 the magnetizing current is internally calculated and displayed in r0331.
Synchronous motors:
Sets the rated motor short-circuit current.
Note: The magnetizing current p0320 for induction motors is reset when quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0.
If, for induction motors, the magnetizing current p0320 is changed outside the commissioning phase (p0010 > 0),
then the magnetizing inductance p0360 is changed so that the EMF r0337 remains constant.
p0322[0...n] Maximum motor speed / Mot n_max


0.0 [rpm] 210000.0 [rpm] 0.0 [rpm]
Description: Sets the maximum motor speed.
with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0323[0...n] Maximum motor current / Mot I_max


0.00 [Arms] 20000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the maximum permissible motor current (e.g. de-magnetizing current for synchronous motors).
Notice: If p0323 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is pre-assigned
accordingly.
Note: The parameter has no effect for induction motors.
The parameter has not effect for synchronous motors if a value of 0.0 is entered. The user-selectable current limit is
entered into p0640.
p0325[0...n] Motor pole position identification current, 1st phase / Mot PolID I 1st ph
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Data set: MDS

0.000 [Arms] 10000.000 [Arms] 0.000 [Arms]
Description: Sets the current for the 1st phase of the two-stage technique for pole position identification routine.
The current of the 2nd phase is set in p0329.
The two-stage technique is selected with p1980 = 4.
Dependency: Refer to: p0329, p1980, r1984, r1985, r1987
Notice: When the motor code (p0301) is changed, it is possible that p0325 is not pre-assigned.
p0325 can be pre-assigned using p0340 = 3.
Note: The value is automatically pre-assigned for the following events:
- For p0325 = 0 and automatic calculation of the closed-loop control parameters (p0340 = 1, 2, 3).
- for quick commissioning (p3900 = 1, 2, 3).
p0326[0...n] Motor stall torque correction factor / Mot M_stall_corr


5 [%] 300 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the correction factor for the stall torque/force at a 600 V DC link voltage.
Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0327[0...n] Optimum motor load angle / Mot phi_load opt


0.0 [°] 135.0 [°] 90.0 [°]
Description: Sets the optimum load angle for synchronous motors with reluctance torque.
The load angle is measured at the rated motor current.
Note: This parameter has no significance for induction motors.
For synchronous motors without reluctance torque, a angle of 90 degrees must be set.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
p0328[0...n] Motor reluctance torque constant / Mot kT_reluctance


-1000.00 [mH] 1000.00 [mH] 0.00 [mH]
Description: Sets the reluctance torque constant for synchronous motors with reluctance torque (e.g. 1FE ... motors).
This parameter has no significance for induction motors.
Note: For synchronous motors without reluctance torque, the value 0 must be set.
p0329[0...n] Motor pole position identification current / Mot PolID current


0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the current for the pole position identification routine.
For a two-stage technique, the current is set for the 2nd phase.
Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p1980, r1984, r1985, r1987
r0330[0...n] Rated motor slip / Mot slip_rated


- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Displays the rated motor slip.
Dependency: The rated slip is calculated from the rated frequency, rated speed and number of pole pairs.
Refer to: p0310, p0311, r0313

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0331[0...n] Actual motor magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rtd act


Description: Induction motor:
Displays the rated magnetizing current from p0320.
For p0320 = 0, the internally calculated magnetizing current is displayed.
Synchronous motor:
Displays the rated short-circuit current from p0320.
Dependency: If p0320 was not entered, then the parameter is calculated from the rating plate parameters.
r0332[0...n] Rated motor power factor / Mot cos_phi_rated


- - -
Description: Displays the rated power factor for induction motors.
For IEC motors, the following applies (p0100 = 0):
For p0308 = 0, the internally-calculated power factor is displayed.
For p0308 > 0, this value is displayed.
For NEMA motors, the following applies (p0100 = 1):
For p0309 = 0, the internally-calculated power factor is displayed.
For p0309 > 0, this value is converted into the power factor and displayed.
Dependency: If p0308 is not entered, the parameter is calculated from the rating plate parameters.
r0333[0...n] Rated motor torque / Mot M_rated


- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the rated motor torque.
Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit Nm
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lbf ft
Note: For induction motors, r0333 is calculated from p0307 and p0311.
For synchronous motors, r0333 is calculated from p0305, p0316, p0327 and p0328.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0334[0...n] Actual motor-torque constant / Mot kT act


- [Nm/A] - [Nm/A] - [Nm/A]
Description: Displays the torque constant of the synchronous motor used.
Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit Nm / A
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lbf ft / A
Note: This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx).
For synchronous motors, parameter r0334 is calculated from p0305, p0307 and p0311.
p0335[0...n] Motor cooling type / Motor cooling type

Can be changed: C(1, 3), T Scaling: - Data set: MDS

0 128 0
Description: Sets the motor cooling system used.
Value: 0: Non-ventilated
1: Forced cooling
2: Liquid cooling
128: No fan
Dependency: For 1LA7 motors (refer to p0300), the parameter is pre-set as a function of p0307 and p0311.
Note: The parameter influences the thermal 3-mass motor model.
1LA7 motors, frame size 56 are operated without fan.
r0337[0...n] Rated motor EMF / Mot EMF_rated


Description: Displays the rated EMF of the motor.
Note: EMF: Electromagnetic force

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0340[0...n] Automatic calculation, motor/control parameters / Calc auto par

Can be changed: C(3), T Scaling: - Data set: DDS, p0180

0 5 0
Description: Setting to automatically calculate motor parameters and U/f open-loop and closed-loop control parameters from the
rating plate data.
Value: 0: No calculation
1: Complete calculation
2: Calculation of equivalent circuit diagram parameters
3: Calculation of closed-loop control parameters
4: Calculation of controller parameters
5: Calculation of technological limits and threshold values
The following parameters are influenced using p0340:
p0340 = 1:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5
--> p0341, p0342, p0344, p0612, p0640, p1082, p1231, p1232, p1333, p1349, p1611, p1654, p1726, p1825, p1828
... p1832, p1909, p1959, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, p3927, p3928
p0340 = 2:
--> p0350, p0354 ... p0360
--> p0625 (matching p0350)
p0340 = 3:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 4, 5
--> p0346, p0347, p0622, p1320 ... p1327, p1582, p1584, p1616, p1755, p1756, p2178
p0340 = 4:
--> p1290, p1292, p1293, p1338, p1339, p1340, p1341, p1345, p1346, p1461, p1463, p1464, p1465, p1470,
p1472, p1703, p1715, p1717, p1740, p1756, p1764, p1767, p1781, p1783, p1785, p1786, p1795
p0340 = 5:
--> p1037, p1038, p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531, p1574, p1802, p1803, p2140, p2142, p2148, p2150, p2161,
p2162, p2163, p2164, p2175, p2177, p2194, p2390, p2392, p2393
Note: p0340 = 1 contains the calculations of p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5.
p0340 = 2 calculates the motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360).
p0340 = 3 contains the calculations of p0340 = 4, 5.
p0340 = 4 only calculates the controller parameters.
p0340 = 5 only calculates the controller limits.
When quick commissioning is exited using p3900 > 0, p0340 is automatically set to 1.
At the end of the calculations, p0340 is automatically set to 0.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0341[0...n] Motor moment of inertia / Mot M_mom of inert

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32

0.000000 [kgm²] 100000.000000 [kgm²] 0.000000 [kgm²]
Description: Sets the motor moment of inertia (without load).
Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg m^2
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb ft^2
The parameter value is included, together with p0342, in the rated starting time of the motor.
Refer to: p0342, r0345
Note: The product of p0341 * p0342 is used when the speed controller (p0340 = 4) is calculated automatically.
p0342[0...n] Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia / Mot MomInert Ratio

1.000 10000.000 1.000
Description: Sets the ratio between the total moment of inertia/mass (load + motor) and the intrinsic motor moment of iner-
tia/mass (no load).
Dependency: This means that together with p0341, the rated starting (accelerating time) of the motor is calculated for a vector
drive.
Note: The product of p0341 * p0342 is used when the speed controller (p0340 = 4) is calculated automatically.
r0343[0...n] Rated motor current identified / Mot I_rated ident


0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] - [Arms]
Description: Displays the identified rated motor current.
p0344[0...n] Motor weight (for the thermal motor model) / Mot weight th mod
Can be changed: C(3), T Scaling: - Data set: MDS

0.0 [kg] 50000.0 [kg] 0.0 [kg]
Description: Sets the motor weight.
Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb
Note: The parameter influences the thermal 3 mass model of the induction motor.
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0345[0...n] Nominal motor starting time / Mot t_start_rated


- [s] - [s] - [s]
Description: Displays the rated motor starting time. This time corresponds to the time from standstill up to reaching the motor
rated speed and the acceleration with motor rated torque (r0333).
Dependency: Refer to: r0313, r0333, p0341, p0342
p0346[0...n] Motor excitation build-up time / Mot t_excitation

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Data type: FloatingPoint32

0.000 [s] 20.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the excitation build-up time of the motor.
This involves the delay time between enabling the pulses and enabling the ramp-function generator. The induction
motor is magnetized during this time.
Caution: If there is insufficient magnetization under load or if the acceleration rate is too high, then an induction motor can
stall (refer to the note).
Note: The parameter is calculated using p0340 = 1, 3.

For induction motors, the result depends on the rotor time constant (r0384). If this time is excessively reduced, this
can result in an inadequate magnetizing of the induction motor. This is the case if the current limit is reached while
building up magnetizing. For induction motors, the parameter cannot be set to 0 s (internal limit: 0.1 * r0384).
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors and vector control, the value depends on the stator time constant
(r0386). Here, it defines the time to establish the current for encoderless operation immediately after the pulses
have been enabled.
p0347[0...n] Motor de-excitation time / Mot t_de-excitat.


0.000 [s] 20.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the de-magnetizing time (for induction motors) after the inverter pulses have been canceled.
The inverter pulses cannot be switched in (enabled) within this delay time.
Note: The parameter is calculated using p0340 = 1, 3.
For induction motors, the result depends on the rotor time constant (r0384).
if this time is shortened too much, then this can result in an inadequate de-magnetizing of the induction motor and
in an overcurrent condition when the pulses are subsequently enabled (only when the flying restart function is acti-
vated and the motor is rotating).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0350[0...n] Motor stator resistance, cold / Mot R_stator cold


0.00000 [ohm] 2000.00000 [ohm] 0.00000 [ohm]
Description: Sets the stator resistance of the motor at ambient temperature p0625.
Note: The motor identification routine determines the stator resistance from the total stator resistance minus the cable
resistance (p0352).
p0352[0...n] Cable resistance / Mot R_cable cold


0.00000 [ohm] 120.00000 [ohm] 0.00000 [ohm]
Description: Resistance of the power cable between the power unit and motor.
Caution: The cable resistance should be entered prior to motor data identification. If it is used subsequently, the difference
by which p0352 was changed must be subtracted from the stator resistance p0350 or motor data identification must
be repeated.
Note: The parameter influences the temperature adaptation of the stator resistance.
The motor identification sets the cable resistance to 20% of the measured total resistance if p0352 is zero at the
time that the measurement is made. If p0352 is not zero, then the value is subtracted from the measured total stator
resistance to calculate stator resistance p0350. In this case, p0350 is a minimum of 10% of the measured value.
The cable resistance is reset when quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0.
p0354[0...n] Motor rotor resistance cold / Mot R_r cold


0.00000 [ohm] 300.00000 [ohm] 0.00000 [ohm]
Description: Sets the rotor/secondary section resistance of the motor at the ambient temperature p0625.
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor data iden-
tification routine (p1910).
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0356[0...n] Motor stator leakage inductance / Mot L_stator leak.


0.00000 [mH] 1000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]
Description: Induction machine: sets the stator leakage inductance of the motor.
Synchronous motor: Sets the stator quadrature axis inductance of the motor.
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identifica-
tion routine (p1910).
Note: If the stator leakage inductance (p0356) for induction motors is changed outside the commissioning phase (p0010 >
0), the magnetizing inductance (p0360) is automatically adapted to the new EMF (r0337). You are then advised to
repeat the measurement for the saturation characteristic (p1960).
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2), this is the non-saturated value and is, therefore, ideal for
a low current.
p0357[0...n] Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator d


0.00000 [mH] 1000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]
Description: Sets the stator direct-axis inductance of the synchronous motor.
Note: For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2), this is the non-saturated value and is ideal for a low cur-
rent.
p0358[0...n] Motor rotor leakage inductance / Mot L_rot leak


0.00000 [mH] 1000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]
Description: Sets the rotor/secondary section leakage inductance of the motor.
The value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine
(p1910).
Note: If the rotor leakage inductance (p0358) for induction motors is changed outside the commissioning phase (p0010 >
0), then the magnetizing inductance (p0360) is automatically adapted to the new EMF (r0337). You are then
advised to repeat the measurement for the saturation characteristic (p1960).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0360[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance / Mot Lh


0.00000 [mH] 10000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]
Description: Sets the magnetizing inductance of the motor.
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2).
p0362[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic flux 1 / Mot saturat.flux 1


10.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 60.0 [%]
Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the first flux value of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux (100 %).
Dependency: The following applies for the flux values:
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0366
Note: For induction motors, p0362 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.


10.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 85.0 [%]
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the second flux value of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux (100 %).
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0367

Parameters
List of Parameters


10.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 115.0 [%]
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 3rd value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the third flux value of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux (100 %).
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0368


10.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 125.0 [%]
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 4th value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the fourth flux value of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux (100 %).
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0369
p0366[0...n] Motor saturation characteristic I_mag 1 / Mot sat. I_mag 1


5.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the first magnetization current of the saturation characteristic in [%] with reference to the rated magnetization
current (r0331).
Dependency: The following applies for the magnetizing currents:
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0362

Parameters
List of Parameters


5.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 75.0 [%]
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the second magnetization current of the saturation characteristic in [%] with reference to the rated magnetiza-
tion current (r0331).
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0363


5.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 150.0 [%]
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the 3rd value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the third magnetization current of the saturation characteristic in [%] with reference to the rated magnetization
current (r0331).
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0364


5.0 [%] 800.0 [%] 210.0 [%]
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the 4th value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the fourth magnetization current of the saturation characteristic in [%] with reference to the rated magnetiza-
tion current (r0331).
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0365

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0370[0...n] Motor stator resistance, cold / Mot R_stator cold


- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the motor stator resistance at an ambient temperature (p0625).
The value does not include the cable resistance.
r0372[0...n] Cable resistance / Mot R_cable


- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the total cable resistance between power unit and motor, as well as the internal converter resistance.
r0373[0...n] Motor rated stator resistance / Mot R_stator rated


- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the rated motor stator resistance at rated temperature (total of p0625 and p0627).
r0374[0...n] Motor rotor resistance cold / Mot R_r cold


- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the motor rotor resistance at an ambient temperature p0625.
r0376[0...n] Rated motor rotor resistance / Mot R_rotor rated


- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the rated motor rotor resistance at rated temperature (total of p0625 and p0628).

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0377[0...n] Motor leakage inductance, total / Mot L_leak total


- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the stator leakage inductance of the motor including the motor reactor (p0233).
r0378[0...n] Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator_d


- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the stator longitudinal inductance of the synchronous motor including the motor reactor (p0233).
r0382[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance transformed / Mot L_magn transf


- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the magnetizing inductance of the motor.
r0384[0...n] Motor rotor time constant / damping time constant d axis / Mot T_rotor/T_Dd

- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the rotor time constant.
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors.
The value is calculated from the total of the inductances on the rotor side (p0358, p0360) divided by the rotor resis-
tance (p0354). The temperature adaptation of the rotor resistance for induction motors is not taken into account.
r0386[0...n] Motor stator leakage time constant / Mot T_stator leak


- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the stator leakage time constant.
Note: The value is calculated from the total of all leakage inductances (p0233, p0356, p0358) divided by the total of all
motor resistances (p0350, p0352, p0354). The temperature adaptation of the resistances is not taken into account.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0395[0...n] Actual stator resistance / R_stator act


- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the actual stator resistance (phase value).
The parameter value also contains the temperature-independent cable resistance.
Dependency: In the case of induction motors the parameter is also affected by the motor temperature model.
Refer to: p0350, p0352, p0620
Note: In each case, only the stator resistance of the active Motor Data Set is included with the stator temperature of the
thermal motor model.
r0396[0...n] Actual rotor resistance / R_rotor act


- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the actual rotor resistance (phase value).
The parameter is affected by the motor temperature model.
Note: In each case, only the rotor resistance of the active Motor Data Set is included with the rotor temperature of the
thermal motor model.
This parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
p0490 Meas. probe invert / Probe inv

CU240E-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32
CU240E-2 DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Data set: -
CU240E-2 F

- - 0000 bin
Description: Setting to invert the digital input signals to connect a measuring probe.
03 DI 3 (T. 8) Inverted Not inverted -
Note: When the measuring probe is inverted, this has no effect on the status displays of the digital inputs (r0721, r0722,
r0723).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0500 Technology application / Tec application

Can be changed: C(1, 5), T Scaling: - Data set: -

3 3 3
Description: Sets the technology application.
The parameter influences the calculation of open-loop and closed-loop control parameters that is e.g. initiated using
p0340 = 5.
Value: 3: Pumps and fans, efficiency optimization
Notice: If the technological application is set to p0500 = 0 ... 3 during commissioning (p0010 = 1, 5, 30), the operating mode
(p1300) is pre-set accordingly.
Note: The calculation of parameters dependent on the technology application can be called up as follows:
- when exiting quick commissioning using p3900 > 0
- when writing p0340 = 1, 3, 5
For p0500 = 3 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
- p1574 = 2 V
- p1750 bit 2 = 1: Sensorless closed-loop control of induction motors effective up to a frequency of zero.
- p1802 = 10 (SVM/FLB with overmodulation and modulation depth reduction over 57 Hz)
- p1803 = 115 %

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0500 Technology application / Tec application

PM250, PM260 Can be changed: C(1, 5), T Scaling: - Data set: -

0 3 0
Description: Sets the technology application.
The parameter influences the calculation of open-loop and closed-loop control parameters that is e.g. initiated using
p0340 = 5.
Value: 0: Standard drive
1: Pumps and fans
2: Sensorless closed-loop control down to f = 0 (passive loads)
3: Pumps and fans, efficiency optimization
Notice: If the technological application is set to p0500 = 0 ... 3 during commissioning (p0010 = 1, 5, 30), the operating mode
(p1300) is pre-set accordingly.
Note: The calculation of parameters dependent on the technology application can be called up as follows:
- when exiting quick commissioning using p3900 > 0
- when writing p0340 = 1, 3, 5
- p1574 = 10 V
- p1750 bit 2 = 0
- p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol) (PM240: p1802 = 0, PM260: p1802 = 2)
- p1803 = 106 % (PM260: p1803 = 103 %)
- p1574 = 2 V
- p1750 bit 2 = 0
- p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol) (PM240: p1802 = 0)
- p1803 = 106 % (PM260: p1803 = 103 %)
- p1574 = 2 V (for separately-excited synchronous motors: 4 V)
- p1750 bit 2 = 1
- p1803 = 106 % (PM260: p1803 = 103 %)
- p1574 = 2 V
- p1750 bit 2 = 1
- p1803 = 106 % (PM260: p1803 = 103 %)
Re p1750:
The setting of p1750 is only relevant for induction motors.
p1750 bit 2 = 1: Sensorless closed-loop control of induction motors effective up to a frequency of zero.
This operating mode is possible for passive loads. These include applications where the load does not generate
regenerative torque when breaking away and the motor comes to a standstill (zero speed) itself when the pulses
are inhibited.
Re p1802 / p1803:
p1802 and p1803 are only changed, in all cases, if a sine-wave output filter (p0230 = 3, 4) has not been selected.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0505 Selecting the system of units / Unit sys select


1 4 1
Description: Adjustable parameter of the actual system of units.
Value: 1: SI system of units
2: System of units, referred/SI
3: US system of units
4: System of units, referred/US
Dependency: The parameter cannot be changed if the master control was fetched.
Caution: If a per unit representation is selected and if the reference parameters (e.g. p2000) are subsequently changed, then
the physical significance of several control parameters is also adapted at the same time. As a consequence, the
control behavior can change (see p1576, p1621, p1744, p1752, p1755 and p1609, p1612, p1619, p1620).
Note: Reference parameter for the unit system % are, for example, p2000 ... p2004. Depending on what has been
selected, these are displayed using either SI or US units.
p0573 Inhibit automatic reference value calculation / Inhibit calc


0 1 0
Description: Setting to inhibit the calculation of reference parameters (e.g. p2000) when automatically calculating the motor and
closed-loop control parameters (p0340, p3900).
Value: 0: No
1: Yes
Notice: The inhibit for the reference value calculation is canceled when new motor parameters (e.g. p0305) are entered and
only one drive data set exists (p0180 = 1). This is the case during initial commissioning.
Once the motor and control parameters have been calculated (p0340, p3900), the inhibit for the reference value
calculation is automatically re-activated.
Note: If value = 0:
The automatic calculation (p0340, p3900) overwrites the reference parameters.
If value = 1:
The automatic calculation (p0340, p3900) does not overwrite the reference parameters.
p0580 Measuring probe, input terminal / MT input terminal

CU240E-2 F

0 23 0
Description: Sets the input terminal for the measuring probe for speed actual value measurement.
Value: 0: No measuring probe
23: DI 3 (T. 8)
Note: DI: Digital Input

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0581 Measuring probe, edge / MT edge

CU240E-2 F

0 1 0
Description: Sets the edge to evaluate the measuring probe signal for speed actual value measurement.
0: 0/1 edge
1: 1/0 edge
p0582 Measuring probe, pulses per revolution / MT pulses per rev

CU240E-2 F

1 12 1
Description: Sets the number of pulses per revolution (e.g. for disks with holes).
p0583 Measuring probe, maximum measuring time / MT t_meas max

CU240E-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2 F

0.040 [s] 10.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
Description: Sets the maximum measuring time for the measuring probe.
If a new pulse is not received before the maximum measuring time has expired, then the speed actual value in
r0586 is set to zero. This timer is re-started with the next pulse.
p0585 Measuring probe gear factor / Probe gear factor

CU240E-2 F

0.00000 1000.00000 1.00000
Description: Sets the BERO gear factor.
The measured speed is multiplied by the BERO gear factor and is displayed in r0586.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0586 CO: Measuring probe, speed actual value / MT n_act

CU240E-2 DP Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Data set: -
CU240E-2 DP F Units group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505
CU240E-2 F

- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the speed actual value measured using the BERO.
Note: For p0580 = 0 (no measuring probe), a value of zero is displayed here.
r0587 CO: Measuring probe, measuring time measured / MT t_meas measured

CU240E-2 DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Data set: -
CU240E-2 F

- - -
Description: Displays the time between the last two BERO pulses.
The measuring time is specified as 32-bit value with a resolution of 1/48 µs.
If a new pulse is not received before the maximum measured time in p0583 expires, then r0587 is set to the maxi-
mum measuring time.
r0588 CO: Measuring probe, pulse counter / MT pulse counter

CU240E-2 F

- - -
Description: Displays the number of measuring pulses that have occurred (been received) up until now.
Note: After reaching 4294967295 (2^32 - 1), the counter starts again at 0.
r0589 Measuring probe, delay time / MT t_delay

CU240E-2 F

- - -
Description: Displays the time since the last measuring pulse was detected.
The delay time is specified as 32-bit value with a resolution of 1/48 µs.
When a measuring pulse occurs (is received) the delay time is reset and is limited to the maximum measuring time
in p0583.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0595 Selecting technological units / Select tech units


1 46 1
Description: Selects the units for the parameters of the technology controller.
Value: 1: %
2: 1 referred, no dimensions
3: bar
4: °C
5: Pa
6: ltr/s
7: m³/s
8: ltr/min
9: m³/min
10: ltr/h
11: m³/h
12: kg/s
13: kg/min
14: kg/h
15: t/min
16: t/h
17: N
18: kN
19: Nm
20: psi
21: °F
22: gallon/s
23: inch³/s
24: gallon/min
25: inch³/min
26: gallon/h
27: inch³/h
28: lb/s
29: lb/min
30: lb/h
31: lbf
32: lbf ft
33: K
34: rpm
35: parts/min
36: m/s
37: ft³/s
38: ft³/min
39: BTU/min
40: BTU/h
41: mbar
42: inch wg
43: ft wg
44: m wg
45: % r.h.
46: g/kg
Dependency: Only units of parameters with unit group 9_1 can be changed over using this parameter.
Refer to: p0596

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0596 Reference quantity, technological units / Ref tech units


0.01 340.28235E36 1.00
Description: Sets the reference quantity for the technological units. When changing over using changeover parameter 595 to
absolute units, all of the parameters involved refer to the reference quantity.
p0601[0...n] Motor temperature sensor type / Mot_temp_sens type


0 4 0
Description: Sets the sensor type for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value: 0: No sensor
1: PTC alarm & timer
2: KTY84
4: Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer
Dependency: The thermal motor model is only calculated for p0612.1 = 1.
Caution: If, for a selected KTY temperature sensor (p0601 = 2), the motor temperature sensor is not connected but another
encoder, then the temperature adaptation of the motor resistances must be switched out (p0620 = 0). Otherwise, in
controlled-loop operation, torque errors will occur that will mean that the drive will not be able to be stopped.
Note: PTC thermistor (p0601 = 1): Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm.
p0604[0...n] Motor temperature alarm threshold / Mot_temp al thr


0.0 [°C] 240.0 [°C] 130.0 [°C]
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for monitoring the motor temperature.
Note: The hysteresis for canceling the alarm is 2 Kelvin.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0605[0...n] Motor temperature fault threshold / Mot_temp flt thr


0.0 [°C] 240.0 [°C] 145.0 [°C]
Description: Sets the fault threshold for monitoring the motor temperature.
Note: The hysteresis for canceling the fault is 2 Kelvin.
p0606[0...n] Motor temperature timer / Mot_temp timer


0.000 [s] 600.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the timer for the alarm threshold for the motor temperature monitoring function.
This timer is started when the temperature alarm threshold (p0604) is exceeded.
If the timer expires before the temperature in the meantime falls below the alarm threshold, the fault F07011 is out-
put.
If the temperature fault threshold (p0605) is prematurely exceeded before the timer has expired, then fault F07011
is immediately output.
As long as the motor temperature has still not exceeded the fault threshold and the alarm thresholds have again
been undershot, the fault can be acknowledged.
Refer to: F07011, A07910
Note: With p0606 = 0 s, the timer is de-activated and only the fault threshold is effective.
KTY sensor: When setting the minimum value, the timer is disabled and a fault is not output until p0605 is
exceeded.
PTC sensor, bimetallic NC contact: The timer minimum value has no special significance.
p0607[0...n] Temperature sensor fault timer / Sensor fault time


0.000 [s] 600.000 [s] 0.100 [s]
Description: Sets the timer between the output of alarm and fault for a temperature sensor fault.
If there is a sensor fault, this timer is started. If the sensor fault is still present after the timer has expired, a corre-
sponding fault message is output.
Notice: The parameterized time is internally rounded-off to an integer multiple of 48 ms.
Note: If the motor is an induction motor, the timer is switched off when setting the minimum value and no alarm is output.
Temperature monitoring is then based on the thermal model.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0610[0...n] Motor overtemperature response / Mot temp response


0 2 1
Description: Sets the system response when the motor temperature reaches the alarm threshold.
Value: 0: No response only alarm no reduction of I_max
1: Alarm with reduction of I_max and fault
2: Alarm and fault no reduction of I_max
Dependency: Refer to: p0601, p0604, p0605
Refer to: F07011, A07910
Note: The I_max reduction is not executed for PTC (p0601 = 1) or bimetallic NC contact (p0601 = 4).
The I_max reduction results in a lower output frequency.
If value = 0:
p0606 is not started, therefore only alarm A07910 is output.
If value = 1:
PTC: Same as value = 2 because there is no reduction in I_max.
KTY84: Alarm A07910 is output, I_max is reduced and p0606 is started. After p0606 has elapsed, fault F0711 is
set.
If value = 2:
Alarm A07910 is output and p0606 is started. After p0606 has elapsed, fault F0711 is set.
p0611[0...n] I2t motor model thermal time constant / I2t mot_mod T


0 [s] 20000 [s] 0 [s]
Description: Sets the winding time constant.
The time constant specifies the warm-up time of the cold stator winding when loaded with the motor standstill cur-
rent up until a temperature rise of 63 % of the continuously permissible winding temperature has been reached.
Dependency: This parameter is only used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Refer to: r0034, p0612, p0615
Refer to: F07011, A07012, A07910
Caution: This parameter is automatically pre-set from the motor database for motors from the motor list (p0301).
When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should
be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note: When parameter p0611 is reset to 0, then this switches out the thermal I2t motor model (also refer to p0612).
If no temperature sensor is parameterized, then the ambient temperature for the thermal motor model is referred to
p0625.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0612[0...n] Thermal motor model configuration / Therm Mot_mod conf

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Unsigned16

- - 0010 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the thermal motor model.
00 Activate I2t motor model Yes No -
01 Activate motor temperature model Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: r0034, p0611, p0615
Note: Re bit 00:
This bit is only used for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). It is only possible to switch in ther-
mal I2t monitoring with a time constant greater than zero (p0611 > 0).
Re bit 01:
This bit is used to activate/de-activate the thermal motor model for induction motors.
p0615[0...n] I2t motor model fault threshold / I2t mot_mod thresh


0.0 [°C] 220.0 [°C] 180.0 [°C]
Description: Sets the fault threshold for monitoring using the thermal I2t motor model.
Dependency: The parameter is only used for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Refer to: r0034, p0611, p0612
Refer to: F07011, A07012
p0620[0...n] Thermal adaptation, stator and rotor resistance / Mot therm_adapt R

Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: Integer16

0 2 1
Description: Sets the thermal adaptation of the stator/primary section resistance and rotor/secondary section resistance accord-
ing to r0395 and r0396.
Value: 0: No thermal adaptation of stator and rotor resistances
1: Resistances adapted to the temperatures of the thermal model
2: Resistances adapted to the measured stator winding temperature
Note: For p0620 = 1, the following applies:
The stator resistance is adapted using the temperature in r0035 and the rotor resistance together with the model
temperature in r0633.
For p0620 = 2, the following applies:
The stator resistance is adapted using the temperature in r0035. If applicable, the rotor temperature for adapting
the rotor resistance is calculated from the stator temperature (r0035) as follows:
theta_R = (r0628 + r0625) / (r0627 + r0625) * r0035

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0621[0...n] Identification stator resistance after restart / Rst_ident Restart


0 2 0
Description: Selects the identification of the stator resistance after booting the Control Unit (only for vector control).
The identification is used to measure the actual stator resistance and from the ratio of the result of motor data iden-
tification (p0350) to the matching ambient temperature (p0625) the actual mean temperature of the stator winding is
calculated. The result is used to initialize the thermal motor model.
p0621 = 1:
Identification of the stator resistance only when the drive is powered up for the first time (pulse enable) after booting
the Control Unit.
p0621 = 2:
Identification of the stator resistance every time the drive is powered up (pulse enable).
Value: 0: No Rs identification
1: Rs identification after switching-on again
2: Rs identification after switching-on each time
Dependency: - perform motor data identification (see p1910) with cold motor.
- enter ambient temperature at time of motor data identification in p0625.
Notice: The calculated stator temperature can only be compared with the measured value of a temperature sensor (KTY) to
a certain extent, as the sensor is usually the warmest point of the stator winding, whereas the measured value of
identification reflects the mean value of the stator winding.
Furthermore this is a short-time measurement with limited accuracy that is performed during the magnetizing phase
of the induction motor.
Note: The measurement is carried out:
- For induction motors
- When vector control is active (see p1300)
- If a temperature sensor (KTY) has not been connected
- When the motor is at a standstill when switched on
When a flying restart is performed on a rotating motor, the temperatures of the thermal motor model are set to a
third of the overtemperatures. This occurs only once, however, when the CU is booted (e.g. after a power failure).
If identification is activated, the magnetizing time is determined via p0622 and not via p0346. Quick magnetizing
(p1401.6) is de-energized internally and alarm A07416 is displayed. The speed is enabled after completion of the
measurement.
p0622[0...n] Motor excitation time for Rs_ident after powering up again / t_excit Rs_id

0.000 [s] 20.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the excitation time of the motor for the stator resistance identification after powering up again (restart).
Note: For p0622 < p0346 the following applies:
If identification is activated, the magnetizing time is influenced by p0622. The speed is enabled after measurement
is complete, but not before the time in p0346 has elapsed (see r0056 bit 4). The time taken for measurement also
depends on the settling time of the measured current.
For p0622 >= p0346 the following applies:
Parameter p0622 is internally limited to the magnetizing time p0346, so that p0346 represents the maximum possi-
ble magnetizing time during identification. The entire measurement period (magnetizing plus measurement settling
time plus measuring time) will always be greater than p0346.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0623 Stator resistance of Rs identification after powering up again / R_Stator Reset_Id


- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the identified stator resistance after the Rs identification after powering up again.
p0625[0...n] Motor ambient temperature / Mot T_ambient


-40 [°C] 80 [°C] 20 [°C]
Description: Defines the ambient temperature of the motor for calculating the motor temperature model.
Note: The parameters for stator and rotor resistance (p0350, p0354) refer to this temperature.
If the thermal I2t motor model is activated for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (refer to p0611), p0625 is
included in the model calculation if a temperature sensor is not being used (see p0601).
p0626[0...n] Motor overtemperature, stator core / Mot T_over core


20 [K] 200 [K] 50 [K]
Description: Defines the rated overtemperature of the stator core referred to the ambient temperature.
Refer to: p0625
p0627[0...n] Motor overtemperature, stator winding / Mot T_over stator


20 [K] 200 [K] 80 [K]
Description: Defines the rated overtemperature of the stator winding referred to the ambient temperature.
Refer to: p0625

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0628[0...n] Motor overtemperature rotor winding / Mot T_over rotor


20 [K] 200 [K] 100 [K]
Description: Defines the rated overtemperature of the squirrel cage rotor referred to ambient temperature.
Refer to: p0625
r0630[0...n] Motor temperature model ambient temperature / MotTMod T_amb.

Can be changed: - Scaling: p2006 Data set: MDS

- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the ambient temperature of the motor temperature model.
r0631[0...n] Motor temperature model, stator core temperature / MotTMod T_core


- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the stator core temperature of the motor temperature model.
r0632[0...n] Motor temperature model, stator winding temperature / MotTMod T_copper


- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the stator winding temperature of the motor temperature model.
r0633[0...n] Motor temperature model, rotor temperature / MotTMod T_rotor


- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the rotor temperature of the motor temperature model.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0634[0...n] Q flux flux constant unsaturated / PSIQ KPSI UNSAT


0.000 [Vsrms] 100.000 [Vsrms] 0.000 [Vsrms]
Description: The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients.
The parameter weights the unsaturated component of the quadrature axis flux function.
p0635[0...n] Q flux quadrature axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KIQ UNSAT

0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
This parameter describes the interdependency of the unsaturated component of the quadrature axis current.
p0636[0...n] Q flux direct axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KID UNSAT

0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
This parameter describes the interdependency of the unsaturated component of the direct axis current.
p0637[0...n] Q flux flux gradient saturated / PSIQ Grad SAT


0.00 [mH] 10000.00 [mH] 0.00 [mH]
This parameter describes the gradients of the saturated component over the quadrature axis current.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0640[0...n] Current limit / Current limit

Can be changed: C(1, 3), U, T Scaling: - Data set: DDS, p0180

0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the current limit.
Note: The parameter is part of the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1); this means that it is appropriately pre-assigned when
changing p0305. The current limit p0640 is limited to r0209.
The resulting current limit is displayed in r0067 and if required, r0067 is reduced by the thermal model of the power
unit.
The torque and power limits (p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531) matching the current limit are automatically calculated
when exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 > 0 or using the automatic parameterization with p0340 = 3, 5.
p0640 is limited to 4.0 x p0305.
p0640 is pre-assigned for the automatic self commissioning routine (e.g. to 1.5 x p0305, with p0305 = r0207[1]).
p0640 must be entered when commissioning the system. This is the reason that p0640 is not calculated by the
automatic parameterization when exiting the quick commissioning (p3900 > 0).
p0641[0...n] CI: Current limit, variable / Curr lim var

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Data set: CDS, p0170

- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the variable current limit.
The value is referred to p0640.
p0650[0...n] Actual motor operating hours / Mot t_oper act

Can be changed: T Scaling: - Data set: MDS

0 [h] 4294967295 [h] 0 [h]
Description: Displays the operating hours for the corresponding motor.
The motor operating time counter continues to run when the pulses are enabled. When the pulse enable is with-
drawn, the counter is held and the value saved.
Refer to: A01590
Note: The operating hours counter in p0650 can only be reset to 0. In this case, p0651 is automatically set to 0.
For p0651 = 0, the operating hours counter is disabled.
The operating hours counter only runs with drive data set 0 and 1 (DDS).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0651[0...n] Motor operating hours maintenance interval / Mot t_op maint


0 [h] 150000 [h] 0 [h]
Description: Sets the service/maintenance intervals in hours for the appropriate motor.
An appropriate fault is output when the operating hours set here are reached.
Refer to: A01590
Note: For p0651 = 0, the operating hours counter is disabled.
The operating hours counter only runs with drive data set 0 and 1 (DDS).

Can be changed: T Scaling: - Data set: CDS, p0170

0 184 0
Description: Sets the command source.
Value: 0: No Macro
2: Terminals
6: Fieldbus
100: EAQ1
101: EAQ2
110: Set enable signals
120: FBM (fault, operation, signal)
150: MOP 1
181: 2 Wire type 2
182: 2 Wire type 3
183: 3 Wire type 1
184: 3 Wire type 2

CU240B-2 DP Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16

0 184 0
Value: 0: No Macro
2: Terminals
6: Fieldbus
100: EAQ1
101: EAQ2
140: CDS
150: MOP 1
170: Jog 1
181: 2 Wire type 2
182: 2 Wire type 3
183: 3 Wire type 1
184: 3 Wire type 2

Parameters
List of Parameters


0 184 0
Value: 0: No Macro
2: Terminals
6: Fieldbus
100: EAQ1
101: EAQ2
130: Safety 0
140: CDS
150: MOP 1
152: MOP 3
160: Fix Setpoint 0
162: Fix Setpoint 2
181: 2 Wire type 2
182: 2 Wire type 3
183: 3 Wire type 1
184: 3 Wire type 2

CU240E-2 DP Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16

0 184 0
Value: 0: No Macro
2: Terminals
6: Fieldbus
100: EAQ1
101: EAQ2
130: Safety 0
140: CDS
150: MOP 1
152: MOP 3
160: Fix Setpoint 0
162: Fix Setpoint 2
170: Jog 1
181: 2 Wire type 2
182: 2 Wire type 3
183: 3 Wire type 1
184: 3 Wire type 2

Parameters
List of Parameters

CU240E-2 DP F Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: Integer16

0 184 0
Value: 0: No Macro
2: Terminals
6: Fieldbus
100: EAQ1
101: EAQ2
130: Safety 0
131: Safety 1
140: CDS
150: MOP 1
152: MOP 3
160: Fix Setpoint 0
162: Fix Setpoint 2
170: Jog 1
181: 2 Wire type 2
182: 2 Wire type 3
183: 3 Wire type 1
184: 3 Wire type 2
r0720[0...4] CU number of inputs and outputs / CU I/O count


- - -
Description: Displays the number of inputs and outputs
Index: [0] = Number of digital inputs
[1] = Number of digital outputs
[2] = Number of digital input/outputs bidirectional
[3] = Number of analog inputs
[4] = Number of analog outputs

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0721 CU digital inputs, terminal actual value / CU DI actual value

CU240B-2 DP Can be changed: - Scaling: - Data set: -

- - -
Description: Displays the actual value at the digital inputs.
This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x or DI/DO x prior to switching from the simu-
lation mode (p0795.x = 1) to terminal mode (p0795.x = 0).
00 DI 0 (T. 5) High Low -
11 DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 High Low -
T: Terminal
r0721 CU digital inputs, terminal actual value / CU DI actual value

CU240E-2 F

- - -
Description: Displays the actual value at the digital inputs.
This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x or DI/DO x prior to switching from the simu-
lation mode (p0795.x = 1) to terminal mode (p0795.x = 0).
04 DI 4 (T. 16) High Low -
05 DI 5 (T. 17) High Low -
11 DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 High Low -
12 DI 12 (T. 10, 11) AI 1 High Low -
T: Terminal

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0722.0...11 CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status / CU DI status


- - -
Description: Displays the status of the digital inputs.
11 DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 High Low -
Notice: To the terminal designation:
The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310.
Note: AI: Analog Input
DI: Digital Input
T: Terminal

CU240E-2 F

- - -
Description: Displays the status of the digital inputs.
04 DI 4 (T. 16) High Low -
05 DI 5 (T. 17) High Low -
11 DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 High Low -
12 DI 12 (T. 10, 11) AI 1 High Low -
DI: Digital Input
T: Terminal

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0723.0...11 CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status inverted / CU DI status inv


- - -
Description: Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs.
11 DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 High Low -
T: Terminal

CU240E-2 F

- - -
Description: Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs.
04 DI 4 (T. 16) High Low -
05 DI 5 (T. 17) High Low -
11 DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 High Low -
12 DI 12 (T. 10, 11) AI 1 High Low -
T: Terminal
p0724 CU digital inputs debounce time / CU DI t_debounce


0.000 [ms] 20.000 [ms] 4.000 [ms]
Description: Sets the debounce time for digital inputs.
Note: The digital inputs are read in cyclically every 2 ms (DI 11, DI 12 every 4 ms).
To debounce the signals, the set debounce time is converted into integer multiple debounce clock cycles Tp (Tp =
p0724 / 2 ms).
DI: Digital Input

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0730 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 0 / CU S_src DO 0

Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary

- - 52.3
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 0 (NO: T. 19 / NC: T. 18).
Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: DO: Digital Output
T: Terminal
Relay output: NO = normally open, NC = normally closed

CU240E-2 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2 F

- - 52.7
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 1 (NO: T. 21).
T: Terminal

CU240E-2 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary
CU240E-2 F

- - 52.2
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 2 (NO: T. 24 / NC: T. 23).
T: Terminal
r0747 CU, digital outputs status / CU DO status


- - -
Description: Displays the status of digital outputs.
00 DO 0 (NO: T. 19 / NC: T. 18) High Low -
T: Terminal
Inversion using p0748 has been taken into account.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0747 CU, digital outputs status / CU DO status

CU240E-2 F

- - -
Description: Displays the status of digital outputs.
01 DO 1 (NO: T. 21) High Low -
T: Terminal
Inversion using p0748 has been taken into account.
p0748 CU, invert digital outputs / CU DO inv

CU240B-2 DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Data set: -

- - 0000 bin
Description: Setting to invert the signals at the digital outputs.
00 DO 0 (NO: T. 19 / NC: T. 18) Inverted Not inverted -
T: Terminal
p0748 CU, invert digital outputs / CU DO inv

CU240E-2 F

- - 0000 bin
Description: Setting to invert the signals at the digital outputs.
01 DO 1 (NO: T. 21) Inverted Not inverted -
T: Terminal

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0751.0...9 BO: CU analog inputs status word / CU AI status word


- - -
Description: Displays the status of analog inputs.
00 Analog input AI0 wire breakage Yes No -
01 Analog input AI1 wire breakage Yes No -
08 Analog input AI0 no wire breakage Yes No -
09 Analog input AI1 no wire breakage Yes No -
r0752[0...1] CO: CU analog inputs input voltage/current actual / CU AI U/I_inp act


- - -
Description: Displays the actual input voltage in V when set as voltage input.
Displays the actual input current in mA when set as current input and with the load resistor switched in.
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
Dependency: The type of analog input AIx (voltage or current input) is set using p0756.
Refer to: p0756
T: Terminal
p0753[0...1] CU analog inputs smoothing time constant / CU AI T_smooth


0.0 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st-order low pass filter for the analog inputs.
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
T: Terminal

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0755[0...1] CO: CU analog inputs actual value in percent / CU AI value in %


- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the currently referred input value of the analog inputs.
When interconnected, the signals are referred to the reference quantities p200x and p205x.
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
T: Terminal
p0756[0...1] CU analog inputs type / CU AI type


0 8 [0] 4
[1] 4
Description: Sets the type of analog inputs.
p0756[0...1] = 0, 1, 4 corresponds to a voltage input (r0752, p0757, p0759 are displayed in V).
p0756[0...1] = 2, 3 corresponds to a current input (r0752, p0757, p0759 are displayed in mA).
In addition, the associated DIP switch must be set.
For the voltage input, DIP switch AI0/1 must be set to "U".
For the current input, DIP switch AI0/1 or AI2 must be set to "I".
Value: 0: Unipolar voltage input (0 V ... +10 V)
1: Unipolar voltage input monitored (+2 V ... +10 V)
2: Unipolar current input (0 mA ... +20 mA)
3: Unipolar current input monitored (+4 mA to +20 mA)
4: Bipolar voltage input (-10 V ... +10 V)
8: No sensor connected
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
Warning: The maximum voltage difference between analog input terminals AI+, AI-, and the ground must not exceed 35 V.
If the system is operated when the load resistor is switched on (DIP switch set to "I"), the voltage between differen-
tial inputs AI+ and AI- must not exceed 10 V or the injected 80 mA current otherwise the input will be damaged.
Note: When changing p0756 , the parameters of the scaling characteristic (p0757, p0758, p0759, p0760) are overwritten
with the following default values:
For p0756 = 0, 1, 4, p0757 is set to 0.0 V, p0758 = 0.0 %, p0759 = 10.0 V and p0760 = 100.0 %.
For p0756 = 2, p0757 is set to 0.0 mA, p0758 = 0.0 %, p0759 = 20.0 mA and p0760 = 100.0 %.
For p0756 = 3, p0757 is set to 4.0 mA, p0758 = 0.0 %, p0759 = 20.0 mA and p0760 = 100.0 %.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0757[0...1] CU analog inputs characteristic value x1 / CU AI char x1


-50.000 160.000 0.000
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs.
The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (V, mA) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
p0758[0...1] CU analog inputs characteristic value y1 / CU AI char y1


-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
p0759[0...1] CU analog inputs characteristic value x2 / CU AI char x2


-50.000 160.000 10.000
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (V, mA) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
p0760[0...1] CU analog inputs characteristic value y2 / CU AI char y2


-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0761[0...1] CU analog inputs wire breakage monitoring response threshold / CU WireBrkThresh


0.00 20.00 2.00
Description: Sets the response threshold for the wire breakage monitoring of the analog inputs.
The unit for the parameter value depends on the set analog input type.
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
Dependency: For the following analog input type, the wire breakage monitoring is active:
p0756[0...1] = 1 (unipolar voltage input monitored (+2 V ... +10 V)), unit [V]
p0756[0...1] = 3 (unipolar current input monitored (+4 mA ... +20 mA)), unit [mA]
Refer to: p0756
When p0761 = 0, wire breakage monitoring is not carried out.
p0762[0...1] CU analog inputs wire breakage monitoring delay time / CU wire brk t_del

0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for the wire breakage monitoring of the analog inputs.
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
p0771[0...1] CI: CU analog outputs signal source / CU AO S_src

Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Data set: -

- - [0] 21[0]
[1] 27[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the analog outputs.
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
Note: AO: Analog Output
T: Terminal
r0772[0...1] CU analog outputs, output value currently referred / CU AO outp_val


- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the actual referred output value of the analog outputs.
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
T: Terminal

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0773[0...1] CU analog outputs smoothing time constant / CU AO T_smooth


0.0 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st-order low pass filter for the analog outputs.
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
T: Terminal
r0774[0...1] CU analog outputs output voltage/current actual / CU AO U/I_outp


- - -
Description: Displays the actual output voltage or output current at the analog outputs.
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
T: Terminal
p0775[0...1] CU analog outputs activate absolute value generation / CU AO absVal act


0 1 0
Description: Activates the absolute value generation for the analog outputs.
Value: 0: No absolute value generation
1: Absolute value generation switched in
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
T: Terminal

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0776[0...1] CU analog outputs type / CU AO type


0 2 0
Description: Sets the analog output type.
p0776[x] = 1 corresponds to a voltage output (p0774, p0778, p0780 are displayed in V).
p0776[x] = 0, 2 corresponds to a current output (p0774, p0778, p0780 are displayed in mA).
Value: 0: Current output (0 mA ... +20 mA)
1: Voltage output (0 V ... +10 V)
2: Current output (+4 mA ... +20 mA)
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
Note: When changing p0776, the parameters of the scaling characteristic (p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780) are overwritten
with the following default values:
For p0776 = 0, p0777 is set to 0.0 %, p0778 = 0.0 mA, p0779 = 100.0 % and p0780 to 20.0 mA.
For p0776 = 1, p0777 is set to 0.0 %, p0778 = 0.0 V, p0779 = 100.0 % and p0780 to 10.0 V.
For p0776 = 2, p0777 is set to 0.0 %, p0778 = 4.0 mA, p0779 = 100.0 % and p0780 to 20.0 mA.
p0777[0...1] CU analog outputs characteristic value x1 / CU AO char x1


-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs.
The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog output type is changed (p0776).
Note: This parameter is automatically overwritten if p0776 (type of analog output) is changed.
The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
p0778[0...1] CU analog outputs characteristic value y1 / CU char y1


-20.000 [V] 20.000 [V] 0.000 [V]
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V or output current in mA) of the 1st value pair of the
characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
Dependency: The unit of this parameter (V or mA) depends on the analog input type.
Refer to: p0776

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0779[0...1] CU analog outputs characteristic value x2 / CU char x2


-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
p0780[0...1] CU analog outputs characteristic value y2 / CU char y2


-20.000 [V] 20.000 [V] 20.000 [V]
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V or output current in mA) of the 2nd value pair of the
characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
Dependency: The unit of this parameter (V or mA) depends on the analog input type.
Refer to: p0776
p0782[0...1] BI: CU analog outputs invert signal source / CU AO inv S_src


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to invert the analog output signals.
Index: [0] = AO0 (T 12/13)
[1] = AO1 (T 26/27)
T: Terminal

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0785.0...1 BO: CU analog outputs status word / CU AO ZSW


- - -
Description: Displays the status of analog outputs.
00 AO 0 negative Yes No -
01 AO 1 negative Yes No -
p0795 CU digital inputs simulation mode / CU DI simulation


- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the simulation mode for digital inputs.
00 DI 0 (T. 5) Simulation Terminal eval. -
11 DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 Simulation Terminal eval. -
Dependency: The setpoint for the input signals is specified using p0796.
Refer to: p0796
Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed up (p0971).
DI: Digital Input
T: Terminal
p0795 CU digital inputs simulation mode / CU DI simulation

CU240E-2 F

- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the simulation mode for digital inputs.
Dependency: The setpoint for the input signals is specified using p0796.
Refer to: p0796
DI: Digital Input
T: Terminal

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0796 CU digital inputs simulation mode setpoint / CU DI simul setp


- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the digital input simulation mode.
11 DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 High Low -
Dependency: The simulation of a digital input is selected using p0795.
Refer to: p0795
AI: Analog Input
DI: Digital Input
T: Terminal
p0796 CU digital inputs simulation mode setpoint / CU DI simul setp

CU240E-2 F

- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the digital input simulation mode.
04 DI 4 (T. 16) High Low -
05 DI 5 (T. 17) High Low -
11 DI 11 (T. 3, 4) AI 0 High Low -
12 DI 12 (T. 10, 11) AI 1 High Low -
Dependency: The simulation of a digital input is selected using p0795.
Refer to: p0795
AI: Analog Input
DI: Digital Input
T: Terminal

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0797[0...1] CU analog inputs simulation mode / CU AI sim_mode


0 1 0
Description: Sets the simulation mode for the analog inputs.
Value: 0: No simulation mode for analog input x
1: Simulation mode for analog input x
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
Dependency: The setpoint for the input voltage is specified via p0798.
Refer to: p0798
AI: Analog Input
p0798[0...1] CU analog inputs simulation mode setpoint / CU AI sim setp


-50.000 2000.000 0.000
Description: Sets the setpoint for the input value in the simulation mode of the analog inputs.
Index: [0] = AI0 (T. 3/4)
[1] = AI1 (T. 10/11)
Dependency: The simulation of an analog input is selected using p0797.
If AI x is parameterized as a voltage input (p0756), the setpoint is a voltage in V.
If AI x is parameterized as a current input (p0756), the setpoint is a current in mA.
AI: Analog Input
p0802 Data transfer: memory card as source/target / mem_card src/targ


0 100 0
Description: Sets the number for data transfer of a parameter backup from/to memory card.
Transfer from memory card to device memory (p0804 = 1):
- Sets the source of parameter backup (e.g. p0802 = 48 --> PS048xxx.ACX is the source).
Transfer from non-volatile device memory to memory card (p0804 = 2):
- Sets the target of parameter backup (e.g. p0802 = 23 --> PS023xxx.ACX is the target).
Notice: If the data between the volatile and non-volatile device memories differ, then it may be necessary to save the data
on the memory card in a non-volatile fashion prior to the transfer (e.g. p0971 = 1).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0803 Data transfer: device memory as source/target / Dev_mem src/targ


0 12 0
Description: Sets the number for data transfer of a parameter backup from/to device memory.
Transfer from memory card to device memory (p0804 = 1):
- Sets the target of the parameter backup (e.g. p0803 = 10 --> PS010xxx.ACX is the target).
Transfer from non-volatile device memory to memory card (p0804 = 2):
- Sets the source of the parameter backup (e.g. p0803 = 11 --> PS011xxx.ACX is the source).
Value: 0: Source/target standard
10: Source/target with setting 10
Notice: If the data between the volatile and non-volatile device memories differ, then it may be necessary to save the data
on the memory card in a non-volatile fashion prior to the transfer (e.g. p0971 = 1).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0804 Data transfer start / Data transf start

CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Data set: -

0 1100 0
Description: Sets the transfer direction and start of data transfer between the memory card and non-volatile device memory.
Example 1:
The parameter backup is to be transferred from the device memory to the memory card with setting 0. The parame-
ter backup is to be stored on the memory card with setting 22.
p0802 = 22 (parameter backup stored on memory card as target with setting 22)
p0803 = 0 (parameter backup stored in device memory as source with setting 0)
p0804 = 2 (start data transfer from device memory to memory card)
--> PS000xxx.ACX is transferred from device memory to memory card and stored as PS022xxx.ACX.
Example 2:
The parameter backup is to be transferred from the memory card to the device memory with setting 22. The param-
eter backup is to be stored in the device memory as setting 0.
p0802 = 22 (parameter backup stored on memory card as source with setting 22)
p0803 = 0 (parameter backup stored in device memory as target with setting 0)
p0804 = 1 (start data transfer from memory card to device memory)
--> PS022xxx.ACX is transferred from memory card to device memory and stored as PS000xxx.ACX.
Example 3 (not supported for PROFIBUS devices):
The communication configuration is to be transferred from the device memory to the memory card.
p0802 = (not relevant)
p0804 = 12 (start transferring the device master data (GSD) to the memory card)
--> The files that are relevant for the communication configuration are transferred from the device memory to the
memory card and stored in the /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/DATA/CFG directory.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Memory card to device memory
2: Device memory to memory card
1001: File on memory card cannot be opened
1002: File in device memory cannot be opened
1003: Memory card not found
1100: File cannot be transferred
Notice: The memory card must not be removed while data is being transferred.
After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
Note: If a parameter backup with setting 0 is detected on the memory card when the Control Unit is switched on
(PS000xxx.ACX), this is transferred automatically to the device memory.
When the memory card is inserted, a parameter backup with setting 0 (PS000xxx.ACX) is automatically written to
the memory card when the parameters are saved in a non-volatile memory (e.g. by means of "Copy RAM to ROM").
Once the data has been successfully transferred, this parameter is automatically reset to 0. If an error occurs, the
parameter is set to a value > 1000. Possible fault causes:
p0804 = 1001:
The parameter backup set in p0802 as the source on the memory card does not exist or there is not sufficient mem-
ory space available on the memory card.
p0804 = 1002:
The parameter backup set in p0803 as the source in the device memory does not exist or there is not sufficient
memory space available in the device memory.
p0804 = 1003:
No memory card has been inserted.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0804 Data transfer start / Data transf start

CU240E-2 DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Data set: -

0 1100 0
Description: Sets the transfer direction and start of data transfer between the memory card and non-volatile device memory.
Example 1:
The parameter backup is to be transferred from the device memory to the memory card with setting 0. The parame-
ter backup is to be stored on the memory card with setting 22.
p0802 = 22 (parameter backup stored on memory card as target with setting 22)
p0803 = 0 (parameter backup stored in device memory as source with setting 0)
p0804 = 2 (start data transfer from device memory to memory card)
--> PS000xxx.ACX is transferred from device memory to memory card and stored as PS022xxx.ACX.
Example 2:
The parameter backup is to be transferred from the memory card to the device memory with setting 22. The param-
eter backup is to be stored in the device memory as setting 0.
p0802 = 22 (parameter backup stored on memory card as source with setting 22)
p0803 = 0 (parameter backup stored in device memory as target with setting 0)
p0804 = 1 (start data transfer from memory card to device memory)
--> PS022xxx.ACX is transferred from memory card to device memory and stored as PS000xxx.ACX.
Example 3 (not supported for PROFIBUS devices):
The communication configuration is to be transferred from the device memory to the memory card.
p0804 = 12 (start transferring the device master data (GSD) to the memory card)
--> The files that are relevant for the communication configuration are transferred from the device memory to the
memory card and stored in the /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/DATA/CFG directory.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Memory card to device memory
2: Device memory to memory card
12: Device memory (communication configuration) to memory card
1001: File on memory card cannot be opened
1002: File in device memory cannot be opened
1003: Memory card not found
1100: File cannot be transferred
Notice: The memory card must not be removed while data is being transferred.
Note: If a parameter backup with setting 0 is detected on the memory card when the Control Unit is switched on
(PS000xxx.ACX), this is transferred automatically to the device memory.
When the memory card is inserted, a parameter backup with setting 0 (PS000xxx.ACX) is automatically written to
the memory card when the parameters are saved in a non-volatile memory (e.g. by means of "Copy RAM to ROM").
Once the data has been successfully transferred, this parameter is automatically reset to 0. If an error occurs, the
parameter is set to a value > 1000. Possible fault causes:
p0804 = 1001:
The parameter backup set in p0802 as the source on the memory card does not exist or there is not sufficient mem-
ory space available on the memory card.
p0804 = 1002:
The parameter backup set in p0803 as the source in the device memory does not exist or there is not sufficient
memory space available in the device memory.
p0804 = 1003:
No memory card has been inserted.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0806 BI: Inhibit master control / PcCtrl inhibit


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to block the master control.
Note: The commissioning software (drive control panel) uses the master control.
r0807.0 BO: Master control active / PcCtrl active


- - -
Description: Displays what has the master control.
The drive can be controlled via the BICO interconnection or from external (e.g. the commissioning software).
00 Master control active Yes No 5030,
6031
Notice: The master control only influences control word 1 and speed setpoint 1. Other control words/setpoints can be trans-
ferred from another automation device.
Note: Bit 0 = 0: BICO interconnection active
Bit 0 = 1: Master control for PC/OP
The master control is used from the commissioning software (drive control panel) and from the Operator Panel (OP,
LOCAL mode).
p0809[0...2] Copy Command Data Set CDS / Copy CDS


0 3 0
Description: Copies one Command Data Set (CDS) into another.
Index: [0] = Source Command Data Set
[1] = Target Command Data Set
[2] = Start copying procedure
Notice: When the command data sets are copied, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note: Procedure:
1. In Index 0, enter which command data set should be copied.
2. In Index 1, enter the command data set that is to be copied into.
3. Start copying: Set index 2 from 0 to 1.
p0809[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0810 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 0 / CDS select., bit 0
CU240B-2 Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the Command Data Set bit 0 (CDS bit 0).
Dependency: Refer to: r0050, p0811, r0836
Note: The Command Data Set selected using the binector inputs is displayed in r0836.
The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.
A Command Data Set can be copied using p0809.
CU240B-2 DP Access level: 2 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary

- - 722.3

- - 0

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0819[0...2] Copy Drive Data Set DDS / Copy DDS


0 3 0
Description: Copies one Drive Data Set (DDS) into another.
Index: [0] = Source Drive Data Set
[1] = Target Drive Data Set
[2] = Start copying procedure
Notice: When the drive data sets are copied, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note: Procedure:
1. In Index 0, enter which drive data set is to be copied.
2. In Index 1, enter the drive data set data that is to be copied into.
3. Start copying: Set index 2 from 0 to 1.
p0819[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed.
p0820[0...n] BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 0 / DDS select., bit 0
Can be changed: C(15), T Scaling: - Data set: CDS, p0170

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 0 (DDS, bit 0).

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 1 (DDS, bit 1).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0826[0...n] Motor changeover, motor number / Mot_chng mot No.


0 3 0
Description: Sets the freely-assignable motor number for the drive data set changeover.
If the same motor is driven by different drive data sets, the same motor number must also be entered in these data
sets.
If the motor is also switched with the drive data set, different motor numbers must be used. In this case, the data set
can only be switched when the pulse inhibit is set.
Note: If the motor numbers are identical, the same thermal motor model is used for calculation after data set changeover.
If different motor numbers are used, different models are also used for calculating (the inactive motor cools down in
each case).
For the same motor number, the correction values of the Rs, Lh or kT adaptation are applied for the data set
changeover (refer to r1782, r1787, r1797).
r0835.2...8 CO/BO: Data set changeover status word / DDS_ZSW


- - -
Description: Displays the status word for the drive data set changeover.
02 Internal parameter calculation active Yes No -
04 Armature short circuit active Yes No -
05 Identification running Yes No -
07 Rotating measurement running Yes No -
08 Motor data identification running Yes No -
Note: Re bit 02:
A data set changeover is delayed by the time required for the internal parameter calculation.
Re bit 04:
A data set changeover is only carried out when the armature short circuit is not activated.
Re bit 05:
A data set changeover is only carried out when pole position identification is not running.
Re bit 07:
A data set changeover is only carried out when rotating measurement is not running.
Re bit 08:
A data set changeover is only carried out when motor data identification is not running.
r0836.0...1 CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS selected / CDS selected


- - -
Description: Displays the command data set (CDS) selected via the binector input.
00 CDS select. bit 0 ON OFF -
01 CDS select. bit 1 ON OFF -
Note: Command data sets are selected via binector input p0810 and following.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0837.0...1 CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS selected / DDS selected


- - -
Description: Displays the drive data set (DDS) selected via the binector input.
00 DDS select. bit 0 ON OFF -
01 DDS select. bit 1 ON OFF -
Note: Drive data sets are selected via binector input p0820 and following.
The currently effective drive data set is displayed in r0051.
If there is only one data set, then a value of 0 is displayed in this parameter and not the selection via binector inputs.
p0840[0...n] BI: ON / OFF (OFF1) / ON / OFF (OFF1)

CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Data set: CDS, p0170

- - [0] 722.0
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "ON/OFF (OFF1)".
For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 0 (STW1.0).
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
Notice: For binector input p0840 = 0 signal, the motor can be moved, jogging using binector input p1055 or p1056.
The command "ON/OFF (OFF1)" can be issued using binector input p0840 or p1055/p1056.
For binector input p0840 = 0 signal, the switch-on inhibit is acknowledged.
Only the signal source that originally powered up can also power down again.
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: For drives with closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20), the following applies:
- BI: p0840 = 0 signal: OFF1 (braking with the ramp-function generator, then pulse suppression and switch-on
inhibit)
For drives with closed-loop torque control (p1300 = 22), the following applies:
- BI: p0840 = 0 signal: immediate pulse cancellation
For drives with closed-loop torque control (activated using p1501), the following applies:
- BI: p0840 = 0 signal: No dedicated braking response, but pulse suppression when standstill is detected (p1226,
p1227)
For drives with closed-loop speed/torque control, the following applies:
- BI: p0840 = 0/1 signal: ON (pulses can be enabled)

Parameters
List of Parameters

CU240E-2 DP Can be changed: T Scaling: - Data set: CDS, p0170

- - [0] 2090.0
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "ON/OFF (OFF1)".
Notice: For binector input p0840 = 0 signal, the motor can be moved, jogging using binector input p1055 or p1056.
The command "ON/OFF (OFF1)" can be issued using binector input p0840 or p1055/p1056.
For binector input p0840 = 0 signal, the switch-on inhibit is acknowledged.
Only the signal source that originally powered up can also power down again.
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
Note: For drives with closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20), the following applies:
- BI: p0840 = 0 signal: OFF1 (braking with the ramp-function generator, then pulse suppression and switch-on
inhibit)
For drives with closed-loop torque control (p1300 = 22), the following applies:
- BI: p0840 = 0 signal: immediate pulse cancellation
For drives with closed-loop torque control (activated using p1501), the following applies:
- BI: p0840 = 0 signal: No dedicated braking response, but pulse suppression when standstill is detected (p1226,
p1227)
For drives with closed-loop speed/torque control, the following applies:
- BI: p0840 = 0/1 signal: ON (pulses can be enabled)
p0844[0...n] BI: No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1 / OFF2 S_src 1


- - 1
Description: Sets the first signal source for the command "No coast down/coast down (OFF2)".
The following signals are AND'ed:
- BI: p0844 "No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2) signal source 1"
For the PROFIdrive profile, the result of the AND logic operation corresponds to control word 1 bit 1 (STW1.1).
BI: p0844 = 0 signal or BI: p0845 = 0 signal
- OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switch on inhibit)
BI: p0844 = 1 signal and BI: p0845 = 1 signal
- No OFF2 (enable is possible)

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - [0] 2090.1
[1] 1
[2] 2090.1
[3] 2090.1
Description: Sets the first signal source for the command "No coast down/coast down (OFF2)".


- - 1
Description: Sets the second signal source for the command "No coast down/coast down (OFF2)".
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is effective.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0848[0...n] BI: No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3) signal source 1 / OFF3 S_src 1

- - 1
Description: Sets the first signal source for the command "No quick stop/quick stop (OFF3)".
- BI: p0848 "No quick stop / quick stop (OFF3) signal source 1"
- OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse suppression and switch on inhibit)

- - [0] 2090.2
[1] 1
[2] 2090.2
[3] 2090.2
Description: Sets the first signal source for the command "No quick stop/quick stop (OFF3)".

Parameters
List of Parameters

- - 1
Description: Sets the second signal source for the command "No quick stop/quick stop (OFF3)".
Caution: When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is effective.
p0852[0...n] BI: Enable operation/inhibit operation / Operation enable


- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable operation/inhibit operation".
BI: p0852 = 0 signal
Inhibit operation (suppress pulses).
Enable operation (pulses can be enabled).

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - [0] 2090.3
[1] 1
[2] 2090.3
[3] 2090.3
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable operation/inhibit operation".
Inhibit operation (suppress pulses).
Enable operation (pulses can be enabled).
p0854[0...n] BI: Control by PLC/no control by PLC / Master ctrl by PLC


- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "control by PLC/no control by PLC".
No control by PLC
Control by PLC.
Note: This bit is used to initiate a response for the drives when the control fails (F07220). If there is no control available,
then binector input p0854 should be set to 1.
If a control is available, then STW1.10 must be set to 1 (PZD1) so that the received data is updated. This applies
regardless of the setting in p0854 and even in the case of free telegram configuration (p0922 = 999).

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - [0] 2090.10
[1] 1
[2] 2090.10
[3] 2090.10
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "control by PLC/no control by PLC".
No control by PLC
Control by PLC.
Note: This bit is used to initiate a response for the drives when the control fails (F07220). If there is no control available,
then binector input p0854 should be set to 1.
If a control is available, then STW1.10 must be set to 1 (PZD1) so that the received data is updated. This applies
regardless of the setting in p0854 and even in the case of free telegram configuration (p0922 = 999).
p0855[0...n] BI: Unconditionally release holding brake / Uncond open brake


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "unconditionally open holding brake".
Note: The signal via BI: p0858 (unconditionally close holding brake) has a higher priority than via BI: p0855 (uncondition-
ally open holding brake).
p0856[0...n] BI: Speed controller enable / n_ctrl enable


- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable speed controller" (r0898.12).
0 signal: Set the I component and speed controller output to zero.
1 signal: Enable speed controller.
Note: If "enable speed controller" is withdrawn, then an existing brake will be closed.
If "speed controller enable" is withdrawn, the pulses are not suppressed.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0857 Power unit monitoring time / PU t_monit


100.0 [ms] 60000.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the monitoring time for the power unit.
The monitoring time is started after an 0/1 edge of the ON/OFF1 command. If the power unit does not return a
READY signal within the monitoring time, fault F07802 is output.
Dependency: Refer to: F07802, F30027
Notice: The maximum time to pre-charge the DC link is monitored in the power unit and cannot be changed. The maximum
pre-charging duration depends on the power unit.
The monitoring time for the pre-charging is started after the ON command (BI: p0840 = 0/1 signal). Fault F30027 is
output when the maximum pre-charging duration is exceeded.
Note: The factory setting for p0857 depends on the power unit.
The monitoring time for the ready signal of the power unit includes the time to pre-charge the DC link and, if rele-
vant, the de-bounce time of the contactors.
If an excessively low value is entered into p0857, then after enable, this results in the corresponding fault.
p0858[0...n] BI: Unconditionally close holding brake / Uncond close brake


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "unconditionally close holding brake".
Note: The signal via BI: p0858 (unconditionally close holding brake) has a higher priority than via BI: p0855 (uncondition-
ally open holding brake).
For a 1 signal via BI: p0858, the command "unconditionally close the holding brake" is executed and internally a
zero setpoint is entered.
p0897 BI: Parking axis selection / Parking axis sel


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the "parking axis" function.
Dependency: BI: p0897 = 0 signal
The function "parking axis" is not selected.
The function "parking axis" is selected.
Note: After it has been selected the "parking axis" function only becomes active when the pulses are suppressed.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0898.0...14 CO/BO: Control word sequence control / STW seq_ctrl


- - -
Description: Displays the control word of the sequence control.
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No -
05 Continue ramp-function generator Yes No -
07 Command open brake Yes No -
08 Jog 1 Yes No -
09 Jog 2 Yes No -
12 Speed controller enable Yes No -
14 Command close brake Yes No -
Re bit 10:
If p0700 = 2 is set, bit 10 always shows "1".
r0899.0...13 CO/BO: Status word sequence control / ZSW seq_ctrl


- - -
Description: Displays the status word of the sequence control.
00 Rdy for switch on Yes No -
01 Ready Yes No -
02 Operation enabled Yes No -
03 Jog active Yes No -
04 No coasting active OFF2 inactive OFF2 active -
05 No Quick Stop active OFF3 inactive OFF3 active -
06 Switching on inhibited active Yes No -
07 Drive ready Yes No -
08 Controller enable Yes No -
09 Control request Yes No -
11 Pulses enabled Yes No -
12 Open holding brake Yes No -
13 Command close holding brake Yes No -
Note: Re bits 00, 01, 02, 04, 05, 06, 09:
For PROFIdrive, these signals are used for status word 1.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0918 PROFIBUS address / PB address


1 126 126
Description: Displays or sets the PROFIBUS address for PROFIBUS interface on the Control Unit.
The address can be set as follows:
1) Using the DIP switch on the Control Unit.
--> p0918 can then only be read and displays the selected address.
--> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
2) Using p0918
--> Only if all of the DIP switches are set to ON or OFF.
--> The address is saved in a non-volatile fashion using the function "copy from RAM to ROM".
Notice: For p0014 = 1, the following applies:
Before a changed setting becomes permanently effective, a non-volatile RAM to ROM data save is required. To do
this, set p0971 = 1 or p0014 = 1.
Note: Permissible PROFIBUS addresses: 1 ... 126
Address 126 is used for commissioning.
Every PROFIBUS address change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
p0922 PROFIdrive telegram selection / PD Telegr_sel

CU240E-2 DP Can be changed: C(1), T Scaling: - Data set: -

1 999 1
Description: Sets the send and receive telegram.
Value: 1: Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2
999: Free telegram configuration with BICO
Note: If a value is not equal to 999, a telegram is set and the automatically set interconnections in the telegram are inhib-
ited.
The inhibited interconnections can only be changed again after setting value 999.
r0944 CO: Counter for fault buffer changes / Fault buff change

- - -
Description: Displays fault buffer changes. This counter is incremented every time the fault buffer changes.
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0945[0...63] Fault code / Fault code


- - -
Description: Displays the numbers of faults that have occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
Fault buffer structure (general principle):
r0945[0], r0949[0], r0948[0], r2109[0] --> actual fault case, fault 1
...
r0945[7], r0949[7], r0948[7], r2109[7] --> actual fault case, fault 8
r0945[8], r0949[8], r0948[8], r2109[8] --> 1st acknowledged fault case, fault 1
...
r0945[15], r0949[15], r0948[15], r2109[15] --> 1st acknowledged fault case, fault 8
...
r0945[56], r0949[56], r0948[56], r2109[56] --> 7th acknowledged fault case, fault 1
...
r0945[63], r0949[63], r0948[63], r2109[63] --> 7th acknowledged fault case, fault 8
r0946[0...65534] Fault code list / Fault code list


- - -
Description: Lists the fault codes stored in the drive unit.
The indices can only be accessed with a valid fault code.
Dependency: The parameter assigned to the fault code is entered in r0951 under the same index.
r0947[0...63] Fault number / Fault number


- - -
Description: This parameter is identical to r0945.
r0948[0...63] Fault time received in milliseconds / t_fault recv ms


- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the fault occurred.
Notice: The time comprises r2130 (days) and r0948 (milliseconds).
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.
When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the TimeDifference data type applies.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0949[0...63] Fault value / Fault value


- - -
Description: Displays additional information about the fault that occurred (as integer number).
p0952 Fault cases, counter / Fault cases qty


0 65535 0
Description: Number of fault situations that have occurred since the last reset.
Dependency: The fault buffer is deleted (cleared) by setting p0952 to 0.
Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136
r0963 PROFIBUS baud rate / PB baud rate


0 255 -
Description: Displays the corresponding value for the PROFIBUS baud rate.
Value: 0: 9.6 kbit/s
1: 19.2 kbit/s
2: 93.75 kbit/s
3: 187.5 kbit/s
4: 500 kbit/s
6: 1.5 Mbit/s
7: 3 Mbit/s
8: 6 Mbit/s
9: 12 Mbit/s
10: 31.25 kbit/s
11: 45.45 kbit/s
255: Baud rate unknown

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0964[0...6] Device identification / Device ident.


- - -
Description: Displays the device identification.
Index: [0] = Company (Siemens = 42)
[1] = Device type
[2] = Firmware version
[3] = Firmware date (year)
[4] = Firmware date (day/month)
[5] = Number of drive objects
[6] = Firmware patch/hot fix
Note: Example:
r0964[0] = 42 --> SIEMENS
r0964[1] = device type, see below
r0964[2] = 403 --> first part of the firmware version V04.03 (for second part, refer to index 6)
r0964[3] = 2010 --> year 2010
r0964[4] = 1705 --> 17th of May
r0964[5] = 1 --> 1 drive object
r0964[6] = 200 --> second part, firmware version (complete version: V04.03.02.00)
Device type:
r0964[1] = 6100 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240B-2 DP
r0964[1] = 6103 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240B-2
r0964[1] = 6210 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240E-2 DP
r0964[1] = 6213 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240E-2
r0964[1] = 6220 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240E-2 DP-F
r0964[1] = 6223 --> SINAMICS G120 CU240E-2 F
r0965 PROFIdrive profile number / PD profile number


- - -
Description: Displays the PROFIdrive profile number and profile version.
Constant value = 0329 hex.
Byte 1: Profile number = 03 hex = PROFIdrive profile
Byte 2: Profile version = 29 hex = Version 4.1
Note: When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the Octet String 2 data type applies.
p0969 System runtime relative / t_System relative


0 [ms] 4294967295 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Displays the system runtime in ms since the last POWER ON.
Note: The value in p0969 can only be reset to 0.
The value overflows after approx. 49 days.
When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the TimeDifference data type applies.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0970 Reset drive parameters / Drive par reset


0 300 0
Description: The parameter is used to initiate the reset of the drive parameters.
Parameters p0100, p0205 are not reset.
The following motor parameters are defined in accordance with the power unit: p0300 ... p0311.
When downloading settings 10, 11, 12, the buffer memory mode is automatically deactivated (p0014 = 0).
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Start a parameter reset
5: Starts a safety parameter reset
10: Starts to download setting 10
100: Start a BICO interconnection reset
Caution: When the buffer memory is active (see p0014), the actual parameters are backed up from RAM to ROM when a
parameter set is loaded (p0970 = 10, 11, 12).
Peculiarities of communication via PROFIBUS DP:
- Communication with Class 1 masters (e.g. S7 controllers) is interrupted.
- Communication with Class 2 masters (e.g. STARTER) is retained.
Note: A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset).
At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0.
Parameter reset has been completed if p0970 and p0010 have been set to 0.
For p0970 = 5 the following applies:
The password for Safety Integrated must be set.
When Safety Integrated is enabled, this can result in error messages, which then require an acceptance test to be
performed.
Then save the parameters and carry out a POWER ON.
If a Safety Integrated function is parameterized (p9601), then the safety parameters are not reset. In this case, an
error message (F01659) is output with fault value 2.
The following generally applies:
One index of parameters p2100, p2101, p2118, p2119, p2126, p2127 is not reset, if a parameterized message is
precisely active in this index.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p0971 Save parameters / Save par


0 12 0
Description: Setting to save parameters in the non-volatile memory.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Save drive object
10: Save in non-volatile memory as setting 10
Caution: If a memory card (optional) is inserted, the following applies:
The parameters are also saved on the card and therefore overwrite any existing data!
Caution: The Control Unit power supply may only be powered down after data has been saved (i.e. after data save has been
started, wait until the parameter again has the value 0).
Notice: Writing to parameters is inhibited while saving.
The progress while saving is displayed in r3996.
p0972 Drive unit reset / Drv_unit reset


0 3 0
Description: Sets the required procedure to execute a hardware reset for the drive unit.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Hardware-Reset immediate
2: Hardware reset preparation
3: Hardware reset after cyclic communication has failed
Danger: It must be absolutely ensured that the system is in a safe condition.
The memory card/device memory of the Control Unit must not be accessed.
Note: If value = 1:
Reset is immediately executed and communications interrupted.
After communications have been established, check the reset operation (refer below).
If value = 2:
Help to check the reset operation.
Firstly, set p0972 = 2 and then read back. Secondly, set p0972 = 1 (it is possible that this request is possibly no lon-
ger acknowledged). The communication is then interrupted.
If value = 3:
The reset is executed after interrupting cyclic communication. This setting is used to implement a synchronized
reset by a control for several drive units.
If the cyclic communication is active for both PROFIdrive interfaces, then the reset is executed after completing
both cycle communications.
To check the reset operation:
After the drive unit has been restarted and communications have been established, read p0972 and check the fol-
lowing:
p0972 = 0? --> The reset was successfully executed.
p0972 > 0? --> The reset was not executed.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0980[0...299] List of existing parameters 1 / List avail par 1


- - -
Description: Displays the parameters that exist for this drive.
Note: The existing parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here.
In a long list, index 299 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).


- - -
In a long list, index 299 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299]


- - -
r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299]

Parameters
List of Parameters
r0990[0...99] List of modified parameters 1 / List chang. par 1


- - -
Description: Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive.
Note: Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a
long list, index 99 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99]


- - -
Note: Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a
long list, index 99 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99]


- - -
Note: Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here.
r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99]

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1000[0...n] Speed setpoint selection / n_set sel


0 200 2
Description: Sets the source for the speed setpoint.
For single-digit values, the following applies:
The value specifies the main setpoint.
For double-digit values, the following applies:
The left-hand digit specifies the supplementary setpoint, the right-hand digit the main setpoint.
Example:
Value = 26
--> The analog setpoint (2) supplies the supplementary setpoint.
--> The fieldbus (6) supplies the main setpoint.
Value: 0: No main setpoint
1: Motorized potentiometer
2: Analog setpoint
3: Fixed speed setpoint
6: Fieldbus
10: Motor potentiometer + no main setpoint
11: Motor potentiometer + motor potentiometer
12: Motor potentiometer + analog setpoint
13: Motor potentiometer + fixed speed setpoint
16: Motor potentiometer + fieldbus
20: Analog setpoint + no main setpoint
21: Analog setpoint + motor potentiometer
22: Analog setpoint + analog setpoint
23: Analog setpoint + fixed speed setpoint
26: Analog setpoint + fieldbus
30: Fixed speed setpoint + no main setpoint
31: Fixed speed setpoint + motor potentiometer
32: Fixed speed setpoint + analog setpoint
33: Fixed speed setpoint + fixed speed setpoint
36: Fixed speed setpoint + fieldbus
60: Fieldbus + no main setpoint
61: Fieldbus + motor potentiometer
62: Fieldbus + analog setpoint
63: Fieldbus + fixed speed setpoint
66: Fieldbus+fieldbus
200: Analog output connection
Dependency: When changing this parameter, the following settings are influenced:
Refer to: p1070, p1071, p1075, p1076
Caution: If p1000 is selected as the main setpoint of the fieldbus, the following BICO interconnection is set automatically:
p2051[1] = r0063

Parameters
List of Parameters


0 200 6
Example:
Value = 26
2: Analog setpoint
6: Fieldbus
Refer to: p1070, p1071, p1075, p1076
p2051[1] = r0063

Parameters
List of Parameters


0 200 2
Example:
Value = 26
2: Analog setpoint
6: Fieldbus
17: Motor potentiometer + analog setpoint 2
27: Analog setpoint + analog setpoint 2
37: Fixed speed setpoint + analog setpoint 2
67: Fieldbus + analog setpoint 2
70: Analog setpoint 2 + no main setpoint
71: Analog setpoint 2 + motor potentiometer
72: Analog setpoint 2 + analog setpoint
73: Analog setpoint 2 + fixed speed setpoint
76: Analog setpoint 2 + fieldbus
77: Analog setpoint 2 + analog setpoint 2
Refer to: p1070, p1071, p1075, p1076
p2051[1] = r0063

Parameters
List of Parameters

CU240E-2 DP F Can be changed: T Scaling: - Data set: CDS, p0170

0 200 6
Example:
Value = 26
2: Analog setpoint
6: Fieldbus
17: Motor potentiometer + analog setpoint 2
37: Fixed speed setpoint + analog setpoint 2
71: Analog setpoint 2 + motor potentiometer
73: Analog setpoint 2 + fixed speed setpoint
Refer to: p1070, p1071, p1075, p1076
p2051[1] = r0063

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1001[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 1 / n_set_fixed 1

Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Data set: DDS, p0180

-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 1.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.


-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]


-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]


-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]


-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]

Parameters
List of Parameters


-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]


-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]


-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]


-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]


-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]

Parameters
List of Parameters


-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]


-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]


-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]


-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]


-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1016 Fixed speed setpoint mode / n_setp_fixed mode


1 2 1
Description: Sets the mode to select the fixed speed setpoint.
Value: 1: Direct selection
2: Selection binary coded
Note: Re p1016 = 1:
In this mode, the fixed speed setpoint is entered using p1001 ... p1004.
Re p1016 = 2:
In this mode, the fixed speed setpoint is entered using p1001 ... p1015.
p1020[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 0 / n_set_fixed Bit 0


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint.
Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1021, p1022, p1023, r1197
Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).


- - 0
Refer to: p1020, p1022, p1023, r1197


- - 0
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1023, r1197

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, r1197
r1024 CO: Fixed speed setpoint effective / n_set_fixed eff


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the selected and effective fixed speed setpoint.
This setpoint is the output value for the fixed speed setpoints and must be appropriately interconnected (e.g. with
the main setpoint).
r1025.0 BO: Fixed speed setpoint status / n_setp_fix status


- - -
Description: Displays the status when selecting the fixed speed setpoints.
00 Fixed speed setpoint selected Yes No -
Note: Re bit 00:
When the fixed speed setpoints are directly selected (p1016 = 1), this bit is set if at least 1 fixed speed setpoint is
selected.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1030[0...n] Motorized potentiometer configuration / Mop configuration

Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Data set: DDS, p0180

- - 0000 0110 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the motorized potentiometer.
00 Data save active Yes No -
01 Automatic mode, ramp-function generator Yes No -
active
02 Initial rounding-off active Yes No -
03 Save in NVRAM active Yes No -
04 Ramp-function generator always active Yes No -
Note: Re bit 00:
0: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p1040.
1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved after OFF and after ON set to the saved value. In order to
save in a non-volatile fashion, bit 03 should be set to 1.
Re bit 01:
0: Without ramp-function generator in the automatic mode (ramp-up/ramp-down time = 0).
1: With ramp-function generator in the automatic mode.
For manual operation (0 signal via BI: p1041), the ramp-function generator is always active.
Re bit 02:
0: Without initial rounding-off
1: With initial rounding-off. The selected ramp-up/down time is correspondingly exceeded. The initial rounding-off is
a sensitive way of specifying small changes (progressive reaction when keys are pressed).
The jerk for the initial rounding-off is independent of the ramp-up time and only depends on the selected maximum
speed (p1082). It is calculated as follows:
r = 0.01 % * p1082 [1/s] / 0.13^2 [s^2]
The jerk acts up until the maximum acceleration is reached (a_max = p1082 [1/s] / p1047 [s]), and then the drive
continues to run linearly with a constant rate of acceleration. The higher the maximum acceleration (the lower that
p1047 is), the longer the ramp-up time increases with respect to the set ramp-up time.
Re bit 03:
0: Non-volatile data save de-activated.
1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a non-volatile fashion (for bit 00 = 1).
Re bit 04:
When the bit is set, the ramp-function generator is computed independent of the pulse enable. The actual output
value of the motorized potentiometer is always in r1050.
p1035[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint raise / Mop raise


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to continually increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint change (CO: r1050) depends on the set ramp-up time (p1047) and the duration of the signal that is
present (BI: p1035).

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - [0] 2090.13
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source to continually increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer.
p1036[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Mop lower


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to continuously lower the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint change (CO: r1050) depends on the set ramp-down time (p1048) and the duration of the signal that is


- - [0] 2090.14
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source to continuously lower the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer.
p1037[0...n] Motorized potentiometer maximum speed / MotP n_max

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: FloatingPoint32

-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the maximum speed/velocity for the motorized potentiometer.
Note: This parameter is automatically pre-assigned in the commissioning phase.
The setpoint output from the motorized potentiometer is limited to this value (see function diagram 3020).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1038[0...n] Motorized potentiometer minimum speed / MotP n_min


-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the minimum speed/velocity for the motorized potentiometer.
Note: This parameter is automatically pre-assigned in the commissioning phase.
The setpoint output from the motorized potentiometer is limited to this value (see function diagram 3020).
p1039[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer inversion / MotP inv


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to invert the minimum speed/velocity or the maximum speed/velocity for the motorized
potentiometer.
Note: The inversion is only active during "motorized potentiometer raise" or "motorized potentiometer lower".
p1040[0...n] Motorized potentiometer starting value / Mop start value


-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the starting value for the motorized potentiometer. This starting value becomes effective after the drive has
been powered up.
Dependency: Only effective if p1030.0 = 0.
Refer to: p1030
p1041[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer manual/automatic / Mop manual/auto


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to change over from manual to automatic when using a motorized potentiometer.
In the manual mode, the setpoint is changed using two signals - raise and lower. In the automatic mode, the set-
point must be interconnected via a connector input.
Dependency: Refer to: p1030, p1035, p1036, p1042
Note: The effectiveness of the internal ramp-function generator can be set in automatic mode.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1042[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer automatic setpoint / Mop auto setpoint

Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Data set: CDS, p0170

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint of the motorized potentiometer in the automatic mode.
p1043[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer accept setting value / MotP acc set val

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to accept the setting value for the motorized potentiometer.
Note: The setting value (CI: p1044) becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command (BI: p1043).
p1044[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer setting value / Mop set val


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setting value for the motorized potentiometer.
Note: The setting value (CI: p1044) becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command (BI: p1043).
r1045 CO: Mot. potentiometer speed setp. in front of ramp-fct. gen. / Mop n_set bef RFG

- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Sets the effective setpoint in front of the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator.
p1047[0...n] Motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Mop ramp-up time


0.000 [s] 1000.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-up time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint is changed from zero up to the speed/velocity limit (p1082) within this time (if no initial rounding-off has
been activated).
Note: When the initial rounding-off is activated (p1030.2) the ramp-up time is correspondingly extended.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1048[0...n] Motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Mop ramp-down time


0.000 [s] 1000.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint is changed from the speed/velocity limit (p1082) to zero within this time (if no initial rounding-off has
been activated).
Note: The deceleration time is extended corresponding to the activated initial rounding-off (p1030.2).
r1050 CO: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator /

Mop setp after RFG

- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Sets the effective setpoint after the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator.
This setpoint is the output value of the motorized potentiometer and must be appropriately interconnected onwards
(e.g. with the main setpoint).
Note: For "With ramp-function generator", after an OFF1, OFF2, OFF3 or for a 0 signal via BI: p0852 (inhibit operation,
cancel pulses) the ramp-function generator output (r1050) is set to the starting value (configuration via p1030.0).
p1051[0...n] CI: Speed limit RFG positive direction of rotation / n_limit RFG pos
CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
CU240B-2 DP Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Data set: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2 Units group: - Unit selection: -
CU240E-2 DP

- - 1083[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the positive direction on the ramp-function generator input.
CU240E-2 DP F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2 F Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Data set: CDS, p0170

- - 9733[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the positive direction on the ramp-function generator input.
p1052[0...n] CI: Speed limit RFG negative direction of rotation / n_limit RFG neg
CU240B-2 DP Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Data set: CDS, p0170
CU240E-2 Units group: - Unit selection: -
CU240E-2 DP

- - 1086[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the negative direction on the ramp-function generator input.

Parameters
List of Parameters
CU240E-2 DP F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2 F Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Data set: CDS, p0170

- - 9733[1]
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the negative direction on the ramp-function generator input.
p1055[0...n] BI: Jog bit 0 / Jog bit 0


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for jog 1.
Notice: The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056.
The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056.
Only the signal source that was used to power up can also be used to power down again.


- - [0] 0
[1] 722.0
[2] 0
[3] 0


- - 0

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - [0] 0
[1] 722.1
[2] 0
[3] 0
p1058[0...n] Jog 1 speed setpoint / Jog 1 n_set

Can be changed: T Scaling: - Data set: DDS, p0180

-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 150.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed/velocity for jog 1. Jogging is level-triggered and allows the motor to be incrementally moved.


-210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] -150.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed/velocity for jog 2. Jogging is level-triggered and allows the motor to be incrementally moved.
p1063[0...n] Speed limit setpoint channel / n_limit setp


0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed limit/velocity limit effective in the setpoint channel.
Dependency: Refer to: p1082, p1083, p1085, p1086, p1088

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1070[0...n] CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint

CU240E-2 Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Data set: CDS, p0170

- - [0] 755[0]
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the main setpoint.
Examples:
r1024: Fixed speed setpoint effective
r1050: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator
Dependency: Refer to: p1071, r1073, r1078

CU240B-2 DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2 DP Can be changed: T Scaling: p2000 Data set: CDS, p0170

- - [0] 2050[1]
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the main setpoint.
Examples:
r1024: Fixed speed setpoint effective
r1050: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator
p1071[0...n] CI: Main setpoint scaling / Main setp scal


- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the main setpoint.
r1073 CO: Main setpoint effective / Main setpoint eff


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the effective main setpoint. The value shown is the main setpoint after scaling.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1075[0...n] CI: Suppl setpoint / Suppl setpoint


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the supplementary setpoint.
p1076[0...n] CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling / Suppl setp scal


- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the supplementary setpoint.
r1077 CO: Supplementary setpoint effective / Suppl setpoint eff


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the effective supplementary setpoint. The value shown is the additional setpoint after scaling.
r1078 CO: Total setpoint effective / Total setpoint eff


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the total effective setpoint. The value indicates the sum of the effective main setpoint and supplementary
setpoint.
p1080[0...n] Minimum speed / n_min


0.000 [rpm] 19500.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the lowest possible motor speed.
This value is not undershot in operation.
Note: The parameter value applies for both motor directions.
In exceptional cases, the motor can operate below this value (e.g. when reversing).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1082[0...n] Maximum speed / n_max


0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 1500.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the highest possible speed.
Dependency: Refer to: p0230, r0313, p0322
Note: The parameter applies for both motor directions. The parameter has a limiting effect and is the reference quantity
for all ramp-up and ramp-down times (e.g. down ramps, ramp-function generator, motor potentiometer).
Since the parameter is part of quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), it is defined appropriately when p0310, p0311,
p0322, p0324, p0530, p0531, and p0532 are changed.
The following limits are always effective for p1082:
p1082 <= min(p0324, p0532) if p0324 > 0 and p0532 > 0
p1082 <= p0322 if p0324 = 0 or p0532 = 0 and p0322 > 0
p1082 <= 60 x maximum(15 x r0310, 650 Hz) / r0313
p1082 <= 60 x maximum power unit pulse frequency / (k x r0313), with k = 12 (vector control), k = 6.5 (U/f control)
If a sine-wave filter (p0230 = 3) is parameterized as output filter, then the maximum speed is limited corresponding
to the maximum permissible filter output frequency (refer to the filter data sheet). For reactors and dU/dt filters, it is
limited to 120 Hz / r0313.
During automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0), the parameter value is assigned the maximum motor speed
(p0322). If p0322 = 0, the rated motor speed (p0311) is used as default (pre-assignment) value. For induction
motors, the synchronous no-load speed is used as the default value (p0310 x 60 / r0313).
For synchronous motors, the following additionally applies:
During automatic calculation (p0340, p3900), p1082 is limited to speeds where the EMF does not exceed the DC
link voltage.
p1082 is also available in the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1); this means that when exiting via p3900 > 0, the
value is not changed.
For vector control, the maximum speed is restricted to 60.0 / (8.333 x 500 µs x r0313). This can be identified by a
reduction in r1084. p1082 is not changed in this process due to the fact that the operating mode p1300 can be
changed over.
When using sine-wave filters (p0230 = 3, 4), the maximum speed r1084 is limited to 70% of the resonant frequency
of the filter capacitance and the motor leakage inductance.
p1083[0...n] CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos


0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the maximum speed for the positive direction.
r1084 CO: Speed limit positive effective / n_limit pos eff


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the effective positive speed limit.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1085[0...n] CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos


- - 1083[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the positive direction.
p1086[0...n] CO: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg


-210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm] -210000.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed limit for the negative direction.
r1087 CO: Speed limit negative effective / n_limit neg eff


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the effective negative speed limit.
p1088[0...n] CI: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg


- - 1086[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed/velocity limit of the negative direction.
p1091[0...n] Skip speed 1 / n_skip 1


0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets skip speed 1.
Notice: Skip bandwidths can also become ineffective as a result of the downstream limits in the setpoint channel.
Note: The skip (suppression) speeds can be used to prevent the effects of mechanical resonance.

Parameters
List of Parameters


0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]


0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]


0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
p1101[0...n] Skip speed bandwidth / n_skip bandwidth


0.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the bandwidth for the skip speeds/velocities 1 to 4.
Note: The setpoint (reference) speeds are skipped (suppressed) in the range of the skip speed +/-p1101.
Steady-state operation is not possible in the skipped (suppressed) speed range. The skip (suppression) range is
skipped.
Example:
p1091 = 600 and p1101 = 20
--> setpoint speeds between 580 and 620 [rpm] are skipped.
For the skip bandwidths, the following hysteresis behavior applies:
For a setpoint speed coming from below, the following applies:
r1170 < 580 [rpm] and 580 [rpm] <= r1114 <= 620 [rpm] --> r1119 = 580 [rpm]
For a setpoint speed coming from above, the following applies:
r1170 > 620 [rpm] and 580 [rpm] <= r1114 <= 620 [rpm] --> r1119 = 620 [rpm]

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1108[0...n] BI: Total setpoint selection / Total setp sel


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the total setpoint.
Dependency: The selection of the total speed setpoint is automatically interconnected to the status word of the technology con-
troller (r2349.4) if the technology controller is selected (p2200 > 0) and operated in the mode p2251 = 0.
Refer to: p1109
Caution: If the technology controller is to supply the total setpoint using p1109, then it is not permissible to withdraw the inter-
connection to its status word (r2349.4).
p1109[0...n] CI: Total setpoint / Total setp


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the total setpoint.
For p1108 = 1 signal, the total setpoint is read in via p1109.
Dependency: The signal source of the total setpoint is automatically interconnected to the output of the technology controller
(r2294) if the technology controller is selected (p2200 > 0) and operated in the mode p2251 = 0.
Refer to: p1108
Caution: If the technology controller is to supply the total setpoint using p1109, then it is not permissible to disable the inter-
connection to its output (r2294).
p1110[0...n] BI: Inhibit negative direction / Inhib neg dir


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to disable the negative direction.
p1111[0...n] BI: Inhibit positive direction / Inhib pos dir


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to disable the positive direction.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1112 CO: Speed setpoint after minimum limiting / n_set n. min_lim


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the speed setpoint after the minimum limiting.
p1113[0...n] BI: Setpoint inversion / Setp inv


- - [0] 722.1
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source to invert the setpoint.
Caution: If the technology controller is being used as the speed main setpoint (p2251 = 0), do not invert the setpoint using
p1113 when the technology controller is enabled because this can cause the speed to change suddenly and lead to
positive couplings in the control loop.


- - [0] 2090.11
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the signal source to invert the setpoint.
Caution: If the technology controller is being used as the speed main setpoint (p2251 = 0), do not invert the setpoint using
p1113 when the technology controller is enabled because this can cause the speed to change suddenly and lead to
positive couplings in the control loop.
r1114 CO: Setpoint after the direction limiting / Setp after limit

- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the speed/velocity setpoint after the changeover and limiting the direction.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1115 Ramp-function generator selection / RFG selection


0 1 1
Description: Sets the ramp-function generator type.
Value: 0: Basic ramp-function generator
1: Extended ramp-function generator
Note: Another ramp-function generator type can only be selected when the motor is at a standstill.
r1119 CO: Ramp-function generator setpoint at the input / RFG setp at inp

- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the setpoint at the input of the ramp-function generator.
Note: The setpoint is influenced by other functions, e.g. skip (suppressed) speeds, minimum and maximum limits.
p1120[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-up time / RFG ramp-up time

Can be changed: C(1), U, T Scaling: - Data set: DDS, p0180

0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
Description: The ramp-function generator ramps-up the speed setpoint from standstill (setpoint = 0) up to the maximum speed
(p1082) in this time.
Note: The parameter is adapted during the rotating measurement (p1960 > 0). This is the reason that during the rotating
measurement, the motor can accelerate faster than was originally parameterized.
For U/f control and sensorless vector control (see p1300), ramp-up times of 0 s are not expedient. The setting
should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.
p1121[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-down time / RFG ramp-down time

PM230 Access level: 1 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32

0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 30.000 [s]
Description: The ramp-function generator ramps-down the speed setpoint from the maximum speed (p1082) down to standstill
(setpoint = 0) in this time.
Further, the ramp-down time is always effective for OFF1.
Dependency: The parameter is pre-assigned depending on the size of the power unit.
Note: For U/f control and sensorless vector control (see p1300), ramp-down times of 0 s are not recommended. The set-
ting should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.

Parameters
List of Parameters

PM250, PM260 Can be changed: C(1), U, T Scaling: - Data set: DDS, p0180

0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
Description: The ramp-function generator ramps-down the speed setpoint from the maximum speed (p1082) down to standstill
(setpoint = 0) in this time.
Further, the ramp-down time is always effective for OFF1.
p1122[0...n] BI: Bypass ramp-function generator / Bypass RFG

Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Data set: CDS, p0170

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for bypassing the ramp generator (ramp-up and ramp-down times = 0).
Caution: If the technology controller is operated in mode p2251 = 0 (technology controller as main speed setpoint), then it is
not permissible to disable the interconnection to its status word (r2349).
Note: In the case of sensorless vector control, the ramp-function generator must not be bypassed, other than indirectly by
means of interconnection with r2349.
p1123[0...n] Ramp-function generator minimum ramp-up time / RFG t_RU min


0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the minimum ramp-up time.
The ramp-up time (p1120) is limited internally to this minimum value.
If the maximum speed p1082 changes, p1123 is re-calculated.
p1127[0...n] Ramp-function generator minimum ramp-down time / RFG t_RD min


0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the minimum ramp-down time.
The ramp-down time (p1121) is limited internally to this minimum value.
ting should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor. If the maximum speed p1082 changes, p1123 is re-
calculated.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1130[0...n] Ramp-function generator initial rounding-off time / RFG t_start_round


0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 2.000 [s]
Description: Sets the initial rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.
Note: Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.

PM250, PM260 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Data set: DDS, p0180

0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the initial rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.
p1131[0...n] Ramp-function generator final rounding-off time / RFG t_end_delay


0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 2.000 [s]
Description: Sets the final rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.


0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the final rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1134[0...n] Ramp-function generator rounding-off type / RFG round-off type


0 1 0
Description: Sets the smoothed response to the OFF1 command or the reduced setpoint for the extended ramp-function gener-
ator.
Value: 0: Cont. smoothing
1: Discont smoothing
Dependency: No effect up to initial rounding-off time (p1130) > 0 s.
Note: p1134 = 0 (continuous smoothing)
If the setpoint is reduced while ramping-up, initially a final rounding-off is carried out and then the ramp-up com-
pleted. During the final rounding-off, the output of the ramp-function generator continues to go in the direction of the
previous setpoint (overshoot). After the final rounding-off has been completed, the output goes toward the new set-
point.
p1134 = 1 (discontinuous smoothing)
If the setpoint is reduced while ramping-up, then the output goes immediately in the direction of the new setpoint.
For the setpoint change there is no rounding-off.
p1135[0...n] OFF3 ramp-down time / OFF3 t_RD


0.000 [s] 5400.000 [s] 30.000 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time from the maximum speed down to zero speed for the OFF3 command.
Note: This time can be exceeded if the DC link voltage reaches its maximum value.

PM250, PM260 Can be changed: C(1), U, T Scaling: - Data set: DDS, p0180

0.000 [s] 5400.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time from the maximum speed down to zero speed for the OFF3 command.
Note: This time can be exceeded if the DC link voltage reaches its maximum value.
p1136[0...n] OFF3 initial rounding-off time / RFGOFF3 t_strt_rnd


0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 2.000 [s]
Description: Sets the initial rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator.

Parameters
List of Parameters


0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the initial rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator.
p1137[0...n] OFF3 final rounding-off time / RFG OFF3 t_end_del


0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the final rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator.
p1140[0...n] BI: Enable ramp-function generator/inhibit ramp-function generator / RFG enable


- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable ramp-function generator/inhibit ramp-function generator".
BI: p1140 = 0 signal:
Inhibits the ramp-function generator (the ramp-function generator output is set to zero).
Enables the ramp-function generator.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - [0] 2090.4
[1] 1
[2] 2090.4
[3] 2090.4
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable ramp-function generator/inhibit ramp-function generator".
Inhibits the ramp-function generator (the ramp-function generator output is set to zero).
Enables the ramp-function generator.
p1141[0...n] BI: Continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator / Continue RFG


- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator".
Freezes the ramp-function generator.
Continues the ramp-function generator.
Notice: The ramp-function generator is, independent of the state of the signal source, active in the following cases:
- OFF1/OFF3.
- ramp-function generator output within the suppression bandwidth.
- ramp-function generator output below the minimum speed.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - [0] 2090.5
[1] 1
[2] 2090.5
[3] 2090.5
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator".
Freezes the ramp-function generator.
Continues the ramp-function generator.
Notice: The ramp-function generator is, independent of the state of the signal source, active in the following cases:
- OFF1/OFF3.
- ramp-function generator output within the suppression bandwidth.
- ramp-function generator output below the minimum speed.
p1142[0...n] BI: Enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint / Setpoint enable


- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint".
Inhibits the setpoint (the ramp-function generator input is set to zero).
Enables the setpoint.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - [0] 2090.6
[1] 1
[2] 2090.6
[3] 2090.6
Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable setpoint/inhibit setpoint".
Inhibits the setpoint (the ramp-function generator input is set to zero).
Enables the setpoint.
p1143[0...n] BI: Ramp-function generator, accept setting value / RFG accept set v

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for accepting the setting value of the ramp-function generator.
Dependency: The signal source for the ramp-function generator setting value is set using parameters.
Refer to: p1144
Note: 0/1 signal:
The ramp-function generator output is immediately (without delay) set to the setting value of the ramp-function gen-
erator.
1 signal:
The setting value of the ramp-function generator is effective.
1/0 signal:
The input value of the ramp-function generator is effective. The ramp-function generator output is adapted to the
input value using the ramp-up time or the ramp-down time.
0 signal:
The input value of the ramp-function generator is effective.
p1144[0...n] CI: Ramp-function generator setting value / RFG setting value

Can be changed: U, T Scaling: p2000 Data set: CDS, p0170

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the ramp-function generator setting value.
Dependency: The signal source for accepting the setting value is set using parameters.
Refer to: p1143

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1145[0...n] Ramp-function generator tracking intensity. / RFG track intens


0.0 50.0 0.0
Description: Sets the ramp-function generator tracking.
The output value of the ramp-function generator is tracked (corrected) corresponding to the maximum possible
drive acceleration. The reference value is the deviation at the speed/velocity controller input that is necessary to
ensure that the motor accelerates at the torque/force limit.
Notice: If ramp-function generator tracking is activated and the ramp time is set too short, this can cause unsteady acceler-
ation.
Remedy:
- switch off ramp-function generator tracking (p1145 = 0).
- increase the ramp-up/ramp-down time (p1120, p1121).
Note: In the U/f mode, ramp-function generator tracking is not active.
p1148[0...n] Ramp-function gen., tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down active / RFG tol HL/RL act

0.000 [rpm] 1000.000 [rpm] 19.800 [rpm]
Description: Sets the tolerance value for the status of the ramp-function generator (ramp-up active, ramp-down active).
If the input of the ramp-function generator does not change in comparison to the output by more than the entered
tolerance time, then the status bits "ramp-up active" and "ramp-down active" are not influenced.
r1149 CO: Ramp-function generator, acceleration / RFG acceleration


- [rev/s²] - [rev/s²] - [rev/s²]
Description: Displays the acceleration of the ramp-function generator.
r1150 CO: Ramp-function generator speed setpoint at the output / RFG n_set at outp

- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the setpoint at the output of the ramp-function generator.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1155[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 1 / n_ctrl n_set 1


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for speed setpoint 1 of the speed controller.
Dependency: The effectiveness of this setpoint depends on, e.g. STW1.4 and STW1.6.
The signal source of the total setpoint is automatically interconnected to the output of the technology controller
(r2294) if the technology controller is selected (p2200 > 0) and operated in the mode p2251 = 1.
Refer to: r0002, p0840, p0844, p0848, p0852, p0854, r0898, p1140, p1142, p1160, r1170
Caution: If the technology controller is activated, then it is not permissible to withdraw the parameter interconnection.


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for speed setpoint 2 of the speed controller.
Note: For OFF1/OFF3, the ramp-function generator ramp is effective.
The ramp-function generator is set (to the setpoint (r1170)) and stops the drive corresponding to the ramp-down
time (p1121 or p1135). While stopping via the ramp-function generator, STW1.4 is effective (enable ramp-function
generator).
r1169 CO: Speed controller, speed setpoints 1 and 2 / n_ctrl n_set 1/2

- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the speed setpoint after the addition of the speed setpoint 1 (p1155) and speed setpoint 2 (p1160).
Note: The value is only correctly displayed at r0899.2 = 1 (operation enabled).
r1170 CO: Speed controller, setpoint sum / n_ctrl setp sum


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the speed setpoint after selecting the ramp-function generator and adding the speed setpoint 1 (p1155)
and speed setpoint 2 (p1160).

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1197 Fixed speed setpoint number actual / n_set_fixed No act


- - -
Description: Displays the number of the selected fixed speed/velocity setpoint.
r1198.0...15 CO/BO: Control word setpoint channel / STW setpoint chan


- - -
Description: Displays the control word for the setpoint channel.
00 Fixed setp bit 0 Yes No 3010
05 Inhibit negative direction Yes No 3040
06 Inhibit positive direction Yes No 3040
11 Setpoint inversion Yes No 3040
13 Motorized potentiometer raise Yes No 3020
14 Motorized potentiometer lower Yes No 3020
15 Bypass ramp-function generator Yes No 3060,
3070
r1199.0...6 CO/BO: Ramp-function generator status word / RFG ZSW


- - -
Description: Displays the status word for the ramp-function generator (RFG).
00 Ramp-up active Yes No -
01 Ramp-down active Yes No -
02 RFG active Yes No -
03 Ramp-function generator set Yes No -
04 Ramp-function generator held Yes No -
05 Ramp-function generator tracking active Yes No -
06 Maximum limit active Yes No -
Note: Re bit 02:
The bit is an OR logic operation - bit 00 and bit 01.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1200[0...n] FlyRest oper mode / FlyRest op_mode


0 4 0
Description: Sets the operating mode for flying restart.
The flying restart allows the drive converter to be powered up while the motor is still rotating. In so doing, the drive
converter output frequency is changed until the actual motor speed/velocity is found. The motor then accelerates up
to the setpoint at the ramp-function generator setting.
Value: 0: Flying restart inactive
1: Flying restart always active (start in setpoint direction)
4: Flying restart always active (start only in setpoint direction)
Dependency: A differentiation is made between flying restart for U/f control and for vector control (p1300).
Flying restart, U/f control: p1202, p1203, r1204
Flying restart, vector control: p1202, p1203, r1205
For synchronous motors, flying restart cannot be activated.
Refer to: p1201
Refer to: F07330, F07331
Notice: The "flying restart" function must be used in cases where the motor may still be running (e.g. after a brief line supply
interruption) or is being driven by the load. The system might otherwise shut down as a result of overcurrent.
Note: When p1200 = 1, 4: Flying restart is active after faults, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3.
When p1200 = 1: The search is made in both directions.
When p1200 = 4: The search is only made in the setpoint direction.
For U/f control (p1300 < 20), the following applies:
The speed can only be sensed for values above approx. 5 % of the rated motor speed. For lower speeds, it is
assumed that the motor is at a standstill.
If p1200 is changed during commissioning (p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be able to
be set. The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1200 have been changed by a parameter that was set when
the drive was commissioned (e.g. p0300).
p1201[0...n] BI: Flying restart enable signal source / Fly_res enab S_src

- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source to enable the "flying restart" function.
Note: Withdrawing the enable signal has the same effect as setting p1200 = 0.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1202[0...n] FlyRest srch curr / FlyRest I_srch


10 [%] 400 [%] 90 [%]
Description: Sets the search current for the "flying restart" function.
The value is referred to the motor magnetizing current.
Caution: An unfavorable parameter value can result in the motor behaving in an uncontrollable fashion.
Note: In U/f control mode, the parameter serves as a threshold value for establishing the current at the beginning of the
flying restart function. When the threshold value is reached, the prevailing search current is set dependent upon the
frequency on the basis of voltage inputs.
Reducing the search current can also improve flying restart performance (if the system moment of inertia is not very
high, for example).


10 [%] 400 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the search current for the "flying restart" function.
The value is referred to the motor magnetizing current.
Note: In U/f control mode, the parameter serves as a threshold value for establishing the current at the beginning of the
flying restart function. When the threshold value is reached, the prevailing search current is set dependent upon the
frequency on the basis of voltage inputs.
Reducing the search current can also improve flying restart performance (if the system moment of inertia is not very
high, for example).
p1203[0...n] Flying restart search rate factor / FlyRst v_Srch Fact


10 [%] 4000 [%] 150 [%]
Description: The value influences the rate at which the output frequency is changed during a flying restart . A higher value
results in a longer search time.
For vector control, a value that is too low or too high can cause flying restart to become unstable.
Note: The parameter factory setting is selected so that standard induction motors that are rotating can be found and
restarted as quickly as possible (fast flying restart).
With this pre-setting, if the motor is not found (e.g. for motors that are accelerated as a result of active loads or with
U/f control and low speeds), we recommend that the search rate is reduced (by increasing p1203).

Parameters
List of Parameters


10 [%] 4000 [%] 100 [%]
Description: The value influences the rate at which the output frequency is changed during a flying restart . A higher value
results in a longer search time.
For vector control, a value that is too low or too high can cause flying restart to become unstable.
Note: The parameter factory setting is selected so that standard induction motors that are rotating can be found and
restarted as quickly as possible (fast flying restart).
With this pre-setting, if the motor is not found (e.g. for motors that are accelerated as a result of active loads or with
U/f control and low speeds), we recommend that the search rate is reduced (by increasing p1203).
r1204.0...13 CO/BO: Flying restart, U/f control status / FlyRest Uf st


- - -
Description: Displays the status for checking and monitoring flying restart states in the U/f control mode.
00 Current impressed Yes No -
01 No current flow Yes No -
02 Voltage input Yes No -
03 Voltage reduced Yes No -
04 Start ramp-function generator Yes No -
05 Wait for execution Yes No -
06 Slope filter act Yes No -
07 Positive gradient Yes No -
08 Current < thresh Yes No -
09 Current minimum Yes No -
10 Search in the positive direction Yes No -
11 Stop after positive direction Yes No -
12 Stop after negative direction Yes No -
13 No result Yes No -

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1205.0...15 CO/BO: Flying restart, vector control status / FlyRest vector st


- - -
Description: Displays the status for checking and monitoring flying restart states in the vector control mode.
00 Speed adaptation circuit record angle Yes No -
01 Speed adaptation circuit set gain to 0 Yes No -
02 Isd channel enable Yes No -
03 Speed control switched out Yes No -
04 Quadrature arm switched in Yes No -
05 Special transformation active Yes No -
06 Speed adaptation circuit set I comp to 0 Yes No -
07 Current control on Yes No -
08 Isd_set = 0 A Yes No -
09 Frequency held Yes No -
10 Search in the positive direction Yes No -
11 Search Started Yes No -
12 Current impressed Yes No -
13 Search interrupted Yes No -
14 Speed adaptation circuit deviation = 0 Yes No -
15 Speed control activated Yes No -
Note: Re bit 00 ... 09:
Used to control internal sequences during the flying restart.
Depending on the motor type (p0300), the number of active bits differs.
Re bits 10 ... 15:
Are used to monitor the flying restart sequence.
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PEM) only bits 10, 11 and 15 are supported.
p1206[0...9] Set the fault number without automatic restart / Fault_No w/o AR

0 65535 0
Description: Selects the faults for which automatic restart should not be effective.
Dependency: The setting is only effective for p1210 = 6, 16.
Refer to: p1210

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1210 Automatic restart, mode / AR mode


0 26 0
Description: Sets the automatic restart mode (AR).
The parameters must be saved in the non-volatile memory p0971 = 1 in order that the setting becomes effective.
Value: 0: Inhibit automatic restart
1: Acknowledge all faults without restarting
4: Restart after line supply failure w/o additional start attempts
6: Restart after fault with additional start attempts
14: Restart after line supply failure following man. acknowledgment
16: Restart after fault following manual acknowledgment
26: Acknowledging all faults and reclosing for an ON command
Dependency: The automatic restart requires an active ON command (e.g., via a digital input). If, for p1210 > 1, there is no active
ON command, then the automatic restart is interrupted.
When using an Operator Panel in the LOCAL mode, then there is no automatic start.
For p1210 = 14, 16, a manual acknowledgement is required for an automatic restart.
For p1210 = 26, the ON command can also be entered with a delay. After the line supply returns or acknowledging
a fault, the restart waits for an ON command. The maximum wait time is specified using p1213[0].
Refer to: F30003
Danger: If the automatic restart is activated (p1210 > 1) if there is an ON command (refer to p0840), the drive is powered up
as soon as any fault messages that are present can be acknowledged. This also occurs after the line supply returns
or the Control Unit boots if the DC link voltage is present again. This automatic power-up sequence can only be
interrupted by withdrawing the ON command.
Caution: A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1). When faults
are present, therefore, the parameter cannot be changed.
For p1210 > 1, the motor is automatically started.
Note: Re p1210 = 1:
Faults that are present are automatically acknowledged. If new faults occur after a successful fault acknowledg-
ment, then these are also automatically acknowledged again. p1211 has no influence on the number of acknowl-
edgment attempts.
Re p1210 = 4:
An automatic restart is only performed if fault F30003 has occurred on the power unit. If additional faults are pres-
ent, then these faults are also acknowledged and when successful, starting continues. If the 24 V Control Unit
power supply fails, then this is interpreted as a line supply failure.
Re p1210 = 6:
An automatic restart is carried out if any fault has occurred.
Re p1210 = 14:
As for p1210 = 4. However, faults that are present must be manually acknowledged.
Re p1210 = 16:
As for p1210 = 6. However, faults that are present must be manually acknowledged.
Re p1210 = 26:
As for p1210 = 6. However, at the time that the fault is acknowledged or at power on, a switch-on command is not
necessary. This can be set with a time delay. The drive is switched-on again as soon as the switch-on command is
set. The restart can be interrupted with either OFF2 or OFF3.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1211 Automatic restart, start attempts / AR start attempts


0 10 3
Description: Sets the start attempts of the automatic restart function for p1210 = 4, 6, 14, 16, 26.
Refer to: F07320
Caution: A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1).
Notice: After fault F07320 occurs, the power-on command must be withdrawn and all of the faults acknowledged so that the
automatic restart function is re-activated.
After a complete power failure the start counter always starts with the counter value that applied before the power
failure, and decrements this start attempt by 1. If a further attempt to acknowledge is started by the automatic
restart function prior to power failure, e.g. when the CU remains active on power failure longer than the time p1212
/ 2, the fault counter will already have been decremented once. In this case, the start counter is thus decreased by
the value 2.
Note: A start attempt starts immediately when a fault occurs. The start attempt is considered to been completed if the
motor was magnetized (r0056.4 = 1) and an additional delay time of 1 s has expired.
As long as a fault is present, an acknowledge command is generated in the time intervals of p1212 / 2. When suc-
cessfully acknowledged, the start counter is decremented. If, after this, a fault re-occurs before a restart has been
completed, then acknowledgement starts again from the beginning.
Fault F07320 is output if, after several faults occur, the number of parameterized start attempts has been reached.
After a successful start attempt, i.e. a fault/error has no longer occurred up to the end of the magnetizing phase, the
start counter is again reset to the parameter value after 1 s. If a fault re-occurs - the parameterized number of start
attempts is again available.
At least one start attempt is always carried out.
After a line supply failure, acknowledgement is immediate and when the line supply returns, the system is powered
up. If, between successfully acknowledging the line fault and the line supply returning, another fault occurs, then its
acknowledgement also causes the start counter to be decremented.
For p1210 = 26, the start counter is decremented if after a successful fault acknowledgement, the on command is
present.
p1212 Automatic restart, delay time start attempts / AR t_wait start


0.1 [s] 1000.0 [s] 1.0 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time up to restart.
Dependency: This parameter setting is active for p1210 = 4, 6, 26.
For p1210 = 1, the following applies: Faults are only automatically acknowledged in half of the delay time, no
restart.
Note: The faults are automatically acknowledged after half of the delay time has expired and the full delay time.
If the cause of a fault is not removed in the first half of the delay time, then it is no longer possible to acknowledge in
the delay time.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1213[0...1] Automatic restart, monitoring time / AR t_monitoring


0.0 [s] 10000.0 [s] [0] 60.0 [s]
[1] 0.0 [s]
Description: Sets the monitoring time of the automatic restart (AR).
Index: [0] = For restart
[1] = To reset the start counter
Notice: After fault F07320 occurs, the power-on command must be withdrawn and all of the faults acknowledged so that the
automatic restart function is re-activated.
Note: Index 0:
The monitoring time starts when the faults are detected. If the automatic acknowledgements are not successful, the
monitoring time runs again. If, after the monitoring time has expired, the drive has still not successfully started again
(flying restart and magnetizing of the motor must have been completed: r0056.4 = 1), then fault F07320 is output.
The monitoring is de-activated with p1213 = 0. If p1213 is set lower than the sum of p1212, the magnetizing time
p0346 and the additional delay time due to the flying restart, then fault F07320 is generated at each restart. If, for
p1210 = 1, the time in p1213 is set lower than in p1212, then fault F07320 is also generated at each restart.
The monitoring time must be extended if the faults that occur cannot be immediately and successfully acknowl-
edged (e.g. for faults that are permanently present).
In the case of p1210 = 14, 16, the faults which are present must be acknowledged manually within the time in
p1213 index 0. Otherwise, fault F07320 is generated after the set time.
Index 1:
The start counter (refer to r1214) is only set back to the starting value p1211 if, after successful restart, the time in
p1213 index 1 has expired. The delay time is not effective for fault acknowledgement without automatic restart
(p1210 = 1). After a power failure (blackout) the delay time only starts after the line supply returns and the Control
Unit boots. The start counter is set to p1211, if F07320 occurred, the power-on command is withdrawn and the fault
is acknowledged.
The start counter is immediately updated if the starting value p1211 or the mode p1210 is changed.
For p1210 = 26, the fault must have been successfully acknowledged and the switch-on command issued within the
time in p1213, index 0. Otherwise, fault F07320 is generated after the set time.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1214.0...15 CO/BO: Automatic restart, status / AR status


- - -
Description: Displays the status of the automatic restart (AR).
00 Initialization Yes No -
01 Wait for alarm Yes No -
02 Auto restart act Yes No -
03 Setting the acknowledgement command Yes No -
04 Acknowledge alarms Yes No -
05 Restart Yes No -
06 Delay time running after automatic power- Yes No -
up
07 Fault Yes No -
10 Effective fault Yes No -
12 Start count. bit 0 ON OFF -
Note: Re bit 00:
State to display the single initialization after POWER ON.
Re bit 01:
State in which the automatic restart function waits for faults (initial state).
Re bit 02:
General display that a fault has been identified and that the restart or acknowledgement has been initiated.
Re bit 03:
Displays the acknowledge command within the "acknowledge alarms" state (bit 4 = 1). For bit 5 = 1 or bit 6 = 1, the
acknowledge command is continually displayed.
Re bit 04:
State in which the faults that are present are acknowledged. The state is exited again after successful acknowl-
edgement. A change is only made into the next state if it is signaled that a fault is no longer present after an
acknowledgement command (bit 3 = 1).
Re bit 05:
State in which the drive is automatically powered up (only for p1210 = 4, 6).
Re bit 06:
State in which the system waits after having been powered up, to the end of the start attempt (to the end of the
magnetizing process).
For p1210 = 1, this signal is directly set after the faults have been successfully acknowledged.
Re bit 07:
State which is assumed after a fault occurs within the automatic restart function. This is only reset after acknowl-
edging the fault and withdrawing the power-on command.
Re bit 10:
When the automatic restart function is active, r1214 bit 7 is displayed, otherwise the effective fault r2139 bit 3.
Re bits 12 ... 15:
Actual state of the start counter (binary coded).
In addition to bit 04:
For p1210 = 26, the system waits in this state until the switch-on command is available.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1215 Motor holding brake configuration / Brake config


0 3 0
Description: Sets the holding brake configuration.
Value: 0: No motor holding brake being used
3: Motor holding brake like sequence control, connection via BICO
Caution: For the setting p1215 = 0, if a brake is used, it remains closed. If the motor moves, this will destroy the brake.
Notice: If p1215 was set to 3, then when the pulses are suppressed, the brake is closed even if the motor is still rotating.
Pulse suppression can either be caused by a 0 signal at p0844, p0845 or p0852 or as a result of a fault with OFF2
response. If this is not desirable (e.g. for a flying restart), then the brake can be kept open using a 1 signal at p0855.
Note: if an external motor holding brake is being used, then p1215 should be set to 3 and r0899.12 should be intercon-
nected as control signal.
The parameter can only be set to zero when the pulses are inhibited.
p1215 Motor holding brake configuration / Brake config

PM250, PM260 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Data set: -

0 3 0
Description: Sets the holding brake configuration.
Value: 0: No motor holding brake being used
1: Motor holding brake acc. to sequence control
2: Motor holding brake always open
3: Motor holding brake like sequence control, connection via BICO
Caution: For the setting p1215 = 0, if a brake is used, it remains closed. If the motor moves, this will destroy the brake.
Notice: If p1215 was set to 1 or if p1215 was set to 3, then when the pulses are suppressed, the brake is closed even if the
motor is still rotating. Pulse suppression can either be caused by a 0 signal at p0844, p0845 or p0852 or as a result
of a fault with OFF2 response. If this is not desirable (e.g. for a flying restart), then the brake can be kept open using
a 1 signal at p0855.
Note: If a holding brake integrated in the motor is used, then it is not permissible that p1215 is set to 3.
if an external motor holding brake is being used, then p1215 should be set to 3 and r0899.12 should be intercon-
nected as control signal.
The parameter can only be set to zero when the pulses are inhibited.
p1216 Motor holding brake, opening time / Brake t_open


0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the time to open the motor holding brake.
After the holding brake has been controlled (opened), the speed setpoint remains at zero for this time. After this, the
speed setpoint is enabled.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1217 Motor holding brake closing time / Brake t_close


0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the time to apply the motor holding brake.
After OFF1 or OFF3 and the controlling (closing) of the holding brake, the drive remains stationary under closed-
loop control for this time with a speed setpoint of zero. The pulses are suppressed when the time expires.
Notice: If the selected closing time is too short with respect to the actual closing time of the brake, then the load can sag.
If the closing time is selected to be too long with respect to the actual closing time of the brake, the control works
against the brake and therefore reduces its lifetime.
p1226[0...n] Threshold for zero speed detection / n_standst n_thresh


0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 20.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold for the standstill identification.
Acts on the actual value and setpoint monitoring.
When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, when the threshold is undershot, standstill is identified.
Note: Standstill is identified in the following cases:
- the speed actual value falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1228 has
expired.
- the speed setpoint falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1227 has expired.
The actual value sensing is subject to measuring noise. For this reason, standstill cannot be detected if the speed
threshold is too low.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1227 Zero speed detection monitoring time / n_standst t_monit


0.000 [s] 300.000 [s] 300.000 [s]
Description: Sets the monitoring time for the standstill identification.
When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, standstill is identified after this time has expired, after the setpoint speed has
fallen below p1226 (also refer to p1145).
Refer to: p1226
Notice: For p1145 > 0.0 (RFG tracking) the setpoint is not equal to zero dependent on the selected value. This can there-
fore cause the monitoring time in p1227 to be exceeded. In this case, for a driven motor, the pulses are not sup-
pressed.
expired.
For p1227 = 300.000 s, the following applies:
Monitoring is de-activated.
For p1227 = 0.000 s, the following applies:
With OFF1 or OFF3 and a ramp-down time = 0, the pulses are immediately suppressed and the motor "coasts"
down.
Once the Control Unit has been booted up for the first time or if the factory settings have been defined accordingly,
p1228 Pulse suppression delay time / Pulse suppr t_del


0.000 [s] 299.000 [s] 0.010 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time for pulse suppression.
After OFF1 or OFF3 and zero speed detection, the system waits for this time to expire and the pulses are then sup-
pressed.
Notice: If the motor holding brake is activated, the pulse suppression is only conducted if this delay time (p1228) and then
the closing time for the brake (p1217) have elapsed.
expired.
p1230[0...n] BI: DC braking activation / DC brake act


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to activate DC braking.
Dependency: Refer to: p1231, p1232, p1233, p1234, r1239
Note: 1 signal: DC braking activated.
0 signal: DC braking de-activated.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1231[0...n] DC braking configuration / DCBRK config


0 14 0
Description: Setting to activate DC braking.
Value: 0: No function
4: DC braking
5: DC braking for OFF1/OFF3
14: DC braking below starting speed
Note: The function is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled.
- the function can be initiated by an OFF2 response.
Activation criterion (one of the following criteria is fulfilled):
- binector input p1230 = 1 signal (DC braking activation).
- the drive is not in the state "S4: Operation" or in "S5x" (refer to function chart 2610).
- the internal pulse enable is missing (r0046.19 = 0).
The function can only be used for induction motors (p0300 = 1).
DC braking can only be withdrawn (p1231 = 0) if it is not being used as a fault response in p2101.
Re p1231 = 5:
DC braking can only be set for induction motors.
DC braking is activated if the OFF1 or OFF3 command is present. Binector input p1230 is ineffective. If the drive
speed still lies above the speed threshold p1234, then initially, the drive is ramped-down to this threshold, demag-
netized (see p0347) and is then switched into DC braking for the time set in p1233. After this, the drive is switched-
off. If, at OFF1, the drive speed is below p1234, then it is immediately demagnetized and switched into DC braking.
A change is made into normal operation if the OFF1 command is withdrawn prematurely. Flying restart must be
activated if the motor is still rotating.
DC braking by means of fault response continues to be possible.
Re p1231 = 14:
In addition to the function for p1231 = 5, binector input p1230 is evaluated.
DC braking is only automatically activated when the speed threshold p1234 is fallen below if binector input p1230 =
1 signal.
Notice:
This is also the case, if no OFF command is present. After demagnetization and after the time in p1233 has expired,
the drive changes back into normal operation or is switched-off (for OFF1/OFF3).
If a 0 signal is applied to binector input p1230, for OFF1 and OFF3 no DC braking is executed.
Note:
DCBRK: DC Braking

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1232[0...n] DC braking, braking current / DCBRK I_brake


0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the braking current for DC braking.
Dependency: Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1233, p1234, r1239, p1345, p1346
Note: A change to the braking current becomes effective the next time that DC braking is switched-on.
The value for p1232 is specified as an rms value in the 3-phase system. The magnitude of the braking current is the
same as that of an identical output current at frequency zero (see r0067, r0068, p0640). The braking current is
internally limited to r0067.
For vector control, a current value of 1.4142 x p1232 is obtained in the output phase U. For U/f control, the phase
angle is offset by -30 degrees to obtain a current measurement of 1.2247 x p1232 in output phase U.
For the current controller, the settings of parameters p1345 and p1346 (I_max limiting controller) are used.
p1233[0...n] DC braking time / DCBRK time


0.0 [s] 3600.0 [s] 1.0 [s]
Description: Sets the DC braking time (as fault response).
p1234[0...n] Speed at the start of DC braking / DCBRK n_start


0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the starting speed for DC braking.
If the actual speed falls below this threshold, then DC braking is activated.
r1239.8...13 CO/BO: DC braking status word / DCBRK ZSW


- - -
Description: Status word of the DC braking.
08 DC braking active Yes No 7017
10 DC braking ready Yes No 7017
11 DC braking selected Yes No -
12 DC braking selection internally inhibited Yes No -
13 DC braking for OFF1/OFF3 Yes No -
Note: Re bit 12, 13:
Only effective for p1231 = 14.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1240[0...n] Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration (vector control) / Vdc_ctr config vec

0 3 1
Description: Sets the controller configuration of the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the closed-loop control mode. For U/f con-
trol: see p1280.
Value: 0: Inhib Vdc ctrl
1: Vdc_max controller enable
3: Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller enable
Refer to: A07400, A07401, A07402, F07405, F07406
Notice: An excessively high value in p1245 can possibly negatively influence the normal operation of the drive.
Note: p1240 = 1, 3:
When the DC link voltage limit specified for the power unit is reached the following applies:
- the Vdc_max controller limits the regenerative energy in order that the DC link voltage is kept below the maximum
DC link voltage when braking.
- the ramp-down times are automatically increased. If overvoltage faults occur in spite of the Vdc_max controller
being active, the ramp-down time in p1121 might need to be increased.
- set the input voltage p0210 as low as possible in line with the supply voltage (in so doing avoid A07401).
p1240 = 3:
When the switch-in threshold of the Vdc_min controller is reached (p1245), the following applies:
- the Vdc_min controller limits the energy taken from the DC link in order to keep the DC link voltage above the min-
imum DC link voltage when accelerating.
- the motor is braked in order to use its kinetic energy to buffer the DC link.

0 3 1
Description: Sets the controller configuration of the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the closed-loop control mode. For U/f con-
trol: see p1280.
2: Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) enable
Refer to: A07400, A07401, A07402, F07405, F07406
Notice: An excessively high value in p1245 can possibly negatively influence the normal operation of the drive.
Note: p1240 = 1, 3:
When the DC link voltage limit specified for the power unit is reached the following applies:
- the Vdc_max controller limits the regenerative energy in order that the DC link voltage is kept below the maximum
DC link voltage when braking.
- the ramp-down times are automatically increased.
p1240 = 2, 3:
When the switch-in threshold of the Vdc_min controller is reached (p1245), the following applies:
- the Vdc_min controller limits the energy taken from the DC link in order to keep the DC link voltage above the min-
imum DC link voltage when accelerating.
- the motor is braked in order to use its kinetic energy to buffer the DC link.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1242 Vdc_max controller switch-in level / Vdc_max on_level

PM240 Can be changed: - Scaling: p2001 Data set: -

- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.
If p1254 = 0 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = off), then the following applies:
r1242 = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * V_mains = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * p0210 (supply voltage)
PM230: r1242 is limited to Vdc_max - 50.0 V.
If p1254 = 1 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = on), then the following applies:
r1242 = Vdc_max - 50.0 V (Vdc_max: Overvoltage threshold of the power unit)
Note: The Vdc_max controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage falls below the threshold 0.95 * p1242 and
the controller output is zero.
p1243[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor / Vdc_max dyn_factor

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,4 Data type: FloatingPoint32
PM240 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Data set: DDS, p0180

1 [%] 10000 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_max controller).
100% means that p1250, p1251, and p1252 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used corresponding to their
basic settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case p1250, p1251,
p1252 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1243.
p1245[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level


65 [%] 150 [%] 73 [%]
Description: Sets the switch-in level for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
The value is obtained as follows:
r1246[V] = p1245[%] * sqrt(2) * p0210
Warning: An excessively high value may adversely affect normal drive operation.

Parameters
List of Parameters


65 [%] 150 [%] 76 [%]
r1246[V] = p1245[%] * sqrt(2) * p0210
r1246 Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level


- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Note: The Vdc_min controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage rises above the threshold 1.05 * p1246 and
p1247[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min dyn_factor


1 [%] 10000 [%] 300 [%]
Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case p1250, p1251,
p1252 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1247.
p1249[0...n] Vdc_max controller speed threshold / Vdc_max n_thresh

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1 Data type: FloatingPoint32

0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 10.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the lower speed threshold for the Vdc_max controller. When this speed threshold is undershot, the Vdc_max
control is switched out and the speed is controlled using the ramp-function generator.
Note: For fast braking where the ramp-function generator tracking was active, it is possible to prevent the drive rotating in
the opposite direction by increasing the speed threshold and setting a final rounding-off time in the ramp-function
generator (p1131). This is supported using a dynamic setting of the speed controller.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1250[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain / Vdc_ctrl Kp


0.00 100.00 1.00
Description: Sets the proportional gain for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller).
Dependency: The effective proportional gain is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor) and the
DC link capacitance of the power unit.
p1251[0...n] Vdc controller integral time / Vdc_ctrl Tn


0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral time for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller).
Dependency: The effective integral time is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor).
Note: p1251 = 0: The integral component is de-activated.
p1252[0...n] Vdc controller rate time / Vdc_ctrl t_rate


0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the rate time constant for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller).
Dependency: The effective rate time is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor).
p1254 Vdc_max controller automatic ON level detection / Vdc_max SenseOnLev


0 1 0
Description: Activates/de-activates the automatic sensing of the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.
Value: 0: Automatic detection inhibited
p1254 Vdc_max controller automatic ON level detection / Vdc_max SenseOnLev


0 1 1
Description: Activates/de-activates the automatic sensing of the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1255[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold / Vdc_min t_thresh


0.000 [s] 1800.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the time threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized.
Prerequisite: p1256 = 1
Notice: If a time threshold has been parameterized, the Vdc_max controller should also be activated (p1240 = 3) so that the
drive does not shut down with overvoltage when Vdc_min control is exited (due to the time violation) and in the
event of fault response OFF3. It is also possible to increase the OFF3 ramp-down time p1135.
p1256[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min response


0 1 0
Description: Sets the response for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Value: 0: Buffer Vdc until undervoltage, n<p1257 -> F07405
1: Buff. Vdc until undervolt., n<p1257 -> F07405, t>p1255 -> F07406
p1257[0...n] Vdc_min controller speed threshold / Vdc_min n_thresh


0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 50.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized .
r1258 CO: Vdc controller output / Vdc_ctrl output


Description: Displays the actual output of the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller)
Note: The regenerative power limit p1531 is used for vector control to pre-control the Vdc_max controller. The lower the
power limit is set, the lower the correction signals of the controller when the voltage limit is reached.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1280[0...n] Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration (U/f) / Vdc_ctr config U/f

0 1 1
Description: Sets the configuration of the controller for the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the U/f operating mode.
Note: For high input voltages (see p0210), the following settings can improve the degree of ruggedness of the Vdc_max
controller:
- Set the input voltage p0210 as low as possible (in so doing avoid A07401).
- Set the rounding times (p1130, p1136).
- Increase the ramp-down times (p1121).
- Reduce the integral time of the controller (p1291) (factor 0.5).
- Activate the Vdc correction in the current controller (p1810 bit 1 = 1) or reduce the derivative action time of the
controller (p1292) (factor 0.5).
In this case, we always recommend using vector control (p1300 = 20) (Vdc controller, see p1240).

0 3 1
Description: Sets the configuration of the controller for the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the U/f operating mode.
2: Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) enable
Note: For high input voltages (see p0210), the following settings can improve the degree of ruggedness of the Vdc_max
controller:
- Set the input voltage p0210 as low as possible (in so doing avoid A07401).
- Set the rounding times (p1130, p1136).
- Increase the ramp-down times (p1121).
- Reduce the integral time of the controller (p1291) (factor 0.5).
- Activate the Vdc correction in the current controller (p1810 bit 1 = 1) or reduce the derivative action time of the
controller (p1292) (factor 0.5).
In this case, we generally recommend to use vector control (p1300 = 20) (Vdc controller, see p1240).
The following measures are suitable to improve the Vdc_min controller:
- Optimize the Vdc_min controller (see p1287).
- Activate the Vdc correction in the current controller (p1810 bit 1 = 1).

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1282 Vdc_max controller switch-in level (U/f) / Vdc_max on_level


- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.
If p1294 = 0 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = off), then the following applies:
r1282 = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * V_mains = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * p0210 (supply voltage)
If p1294 = 1 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = on), then the following applies:
r1282 = Vdc_max - 50.0 V (Vdc_max: Overvoltage threshold of the power unit)
Note: The Vdc_max controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage falls below the threshold 0.95 * p1282 and
p1283[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor (U/f) / Vdc_max dyn_factor


1 [%] 10000 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_max controller).
100% means that p1290, p1291, and p1292 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used in accordance with their
basic settings and on the basis of a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case, p1290, p1291,
and p1292 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1283.
p1285[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min on_level

65 [%] 150 [%] 76 [%]
p1286[V] = p1285[%] * sqrt(2) * p0210
r1286 Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min on_level

- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Note: The Vdc_min controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage rises above the threshold 1.05 * p1286 and

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1287[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min dyn_factor

1 [%] 10000 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case, p1290, p1291,
and p1292 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1287.
p1288[0...n] Vdc_max controller feedback coupling factor ramp-fct. gen. (U/f) /

Vdc_max factor RFG

0.000 100.000 0.500
Description: Sets the feedback factor for the ramp-function generator. Its ramp times are decelerated relative to the output signal
of the Vdc_max controller.
Note: For values p1288 = 0.0 to 0.5, the controller dynamics are automatically adapted internally.
p1290[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl Kp


0.00 100.00 1.00
Description: Sets the proportional gain for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
Note: The gain factor is proportional to the capacitance of the DC link. The parameter is pre-set to a value that is optimally
adapted to the capacitance of the power unit.
p1291[0...n] Vdc controller integral time (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl Tn


0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 40 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral time for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
p1292[0...n] Vdc controller rate time (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl t_rate


0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Sets the rate time constant for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1293[0...n] Vdc min controller output limit (U/f) / Vdc_min outp_lim


0.00 [Hz] 600.00 [Hz] 600.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets the output limit for the Vdc min controller (DC link undervoltage controller).
p1294 Vdc_max controller automatic detection ON signal level (U/f) / Vdc_max SenseOnLev
PM240 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Data set: -

0 1 0
Description: Activates/de-activates the automatic sensing of the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller. When the sensing
function is de-activated, the activation threshold r1282 for the Vdc_max controller is determined from the parame-
terized connection voltage p0210.
p1295[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold (U/f) / Vdc_min t_thresh


0.000 [s] 10000.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the time threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the
required response can be parameterized.
Prerequisite: p1296 = 1.
Notice: If a time threshold has been parameterized, the Vdc_max controller should also be activated (p1280 = 3) so that the
drive does not shut down with overvoltage when Vdc_min control is exited (due to the time violation) and in the
event of fault response OFF3. It is also possible to increase the OFF3 ramp-down time p1135.
p1296[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) (U/f / Vdc_min response


0 1 0
Description: Sets the response for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Value: 0: Buffer Vdc until undervoltage, n<p1297 -> F07405
1: Buff. Vdc until undervolt., n<p1297 -> F07405, t>p1295 -> F07406
Note: Re p1296 = 1:
The quick stop ramp entered in p1135 must not be equal to zero, to prevent overcurrent shutdown if F07406 is trig-
gered.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1297[0...n] Vdc_min controller speed threshold (U/f) / Vdc_min n_thresh


0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 50.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized .
r1298 CO: Vdc controller output (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl output


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the actual output of the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller)
p1300[0...n] Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode / Op/cl-lp ctrl_mode


0 22 0
Description: Sets the open and closed-loop control mode of a drive.
Value: 0: U/f control with linear characteristic
1: U/f control with linear characteristic and FCC
2: U/f control with parabolic characteristic
3: U/f control with parameterizable characteristic
4: U/f control with linear characteristic and ECO
5: U/f control for drives requiring a precise freq. (e.g. textiles)
6: U/f control for drives requiring a precise frequency and FCC
7: U/f control for a parabolic characteristic and ECO
19: U/f control with independent voltage setpoint
20: Speed control (encoderless)
22: Torque control (encoderless)
Dependency: Only operation with U/f characteristic is possible if the rated motor speed is not entered (p0311).
Operation with a U/f characteristic is not supported for 1LE4 synchronous motors.
Refer to: p0300, p0311, p0500, p1501
Notice: Active slip compensation is required in the U/f control types with Eco mode (p1300 = 4, 7). The scaling of the slip
compensation (p1335) should be set so that the slip is completely compensated (generally 100%).
The Eco mode is only effective in steady-state operation and when the ramp-function generator is not bypassed. In
the case of analog setpoints, if required the tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down should be actively increased for
the ramp-function generator using p1148 in order to reliably signal a steady-state condition.
Note: Only by selecting closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20) is it possible to change over in operation to closed-loop
torque control (p1501). At the changeover, the setting of p1300 does not change. In this case, the actual state is
displayed in r1407, bit 2 and bit 3.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sector), slip compensation p1335, resonance damping
p1338, and the Imax frequency controller are switched off internally so that the output frequency can be set pre-
cisely. The Imax voltage controller remains active.
During operation (the pulses enabled) the open-loop/closed-loop control mode cannot be changed by changing
over drive data sets.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1310[0...n] Voltage boost permanent / U_boost perm


0.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Description: Defines the voltage boost as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305).
The magnitude of the permanent voltage boost is reduced with increasing frequency so that at the rated motor fre-
quency, the rated motor voltage is present.
The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows:
Voltage boost [V] = 1.732 x p0305 (rated motor current [A]) x r0395 (stator/primary section resistance [ohm]) x
p1310 (permanent voltage boost [%]) / 100 %
At low output frequencies, there is only a low output voltage in order to maintain the motor flux. However, the output
voltage can be too low in order to achieve the following:
- magnetize the induction motor.
- hold the load.
- compensate for losses in the system.
This is the reason that the output voltage can be increased using p1310.
The voltage boost can be used for both linear as well as square-law U/f characteristics.
Dependency: The current limit p0640 limits the boost.
For vector control, the permanent voltage boost (p1310) has no effect as the drive converter automatically sets the
optimum operating conditions.
Refer to: p1300, p1311, p1312, r1315
Notice: The voltage boost increases the motor temperature (particularly at zero speed).
Note: The voltage boost is only effective for U/f control (p1300).
The boost values are combined with one another if the permanent voltage boost (p1310) is used in conjunction with
other boost parameters (acceleration boost (p1311), voltage boost for starting (p1312)).
However, these parameters are assigned the following priorities: p1310 > p1311, p1312
p1311[0...n] Voltage boost at acceleration / U_boost accelerate


0.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: p1311 only results in a voltage boost when accelerating and generates a supplementary torque to accelerate the
load.
The voltage boost becomes effective for a positive setpoint increase and disappears as soon as the setpoint has
been reached. The build-up and withdrawal of the voltage boost are smoothed.
The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows:
Voltage boost [V] = 1.732 * p0305 (rated motor current [A]) x r0395 (stator/primary section resistance [ohm]) x
p1311 (voltage boost when accelerating [%]) / 100 %
Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1312, r1315
Notice: The voltage boost results in a higher motor temperature increase.
Note: The voltage boost when accelerating can improve the response to small, positive setpoint changes.
Assigning priorities for the voltage boosts: refer to p1310

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1312[0...n] Voltage boost when starting / U_boost starting


0.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Setting for an additional voltage boost when powering-up, however, only for the first acceleration phase.
The voltage boost becomes effective for a positive setpoint increase and disappears as soon as the setpoint has
been reached. The build-up and withdrawal of the voltage boost are smoothed.
Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1311, r1315
Notice: The voltage boost results in a higher motor temperature increase.
Note: The voltage boost when accelerating can improve the response to small, positive setpoint changes.
Assigning priorities for the voltage boosts: refer to p1310
r1315 Voltage boost total / U_boost total


Description: Displays the total resulting voltage boost in volt.
r1315 = p1310 + p1311 + p1312
p1320[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic frequency 1 / Uf char f1


0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: The programmable characteristic for the U/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the first point along the characteristic.
Dependency: Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3.
The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard charac-
teristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point.
Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1311, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327
Note: Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327.
The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable U/f characteristic.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1321[0...n] U/f control programmable characteristic voltage 1 / Uf char U1


0.0 [Vrms] 10000.0 [Vrms] 0.0 [Vrms]
This parameter specifies the voltage of the first point along the characteristic.
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327


0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
This parameter specifies the voltage of the second point along the characteristic.
Dependency: The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard charac-


0.0 [Vrms] 10000.0 [Vrms] 0.0 [Vrms]
This parameter specifies the voltage of the second point along the characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327


0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
This parameter specifies the voltage of the third point along the characteristic.
Dependency: The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard charac-

Parameters
List of Parameters


0.0 [Vrms] 10000.0 [Vrms] 0.0 [Vrms]
This parameter specifies the voltage of the third point along the characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1326, p1327


0.00 [Hz] 10000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
This parameter specifies the frequency of the fourth point along the characteristic.
The following applies for the frequency values:
p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326
Otherwise, a standard characteristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point.
Note: Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327. For output fre-
quencies above p1326, the characteristic is extrapolated with the gradient between the characteristic points
p1324/p1325 and p1326/p1327.


0.0 [Vrms] 10000.0 [Vrms] 0.0 [Vrms]
This parameter specifies the voltage of the fourth point along the characteristic.
p1330[0...n] CI: U/f control independent voltage setpoint / Uf U_set independ.


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the voltage setpoint for U/f control with an independent voltage setpoint (p1300 = 19).
Dependency: Selects the U/f control with independent voltage setpoint via p1300 = 19.
Refer to: p1300

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1333[0...n] U/f control FCC starting frequency / U/f FCC f_start


0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets the starting frequency at which FCC (Flux Current Control) is activated.
Dependency: The correct operating mode must be set (p1300 = 1, 6).
Warning: An excessively low value can result in instability.
Note: For p1333 = 0 Hz, the FCC starting frequency is automatically set to 6 % of the rated motor frequency.
p1334[0...n] U/f control slip compensation starting frequency / Slip comp start

0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets the starting frequency of the slip compensation.
Note: For p1334 = 0, the starting frequency of the slip compensation is automatically set to 6 % of the rated motor fre-
quency.
p1335[0...n] Slip compensation, scaling / Slip comp scal


0.0 [%] 600.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Sets the setpoint for slip compensation in [%] referred to r0330 (motor rated slip).
p1335 = 0.0 %: Slip compensation de-activated.
p1335 = 100.0 %: The slip is completely compensated.
Dependency: Prerequisite for a precise slip compensation for p1335 = 100 % are the precise motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360).
If the parameters are not precisely known, a precise compensation can be achieved by varying p1335.
For U/f control types with Eco optimization (4 and 7), the slip compensation must be activated in order to guarantee
correct operation.
Note: The purpose of slip compensation is to maintain a constant motor speed regardless of the applied load. The fact
that the motor speed decreases with increasing load is a typical characteristic of induction motors.
For synchronous motors, this effect does not occur and the parameter has no effect in this case.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sector), the slip compensation is internally disabled in
order to be able to precisely set the output frequency.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1336[0...n] Slip compensation limit value / Slip comp lim val


0.00 [%] 600.00 [%] 250.00 [%]
Description: Sets the limit value for slip compensation in [%] referred to r0330 (motor rated slip).
r1337 CO: Actual slip compensation / Slip comp act val


- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the actual compensated slip [%] referred to r0330 (rated motor slip).
Dependency: p1335 > 0 %: Slip compensation active.
Refer to: p1335
p1338[0...n] U/f mode resonance damping gain / Uf Res_damp gain


0.00 100.00 0.00
Description: Sets the gain for resonance damping for U/f control.
Note: The resonance damping function dampens active current oscillations that frequency occur under no-load condi-
tions.
The resonance damping is active in a range of approximately 5 ... 90 % of the rated motor frequency (p0310), but
up to a maximum of 45 Hz.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sectors), the resonance damping is internally disabled in
order that the output frequency can be precisely set.
p1339[0...n] U/f mode resonance damping filter time constant / Uf Res_damp T


1.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms] 20.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the filter time constant for resonance damping for U/f control.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1340[0...n] I_max frequency controller proportional gain / I_max_ctrl Kp


0.000 0.500 0.000
Description: Sets the proportional gain of the I_max voltage controller.
The I_max controller reduces the drive converter output current if the maximum current (r0067) is exceeded.
In the U/f operating modes (p1300) for the I_max control, one controller is used that acts on the output frequency
and one controller that acts on the output voltage. The frequency controller reduces the current by decreasing the
converter output frequency. The frequency is reduced down to a minimum value (equaling twice rated slip). If the
overcurrent condition cannot be successfully resolved using this measure, then the drive converter output voltage is
reduced using the I_max voltage controller. Once the overcurrent condition has been resolved, the drive is acceler-
ated along the ramp set in p1120 (ramp-up time).
Dependency: In the U/f modes (p1300) for textile applications and for external voltage setpoints, only the I_max voltage controller
is used.
Notice: When de-activating the I_max controller, the following must be carefully observed:
When the maximum current (r0067) is exceeded, the output current is no longer reduced, however, overcurrent
alarm messages are generated. The drive is shut down if the overcurrent limit (r0209) is exceeded.
Note: The I_max limiting controller becomes ineffective if the ramp-function generator is de-activated with p1122 = 1.
p1341 = 0: I_max frequency controller de-activated and I_max voltage controller activated over the complete speed
range.
p1341[0...n] I_max frequency controller integral time / I_max_ctrl Tn


0.000 [s] 50.000 [s] 0.300 [s]
Description: Sets the integral time for the I_max frequency controller.
Note: When p1341 = 0, the current limiting controller influencing the frequency is de-activated and only the current limiting
controller influencing the output voltage remains active (p1345, p1346).
In the case of power units with regenerative feedback (PM250, PM260), current limitation control for a regenerative
load is always implemented by influencing the frequency. This current limiting function is de-activated with p1340 =
p1341 = 0.
r1343 CO: I_max controller frequency output / I_max_ctrl f_outp


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the effective frequency limit.
r1344 I_max controller voltage output / I_max_ctrl U_outp


Description: Displays the amount by which the converter output voltage is reduced.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1345[0...n] I_max voltage controller proportional gain / I_max_U_ctrl Kp


0.000 100000.000 0.000
Description: Sets the proportional gain for the I_max voltage controller.
Note: The controller settings are also used in the current controller of the DC braking (refer to p1232).
p1346[0...n] I_max voltage controller integral time / I_max_U_ctrl Tn


0.000 [s] 50.000 [s] 0.030 [s]
Description: Sets the integral time for the I_max voltage controller.
Note: p1346 = 0: Integral time of the I_max voltage controller de-activated.
The controller settings are also used in the current controller of the DC braking (refer to p1232).
r1348 CO: U/f control Eco factor actual value / U/f Eco fac act v

- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the economic factor determined for optimizing motor consumption.
Note: The value is only determined for operating modes with Economic (p1300 = 4, 7).
p1349[0...n] U/f mode resonance damping maximum frequency / Uf res_damp f_max


0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets the maximum output frequency for resonance damping for U/f control.
Resonance damping is inactive above this output frequency.
Note: For p1349 = 0, the changeover limit is automatically set to 95 % of the rated motor frequency - however, to a max.
of 45 Hz.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1350[0...n] Soft starting / Soft starting


0 1 0
Description: Sets whether the voltage is continuously increased during the magnetizing phase (p1350 = 1, On) or whether it
jumps directly to the voltage boost (p1350 = 0, Off).
Value: 0: OFF
1: ON
Note: The settings for this parameter have the following advantages and disadvantages:
0 = off (jump directly to voltage boost)
Advantage: Flux is established quickly -> torque is quickly available
Disadvantage: The motor can move while it is being magnetized
1 = on (voltage is continually established)
Advantage: The motor is unlikely to rotate
Disadvantage: The flux is established slower -> torque is available later
p1351[0...n] CO: Motor holding brake starting frequency / Brake f_start

Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Data set: DDS, p0180

-300.00 [%] 300.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the frequency setting value at the slip compensation output for starting up with motor holding brake.
Dependency: When setting p1351 > 0, then slip compensation is automatically activated (p1335 = 100 %).
Refer to: p1352
Note: Connected with p1352 a value of 100% corresponds to the motor rated slip (r0330).
p1352[0...n] CI: Motor holding brake starting frequency signal source / Brake f_start

- - 1351[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the frequency setting value at the slip compensation output for starting up with motor
holding brake.
Note: A value of 100% corresponds to the motor rated slip (r0330).
The setting of the starting frequency begins after magnetizing (see p0346, r0056.4) and ends once the brake open-
ing time (p1216) has elapsed and the starting frequency (p1334) has been reached.
A setting value of zero means that no setting procedure will take place.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1400[0...n] Speed control configuration / n_ctrl config


- - 1000 0000 0010 0001 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the closed-loop speed control.
00 Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active Yes No 6040
01 Sensorless vector control freeze I comp Yes No 6040
05 Kp/Tn adaptation active Yes No 6040
06 Free Tn adaptation active Yes No 6050
14 Torque pre-control Always active For n_ctrl enab 6060
15 Sensorless vector control, speed pre-control Yes No 6030
Note: Re bit 01:
When the bit is set, the I component of the speed controller is kept when changing into the open-loop controlled
mode.
p1401[0...n] Flux control configuration / Flux ctrl config


- - 0000 0110 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for flux setpoint control
00 Flux setpoint soft starting active Yes No 6722
01 Flux setpoint differentiation active Yes No 6723
02 Flux build-up control active Yes No 6722,
6723
06 Quick magnetizing Yes No 6722
07 Pre-control speed limitation Yes No 6640
Note: Re bit 00 (not for permanent-magnet synchronous motors):
Initially, the flux is only established with a low rate of rise when magnetizing the induction motor. The flux setpoint
p1570 is reached again at the end of the magnetizing time p0346.
Re bit 01 (not for permanent-magnet synchronous motors):
Initially, the flux is only established with a low rate of rise when magnetizing the induction motor. The flux setpoint
p1570 is reached again at the end of the magnetizing time p0346. When quick magnetizing (p1401.6 = 1) is
selected, soft starting is internally de-activated and alarm A07416 is displayed.
The flux differentiation can be switched out if a significant ripple occurs in the field-generating current setpoint
(r0075) when entering the field weakening range. However, this is not suitable for fast acceleration operations
because then, the flux decays more slowly and the voltage limiting responds.
Re bit 02 (not for permanent-magnet synchronous motors):
The flux build-up control operates during the magnetizing phase p0346 of the induction motor. If it is switched out, a
constant current setpoint is injected and the flux is built up corresponding to the rotor time constant. When quick
magnetizing (p1401.6 = 1) is selected and when flux build-up control is de-energized alarm A07416 is displayed.
Re bit 06 (not for induction motors):
Magnetizing is performed with maximum current (0.9 * r0067). With active identification of the stator resistance (see
p0621) quick magnetizing is internally de-activated and alarm A07416 is displayed. During a flying restart of a rotat-
ing motor (see p1200) no quick magnetizing takes place.
Re bit 07:
if the speed of the drive exceeds the effective speed limit of the speed limiting controller, the torque limit is reduced
linearly to zero as the deviation becomes greater. This reduces the integral component of the speed controller and,
in turn, the overshoot during load shedding (see also F07901 and p2162).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1402[0...n] Closed-loop current control and motor model configuration / I_ctrl config
Access level: 4 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3 Data type: Unsigned16

- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the closed-loop control and the motor model.
02 Current controller adaptation active Yes No -
r1406.4...15 CO/BO: Control word speed controller / STW n_ctrl


- - -
Description: Displays the control word of the speed controller.
04 Hold speed controller I component Yes No 6040
05 Set speed controller I component Yes No 6040
11 Droop enable Yes No 6030
12 Torque control active Yes No 6060
15 Set speed adaptation controller I compo- Yes No -
nent
r1407.0...15 CO/BO: Status word speed controller / ZSW n_ctrl


- - -
Description: Displays the status word of the speed controller.
00 U/f control active Yes No -
01 Encoderless operation active Yes No -
02 Torque control active Yes No 6030,
6060,
8010
03 Speed control active Yes No 6040
05 Speed controller I component frozen Yes No 6040
06 Speed controller I component set Yes No 6040
07 Torque limit reached Yes No 6060
08 Upper torque limit active Yes No 6060
09 Lower torque limit active Yes No 6060
10 Droop enabled Yes No 6030
11 Speed setpoint limited Yes No 6030
12 Ramp-function generator set Yes No -
13 Encoderless operation due to a fault Yes No -
15 Torque limit reached (without pre-control) Yes No 6060

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1408.0...14 CO/BO: Status word current controller / ZSW I_ctrl


- - -
Description: Displays the current controller status word.
00 Current ctrl act Active Not active -
01 Id control, I component limiting Active Not active 6714
03 Voltage limiting Active Not active 6714
10 Speed adaptation, limiting Active Not active -
12 Motor stalled Yes No -
13 Separately excited synchronous motor is Yes No -
excited
14 Current model FEM: magnetizing excitation Yes No -
current limited to 0
p1416[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 time constant / n_set_filt 1 T


0.00 [ms] 5000.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the time constant for the speed setpoint filter 1 (PT1).
r1438 CO: Speed controller, speed setpoint / n_ctrl n_set


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the speed setpoint after setpoint limiting for the P component of the speed controller.
For U/f operation, the value that is displayed is of no relevance.
Note: In the standard state (the reference model is de-activated), r1438 = r1439.
r1439 Speed setpoint, I component / n_set I_comp


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the speed setpoint for the I component of the speed controller (output of the reference model after the set-
point limiting).
Note: In the standard state (the reference model is de-activated), r1438 = r1439.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1444 Speed controller, speed setpoint steady-state (static) / n_ctrl n_set stat

- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the sum of all speed setpoints that are present.
The following sources are available for the displayed setpoint:
- setpoint at the ramp-function generator input (r1119).
- speed setpoint 1 (p1155).
- speed setpoint 2 (p1160).
- speed setpoint for the speed pre-control (p1430).
- setpoint from DSC (for DSC active).
- setpoint via PC (for master control active).


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the actual smoothed actual speed for speed control.
p1452[0...n] Speed controller speed actual value smoothing time (SLVC) / n_C n_act T_s SLVC

0.00 [ms] 32000.00 [ms] 10.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time for the actual speed of the speed controller for encoderless closed-loop speed control.
Note: The smoothing must be increased if there is gear backlash. For longer smoothing times, the integral time of the
speed controller must also be increased (e.g. using p0340 = 4).
r1454 CO: Speed controller system deviation I component / n_ctrl sys dev Tn

- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the system deviation of the I component of the speed controller.
p1455[0...n] CI: Speed controller P gain adaptation signal / n_ctrl Adpt_sig Kp


- - 0
Description: Sets the source for the adaptation signal to additionally adapt the P gain of the speed controller.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1456[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation lower starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKpLow

0.00 [%] 400.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the lower starting point of the adaptation range for the additional adaptation of the P gain of the speed control-
ler.
The values are in % and refer to the set source of the adaptation signal.
Note: If the upper transition point p1457 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition
p1456, then the controller gain below p1457 is adapted with p1459 and above p1456, with p1458.
p1457[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation upper starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKp up

0.00 [%] 400.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the upper starting point of the adaptation range for the additional adaptation of the P gain of the speed control-
ler.
The values are in % and refer to the set source of the adaptation signal.
p1458[0...n] Adaptation factor, lower / Adapt_factor lower


0.0 [%] 200000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the adaptation factor before the adaptation range (0 % ... p1456) to additionally adapt the P gain of the
speed/velocity controller.
p1459[0...n] Adaptation factor, upper / Adapt_factor upper


0.0 [%] 200000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the adaptation factor after the adaptation range (> p1457) to additionally adapt the P gain of the speed/velocity
controller.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1461[0...n] Speed controller Kp adaptation speed, upper scaling / n_ctrl Kp n upper


0.0 [%] 200000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the P gain of the speed controller for the upper adaptation speed range (> p1465). The entry is made referred
to the P gain for the lower adaptation speed range of the speed controller (% referred to p1470).
p1464, then the controller gain below p1465 is adapted with p1461. This means that an adaptation can be imple-
mented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.
p1463[0...n] Speed controller Tn adaptation speed, upper scaling / n_ctrl Tn n upper


0.0 [%] 200000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the integral time of the speed controller after the adaptation speed range (> p1465). The entry is made referred
to the integral time for the lower adaptation speed range of the speed controller (% referred to p1472).
point p1464, then the controller integral time below p1465 is adapted with p1463. This means that an adaptation
can be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.
p1464[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed, lower / n_ctrl n lower


0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the lower adaptation speed of the speed controller.
No adaptation is effective below this speed.
point p1464, then the controller below p1465 is adapted with p1461 or p1463. This means that an adaptation can
be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.
p1465[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed, upper / n_ctrl n upper


0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the upper adaptation speed of the speed controller.
No adaptation is effective above this speed.
For P gain, p1470 x p1461 is effective. For the integral time, p1472 x p1463 is effective.
point p1464, then the controller below p1465 is adapted with p1461 or p1463. This means that an adaptation can
be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1466[0...n] CI: Speed controller P-gain scaling / n_ctrl Kp scal


- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the P gain of the speed controller. This also makes the effective P gain
(including adaptations) scalable.
r1468 CO: Speed controller P-gain effective / n_ctr Kp eff


- - -
Description: Displays the effective P gain of the speed controller.
r1469 Speed controller integral time effective / n_ctr Tn eff


- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the effective integral time of the speed controller.
p1470[0...n] Speed controller encoderless operation P-gain / n_ctrl SLVC Kp


0.000 999999.000 0.300
Description: Sets the P gain for encoderless operation for the speed controller.
Note: The product p0341 x p0342 is taken into account when automatically calculating the speed controller (p0340 = 1, 3,
4).
p1472[0...n] Speed controller encoderless operation integral time / n_ctrl SLVC Tn


0.0 [ms] 100000.0 [ms] 20.0 [ms]
Description: Set the integral time for encoderless operation for the speed controller.
Note: The integral component is stopped if the complete controller output or the sum of controller output and torque pre-
control reach the torque limit.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1475[0...n] CI: Speed controller torque setting value for motor holding brake / n_ctrl M_sv MHB

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the torque setting value when starting up with motor holding brake.
Dependency: The switching in of the torque setting value for the motor holding brake has a higher priority than the setting of the
integrator value using p1477 and p1478.
Note: The setting of the integral output of the speed controller begins after magnetizing (see p0346, r0056 bit 4) and ends
at the end of the brake control opening time p1216. A setting value of zero means that no setting procedure will take
place.
If p1351 is used as a signal source for the torque setting value, the percentage value is interpreted in relation to the
rated torque (p2003).
p1476[0...n] BI: Speed controller hold integrator / n_ctrl integ stop


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to hold the integrator for the speed controller.
p1477[0...n] BI: Speed controller set integrator value / n_ctrl integ set

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to set the integrator setting value (p1478).
p1478[0...n] CI: Speed controller integrator setting value / n_ctr integ_setVal


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the integrator setting value for the velocity controller.
The signal to set this integrator setting value is interconnected via p1477.
Dependency: The setting value of the speed controller integrator is weighted with the scaling factor of the signal source in p1479.
If p1478 is interconnected to the integral output of the speed controller (r1482), then after the magnetizing time
(r0346) and if the speed controller is enabled, the integral component of the controller is set to the last value before
the pulse inhibit. This value is set if no setting command (p1477) is interconnected or, at the instant that the pulses
were inhibited, a setting command is available, which is not de-activated up to the next time that the pulses are
inhibited. For sensorless vector control, in addition p1400.1 should be set to 1 so that when the drive is stopped, the
integral component of the speed controller is not controlled down to zero.
In order that when setting the integrator output, only the static torque is detected, we recommend that the accelerat-
ing torque is completely pre-controlled (e.g. p1496).
If p1478 is interconnected to another output other than r1482, then after magnetizing and speed controller enable,
the integral output is set once if the setting command is not interconnected (p1477 = 0).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1479[0...n] CI: Speed controller integrator setting value scaling / n_ctrl I_val scal

- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the integrator setting value (p1478) of the speed controller.
r1482 CO: Speed controller I torque output / n_ctrl I-M_output


- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the torque setpoint at the output of the I speed controller.
p1486[0...n] CI: Droop compensation torque / Droop M_comp


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the compensation torque to be output within the droop calculation.
p1487[0...n] Droop compensation torque scaling / Droop M_comp scal


-2000.0 [%] 2000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the compensation torque within the droop calculation.
p1488[0...n] Droop input source / Droop input source


0 3 0
Description: Sets the source for droop feedback.
Value: 0: Droop feedback not connected
1: Droop from torque setpoint
2: Droop from speed controller output
3: Droop from integral output, speed controller

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1489[0...n] Droop feedback scaling / Droop scaling


0.000 0.500 0.050
Description: Sets the scaling for the droop feedback
Note: Example:
A value of 0.05 means that for a torque equal to the rated motor torque, the rated motor speed is reduced by 5 %.
r1490 CO: Droop feedback speed reduction / Droop n_reduction


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the output signal of the droop calculation. The droop feedback result is subtracted from the speed setpoint
when activated (p1492).
p1492[0...n] BI: Droop feedback enable / Droop enable


- - 0
Description: Enables the droop to be applied to the speed/velocity setpoint.
Note: Even when not enabled, the droop speed is calculated but not subtracted from the setpoint speed. This makes it
possible to subtract the result of this calculation from the speed of another drive.
r1493 CO: Moment of inertia, total / M_inertia total


- [kgm²] - [kgm²] - [kgm²]
Description: Displays the parameterized total moment of inertia ((p0341 * p0342) * p1496).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1496[0...n] Acceleration pre-control scaling / a_before scaling


0.0 [%] 10000.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the acceleration pre-control of the speed/velocity controller.
Note: The parameter is set to 100% by the rotating measurement (refer to p1960).
The acceleration pre-control may not be used if the speed setpoint manifests significant ripple (e.g. analog setpoint)
and the rounding-off in the speed ramp-function generator is disabled.
We also recommend that the pre-control mode is not used if there is gearbox backlash.
p1499[0...n] Accelerating for torque control, scaling / a for M_ctrl scal


0.0 [%] 400.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the acceleration integrator at low speeds (only for encoderless torque control).
p1500[0...n] Torque setpoint selection / M_set sel


0 66 2
Description: Sets the source for the torque setpoint.
Example:
Value = 26
2: Analog setpoint
6: Fieldbus

Parameters
List of Parameters


0 66 6
Example:
Value = 26
2: Analog setpoint
6: Fieldbus

Parameters
List of Parameters

CU240E-2 F Can be changed: C(1), T Scaling: - Data set: CDS, p0170

0 77 2
Example:
Value = 26
2: Analog setpoint
6: Fieldbus

Parameters
List of Parameters

CU240E-2 DP F Can be changed: C(1), T Scaling: - Data set: CDS, p0170

0 77 6
Example:
Value = 26
2: Analog setpoint
6: Fieldbus
p1501[0...n] BI: Change over between closed-loop speed/torque control / Changeov n/M_ctrl

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for toggling between speed and torque control.
Dependency: The input connectors to enter the torque are provided using p1511, p1512 and p1513.
Refer to: p1300
Caution: If the closed-loop torque control is not activated (p1300) and a change is made to closed-loop torque control
(p1501), OFF1 (p0840) does not have its own braking response but pulse suppression when standstill is detected
(p1226, p1227).
Note: 0 signal: Closed-loop speed control
1 signal: Closed-loop torque control

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1503[0...n] CI: Torque setpoint / M_set


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the torque setpoint for torque control.
Note: A change is made to closed-loop torque control if, in p1300, closed-loop torque control was selected or if the selec-
tion was made using the changeover source in p1501.
it is also possible to change over in operation using p1501.
r1508 CO: Torque setpoint before supplementary torque / M_set bef. M_suppl

- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the torque setpoint before entering the supplementary torque.
For closed-loop speed control, r1508 corresponds to the speed controller output; for closed-loop torque control,
r1508 corresponds to the torque setpoint of the signal source assigned in p1503.
p1511[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 1 / M_suppl 1


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for supplementary torque 1.
p1512[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 1 scaling / M_suppl 1 scal


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the supplementary torque 1.


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for supplementary torque 2.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1514[0...n] Supplementary torque 2 scaling / M_suppl 2 scal


-2000.0 [%] 2000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for supplementary torque 2.
r1515 Supplementary torque total / M_suppl total


- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the total supplementary torque.
The displayed value is the total of supplementary torque values 1 and 2 (p1511, p1512, p1513, p1514).
r1516 CO: Supplementary torque and acceleration torque / M_suppl + M_accel


- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the total supplementary torque and the accelerating torque.
The displayed value is the total of the smoothed supplementary torque and the accelerating torque (p1516 =
p1518[1] + r1515).
p1517[0...n] Accelerating torque smoothing time constant / M_accel T_smooth


0.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms] 4.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the accelerating torque.
Note: The acceleration pre-control is inhibited if the smoothing is set to the maximum value.
r1518[0...1] CO: Accelerating torque / M_accel


- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the accelerating torque for pre-control of the speed controller.
[1] = Smoothed

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1520[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper / M_max upper


-1000000.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the fixed, upper torque limit.
Dependency: Refer to: p1521, p1522, p1523, r1538, r1539
Danger: Negative values when setting the upper torque limit (p1520 < 0) can result in the motor accelerating in an uncontrol-
lable fashion.
Note: The torque limit is limited to 400% of the rated motor torque. When automatically calculating the motor/closed-loop
control parameters (p0340), the torque limit is set to match the current limit (p0640).
p1521[0...n] CO: Torque limit lower / M_max lower


-20000000.00 [Nm] 1000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the fixed, lower torque limit.
Danger: Positive values when setting the lower torque limit (p1521 > 0) can result in the motor accelerating in an uncontrol-
lable fashion.
Note: The torque limit is limited to 400% of the rated motor torque. When automatically calculating the motor/closed-loop
control parameters (p0340), the torque limit is set to match the current limit (p0640).
p1522[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper / M_max upper


- - 1520[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the upper torque limit.
Danger: Negative values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled
manner.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1523[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower / M_max lower


- - 1521[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the lower torque limit.
Danger: Positive values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled
manner.
p1524[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper/motoring scaling / M_max up/mot scal


-2000.0 [%] 2000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the upper torque limit or the torque limit when motoring.
Dependency: p1400.4 = 0: upper/lower
p1400.4 = 1: motoring / regenerating
Note: This parameter can be freely interconnected.
The value has the meaning stated above if it is interconnected from connector input p1528.
p1525[0...n] CO: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal


-2000.0 [%] 2000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the lower torque limit.
Note: This parameter can be freely interconnected.
The value has the meaning stated above if it is interconnected from connector input p1528.
r1526 CO: Torque limit upper without offset / M_max up w/o offs

- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the upper torque limit of all torque limits without offset.
Dependency: Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1527 CO: Torque limit lower without offset / M_max low w/o offs

- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the lower torque limit of all torque limits without offset.
p1528[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal


- - 1524[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the upper torque limit in p1522.
Danger: For p1400.4 = 0 (torque limiting, upper/lower) the following applies:
Negative values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled
manner.
p1529[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal


- - 1525[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the lower torque limit in p1523.
Danger: For p1400.4 = 0 (torque limiting, upper/lower) the following applies:
Positive values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled
manner.
p1530[0...n] Power limit motoring / P_max mot


0.00 [kW] 100000.00 [kW] 0.00 [kW]
Description: Sets the power limit when motoring.
Note: The power limit is limited to 300% of the rated motor power.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1531[0...n] Power limit regenerative / P_max gen


-100000.00 [kW] -0.01 [kW] -0.01 [kW]
Description: Sets the regenerative power limit.
Note: The power limit is limited to 300% of the rated motor power.
For power units without regenerative feedback into the line supply, the regenerative power limit is pre-set to 30% of
the motoring power limit p1530 and in the ratio rated drive converter power to rated motor power.
For power units with energy recovery, the parameter is limited to the negative value of r0206[2].
r1533 Current limit torque-generating total / Iq_max total


Description: Displays the maximum torque/force generating current as a result if all current limits.
r1536 Current limit maximum torque-generating current / Isq_max


Description: Displays the maximum limit for the torque-generating current component.
r1537 Current limit minimum torque-generating current / Isq_min


Description: Displays the minimum limit for the torque-generating current component.
r1538 CO: Upper effective torque limit / M_max upper eff


- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the currently effective upper torque limit.
Note: The effective upper torque limit is reduced with respect to the selected upper torque limit p1520, if the current limit
p0640 is reduced or the rated magnetizing current of the induction motor p0320 is increased.
This may be the case for rotating measurements (see p1960).
The torque limit p1520 can be re-calculated using p0340 = 1, 3 or 5.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1539 CO: Lower effective torque limit / M_max lower eff


- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the currently effective lower torque limit.
Note: The effective lower torque limit is reduced with respect to the selected lower torque limit p1521, if the current limit
p0640 is reduced or the rated magnetizing current of the induction motor p0320 is increased.
This may be the case for rotating measurements (see p1960).
The torque limit p1520 can be re-calculated using p0340 = 1, 3 or 5.
r1547[0...1] CO: Torque limit for speed controller output / M_max outp n_ctrl

- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the torque limit to limit the speed controller output.
Index: [0] = Upper limit
[1] = Lower limit
r1548[0...1] CO: Stall current limit torque-generating maximum / Isq_max stall


Description: Displays the limit for the torque-generating current component using the stall calculation, the current limit of the
power unit as well as the parameterization in p0640.
Index: [0] = Upper limit
[1] = Lower limit
p1552[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling without offset / M_max up w/o offs

- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the upper torque limiting to limit the speed controller output without taking
into account the current and power limits.
p1554[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling without offset / M_max low w/o offs

- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the lower torque limiting to limit the speed controller output without taking
into account the current and power limits.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1570[0...n] CO: Flux setpoint / Flux setpoint


50.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the flux setpoint referred to rated motor flux.
Note: For p1570 > 100%, the flux setpoint increases as a function of the load from 100% (no-load operation) to the setting
in p1570 (above rated motor torque), if p1580 > 0% has been set.
p1571[0...n] CI: Supplementary flux setpoint / Suppl flux setp


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the supplementary flux setpoint.
Notice: Low flux setpoints can cause the drive to stall at higher loads. This is the reason that the flux setpoint should only be
adapted for slow load changes.
Note: The supplementary flux setpoint is limited to +/- 50 %.
p1573[0...n] Flux threshold value magnetizing / Flux thresh magnet


10.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the flux threshold value for enabling the speed setpoint and the end of magnetizing (r0056.4).
Note: The parameter only has an influence if the flux actual value reaches the threshold value p1573 more quickly during
magnetizing than the time set in p0346.
The parameter has no influence for flying restart (see p1200) and after DC braking (see p1231).
p1574[0...n] Voltage reserve dynamic / U_reserve dyn


0.0 [Vrms] 150.0 [Vrms] 2.0 [Vrms]
Description: Sets a dynamic voltage reserve.
Note: In the field weakening range, it must be expected that the control dynamic performance is somewhat restricted due
to the limited possibilities of controlling/adjusting the voltage. This can be improved by increasing the voltage
reserve. Increasing the reserve reduces the steady-state maximum output voltage (r0071).

Parameters
List of Parameters


0.0 [Vrms] 150.0 [Vrms] 10.0 [Vrms]
Description: Sets a dynamic voltage reserve.
Note: In the field weakening range, it must be expected that the control dynamic performance is somewhat restricted due
to the limited possibilities of controlling/adjusting the voltage. This can be improved by increasing the voltage
reserve. Increasing the reserve reduces the steady-state maximum output voltage (r0071).
p1580[0...n] Efficiency optimization / Efficiency opt.


0 [%] 100 [%] 80 [%]
Description: Sets the efficiency optimization. When optimizing the efficiency, the flux setpoint of the closed-loop control is
adapted as a function of the load.
For p1580 = 100 %, under no-load operating conditions, the flux setpoint is reduced to 50 % of the rated motor flux.
Note: It only makes sense to activate this function if the dynamic response requirements of the speed controller are low.
In order to avoid oscillations, if required, the speed controller parameters should be adapted (increase Tn, reduce
Kp).
Further, the smoothing time of the flux setpoint filter (p1582) should be increased.


0 [%] 100 [%] 0 [%]
Description: Sets the efficiency optimization. When optimizing the efficiency, the flux setpoint of the closed-loop control is
adapted as a function of the load.
For p1580 = 100 %, under no-load operating conditions, the flux setpoint is reduced to 50 % of the rated motor flux.
Note: It only makes sense to activate this function if the dynamic response requirements of the speed controller are low.
In order to avoid oscillations, if required, the speed controller parameters should be adapted (increase Tn, reduce
Kp).
Further, the smoothing time of the flux setpoint filter (p1582) should be increased.
p1582[0...n] Flux setpoint smoothing time / Flux setp T_smth


4 [ms] 5000 [ms] 15 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time for the flux setpoint.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1583 Flux setpoint smoothed / Flux setp smooth


- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the smoothed flux setpoint.
The value is referred to the rated motor flux.
p1584[0...n] Field weakening operation, flux setpoint smoothing time / Field weak T_smth

0 [ms] 20000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time for the flux setpoint in the field-weakening range
Note: Only the flux setpoint rise is smoothed
r1589 Field-weakening current, pre-control value / I_FieldWeak prectr


Description: Displays the pre-control value for the field weakening current.
r1593[0...1] CO: Field weakening controller / flux controller output / Field/Fl_ctrl outp

Description: Displays the output of the field weakening controller (synchronous motor).
Index: [0] = PI output
[1] = I output
p1594[0...n] Field-weakening controller, P gain / Field_ctrl Kp


0.00 1000.00 0.00
Description: Sets the P gain of the field-weakening controller.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1596[0...n] Field weakening controller integral-action time / Field_ctrl Tn


10 [ms] 10000 [ms] 300 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral-action time of the field-weakening controller.
r1597 CO: Field weakening controller output / Field_ctrl outp


- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the output of the field weakening controller.
r1598 CO: Total flux setpoint / Flux setp total


- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the effective flux setpoint.
p1610[0...n] Torque setpoint static (SLVC) / M_set static


-200.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Description: Sets the static torque setpoint for sensorless vector control (SLVC).
This parameter is entered as a percentage referred to the rated motor torque (r0333).
For sensorless vector control, when the motor model is shut down, an absolute current is impressed. p1610 repre-
sents the maximum load that occurs at a constant setpoint speed.
Notice: p1610 should always be set to at least 10 % higher than the maximum steady-state load that can occur.
Note: For p1610 = 0%, a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the no-load case (ASM: rated magnetizing cur-
rent).
For p1610 = 100 %, a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the rated motor torque.
Negative values are converted into positive setpoints in the case of induction and permanent-magnet synchronous
motors.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1611[0...n] Supplementary accelerating torque (SLVC) / M_suppl_accel


0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 30.0 [%]
Description: Enters the dynamic torque setpoint for the low-speed range for sensorless vector control (SLVC). This parameter is
entered as a percentage referred to the rated motor torque (r0333).
Note: When accelerating and braking p1611 is added to p1610 and the resulting total torque is converted into an appro-
priate current setpoint and controlled.
For pure accelerating torques, it is always favorable to use the torque pre-control of the speed controller (p1496).
p1616[0...n] Current setpoint smoothing time / I_set T_smooth


4 [ms] 10000 [ms] 40 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time for the current setpoint.
The current setpoint is generated from p1610 and p1611.
Note: This parameter is only effective in the range where current is injected for sensorless vector control.
r1623[0...1] Field-generating current setpoint (steady-state) / Id_set stationary


Description: Displays the steady-state field generating current setpoint (Id_set).
Note: Re index 1:
Displays the stationary field-generating current on the stator side in the case of separately excited synchronous
motors without the excitation current monitoring component (r1644).
r1624 Field-generating current setpoint, total / Id_setp total


Description: Displays the limited field-generating current setpoint (Id_set).
This value comprises the steady-state field-generating current setpoint r1623 and a dynamic component that is only
set when changes are made to the flux setpoint.
r1650 Current setpoint torque-generating before filter / Iq_set before filt


Description: Displays the torque generating current setpoint Iqset after the torque limits and the clock cycle interpolation is
ahead of the current setpoint filters.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1654[0...n] Curr. setpoint torque-gen. smoothing time field weakening range / Isq_s T_smth FW

0.1 [ms] 50.0 [ms] 4.8 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant for the setpoint of the torque-generating current components.
Note: The smoothing time does not become effective until the field-weakening range is reached.
p1702[0...n] Isd current controller pre-control scaling / Isd_ctr_prectrScal


0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 70.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling of the dynamic current controller pre-control for the flux-generating current component Isd.
Note: The parameter is effective for permanent-magnet synchronous motors.
p1703[0...n] Isq current controller pre-control scaling / Isq_ctr_prectrScal


0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 60.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling of the dynamic current controller pre-control for the torque/force-generating current component Isq.
p1715[0...n] Current controller P gain / I_ctrl Kp


0.000 100000.000 0.000
Description: Sets the proportional gain of the current controller.
This value is automatically pre-set using p3900 or p0340 when commissioning has been completed.
p1717[0...n] Current controller integral-action time / I_ctrl Tn


0.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms] 2.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral-action time of the current controller.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1718 CO: Isq controller output / Isq_ctrl outp


Description: Displays the actual output of the Isq current controller (torque/force generating current, PI controller).
The value contains the proportional and integral components of the PI controller.
r1719 Isq controller integral component / Isq_ctrl I_comp


Description: Displays the integral component of the Isq current controller (torque/force-generating current, PI controller).
r1723 CO: Isd controller output / Isd_ctrl outp


Description: Displays the actual output of the Isd current controller (flux-generating current, PI controller).
The value contains the proportional and integral components of the PI controller.
r1724 Isd controller integral component / Isd_ctrl I_comp


Description: Displays the integral component of the Isd current controller (flux-generating current, PI controller).
r1725 Isd controller integral component limit / Isd_ctrl I_limit


Description: Displays the limit value for the integral component of the Isd current controller.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1726[0...n] Quadrature arm decoupling, scaling / Transv_decpl scal


0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 75.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling of the quadrature arm decoupling
Note: This parameter is ineffective for sensorless vector control. In this case, p1727 is always used. If p1726 is set to 0,
then the quadrature de-coupling is de-activated. The integral component of the Isd current controller remains effec-
tive in the complete speed control range.
For the closed-loop control of synchronous motors, this parameter is used to scale the current controller de-cou-
pling.
p1727[0...n] Quadrature arm decoupling at voltage limit scaling / TrnsvDecplVmaxScal


0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling of quadrature arm decoupling when the voltage limit is reached.
r1728 De-coupling voltage, in-line axis / U_dir-axis_decoupl


Description: Displays the actual output of the quadrature channel de-coupling for the d axis.
r1729 De-coupling voltage, quadrature axis / U_quad_decoupl


Description: Displays the actual output of the quadrature channel de-coupling for the q axis.
p1730[0...n] Isd controller integral component shutdown threshold / Isd_ctrl I_thresh


30 [%] 150 [%] 30 [%]
Description: Sets the speed activation threshold (referred to the synchronous speed r0336 / r0313) for pure quadrature branch
operation of the closed-loop current control.
The d current controller is only effective as P controller for speeds greater than the threshold value.
Warning: For settings above 80%, the d current controller is active up to the field weakening limit (maximum voltage)
This can result in unstable behavior as the closed-loop control at the maximum voltage is based on pure quadrature
branch operation.
Setting values as high as this should not be selected; they are only intended for test purposes.
Note: The parameter is only effective for induction motor operation without an encoder.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1732[0...1] CO: Direct-axis voltage setpoint / Direct U set


Description: Displays the direct-axis voltage setpoint Ud.
r1733[0...1] CO: Quadrature-axis voltage setpoint / Quad U set


Description: Displays the quadrature-axis component of voltage setpoint Uq.
p1740[0...n] Gain resonance damping for encoderless closed-loop control / Gain res_damp

0.000 10.000 0.025
Description: Defines the gain of the controller for resonance damping for operation with sensorless vector control in the range
that current is injected.
p1745[0...n] Motor model error threshold stall detection / MotMod ThreshStall


0.0 [%] 1000.0 [%] 5.0 [%]
Description: Sets the fault threshold in order to detect a motor that has stalled.
If the error signal (r1746) exceeds the parameterized error threshold, then status signal r1408.12 is set to 1.
Dependency: If a stalled drive is detected (r1408.12 = 1), fault F07902 is output after the delay time set in p2178.
Refer to: p2178
Note: Monitoring is only effective in the low-speed range (below p1755 * (100% - p1756)).
r1746 Motor model error signal stall detection / MotMod sig stall

- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Signal to initiate stall detection
Note: The signal is not calculated while magnetizing and only in the low speed range (below p1755 * (100 % - p1756)).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1750[0...n] Motor model configuration / MotMod config

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: Unsigned8

- - 0000 1100 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the motor model.
Bit 0 = 1: Forces open-loop speed-controlled starting (ASM).
Bit 1 = 1: Forces the system to pass through frequency zero, open-loop-controlled (ASM).
Bit 2 = 1: Drive remains in full closed-loop control mode, even at zero frequency (ASM).
Bit 3 = 1: Motor model evaluates the saturation characteristic (ASM).
Bit 6 = 1: If the motor is blocked, sensorless vector control remains speed-controlled (ASM).
00 Controlled start Yes No -
01 Controlled through 0 Hz Yes No -
02 Closed-loop ctrl oper. down to zero freq. for Yes No -
passive loads
03 Motor model Lh_pre = f(PsiEst) Yes No -
06 Closed-loop control when motor is blocked Yes No -
Caution: Do not use bit 6 = 1 if the motor can be reversed by the load. Long delay times due to blocking (p2177) can cause
the motor to stall. In this case you should de-activate the function or use closed-loop control throughout the speed
range (note the information re bit 2 = 1).
Note: Bits 0 ... 2 only have an influence for encoderless vector control, bit 2 is pre-assigned depending on p0500.
Re bit 2 = 1:
The sensorless vector control is effective down to zero frequency. A change is not made into the open-loop speed
controlled mode.
This operating mode is possible for passive loads. These include applications where the load itself does not gener-
ate any active torque and therefore only acts reactively to the drive torque of the induction motor.
If bit 2 = 1, then bit 3 is automatically set to 1. Manual de-selection is possible and may be sensible if the saturation
characteristic (p1960) was not measured for third-party motors. Generally, for standard SIEMENS motors, the
already pre-assigned (default value) saturation characteristic is adequate.
When the bit is set, the selection of bits 0 and 1 is ignored.
Re bit 2 = 0:
Bit 3 is also automatically deactivated.
Re bit 6 = 1:
The following applies for encoderless vector control of induction motors:
For a blocked motor (see p2175, p2177) the time condition in p1758 is bypassed and a change is not made into
open-loop controlled operation.

Parameters
List of Parameters

PM240 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: Unsigned8

- - 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the motor model.
Bit 0 = 1: Forces open-loop speed-controlled starting (ASM).
Bit 1 = 1: Forces the system to pass through frequency zero, open-loop-controlled (ASM).
Bit 2 = 1: Drive remains in full closed-loop control mode, even at zero frequency (ASM).
Bit 3 = 1: Motor model evaluates the saturation characteristic (ASM).
Bit 6 = 1: If the motor is blocked, sensorless vector control remains speed-controlled (ASM).
00 Controlled start Yes No -
01 Controlled through 0 Hz Yes No -
02 Closed-loop ctrl oper. down to zero freq. for Yes No -
passive loads
03 Motor model Lh_pre = f(PsiEst) Yes No -
06 Closed-loop control when motor is blocked Yes No -
Caution: Do not use bit 6 = 1 if the motor can be reversed by the load. Long delay times due to blocking (p2177) can cause
the motor to stall. In this case you should de-activate the function or use closed-loop control throughout the speed
range (note the information re bit 2 = 1).
Note: Bits 0 ... 2 only have an influence for encoderless vector control, bit 2 is pre-assigned depending on p0500.
Re bit 2 = 1:
The sensorless vector control is effective down to zero frequency. A change is not made into the open-loop speed
controlled mode.
This operating mode is possible for passive loads. These include applications where the load itself does not gener-
ate any active torque and therefore only acts reactively to the drive torque of the induction motor.
If bit 2 = 1, then bit 3 is automatically set to 1. Manual de-selection is possible and may be sensible if the saturation
characteristic (p1960) was not measured for third-party motors. Generally, for standard SIEMENS motors, the
already pre-assigned (default value) saturation characteristic is adequate.
When the bit is set, the selection of bits 0 and 1 is ignored.
Re bit 2 = 0:
Bit 3 is also automatically deactivated.
Re bit 6 = 1:
The following applies for encoderless vector control of induction motors:
For a blocked motor (see p2175, p2177) the time condition in p1758 is bypassed and a change is not made into
open-loop controlled operation.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1751 Motor model status / MotMod status


- - -
Description: Displays the status of the motor model.
00 Controlled operation Active Inactive 6721
01 Set ramp-function generator Active Inactive -
02 Stop RsLh adaptation Yes No -
03 Feedback Active Inactive -
05 Holding angle Yes No -
06 Acceleration criterion Active Inactive -
07 Set angular integrator PEM No Yes -
08 Stop Kt adaptation PEM No Yes -
09 PolID active PEM SLVC No Yes -
10 I injection PEM No Yes -
11 Speed controller output cannot be set to Yes No -
zero
12 Rs adapt waits Yes No -
13 Motor operation Yes No -
14 Stator frequency sign Positive Negative -
15 Torque sign Motor mode Regenerative mode -
16 Pulse injection active PEM Yes No -
17 Operation with feedback Selected Deselected -
p1755[0...n] Motor model changeover speed encoderless operation / MotMod n_chgSnsorl


0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed to change over the motor model to encoderless operation.
Notice: The changeover speed represents the steady-state minimum speed up to which the motor model can be used
in steady-state operation without encoder.
If the stability is not adequate close to the changeover speed, it may make sense to increase the parameter value.
Note: The changeover speed applies for the changeover between open-loop and closed-loop control mode.
p1756 Motor model changeover speed hysteresis encoderless operation /

MotMod n_chgov hys

0.0 [%] 95.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Description: Sets the hysteresis for the changeover speed of the motor model for encoderless operation.
Note: The parameter value refers to p1755.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1758[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time closed/open-loop control / MotMod t cl_op

100 [ms] 10000 [ms] 500 [ms]
Description: Sets the minimum time for falling below the changeover speed when changing from closed-loop controlled opera-
tion to open-loop controlled operation.
p1759[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time open/closed-loop control / MotMod t op_cl

0 [ms] 2000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the minimum time for exceeding the changeover speed when changing from open-loop controlled operation to
closed-loop controlled operation.
Note: When p1759 = 2000 ms, the delay time becomes ineffective and the model changeover is determined by the output
frequency only.
r1762[0...1] Motor model deviation component 1 / MotMod dev comp 1


- - -
Description: Induction motor (ASM):
Displays the referred imaginary system deviation for the adaptation circuit of the motor model.
Permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PESM):
Displays the system deviation for speed adaptation.
r1762.0: Angular deviation [rad-el] of the estimated EMF.
r1762.1: Angular deviation [electr. deg.] of the low-level signal response for pulse technique.
Index: [0] = Deviation Model1
[1] = Deviation Model2
r1763 Motor model deviation component 2 / MotMod dev comp 2


- - -
Description: Induction motor (ASM):
Displays the referred real system deviation for the adaptation circuit of the motor model.
Permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PESM):
Not used.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1764[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod woE n_adaKp

0.000 100000.000 1000.000
Description: Sets the proportional gain of the controller for speed adaptation without encoder.
r1765 Motor model, speed adaptation Kp effective / MotM n_ada Kp act


- - -
Description: Displays the effective proportional gain of the controller for the speed adaptation.
p1767[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod woE n_adaTn

1 [ms] 200 [ms] 4 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral time of the controller for speed adaptation without encoder
r1768 Motor model, speed adaptation Vi effective / MotM n_ada Vi act


- - -
Description: Displays the effective gain of the integral component of the controller for speed adaptation.
r1770 CO: Motor model speed adaptation proportional component / MotMod n_adapt Kp

- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the P component of the controller for speed adaptation.
r1771 CO: Motor model speed adaptation I comp. / MotMod n_adapt Tn


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the I component of the controller for speed adaptation.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1773[0...1] Motor model slip speed / MotMod slip


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays estimated (speed) signals of the motor model.
r1773[0]: Displays the estimated (mechanical) slip of the motor model.
r1773[1]: Displays the estimated input speed of the motor model.
Index: [0] = Slip speed estimated
[1] = Speed estimated
p1774[0...n] Motor model, offset voltage compensation alpha / MotMod offs comp A

-5.000 [V] 5.000 [V] 0.000 [V]
Description: Sets the offset voltage in the alpha direction; this compensates the offset voltages of the drive converter/inverter at
low speeds. The value is valid for the rated (nominal) pulse frequency of the power unit.
Note: The value is pre-set during the rotating measurement.
p1775[0...n] Motor model, offset voltage compensation beta / MotMod offs comp B

-5.000 [V] 5.000 [V] 0.000 [V]
Description: Sets the offset voltage in the beta direction; this compensates the offset voltages of the drive converter/inverter at
low speeds. The value is valid for the rated (nominal) pulse frequency of the power unit.
Note: The value is pre-set during the rotating measurement.
r1776[0...6] Motor model status signals / MotMod status sig


- - -
Description: Displays the internal status signals of the motor model:
Index 0: Changeover ramp between current and voltage models
Index 1: Changeover ramp for model tracking (encoderless induction motors only)
Index 2: Changeover ramp for zero frequency range (encoderless induction motors only)
Index 3: Transition ramp actual speed from speed setpoint to model value (encoderless FEM)
Index 4: Speed controller enable (encoderless FEM)
Index 5: Transition ramp between current and voltage models (encoderless FEM)
Index 6: Transition ramp for EMF deviation at PLL input (encoderless PESM)
Index: [0] = Changeover ramp motor model
[1] = Changeover ramp model tracking
[2] = Changeover ramp zero frequency encoderless ASM
[3] = Changeover ramp actual speed encoderless FEM
[4] = Enable speed controller encoderless FEM
[5] = Changeover ramp motor model encoderless FEM
[6] = Changeover ramp motor model encoderless PESM
Note: Indices 3 through 5 are only relevant in the case of encoderless control of separately excited synchronous motors.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1778 Motor model flux angle difference / MotMod ang. diff.


- [°] - [°] - [°]
Description: Displays the difference between the motor model flux angle and the transformation angle.
Dependency: A setting for smoothing the display can be made using p1754.
p1780[0...n] Motor model adaptation configuration / MotMod adapt conf


- - 0101 1100 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the adaptation circuit of the motor model.
Induction motor (ASM): Rs, Lh, and offset compensation.
Permanent magnet synchronous motor (PEM): kT
01 Select motor model ASM Rs adaptation Yes No -
02 Select motor model ASM Lh adaptation Yes No -
03 Select motor model PEM kT adaptation Yes No -
04 Select motor model offset adaptation Yes No -
06 Select pole position identification PEM Yes No -
encoderless
07 Select T(valve) with Rs adaptation Yes No -
Note: ASM: Induction motor
PEM: Permanent magnet synchronous motor
When selecting the compensation of the valve interlocking via Rs (bit 7), the compensation in the gating unit is de-
activated and is instead taken into account in the motor model.
In order that the correction values of the Rs, Lh and kT adaptation (selected using Bit 0 ... Bit 2) are correctly
accepted when changing over the drive data set, a dedicated motor number must be entered into p0826 for each
different motor.
p1784[0...n] Motor model feedback scaling / Mod_FB_scal


0.0 [%] 1000.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for model fault feedback.
Note: Feeding back the measured model fault to the model states increases the control stability and makes the motor
model rugged against parameter errors.
The model feedback is only effective for encoderless operation of the ASM.
When feedback is selected (p1784 > 0), Lh adaptation is not effective.
p1785[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation Kp / MotMod Lh Kp


0.000 10.000 0.100
Description: Sets the proportional gain for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1786[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation integral time / MotMod Lh Tn


10 [ms] 10000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral time for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).
r1787[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation corrective value / MotMod Lh corr

Can be changed: - Scaling: - Data set: DDS, p0180

- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the corrective value for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).
Note: The adaptation result is reset if the magnetizing inductance of the induction motor is changed (p0360, r0382). This
also happens when changing over the data set if a different motor is not being used (p0826).
The display of the inactive data sets is only updated when changing over the data set.
r1791 Motor model Lh adaptation power-on frequency / MotMod Lh f_on


- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Displays the power-on stator frequency/ primary section frequency for the Lh adaptation for the induction motor
(ASM).
r1792 Motor model Lh adaptation power-on slip / MotMod Lh fslip


- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Displays the power-on slip frequency for the Lh adaptation for the induction motor (ASM).
p1795[0...n] Motor model kT adaptation integral time / MotMod kT Tn


10 [ms] 10000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral time of the kT adaptation of the motor model for a permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PEM).

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1797[0...n] Motor model kT adaptation corrective value / MotMod kT corr


- [Nm/A] - [Nm/A] - [Nm/A]
Description: Displays the corrective value of the kT adaptation of the motor model for a permanent-magnet synchronous motor
(PEM).
Note: The display of the inactive data sets is only updated when changing over the data set.
p1800[0...n] Pulse frequency setpoint / Pulse freq setp


2.000 [kHz] 16.000 [kHz] 4.000 [kHz]
Description: Sets the pulse frequency for the converter.
This parameter is pre-set to the rated converter value when the drive is first commissioned.
Note: The maximum possible pulse frequency is also determined by the power unit being used.
When the pulse frequency is increased, depending on the particular power unit, the maximum output current can be
reduced (derating, refer to r0067).
If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3), then the pulse frequency cannot be set below the
minimum value required for the filter.
For operation with output reactors, the pulse frequency is limited to 4 kHz (see p0230).
r1801[0...1] CO: Pulse frequency / Pulse frequency


- [kHz] - [kHz] - [kHz]
Description: Display and connector output for the actual converter switching frequency.
Index: [0] = Actual
[1] = Modulator minimum value
Note: The selected pulse frequency (p1800) may be reduced if the drive converter has an overload condition (p0290).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1802[0...n] Modulator mode / Modulator mode

PM230 Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: Integer16

0 10 10
Description: Sets the modulator mode.
Value: 0: Automatic changeover SVM/FLB
2: Space vector modulation (SVM)
3: SVM without overcontrol
4: SVM/FLB without overcontrol
10: SVM/FLB with modulation depth reduction
Dependency: If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), then only space vector modulation without over-
control can be selected as modulation type (p1802 = 3). This is not valid for the power units PM260. p1802 = 10 can
only be set for the PM230 and PM240 power units.
Note: When modulation modes are enabled that could lead to overmodulation (p1802 = 0, 2, 10), the modulation depth
must be limited using p1803 (pre-assignment, p1803 = 98%). The higher the overmodulation, the greater the cur-
rent ripple and torque ripple. With p1802 = 10, the modulation depth limit is automatically reduced to 100% in the
critical output frequency range (over approx. 57 Hz).
When changing p1802[x], the values for all of the other existing indices are also changed.


0 10 0
10: SVM/FLB with modulation depth reduction
Note: When modulation modes are enabled that could lead to overmodulation (p1802 = 0, 2,10), the modulation depth
must be limited using p1803 (default p1803 < 100 %). The higher the overmodulation, the greater the current ripple
and torque ripple.

Parameters
List of Parameters

PM260 Can be changed: T Scaling: - Data set: DDS, p0180

0 4 4
Note: When modulation modes are enabled that could lead to overmodulation (p1802 = 0, 2,10), the modulation depth
must be limited using p1803 (default p1803 < 100 %). The higher the overmodulation, the greater the current ripple
and torque ripple.
p1803[0...n] Maximum modulation depth / Modulat depth max


20.0 [%] 120.0 [%] 115.0 [%]
Description: Defines the maximum modulation depth.
Note: p1803 = 100% is the overcontrol limit for space vector modulation (for an ideal drive converter without any switching
delay).


20.0 [%] 150.0 [%] 106.0 [%]
delay).


20.0 [%] 150.0 [%] 106.0 [%]
Dependency: Default setting PM260: 103 %.
Refer to: p0500
delay).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1806[0...n] Filter time constant Vdc correction / T_filt Vdc_corr


0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the filter time constant of the DC link voltage used to calculate the modulation depth.
r1808 DC link voltage actual value for U_max calculation / Vdc act val U_max

- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: DC link voltage used to determine the maximum possible output voltage.
r1809 CO: Modulator mode actual / Modulator mode act


1 2 -
Description: Displays the effective modulator mode.
Value: 1: Flat top modulation (FLB)
p1810 Modulator configuration / Modulator config


- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the modulator.
00 Avg value filter for U_lim (only for Yes No -
Vdc_comp. in modulator)
01 DC link voltage compensation in the current Yes No -
control
Notice: Bit 1 = 1 can only be set under a pulse inhibit and for r0192.14 = 1.
Note: Re bit 00 = 0:
Voltage limitation from the minimum of the DC link voltage (lower ripple in the output current, reduced output volt-
age).
Re bit 00 = 1:
Voltage limitation from averaged DC link voltage (higher output voltage with increased ripple in the output current).
The selection is only valid if the DC link compensation is not performed in the Control Unit (bit 1 = 0).
Re bit 01 = 0:
DC link voltage compensation in the modulator.
Re bit 01 = 1:
DC link voltage compensation in the current control.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1820[0...n] Reverse the output phase sequence / Outp_ph_seq rev


0 1 0
Description: Sets the phase sequence reversal for the motor without setpoint change.
If the motor does not rotate in the required direction, then the output phase sequence can be reversed using this
parameter. This means that the direction of the motor is reversed without the setpoint being changed.
Value: 0: OFF
1: ON
Note: This setting can only be changed when the pulses are inhibited.
p1825 Converter valve threshold voltage / Threshold voltage


0.0 [Vrms] 100.0 [Vrms] 0.6 [Vrms]
Description: Sets the threshold voltage drop of the valves (power semiconductor devices) to be compensated.
Note: The value is automatically calculated in the motor data identification routine.
p1828 Compensation valve lockout time phase U / Comp t_lock ph U


0.00 [µs] 3.99 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase U.
Note: The value is automatically calculated in the motor data identification routine.
p1829 Compensation valve lockout time phase V / Comp t_lock ph V


0.00 [µs] 3.99 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase V.
p1830 Compensation valve lockout time phase W / Comp t_lock ph W


0.00 [µs] 3.99 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase W.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1832 Dead time compensation current level / t_dead_comp I_lev


0.0 [Arms] 10000.0 [Arms] 0.0 [Arms]
Description: Sets the current level for the dead time compensation.
Above the current level, the dead time - resulting from the converter switching delays - is compensated by a previ-
ously calculated constant value. If the relevant phase current setpoint falls below the absolute value defined by
p1832, the corrective value for this phase is continuously reduced.
Dependency: The factor setting of p1832 is automatically set to 0.02 * rated drive converter current (r0207).
p1900 Motor data identification and rotating measurement / MotID and rot meas
Can be changed: C(1), T Scaling: - Data set: -

0 3 0
Description: Sets the motor data identification and speed controller optimization.
p1900 = 0:
Function inhibited.
p1900 = 1:
Sets p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0, 1 depending on p1300
When the drive enable signals are present, a motor data identification routine is carried out at standstill with the
next power-on command. Current flows through the motor which means that it can align itself by up to a quarter of
a revolution.
With the following power-on command, a rotating motor data identification routine is carried out - and in addition, a
speed controller optimization by making measurements at different motor speeds.
p1900 = 2:
Sets p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0
When the drive enable signals are present, a motor data identification routine is carried out at standstill with the
next power-on command. Current flows through the motor which means that it can align itself by up to a quarter of
a revolution.
p1900 = 3:
Sets p1960 = 0, 1 depending on p1300
This setting should only be selected if the motor data identification was already carried out at standstill.
When the drive enable signals are present, with the next power-on command, a rotating motor data identification
routine is carried out - and in addition, speed controller optimization by taking measurements at different motor
speeds.
Value: 0: Inhibited
1: Identify motor data at standstill and with motor rotating
2: Identify motor data at standstill
3: Identify motor data with motor rotating
Refer to: A07980, A07981, F07983, F07984, F07985, F07986, F07988, F07990, A07991
Notice: If there is a motor holding brake, it must be open (p1215 = 2).
To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971).
Note: The motor and control parameters are only optimally set when both measurements are carried out (initially at stand-
still, and then with the motor rotating).
An appropriate alarm is output when the parameter is set.
The power-on command must remain set during a measurement and after the measurement has been completed,
the drive automatically resets it.
The duration of the measurements can lie between 0.3 s and several minutes. This time is, for example, influenced
by the motor size and the mechanical conditions.
p1900 is automatically set to 0 after the motor data identification routine has been completed.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1901 Test pulse evaluation configuration / Test puls config


- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the test pulse evaluation.
Re bit 00:
Check for conductor-to-conductor short circuit when pulse is enabled.
00 Phase short-circuit test pulse active Yes No -
Note: Re bit 00:
If the test was successful once after POWER ON (see r1902.0), it is not repeated.
If a conductor-to-conductor short-circuit is detected during the test, this is displayed in r1902.1.
r1902 Test pulse evaluation status / Test puls ev stat


- - -
Description: Displays the status of the test pulse evaluation.
Short-circuit test:
Bit 0: The short-circuit test was run without any faults detected.
Bit 1: A phase short circuit has been detected.
00 Short-circuit test executed Yes No -
01 Phase short-circuit detected Yes No -

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1909[0...n] Motor data identification control word / MotID STW


- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the motor data identification.
00 Stator inductance estimate no measure- Yes No -
ment
02 Rotor time constant estimate no measure- Yes No -
ment
03 Leakage inductance estimate no measure- Yes No -
ment
05 Determine Tr and Lsig evaluation in the time Yes No -
range
06 Activate vibration damping Yes No -
07 De-activate vibration detection Yes No -
11 De-activate pulse measurement Lq Ld Yes No -
12 De-activate rotor resistance Rr measure- Yes No -
ment
14 De-activate valve interlocking time mea- Yes No -
surement
15 Determine only stator resistance, valve volt- Yes No -
age fault, dead time
Note: The following applies to permanent-magnet synchronous motors:
Without de-selection in bit 11, in the closed-loop control mode, the direct inductance LD and the quadrature induc-
tance Lq are measured at a low current.
When de-selecting with bit 11 or in the U/f mode, the stator inductance is measured at half the rated motor current.
If the stator is inductance is not measured but is to be estimated, then bit 0 should be set and bit 11 should be de-
selected.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1910 Motor data identification selection / MotID selection


0 26 0
Description: Sets the motor data identification routine.
The motor data identification routine is carried out after the next power-on command.
p1910 = 1:
All motor data and the drive converter characteristics are identified and then transferred to the following parame-
ters:
p0350, p0354, p0356, p0357, p0358, p0360, p1825, p1828, p1829, p1830
After this, the control parameter p0340 = 3 is automatically calculated.
p1910 = 20:
Only for internal SIEMENS use.
Value: 0: Inhibited
1: Complete identification (ID) and acceptance of motor data
2: Complete identification (ID) of motor data without acceptance
20: Voltage vector input
21: Voltage vector input without filter
22: Rectangular voltage vector input without filter
23: Triangular voltage vector input without filter
24: Rectangular voltage vector input with filter
25: Triangular voltage vector input with filter
26: Enter voltage vector with DTC correction
Dependency: "Quick commissioning" must be carried out (p0010 = 1, p3900 > 0) before executing the motor data identification
routine!
When selecting the motor data identification routine, the drive data set changeover is suppressed.
Refer to: p1900
Caution: After the motor data identification (p1910 > 0) has been selected, alarm A07991 is output and a motor data identifi-
cation routine is carried out as follows at the next power-on command:
- current flows through the motor and a voltage is present at the drive converter output terminals.
- during the identification routine, the motor shaft can rotate through a maximum of half a revolution.
- however, no torque torque is generated.
Note: When setting p1910, the following should be observed:
1. "With acceptance" means:
The parameters specified in the description are overwritten with the identified values and therefore have an influ-
ence on the controller setting.
2. "Without acceptance" means:
The identified parameters are only displayed in the range r1912 ... r1926 (service parameters). The controller set-
tings remain unchanged.
p1911 Number of phases to be identified / Qty ph to ident


1 3 1
Description: Sets the number of phases to be identified.
Value: 1: 1 phase U
2: 2 phases U, V
3: 3 phases U, V, W
Note: When identifying with several phases, the accuracy increases and also the time it takes to make the measurement.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1912[0...2] Identified stator resistance / R_stator ident


- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays the identified stator resistance.
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1913[0...2] Identified rotor time constant / T_rotor ident


- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the identified rotor time constant.
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1914[0...2] Identified total leakage inductance / L_total_leak ident


- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the identified total leakage inductance.
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1915[0...2] Identified nominal stator inductance / L_stator ident


- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified.
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1916[0...2] Identified stator inductance 1 / L_stator 1 ident


- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 1st point of the saturation characteristic.
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W


- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 2nd point of the saturation characteristic.
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W


- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 3rd point of the saturation characteristic.
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W


- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 4th point of the saturation characteristic.
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1925[0...2] Identified threshold voltage / U_threshold ident


Description: Displays the identified IGBT threshold voltage.
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1926[0...2] Identified effective valve lockout time / t_lock_valve id


- [µs] - [µs] - [µs]
Description: Displays the identified effective valve lockout time.
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1927[0...2] Identified rotor resistance / R_rotor ident


- [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm]
Description: Displays identified rotor resistance (on separately excited synchronous motors: damping resistance).
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
p1959[0...n] Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config


- - 0001 1110 bin
Description: Sets the configuration of the rotating measurement.
01 Saturation characteristic identification Yes No -
02 Moment of inertia identification Yes No -
03 Re-calculates the speed controller parame- Yes No -
ters
04 Speed controller optimization (vibration test) Yes No -
Note: The following parameters are influenced for the individual optimization steps:
Bit 01: p0320, p0360, p0362 ... p0369
Bit 02: p0341, p0342
Bit 03: p1400.0, p1458, p1459, p1463, p1470, p1472, p1496
Bit 04: Dependent on p1960
p1960 = 1, 3: p1400.0, p1458, p1459, p1470, p1472, p1496

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1960 Rotating measurement selection / Rot meas sel


0 3 0
Description: Sets the rotating measurement.
The rotating measurement is carried out after the next power-on command.
The setting possibilities of the parameter depend on the open-loop/closed-loop control mode (p1300).
p1300 < 20 (U/f open-loop control):
It is not possible to select rotating measurement or speed controller optimization.
p1300 = 20, 22 (encoderless operation):
Only rotating measurement or speed controller optimization can be selected in the encoderless mode.
Value: 0: Inhibited
1: Rotating measurement in encoderless operation
3: Speed controller optimization in encoderless operation
Dependency: Before the rotating measurement is carried out, the motor data identification routine (p1900, p1910, r3925) should
have already been done.
When selecting the rotating measurement, the drive data set changeover is suppressed.
Refer to: p1300, p1900, p1959
Danger: For drives with a mechanical system that limits the distance moved, it must be ensured that this is not reached dur-
ing the rotating measurement. If this is not the case, then it is not permissible that the measurement is carried out.

Note: When the rotating measurement is activated, it is not possible to save the parameters (p0971).
Parameter changes are automatically made for the rotating measurement (e.g. p1120); this is the reason that up to
the end of the measurement, and if no faults are present, no manual changes should be made.
The ramp-up and ramp-down times (p1120, p1121) are limited, for the rotating measurement, to 900 s.
p1961 Saturation characteristic speed to determine / Sat_char n determ


26 [%] 75 [%] 40 [%]
Description: Sets the speed to determine the saturation characteristic.
The percentage value is referred to p0310 (rated motor frequency).
Refer to: F07983
Note: The saturation characteristics should be determined at an operating point with the lowest possible load.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p1965 Speed_ctrl_opt speed / n_opt speed


10 [%] 75 [%] 40 [%]
Description: Sets the speed for the identification of the moment of inertia and the vibration test.
Induction motor:
The percentage value is referred to p0310 (rated motor frequency).
Synchronous motor:
The percentage value is referred to the minimum from p0310 (rated motor frequency) and p1082 (maximum
speed).
Refer to: F07984, F07985
Note: In order to calculate the inertia, sudden speed changes are carried out - the specified value corresponds to the
lower speed setpoint. This value is increased by 20 % for the upper speed value. The q leakage inductance (refer to
p1959 bit 5) is determined at zero speed and at 50% of p1965 - however, with a maximum output frequency of 15
Hz and at a minimum of 10% of the rated motor speed.
p1967 Speed_ctrl_opt dynamic factor / n_opt dyn_factor


1 [%] 400 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the dynamic response factor for speed controller optimization.
Dependency: For power units with a reduced DC link capacitance (e.g., PM250), the dynamic response of the controller is set to
40%.
Refer to: p1959
Refer to: F07985
Note: For a rotating measurement, this parameter can be used to optimize the speed controller.
p1967 = 100 % --> speed controller optimization according to a symmetric optimum.
p1967 > 100 % --> optimization with a higher dynamic response (Kp higher, Tn lower).
r1968 Speed_ctrl_opt dynamic factor actual / n_opt dyn_fact act


- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the dynamic factor which is actually achieved for the vibration test
Refer to: F07985
Note: This dynamic factor only refers to the control mode of the speed controller set in p1960.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1969 Speed_ctrl_opt moment of inertia determined / n_opt M_inert det


- [kgm²] - [kgm²] - [kgm²]
Description: Displays the determined moment of inertia of the drive.
After it has been determined, the value is transferred to p0341, p0342.
Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg m^2
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb ft^2
Refer to: p0341, p0342, p1959
Refer to: F07984
r1970[0...1] Speed_ctrl_opt vibration test vibration frequency determined / n_opt f_vibration


- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Displays the vibration frequencies determined by the vibration test.
Index: [0] = Frequency low
[1] = Frequency high
Refer to: F07985
p1980[0...n] PolID technique / PolID technique


1 10 4
Description: Sets the pole position identification technique.
Value: 1: Voltage pulsing 1st harmonics
4: Voltage pulsing 2-stage
6: Voltage pulsing 2-stage inverse
10: DC current injection
Note: Voltage pulse technique (p1980 = 1, 4) cannot be applied to operation with sine-wave output filters (p0230).
r1984 PolID angular difference / PolID ang diff


- [°] - [°] - [°]
Description: Displays the angular difference between the actual electrical commutation angle and the angle determined by the
pole position identification.
Note: When the pole position identification routine is executed several times, the spread of the measured values can be
determined using this value. At the same position, the spread should be less than 2 degrees electrical.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r1985 PolID saturation curve / PolID sat_char


Description: Displays the saturation characteristic of the pole position identification routine (saturation technique).
Displays the current characteristic of the pole position identification routine (elasticity technique).
Note: PolID: Pole position identification
Regarding the saturation technique:
The values for the characteristic of the last saturation-based pole position identification routine are output every 1
ms in order to record signals (e.g. trace).
r1987 PolID trigger characteristic / PolID trig_char


- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the trigger characteristic of the pole position identification routine.
The values for the characteristic of the last pole position identification routine are output every 1 ms in order to
record signals (e.g. trace).
The values for trigger characteristic and saturation characteristic are always output in synchronism from a time per-
spective.
Note: PolID: Pole position identification
The following information and data can be taken from the trigger characteristic.
- the value -100% marks the angle at the start of the measurement.
- the value +100 % marks the commutation angle determined from the pole position identification routine.
p1999[0...n] Ang. commutation offset calibr. and PollD scaling / Com_ang_offs scal

10 [%] 5000 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the runtime of the pole position identification technique in which the current is injected.
Caution: For p1999 > 100 % (setting large moments of inertia) the following applies:
There is no locked rotor monitoring (F07970 fault value 2).
Note: For high moments of inertia, it is practical to scale the runtime of the calibration higher.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2000 Reference speed reference frequency / n_ref f_ref


6.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 1500.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for speed and frequency.
All speeds or frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) = reference speed (in ((rpm) / 60) x pole pair number).
Dependency: This parameter is only updated during the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) if motor commissioning was
carried out beforehand for drive data set zero. This means that the parameter is not locked against overwriting
using p0573 = 1.
Refer to: p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004, r3996
Notice: When the reference speed / reference frequency is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note: If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quanti-
ties are used as internal conversion factor.
Example 1:
The signal of an analog input (e.g. r0755[0]) is connected to a speed setpoint (e.g. p1070[0]). The actual percent-
age input value is cyclically converted into the absolute speed setpoint using the reference speed (p2000).
Example 2:
The setpoint from PROFIBUS (r2050[1]) is connected to a speed setpoint (e.g. p1070[0]). The actual input value is
cyclically converted into a percentage value via the pre-specified scaling 4000 hex. This percentage value is con-
verted to the absolute speed setpoint via reference speed (p2000).
p2001 Reference voltage / Reference voltage


10 [Vrms] 100000 [Vrms] 1000 [Vrms]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for voltages.
All voltages specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. This also applies for direct voltage val-
ues (= rms value) like the DC-link voltage.
Dependency: p2001 is only updated during automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) if motor commissioning has been carried
out first for drive data set zero and as a result overwriting of the parameter has not been blocked by setting p0573 =
1.
Refer to: r3996
Notice: When the reference voltage is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
For infeed units, the parameterized device supply voltage (p0210) is pre-assigned as the reference quantity.
Example:
The actual value of the DC link voltage (r0070) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual voltage
value is cyclically converted into a percentage of the reference voltage (p2001) and output according to the param-
eterized scaling.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2002 Reference current / I_ref


0.10 [Arms] 100000.00 [Arms] 100.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for currents.
All currents specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
using p0573 = 1.
Refer to: r3996
Notice: If various DDS are used with different motor data, then the reference quantities remain the same as these are not
changed over with the DDS. The resulting conversion factor must be taken into account.
Example:
p2002 = 100 A
Reference quantity 100 A corresponds to 100 %
p305[0] = 100 A
Rated motor current 100 A for MDS0 in DDS0 --> 100 % corresponds to 100 % of the rated motor current
p305[1] = 50 A
Rated motor current 50 A for MDS1 in DDS1 --> 100 % corresponds to 200 % of the rated motor current
When the reference current is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
For infeed units, the rated line current, which is obtained from the rated power and parameterized rated line supply
voltage (p2002 = r0206 / p0210 / 1.73) is pre-assigned as the reference quantity.
Example:
The actual value of a phase current (r0069[0]) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual current
value is cyclically converted into a percentage of the reference current (p2002) and output according to the param-
eterized scaling.
p2003 Reference torque / M_ref


0.01 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 1.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for torque.
All torques specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
using p0573 = 1.
Refer to: r3996
Notice: When the reference torque is changed, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Example:
The actual value of the total torque (r0079) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual torque is cycli-
cally converted into a percentage of the reference torque (p2003) and output according to the parameterized scal-
ing.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r2004 Reference power / P_ref


- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]
Description: Displays the reference quantity for power.
All power ratings specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
Dependency: This value is calculated as follows:
Infeed: Calculated from voltage times current.
Closed-loop control: Calculated from torque times speed.
Refer to: p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003
The reference power is calculated as follows:
- 2 * Pi * reference speed / 60 * reference torque (motor)
- reference voltage * reference current * root(3) (infeed)
p2005 Reference angle / Reference angle


90.00 [°] 180.00 [°] 90.00 [°]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for angle.
All angles specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
using p0573 = 1.
p2006 Reference temp / Ref temp


50.00 [°C] 300.00 [°C] 100.00 [°C]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for temperature.
All temperatures specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2007 Reference acceleration / a_ref


0.01 [rev/s²] 500000.00 [rev/s²] 0.01 [rev/s²]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for acceleration rates.
All acceleration rates specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
using p0573 = 1.
The reference acceleration is calculated as follows:
p2007 = p2000 / 1 [s]
p2010 Comm interface baud rate / Comm baud


4 12 12
Description: Sets the baud rate for the commissioning interface (USS, RS232).
Value: 4: 2400 baud
5: 4800 baud
6: 9600 baud
7: 19200 baud
8: 38400 baud
9: 57600 baud
10: 76800 baud
11: 93750 baud
12: 115200 baud
Note: Commissioning interface
p2011 Comm int address / Comm add


0 31 2
Description: Sets the address for the commissioning interface (USS, RS232).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2016[0...3] CI: Comm IF USS PZD send word / Comm USS send word
Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Integer16
Can be changed: U, T Scaling: 4000H Data set: -

- - 0
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) to be sent via the commissioning interface USS.
The actual values are displayed on an intelligent operator panel (IOP).
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
r2019[0...7] Comm int error statistics / Comm err


- - -
Description: Displays the receive errors at the commissioning interface (USS, RS232).
Index: [0] = Number of error-free telegrams
[1] = Number of rejected telegrams
[2] = Number of framing errors
[3] = Number of overrun errors
[4] = Number of parity errors
[5] = Number of starting character errors
[6] = Number of checksum errors
[7] = Number of length errors
p2020 Field bus interface baud rate / Field bus baud


4 13 8
Description: Sets the baud rate for the field bus interface (RS485).
Value: 4: 2400 baud
5: 4800 baud
6: 9600 baud
7: 19200 baud
8: 38400 baud
9: 57600 baud
10: 76800 baud
11: 93750 baud
12: 115200 baud
13: 187500 baud
this, set p0971 = 1 or p0014 = 1.
Note: Fieldbus SS: Fieldbus interface
Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is set to the factory setting when the protocol is reselected.
When p2030 = 1 (USS), the following applies:
Min./max./factory setting: 4/13/8
When p2030 = 2 (MODBUS), the following applies:

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2021 Field bus interface address / Field bus address


0 247 0
Description: Displays or sets the address for the fieldbus interface (RS485).
The address can be set as follows:
1) Using the address switch on the Control Unit.
--> p2021 displays the address setting.
2) Using p2021
--> Only if an address of 0 or an address which is invalid for the fieldbus selected in p2030 has been set using the
address switch.
--> The address is saved in a non-volatile fashion using the function "copy from RAM to ROM".
this, set p0971 = 1 or p0014 = 1.
Note: Changes only become effective after POWER ON.
The parameter is set to the factory setting when the protocol is reselected.
When p2030 = 1 (USS), the following applies:
When p2030 = 2 (MODBUS), the following applies:
p2022 Field bus int USS PZD no. / Field bus USS PZD

0 8 2
Description: Sets the number of 16-bit words in the PZD part of the USS telegram for the field bus interface.
p2023 Field bus int USS PKW no. / Field bus USS PKW

0 127 127
Description: Sets the number of 16-bit words in the PKW part of the USS telegram for the field bus interface.
Value: 0: PKW 0 words
3: PKW 3 words
4: PKW 4 words
127: PKW variable

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2024[0...2] Fieldbus interface times / Fieldbus times

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32
CU240E-2 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Data set: -

0 [ms] 10000 [ms] [0] 1000 [ms]
[1] 0 [ms]
[2] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the time values for the fieldbus interface.
The following applies for MODBUS:
p2024[0]: Maximum permissible telegram processing time of the MODBUS slave in which a reply is sent back to the
MODBUS master.
p2024[1]: Character delay time (time between individual characters in the telegram).
p2024[2]: Telegram pause time (pause time between two telegrams).
Index: [0] = Max. processing time
[1] = Character delay time
[2] = Telegram pause time
Note: Re p2024[1,2] (MODBUS):
If the field bus baud rate is changed (p2020), the default time settings are restored.
The default setting is the time required for 1.5 characters (p2024[1]) or 3.5 characters (p2024[2]) (depending on the
set baud rate).
r2029[0...7] Field bus int error statistics / Field bus error

CU240E-2 Can be changed: - Scaling: - Data set: -

- - -
Description: Displays the receive errors on the field bus interface (RS485).
Index: [0] = Number of error-free telegrams
[1] = Number of rejected telegrams
[2] = Number of framing errors
[3] = Number of overrun errors
[4] = Number of parity errors
[5] = Number of starting character errors
[6] = Number of checksum errors
[7] = Number of length errors
p2030 Field bus int protocol selection / Field bus protocol


0 2 0
Description: Sets the communication protocol for the field bus interface.
Value: 0: No protocol
1: USS
2: MODBUS

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2030 Field bus int protocol selection / Field bus protocol


0 3 3
Description: Sets the communication protocol for the field bus interface.
Value: 0: No protocol
3: PROFIBUS
r2032 Master control, control word effective / PcCtrl STW eff


- - -
Description: Displays the effective control word 1 (STW1) of the drive for the master control.
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No -
05 Start ramp-function generator Yes No -
Notice: The master control only influences control word 1 and speed setpoint 1. Other control words/setpoints can be trans-
ferred from another automation device.
p2037 PROFIdrive STW1.10 = 0 mode / PD STW1.10=0


0 2 0
Description: Sets the processing mode for PROFIdrive STW1.10 "master control by PLC".
Generally, control world 1 is received with the first receive word (PZD1) (this is in conformance to the PROFIdrive
profile). The behavior of STW1.10 = 0 corresponds to that of the PROFIdrive profile. For other applications that
deviate from this, the behavior can be adapted using this particular parameter.
Value: 0: Freeze setpoints and continue to process sign-of-life
1: Freeze setpoints and sign-of-life
2: Setpoints are not frozen
Note: If the STW1 is not transferred according to the PROFIdrive with PZD1 (with bit 10 "master control by PLC"), then
p2037 should be set to 2.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2038 PROFIdrive STW/ZSW interface mode / PD STW/ZSW IF mode


0 2 0
Description: Sets the interface mode of the PROFIdrive control words and status words.
When selecting a telegram via p0922 (p2079), this parameter influences the device-specific assignment of the bits
in the control and status words.
Value: 0: SINAMICS
2: VIK-NAMUR
Note: - For p0922 (p2079) = 1, 350 ... 999, p2038 is automatically set to 0.
- For p0922 (p2079) = 20, p2038 is automatically set to 2.
It is not then possible to change p2038.
p2039 Select debug monitor interface / Debug monit select


0 3 0
Description: The serial interface for the debug monitor is COM1 (commissioning interface, RS232) or COM2 (fieldbus interface,
RS485).
Value = 0: De-activated
Value = 1: COM1, commissioning protocol is de-activated
Value = 2: COM2, field bus is de-activated
Value = 3: Reserved
Note: Value = 2 is only possible for Control Units with RS485 as a field bus interface.
p2040 Fieldbus interface monitoring time / Fieldbus t_monit

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32

0 [ms] 1999999 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the monitoring time to monitor the process data received via the fieldbus interface.
If no process data is received within this time, an appropriate message is output.
Note: 0: The monitoring is de-activated.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2042 PROFIBUS Ident Number / PB Ident No.


0 1 0
Description: Sets the PROFIBUS Ident Number (PNO-ID).
SINAMICS can be operated with various identities on PROFIBUS. This allows the use of a PROFIBUS GSD that is
independent of the device (e.g. PROFIdrive VIK-NAMUR with Ident Number 3AA0 hex).
Value: 0: SINAMICS
1: VIK-NAMUR
Note: Every change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
r2043.0...2 BO: PROFIdrive PZD state / PD PZD state


- - -
Description: Displays the PROFIdrive PZD state.
00 Setpoint failure Yes No -
02 Fieldbus oper Yes No -
Note: When using the "setpoint failure" signal, the bus can be monitored and an application-specific response triggered
when the setpoint fails.
p2044 PROFIdrive fault delay / PD fault delay

CU240B-2 DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32

0 [s] 100 [s] 0 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time to initiate fault F01910 after a setpoint failure.
The time until the fault is initiated can be used by the application. This means that is is possible to respond to the
failure while the drive is still operational (e.g. emergency retraction).
Refer to: F01910
p2047 PROFIBUS additional monitoring time / PB suppl t_monit

CU240B-2 DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32

0 [ms] 20000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the additional monitoring time to monitor the process data received via PROFIBUS.
The additional monitoring time enables short bus faults to be compensated.
If no process data is received within this time, an appropriate message is output.
Note: For controller STOP, the additional monitoring time is not effective.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r2050[0...7] CO: PROFIBUS PZD receive word / PZD recv word

Can be changed: - Scaling: 4000H Data set: -

- - -
Description: Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with word format received from the fieldbus master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
p2051[0...7] CI: PROFIdrive PZD send word / PZD send word

CU240B-2 Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Integer16
CU240E-2 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: 4000H Data set: -

- - 0
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with word format to be sent to the fieldbus master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8

CU240B-2 DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Integer16
CU240E-2 DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: 4000H Data set: -

- - [0] 2089[0]
[1] 63[0]
[2...7] 0
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with word format to be sent to the fieldbus master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8

Parameters
List of Parameters
r2053[0...7] PROFIdrive diagnostics send PZD word / Diag send word


- - -
Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) with word format sent to the fieldbus master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -
r2054 PROFIBUS status / PB status


0 4 -
Description: Status display for the PROFIBUS interface.
Value: 0: OFF
1: No connection (search for baud rate)
2: Connection OK (baud rate found)
3: Cyclic connection with master (data exchange)
4: Cyclic data OK
r2055[0...2] PROFIBUS diagnostics standard / PB diag standard


- - -
Description: Diagnostics display for the PROFIBUS interface.
Index: [0] = Master bus address
[1] = Master input total length bytes
[2] = Master output total length bytes

Parameters
List of Parameters
r2074[0...7] PROFIdrive diagnostics bus address PZD receive / Diag addr recv

- - -
Description: Displays the PROFIBUS address of the sender from which the process data (PZD) is received.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
Note: Value range:
0 - 125: Bus address of the sender
255: Not assigned
r2075[0...7] PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / Diag offs recv

- - -
Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive receive telegram (controller output).
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
Note: Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
65535: not assigned
r2076[0...7] PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / Diag offs send

- - -
Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive send telegram (controller input).
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
Note: Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
65535: not assigned

Parameters
List of Parameters
r2077[0...15] PROFIBUS diagnostics peer-to-peer data transfer addresses / PB diag peer addr

- - -
Description: Displays the addresses of the slaves (peers) where peer-to-peer data transfer has been configured via PROFIBUS.
p2079 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended / PD PZD tel ext


1 999 1
Description: Sets the send and receive telegram.
Contrary to p0922, a telegram can be selected using p2079 and subsequently expanded.
For p0922 < 999 the following applies:
p2079 has the same value and is inhibited. All of the interconnections and extensions contained in the telegram are
inhibited.
p2079 can be freely set. If p2079 is also set to 999, then all of the interconnections can be set.
For p0922 = 999 and p2079 < 999 the following applies:
The interconnections contained in the telegram are inhibited. However, the telegram can be extended.
Value: 1: Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2
999: Free telegram configuration with BICO
p2080[0...15] BI: Binector-connector converter status word 1 / Bin/con ZSW1


- - 0
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller.
The individual bits are combined to form status word 1.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - [0] 899.0
[1] 899.1
[2] 899.2
[3] 2139.3
[4] 899.4
[5] 899.5
[6] 899.6
[7] 2139.7
[8] 2197.7
[9] 899.9
[10] 2199.1
[11] 1407.7
[12] 899.12
[13] 2135.14
[14] 2197.3
[15] 2135.15
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15


- - 0
The individual bits are combined to form free status word 3.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15


- - 0
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2088[0...4] Invert binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW inv


- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Setting to invert the individual binector inputs of the binector connector converter.
Index: [0] = Status word 1
[1] = Status word 2
[2] = Free status word 3
00 Bit 0 Inverted Not inverted -
p2088[0...4] Invert binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW inv


- - [0] 1010 1000 0000 0000 bin
[1...4] 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Setting to invert the individual binector inputs of the binector connector converter.
[1] = Status word 2

Parameters
List of Parameters
r2089[0...4] CO: Send binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW send

- - -
Description: Connector output to interconnect the status words to a PZD send word.
[1] = Status word 2
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -
Note: r2089 together with p2080 to p2084 forms five binector-connector converters.
r2090.0...15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD1 receive bit-serial / PZD1 recv bitw


- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD1 (normally control word 1) received from the PROFIdrive con-
troller.
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD2 received from the PROFIdrive controller.
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -


- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD3 received from the PROFIdrive controller.
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD4 (normally control word 2) received from the PROFIdrive con-
troller.
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -
r2094.0...15 BO: Connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp


- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial onward interconnection of a PZD word received from the PROFIdrive controller.
The PZD is selected via p2099[0].
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of a PZD word received from the PROFIdrive controller.
The PZD is selected via p2099[1].
00 Bit 0 ON OFF -
01 Bit 1 ON OFF -
02 Bit 2 ON OFF -
03 Bit 3 ON OFF -
04 Bit 4 ON OFF -
05 Bit 5 ON OFF -
06 Bit 6 ON OFF -
07 Bit 7 ON OFF -
08 Bit 8 ON OFF -
09 Bit 9 ON OFF -
10 Bit 10 ON OFF -
11 Bit 11 ON OFF -
12 Bit 12 ON OFF -
13 Bit 13 ON OFF -
14 Bit 14 ON OFF -
15 Bit 15 ON OFF -
p2098[0...1] Inverter connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp inv


- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
Description: Setting to invert the individual binector outputs of the connector-binector converter.
Using p2098[0], the signals of CI: p2099[0] are influenced.
Using p2098[1], the signals of CI: p2099[1] are influenced.
Dependency: Refer to: r2094, r2095, p2099

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2099[0...1] CI: Connector-binector converter signal source / Con/bin S_src

Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Integer16

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the connector-binector converter.
A PZD receive word can be selected as signal source. The signals are available to be serially passed-on (intercon-
nection).
Note: From the signal source set via the connector input, the corresponding lower 16 bits are converted.
p2099[0...1] together with r2094.0...15 and r2095.0...15 forms two connector-binector converters:
Connector input p2099[0] to binector output in r2094.0...15
Connector input p2099[1] to binector output in r2095.0...15
p2100[0...19] Setting the fault number for fault response / F_no F response

0 65535 0
Description: Selects the faults for which the fault response should be changed
Dependency: The fault is selected and the required response is set under the same index.
Refer to: p2101
Notice: For the following cases, it is not possible to re-parameterize the fault response to a fault:
- if there is no existing fault number.
- the message type is not "fault" (F).
- when a fault is present.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2101[0...19] Setting the fault response / Fault response


0 6 0
Description: Sets the fault response for the selected fault.
Value: 0: NONE
1: OFF1
2: OFF2
3: OFF3
5: STOP2
6: Internal armature short-circuit / DC braking
Dependency: The fault is selected and the required response is set under the same index.
Refer to: p2100
Notice: It is not possible to re-parameterize the response to a specific fault for faults that are already present (queued).
Note: The fault response can only be changed for faults with the appropriate identification.
Example:
F12345 and fault response = NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
--> The fault response NONE can be changed to OFF1 or OFF2.
Re value = 1 (OFF1):
Braking along the ramp-function generator down ramp followed by a pulse inhibit.
Internal/external pulse inhibit.
Braking along the OFF3 down ramp followed by a pulse inhibit.
Re value = 5 (STOP2):
n_set = 0
Re value = 6 (armature short-circuit, internal/DC braking):
This value can only be set for all drive data sets when p1231 = 4.
a) DC braking is not possible for synchronous motors.
b) DC braking is possible for induction motors.
p2103[0...n] BI: 1. Acknowledge faults / 1. Acknowledge

CU240E-2 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Data set: CDS, p0170

- - [0] 722.2
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the first signal source to acknowledge faults.
Note: A fault acknowledgement is triggered with a 0/1 signal.

Parameters
List of Parameters

CU240E-2 DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Data set: CDS, p0170

- - [0] 2090.7
[1] 722.2
[2] 2090.7
[3] 2090.7
Description: Sets the first signal source to acknowledge faults.

CU240E-2 Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Data set: CDS, p0170

- - 0
Description: Sets the second signal source to acknowledge faults.

CU240E-2 DP Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Data set: CDS, p0170

- - [0] 722.2
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
Description: Sets the second signal source to acknowledge faults.


- - 0
Description: Sets the third signal source to acknowledge faults.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2106[0...n] BI: External fault 1 / External fault 1


- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 1.
Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.


- - 1


- - 1
External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation:
- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Refer to: F07862
r2109[0...63] Fault time removed in milliseconds / t_flt resolved ms


- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the fault was removed.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r2110[0...63] Alarm number / Alarm number


- - -
Description: This parameter is identical to r2122.
p2111 Alarm counter / Alarm counter


0 65535 0
Description: Number of alarms that have occurred after the last reset.
Dependency: When p2111 is set to 0, the following is initiated:
- all of the alarms of the alarm buffer that have gone [0...7] are transferred into the alarm history [8...63].
- the alarm buffer [0...7] is deleted.
Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125
Note: The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON.
p2112[0...n] BI: External alarm 1 / External alarm 1


- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 1.
Dependency: Refer to: A07850
Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
r2114[0...1] System runtime total / Sys runtime tot


- - -
Description: Displays the total system runtime for the drive unit.
The time comprises r2114[0] (milliseconds) and r2114[1] (days).
After r2114[0] has reached a value of 86.400.000 ms (24 hours) this value is reset and r2114[1] is incremented.
Index: [0] = Milliseconds
[1] = Days
Dependency: Refer to: r0948, r2109, r2123, r2125, r2130, r2136, r2145, r2146
Note: When the electronic power supply is switched out, the counter values are saved.
After the drive unit is powered up, the counter continues to run with the last value that was saved.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 1


- - 1
p2118[0...19] Sets the message number for message type. / Msg_no Msg_type

0 65535 0
Description: Selects faults or alarms for which the message type should be changed.
Dependency: Selects the fault or alarm selection and sets the required type of message realized under the same index.
Refer to: p2119
Notice: It is not possible to re-parameterize the message type in the following cases:
- if there is no existing message number.
- if a message is present.
p2119[0...19] Setting the message type / Message type


1 3 1
Description: Sets the message type for the selected fault or alarm.
Value: 1: Fault (F)
2: Alarm (A)
3: No message (N)
Dependency: Selects the fault or alarm selection and sets the required type of message realized under the same index.
Refer to: p2118
Notice: It is not possible to re-parameterize the message type for the existing faults or alarms.
Note: The message type can only be changed for messages with the appropriate identification.
Example:
F12345(A) --> Fault F12345 can be changed to alarm A12345.
In this case, the message number that may be possibly entered in p2100[0...19] and p2126[0...19] is automatically
removed.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r2120 CO: Sum of fault and alarm buffer changes / Sum buffer changed

- - -
Description: Displays the sum of all of the fault and alarm buffer changes in the drive unit.
r2121 CO: Counter, alarm buffer changes / Alrm buff changed


- - -
Description: This counter is incremented every time the alarm buffer changes.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125
r2122[0...63] Alarm code / Alarm code


- - -
Description: Displays the number of alarms that have occurred.
Alarm buffer structure (general principle):
r2122[0], r2124[0], r2123[0], r2125[0] --> alarm 1 (the oldest)
...
r2122[7], r2124[7], r2123[7], r2125[7] --> Alarm 8 (the latest)
When the alarm buffer is full, the alarms that have gone are entered into the alarm history:
r2122[8], r2124[8], r2123[8], r2125[8] --> Alarm 1 (the latest)
...
r2122[63], r2124[63], r2123[63], r2125[63] --> alarm 56 (the oldest)
r2123[0...63] Alarm time received in milliseconds / t_alarm recv ms


- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the alarm occurred.
The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r2124[0...63] Alarm value / Alarm value


- - -
Description: Displays additional information about the active alarm (as integer number).
r2125[0...63] Alarm time removed in milliseconds / t_alarm res ms


- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the alarm was cleared.
p2126[0...19] Setting fault number for acknowledge mode / Fault_no ackn_mode


0 65535 0
Description: Selects the faults for which the acknowledge mode is to be changed
Dependency: Selects the faults and sets the required acknowledge mode realized under the same index
Refer to: p2127
Notice: It is not possible to re-parameterize the acknowledge mode of a fault in the following cases:

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2127[0...19] Sets acknowledgement mode / Acknowledge mode


1 2 1
Description: Sets the acknowledge mode for selected fault.
Value: 1: Acknowledgment only using POWER ON
2: Ack IMMEDIATELY after the fault cause has been removed
Dependency: Selects the faults and sets the required acknowledge mode realized under the same index
Refer to: p2126
Notice: It is not possible to re-parameterize the acknowledge mode of a fault in the following cases:
Note: The acknowledge mode can only be changed for faults with the appropriate identification.
Example:
F12345 and acknowledge mode = IMMEDIATE (POWER ON)
--> The acknowledge mode can be changed from IMMEDIATELY to POWER ON.
p2128[0...15] Selecting fault/alarm code for trigger / Message trigger


0 65535 0
Description: Selects faults or alarms which can be used as trigger.
r2129.0...15 CO/BO: Trigger word for faults and alarms / Trigger word

- - -
Description: Trigger signal for the selected faults and alarms
00 Trigger signal p2128[0] ON OFF -
Dependency: If one of the faults or alarms selected in p2128[n] occurs, then the particular bit of this binector output is set.
Refer to: p2128
Note: CO: r2129 = 0 --> None of the selected messages has occurred.
CO: r2129 > 0 --> At least one of the selected messages has occurred.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r2130[0...63] Fault time received in days / t_fault recv days


- - -
Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the fault occurred.
The value displayed in p2130 refers to 01.01.1970.
r2131 CO: Actual fault code / Actual fault code


- - -
Description: Displays the code of the oldest active fault.
Note: 0: No fault present.
r2132 CO: Actual alarm code / Actual alarm code


- - -
Description: Displays the code of the last alarm that occurred.
Note: 0: No alarm present.
r2133[0...63] Fault value for float values / Fault val float


- - -
Description: Displays additional information about the fault that occurred for float values.
r2134[0...63] Alarm value for float values / Alarm value float


- - -
Description: Displays additional information about the active alarm for float values.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r2135.12...15 CO/BO: Status word faults/alarms 2 / ZSW fault/alarm 2


- - -
Description: Displays the second status word of faults and alarms.
12 Fault motor overtemperature Yes No -
13 Fault power unit thermal overload Yes No -
14 Alarm motor overtemperature Yes No -
15 Alarm power unit thermal overload Yes No -
r2136[0...63] Fault time removed in days / t_flt resolv. days


- - -
Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the fault was removed.
r2138.7...15 CO/BO: Control word faults/alarms / STW fault/alarm


- - -
Description: Displays the control word of the faults and alarms.
10 External alarm 1 (A07850) effective Yes No -
13 External fault 1 (F07860) effective Yes No -
Dependency: Refer to: p2103, p2104, p2105, p2106, p2107, p2108, p2112, p2116, p2117, p3110, p3111, p3112

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - -
Description: Displays the first status word of faults and alarms.
00 Being acknowledged Yes No -
01 Acknowledgment required Yes No -
03 Fault present Yes No -
06 Internal message 1 present Yes No -
07 Alarm present Yes No -
08 Internal message 2 present Yes No -
11 Alarm class bit 0 High Low -
12 Alarm class bit 1 High Low -
Note: Re bit 03, 07:
These bits are set if at least one fault/alarm occurs. Data is entered into the fault/alarm buffer with delay. This is the
reason that the fault/alarm buffer should only be read if, after "fault present"/"alarm present" has occurred, a change
in the buffer was also detected (r0944, r9744, r2121).
Re bit 06, 08:
These status bits are used for internal diagnostic purposes only.
Re bit 11, 12:
These status bits are used for the classification of internal alarm classes and are intended for diagnostic purposes
only on certain automation systems with integrated SINAMICS functionality.
p2140[0...n] Hysteresis speed 2 / n_hysteresis 2


0.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm] 90.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the following signals:
"|n_act| < = speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.1)
"|n_act| > speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.2)
p2141[0...n] Speed threshold 1 / n_thresh val 1


0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 5.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the signal "f or n comparison value reached or exceeded" (BO: r2199.1).

Parameters
List of Parameters


0.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm] 2.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the signal "f or n / v comparison value reached or exceeded" (BO:
r2199.1).
p2144[0...n] BI: Motor stall monitoring enable (negated) / Mot stall enab neg

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the negated enable (0 = enable) of the motor stall monitoring.
Refer to: F07900
Note: If the enable signal is connected to r2197.7 then the stall signal is suppressed if there is no speed setpoint - actual
value deviation.
r2145[0...63] Alarm time received in days / t_alarm recv days


- - -
Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the alarm occurred.
r2146[0...63] Alarm time removed in days / t_alarm res days


- - -
Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the alarm was cleared.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2148[0...n] BI: RFG active / RFG active

Access level: 3 Calculated: p0340 = 1,3,5 Data type: U32 / Binary

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the signal "ramp-function generator active" for the following signals/messages:
"Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_on" (BO: r2199.4)
"Ramp-up/ramp-down completed" (BO: r2199.5)
Note: The binector input is automatically interconnected to r1199.2 as a default setting.
p2149[0...n] Monitoring configuration / Monit config


- - 1001 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for messages and monitoring functions.
00 Enable alarm A07903 Yes No 8010
01 Load monitoring only in the 1st quadrant Yes No 8013
03 n_act > p2155 own hysteresis Yes No 8010
Refer to: A07903
Note: Re bit 00:
Alarm A07903 is output when the bit is set with r2197.7 = 0 (n_set <> n_act).
Re bit 01:
When the bit is set, load monitoring is only carried out in the 1st quadrant as a result of the positive characteristic
parameters (p2182 ... p2190).
Re bit 03:
When the bit is set, r2197 bit 1 and bit 2 are determined via separate hystereses.


0.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm] 2.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the following signals:
"|n_act| < speed threshold value 3" (BO: r2199.0)
"n_set >= 0" (BO: r2198.5)
"n_act >= 0" (BO: r2197.3)

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2151[0...n] CI: Speed setpoint for messages/signals / n_set for msg


- - 1170[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed setpoint for the following messages:
"Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off" (BO: r2197.7)
"Ramp-up/ramp-down completed" (BO: r2199.5)
"|n_set| < p2161" (BO: r2198.4)
"n_set > 0" (BO: r2198.5)
Dependency: Refer to: r2197, r2198, r2199
p2152[0...n] Delay for comparison n > n_max / Del n > n_max


0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 200 [ms]
Description: Delay time for the comparison of the speed with the maximum speed.
Dependency: Refer to: p1082, r1084, r1087, p2162
p2153[0...n] Speed actual value filter time constant / n_act_filt T


0 [ms] 1000000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the time constant of the PT1 element to smooth the speed / velocity actual value.
The smoothed actual speed/velocity is compared with the threshold values and is only used for messages and sig-
nals.


0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 900.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the following messages:

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2156[0...n] On delay, comparison value reached / t_on cmpr val rchd


0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the switch-in delay time for the signal "comparison value reached" (BO: r2199.1).


0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 900.00 [rpm]
p2158[0...n] Delay for n_act comparison with speed threshold value 5 / Del compar n_5

0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Delay time for the comparison of the speed with the speed threshold value 5 (P2157).


0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 900.00 [rpm]

0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for the comparison of the speed with the speed threshold value 6 (p2159).

Parameters
List of Parameters


0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 5.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the signal "|n_act| < speed threshold value 3" (BO: r2199.0).
p2162[0...n] Hysteresis speed n_act > n_max / Hyst n_act>n_max


0.00 [rpm] 60000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the signal "n_act > n_max" (BO: r2197.6).
Notice: For p0322 = 0, the following applies: p2162 <= 0.1 * p0311
For p0322 > 0, the following applies: p2162 <= 1.02 * p0322 - p1082
If one of the conditions is violated, p2162 is appropriately and automatically reduced when exiting the commission-
ing mode.
Note: For a negative speed limit (r1087) the hysteresis is effective below the limit value and for a positive speed limit
(r1084) above the limit value.
If significant overshoot occurs in the maximum speed range (e.g. due to load shedding), you are advised to
increase the dynamic response of the speed controller (if possible). If this is insufficient, the hysteresis p2162 can
only be increased by more than 10% of the rated speed when the maximum speed (p0322) of the motor is suffi-
ciently greater than the speed limit p1082.


0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 90.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" signal/message
(BO: r2197.7).


0.00 [rpm] 200.00 [rpm] 2.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" signal/mes-
sage (BO: r2197.7).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2166[0...n] Off delay n_act = n_set / t_del_off n_i=n_so


0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 200.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the switch-off delay time for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" signal/message
(BO: r2197.7).
p2167[0...n] Switch-on delay n_act = n_set / t_on n_act=n_set


0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 200.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the switch-on delay for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_on" signal/message (BO:
r2199.4).
r2169 CO: Actual speed smoothed signals / n_act smth message


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the smoothed actual speed for messages/signals.
p2170[0...n] Current threshold value / I_thres


0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the absolute current threshold for the messages.
"I_act >= I_threshold p2170" (BO: r2197.8)
"I_act < I_threshold p2170" (BO: r2198.8)
p2171[0...n] Current threshold value reached delay time / t_del I_thresh rch

0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for the comparison of the current actual value (r0068) with the current threshold value (p2170).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2172[0...n] DC link voltage, threshold value / Vdc thresh val


0 [V] 2000 [V] 800 [V]
Description: Sets the DC link voltage threshold value for the following messages:
"Vdc_act <= Vdc_threshold p2172" (BO: r2197.9)
"Vdc_act > Vdc_threshold p2172" (BO: r2197.10)
p2173[0...n] DC link voltage comparison delay time / t_del Vdc


0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 10 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for the comparison of the DC link voltage r0070 with the threshold value p2172.
p2174[0...n] Torque threshold value 1 / M_thresh val 1


0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 5.13 [Nm]
Description: Sets the torque threshold value for the messages:
"Torque setpoint < torque threshold value 1 and n_set reached" (BO: r2198.9)
"Torque setpoint < torque threshold value 1" (BO: r2198.10)
"Torque setpoint > torque threshold value 1" (BO: r2198.13)
p2175[0...n] Motor locked speed threshold / Mot lock n_thresh


0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 120.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed threshold for the message "Motor locked" (BO: r2198.6).
Note: The following applies for sensorless vector control:
At low speeds in open-loop speed controlled operation (see p1755, p1756), a locked motor cannot be detected.
p2176[0...n] Torque threshold value comparison delay time / M_thrsh comp T_del

0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 200 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for the comparison of the torque actual value (r0080) with torque threshold value 1 (p2174).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2177[0...n] Motor locked delay time / Mot lock t_del


0.000 [s] 65.000 [s] 3.000 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time for the message "Motor locked" (BO: r2198.6).
Note: The following applies for sensorless vector control:
At low speeds a locked motor can only be detected if no change is made to open-loop speed controlled operation. If
this is the case, the value in p2177 must be reduced accordingly before time p2177 has elapsed in order to detect
the locked state reliably.
p2178[0...n] Motor stalled delay time / Mot stall t_del


0.000 [s] 10.000 [s] 0.010 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time for the message "Motor stalled" (BO: r2198.7).
Note: In the open-loop speed controlled operating range (see p1755, p1756), vector control stall monitoring depends on
threshold p1745.
At higher speeds, the difference between flux setpoint r0083 and flux actual value r0084 is monitored.
p2179[0...n] Output load identification current limit / Outp_ld iden I_lim


0.00 [Arms] 1000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms]
Description: Sets the current limit for output load identification.
Notice: For synchronous motors the output current can be almost zero under no load conditions.
Note: A missing output load condition exists if the motor is either not connected or a phase has failed.
p2180[0...n] Missing output load delay time / No load t_delay


0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 2000 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time to detect a missing output load.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2181[0...n] Load monitoring response / Load monit resp


0 6 0
Description: Sets the response when evaluating the load monitoring.
Value: 0: Load monitoring disabled
1: A07920 for torque/speed too low
2: A07921 for torque/speed too high
3: A07922 for torque/speed out of tolerance
4: F07923 for torque/speed too low
5: F07924 for torque/speed too high
6: F07925 for torque/speed out of tolerance
Dependency: Refer to: p2182, p2183, p2184, p2185, p2186, p2187, p2188, p2189, p2190, p2192, p2193, r2198, p3230, p3231
Refer to: A07920, A07921, A07922, F07923, F07924, F07925
Note: The response to the faults F07923 ... F07925 can be set. F07926 is evaluated only if p2181 is not zero.
This parameter setting has no effect on the production of fault F07936.
p2182[0...n] Load monitoring speed threshold value 1 / n_thresh 1


0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 150.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.
The envelope curve (upper and lower envelope curve) is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds:
p2182 (n_threshold 1) --> p2185 (M_threshold 1, upper), p2186 (M_threshold 1, lower)
Dependency: The following applies: p2182 < p2183 < p2184
Refer to: p2183, p2184, p2185, p2186


0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 900.00 [rpm]
Refer to: p2182, p2184, p2187, p2188

Parameters
List of Parameters


0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 1500.00 [rpm]
Refer to: p2182, p2183, p2189, p2190
p2185[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 1, upper / M_thresh 1 upper


0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 10000000.00 [Nm]
Dependency: The following applies: p2185 > p2186
Note: The upper envelope curve is defined by p2185, p2187 and p2189.
p2186[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 1, lower / M_thresh 1 lower


0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Dependency: The following applies: p2186 < p2185
Note: The lower envelope curve is defined by p2186, p2188 and p2190.


0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 10000000.00 [Nm]

Parameters
List of Parameters


0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]


0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 10000000.00 [Nm]


0.00 [Nm] 20000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
p2192[0...n] Load monitoring delay time / Load monit t_del


0.00 [s] 65.00 [s] 10.00 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time to evaluate the load monitoring.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2193[0...n] Load monitoring configuration / Load monit config


0 3 1
Description: Sets the load monitoring configuration.
Value: 0: Monitoring switched out
1: Monitoring torque and load drop
2: Monitoring speed and load drop
3: Monitoring load drop
Dependency: Refer to: p2182, p2183, p2184, p2185, p2186, p2187, p2188, p2189, p2190, p2192, r2198, p3230, p3231, p3232
Refer to: A07920, A07921, A07922, F07923, F07924, F07925, F07936


0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 90.00 [%]
Description: Sets the torque threshold value for the message "Torque utilization < torque threshold value 2" (BO: r2199.11).
The message "torque setpoint < p2174" (BO: r2198.10) and "torque utilization < p2194" (BO: r2199.11) are only
evaluated after the run-up and the delay time has expired.
p2195[0...n] Torque utilization switch-off delay / M_util t_off


0.0 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 800.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the switch-off delay time for the negated signal "run-up completed".
The message "torque setpoint < p2174" (BO: r2198.10) and "torque utilization < p2194" (BO: r2199.11) are only
evaluated after the run-up and the delay time has expired.
p2196[0...n] Torque utilization scaling / M_util scal

Can be changed: C(1, 3), U, T Scaling: - Data set: DDS, p0180

0.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling factor for torque utilization (r0033).

Parameters
List of Parameters
r2197.0...13 CO/BO: Status word monitoring 1 / ZSW monitor 1


- - -
Description: Displays the first status word for monitoring functions.
00 |n_act| <= n_min p1080 Yes No 8020
01 -
02 -
03 n_act >= 0 Yes No 8011
04 |n_act| >= n_set Yes No 8020
05 |n_act| <= n_standstill p1226 Yes No 8020
06 |n_act| > n_max Yes No 8010
07 Speed setp - act val deviation in tolerance Yes No 8011
t_off
08 I_act >= I_threshold value p2170 Yes No 8020
09 Vdc_act <= Vdc_threshold value p2172 Yes No 8020
10 Vdc_act > Vdc_threshold value p2172 Yes No 8020
11 Output load is not present Yes No 8020
12 |n_act| > n_max (delayed) Yes No 8021
13 |n_act| > n_max error Yes No -
Notice: Re bit 06:
When the overspeed is reached, this bit is set and F07901 output immediately following this. The bit is canceled
again as soon as the next pulse inhibit is present.
Note: Re bit 00:
The threshold value is set in p1080 and the hysteresis in p2150.
Re bit 01, 02:
The threshold value is set in p2155 and the hysteresis in p2140.
Re bit 03:
1 signal direction of rotation positive.
0 signal: direction of rotation negative.
The hysteresis is set in p2150.
Re bit 04:
The threshold value is set in r1119 and the hysteresis in p2150.
Re bit 05:
The threshold value is set in p1266 and the delay time in p1228.
Re bit 06:
The hysteresis is set in p2162.
Re bit 07:
The threshold value is set in p2163 and the hysteresis is set in p2164.
Re bit 08:
Re bit 09, 10:
Re bit 11:
Re bit 12:
The threshold value is set in p2182, the hysteresis in p2162, and the delay time (for canceling the signal) in p2152.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - -
Description: Displays the second status word for monitoring functions.
00 |n_act| <= speed threshold value 5 Yes No 8021
01 |n_act| > speed threshold value 5 Yes No 8021
02 |n_act| <= speed threshold value 6 Yes No 8021
03 |n_act| > speed threshold value 6 Yes No 8021
04 |n_set| < p2161 Yes No 8011
05 n_set > 0 Yes No 8011
06 Motor blocked Yes No 8012
07 Motor stalled Yes No 8012
08 |I_act| < I_threshold value p2170 Yes No 8020
09 |M_act| > torque threshold value 1 and Yes No 8021
n_set reached
10 |M_set| < torque threshold value 1 Yes No 8012
11 Load monitoring signals an alarm Yes No 8013
12 Load monitoring signals a fault condition Yes No 8013
13 |M_act| > torque threshold value 1 Yes No 8021
Note: Re bit 10:
The torque threshold value 1 is set in p2174.
Re bit 12:
This bit is reset after the fault cause disappears, even if the fault itself is still present.


- - -
Description: Displays the third status word for monitoring functions.
00 |n_act| < speed threshold value 3 Yes No 8010
01 f or n comparison value reached or Yes No 8010
exceeded
04 Speed setp - act val deviation in tolerance Yes No 8011
t_on
05 Ramp-up/ramp-down completed Yes No 8011
11 Torque utilization < torque threshold value 2 Yes No 8012
Note: Re bit 00:
The speed threshold value 3 is set in p2161.
Re bit 01:
The comparison value is set in p2141. We recommend setting the hysteresis (p2142) for canceling the bit to a value
lower than that in p2141. Otherwise, the bit will never be reset.
Re bit 11:
The torque threshold value 2 is set in p2194.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2200[0...n] BI: Technology controller enable / Tec_ctrl enable


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to switch in/switch out the technology controller.
The technology controller is switched in with a 1 signal.
p2201[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 1 / Tec_ctr fix val 1


-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 10.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 1 of the technology controller.


-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 20.00 [%]


-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 30.00 [%]


-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 40.00 [%]

Parameters
List of Parameters


-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 50.00 [%]


-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 60.00 [%]


-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 70.00 [%]


-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 80.00 [%]


-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 90.00 [%]

Parameters
List of Parameters


-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]


-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 110.00 [%]


-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 120.00 [%]


-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 130.00 [%]


-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 140.00 [%]

Parameters
List of Parameters


-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 150.00 [%]
p2216[0...n] Technology controller fixed value selection method / Tec_ctr FixVal sel

1 2 1
Description: Selects the method that can be used to select the fixed setpoints.
Value: 1: Fixed value selection direct
2: Fixed value selection binary
p2220[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 0 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 0

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the fixed value of the technology controller.

- - 0

- - 0

Parameters
List of Parameters

- - 0
r2224 CO: Technology controller, fixed value effective / Tec_ctr FixVal eff

- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the selected and effective fixed value of the technology controller.
r2225.0 CO/BO: Technology controller fixed value selection status word / Tec_ctr FixVal ZSW

- - -
Description: Displays the status word for the fixed value selection of the technology controller.
00 Technology controller fixed value selected Yes No 7950,
7951
r2229 Technology controller number actual / Tec_ctrl No. act


- - -
Description: Displays the number of the selected fixed setpoint of the technology controller.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2230[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer configuration / Tec_ctr mop config


- - 0000 0100 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
00 Data save active Yes No -
02 Initial rounding-off active Yes No -
03 Non-volatile data save active for p2230.0 = Yes No -
1
04 Ramp-function generator always active Yes No -
Note: Re bit 00:
0: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p2240.
1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved and after ON is entered using r2231. In order to save in a
non-volatile fashion, bit 03 should be set to 1.
Re bit 02:
0: Without initial rounding-off
1: With initial rounding-off.
The selected ramp-up/down time is correspondingly exceeded. The initial rounding-off is a sensitive way of specify-
ing small changes (progressive reaction when keys are pressed). The jerk for initial rounding is independent of the
ramp-up time and only depends on the selected maximum value (p2237).
It is calculated as follows:
r = 0.0001 x max(p2237, |p2238| ) [%] / 0.13^2 [s^2]
The jerk is effective until the maximum acceleration is reached (a_max = p2237 [%] / p2247 [s] or a_max = p2238
[%] / p2248 [s]), after which the drive continues to run linearly with constant acceleration. The higher the maximum
acceleration (the lower that p2247 is), the longer the ramp-up time increases with respect to the set ramp-up time.
Re bit 03:
0: Non-volatile data save de-activated.
1. The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a non-volatile fashion (for p2230.0 = 1).
Re bit 04:
When the bit is set, the ramp-function generator is computed independent of the pulse enable. The actual output
value of the motorized potentiometer is always in r2250.
r2231 Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint memory / Tec_ctrl mop mem

- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the setpoint memory for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
For p2230.0 = 1, the last setpoint that was saved is entered after ON.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2235[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer raise setpoint / Tec_ctrl mop raise

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to continually increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer of the technology control-
ler.
p2236[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer lower setpoint /

Tec_ctrl mop lower

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to continually reduce the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer of the technology control-
ler.
p2237[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum value / Tec_ctrl mop max

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the maximum value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
p2238[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum value / Tec_ctrl mop min

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] -100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the minimum value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
p2240[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer starting value / Tec_ctrl mop start

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the starting value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
For p2230.0 = 0, this setpoint is entered after ON.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r2245 CO: Technology controller mot. potentiometer setpoint before RFG /

Tec_ctr mop befRFG

- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Sets the effective setpoint in front of the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator of the technology
controller.
p2247[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Tec_ctr mop t_r-up

0.0 [s] 1000.0 [s] 10.0 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-up time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the technology
controller.
Note: The time is referred to 100 %.
When the initial rounding-off is activated (p2230.2 = 1) the ramp-up is correspondingly extended.
p2248[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-down time /

Tec_ctrMop t_rdown

0.0 [s] 1000.0 [s] 10.0 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the technology
controller.
Note: The time is referred to 100 %.
When the initial rounding-off is activated (p2230.2 = 1) the ramp-down is correspondingly extended.
r2250 CO: Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint after RFG /

Tec_ctr mop aftRFG

- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the effective setpoint after the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the
technology controller.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2251 Technology controller mode / Tec_ctrl mode


0 1 0
Description: Sets the mode for using the technology controller output.
Value: 0: Technology controller as main speed setpoint
1: Technology controller as supplementary speed setpoint
Dependency: p2251 = 0, 1 is only effective if the enable signal of the technology controller is interconnected (p2200 > 0).
p2253[0...n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 1 / Tec_ctrl setp 1

Can be changed: U, T Scaling: PERCENT Data set: CDS, p0170

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint 1 of the technology controller.


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint 2 of the technology controller.
p2255 Technology controller setpoint 1 scaling / Tec_ctrl set1 scal


0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the setpoint 1 of the technology controller.
p2256 Technology controller setpoint 2 scaling / Tec_ctrl set2 scal


0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the setpoint 2 of the technology controller.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2257 Technology controller, ramp-up time / Tec_ctrl t_ramp-up


0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-up time of the technology controller.
Note: The ramp-up time is referred to 100 %.
p2258 Technology controller ramp-down time / Tec_ctrl t_ramp-dn


0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time of the technology controller.
Note: The ramp-down time is referred to 100 %.
r2260 CO: Technology controller setpoint after ramp-function generator /

Tec_ctr set aftRFG

- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Sets the setpoint after the ramp-function generator of the technology controller.
p2261 Technology controller setpoint filter time constant / Tec_ctrl set T


0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the time constant for the setpoint filter (PT1) of the technology controller.
r2262 CO: Technology controller setpoint after filter / Tec_ctr set aftFlt

- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the smoothed setpoint after the setpoint filter (PT1) of the technology controller.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2263 Technology controller type / Tec_ctrl type


0 1 0
Description: Sets the technology controller type.
Value: 0: D component in the actual value signal
1: D component in the fault signal
p2264[0...n] CI: Technology controller actual value / Tec_ctrl act val


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the actual value of the technology controller.
p2265 Technology controller actual value filter time constant / Tec_ctrl act T

0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the time constant for the actual value filter (PT1) of the technology controller.
r2266 CO: Technology controller actual value after filter / Tec_ctr act aftFlt

- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value after the filter (PT1) of the technology controller
p2267 Technology controller upper limit actual value / Tec_ctrl u_lim act

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the upper limit for the actual value signal of the technology controller.
Refer to: F07426
Notice: If the actual value exceeds this upper limit, this results in fault F07426.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2268 Technology controller lower limit actual value / Tec_ctrl l_lim act

-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] -100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the lower limit for the actual value signal of the technology controller.
Refer to: F07426
Notice: If the actual value falls below this lower limit, this results in fault F07426.
p2269 Technology controller gain actual value / Tech_ctrl gain act


0.00 [%] 500.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Scaling factor for the actual value of the technology controller.
Note: For 100%, the actual value is not changed.
p2270 Technology controller actual value function / Tec_ctr ActVal fct


0 3 0
Description: Setting to use an arithmetic function for the actual value signal of the technology controller.
Value: 0: No function
1: Root function (root from x)
2: Square function (x * x)
3: Cube function (x * x * x)
p2271 Technology controller actual value inversion (sensor type) / Tech_ctrl act inv

0 1 0
Description: Setting to invert the actual value signal of the technology controller.
The inversion depends on the sensor type for the actual value signal.
Value: 0: No inversion
1: Inversion actual value signal
Caution: If the actual value inversion is incorrectly selected, then the closed-loop control with the technology controller can
become unstable and can oscillate!
Note: The correct setting can be determined as follows:

- inhibit the technology controller (p2200 = 0).
- increase the motor speed and in so doing, measure the actual value signal of the technology controller.
--> If the actual value increases as the motor speed increases, then p2271 should be set to 0 (no inversion).
--> If the actual value decreases as the motor speed increases, then p2271 should be set to 1 (the actual value sig-
nal is inverted).

Parameters
List of Parameters
r2272 CO: Technology controller actual value scaled / Tech_ctrl act scal

- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the scaled actual value signal of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2264, p2265, r2266, p2267, p2268, p2269, p2270, p2271
r2273 CO: Technology controller error / Tec_ctrl error


- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the error (system deviation) between the setpoint and actual value of the technology controller.
p2274 Technology controller differentiation, time constant / Tec_ctrl D comp T


0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the time constant for the differentiation (D component) of the technology controller.
Note: p2274 = 0: Differentiation is disabled.
p2280 Technology controller proportional gain / Tec_ctrl Kp


0.000 1000.000 1.000
Description: Sets the proportional gain (P component) of the technology controller.
Note: p2280 = 0: The proportional gain is disabled.
p2285 Technology controller integral time / Tec_ctrl Tn


0.000 [s] 10000.000 [s] 30.000 [s]
Description: Sets the integral time (I component, integrating time constant) of the technology controller.
Notice: The following applies for p2251 = 0:
If the output of the technology controller lies within the range of a suppression (skip) bandwidth (p1091 ... p1094,
p1101) or below the minimum speed (p1080), the integral component of the controller is held so that the controller
temporarily works as a P controller. This is necessary in order to prevent the controller from behaving in an unstable
manner, as the ramp-function generator switches to the parameterized up and down ramps (p1120, p1121) at the
same time in order to avoid setpoint steps. This state can be exited or avoided by changing the controller setpoint or
by using the start speed (= minimum speed).
Note: When the controller output reaches the limit, the I component of the controller is held.
p2285 = 0:
The integral time is disabled and the I component of the controller is reset.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2286[0...n] BI: Hold technology controller integrator / Tec_ctr integ stop


- - 56.13
Description: Sets the signal source to hold the integrator for the technology controller.
p2289[0...n] CI: Technology controller pre-control signal / Tec_ctrl prectrl


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the pre-control signal of the technology controller.
p2291 CO: Technology controller maximum limiting / Tec_ctrl max_limit


-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the maximum limit of the technology controller.
Caution: The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p2291 > p2292).
p2292 CO: Technology controller minimum limiting / Tec_ctrl min_lim


-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the minimum limit of the technology controller.
Caution: The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p2291 > p2292).
p2293 Technology controller ramp-up/ramp-down time / Tec_ctr ramp up/dn


0.00 [s] 100.00 [s] 1.00 [s]
Description: Sets the ramping time for the output signal of the technology controller.
Note: The time refers to the set maximum and minimum limits (p2291, p2292).

Parameters
List of Parameters
r2294 CO: Technology controller output signal / Tec_ctrl outp_sig


- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the output signal of the technology controller.
p2295 CO: Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctrl outp scal


-100.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the output signal of the technology controller.
p2296[0...n] CI: Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctrl outp scal


- - 2295[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling value of the technology controller.
p2297[0...n] CI: Technology controller maximum limit signal source / Tec_ctrl m_lm s_sc

- - 1084[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the maximum limiting of the technology controller.
Note: In order that the output of the technology controller does not exceed the maximum speed limit, its upper limit p2297
should be connected to the actual maximum speed r1084.
In mode p2251 = 1, p2299 must also be connected to the output of the ramp-function generator r1150.
p2298[0...n] CI: Technology controller minimum limit signal source / Tec_ctrl min_l s_s

- - 1087[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the minimum limiting of the technology controller.
Note: If the technology controller is rotated in a negative direction in mode p2251 = 0, its lower limit p2298 should be con-
nected to the actual minimum speed r1087.
In mode p2251 = 1, p2299 must also be connected to the output of the ramp-function generator r1150.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p2299[0...n] CI: Technology controller limit offset / Tech_ctrl lim offs


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the offset of the output limiting of the technology controller.
Note: In mode p2251 = 1, p2299 must be connected to the output of ramp-function generator r1150 so that the technol-
ogy controller stops when the speed limits are reached (see also p2297, p2298).
p2302 Technology controller output signal starting value / Tec_ctr start val

0.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the start value for the output of the technology controller.
When the technology controller is enabled (refer to p2200 and r0056.3) then its output signal (r2294) starts to run
from this starting value.
Dependency: The starting value is only effective in the mode "technology controller as main speed setpoint" (p2251 = 0).
Note: If the technology controller operates on the speed/setpoint channel (p2251 = 0), then the starting value is inter-
preted as the starting speed and when operation is enabled, is connected to the output of the technology controller
(r2294).
If fault F07426 "technology controller actual value limited" occurs while ramping up to the starting value and if the
associated reaction has been set to "NONE" (see p2100, p2101), the starting value is kept as the speed setpoint
instead of a switch to closed-loop control operation.
p2306 Technology controller fault signal inversion / Tec_ctrl fault inv


0 1 0
Description: Setting to invert the fault signal of the technology controller.
The setting depends on the type of control loop.
Value: 0: No inversion
1: Inversion
Caution: If the actual value inversion is incorrectly selected, then the closed-loop control with the technology controller can
become unstable and can oscillate!
Note: The correct setting can be determined as follows:

- inhibit the technology controller (p2200 = 0).
- increase the motor speed and in so doing, measure the actual value signal (of the technology controller).
- if the actual value increases with increasing motor speed, then the inversion should be switched out.
- if the actual value decreases with increasing motor speed, then the inversion should be set.
If value = 0:
The drive reduces the output speed when the actual value rises (e.g. for heating fans, intake pump, compressor).
If value = 1:
The drive increases the output speed when the actual value increases (e.g. for cooling fans, discharge pumps).

Parameters
List of Parameters
r2344 CO: Technology controller last speed setpoint (smoothed) / Tec_ctrl n_setp_sm

- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the smoothed speed setpoint of the technology controller prior to switching to operation with fault response
(see p2345).
Note: The smoothing time is 10 s.
p2345 Technology controller fault response / Tech_ctrl flt resp


0 2 0
Description: Sets the response of the technology controller to the occurrence of a fault F07426 (technology controller actual
value limited). The fault response is executed if status bits 8 or 9 in technology controller status word r2349 are set.
If both status bits are zero, a switch back to technology controller operation will follow.
Value: 0: Function inhibited
1: On fault: Changeover to r2344 (or p2302)
2: On fault: Changeover to p2215
Dependency: The parameterized fault response is only effective if the technology controller mode is set to p2251 = 0 (technology
controller as main setpoint).
Refer to: p2267, p2268, r2344
Refer to: F07426
Notice: Dependent upon the application, the changing over of the setpoint when fault F07426 occurs can lead to the fault
condition disappearing and the re-activation of the technology controller. This can repeat itself and cause limit oscil-
lations. In this case a suitable fault response or a different fixed setpoint 15 for the fault response p2345 = 2 should
be selected.
Note: The parameterized fault response can only be achieved if the default fault response of the technology controller
fault F07426 is set to "NONE" (see p2100, p2101). If a fault response other than "NONE" is entered in p2101 for
F07426, p2345 must be set to zero.
If the fault occurs during ramping up to the starting setpoint p2302, this starting setpoint is retained as the final value
(there is no changeover to the fault response setpoint).

Parameters
List of Parameters
r2349.0...12 CO/BO: Technology controller status word / Tec_ctrl status


- - -
Description: Displays the status word of the technology controller.
00 Technology controller de-activated Yes No -
01 Technology controller limited Yes No -
02 Technology controller, motorized potentiom- Yes No -
eter limited max.
03 Technology controller, motorized potentiom- Yes No -
eter limited min.
04 Technology controller speed setpoint total in Yes No -
setpoint channel
05 Technology controller RFG bypassed in the Yes No -
setpoint channel
06 Technology controller starting value at the No Yes -
current limit
08 Technology controller actual value at the Yes No -
minimum
09 Technology controller actual value at the Yes No -
maximum
10 Technology controller output at the mini- Yes No -
mum
11 Technology controller output at the maxi- Yes No -
mum
12 Fault response active Yes No -
p2900[0...n] CO: Fixed value 1 [%] / Fixed value 1 [%]


-10000.00 [%] 10000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets a fixed percentage.
Note: The value can be used to interconnect a scaling function (e.g. scaling of the main setpoint)


-10000.00 [%] 10000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets a fixed percentage.
Note: The value can be used to interconnect a scaling function (e.g. scaling of the supplementary setpoint)

Parameters
List of Parameters
r2902[0...14] CO: Fixed values [%] / Fixed values [%]


- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Signal sources for frequently used percentage values.
Index: [0] = Fixed value +0 %
[1] = Fixed value +5 %
[8] = Fixed value -5 %
[13] = Fixed value -150%
Note: The signal sources can, for example, be used to interconnect scalings.
p2930[0...n] CO: Fixed value M [Nm] / Fixed value M [Nm]


-100000.00 [Nm] 100000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets a fixed value for torque.
Note: The value can, for example, be used to interconnect a supplementary torque.
p3110 External fault 3, power-up delay / Ext fault 3 t_on


0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for external fault 3.
Refer to: F07862

Parameters
List of Parameters
p3111[0...n] BI: External fault 3, enable / Ext fault 3 enab


- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the enable signal of external fault 3.
- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Refer to: F07862
p3112[0...n] BI: External fault 3 enable negated / Ext flt 3 enab neg

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the negated enable signal of external fault 3.
- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Refer to: F07862
r3113.0...15 CO/BO: NAMUR message bit bar / NAMUR bit bar


- - -
Description: Displays the status of NAMUR signal bit bar.
The faults or alarms are assigned to the appropriate signaling/message classes and influence a specific message
bit.
00 Fault drive converter data electronics / soft- Yes No -
ware error
01 Line supply fault Yes No -
02 DC link overvoltage Yes No -
03 Fault drive converter power electronics Yes No -
04 Drive converter overtemperature Yes No -
05 Ground fault Yes No -
06 Motor overload Yes No -
07 Bus error Yes No -
08 External safety-relevant shutdown Yes No -
10 Error communication internal Yes No -
11 Fault infeed Yes No -
15 Other faults Yes No -

Parameters
List of Parameters
r3131 CO: Current flt value / Current flt value


- - -
Description: Displays the fault value of the oldest active fault.
r3132 CO: Actual component number / Act comp_no.


- - -
Description: Displays the component number of the oldest fault that is still active.
p3230[0...n] CI: Load monitoring, speed actual value / Load monit n_act

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed actual value of the load monitoring.
Dependency: Refer to: r2169, p2181, p2192, p2193, p3231
Refer to: A07920, A07921, A07922, F07923, F07924, F07925
Note: The parameter is only effective for p2193 = 2.
p3231[0...n] Load monitoring speed deviation / Load monit n_dev


0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 150.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the permissible speed deviation during load monitoring (for p2193 = 2).
Dependency: Refer to: r2169, p2181, p2193, p3230
Refer to: A07920, A07921, A07922, F07923, F07924, F07925
p3232[0...n] BI: Load monitoring failure detection / Load_moni fail_det


- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for detecting a failure.
Refer to: F07936
Note: Monitoring is triggered with a 0 signal, as soon as the time in p2192 has expired.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p3233[0...n] Torque actual value filter, time constant / M_act_filt T


0 [ms] 1000000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the time constant of the PT1 element to smooth the torque actual value.
The smoothed actual torque is compared with the threshold values and is only used for messages and signals.
p3235 Phase failure signal motor monitoring time / Ph_fail t_monit


0 [ms] 2000 [ms] 320 [ms]
Description: Sets the monitoring time for phase failure detection of the motor.
Note: For p3235 = 0 the function is deactivated.
The monitoring is automatically de-activated during the flying restart operation for a motor that is still rotating.
3-phase phase failures cannot be detected and are indicated by other messages (e.g. F07902).
p3320[0...n] Fluid flow machine P = f(n), Y coordinate: P flow1 %, point 1 / Fluid flow mach Y1

0.00 100.00 25.00
Description: The power (P) for point 1 on the Y coordinate of the flow characteristic is saved in p3320. Unit: %
Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed.
The energy saved is displayed in r0041.
p3321[0...n] Fluid flow machine P = f(n), X coordinate: n flow1 %, point 1 / Fluid flow mach X1

0.00 100.00 0.00
Description: The speed (n) for point 1 on the X coordinate of the flow characteristic is saved in p3321. Unit: %

Parameters
List of Parameters

0.00 100.00 50.00

0.00 100.00 25.00

0.00 100.00 77.00

0.00 100.00 50.00

Parameters
List of Parameters

0.00 100.00 92.00

0.00 100.00 75.00

0.00 100.00 100.00

0.00 100.00 100.00

Parameters
List of Parameters
p3330[0...n] BI: 2-3-WIRE Control Command 1 / 2-3-WIRE CC_1


- - 0
Description: The function of the 2-3-WIRE Control Command 1 depends on the selected 2-3-WIRE type. It shall be predefined
by p0015


- - 0
by p0015


- - 0
by p0015
r3333.0...3 CO/BO: 2-3-WIRE Output / 2-3-WIRE OUT


- - -
Description: The output values of the 2-3-WIRE Control Command depends on the selected 2-3-WIRE type and the control
command inputs. Type shall be predefined by p0015
00 2-3-Wire On Yes No -
01 2-3-Wire Reverse Yes No -
02 2-3-Wire On/Inverse Yes No -
03 2-3-Wire Reverse/Inverse Yes No -
p3334 2-3-WIRE Selection / 2-3-WIRE Sel


0 4 0
Description: Determines the 2/3-Wire type using the terminals. It shall be predefined by p0015.
Value: 0: No 2/3-Wire control
1: 2-Wire Forward-Backward 1
2: 2-Wire Forward-Backward 2
3: 3-Wire Enable-Forward-Backward
4: 3-Wire Enable-On-Reverse

Parameters
List of Parameters
p3856[0...n] Compound braking current / Compound I_brake


0.00 [%] 250.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Compound braking current is used to define the amount of DC current that is produced on stopping the motor dur-
ing U/f operation to further increase the DC brake function.
Compound braking is a superimposition of the DC brake function with regenerative braking (net braking along the
ramp) after OFF1 or OFF3. This permits braking with controlled motor frequency and minimum power input into the
motor. Effective braking without using additional hardware components is obtained by optimizing the ramp down
time and compound braking.
Dependency: The compound braking current is only activated if the DC link voltage exceeds the threshold value in r1282.
Compound braking does not operate:
- when DC braking is active (refer to p1230, r1239)
- as long as the motor is not magnetized (e.g. for flying restart)
- for vector control (p1300 >= 20)
- for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx)
Caution: Generally, increasing the braking current improves the braking effect when stopping the motor. However, if the
value is set too high, then the drive can be tripped (shut down) as a result of overcurrent or ground fault.
Recommendation: p3856 < 100 % x (r0209 - r0331) / p0305 / 2
Compound braking generates a current in the motor with a ripple manifesting the rotational frequency. The higher
the braking current is set, the higher the resulting ripple, especially when the Vdc(max) control is simultaneously
active (refer to to p1280).
Note: The parameter value is entered relative to the rated motor current (p0305). Compound braking is deactivated with
p3856 = 0%.
r3859.0 CO/BO: Compound braking status word / Compound Br ZSW


- - -
Description: Displays the status word of the compound braking.
00 Compound braking active Yes No -

Parameters
List of Parameters
p3900 Completion of quick commissioning / Compl quick_comm


0 3 0
Description: Exits quick commissioning (p0010 = 1) with automatic calculation of all parameters of all existing drive data sets
that depend on the entries made during quick commissioning.
p3900 = 1 initially includes a parameter reset (factory setting, the same as p0970 = 1) for all parameters of the drive
object; however, without overwriting the entries made during the quick commissioning.
The interconnections of PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection (p0922) and the interconnections via p15 and p1500
are re-established and all of the dependent motor, open-loop and control-loop control parameters are calculated
(corresponding to p0340 = 1).
p3900 = 2 includes the restoration of the interconnections of PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection (p0922) and the
interconnections via p15 and p1500 and the calculations corresponding to p0340 = 1.
p3900 = 3 only includes the calculations associated with the motor, open-loop and closed-loop control parameters
corresponding to p0340 = 1.
Value: 0: No quick parameterization
1: Quick parameterization after parameter reset
2: Quick parameterization (only) for BICO and motor parameters
3: Quick parameterization for motor parameters (only)
Note: When the calculations have been completed, p3900 and p0010 are automatically reset to a value of 0.
When calculating motor, open-loop and closed-loop control parameters (such as for p0340 = 1) parameters associ-
ated with a selected Siemens catalog motor are not overwritten.
If a catalog motor has not been selected (see p0300), then the following parameters are reset with p3900 > 0 in
order to restore the situation that applied when commissioning the drive for the first time:
for induction motors p0320, p0352, p0362 ... p0369, p0604, p0605, p0626 ... p0628.
for synchronous motors p0326, p0327, p0352, p0604, p0605.
r3925[0...n] Identification final display / Ident final_disp


- - -
Description: Displays the commissioning steps that have been carried out.
00 Motor/control parameters calculated (p0340 Yes No -
= 1, p3900 > 0)
02 Motor data identification carried out at Yes No -
standstill (p1910 = 1)
03 Rotating measurement carried out (p1960 = Yes No -
1, 2)
15 Motor equivalent circuit diagram parameters Changed Not changed -
changed
Note: The individual bits are only set if the appropriate action has been initiated and successfully completed.
When motor rating plate parameters are changed, the final display is reset.
When setting the individual bits, all of the most significant bits are reset.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r3926[0...n] Alternating voltage generation base voltage amplitude / Alt U_gen U_base

- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the base voltage of the alternating voltage for the last motor data identification.
0: No alternating voltages, function de-activated.
Otherwise: Base voltage for alternating current generation in volts.
r3927[0...n] Motor data identification control word / MotID STW


- - -
Description: Successfully completed component of the last motor data identification carried out.
00 Stator inductance estimate no measure- Yes No -
ment
02 Rotor time constant estimate no measure- Yes No -
ment
03 Leakage inductance estimate no measure- Yes No -
ment
05 Determine Tr and Lsig evaluation in the time Yes No -
range
06 Activate vibration damping Yes No -
07 De-activate vibration detection Yes No -
11 De-activate pulse measurement Lq Ld Yes No -
12 De-activate rotor resistance Rr measure- Yes No -
ment
14 De-activate valve interlocking time mea- Yes No -
surement
15 Determine only stator resistance, valve volt- Yes No -
age fault, dead time
Note: The parameter is a copy of p1909.
r3928[0...n] Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config


- - -
Description: Successfully completed component of the last rotating measurement carried out.
01 Saturation characteristic identification Yes No -
02 Moment of inertia identification Yes No -
03 Re-calculates the speed controller parame- Yes No -
ters
04 Speed controller optimization (vibration test) Yes No -
05 q leakage inductance ident. (for current con- Yes No -
troller adaptation)
Note: The parameter is a copy of p1959.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r3929[0...n] Motor data identification modulated voltage generation / MotID U_gen mod

- - -
Description: Configuration of voltage generation for the various MotID sections in the case of the most recent successful MotID.
00 Wobble U_generate to determine dead-time Yes No -
correction
01 Wobble U_generate to determine stator Yes No -
resistance
02 Wobble U_generate to determine rotor time Yes No -
constant
03 Wobble U_generate to determine leakage Yes No -
inductance
04 Wobble U_generate to determine dyn. leak- Yes No -
age inductance
05 Wobble U_generate to determine magnetiz- Yes No -
ing inductance
08 Alternating U_generate to determine dead- Yes No -
time correction
09 Alternating U_generate to determine stator Yes No -
resistance
10 Alternating U_generate to determine rotor Yes No -
time constant
11 Alternating U_generate to determine leak- Yes No -
age inductance
12 Alternating U_generate to determine dyn. Yes No -
leakage inductance
13 Alternating U_generate to determine mag- Yes No -
netizing inductance
r3930[0...4] Power unit EEPROM characteristics / PU characteristics


- - -
Description: Displays the characteristics (A5E number and versions) of the power unit.
[0]: A5E number xxxx (A5Exxxxyyyy)
[1]: A5E number yyyy (A5Exxxxyyyy)
[2]: File version (logistic)
[3]: File version (fixed data)
[4]: File version (calib data)
p3950 Service parameter / Serv. par.

Can be changed: C, U, T Scaling: - Data set: -

- - -
Description: For service personnel only.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r3960[0...1] Control Unit temperature measured / CU temp measured

CU240E-2 DP Can be changed: - Scaling: p2006 Data set: -
CU240E-2 F

- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the measured Control Unit temperature.
An appropriate message is output when 87 °C is exceeded.
Index: [0] = Temperature actual
[1] = Temperature maximum
Note: The value of -200 indicates that there is no measuring signal.
Re r3960[0]:
Displays the currently measured Control Unit temperature.
Re r3960[1]:
Displays the highest measured Control Unit temperature. This value is saved on the module in a non-volatile fash-
ion.
r3974 Drive unit status word / Drv_unit ZSW


- - -
Description: Displays the status word for the drive unit.
00 Software reset active Yes No -
01 Writing of parameters disabled as parame- Yes No -
ter save in progress
02 Writing of parameters disabled as macro is Yes No -
running
r3978 BICO CounterDevice / BICO CounterDevice


- - -
Description: Displays the counter reading for modified BICO interconnections on this device.
The counter is incremented by one for each modified BICO interconnection.
p3981 Faults, acknowledge drive object / Faults ackn DO


0 1 0
Description: Setting to acknowledge all active faults of a drive object.
Note: Parameter should be set from 0 to 1 to acknowledge.
After acknowledgement, the parameter is automatically reset to 0.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p3985 Master control mode selection / PcCtrl mode select


0 1 0
Description: Sets the mode to change over the master control / LOCAL mode.
Value: 0: Change master control for STW1.0 = 0
1: Change master control in operation
Danger: When changing the master control in operation, the drive can manifest undesirable behavior - e.g. it can accelerate
up to another setpoint.
r3986 Parameter count / Parameter No.


- - -
Description: Displays the number of parameters for this drive unit.
The number comprises the device-specific and the drive-specific parameters.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r3988[0...1] Boot state / Boot_state


0 800 -
Description: Index 0:
Displays the boot state.
Index 1:
Displays the partial boot state
Value: 0: Not active
1: Fatal fault
10: Fault
20: Reset all parameters
30: Drive object modified
40: Download using commissioning software
50: Parameter download using commissioning software
90: Reset Control Unit
100: Start initialization
101: Only for internal Siemens use
110: Instantiate Control Unit basis
111: Insert drive object
115: Parameter download using commissioning software
150: Wait until Power Module is determined
160: Evaluate Power Module
170: Instantiate Control Unit reset
200: First commissioning
210: Create drive packages
250: Wait for fault acknowledge
325: Wait for input of drive type
350: Determine drive type
370: Wait until p0010 is set to 0
550: Call conversion functions for parameter
625: Wait for non-cyclic start
650: Start cyclic operation
660: Evaluate drive commissioning status
690: Wait for non-cyclic start
700: Save parameters
725: Wait for cyclic
740: Check the ability to operate
745: Start cyclic calculations
750: Interrupt enable
800: Initialization finished
Index: [0] = System
[1] = Partial boot

Parameters
List of Parameters
r3996 Parameter write inhibit status / Par_write inhib st


- - -
Description: Displays whether writing to parameters is inhibited.
r3996 = 0:
Parameter write not inhibited.
0 < r3996 < 100:
Parameter write inhibited. The value shows how the calculations are progressing.
r7760 Write protection status / Write prot stat


- - -
Description: Displays the status for write protection of adjustable parameters.
00 Write protection active -
Note: Write protection can be activated/deactivated via p7760 on the Control Unit.
p7761 Write protection / Write protection


0 1 0
Description: Setting for activating/de-activating the write protection for adjustable parameters.
Value: 0: Inactive
1: Active
Note: The following parameters are excluded from the write protection:
- p0003 (BOP access level)
- p0971 (drive object save parameters)
- p0977 (save all parameters)
- p3950 (service parameters)
- p3981 (acknowledge fault, drive object)
- p7760 (adjustable parameters write protection)
r7841[0...15] Power Module serial number / PM serial no.


- - -
Description: Displays the actual serial number of the Power Module.
The individual characters of the serial number are displayed in the ASCII code in the indices.
Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r7843[0...20] Memory card serial number / Mem_card ser.no


- - -
Description: Displays the actual serial number of the memory card.
The individual characters of the serial number are displayed in the ASCII code in the indices.
Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual.
Note: Example: displaying the serial number for a memory card:
r7843[0] = 49 dec --> ASCII characters = "1" --> serial number, character 1
r7843[6] = 69 dec --> ASCII characters = "E" --> serial number, character 7
r7843[7] = 0 dec --> ASCII characters = " " --> serial number, character 8
...
r7843[19] = 0 dec --> ASCII characters = " " --> serial number, character 20
r7843[20] = 0 dec
Serial number = 111923E
r7901[0...43] Sampling times / t_sample


- [µs] - [µs] - [µs]
Description: Displays the sampling times currently present on the drive unit.
For r7901[x] = 0, the following applies: The time slice is not active.
r7903 Hardware sampling times still cannot be assigned / HW t_samp free


- - -
Description: Displays the number of hardware sampling times that can still be assigned.
These free sampling times can be used by OA applications such as DCC (Drive Control Chart) or FBLOCKS (free
function blocks).
Note: OA: Open Architecture
r8570[0...39] Macro drive object / Macro DO


- - -
Description: Displays the macro file saved in the appropriate directory on the memory card/device memory.
Note: For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r8571[0...39] Macro Binector Input (BI) / Macro BI


- - -
Description: Displays the ACX file saved in the appropriate directory in the non-volatile memory.
r8572[0...39] Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for speed setpoints / Macro CI n_set

- - -
r8573[0...39] Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for torque setpoints / Macro CI M_set

- - -
r8585 Macro execution actual / Macro executed


- - -
Description: Displays the macro currently being executed on the drive object.
Dependency: Refer to: p0015, p0700, p1000, p1500, r8570, r8571, r8572, r8573
p8991 USB memory access / USB memory


1 2 1
Description: Selects the storage medium for access via the USB mass storage.
Value: 1: Memory card
2: Flash r/w internal
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p8999 USB functionality / USB functionality


1 3 3
Description: Selecting the USB functionality.
Value: 1: USS commissioning via the virtual COM port
2: Only memory access
3: USB commissioning and memory access
Note: COMM: Commissioning.
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
p9301 SI Motion enable safety functions (processor 2) / SI Mtn enable P2

PM250 Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Data set: -
CU240E-2 DP F

- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signals for the safe motion monitoring.
00 Enable SLS Enable Inhibit -
16 Enable SSM hysteresis and filtering Enable Inhibit 2860
17 Enable SDI Enable Inhibit 2861
30 Enable F-DI in PROFIsafe telegram 900 Enable Inhibit -
Refer to: F01682, F01683
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note: For bit 30 = 1, PROFIsafe telegram 900 must be configured in the F host.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)
SLS: Safely-Limited Speed
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)

Parameters
List of Parameters

CU240E-2 F

- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 bin
Refer to: F01682, F01683
p9306 SI Motion function specification (processor 2) / SI Mtn fct spec P2

CU240E-2 F Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Data set: -

1 3 1
Description: Sets the function specification for the safe motion monitoring.
Value: 1: Safety without encoder
3: Safety without encoder with accel_monitoring/delay time
Dependency: Refer to: C30711
p9307 SI Motion function configuration (processor 2) / SI Mtn config P2

CU240E-2 DP F
CU240E-2 F

- - 0011 bin
Description: Sets the function configuration for safe motion monitoring.
00 Extended message acknowledgement Yes No -
01 Setpoint velocity limit for STOP F No Yes -
Note: Re bit 00:
When the function is activated, a safety-relevant acknowledgement (internal event acknowledge) can be performed
by selecting/deselecting STO.
Re bit 01:
When the function is activated, the active setpoint velocity limit (CO: r9733) is set to zero when STOP F is active.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9309 SI Motion behavior during pulse suppression (processor 2) / SI Mtn behav IL P2

CU240E-2 DP F

- - 0000 0000 1111 1111 bin
Description: Sets the behavior of safety functions and their feedback during pulse suppression in encoderless operation.
00 SSM during pulse suppression and sensor- Becomes inactive Remains active -
less
08 SDI during pulse suppression and sensor- Becomes inactive Remains active -
less
Note: SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction)
Re bit 00:
For bit = 1 and with the SSM safety function activated, the following applies:
- During pulse suppression, monitoring is switched off and the feedback signal has a 0 signal level.
- Monitoring continues during pulse suppression. The feedback signal last displayed before pulse suppression is
kept and the system goes into the STO state.
Re bit 08:
For bit = 1 and with the SDI safety function activated, the following applies:
- During pulse suppression, monitoring is switched off and the status signal indicates inactive.
- Monitoring continues during pulse suppression. The status signal indicates active and the system goes into the
STO state.

CU240E-2 F

- - 0000 0000 1111 1111 bin
less
Re bit 00:
Re bit 08:
STO state.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9321[0...7] SI Motion gearbox motor/load denominator (processor 2) / SI Mtn gear den P2

CU240E-2 DP F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32

1 2147000000 1
Description: Sets the denominator for the gearbox between the motor and the load.
Index: [0] = Gearbox 1
[1] = Gearbox 2
[2] = Gearbox 3
[3] = Gearbox 4
[4] = Gearbox 5
[5] = Gearbox 6
[6] = Gearbox 7
[7] = Gearbox 8
Notice: It is not possible to change over the gearbox stages. Gearbox 1 (index 0) is always active.
p9322[0...7] SI Motion gearbox motor/load numerator (processor 2) / SI Mtn gear num P2


1 2147000000 1
Description: Sets the numerator for the gearbox between the motor and the load.
[1] = Gearbox 2
[2] = Gearbox 3
[3] = Gearbox 4
[4] = Gearbox 5
[5] = Gearbox 6
[6] = Gearbox 7
[7] = Gearbox 8
Note: In the case of encoderless monitoring functions, the pole pair number must be multiplied by the numerator of the
gearbox ratio.
Example:
Gearbox ratio 1:4, pole pair number (r0313) = 2
--> p9321 = 1, p9322 = 8 (4 x 2)
p9331[0...3] SI Motion SLS limit values (processor 2) / SI Mtn SLS lim P2

CU240E-2 DP F Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Data set: -

0.01 [rpm] 100000.00 [rpm] 2000.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the limit values for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS).
Index: [0] = Limit value SLS1
[1] = Limit value SLS2
[3] = Limit value SLP4
Refer to: C01714
Note: SLS: Safely-Limited Speed

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9342 SI Motion act. val. comparison tolerance (crossw.) (processor 2) / SI Mtn actV tol P2

0.0010 [°] 360.0000 [°] 12.0000 [°]
Description: Sets the tolerance for the cross-check of the actual position between processor 1 and processor 2.
Refer to: C01711
p9345 SI Motion SSM filter time (processor 2) / SI Mtn SSM filt P2

CU240E-2 DP F

0.00 [µs] 100000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the filter time for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill.
Note: The filter time is effective only if the function is enabled (p9301.16 = p9501.16 = 1).
The parameter is included in the crosswise data comparison of the two monitoring channels.
p9346 SI Motion SSM velocity limit (processor 2) / SI Mtn SSM v_limP2


0.00 [rpm] 100000.00 [rpm] 20.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the velocity limit for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx).
When this limit value is undershot, the signal "SSM feedback signal active" is set.
Caution: The following applies for p9306 = 3:
The "SAM" function is switched out if the selected threshold value is undershot.
Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring)
p9347 SI Motion SSM velocity hysteresis (processor 2) / SI Mtn SSM Hyst P2


0.0010 [rpm] 500.0000 [rpm] 10.0000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the velocity hysteresis for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx).
Note: The velocity hysteresis is effective only if the function is enabled (p9301.16 = p9501.16 = 1).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9348 SI Motion SAM actual velocity tolerance (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SAM tol MM

0.00 [rpm] 120000.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the velocity tolerance for the "SAM" function.
Refer to: C01706
p9351 SI Motion SLS changeover delay time (processor 2) / SI Mtn SLS t P2

CU240E-2 DP F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: FloatingPoint32

0.00 [µs] 600000000.00 [µs] 100000.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the delay time for the SLS changeover for the function "safely limited speed" (SLS).
When transitioning from a higher to a lower safely-limited velocity/speed stage, within this delay time, the "old"
velocity stage remains active.
Even if SLS is activated from non safety-related operation, then this delay is still applied.
p9356 SI Motion pulse suppression delay time (processor 2) / SI Mtn IL t_del P2


0.00 [µs] 600000000.00 [µs] 600000000.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the delay time for the safe pulse suppression after STOP B / SS1.
In the case of encoderless motion monitoring functions with brake ramp monitoring (p9306 = 1), the parameter has
no effect.
Refer to: C01701
Note: SS1: Safe Stop 1
p9358 SI Motion acceptance test mode time limit (processor 2) / SI Mtn acc t P2

5000000.00 [µs] 100000000.00 [µs] 40000000.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the maximum time for the acceptance test mode.
If the acceptance test mode takes longer than the selected time limit, then the mode is automatically terminated.
Refer to: C01799

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9360 SI Motion pulse suppression shutdown speed (processor 2) / SI Mtn IL n_sh P2


10.00 [rpm] 6000.00 [rpm] 10.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the shutdown speed for the pulse suppression.
Below this speed "standstill" is assumed and for STOP B / SS1, the pulses are suppressed (by changing to STOP
A).
Note: SS1: Safe Stop 1
p9363[0...3] SI Motion SLS stop response (processor 2) / SI Mtn SLS stop P2


0 1 0
Description: Sets the stop response for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS).
These settings apply to the individual limit values for SLS.
Value: 0: STOP A
1: STOP B
p9364 SI Motion SDI tolerance (processor 2) / SI Mtn SDI tol P2


0.001 [°] 360.000 [°] 12.000 [°]
Description: Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI). This motion in the monitored direction is still per-
missible before an alarm is initiated.
Refer to: C30716
Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Sets the tolerance
for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9365 SI Motion SDI delay time (processor 2) / SI Mtn SDI t P2


0.00 [µs] 600000000.00 [µs] 100000.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the delay time for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI). When selecting the SDI function, motion in the
monitored direction is permissible as a maximum for this time; this means that this time can be used for braking
existing motion.
Refer to: C30716
p9366 SI Motion SDI stop response (processor 2) / SI Mtn SDI Stop P2


0 1 1
Description: Sets the stop response for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI).
This setting applies to both directions of motion.
Value: 0: STOP A
1: STOP B
Refer to: C30716
p9368 SI Motion SAM velocity limit (processor 2) / SI Mtn SAM v_limP2


0.00 [rpm] 1000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the velocity tolerance limit for the "SAM" function.
SAM is de-activated once the set velocity limit has been undershot.
For p9568 = p9368 = 0, the following applies:
The value in p9546/p9346 (SSM) is applied as the velocity limit for SAM.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9370 SI Motion acceptance test mode (processor 2) / SI Mtn acc_mod P2

CU240E-2 F Can be changed: U, T Scaling: - Data set: -

0000 hex 00AC hex 0000 hex
Description: Setting to select and de-select the acceptance test mode.
Value: 0: [00 hex] De-select the acceptance test mode
172: [AC hex] Select the acceptance test mode
Refer to: C01799
Note: Acceptance test mode can only be selected if the motion monitoring functions, which are integrated in the drives,
are enabled (p9601.2/p9801.2).
r9371 SI Motion acceptance test status (processor 2) / SI Mtn acc_stat P2

CU240E-2 F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Data set: -

0000 hex 00AC hex -
Description: Displays the status of the acceptance test mode.
Value: 0: [00 hex] Acc_mode inactive
12: [0C hex] Acc_mode not possible due to POWER ON fault
13: [0D hex] Acc_mode not possible due to incorrect ID in p9370
15: [0F hex] Acc_mode not possible due to expired Acc_timer
172: [AC hex] Acc_mode active
Refer to: C01799
p9381 SI Motion brake ramp reference value (processor 2) / SI Mtn ramp ref P2

600.0000 [rpm] 24000.0000 [rpm] 1500.0000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the reference value to define the brake ramp.
The rate of rise of the brake ramp depends upon p9381 (reference value) and p9383 (monitoring time).
p9382 SI Motion brake ramp delay time (processor 2) / SI Mtn rp t_del P2


10000.00 [µs] 99000000.00 [µs] 250000.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the delay time for monitoring the brake ramp.
Monitoring of the brake ramp starts once the delay time has elapsed.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9383 SI Motion brake ramp monitoring time (processor 2) / SI Mtn rp t_mon P2


500.00 [ms] 1000000.00 [ms] 10000.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the monitoring time to define the brake ramp.
p9386 SI Motion delay time of the evaluation sensorless (processor 2) / SI Mtn t_del SL MM

5.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the evaluation delay for encoderless actual value sensing after pulse enable.
The value should be greater than or equal to the motor magnetizing time.
p9387 SI Motion encoderless act val sensing filter time (processor 2) / SI Mtn SL filt P2

0.00 [µs] 100000.00 [µs] 25000.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the filter time for smoothing the actual value with sensorless actual value sensing.
p9388 SI Motion actual value sensing minimum current (processor 2) / SI Mtn SL I_min P2

0.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 10.00 [%]
Description: Sets the minimum current for encoderless actual value sensing in reference to 10 mA (i.e. when 1 % = 10 mA).
- The value must be increased if C30711 has occurred with message value 1042.
- The value must be decreased if C30711 has occurred with message value 1041.
Reducing this percentage value can adversely affect actual value sensing.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9389 SI Motion voltage tolerance acceleration (processor 2) / SI Mtn U tol P2


10.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the voltage tolerance for suppressing acceleration peaks.
Increasing this percentage value means that voltage peaks will need to have a higher amplitude during acceleration
procedures if they are not to affect actual value sensing.
- The value must be lowered if acceleration procedures have led to an excessive Safety actual velocity.
r9398[0...1] SI Motion actual checksum SI parameters (processor 2) / SI Mtn act CRC P2


- - -
Description: Displays the checksum over the checked Safety Integrated parameters of the motion monitoring functions (actual
checksum) on processor 2.
Index: [0] = Checksum over SI parameters for motion monitoring
[1] = Checksum over SI parameters with hardware reference
p9399[0...1] SI Motion setpoint checksum SI parameters (processor 2) / SI Mtn setp CRC P2


0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Description: Sets the checksum over the checked Safety Integrated parameters of the motion monitoring functions (actual
checksum) on processor 2.
[1] = Checksum over SI parameters with hardware reference

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9400 Safely remove memory card / Mem_card rem


0 100 0
Description: Setting and display when memory card is "removed safely".
Procedure:
Setting p9400 = 2 results in a value of 3
--> The memory card can be removed safely. After removal the value sets itself to 0 automatically.
Setting p9400 = 2 results in a value of 100
--> The memory card cannot be removed safely. Removal may destroy the file system on the memory card. It may
be necessary to set p9400 = 2 again.
Value: 0: No memory card inserted
1: Memory card inserted
2: Request "safe removal" of the memory card
3: "Safe removal" possible
100: "Safe removal" not possible due to access
Caution: Removing the memory card without a request (p9400 = 2) and confirmation (p9400 = 3) may destroy the file system
on the memory card. The memory card will then no longer work properly and must be repaired.
Note: The status when the memory card is being "removed safely" is shown in r9401.
Re value = 0, 1, 3, 100:
These values can only be displayed, not set.
r9401 Safely remove memory card status / Mem_card rem stat


- - -
Description: Displays the status of the memory card.
00 Memory card inserted Yes No -
01 Memory card activated Yes No -
Note: Re bit 00 and bit 01:
Bit 1/0 = 0/0: No memory card inserted (corresponds to p9400 = 0).
Bit 1/0 = 0/1: "Safe removal" possible (corresponds to p9400 = 3).
Bit 1/0 = 1/0: Status not possible.
Bit 1/0 = 1/1: Memory card inserted (corresponds to p9400 = 1, 2, 100).

Parameters
List of Parameters
r9406[0...19] PS file parameter number parameter not transferred / PS par_no n transf


- - -
Description: Displays the parameters that were not able to be transferred when reading the parameter back-up files (PS files)
from the non-volatile memory (e.g. memory card).
r9406[0] = 0
--> All of the parameter values were able to be transferred error-free.
r9406[0...x] > 0
--> indicates the parameter number in the following cases:
- parameter, whose value was not able to be completely accepted.
- indexed parameter, where at least 1 index was not able to be accepted. The first index that is not transferred is
displayed in r9407.
Note: All indices from r9406 to r9408 designate the same parameter.
r9406[x] parameter number, parameter not accepted
r9407[x] parameter index, parameter not accepted
r9408[x] fault code, parameter not accepted
r9407[0...19] PS file parameter index parameter not transferred / PS parameter index


- - -
Description: Displays the first index of the parameters that could not be transferred when the parameter backup files (PS files)
were read from the non-volatile memory (e.g. memory card).
If, from an indexed parameter, at least one index was not able to be transferred, then the parameter number is dis-
played in r9406[n] and the first index that was not transferred is displayed in r9407[n].
r9406[0] = 0
--> All of the parameter values were able to be transferred error-free.
r9406[n] > 0
--> Displays r9407[n] the first index of the parameter number r9406[n] that was not transferred.
r9408[0...19] PS file fault code parameter not transferred / PS fault code


- - -
Description: Only for internal Siemens service purposes.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r9409 Number of parameters to be saved / Qty par to save


- - -
Description: Displays the number of modified parameters and those that have still not be saved for this drive object.
Note: The modified parameters that still need to be saved are internally listed in r9410 ... r9419.
r9451[0...29] Units changeover adapted parameters / Unit_chngov par


- - -
Description: Displays the parameters whose parameter would have to be changed during a units changeover.
r9463 Set valid macro /


0 999999 -
Description: Displays the valid macro.
A value of 0 is displayed if a parameter set by a macro is changed.
p9484 BICO interconnections search signal source / BICO S_src srch


0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the signal source (BO/CO parameter, BICO coded) to search in the signal sinks.
The signal source to be searched for is set in p9484 (BICO-coded) and the search result is specified using the num-
ber (r9485) and the first index (r9486).
r9485 BICO interconnections signal source search count / BICO S_src srchQty

- - -
Description: Displays the number of BICO interconnections to the signal sink being searched for.
Note: The signal source to be searched is set in p9484 (BICO-coded).
The search result is contained in r9482 and r9483 and is specified by the count (r9485) and the first index (r9486).

Parameters
List of Parameters
r9486 BICO interconnections signal source search first index / BICO S_src srchIdx

- - -
Description: Displays the first index of the signal source being searched for.
The signal source to be searched for is set in p9484 (BICO-coded) and the search result is specified using the num-
ber (r9485) and the first index (r9486).
Note: The signal source to be searched is set in p9484 (BICO-coded).
The search result is contained in r9482 and r9483 and is specified by the count (r9485) and the first index (r9486).

CU240E-2 DP F

- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 bin
16 Enable SSM hysteresis and filtering Enable Inhibit 2860
30 Enable F-DI in PROFIsafe telegram 900 Enable Inhibit -

CU240E-2 F

- - 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 bin

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9506 SI Motion function specification (processor 1) / SI Mtn fct_spc P1


1 3 1
Description: Sets the function specification for the safe motion monitoring.
Value: 1: Safety without encoder
3: Safety without encoder with accel_monitoring/delay time
p9507 SI Motion function configuration (processor 1) / SI Mtn config P1

CU240E-2 DP F
CU240E-2 F

- - 0011 bin
Description: Sets the function configuration for safe motion monitoring.
00 Extended message acknowledgement Yes No -
01 Setpoint velocity limit for STOP F No Yes -
Note: Re bit 00:
When the function is activated, a safety-relevant acknowledgement (internal event acknowledge) can be performed
by selecting/deselecting STO.
Re bit 01:
When the function is activated, the active setpoint velocity limit (CO: r9733) is set to zero when STOP F is active.

Parameters
List of Parameters

CU240E-2 DP F

- - 0000 0000 1111 1111 bin
00 SSM during pulse suppression and Becomes inactive Remains active -
sensorless
08 SDI during pulse suppression and Becomes inactive Remains active -
sensorless
Re bit 00:
Re bit 08:
STO state.

CU240E-2 F

- - 0000 0000 1111 1111 bin
less
Re bit 00:
Re bit 08:
STO state.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9521[0...7] SI Motion gearbox motor/load denominator (processor 1) / SI Mtn gear den P1


1 2147000000 1
Description: Sets the denominator for the gearbox between the motor and the load.
[1] = Gearbox 2
[2] = Gearbox 3
[3] = Gearbox 4
[4] = Gearbox 5
[5] = Gearbox 6
[6] = Gearbox 7
[7] = Gearbox 8
p9522[0...7] SI Motion gearbox motor/load numerator (processor 1) / SI Mtn gear num P1


1 2147000000 1
Description: Sets the numerator for the gearbox between the motor and the load.
[1] = Gearbox 2
[2] = Gearbox 3
[3] = Gearbox 4
[4] = Gearbox 5
[5] = Gearbox 6
[6] = Gearbox 7
[7] = Gearbox 8
Note: In the case of encoderless monitoring functions, the pole pair number must be multiplied by the numerator of the
gearbox ratio.
Example:
Gearbox ratio 1:4, pole pair number (r0313) = 2
--> p9521 = 1, p9522 = 8 (4 x 2)
p9531[0...3] SI Motion SLS limit values (processor 1) / SI Mtn SLS lim P1


0.01 [rpm] 100000.00 [rpm] 2000.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the limit values for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS).
Refer to: C01714

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9533 SI Motion SLS setpoint speed limit (processor 1) / SI Mtn SLS set_lim

0.000 [%] 100.000 [%] 80.000 [%]
Description: This is an evaluation factor to define the setpoint limit from the selected actual speed limit.
The active SLS limit value is evaluated with this factor and is made available as setpoint limit in r9733.
Dependency: This parameter only has to be parameterized for the motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive (p9601.2 =
1)
r9733[0] = p9531[x] x p9533 (converted from the load side to the motor side)
r9733[1] = - p9531[x] x p9533 (converted from the load side to the motor side)
[x] = Selected SLS stage
Conversion factor from the motor side to the load side:
- motor type = rotary and axis type = linear: p9522 / (p9521 x p9520)
- otherwise: p9522 / p9521
Refer to: p9501, p9531, p9601
Note: The active actual speed limit is selected via PROFIsafe.
With STOP A, B, setpoint 0 is specified in r9733.
If p9533 = 0 is set, the setpoint speed limit is de-activated, and r9733[0] = p1082 and r9733[1] = -p1082 are set
p9542 SI Motion act. val. comparison tolerance (crossw.) (processor 1) / SI Mtn act tol P1

0.0010 [°] 360.0000 [°] 12.0000 [°]
Description: Sets the tolerance for the cross-check of the actual position between processor 1 and processor 2.
p9545 SI Motion SSM filter time (processor 1) / SI Mtn SSM filt P1

CU240E-2 DP F

0.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the filter time for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill.
Note: The filter time is effective only if the function is enabled (p9501.16 = 1).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9546 SI Motion SSM velocity limit (processor 1) / SI Mtn SSM v_limP1


0.00 [rpm] 100000.00 [rpm] 20.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the velocity limit for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx).
When this limit value is undershot, the signal "SSM feedback signal active" is set.
Caution: The following applies for p9506 = 3:
The "SAM" function is switched out if the selected threshold value is undershot.

p9547 SI Motion SSM velocity hysteresis (processor 1) / SI Mtn SSM hyst P1


0.0010 [rpm] 500.0000 [rpm] 10.0000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the velocity hysteresis for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx).
Note: The velocity hysteresis is effective only if the function is enabled (p9501.16 = 1).
p9548 SI Motion SAM actual velocity tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SAM tol CU

0.00 [rpm] 120000.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the velocity tolerance for the "SAM" function.
p9551 SI Motion SLS changeover delay time (processor 1) / SI Mtn SLS t P1


0.00 [ms] 600000.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for the SLS changeover for the function "safely limited speed" (SLS).
When transitioning from a higher to a lower safely-limited velocity/speed stage, within this delay time, the "old"
velocity stage remains active.
Even if SLS is activated from non safety-related operation, then this delay is still applied.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9556 SI Motion pulse suppression delay time (processor 1) / SI Mtn IL t_del P1


0.00 [ms] 600000.00 [ms] 600000.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for the safe pulse suppression after STOP B.
In the case of encoderless motion monitoring functions with brake ramp monitoring (p9506 = 1), the parameter has
no effect.
Refer to: C01701
p9558 SI Motion acceptance test mode time limit (processor 1) / SI Mtn acc t P1

5000.00 [ms] 100000.00 [ms] 40000.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the maximum time for the acceptance test mode.
If the acceptance test mode takes longer than the selected time limit, then the mode is automatically terminated.
p9559 SI Motion forced checking procedure timer (processor 1) / SI Mtn dyn timer

0.00 [h] 9000.00 [h] 8.00 [h]
Description: Sets the time interval for carrying out the forced checking procedure and testing the safety motion monitoring func-
tions integrated in the drives.
Within the parameterized time, the safety functions must have been tested at least once (including de-selection of
the "STO" function).
This monitoring time is reset each time the test is carried out.
The signal source to initiate the forced checking procedure is set in p9705.
Refer to: A01697, C01798
Note: STO: Safe Torque Off
p9560 SI Motion pulse suppression shutdown speed (processor 1) / SI Mtn IL v_sh P1


10.00 [rpm] 6000.00 [rpm] 10.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the shutdown speed for the pulse suppression.
Below this speed "standstill" is assumed and for STOP B, the pulses are suppressed by changing to STOP A).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9563[0...3] SI Motion SLS-specific stop response (processor 1) / SI Mtn SLS stop P1


0 1 0
Description: Sets the SLS-specific stop response for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS).
These settings apply to the individual limit values for SLS.
Value: 0: STOP A
1: STOP B
p9564 SI Motion SDI tolerance (processor 1) / SI Mtn SDI tol P1


0.001 [°] 360.000 [°] 12.000 [°]
Description: Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI). This motion in the monitored direction is still per-
missible before an alarm is initiated.
Refer to: C01716
p9565 SI Motion SDI delay time (processor 1) / SI Mtn SDI t P1


0.00 [ms] 600000.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI). When selecting the SDI function, motion in the
monitored direction is permissible as a maximum for this time; this means that this time can be used for braking
existing motion.
Refer to: C01716

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9566 SI Motion SDI stop response (processor 1) / SI Mtn SDI Stop P1


0 1 1
Description: Sets the stop response for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI).
This setting applies to both directions of motion.
Value: 0: STOP A
1: STOP B
Refer to: C01716
p9568 SI Motion SAM velocity limit (processor 1) / SI Mtn SAM v_limP1


0.00 [rpm] 1000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm]
Description: Sets the velocity tolerance limit for the "SAM" function.
SAM is de-activated once the set velocity limit has been undershot.
For p9568 = p9368 = 0, the following applies:
The value in p9546/p9346 (SSM) is applied as the velocity limit for SAM.
p9570 SI Motion acceptance test mode (processor 1) / SI Mtn acc_mod P1


0000 hex 00AC hex 0000 hex
Description: Setting to select and de-select the acceptance test mode.
Value: 0: [00 hex] De-select the acceptance test mode
172: [AC hex] Select the acceptance test mode
Refer to: C01799
Note: Acceptance test mode can only be selected if the motion monitoring functions, which are integrated in the drives,
are enabled (p9601.2/p9801.2).

Parameters
List of Parameters
r9571 SI Motion acceptance test status (processor 1) / SI Mtn acc_status


0000 hex 00AC hex -
Description: Displays the status of the acceptance test mode.
Value: 0: [00 hex] Acc_mode inactive
12: [0C hex] Acc_mode not possible due to POWER ON fault
13: [0D hex] Acc_mode not possible due to incorrect ID in p9570
15: [0F hex] Acc_mode not possible due to expired Acc_timer
172: [AC hex] Acc_mode active
Refer to: C01799
p9581 SI Motion brake ramp reference value (processor 1) / SI Mtn ramp ref P1

600.0000 [rpm] 24000.0000 [rpm] 1500.0000 [rpm]
Description: Sets the reference value to define the brake ramp.
p9582 SI Motion brake ramp delay time (processor 1) / SI Mtn ramp t P1


10.00 [ms] 99000.00 [ms] 250.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for monitoring the brake ramp.
Monitoring of the brake ramp starts once the delay time has elapsed.
p9583 SI Motion brake ramp monitoring time (processor 1) / SI Mtn rp t_mon P1


0.50 [s] 1000.00 [s] 10.00 [s]
Description: Sets the monitoring time to define the brake ramp.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9586 SI Motion delay time of the evaluation sensorless (CU) / SI Mtn t_del SL CU

5.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the evaluation delay for encoderless actual value sensing after pulse enable. The value should be greater than
or equal to the motor magnetizing time. Shortening the time can result in Alarm 1711 with fault value 1041 or1042.
Notice: Reducing this value can adversely affect the actual value sensing and the plausibility check.
When the value is increased, this results in a longer evaluation delay.
Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9306/p9506 = 1).
p9587 SI Motion encoderless act val sensing filter time (processor 1) / SI Mtn SL filt P1

0.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms] 25.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the filter time for smoothing the actual value with sensorless actual value sensing.
p9588 SI Motion act val sensing sensorless min current (processor 1) / SI Mtn SL I_min P1

0.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 10.00 [%]
Description: Sets the minimum current for encoderless actual value sensing in reference to 10 mA (i.e. when 1 % = 10 mA).
- The value must be decreased if C01711 has occurred with message value 1041.
Notice: Reducing this percentage value can adversely affect actual value sensing.
p9589 SI Motion voltage tolerance acceleration (processor 1) / SI Mtn U tol P1


10.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the voltage tolerance for suppressing acceleration peaks.
Increasing this percentage value means that voltage peaks will need to have a higher amplitude during acceleration
procedures if they are not to affect actual value sensing.
- The value must be lowered if acceleration procedures have led to an excessive Safety actual velocity.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r9590[0...3] SI Motion version safety motion monitoring (processor 1) / SI Mtn version P1


- - -
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated version for the safe monitoring functions.
Index: [0] = Safety Version (major release)
[1] = Safety Version (minor release)
[2] = Safety Version (baselevel or patch)
[3] = Safety Version (hotfix)
Note: Example:
r9590[0] = 2, r9590[1] = 60, r9590[2] = 1, r9590[3] = 0 --> SI Motion version V02.60.01.00
p9601 SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (processor 1) / SI enable fct P1

CU240E-2

- - 0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signals for safety functions on processor 1 that are integrated in the drive.
Not all of the settings listed below will be permissible, depending on the Control Unit being used:
- p9601 = 0: Safety functions integrated in the drive disabled.
- p9601 = 1: STO enabled via terminals. Permissible if r9771.0 = 1.
- p9601 = 4: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive enabled via an integrated F-DI. Permissible if
r9771.5 = 1.
- p9601 = 8: STO enabled via PROFIsafe. Permissible if r9771.6 = 1.
- p9601 = 9: STO enabled via PROFIsafe and STO via terminals. Permissible if r9771.6 = 1.
- p9601 = 12: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive enabled via PROFIsafe. Permissible if r9771.4 = 1.
- p9601 = 13: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive enabled via PROFIsafe and STO via terminals.
Permissible if r9771.4 = 1.
00 Enable STO via terminals (processor 1) Enable Inhibit 2810
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input.
STO: Safe Torque Off

Parameters
List of Parameters

CU240E-2 DP

- - 0000 bin
r9771.5 = 1.
03 Enable PROFIsafe (processor 1) Enable Inhibit -

CU240E-2 DP F

- - 0000 bin
r9771.5 = 1.
02 Motion monitoring functions integr. in the Enable Inhibit -
drive (processor 1)

Parameters
List of Parameters

CU240E-2 F

- - 0000 bin
r9771.5 = 1.
drive (processor 1)
p9610 SI PROFIsafe address (processor 1) / SI PROFIsafe P1

CU240E-2 DP Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned16

0000 hex FFFE hex 0000 hex
Description: Sets the PROFIsafe address for processor 1.
p9650 SI F-DI changeover tolerance time (processor 1) / SI F-DI_chg tol P1

CU240E-2 DP Can be changed: C(95) Scaling: - Data set: -
CU240E-2 F

0.00 [ms] 2000.00 [ms] 500.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the tolerance time for the changeover of the failsafe digital input for STO on processor 1.
An F-DI changeover is not effective simultaneously due to the different runtimes in the two monitoring channels.
After an F-DI changeover, dynamic data is not subject to a crosswise data comparison during this tolerance time.
Note: For a crosswise data comparison between p9650 and p9850, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is
tolerated.
The parameterized time is internally rounded-off to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9651 SI STO debounce time (processor 1) / SI STO t_debou P1

CU240E-2 F

0.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms] 1.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the debounce time for the failsafe digital inputs used to control the "STO" function.
The debounce time is rounded to whole milliseconds.
Note: The debounce time is rounded to whole milliseconds. It specifies the maximum duration of a fault pulse at the fail-
safe digital inputs with no reaction/influence on the selection or deselection of the Safety Basic Functions.
Example:
Debounce time = 1 ms: Fault pulses of 1 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 2 ms are processed.
p9659 SI forced checking procedure timer / SI FrcdCkProcTimer

CU240E-2 F

0.00 [h] 9000.00 [h] 8.00 [h]
Description: Sets the time interval for carrying out the forced checking procedure and testing the Safety shutdown paths.
Within the parameterized time, STO must have been de-selected at least once. The monitoring time is reset each
time that STO is de-selected.
r9660 SI forced checking procedure remaining time / SI frc chk remain

CU240E-2 F

- [h] - [h] - [h]
Description: Displays the time remaining before dynamization and testing of the safety shutdown paths (forced checking proce-
dure).

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9700 SI copy function / SI copy function

CU240E-2 DP Can be changed: C(95), U, T Scaling: - Data set: -
CU240E-2 F

0000 hex 00D0 hex 0000 hex
Description: Setting to start the required copy function.
After starting, the corresponding parameters are copied from processor 1 to processor 2.
Once copying is complete, the parameter is automatically reset to zero.
Value: 0: [00 hex] Copy function ended
29: [1D hex] Start copy function node identifier
87: [57 hex] Start copy function SI parameters
208: [D0 hex] Start copy function SI basic parameters
Notice: When the parameters are copied, short-term communication interruptions may occur.
Note: Re value = 57 hex and D0 hex:
The value can only be set if the safety commissioning mode is set and the Safety Integrated password was entered.
Re value = D0 hex:
The following parameters are copied after starting the copy function:
p9601 --> p9801, p9610 --> 9810, p9650 --> p9850, p9651 --> p9851
p9701 Acknowledge SI data change / Ackn SI data

CU240E-2 DP Can be changed: C(95), U, T Scaling: - Data set: -
CU240E-2 F

0000 hex 00EC hex 0000 hex
Description: Setting to transfer the reference checksums from the associated actual checksums after changes (SI parameters,
hardware).
After transferring the reference checksums, parameters are automatically reset to zero.
Value: 0: [00 hex] Data unchanged
172: [AC hex] Acknowledge data change complete
220: [DC hex] Acknowledge SI basic parameter change
236: [EC hex] Acknowledge hardware CRC
Dependency: Refer to: r9398, p9399, r9728, p9729, r9798, p9799, r9898, p9899
Note: Re value = AC and DC hex:
These values can only be set if the safety commissioning mode is set and the Safety Integrated password was
entered.
p9705 BI: SI Motion: Test stop signal source / SI Mtn test stop
CU240E-2 DP F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: U32 / Binary

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the test stop of the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r9710[0...1] SI Motion diagnostics result list 1 / SI Mtn res_list 1


- - -
Description: Displays result list 1 that, for the crosswise data comparison between the monitoring channels, led to the fault.
Index: [0] = Result list processor 2
[1] = Result list processor 1
06 Actual value > upper limit, SLS1 Yes No -
07 Actual value > lower limit, SLS1 Yes No -
16 Actual value > upper limit, SAM/SBR Yes No -
17 Actual value > lower limit, SAM/SBR Yes No -
18 Actual value > upper limit SDI positive Yes No -
19 Actual value > lower limit SDI positive Yes No -
20 Actual value > upper limit SDI negative Yes No -
21 Actual value > lower limit SDI negative Yes No -
SBR: Safe Brake Ramp (safe brake ramp monitoring)
r9712 SI Motion diagnostics pos. act. val. motor side (processor 1) / SI Mtn s_act motP1

- - -
Description: Displays the current motor-side position actual value for the motion monitoring functions on processor 1.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r9713[0...3] SI Motion diagnostics position actual value load side / SI Mtn s_act load

- - -
Description: Displays the actual load-side actual values of both monitoring channels and their difference.
Index: [0] = Load-side actual value on processor 1 (P1)
[1] = Load-side actual value on processor 2 (P2)
[2] = Load-side actual value difference P1 - P2
[3] = Load-side maximum actual value difference P1 - P2
Note: Re index 0:
The display of the load-side position actual value on processor 1 is updated in the monitoring clock cycle.
Re index 1:
The display of the load-side position actual value on processor 2 is updated in the CDC clock cycle (r9724) and
delayed by one CDC clock cycle.
Re index 2:
The difference between the load-side position actual value on processor 1 and load-side position actual value on
processor 2 is updated in the CDC clock cycle (r9724) and delayed by one CDC clock cycle.
Re index 3:
The maximum difference between the load-side position actual value on processor 1 and the load-side position
actual value on processor 2.
CDC: Crosswise Data Check
r9714[0...1] SI Motion diagnostics velocity (processor 1) / SI Mtn diag v P1


- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the actual velocity values for the motion monitoring functions on processor 1.
Index: [0] = Load-side velocity actual value on processor 1
[1] = Actual SAM/SBR velocity limit on processor 1
r9720.0...13 CO/BO: SI Motion control signals integrated in the drive / SI Mtn integ STW

- - -
Description: Control signals for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive.
00 De-select STO Yes No -
01 De-select SS1 Yes No -
04 De-select SLS Yes No -
07 Acknowledgement Signal edge active No -
09 Select SLS bit 0 Set Not set -
10 Select SLS bit 1 Set Not set -
12 Deselect SDI positive Yes No 2861
13 Deselect SDI negative Yes No 2861
Note: This parameter is only supplied with actual values if SI Motion functions are active. For Safety Integrated Basic
Functions (STO), the value is equal to zero.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r9722.0...15 CO/BO: SI Motion status signals integrated in the drive / SI Mtn integ stat

- - -
Description: Status signal for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive.
00 STO active Yes No -
01 SS1 active Yes No -
04 SLS active Yes No -
07 Internal event No Yes -
09 Active SLS stage bit 0 Set Not set -
12 SDI pos active Yes No 2861
13 SDI neg active Yes No 2861
15 SSM (speed below limit value) Yes No 2860
Notice: Re bit 07:
An internal event is displayed if a STOP A ... F is active.
The signal state behaves in an opposite way to the PROFIsafe Standard.
CU240E-2 F Access level: 3 Calculated: - Data type: Unsigned32

- - -
12 SDI pos active Yes No 2861
13 SDI neg active Yes No 2861
Notice: Re bit 07:

Parameters
List of Parameters
r9723.0...16 CO/BO: SI Motion diagnostic signals integrated in the drive / SI Mtn integ diag

- - -
Description: Displays the diagnostic signals for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive.
00 Forced checking procedure required Yes No -
01 For ESR, STOP F and subsequent stop B is Yes No -
active
02 Communication failure Yes No -
03 Actual value sensing supplies valid value Yes No -
04 Encoderless act val sensing acc to tech- Yes No -
nique for U/f control
16 SAM/SBR active Yes No -
Note: ESR: Extended Stop and Retract
SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring)
SBR: Safe Brake Ramp (safe brake ramp monitoring)
r9724 SI Motion crosswise comparison clock cycle / SI Mtn CDC clk cyc

- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the crosswise comparison clock cycle.
The value indicates the clock cycle time with which each individual CDC value is compared between the two moni-
toring channels.
Note: CDC: Crosswise Data Check
r9725[0...2] SI Motion, diagnostics STOP F / SI Mtn Diag STOP F


- - -
Description: Re index 0:
Displays the message value that resulted in the STOP F on the drive.
Value = 0:
Processor 1 signaled a STOP F.
Value = 1 ... 999:
Number of the incorrect date in the crosswise data comparison between the monitoring channels.
Value >= 1000:
Additional diagnostic values of the drive.
Re index 1:
Displays the value from processor 1 that resulted in the STOP F.
Re index 2:
Displays the value from processor 2 that resulted in the STOP F.
Index: [0] = Message value for CDC
[1] = Processor 1 CDC actual value
[2] = Processor 2 CDC actual value
Note: The significance of the individual message values is described in message C01711.
CDC: Crosswise Data Check

Parameters
List of Parameters
r9728[0...2] SI Motion actual checksum SI parameters (processor 1) / SI Mtn act CRC P1


- - -
Description: Displays the checksum over the checked Safety Integrated parameters of the motion monitoring functions (actual
checksum).
[1] = Checksum over SI parameters for actual values
[2] = Checksum over SI parameters for hardware
Refer to: F01680
p9729[0...2] SI Motion setpoint checksum SI parameters (processor 1) / SI Mtn setp CRC P1


Description: Sets the checksum using the checksum-tested Safety Integrated parameters for motion monitoring functions (refer-
ence checksum).
[1] = Checksum over SI parameters for actual values
[2] = Checksum over SI parameters for hardware
Refer to: F01680
r9732 SI Motion velocity resolution / SI Mtn v_res

CU240E-2 DP F Can be changed: - Scaling: - Data set: -

- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the safe velocity resolution (load side).
Setpoints for velocity limits or parameter changes for velocities below this threshold have no effect.
Note: This parameter does not provide any information about the actual accuracy of the velocity sensing. This depends
on the type of actual value sensing, the gear factors as well as the quality of the encoder being used.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r9733[0...2] CO: SI Motion setpoint speed limit effective / SI Mtn setp_lim

CU240E-2 F Can be changed: - Scaling: p2000 Data set: -

- [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm]
Description: Displays the necessary setpoint speed limit as a result of the selected motion monitoring functions.
Contrary to the parameterization of the SI limit values, this parameter specifies the motor-side limit value and not
the load-side limit value.
Index: [0] = Setpoint limiting positive
[1] = Setpoint limiting negative
[2] = Setpoint limit absolute
Dependency: For SLS: r9733[0] = p9531[x] x p9533 (converted from the load side to the motor side)
For SDI negative: r9733[0] = 0
For SLS: r9733[1] = - p9531[x] x p9533 (converted from the load side to the motor side)
For SDI positive: r9733[1] = 0
[x] = Selected SLS stage
Conversion factor from the motor side to the load side:
- motor type = rotary and axis type = linear: p9522 / (p9521 x p9520)
- otherwise: p9522 / p9521
Notice: If p1051 = r9733[0] is interconnected, p1052 = r9733[1] must also be interconnected.
If only the absolute value of the setpoint velocity limiting is required, r9733[2] must be interconnected.
Note: If the "SLS" function is not selected, r9733[0] shows p1082 and r9733[1] shows -p1082.
The display in r9733 can be delayed by up to one Safety monitoring clock cycle as compared to the display in r9720
and r9722.
r9734.0...14 CO/BO: SI Motion Safety Info Channel status word / SI Mtn info ch ZSW

- - -
Description: Displays the status word for the Safety information channel.
06 SLS selected Yes No -
07 Internal event Yes No -
12 SDI positive selected Yes No -
13 SDI neg selected Yes No -
14 ESR retract requested Yes No -
Notice: Re bit 07:

Parameters
List of Parameters
r9742.0...15 CO/BO: SI Motion drive-integrated status signals (processor 2) / SI Mtn int stat P2

- - -
15 SSM (speed below limit value) Yes No 2860
Notice: Re bit 07:
p9761 SI password input / SI password inp

CU240E-2 DP Can be changed: C, T Scaling: - Data set: -
CU240E-2 F

Description: Enters the Safety Integrated password.
Note: It is not possible to change Safety Integrated parameters until the Safety Integrated password has been entered.
p9762 SI password new / SI password new

CU240E-2 F

Description: Enters a new Safety Integrated password.
Dependency: A change made to the Safety Integrated password must be acknowledged in the following parameter:
Refer to: p9763

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9763 SI password acknowledgement / SI ackn password

CU240E-2 F

Description: Acknowledges the new Safety Integrated password.
Note: The new password entered into p9762 must be re-entered in order to acknowledge.
p9762 = p9763 = 0 is automatically set after the new Safety Integrated password has been successfully acknowl-
edged.
r9765 SI Motion forced checking procedure remaining time (processor 1) /

SI Mtn dyn rem P1

- [h] - [h] - [h]
Description: Displays the time remaining until the next dynamization and testing of the safety motion monitoring functions inte-
grated in the drives.
The signal source to initiate the forced checking procedure is parameterized in p9705.
Refer to: C01798
r9770[0...3] SI version drive-integrated safety function (processor 1) / SI version Drv P1

CU240E-2 F

- - -
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated version for the drive-integrated safety functions on processor 1.
Index: [0] = Safety Version (major release)
[1] = Safety Version (minor release)
[2] = Safety Version (baselevel or patch)
[3] = Safety Version (hotfix)
Note: Example:
r9770[0] = 2, r9770[1] = 60, r9770[2] = 1, r9770[3] = 0 --> Safety version V02.60.01.00
r9771 SI common functions (processor 1) / SI general fct P1


- - -
Description: Displays the supported Safety Integrated monitoring functions.
Processor 1 determines this display.
00 STO supported via terminals Yes No 2804

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - -
06 Basic Functions PROFIsafe supported Yes No -


- - -
02 Extended Functions supported (p9501 > 0) Yes No 2804
04 Extended Functions PROFIsafe supported Yes No -
05 Extended Functions integrated in drive sup- Yes No -
ported (p9601.2 = 1)
07 Extended Functions encoderless supported Yes No -
11 Extended Functions SDI supported Yes No -
12 Extended Functions SSM encoderless sup- Yes No -
ported


- - -
ported (p9601.2 = 1)
ported

Parameters
List of Parameters
r9772.0...20 CO/BO: SI status (processor 1) / SI status P1

CU240E-2 F

- - -
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated status on processor 1.
00 STO selected on processor 1 Yes No 2810
01 STO active on processor 1 Yes No 2810
09 STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active Yes No 2802
10 STOP A active Yes No 2802
15 STOP F active Yes No 2802
16 STO cse: Safety comm. mode Yes No -
17 STO cause selection via terminal (Basic Yes No -
Functions)
18 STO cause: Selection via motion monitoring Yes No -
functions
19 STO cause actual value missing Yes No -
20 STO cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic Yes No -
Functions)
Note: Re bit 00:
When STO is selected, the cause is displayed in bits 16 ... 20.
Re bit 18:
When the bit is set, STO is selected via PROFIsafe.
Re bit 19:
For the drive-integrated motion monitoring functions, due to OFF2, no actual value sensing possible.
r9773.0...31 CO/BO: SI status (processor 1 + processor 2) / SI status P1+P2

CU240E-2 F

- - -
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated status on the drive (processor 1 + processor 2).
00 STO selected in drive Yes No 2804
01 STO active in drive Yes No 2804
31 Shutdown paths must be tested Yes No 2810
Note: This status is formed from the AND operation of the relevant status of the two monitoring channels.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r9776 SI diagnostics / SI diagnostics

CU240E-2 F

- - -
Description: The parameter is used for diagnostics.
00 Safety parameter changed POWER ON Yes No -
required
Note: Re bit 00 = 1:
At least one Safety parameter has been changed that will only take effect after a POWER ON.
r9780 SI monitoring clock cycle (processor 1) / SI mon_clk cyc P1

CU240E-2 F

- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the clock cycle time for the Safety Integrated Basic Functions on processor 1.
r9781[0...1] SI checksum to check changes (processor 1) / SI chg chksm P1

CU240E-2 F

- - -
Description: Displays the checksum for tracking changes for Safety Integrated.
These are additional checksums that are created to track changes (fingerprint for the "safety logbook" functionality)
to safety parameters (that are relevant for checksums).
Index: [0] = SI checksum to track functional changes
[1] = SI checksum to track hardware-specific changes
Refer to: F01690
r9782[0...1] SI time stamp to check changes (processor 1) / SI chg t P1

CU240E-2 F

- [h] - [h] - [h]
Description: Displays the time stamps for the checksums for tracking changes for Safety Integrated.
The time stamps for the checksums for tracking changes (fingerprint for the "safety logbook" functionality) made to
safety parameters are saved in parameters p9781[0] and p9781[1].
Index: [0] = SI time stamp for checksum to track functional changes
[1] = SI time stamp for checksum to track hardware-specific changes
Refer to: F01690

Parameters
List of Parameters
r9794[0...19] SI crosswise comparison list (processor 1) / SI CDC_list P1

CU240E-2 F

- - -
Description: Displays the numbers of the data items that are currently being compared crosswise on processor 1.
The content of the list of crosswise-compared data is dependent upon the particular application.
Note: Example:
r9794[0] = 1 (monitoring clock cycle)
r9794[1] = 2 (enable safety functions)
r9794[2] = 3 (F-DI changeover, tolerance time)
...
A complete list of numbers for crosswise-compared data items appears in fault F01611.
r9795 SI diagnostics STOP F (processor 1) / SI diag STOP F P1

CU240E-2 F

- - -
Description: Displays the number of the cross-checked data item which caused STOP F on processor 1.
Note: A complete list of numbers for crosswise-compared data items appears in fault F01611.
r9798 SI actual checksum SI parameters (processor 1) / SI act chksm P1

CU240E-2 F

- - -
Description: Displays the checksum for the Safety Integrated parameters checked using checksums on processor 1 (actual
checksum).
p9799 SI setpoint checksum SI parameters (processor 1) / SI setp_chksm P1

CU240E-2 F

Description: Sets the checksum for the Safety Integrated parameters checked using checksums on processor 1 (setpoint check-
sum).

Parameters
List of Parameters

CU240E-2

- - 0000 bin
r9871.5 = 1.

CU240E-2 DP

- - 0000 bin
r9871.5 = 1.

Parameters
List of Parameters

CU240E-2 DP F

- - 0000 bin
r9871.5 = 1.
drive (processor 2)

Parameters
List of Parameters

CU240E-2 F

- - 0000 bin
r9871.5 = 1.
drive (processor 2)
p9810 SI PROFIsafe address (processor 2) / SI PROFIsafe P2


0000 hex FFFE hex 0000 hex
Description: Sets the PROFIsafe address on processor 2.
p9850 SI F-DI changeover tolerance time (processor 2) / SI F-DI_chg tol P2

CU240E-2 F

0.00 [µs] 2000000.00 [µs] 500000.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the tolerance time for the changeover of the failsafe digital input for STO on processor 2.
An F-DI changeover is not effective simultaneously due to the different runtimes in the two monitoring channels.
After an F-DI changeover, dynamic data is not subject to a crosswise data comparison during this tolerance time.
Note: For a crosswise data comparison between p9650 and p9850, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is
tolerated.
The parameterized time is internally rounded-off to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9851 SI STO debounce time (processor 2) / SI STO t_debou P2

CU240E-2 F

0.00 [µs] 100000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the debounce time for the failsafe digital inputs used to control the "STO" function.
The debounce time is rounded to whole milliseconds.
Note: The debounce time is rounded to whole milliseconds. It specifies the maximum duration of a fault pulse at the fail-
safe digital inputs with no reaction/influence on the selection or deselection of the Safety Basic Functions.
Example:
r9871 SI common functions (processor 2) / SI common fct P2


- - -


- - -

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - -
04 Extended Functions PROFIsafe supported Yes No -
ported (p9601.2 = 1)
ported


- - -
ported (p9601.2 = 1)
ported

Parameters
List of Parameters
r9872.0...20 CO/BO: SI status (processor 2) / SI Status P2

CU240E-2 F

- - -
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated status on processor 2.
00 STO selected on processor 2 Yes No 2810
01 STO active on processor 2 Yes No 2810
09 STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active Yes No 2802
10 STOP A active Yes No 2802
15 STOP F active Yes No 2802
16 STO cse: Safety comm. mode Yes No -
17 STO cause selection via terminal (Basic Yes No -
Functions)
18 STO cause: Selection via motion monitoring Yes No -
functions
20 STO cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic Yes No -
Functions)
Note: Re bit 00:
When STO is selected, the cause is displayed in bits 16 ... 20.
Re bit 18:
When the bit is set, STO is selected via PROFIsafe.
r9898 SI actual checksum SI parameters (processor 2) / SI act_chksm P2

CU240E-2 F

- - -
Description: Displays the checksum for the Safety Integrated parameters checked using checksums on processor 2 (actual
checksum).
p9899 SI setpoint checksum SI parameters (processor 2) / SI setp_chksm P2

CU240E-2 F

Description: Sets the checksum for the Safety Integrated parameters checked using checksums on processor 2 (setpoint check-
sum).

Parameters
List of Parameters
r9925[0...99] Firmware file incorrect / FW file incorr


- - -
Description: Displays the directory and name of the file whose status as shipped from the factory was identified as impermissi-
ble.
Refer to: A01016
Note: The directory and name of the file is displayed in the ASCII code.
r9926 Firmware check status / FW check status


- - -
Description: Displays the status when the firmware is checked when the system is booted.
0: Firmware not yet checked.
1: Check running.
2: Check successfully completed.
3: Check indicates an error.
Refer to: A01016
p9930[0...8] System logbook activation / SYSLOG activation


0 255 0
Description: Only for service purposes.
Index: [0] = System logbook stage (0: Not active)
[1] = COM2/COM1 (0: COM2, 1: COM1)
[2] = Activate file write (0: Not active)
[3] = Display time stamp (0: Not displayed)
[4] = Reserved
[5] = Reserved
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
[8] = System logbook file size (stages, each 10 kB)
Notice: Before powering down the Control Unit, ensure that the system logbook is switched out (p9930[0] = 0).
If writing to the file is activated (p9930[2] = 1), writing to the file must be de-activated again before switching off the
Control Unit (p9930[2] = 0) in order to ensure that the system logbook has been completely written to the file.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p9931[0...129] System logbook module selection / SYSLOG mod select.


p9932 Save system logbook EEPROM / SYSLOG EEPROM save


0 255 0
r9935.0 BO: POWER ON delay signal / POWER ON t_delay


- - -
Description: After power-on, binector output r9935.0 is set with the start of the first sampling time and is again reset after approx.
100 ms.
00 POWER ON delay signal High Low -
r9975[0...7] System utilization measured / Sys util meas


- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the measured system utilization.
The higher the value displayed, the higher the system utilization.
Index: [0] = Computing time utilization (min)
[1] = Computing time utilization (averaged)
[2] = Computing time utilization (max)
[3] = Largest total utilization (min)
[4] = Largest total utilization (averaged)
[5] = Largest total utilization (max)
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
Refer to: F01205
Note: Re index 3 ... 5:
The total utilizations are determined using all sampling times used. The largest total utilizations are mapped here.
The sampling time with the largest total utilization is displayed in r9979.
Total utilization:
Computing time load of sampling time involved including load from higher-priority sampling times (interrupts).

Parameters
List of Parameters
r9976[0...7] System utilization / Sys util


- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the system utilization.
If the utilization is greater than 100%, fault F01054 is output.
Index: [0] = Reserved
[1] = Computing time utilization
[2] = Reserved
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Reserved
[5] = Largest total utilization
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
Note: Re index 1:
The value shows the total computing time load of the system.
Re index 5:
The total utilization is determined using all sampling times used. The largest total utilization is mapped here. The
sampling time with the largest total utilization is displayed in r9979.
Total utilization:
Computing time load of sampling time involved including load from higher-priority sampling times (interrupts).
r9999[0...99] Software error internal supplementary diagnostics / SW_err int diag


- - -
Description: Diagnostics parameter to display additional information for internal software errors.
Note: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
p10002 SI discrepancy monitoring time (processor 1) / SI discrp t_mon P1


1.00 [ms] 2000.00 [ms] 500.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the monitoring time for the discrepancy for the digital inputs.
The signal states at the two associated digital inputs (F-DI) must assume the same state within this monitoring time.
Note: F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input

Parameters
List of Parameters
p10006 SI acknowledgement internal event F-DI (processor 1) / SI ackn int evt P1


0 255 0
Description: Select a safety-relevant digital input for the signal "acknowledge internal event" (internal fault).
The falling edge at this input resets the status "internal event" in the drive.
Value: 0: Statically active
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
255: Statically inact
Refer to: A01666, A30666
If value = 0:
No terminal assigned, acknowledge input has a static zero value.
p10017 SI digital inputs debounce time (processor 1) / SI DI t_debounceP1


0.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms] 1.00 [ms]
The debounce time is accepted rounded off to whole milliseconds.
The debounce time acts on the following digital inputs:
- Fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI).
- Single-channel digital inputs (DI).
- Single-channel digital input 2 (DI 2, read back input for the forced checking procedure).
Note: Example:
The debounce result can be read in r10051.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p10022 SI STO input terminal (processor 1) / SI STO F-DI P1


0 255 0
Description: Sets the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the "STO" function.
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
Note: If value = 0:
No terminal assigned, safety function always active.
If value = 255:
No terminal assigned, safety function always inactive.
p10023 SI SS1 input terminal (processor 1) / SI SS1 F-DI P1


0 255 0
Description: Sets the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the "SS1" function.
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
Note: If value = 0:
If value = 255:
SS1: Safe Stop 1

Parameters
List of Parameters
p10026 SI SLS input terminal (processor 1) / SI SLS F-DI P1


0 255 0
Description: Sets the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the "SLS" function.
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
Note: If value = 0:
If value = 255:
p10030 SI SDI positive input terminal (processor 1) / SI SDI pos F-DI P1


0 255 0
Description: Sets the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the "SDI positive" function.
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
Note: If value = 0:
If value = 255:
p10031 SI SDI negative input terminal (processor 1) / SI SDI neg F-DI P1


0 255 0
Description: Sets the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the "SDI negative" function.
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
Note: If value = 0:
If value = 255:

Parameters
List of Parameters
r10049 SI F-DI monitoring status (processor 1) / SI F-DI status P1


- - -
Description: Displays the monitoring status of the fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI).
The F-DIs that are being used by the Safety Integrated functions are displayed.
If the module used has fewer than 3 F-DIs, "Freely available" is displayed for the F-DIs which are not in use.
00 F-DI 0 Safety monitored Freely available -
Dependency: p10006 / p10106
p10022 / p10122
p10023 / p10123
p10026 / p10126
p10030 / p10130
p10031 / p10131
p10050 / p10150
Refer to: r10149
p10050 SI PROFIsafe F-DI transfer (processor 1) / SI Ps F-DI tran P1


- - 0000 bin
Description: Setting for the transfer and evaluation of failsafe digital inputs (F-DI) via PROFIsafe.
The safe state of the selected F-DIs is transferred to the F-control via PROFIsafe. The F-DIs are monitored for dis-
crepancies. Discrepancy faults can be acknowledged via PROFIsafe.
00 F-DI 0 Transfer No transfer -

Parameters
List of Parameters
r10051.0...2 CO/BO: SI digital inputs status (processor 1) / SI DI status P1


- - -
Description: Displays the single-channel, logical, and debounced status of the fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI).
The parameter is updated in the SI Motion monitoring clock cycle.
00 F-DI 0 High Low -
Note: If a safety function is assigned to an input (e.g. via p10022), then the following applies:
- logical "0": Safety function is selected
- logical "1": Safety function is de-selected
The interrelationship between the logical level and the external voltage level at the input depends on the parameter-
ization (refer to p10040) of the input as either NC or NO contact and is aligned to the use of a safety function:
With 24 V at the input, NC contacts have a logical "1" level, for 0 V at the input, a logical "0" level.
This means that an NC/NC contact parameterization of 0 V at both inputs of the F-DI selects the safety function, for
24 V at both inputs, de-selects the safety function.
With 24 V at the input, NO contacts have a logical "0" level, for 0 V at the input, a logical "1" level.
This means that for an NC/NO contact parameterization, the level 0 V/24 V selects the safety function, the level 24
V/0 V de-selects the safety function.
The state of parameter r10151 is delayed by one monitoring clock cycle in relation to r10051.
The parameter is only updated in the following cases:
- If the Safety Extended Functions are enabled by means of activation via F-DI.
- If transfer of the F-DIs via PROFIsafe is enabled (see p9501).
In this case only the F-DIs transferred for PROFIsafe are displayed and updated (see p10050/p10150). All F-DIs
which have not been transferred have a static zero value.
p10102 SI discrepancy monitoring time (processor 2) / SI discr t_mon P2


1.00 [ms] 2000.00 [ms] 500.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the monitoring time for the discrepancy for the digital inputs.
The signal states at the two associated digital inputs (F-DI) must assume the same state within this monitoring time.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p10106 SI acknowledgement internal event F-DI (processor 2) / SI ackn int evt P2


0 255 0
Description: Select a safety-relevant digital input for the signal "acknowledge internal event" (internal fault).
The falling edge at this input resets the status "internal event" in the drive.
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
Note: If value = 0:
No terminal assigned, acknowledge input has a static zero value.
p10117 SI digital inputs debounce time (processor 2) / SI DI t_debounceP2


0.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms] 1.00 [ms]
The debounce time acts on the following digital inputs:
- Fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI).
- Single-channel digital input 2 (DI 2, read back input for the forced checking procedure).
The debounce time is accepted rounded off to whole milliseconds.
Note: Example:
The debounce result can be read in r10151.
p10122 SI STO input terminal (processor 2) / SI STO F-DI P2


0 255 0
Description: Sets the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the "STO" function.
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
Note: If value = 0:
If value = 255:

Parameters
List of Parameters
p10123 SI SS1 input terminal (processor 2) / SI SS1 F-DI P2


0 255 0
Description: Sets the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the "SS1" function.
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
Note: If value = 0:
If value = 255:
SS1: Safe Stop 1
p10126 SI SLS input terminal (processor 2) / SI SLS F-DI P2


0 255 0
Description: Sets the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the "SLS" function.
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
Note: If value = 0:
If value = 255:

Parameters
List of Parameters
p10130 SI SDI positive input terminal (processor 2) / SI SDI pos DI P2


0 255 0
Description: Sets the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the "SDI positive" function.
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
Note: If value = 0:
If value = 255:
p10131 SI SDI negative input terminal (processor 2) / SI SDI neg DI P2


0 255 0
Description: Sets the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) for the "SDI negative" function.
1: F-DI 0
2: F-DI 1
3: F-DI 2
Note: If value = 0:
If value = 255:

Parameters
List of Parameters
r10149 SI F-DI monitoring status (processor 2) / SI F-DI status P2


- - -
Description: Displays the monitoring status of the fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI).
The F-DIs that are being used by the Safety Integrated functions are displayed.
If the module used has fewer than 3 F-DIs, "Freely available" is displayed for the F-DIs which are not in use.
Dependency: p10006 / p10106
p10022 / p10122
p10023 / p10123
p10026 / p10126
p10030 / p10130
p10031 / p10131
p10050 / p10150
Refer to: r10049
p10150 SI PROFIsafe F-DI transfer (processor 2) / SI Ps F-DI tran P2


- - 0000 bin
Description: Setting for the transfer and evaluation of failsafe digital inputs (F-DI) via PROFIsafe.
The safe state of the selected F-DIs is transferred to the F-control via PROFIsafe. The F-DIs are monitored for dis-
crepancies. Discrepancy faults can be acknowledged via PROFIsafe.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - -
Description: Displays the single-channel, logical, and debounced status of the fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI).
The parameter is updated in the SI Motion monitoring clock cycle.
If a safety function is assigned to an input (e.g. via p10122), then the following applies:
- logical "0": Safety function is selected
- logical "1": Safety function is de-selected
The interrelationship between the logical level and the external voltage level at the input depends on the parameter-
ization (refer to p10140) of the input as either NC or NO contact and is aligned to the use of a safety function:
With 24 V at the input, NC contacts have a logical "1" level, for 0 V at the input, a logical "0" level.
This means that an NC/NC contact parameterization of 0 V at both inputs of the F-DI selects the safety function, for
24 V at both inputs, de-selects the safety function.
With 24 V at the input, NO contacts have a logical "0" level, for 0 V at the input, a logical "1" level.
This means that for an NC/NO contact parameterization, the level 0 V/24 V selects the safety function, the level 24
V/0 V de-selects the safety function.
The state of parameter r10151 is delayed by one monitoring clock cycle in relation to r10051.
The parameter is only updated in the following cases:
- If the Safety Extended Functions are enabled by means of activation via F-DI.
- If transfer of the F-DIs via PROFIsafe is enabled (see p9501).
In this case only the F-DIs transferred for PROFIsafe are displayed and updated (see p10050/p10150). All F-DIs
which have not been transferred have a static zero value.
r20001[0...9] Run-time group sampling time / RTG sampling time


- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the current sampling time of the run-time group 0 to 9.
Index: [0] = Run-time group 0
[1] = Run-time group 1

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20030[0...3] BI: AND 0 inputs / AND 0 inputs


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities I0, I1, I2, I3 of instance AND 0 of the AND function block.
Index: [0] = Input I0
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3
r20031 BO: AND 0 output Q / AND 0 output Q


- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity Q = I0 & I1 & I2 & I3 of instance AND 0 of the AND function block.
p20032 AND 0 run-time group / AND 0 RTG


1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance AND 0 of the AND function block is to be called.
Value: 1: Run-time group 1
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
9999: Do not calculate
p20033 AND 0 run sequence / AND 0 RunSeq


0 32000 10
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance AND 0 within the run-time group set in p20032.
Note: The function blocks with a lower run sequence value are calculated before function blocks with a higher run
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3


- - -


1 9999 9999
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 20
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3


- - -


1 9999 9999
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 30
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3


- - -


1 9999 9999
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 40
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20046[0...3] BI: OR 0 inputs / OR 0 inputs


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities I0, I1, I2, I3 of instance OR 0 of the OR function block.
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3
r20047 BO: OR 0 output Q / OR 0 output Q


- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity Q = I0 | I1 | I2 | I3 of instance OR 0 of the OR function block.
p20048 OR 0 run-time group / OR 0 RTG


1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance OR 0 of the OR function block is to be called.
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
p20049 OR 0 run sequence / OR 0 RunSeq


0 32000 60
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance OR 0 within the run-time group set in p20048.
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3


- - -


1 9999 9999
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 70
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3


- - -


1 9999 9999
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 80
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3


- - -


1 9999 9999
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 90
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20062[0...3] BI: XOR 0 inputs / XOR 0 inputs


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities I0, I1, I2, I3 of instance XOR 0 of the XOR function block.
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3
r20063 BO: XOR 0 output Q / XOR 0 output Q


- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity Q of instance XOR 0 of the XOR function block.
p20064 XOR 0 run-time group / XOR 0 RTG


1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance XOR 0 of the XOR function block is to be called.
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
p20065 XOR 0 run sequence / XOR 0 RunSeq


0 32000 110
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance XOR 0 within the run-time group set in p20064.
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3


- - -


1 9999 9999
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 120
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3


- - -


1 9999 9999
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 130
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0
[1] = Input I1
[2] = Input I2
[3] = Input I3


- - -


1 9999 9999
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 140
sequence value.
p20078 BI: NOT 0 input I / NOT 0 input I


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity I of instance NOT 0 of the inverter.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r20079 BO: NOT 0 inverted output / NOT 0 inv output


- - -
Description: Display parameter for the inverted output of instance NOT 0 of the inverter.
p20080 NOT 0 run-time group / NOT 0 RTG


1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance NOT 0 of the inverter is to be called.
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
p20081 NOT 0 run sequence / NOT 0 RunSeq


0 32000 160
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance NOT 0 within the run-time group set in p20080.
sequence value.


- - 0


- - -

Parameters
List of Parameters


1 9999 9999
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 170
sequence value.


- - 0


- - -


1 9999 9999
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6

Parameters
List of Parameters


0 32000 180
sequence value.


- - 0


- - -


1 9999 9999
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 190
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20094[0...3] CI: ADD 0 inputs / ADD 0 inputs

Can be changed: T Scaling: PERCENT Data set: -

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities X0, X1, X2, X3 of instance ADD 0 of the adder.
Index: [0] = Input X0
[1] = Input X1
[2] = Input X2
[3] = Input X3
r20095 CO: ADD 0 output Y / ADD 0 output Y


- - -
Description: Display parameter for the output quantity Y = X0 + X1 + X2 + X3 of instance ADD 0 of the adder.
p20096 ADD 0 run-time group / ADD 0 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance ADD 0 of the adder is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20097 ADD 0 run sequence / ADD 0 RunSeq


0 32000 210
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance ADD 0 within the run-time group set in p20096.
sequence value.


- - 0
[1] = Input X1
[2] = Input X2
[3] = Input X3

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - -


5 9999 9999
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 220
sequence value.
p20102[0...1] CI: SUB 0 inputs / SUB 0 inputs


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of minuend X1 and subtrahend X2 of instance SUB 0 of the subtractor.
Index: [0] = Minuend X1
[1] = Subtrahend X2
r20103 CO: SUB 0 difference Y / SUB 0 difference Y


- - -
Description: Display parameter for the difference Y = X1 - X2 of instance SUB 0 of the subtractor.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20104 SUB 0 run-time group / SUB 0 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance SUB 0 of the subtractor is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20105 SUB 0 run sequence / SUB 0 RunSeq


0 32000 240
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance SUB 0 within the run-time group set in p20104.
sequence value.


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of minuend X1 and subtrahend X2 of instance SUB 1 of the subtractor.
Index: [0] = Minuend X1
[1] = Subtrahend X2


- - -
Description: Display parameter for the difference Y = X1 - X2 of instance SUB 1 of the subtractor.
p20108 SUB 1 run-time group / SUB 1 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance SUB 1 of the subtractor is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20109 SUB 1 run sequence / SUB 1 RunSeq


0 32000 250
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance SUB 1 within the run-time group set in p20108.
sequence value.
p20110[0...3] CI: MUL 0 inputs / MUL 0 inputs


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of the factors X0, X1, X2, X3 of instance MUL 0 of the multiplier.
Index: [0] = Factor X0
[1] = Factor X1
[2] = Factor X2
[3] = Factor X3
r20111 CO: MUL 0 product Y / MUL 0 product Y


- - -
Description: Display parameter for the product Y = X0 * X1 * X2 * X3 of instance MUL 0 of the multiplier.
p20112 MUL 0 run-time group / MUL 0 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance MUL 0 of the multiplier is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20113 MUL 0 run sequence / MUL 0 RunSeq


0 32000 270
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance MUL 0 within the run-time group set in p20112.
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of the factors X0, X1, X2, X3 of instance MUL 1 of the multiplier.
Index: [0] = Factor X0
[1] = Factor X1
[2] = Factor X2
[3] = Factor X3


- - -
Description: Display parameter for the product Y = X0 * X1 * X2 * X3 of instance MUL 1 of the multiplier.
p20116 MUL 1 run-time group / MUL 1 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance MUL 1 of the multiplier is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20117 MUL 1 run sequence / MUL 1 RunSeq


0 32000 280
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance MUL 1 within the run-time group set in p20116.
sequence value.
p20118[0...1] CI: DIV 0 inputs / DIV 0 inputs


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of dividend X1 and divisor X2 of instance DIV 0 of the divider.
Index: [0] = Dividend X0
[1] = Divisor X1

Parameters
List of Parameters
r20119[0...2] CO: DIV 0 quotient / DIV 0 quotient


- - -
Description: Display parameter for quotients Y = X1/X2, integer number quotients YIN, and division remainder MOD = (Y - YIN)
x X2 of instance DIV 0 of the divider.
Index: [0] = Quotient Y
[1] = Integer number quotient YIN
[2] = Div remainder MOD
r20120 BO: DIV 0 divisor is zero QF / DIV 0 divisor=0 QF


- - -
Description: Display parameter for the signal QF that the divisor X2 of instance DIV 0 of the divider is zero.
X2 = 0.0 => QF = 1
p20121 DIV 0 run-time group / DIV 0 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance DIV 0 of the divider is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20122 DIV 0 run sequence / DIV 0 RunSeq


0 32000 300
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance DIV 0 within the run-time group set in p20121.
sequence value.


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of dividend X1 and divisor X2 of instance DIV 1 of the divider.
Index: [0] = Dividend X0
[1] = Divisor X1

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - -
Description: Display parameter for quotients Y = X1/X2, integer number quotients YIN, and division remainder MOD = (Y - YIN)
x X2 of instance DIV 1 of the divider.
Index: [0] = Quotient Y
[1] = Integer number quotient YIN
[2] = Div remainder MOD


- - -
Description: Display parameter for the signal QF that the divisor X2 of instance DIV 1 of the divider is zero.
X2 = 0.0 => QF = 1
p20126 DIV 1 run-time group / DIV 1 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance DIV 1 of the divider is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20127 DIV 1 run sequence / DIV 1 RunSeq


0 32000 310
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance DIV 1 within the run-time group set in p20126.
sequence value.
p20128 CI: AVA 0 input X / AVA 0 input X


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of the input quantity X of instance AVA 0 of the absolute value generator with sign evalua-
tion.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r20129 CO: AVA 0 output Y / AVA 0 output Y


- - -
Description: Display parameter for output quantity Y of instance AVA 0 of the absolute value generator with sign evaluation.
r20130 BO: AVA 0 input negative SN / AVA 0 input neg SN


- - -
Description: Display parameter for signal SN that the input quantity X of instance AVA 0 of the absolute value generator with
sign evaluation is negative.
X < 0.0 => SN = 1
p20131 AVA 0 run-time group / AVA 0 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance AVA 0 of the absolute value generator with sign evalua-
tion is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20132 AVA 0 run sequence / AVA 0 RunSeq


0 32000 340
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance AVA 0 within the run-time group set in p20131.
sequence value.


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of the input quantity X of instance AVA 1 of the absolute value generator with sign evalua-
tion.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - -
Description: Display parameter for output quantity Y of instance AVA 1 of the absolute value generator with sign evaluation.


- - -
Description: Display parameter for signal SN that the input quantity X of instance AVA 1 of the absolute value generator with
sign evaluation is negative.
X < 0.0 => SN = 1
p20136 AVA 1 run-time group / AVA 1 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance AVA 1 of the absolute value generator with sign evalua-
tion is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20137 AVA 1 run sequence / AVA 1 RunSeq


0 32000 350
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance AVA 1 within the run-time group set in p20136.
sequence value.
p20138 BI: MFP 0 input pulse I / MFP 0 inp_pulse I


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the input pulse I of instance MFP 0 of the pulse generator.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20139 MFP 0 pulse duration in ms / MFP 0 pulse_dur ms


0.00 60000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse duration T in milliseconds of instance MFP 0 of the pulse generator.
r20140 BO: MFP 0 output Q / MFP 0 output Q


- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance MFP 0 of the pulse generator.
p20141 MFP 0 run-time group / MFP 0 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance MFP 0 of the pulse generator is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20142 MFP 0 run sequence / MFP 0 RunSeq


0 32000 370
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance MFP 0 within the run-time group set in p20141.
sequence value.


- - 0

Parameters
List of Parameters


0.00 60000.00 0.00


- - -


5 9999 9999
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 380
sequence value.
p20148 BI: PCL 0 input pulse I / PCL 0 inp_pulse I


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the input pulse I of instance PCL 0 of the pulse shortener.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20149 PCL 0 pulse duration in ms / PCL 0 pulse_dur ms


0.00 60000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse duration T in milliseconds of instance PCL 0 of the pulse shortener.
r20150 BO: PCL 0 output Q / PCL 0 output Q


- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance PCL 0 of the pulse shortener.
p20151 PCL 0 run-time group / PCL 0 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance PCL 0 of the pulse shortener is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20152 PCL 0 run sequence / PCL 0 RunSeq


0 32000 400
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PCL 0 within the run-time group set in p20151.
sequence value.


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the input pulse I of instance PCL 1 of the pulse shortener.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20154 PCL 1 pulse duration in ms / PCL 1 pulse_dur ms


0.00 60000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse duration T in milliseconds of instance PCL 1 of the pulse shortener.


- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance PCL 1 of the pulse shortener.
p20156 PCL 1 run-time group / PCL 1 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance PCL 1 of the pulse shortener is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20157 PCL 1 run sequence / PCL 1 RunSeq


0 32000 410
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PCL 1 within the run-time group set in p20156.
sequence value.
p20158 BI: PDE 0 input pulse I / PDE 0 inp_pulse I


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the input pulse I of instance PDE 0 of the closing delay device.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20159 PDE 0 pulse delay time in ms / PDE 0 t_del ms


0.00 60000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse delay time T in milliseconds of instance PDE 0 of the closing delay device.
r20160 BO: PDE 0 output Q / PDE 0 output Q


- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance PDE 0 of the closing delay device.
p20161 PDE 0 run-time group / PDE 0 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance PDE 0 of the closing delay device is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20162 PDE 0 run sequence / PDE 0 RunSeq


0 32000 430
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PDE 0 within the run-time group set in p20161.
sequence value.


- - 0

Parameters
List of Parameters


0.00 60000.00 0.00


- - -


5 9999 9999
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 440
sequence value.
p20168 BI: PDF 0 input pulse I / PDF 0 inp_pulse I


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the input pulse I of instance PDF 0 of the breaking delay device.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20169 PDF 0 pulse extension time in ms / PDF 0 t_ext ms


0.00 60000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse extension time T in milliseconds of instance PDF 0 of the breaking delay device.
r20170 BO: PDF 0 output Q / PDF 0 output Q


- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance PDF 0 of the breaking delay device.
p20171 PDF 0 run-time group / PDF 0 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance PDF 0 of the breaking delay device is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20172 PDF 0 run sequence / PDF 0 RunSeq


0 32000 460
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PDF 0 within the run-time group set in p20171.
sequence value.


- - 0

Parameters
List of Parameters


0.00 60000.00 0.00


- - -


5 9999 9999
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 470
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PDF 1 within the run-time group set in p20176.
sequence value.
p20178[0...1] BI: PST 0 inputs / PST 0 inputs


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for input pulse I and the reset input R of instance PST 0 of the pulse extension element.
Index: [0] = Input pulse I
[1] = Reset input R

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20179 PST 0 pulse duration in ms / PST 0 pulse_dur ms


0.00 60000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse duration T in milliseconds of instance PST 0 of the pulse extension element.
r20180 BO: PST 0 output Q / PST 0 output Q


- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance PST 0 of the pulse extension element.
p20181 PST 0 run-time group / PST 0 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance PST 0 of the pulse extension element is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20182 PST 0 run sequence / PST 0 RunSeq


0 7999 490
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PST 0 within the run-time group set in p20181.
sequence value.


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for input pulse I and the reset input R of instance PST 1 of the pulse extension element.
Index: [0] = Input pulse I
[1] = Reset input R

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20184 PST 1 pulse duration in ms / PST 1 pulse_dur ms


0.00 60000.00 0.00
Description: Setting parameter for pulse duration T in milliseconds of instance PST 1 of the pulse extension element.


- - -
Description: Display parameter for output pulse Q of instance PST 1 of the pulse extension element.
p20186 PST 1 run-time group / PST 1 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance PST 1 of the pulse extension element is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20187 PST 1 run sequence / PST 1 RunSeq


0 7999 500
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PST 1 within the run-time group set in p20186.
sequence value.
p20188[0...1] BI: RSR 0 inputs / RSR 0 inputs


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for set input S and reset input R of instance RSR 0 of the RS flipflop.
Index: [0] = Set S
[1] = Reset R

Parameters
List of Parameters
r20189 BO: RSR 0 output Q / RSR 0 output Q


- - -
Description: Display parameter for output Q of instance RSR 0 of the RS flipflop
r20190 BO: RSR 0 inverted output QN / RSR 0 inv outp QN


- - -
Description: Display parameter for inverted output QN of instance RSR 0 of the RS flipflop.
p20191 RSR 0 run-time group / RSR 0 RTG


1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance RSR 0 of the RS flipflop is to be called.
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
p20192 RSR 0 run sequence / RSR 0 RunSeq


0 7999 520
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance RSR 0 within the run-time group set in p20191.
sequence value.


- - 0
Index: [0] = Set S
[1] = Reset R

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - -


- - -


1 9999 9999
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6


0 7999 530
sequence value.
p20198[0...3] BI: DFR 0 inputs / DFR 0 inputs


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for trigger input I, D input D, set input S, and reset input R of instance DFR 0 of the D flipflop.
Index: [0] = Trigger input I
[1] = D input D
[2] = Set S
[3] = Reset R

Parameters
List of Parameters
r20199 BO: DFR 0 output Q / DFR 0 output Q


- - -
Description: Display parameter for output Q of instance DFR 0 of the D flipflop.
r20200 BO: DFR 0 inverted output QN / DFR 0 inv outp QN


- - -
Description: Display parameter for the inverted output QN of instance DFR 0 of the D flipflop.
p20201 DFR 0 run-time group / DFR 0 RTG


1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance DFR 0 of the D flipflop is to be called.
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
p20202 DFR 0 run sequence / DFR 0 RunSeq


0 32000 550
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance DFR 0 within the run-time group set in p20201.
sequence value.


- - 0
[1] = D input D
[2] = Set S
[3] = Reset R

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - -


- - -


1 9999 9999
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 560
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group of instance DFR 1 within the run-time group set in p20206.
sequence value.
p20208[0...1] BI: BSW 0 inputs / BSW 0 inputs


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities I0 and I1 of instance BSW 0 of the binary changeover switch.
[1] = Input I1

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20209 BI: BSW 0 switch setting I / BSW 0 sw_setting


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of the switch setting I of instance BSW 0 of the binary changeover switch.
r20210 BO: BSW 0 output Q / BSW 0 output Q


- - -
Description: Display parameter for output quantity Q of instance BSW 0 of the binary changeover switch.
p20211 BSW 0 run-time group / BSW 0 RTG


1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance BSW 0 of the binary changeover switch is to be
called.
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
p20212 BSW 0 run sequence / BSW 0 RunSeq


0 7999 580
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance BSW 0 within the run-time group set in p20211.
sequence value.


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities I0 and I1 of instance BSW 1 of the binary changeover switch.
[1] = Input I1

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of the switch setting I of instance BSW 1 of the binary changeover switch.


- - -
Description: Display parameter for output quantity Q of instance BSW 1 of the binary changeover switch.
p20216 BSW 1 run-time group / BSW 1 RTG


1 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance BSW 1 of the binary changeover switch is to be
called.
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6
p20217 BSW 1 run sequence / BSW 1 RunSeq


0 7999 590
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance BSW 1 within the run-time group set in p20216.
sequence value.
p20218[0...1] CI: NSW 0 inputs / NSW 0 inputs


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities X0 and X1 of instance NSW 0 of the numeric changeover switch.
[1] = Input X1

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20219 BI: NSW 0 switch setting I / NSW 0 sw_setting


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of the switch setting I of instance NSW 0 of the numeric changeover switch.
r20220 CO: NSW 0 output Y / NSW 0 output Y


- - -
Description: Display parameter for output quantity Y of instance NSW 0 of the numeric changeover switch.
p20221 NSW 0 run-time group / NSW 0 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance NSW 0 of the numeric changeover switch is to be
called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20222 NSW 0 run sequence / NSW 0 RunSeq


0 32000 610
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance NSW 0 within the run-time group set in p20221.
sequence value.


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities X0 and X1 of instance NSW 1 of the numeric changeover switch.
[1] = Input X1

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of the switch setting I of instance NSW 1 of the numeric changeover switch.


- - -
Description: Display parameter for output quantity Y of instance NSW 1 of the numeric changeover switch.
p20226 NSW 1 run-time group / NSW 1 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance NSW 1 of the numeric changeover switch is to be
called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20227 NSW 1 run sequence / NSW 1 RunSeq


0 32000 620
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance NSW 1 within the run-time group set in p20226.
sequence value.
p20228 CI: LIM 0 input X / LIM 0 input X


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity X of instance LIM 0 of the limiter.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20229 LIM 0 upper limit value LU / LIM 0 upper lim LU


-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Setting parameter for the upper limit value LU of instance LIM 0 of the limiter.
p20230 LIM 0 lower limit value LL / LIM 0 lower lim LL


-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Setting parameter for the lower limit value LL of instance LIM 0 of the limiter.
r20231 CO: LIM 0 output Y / LIM 0 output Y


- - -
Description: Display parameter for the limited output quantity Y of instance LIM 0 of the limiter.
r20232 BO: LIM 0 input quantity at the upper limit QU / LIM 0 QU


- - -
Description: Display parameter of instance LIM 0 of limiter QU (upper limit reached), i.e. QU = 1 for X >= LU.
r20233 BO: LIM 0 input quantity at the lower limit QL / LIM 0 QL


- - -
Description: Display parameter of instance LIM 0 of limiter QL (lower limit reached), i.e. QL = 1 for X <= LL.
p20234 LIM 0 run-time group / LIM 0 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance LIM 0 of the limiter is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20235 LIM 0 run sequence / LIM 0 RunSeq


0 32000 640
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance LIM 0 within the run-time group set in p20234.
sequence value.


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity X of instance LIM 1 of the limiter.
p20237 LIM 1 upper limit value LU / LIM 1 upper lim LU


-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Setting parameter for the upper limit value LU of instance LIM 1 of the limiter.
p20238 LIM 1 lower limit value LL / LIM 1 lower lim LL


-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Setting parameter for the lower limit value LL of instance LIM 1 of the limiter.


- - -
Description: Display parameter for the limited output quantity Y of instance LIM 1 of the limiter.


- - -
Description: Display parameter of instance LIM 1 of limiter QU (upper limit reached), i.e. QU = 1 for X >= LU.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - -
Description: Display parameter of instance LIM 1 of limiter QL (lower limit reached), i.e. QL = 1 for X <= LL.
p20242 LIM 1 run-time group / LIM 1 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance LIM 1 of the limiter is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20243 LIM 1 run sequence / LIM 1 RunSeq


0 32000 650
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance LIM 1 within the run-time group set in p20242.
sequence value.
p20244[0...1] CI: PT1 0 inputs / PT1 0 inputs


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity X and of setting value SV of instance PT1 0 of the smoothing element.
Index: [0] = Input X
[1] = Setting value SV
p20245 BI: PT1 0 accept setting value S / PT1 0 acc set val

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the "accept setting value" signal of instant PT1 0 of the smoothing element.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20246 PT1 0 smoothing time constant in ms / PT1 0 T_smooth ms


0.00 340.28235E36 0.00
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant T in milliseconds of instance PT1 0 of the smoothing element.
r20247 CO: PT1 0 output Y / PT1 0 output Y


- - -
Description: Display parameter for the smoothed output quantity Y of instance PT1 0 of the smoothing element.
p20248 PT1 0 run-time group / PT1 0 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance PT1 0 of the smoothing element is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20249 PT1 0 run sequence / PT1 0 RunSeq


0 32000 670
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PT1 0 within the run-time group set in p20248.
sequence value.


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity X and of setting value SV of instance PT1 1 of the smoothing element.

Parameters
List of Parameters

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the "accept setting value" signal of instant PT1 1 of the smoothing element.
p20252 PT1 1 smoothing time constant in ms / PT1 1 T_smooth ms


0.00 340.28235E36 0.00
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant T in milliseconds of instance PT1 1 of the smoothing element.


- - -
Description: Display parameter for the smoothed output quantity Y of instance PT1 1 of the smoothing element.
p20254 PT1 1 run-time group / PT1 1 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance PT1 1 of the smoothing element is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20255 PT1 1 run sequence / PT1 1 RunSeq


0 32000 680
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PT1 1 within the run-time group set in p20254.
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20256[0...1] CI: INT 0 inputs / INT 0 inputs


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity X and of setting value SV of instance INT 0 of the integrator.
p20257 INT 0 upper limit value LU / INT 0 upper lim LU


-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Sets the upper limit value LU of instance INT 0 of the integrator.
p20258 INT 0 lower limit value LL / INT 0 lower lim LL


-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Sets the lower limit value LL of instance INT 0 of the integrator.
p20259 INT 0 integrating time constant in ms / INT 0 T_Integr ms


0.00 340.28235E36 0.00
Description: Sets the integrating time constant Ti in milliseconds of instance INT 0 of the integrator.
p20260 BI: INT 0 accept setting value S / INT 0 acc set val

- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the "accept setting value" signal of instant INT 0 of the integrator.
r20261 CO: INT 0 output Y / INT 0 output Y


- - -
Description: Display parameter for output quantity Y of instance INT 0 of the integrator.
If LL>= LU, then the output quantity Y = LU.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r20262 BO: INT 0 integrator at the upper limit QU / INT 0 QU


- - -
Description: Display parameter for the signal QU that output quantity Y of instance INT 0 of the integrator has reached the upper
limit value LU.
r20263 BO: INT 0 integrator at the lower limit QL / INT 0 QL


- - -
Description: Display parameter for the signal QL that output quantity Y of instance INT 0 of the integrator has reached the lower
limit value LL.
p20264 INT 0 run-time group / INT 0 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance INT 0 of the integrator is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20265 INT 0 run sequence / INT 0 RunSeq


0 32000 700
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance INT 0 within the run-time group set in p20264.
sequence value.
p20266 CI: LVM 0 input X / LVM 0 input X


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity X of instance LVM 0 of the double-sided limiter.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20267 LVM 0 interval average value M / LVM 0 avg value M


-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Setting parameter for the interval average M of instance LVM 0 of the double-sided limiter.
p20268 LVM 0 interval limit L / LVM 0 limit L


-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Setting parameter for the interval limit L of instance LVM 0 of the double-sided limiter.
p20269 LVM 0 hyst HY / LVM 0 hyst HY


-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Setting parameter for hysteresis HY of instance LVM 0 of the double-sided limiter.
r20270 BO: LVM 0 input quantity above interval QU / LVM 0 X above QU


- - -
Description: Display parameter of instance LVM 0 of the double-sided limiter that input quantity X was at least once X > M + L
and X is >= M + L - HY.
r20271 BO: LVM 0 input quantity within interval QM / LVM 0 X within QM


- - -
Description: Display parameter of instance LVM 0 of the double-sided limiter that the input quantity X lies within the interval.
r20272 BO: LVM 0 input quantity below interval QL / LVM 0 X below QL


- - -
Description: Display parameter of instance LVM 0 of the double-sided limiter that input quantity X was at least once X < M - L
and X is <= M - L + HY.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20273 LVM 0 run-time group / LVM 0 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance LVM 0 of the double-sided limiter is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20274 LVM 0 run sequence / LVM 0 RunSeq


0 7999 720
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance LVM 0 within the run-time group set in p20273.
sequence value.


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity X of instance LVM 1 of the double-sided limiter.
p20276 LVM 1 interval average value M / LVM 1 avg value M


-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Setting parameter for the interval average M of instance LVM 1 of the double-sided limiter.
p20277 LVM 1 interval limit L / LVM 1 limit L


-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Setting parameter for the interval limit L of instance LVM 1 of the double-sided limiter.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20278 LVM 1 hyst HY / LVM 1 hyst HY


-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Setting parameter for hysteresis HY of instance LVM 1 of the double-sided limiter.


- - -
Description: Display parameter of instance LVM 1 of the double-sided limiter that input quantity X was at least once X > M + L
and X is >= M + L - HY.


- - -
Description: Display parameter of instance LVM 1 of the double-sided limiter that the input quantity X lies within the interval.


- - -
Description: Display parameter of instance LVM 1 of the double-sided limiter that input quantity X was at least once X < M - L
and X is <= M - L + HY.
p20282 LVM 1 run-time group / LVM 1 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance LVM 1 of the double-sided limiter is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20283 LVM 1 run sequence / LVM 1 RunSeq


0 7999 730
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance LVM within the run-time group set in p20282.
sequence value.
p20284 CI: DIF 0 input X / DIF 0 input X


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantity X of instance DIF 0 of the differentiating element.
p20285 DIF 0 differentiating time constant in ms / DIF 0 T_diff ms


0.00 340.28235E36 0.00
Description: Sets the differentiating time constant Td in milliseconds of instance DIF 0 of the differentiating element.
r20286 CO: DIF 0 output Y / DIF 0 output Y


- - -
Description: Display parameter for output quantity Y of instance DIF 0 of the differentiating element.
p20287 DIF 0 run-time group / DIF 0 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance DIF 0 of the differentiating element is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20288 DIF 0 run sequence / DIF 0 RunSeq


0 32000 750
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance DIF 0 within the run-time group set in p20287.
sequence value.


- - 0


- - -


1 9999 9999
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 770
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0


- - -


1 9999 9999
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 780
sequence value.


- - 0
[1] = Input X1
[2] = Input X2
[3] = Input X3

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - -


5 9999 9999
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 800
sequence value.
p20312[0...1] CI: NCM 0 inputs / NCM 0 inputs


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities X0 and X1 of instance NCM 0 of the numeric comparator.
[1] = Input X1
r20313 BO: NCM 0 output QU / NCM 0 output QU


- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity QU of instance NCM 0 of the numeric comparator.
QU is only set if X0 > X1.

Parameters
List of Parameters
r20314 BO: NCM 0 output QE / NCM 0 output QE


- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity QE of instance NCM 0 of the numeric comparator.
QE is only set if X0 = X1.
r20315 BO: NCM 0 output QL / NCM 0 output QL


- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity QL of instance NCM 0 of the numeric comparator.
QL is only set if X0 < X1.
p20316 NCM 0 run-time group / NCM 0 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance NCM 0 of the numeric comparator is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20317 NCM 0 run sequence / NCM 0 RunSeq


0 32000 820
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance NCM 0 within the run-time group set in p20316.
sequence value.


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source of input quantities X0 and X1 of instance NCM 1 of the numeric comparator.
[1] = Input X1

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity QU of instance NCM 1 of the numeric comparator.
QU is only set if X0 > X1.


- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity QE of instance NCM 1 of the numeric comparator.
QE is only set if X0 = X1.


- - -
Description: Display parameter for binary quantity QL of instance NCM 1 of the numeric comparator.
QL is only set if X0 < X1.
p20322 NCM 1 run-time group / NCM 1 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which the instance NCM 1 of the numeric comparator is to be called.
6: Run-time group 6
p20323 NCM 1 run sequence / NCM 1 RunSeq


0 32000 830
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance NCM 1 within the run-time group set in p20322.
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0
Index: [0] = Set S
[1] = Reset R


- - -


- - -


1 9999 9999
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6


0 7999 850
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0
[1] = D input D
[2] = Set S
[3] = Reset R


- - -


- - -


1 9999 9999
2: Run-time group 2
3: Run-time group 3
4: Run-time group 4
5: Run-time group 5
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 870
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group of instance DFR 2 within the run-time group set in p20332.
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0


0.00 60000.00 0.00


- - -


5 9999 9999
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 890
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0


0.00 60000.00 0.00


- - -


5 9999 9999
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 900
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0


0.00 60000.00 0.00


- - -


5 9999 9999
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 920
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0


0.00 60000.00 0.00


- - -


5 9999 9999
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 930
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0


0.00 60000.00 0.00


- - -


5 9999 9999
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 950
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0


0.00 60000.00 0.00


- - -


5 9999 9999
6: Run-time group 6


0 32000 960
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20372 CI: PLI 0 input X / PLI 0 input X


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for input X of the polyline (20 breakpoints) of instance PLI 0.
r20373 CO: PLI 0 output Y / PLI 0 output Y


- - -
Description: Display parameter for the output quantity Y of the polyline (20 breakpoints) of instance PLI 0
p20374[0...19] PLI 0 X-coordinate, A breakpoint / PLI 0 X-coordinate


-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Sets the x-coordinates for the breakpoints (A0...A19) of the polyline (20 breakpoints) of instance PLI 0.
Index: [0] = Breakpoint 0
[1] = Breakpoint 1
[2] = Breakpoint 2
[3] = Breakpoint 3
[4] = Breakpoint 4
[5] = Breakpoint 5
[6] = Breakpoint 6
[7] = Breakpoint 7
[8] = Breakpoint 8
[9] = Breakpoint 9
[10] = Breakpoint 10

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20375[0...19] PLI 0 Y-coordinate, B breakpoint / PLI 0 Y-coordinate


-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Sets the y-coordinates for the breakpoints (B0...B19) of the polyline (20 breakpoints) of instance PLI 0.
[1] = Breakpoint 1
[2] = Breakpoint 2
[3] = Breakpoint 3
[4] = Breakpoint 4
[5] = Breakpoint 5
[6] = Breakpoint 6
[7] = Breakpoint 7
[8] = Breakpoint 8
[9] = Breakpoint 9
p20376 PLI 0 run-time group / PLI 0 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance PLI 0 of the polyline is to be called
6: Run-time group 6
p20377 PLI 0 run sequence / PLI 0 RunSeq


0 32000 980
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PLI 0 within the run-time group set in p20376.
sequence value.

Parameters
List of Parameters


- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for input X of the polyline (20 breakpoints) of instance PLI 1.


- - -
Description: Display parameter for the output quantity Y of the polyline (20 breakpoints) of instance PLI 1
p20380[0...19] PLI 1 X-coordinate, A breakpoint / PLI 1 X-coordinate


-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Sets the x-coordinates for the breakpoints (A0...A19) of the polyline (20 breakpoints) of instance PLI 1.
[1] = Breakpoint 1
[2] = Breakpoint 2
[3] = Breakpoint 3
[4] = Breakpoint 4
[5] = Breakpoint 5
[6] = Breakpoint 6
[7] = Breakpoint 7
[8] = Breakpoint 8
[9] = Breakpoint 9

Parameters
List of Parameters
p20381[0...19] PLI 1 Y-coordinate, B breakpoint / PLI 1 Y-coordinate


-340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.0000
Description: Sets the y-coordinates for the breakpoints (B0...B19) of the polyline (20 breakpoints) of instance PLI 1.
[1] = Breakpoint 1
[2] = Breakpoint 2
[3] = Breakpoint 3
[4] = Breakpoint 4
[5] = Breakpoint 5
[6] = Breakpoint 6
[7] = Breakpoint 7
[8] = Breakpoint 8
[9] = Breakpoint 9
p20382 PLI 1 run-time group / PLI 1 RTG


5 9999 9999
Description: Setting parameter for the run-time group in which instance PLI 1 of the polyline is to be called
6: Run-time group 6
p20383 PLI 1 run sequence / PLI 1 RunSeq


0 32000 990
Description: Setting parameter for the run sequence of instance PLI 1 within the run-time group set in p20382.
sequence value.

Parameters
Command and Drive Data Sets – Overview
1.3 Command and Drive Data Sets – Overview
1.3.1 Command Data Sets (CDS)
Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4402100, Language: eng, Type: CDS

Parameters
p2236[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Tec_ctrl mop lower

Parameters

1.3.2 Drive Data Sets (DDS)
Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4402100, Language: eng, Type: DDS
p0340[0...n] Automatic calculation, motor/control parameters / Calc auto par
p0640[0...n] Current limit / Current limit
p1030[0...n] Motorized potentiometer configuration / Mop configuration
p1037[0...n] Motorized potentiometer maximum speed / MotP n_max
p1038[0...n] Motorized potentiometer minimum speed / MotP n_min
p1040[0...n] Motorized potentiometer starting value / Mop start value
p1047[0...n] Motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Mop ramp-up time
p1048[0...n] Motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Mop ramp-down time
p1063[0...n] Speed limit setpoint channel / n_limit setp
p1080[0...n] Minimum speed / n_min
p1082[0...n] Maximum speed / n_max

Parameters
p1101[0...n] Skip speed bandwidth / n_skip bandwidth

p1120[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-up time / RFG ramp-up time
p1123[0...n] Ramp-function generator minimum ramp-up time / RFG t_RU min
p1127[0...n] Ramp-function generator minimum ramp-down time / RFG t_RD min
p1134[0...n] Ramp-function generator rounding-off type / RFG round-off type
p1137[0...n] OFF3 final rounding-off time / RFG OFF3 t_end_del
p1145[0...n] Ramp-function generator tracking intensity. / RFG track intens
p1148[0...n] Ramp-function gen., tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down active / RFG tol HL/RL act
p1200[0...n] FlyRest oper mode / FlyRest op_mode
p1226[0...n] Threshold for zero speed detection / n_standst n_thresh
p1243[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor / Vdc_max dyn_factor
p1247[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min dyn_factor
p1249[0...n] Vdc_max controller speed threshold / Vdc_max n_thresh
p1250[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain / Vdc_ctrl Kp
p1251[0...n] Vdc controller integral time / Vdc_ctrl Tn
p1252[0...n] Vdc controller rate time / Vdc_ctrl t_rate
p1255[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold / Vdc_min t_thresh
p1256[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min response
p1257[0...n] Vdc_min controller speed threshold / Vdc_min n_thresh
p1283[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor (U/f) / Vdc_max dyn_factor
p1285[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min on_level
p1287[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) (U/f) / Vdc_min dyn_factor
p1288[0...n] Vdc_max controller feedback coupling factor ramp-fct. gen. (U/f) / Vdc_max factor RFG
p1290[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl Kp
p1291[0...n] Vdc controller integral time (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl Tn
p1292[0...n] Vdc controller rate time (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl t_rate
p1293[0...n] Vdc min controller output limit (U/f) / Vdc_min outp_lim
p1295[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold (U/f) / Vdc_min t_thresh
p1296[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) (U/f / Vdc_min response
p1297[0...n] Vdc_min controller speed threshold (U/f) / Vdc_min n_thresh
p1300[0...n] Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode / Op/cl-lp ctrl_mode
p1310[0...n] Voltage boost permanent / U_boost perm
p1311[0...n] Voltage boost at acceleration / U_boost accelerate
p1312[0...n] Voltage boost when starting / U_boost starting
p1333[0...n] U/f control FCC starting frequency / U/f FCC f_start

Parameters
p1334[0...n] U/f control slip compensation starting frequency / Slip comp start
p1335[0...n] Slip compensation, scaling / Slip comp scal
p1336[0...n] Slip compensation limit value / Slip comp lim val
p1338[0...n] U/f mode resonance damping gain / Uf Res_damp gain
p1339[0...n] U/f mode resonance damping filter time constant / Uf Res_damp T
p1340[0...n] I_max frequency controller proportional gain / I_max_ctrl Kp
p1341[0...n] I_max frequency controller integral time / I_max_ctrl Tn
p1345[0...n] I_max voltage controller proportional gain / I_max_U_ctrl Kp
p1346[0...n] I_max voltage controller integral time / I_max_U_ctrl Tn
p1349[0...n] U/f mode resonance damping maximum frequency / Uf res_damp f_max
p1350[0...n] Soft starting / Soft starting
p1400[0...n] Speed control configuration / n_ctrl config
p1401[0...n] Flux control configuration / Flux ctrl config
p1402[0...n] Closed-loop current control and motor model configuration / I_ctrl config
p1416[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 time constant / n_set_filt 1 T
p1452[0...n] Speed controller speed actual value smoothing time (SLVC) / n_C n_act T_s SLVC
p1456[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation lower starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKpLow
p1457[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation upper starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKp up
p1458[0...n] Adaptation factor, lower / Adapt_factor lower
p1459[0...n] Adaptation factor, upper / Adapt_factor upper
p1461[0...n] Speed controller Kp adaptation speed, upper scaling / n_ctrl Kp n upper
p1463[0...n] Speed controller Tn adaptation speed, upper scaling / n_ctrl Tn n upper
p1464[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed, lower / n_ctrl n lower
p1465[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed, upper / n_ctrl n upper
p1470[0...n] Speed controller encoderless operation P-gain / n_ctrl SLVC Kp
p1472[0...n] Speed controller encoderless operation integral time / n_ctrl SLVC Tn
p1487[0...n] Droop compensation torque scaling / Droop M_comp scal
p1488[0...n] Droop input source / Droop input source
p1489[0...n] Droop feedback scaling / Droop scaling
p1496[0...n] Acceleration pre-control scaling / a_before scaling
p1499[0...n] Accelerating for torque control, scaling / a for M_ctrl scal
p1514[0...n] Supplementary torque 2 scaling / M_suppl 2 scal
p1517[0...n] Accelerating torque smoothing time constant / M_accel T_smooth
p1530[0...n] Power limit motoring / P_max mot
p1531[0...n] Power limit regenerative / P_max gen
p1573[0...n] Flux threshold value magnetizing / Flux thresh magnet
p1582[0...n] Flux setpoint smoothing time / Flux setp T_smth
p1584[0...n] Field weakening operation, flux setpoint smoothing time / Field weak T_smth
p1594[0...n] Field-weakening controller, P gain / Field_ctrl Kp
p1596[0...n] Field weakening controller integral-action time / Field_ctrl Tn
p1610[0...n] Torque setpoint static (SLVC) / M_set static
p1611[0...n] Supplementary accelerating torque (SLVC) / M_suppl_accel
p1616[0...n] Current setpoint smoothing time / I_set T_smooth
p1654[0...n] Curr. setpoint torque-gen. smoothing time field weakening range / Isq_s T_smth FW
p1702[0...n] Isd current controller pre-control scaling / Isd_ctr_prectrScal

Parameters
p1703[0...n] Isq current controller pre-control scaling / Isq_ctr_prectrScal

p1715[0...n] Current controller P gain / I_ctrl Kp
p1717[0...n] Current controller integral-action time / I_ctrl Tn
p1726[0...n] Quadrature arm decoupling, scaling / Transv_decpl scal
p1727[0...n] Quadrature arm decoupling at voltage limit scaling / TrnsvDecplVmaxScal
p1730[0...n] Isd controller integral component shutdown threshold / Isd_ctrl I_thresh
p1740[0...n] Gain resonance damping for encoderless closed-loop control / Gain res_damp
p1745[0...n] Motor model error threshold stall detection / MotMod ThreshStall
p1755[0...n] Motor model changeover speed encoderless operation / MotMod n_chgSnsorl
p1758[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time closed/open-loop control / MotMod t cl_op
p1759[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time open/closed-loop control / MotMod t op_cl
p1764[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod woE n_adaKp
p1767[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod woE n_adaTn
p1774[0...n] Motor model, offset voltage compensation alpha / MotMod offs comp A
p1775[0...n] Motor model, offset voltage compensation beta / MotMod offs comp B
p1780[0...n] Motor model adaptation configuration / MotMod adapt conf
p1784[0...n] Motor model feedback scaling / Mod_FB_scal
p1785[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation Kp / MotMod Lh Kp
p1786[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation integral time / MotMod Lh Tn
r1787[0...n] Motor model Lh adaptation corrective value / MotMod Lh corr
p1795[0...n] Motor model kT adaptation integral time / MotMod kT Tn
r1797[0...n] Motor model kT adaptation corrective value / MotMod kT corr
p1800[0...n] Pulse frequency setpoint / Pulse freq setp
p1806[0...n] Filter time constant Vdc correction / T_filt Vdc_corr
p1820[0...n] Reverse the output phase sequence / Outp_ph_seq rev
p1959[0...n] Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config
p2149[0...n] Monitoring configuration / Monit config
p2152[0...n] Delay for comparison n > n_max / Del n > n_max
p2153[0...n] Speed actual value filter time constant / n_act_filt T
p2156[0...n] On delay, comparison value reached / t_on cmpr val rchd
p2162[0...n] Hysteresis speed n_act > n_max / Hyst n_act>n_max
p2166[0...n] Off delay n_act = n_set / t_del_off n_i=n_so
p2167[0...n] Switch-on delay n_act = n_set / t_on n_act=n_set
p2170[0...n] Current threshold value / I_thres
p2171[0...n] Current threshold value reached delay time / t_del I_thresh rch
p2172[0...n] DC link voltage, threshold value / Vdc thresh val
p2173[0...n] DC link voltage comparison delay time / t_del Vdc

Parameters
p2175[0...n] Motor locked speed threshold / Mot lock n_thresh

p2176[0...n] Torque threshold value comparison delay time / M_thrsh comp T_del
p2177[0...n] Motor locked delay time / Mot lock t_del
p2178[0...n] Motor stalled delay time / Mot stall t_del
p2179[0...n] Output load identification current limit / Outp_ld iden I_lim
p2180[0...n] Missing output load delay time / No load t_delay
p2181[0...n] Load monitoring response / Load monit resp
p2192[0...n] Load monitoring delay time / Load monit t_del
p2193[0...n] Load monitoring configuration / Load monit config
p2195[0...n] Torque utilization switch-off delay / M_util t_off
p2196[0...n] Torque utilization scaling / M_util scal
p2216[0...n] Technology controller fixed value selection method / Tec_ctr FixVal sel
p2230[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer configuration / Tec_ctr mop config
p2237[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum value / Tec_ctrl mop max
p2238[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum value / Tec_ctrl mop min
p2240[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer starting value / Tec_ctrl mop start
p2247[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Tec_ctr mop t_r-up
p2248[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Tec_ctrMop t_rdown
p3231[0...n] Load monitoring speed deviation / Load monit n_dev
p3233[0...n] Torque actual value filter, time constant / M_act_filt T

Parameters
p3856[0...n] Compound braking current / Compound I_brake
r3925[0...n] Identification final display / Ident final_disp
r3927[0...n] Motor data identification control word / MotID STW
r3928[0...n] Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config
r3929[0...n] Motor data identification modulated voltage generation / MotID U_gen mod
1.3.3 Motor Data Sets (MDS)
Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4402100, Language: eng, Type: MDS
p0300[0...n] Motor type selection / Mot type sel
p0301[0...n] Motor code number selection / Mot code No. sel
p0304[0...n] Rated motor voltage / Mot U_rated
p0305[0...n] Rated motor current / Mot I_rated
p0307[0...n] Rated motor power / Mot P_rated
p0308[0...n] Rated motor power factor / Mot cos_phi_rated
p0309[0...n] Rated motor efficiency / Mot eta_rated
p0310[0...n] Rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated
p0311[0...n] Rated motor speed / Mot n_rated
r0313[0...n] Motor pole pair number, actual (or calculated) / Mot PolePairNo act
p0314[0...n] Motor pole pair number / Mot pole pair No.
p0316[0...n] Motor torque constant / Mot kT
p0318[0...n] Motor stall current / Mot I_standstill
p0320[0...n] Motor rated magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rated
p0322[0...n] Maximum motor speed / Mot n_max
p0323[0...n] Maximum motor current / Mot I_max
p0325[0...n] Motor pole position identification current, 1st phase / Mot PolID I 1st ph
p0326[0...n] Motor stall torque correction factor / Mot M_stall_corr
p0327[0...n] Optimum motor load angle / Mot phi_load opt
p0328[0...n] Motor reluctance torque constant / Mot kT_reluctance
p0329[0...n] Motor pole position identification current / Mot PolID current
r0330[0...n] Rated motor slip / Mot slip_rated
r0331[0...n] Actual motor magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rtd act
r0332[0...n] Rated motor power factor / Mot cos_phi_rated
r0333[0...n] Rated motor torque / Mot M_rated
r0334[0...n] Actual motor-torque constant / Mot kT act
p0335[0...n] Motor cooling type / Motor cooling type
r0337[0...n] Rated motor EMF / Mot EMF_rated
p0341[0...n] Motor moment of inertia / Mot M_mom of inert
p0342[0...n] Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia / Mot MomInert Ratio
r0343[0...n] Rated motor current identified / Mot I_rated ident
p0344[0...n] Motor weight (for the thermal motor model) / Mot weight th mod
r0345[0...n] Nominal motor starting time / Mot t_start_rated
p0346[0...n] Motor excitation build-up time / Mot t_excitation
p0347[0...n] Motor de-excitation time / Mot t_de-excitat.
p0350[0...n] Motor stator resistance, cold / Mot R_stator cold
p0352[0...n] Cable resistance / Mot R_cable cold

Parameters
p0354[0...n] Motor rotor resistance cold / Mot R_r cold

p0356[0...n] Motor stator leakage inductance / Mot L_stator leak.
p0357[0...n] Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator d
p0358[0...n] Motor rotor leakage inductance / Mot L_rot leak
p0360[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance / Mot Lh
r0370[0...n] Motor stator resistance, cold / Mot R_stator cold
r0372[0...n] Cable resistance / Mot R_cable
r0373[0...n] Motor rated stator resistance / Mot R_stator rated
r0374[0...n] Motor rotor resistance cold / Mot R_r cold
r0376[0...n] Rated motor rotor resistance / Mot R_rotor rated
r0377[0...n] Motor leakage inductance, total / Mot L_leak total
r0378[0...n] Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator_d
r0382[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance transformed / Mot L_magn transf
r0384[0...n] Motor rotor time constant / damping time constant d axis / Mot T_rotor/T_Dd
r0386[0...n] Motor stator leakage time constant / Mot T_stator leak
r0395[0...n] Actual stator resistance / R_stator act
r0396[0...n] Actual rotor resistance / R_rotor act
p0601[0...n] Motor temperature sensor type / Mot_temp_sens type
p0604[0...n] Motor temperature alarm threshold / Mot_temp al thr
p0605[0...n] Motor temperature fault threshold / Mot_temp flt thr
p0606[0...n] Motor temperature timer / Mot_temp timer
p0607[0...n] Temperature sensor fault timer / Sensor fault time
p0610[0...n] Motor overtemperature response / Mot temp response
p0611[0...n] I2t motor model thermal time constant / I2t mot_mod T
p0612[0...n] Thermal motor model configuration / Therm Mot_mod conf
p0615[0...n] I2t motor model fault threshold / I2t mot_mod thresh
p0620[0...n] Thermal adaptation, stator and rotor resistance / Mot therm_adapt R
p0621[0...n] Identification stator resistance after restart / Rst_ident Restart
p0622[0...n] Motor excitation time for Rs_ident after powering up again / t_excit Rs_id
p0625[0...n] Motor ambient temperature / Mot T_ambient
p0626[0...n] Motor overtemperature, stator core / Mot T_over core
p0627[0...n] Motor overtemperature, stator winding / Mot T_over stator
p0628[0...n] Motor overtemperature rotor winding / Mot T_over rotor
r0630[0...n] Motor temperature model ambient temperature / MotTMod T_amb.
r0631[0...n] Motor temperature model, stator core temperature / MotTMod T_core
r0632[0...n] Motor temperature model, stator winding temperature / MotTMod T_copper
r0633[0...n] Motor temperature model, rotor temperature / MotTMod T_rotor
p0634[0...n] Q flux flux constant unsaturated / PSIQ KPSI UNSAT
p0635[0...n] Q flux quadrature axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KIQ UNSAT
p0636[0...n] Q flux direct axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KID UNSAT
p0637[0...n] Q flux flux gradient saturated / PSIQ Grad SAT
p0650[0...n] Actual motor operating hours / Mot t_oper act
p0651[0...n] Motor operating hours maintenance interval / Mot t_op maint
p0826[0...n] Motor changeover, motor number / Mot_chng mot No.
p1231[0...n] DC braking configuration / DCBRK config

Parameters
p1232[0...n] DC braking, braking current / DCBRK I_brake

p1233[0...n] DC braking time / DCBRK time
p1234[0...n] Speed at the start of DC braking / DCBRK n_start
p1909[0...n] Motor data identification control word / MotID STW
p1980[0...n] PolID technique / PolID technique
p1999[0...n] Ang. commutation offset calibr. and PollD scaling / Com_ang_offs scal
r3926[0...n] Alternating voltage generation base voltage amplitude / Alt U_gen U_base
1.3.4 Power unit Data Set (PDS)
Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4402100, Language: eng, Type: PDS
r0200[0...n] Power unit code number actual / PU code no. act
p0201[0...n] Power unit code number / PU code no
r0203[0...n] Actual power unit type / PU actual type
r0204[0...n] Power unit hardware properties / PU HW property

Parameters
Connector/Binector (BICO)-Parameters
1.4 Connector/Binector (BICO)-Parameters
1.4.1 Binector Input Parameters
Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4402100, Language: eng, Type: BI

p0782[0...1] BI: CU analog outputs invert signal source / CU AO inv S_src
p0806 BI: Inhibit master control / PcCtrl inhibit
p0897 BI: Parking axis selection / Parking axis sel

Parameters
p2236[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Tec_ctrl mop lower
p9705 BI: SI Motion: Test stop signal source / SI Mtn test stop

Parameters

p20260 BI: INT 0 accept setting value S / INT 0 acc set val
1.4.2 Connector Input Parameters
Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4402100, Language: eng, Type: CI

p0771[0...1] CI: CU analog outputs signal source / CU AO S_src

Parameters
p2016[0...3] CI: Comm IF USS PZD send word / Comm USS send word
p2099[0...1] CI: Connector-binector converter signal source / Con/bin S_src
p20256[0...1] CI: INT 0 inputs / INT 0 inputs
p20284 CI: DIF 0 input X / DIF 0 input X

Parameters

1.4.3 Binector Output Parameters
Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4402100, Language: eng, Type: BO

r0751.0...9 BO: CU analog inputs status word / CU AI status word
r0785.0...1 BO: CU analog outputs status word / CU AO ZSW
r0807.0 BO: Master control active / PcCtrl active
r1025.0 BO: Fixed speed setpoint status / n_setp_fix status
r2043.0...2 BO: PROFIdrive PZD state / PD PZD state
r9935.0 BO: POWER ON delay signal / POWER ON t_delay

Parameters

r20262 BO: INT 0 integrator at the upper limit QU / INT 0 QU
r20263 BO: INT 0 integrator at the lower limit QL / INT 0 QL
1.4.4 Connector Output Parameters
Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4402100, Language: eng, Type: CO

r0025 CO: Output voltage smoothed / U_outp smooth
r0026 CO: DC link voltage smoothed / Vdc smooth
r0027 CO: Absolute actual current smoothed / I_act abs val smth
r0032 CO: Active power actual value smoothed / P_actv_act smth

Parameters
r0034 CO: Motor utilization / Motor utilization

r0035 CO: Motor temperature / Mot temp
r0036 CO: Power unit overload I2t / PU overload I2t
r0037[0...19] CO: Power unit temperatures / PU temperatures
r0060 CO: Speed setpoint before the setpoint filter / n_set before filt.
r0062 CO: Speed setpoint after the filter / n_set after filter
r0063[0...2] CO: Speed actual value / n_act
r0064 CO: Speed controller system deviation / n_ctrl system dev
r0066 CO: Output frequency / f_outp
r0067 CO: Output current, maximum / I_outp max
r0069[0...6] CO: Phase current actual value / I_phase act value
r0070 CO: Actual DC link voltage / Vdc act val
r0072 CO: Output voltage / U_output
r0074 CO: Modulat_depth / Modulat_depth
r0075 CO: Current setpoint field-generating / Id_set
r0076 CO: Current actual value field-generating / Id_act
r0077 CO: Current setpoint torque-generating / Iq_set
r0078 CO: Current actual value torque-generating / Iq_act
r0079 CO: Torque setpoint / M_set total
r0080[0...1] CO: Torque actual value / M_act
r0081 CO: Torque utilization / M_Utilization
r0082[0...2] CO: Active power actual value / P_act
r0083 CO: Flux setpoint / Flex setp
r0084[0...1] CO: Flux actual value / Flux act val
r0087 CO: Actual power factor / Cos phi act
r0094 CO: Transformation angle / Transformat_angle
r0289 CO: Maximum power unit output current / PU I_outp max
r0586 CO: Measuring probe, speed actual value / MT n_act
r0587 CO: Measuring probe, measuring time measured / MT t_meas measured
r0588 CO: Measuring probe, pulse counter / MT pulse counter
r0752[0...1] CO: CU analog inputs input voltage/current actual / CU AI U/I_inp act
r0755[0...1] CO: CU analog inputs actual value in percent / CU AI value in %
r0944 CO: Counter for fault buffer changes / Fault buff change
r1024 CO: Fixed speed setpoint effective / n_set_fixed eff
r1045 CO: Mot. potentiometer speed setp. in front of ramp-fct. gen. / Mop n_set bef RFG
r1050 CO: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator / Mop setp after RFG
r1073 CO: Main setpoint effective / Main setpoint eff

Parameters
r1077 CO: Supplementary setpoint effective / Suppl setpoint eff

r1078 CO: Total setpoint effective / Total setpoint eff
r1084 CO: Speed limit positive effective / n_limit pos eff
r1087 CO: Speed limit negative effective / n_limit neg eff
r1112 CO: Speed setpoint after minimum limiting / n_set n. min_lim
r1114 CO: Setpoint after the direction limiting / Setp after limit
r1119 CO: Ramp-function generator setpoint at the input / RFG setp at inp
r1149 CO: Ramp-function generator, acceleration / RFG acceleration
r1150 CO: Ramp-function generator speed setpoint at the output / RFG n_set at outp
r1169 CO: Speed controller, speed setpoints 1 and 2 / n_ctrl n_set 1/2
r1170 CO: Speed controller, setpoint sum / n_ctrl setp sum
r1258 CO: Vdc controller output / Vdc_ctrl output
r1298 CO: Vdc controller output (U/f) / Vdc_ctrl output
r1337 CO: Actual slip compensation / Slip comp act val
r1343 CO: I_max controller frequency output / I_max_ctrl f_outp
r1348 CO: U/f control Eco factor actual value / U/f Eco fac act v
r1438 CO: Speed controller, speed setpoint / n_ctrl n_set
r1454 CO: Speed controller system deviation I component / n_ctrl sys dev Tn
r1468 CO: Speed controller P-gain effective / n_ctr Kp eff
r1482 CO: Speed controller I torque output / n_ctrl I-M_output
r1490 CO: Droop feedback speed reduction / Droop n_reduction
r1493 CO: Moment of inertia, total / M_inertia total
r1508 CO: Torque setpoint before supplementary torque / M_set bef. M_suppl
r1516 CO: Supplementary torque and acceleration torque / M_suppl + M_accel
r1518[0...1] CO: Accelerating torque / M_accel
r1526 CO: Torque limit upper without offset / M_max up w/o offs
r1527 CO: Torque limit lower without offset / M_max low w/o offs
r1538 CO: Upper effective torque limit / M_max upper eff
r1539 CO: Lower effective torque limit / M_max lower eff
r1547[0...1] CO: Torque limit for speed controller output / M_max outp n_ctrl
r1548[0...1] CO: Stall current limit torque-generating maximum / Isq_max stall
r1593[0...1] CO: Field weakening controller / flux controller output / Field/Fl_ctrl outp
r1597 CO: Field weakening controller output / Field_ctrl outp
r1598 CO: Total flux setpoint / Flux setp total
r1718 CO: Isq controller output / Isq_ctrl outp
r1723 CO: Isd controller output / Isd_ctrl outp
r1732[0...1] CO: Direct-axis voltage setpoint / Direct U set
r1733[0...1] CO: Quadrature-axis voltage setpoint / Quad U set
r1770 CO: Motor model speed adaptation proportional component / MotMod n_adapt Kp
r1771 CO: Motor model speed adaptation I comp. / MotMod n_adapt Tn
r1801[0...1] CO: Pulse frequency / Pulse frequency
r1809 CO: Modulator mode actual / Modulator mode act
r2050[0...7] CO: PROFIBUS PZD receive word / PZD recv word
r2089[0...4] CO: Send binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW send

Parameters
r2120 CO: Sum of fault and alarm buffer changes / Sum buffer changed
r2121 CO: Counter, alarm buffer changes / Alrm buff changed
r2131 CO: Actual fault code / Actual fault code
r2132 CO: Actual alarm code / Actual alarm code
r2169 CO: Actual speed smoothed signals / n_act smth message
r2224 CO: Technology controller, fixed value effective / Tec_ctr FixVal eff
r2245 CO: Technology controller mot. potentiometer setpoint before RFG / Tec_ctr mop befRFG
r2250 CO: Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint after RFG / Tec_ctr mop aftRFG
r2260 CO: Technology controller setpoint after ramp-function generator / Tec_ctr set aftRFG
r2262 CO: Technology controller setpoint after filter / Tec_ctr set aftFlt
r2266 CO: Technology controller actual value after filter / Tec_ctr act aftFlt
r2272 CO: Technology controller actual value scaled / Tech_ctrl act scal
r2273 CO: Technology controller error / Tec_ctrl error
p2291 CO: Technology controller maximum limiting / Tec_ctrl max_limit
p2292 CO: Technology controller minimum limiting / Tec_ctrl min_lim
r2294 CO: Technology controller output signal / Tec_ctrl outp_sig
p2295 CO: Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctrl outp scal
r2344 CO: Technology controller last speed setpoint (smoothed) / Tec_ctrl n_setp_sm
r2902[0...14] CO: Fixed values [%] / Fixed values [%]
r3131 CO: Current flt value / Current flt value
r3132 CO: Actual component number / Act comp_no.
r9733[0...2] CO: SI Motion setpoint speed limit effective / SI Mtn setp_lim

Parameters

r20261 CO: INT 0 output Y / INT 0 output Y
r20286 CO: DIF 0 output Y / DIF 0 output Y
1.4.5 Connector/Binector Output Parameters
Product: SINAMICS G120 CU240, Version: 4402100, Language: eng, Type: CO/BO
r0046.0...31 CO/BO: Missing enable sig / Missing enable sig
r0050.0...1 CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS effective / CDS effective
r0051.0...1 CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS effective / DDS effective
r0054.0...15 CO/BO: Control word 1 / STW 1
r0055.0...15 CO/BO: Supplementary control word / Suppl STW
r0835.2...8 CO/BO: Data set changeover status word / DDS_ZSW
r0836.0...1 CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS selected / CDS selected
r0837.0...1 CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS selected / DDS selected
r0898.0...14 CO/BO: Control word sequence control / STW seq_ctrl
r0899.0...13 CO/BO: Status word sequence control / ZSW seq_ctrl
r1198.0...15 CO/BO: Control word setpoint channel / STW setpoint chan
r1199.0...6 CO/BO: Ramp-function generator status word / RFG ZSW
r1204.0...13 CO/BO: Flying restart, U/f control status / FlyRest Uf st
r1205.0...15 CO/BO: Flying restart, vector control status / FlyRest vector st
r1214.0...15 CO/BO: Automatic restart, status / AR status
r1239.8...13 CO/BO: DC braking status word / DCBRK ZSW
r1406.4...15 CO/BO: Control word speed controller / STW n_ctrl
r1407.0...15 CO/BO: Status word speed controller / ZSW n_ctrl
r1408.0...14 CO/BO: Status word current controller / ZSW I_ctrl
r2129.0...15 CO/BO: Trigger word for faults and alarms / Trigger word
r2138.7...15 CO/BO: Control word faults/alarms / STW fault/alarm
r2225.0 CO/BO: Technology controller fixed value selection status word / Tec_ctr FixVal ZSW
r2349.0...12 CO/BO: Technology controller status word / Tec_ctrl status
r3113.0...15 CO/BO: NAMUR message bit bar / NAMUR bit bar
r3333.0...3 CO/BO: 2-3-WIRE Output / 2-3-WIRE OUT
r3859.0 CO/BO: Compound braking status word / Compound Br ZSW

Parameters
r9720.0...13 CO/BO: SI Motion control signals integrated in the drive / SI Mtn integ STW
r9723.0...16 CO/BO: SI Motion diagnostic signals integrated in the drive / SI Mtn integ diag
r9734.0...14 CO/BO: SI Motion Safety Info Channel status word / SI Mtn info ch ZSW
r9742.0...15 CO/BO: SI Motion drive-integrated status signals (processor 2) / SI Mtn int stat P2
r9772.0...20 CO/BO: SI status (processor 1) / SI status P1
r9773.0...31 CO/BO: SI status (processor 1 + processor 2) / SI status P1+P2
r9872.0...20 CO/BO: SI status (processor 2) / SI Status P2

Parameters
Quick commissioning (p0010 = 1)
1.5 Quick commissioning (p0010 = 1)
The following parameters are necessary for quick commissioning (p0010 = 1).
.
Table 1-7 Quick commissioning (p0010 = 1)
Par.-No. Name Access level Can be

changed
p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter 1 C(1)T

p0015 Macro drive unit 1 C,C(1)
p0100 IEC/NEMA mot stds 1 C(1)
p0205 Power unit application 1 C(1,2)
p0230 Drive filter type, motor side 1 C(1,2)
p0300 Motor type selection 2 C(1,3)
p0301 Motor code number selection 2 C(1,3)
p0304 Rated motor voltage 1 C(1,3)
p0305 Rated motor current 1 C(1,3)
p0307 Rated motor power 2 C(1,3)
p0308 Rated motor power factor 1 C(1,3)
p0309 Rated motor efficiency 1 C(1,3)
p0310 Rated motor frequency 1 C(1,3)
p0311 Rated motor speed 1 C(1,3)
p0314 Motor pole pair number 1 C(1,3)
p0316 Motor torque constant 3 C(1,3)
p0322 Maximum motor speed 3 C(1,3)UT
p0323 Maximum motor current 1 C(1,3)
p0335 Motor cooling type 1 C(1,3)
p0500 Technology application PM230: 4 C(1,3)T
PM240: 2
p0640 Current limit 2 C(1,5)T
p0700 Command source selection 1 C(1,3)UT
p0922 PROFIdrive telegram selection 1 C(1)T
p0970 Reset drive parameters 1 C(1,30)
p1000 Selecting the speed setpoint 1 C(1)T

Parameters
Quick commissioning (p0010 = 1)
Table 1-7 Quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), continued
Par.-No. Name Access level Can be

changed
p1080 Minimum speed 1 C(1)T

p1082 Maximum speed 1 C(1)T
p1120 Ramp-function generator ramp-up time 1 C(1)UT
p1121 Ramp-function generator ramp-down time 1 C(1)UT
p1135 OFF3 ramp-down time 2 C(1)UT
p1300 Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode 2 C(1)T
p1500 Selecting the torque setpoint 2 C(1)T
p1900 Motor data identification and rotating 2 C(1)T
measurement
p2196 Torque utilization scaling 1 C(1,3)UT
p3900 Completion of quick commissioning 1 C(1)
When p0010 = 1 is chosen, p0003 (user access level) can be used to select the parameters
to be accessed.
At the end of the quick commissioning sequence, set p3900 = 1 to carry out the necessary
motor calculations and clear all other parameters (not included in p0010 = 1) to their default
settings.
Note
This applies only in Quick Commissioning mode.

Function diagrams 2
Contents
2.1 Contents: function diagrams 2-488
2.2 Explanations for the function diagrams 2-493
2.3 Overview 2-498
2.4 Input/Output Terminals 2-506
2.5 Communication 2-517
2.6 Internal control/status words 2-539
2.7 Braking Control 2-557
2.8 Safety Integrated 2-559
2.9 Setpoint channel 2-572
2.10 V/f control 2-582
2.11 Vector control 2-586
2.12 Free Function Blocks 2-606
2.13 Technology functions 2-627
2.14 Technology controller 2-629
2.15 Signals and monitoring functions 2-634
2.16 Faults and warnings 2-644
2.17 Data sets 2-649

Function diagrams
Contents: function diagrams
2.1 Contents: function diagrams
2.2 Explanations for the function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-493

1020 – Explanation of the symbols (Part 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-494
1030 – Handling BICO technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-497
2.3 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-498

1520 – PROFIdrive/PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-499
1530 – Internal control/status words, data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-500
1550 – Setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-501
1690 – Vector control, V/f control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-502
1700 – Vector control, speed control and generation of the torque limits . . . . . . . . . . . 2-503
1710 – Vector control, current control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-504
1750 – Monitoring functions, faults, alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-505
2.4 Input/Output Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-506

2221 – CU240B-2: Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI0 ... DI3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-507
2220 – CU240E-2: Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI0 ... DI5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-508
2223 – CU240B-2: Analog inputs as Digital inputs (DI11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-509
2222 – CU240E-2: Analog inputs as Digital inputs (DI11 ... DI12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-510
2231 – CU240B-2: Digital output (DO0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-511
2230 – CU240E-2: Digital outputs (DO0 ... DO2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-512
9567 – CU240B-2: Analog input 0 (AI0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-513
9566 – CU240E-2: Analog inputs 0 ... 1 (AI0 ... AI1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-514
9573 – CU240B-2: Analog output 0 (AO0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-515
9572 – CU240E-2: Analog outputs 0 ... 1 (AO0 ... AO1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-516
2.5 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-517

2.5.1 Fieldbus Interface (USS, Modbus) (CU240B/E-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-518
9310 – Configuration, addresses and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-519
9342 – STW1 control word interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-520
9352 – ZSW1 status word interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-521
9360 – Receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-522
9370 – Send telegram, free interconnection via BICO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-523
9372 – Status words, free interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-524

Function diagrams
2.5.2 PROFIdrive / PROFIBUS (CU240B/E-2 DP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-525

2410 – PROFIBUS, addresses and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-526
2420 – Telegrams and Process Data (PZD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-527
2440 – PZD receive signals interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-528
2441 – STW1 control word interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-529
2442 – STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-530
2444 – STW3 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-531
2450 – PZD send652 signals interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-532
2451 – ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-533
2468 – Receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-536
2470 – Send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-537
2472 – Status words, free interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-538
2.6 Internal control/status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-539

2501 – Control word, sequence control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-540
2503 – Status word, sequence control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-541
2505 – Control word, setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-542
2510 – Status word 1 (r0052) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-543
2511 – Status word 2 (r0053) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-544
2512 – Control word 1 (r0054) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-545
2513 – Control word 2 (r0055) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-546
2520 – Control word, speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-547
2522 – Status word, speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-548
2526 – Status word, closed-loop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-549
2530 – Status word, current control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-550
2534 – Status word, monitoring functions 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-551
2546 – Control word, faults/alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-554
2548 – Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-555
2634 – Sequence control - Missing enable signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-556
2.7 Braking Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-557

2701 – Basic braking control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-558

Function diagrams
2.8 Safety Integrated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-559

2800 – Basic Functions, Parameter Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-560
2802 – Basic Functions, Monitoring functions and faults/alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-561
2804 – Basic Functions, Status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-562
2810 – Basic Functions, STO: Safe Torque Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-563
2812 – Basic Functions, F-DI: Fail-safe Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-564
2820 – SI Motion, SLS: Safely-Limited Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-565
2825 – SI Motion, SS1: Safe Stop 1, Internal STOP A, B, F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-566
2834 – SI Motion, Status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-567
2840 – SI Motion, PROFIsafe Control word and Status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-568
2846 – SI Motion, Parameter Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-569
2850 – SI Motion, Fail-safe Digital Inputs (F-DI0 ... F-DI2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-570
2855 – SI Motion, Safe State selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-571
2.9 Setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-572

3010 – Fixed speed setpoints, binary selection (p1016 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-573
3011 – Fixed speed setpoints, direct selection (p1016 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-574
3020 – Motorized potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-575
3030 – Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-576
3040 – Direction limitation and direction reversal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-577
3050 – Skip frequency bands and frequency limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-578
3060 – Basic ramp-function generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-579
3070 – Extended ramp-function generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-580
3080 – Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-581
2.10 V/f control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-582

6300 – V/f characteristic and voltage boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-583
6310 – Resonance damping and slip compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-584
6320 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (PM230 / PM240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-585
2.11 Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-586

6030 – Speed setpoint, droop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-587
6031 – Pre-control balancing, acceleration model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-588
6040 – Speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-589
6050 – Kp_n/Tn_n adaption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-590

Function diagrams
6060 – Torque setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-591

6220 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (Vector control, PM230 / PM240) . 2-592
6490 – Speed control configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-593
6491 – Flux control configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-594
6630 – Upper/lower torque limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-595
6640 – Current/power/torque limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-596
6710 – Current setpoint filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-597
6714 – Iq and Id controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-598
6721 – Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-599
6722 – Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-600
6723 – Field weakening controller, flux controller (ASM, p0300 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-601
6724 – Field weakening controller (PEM, p0300 = 2xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-602
6730 – Interface to the Power Module (ASM, p0300 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-603
6731 – Interface to the Power Module (PEM, p0300 = 2xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-604
6799 – Display signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-605
2.12 Free Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-606

7200 – Run-time groups / Sampling times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-607
7210 – AND (AND function block with 4 inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-608
7212 – OR (OR function block with 4 inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-609
7214 – XOR (XOR function block with 4 inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-610
7216 – NOT (inverter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-611
7220 – ADD (adder with 4 inputs), SUB (subtracter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-612
7222 – MUL (multiplier), DIV (divider) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-613
7224 – AVA (absolute value generators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-614
7225 – NCM (numerical comparator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-615
7226 – PLI (scaling polyline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-616
7230 – MFP (pulse generator), PCL (pulse shortener) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-617
7232 – PDE (switch-in delay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-618
7233 – PDF (switch-out delay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-619
7234 – PST (pulse extender) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-620
7240 – RSR (RS flipflop), DFR (D flipflop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-621
7250 – BSW (binary changeover switch), NSW (numerical changeover switch) . . . . . . 2-622
7260 – LIM (limiter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-623
7262 – PT1 (smoothing element) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-624
7264 – INT (integrator), DIF (differentiating element) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-625

Function diagrams
7270 – LVM (limit value monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-626
2.13 Technology functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-627

7017 – DC brake (p0300 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-628
2.14 Technology controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-629

7950 – Fixed values, binary selection (p2216 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-630
7951 – Fixed values, direct selection (p2216 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-631
7954 – Motorized potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-632
7958 – Closed-loop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-633
2.15 Signals and monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-634

8010 – Speed signals 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-635
8011 – Speed signals 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-636
8012 – Torque signals, motor locked/stalled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-637
8013 – Load monitoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-638
8014 – Thermal monitoring, power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-639
8016 – Thermal monitoring, motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-640
8017 – Thermal I2t motor model (PEM, p0300 = 2xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-641
8020 – Monitoring functions 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-642
8021 – Monitoring functions 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-643
2.16 Faults and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-644

8060 – Fault buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-645
8065 – Warning buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-646
8070 – Fault/warning trigger word (r2129) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-647
8075 – Fault/warning configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-648
2.17 Data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-649

8560 – Command Data Sets (CDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-650
8565 – Drive Data Sets (DDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-651

Function diagrams
Explanations for the function diagrams
2.2 Explanations for the function diagrams
Function diagrams
1020 – Explanation of the symbols (Part 1) 2-494
1030 – Handling BICO technology 2-497

Parameters Connectors Binectors Data sets
2-494

Function diagrams
Fig. 2-1 Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning
Parameter name [Unit] Monitoring parameter with Parameter name Connector input CI with Parameter name Binector input BI with with pxxxx[C] Parameter belongs to the
rxxxx[y..z] unit [Unit] and index range pxxxx[y..z] index range [y..z] pxxxx[y..z] index range [y..z] or data set Command Data Set (CDS).
[y..z] or data set [C/D] (Def) or data set [C/D] (Def.y) [C/D] and factory setting.bit
and factory setting (Def) *) number (Def)
1020 – Explanation of the symbols (Part 1)
pxxxx[D] Parameter belongs to the Drive

Parameter name Setting parameter with min/ Parameter name [Unit] Connector output CO with Parameter name Binector output BO Data Set (DDS).
from ... to [Unit] max value and unit [Unit] data rxxxx[y..z] unit [Unit] and with index rxxxx
pxxxx[C/D] (Def) set [C/D] and factory setting range [y..z]
(Def) *)
Connectors/binectors Pre-assigned connectors

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning
Parameter name Parameter name Setting parameter with min/
rxxxx from ... to [Unit] max value and unit [Unit] data
Connector/binector output CO/BO pxxxx[D] (Def)
rxxxx set [D] and factory setting
(Def)
Information on parameters, binectors, connectors Cross references between diagrams

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning
Parameter name Parameter name (up to 18 characters)
[dimension unit] Signal path The function diagrams are sub-divided into signal
paths 1...8 in order to facilitate orientation.
[Unit]
"r" = monitoring parameter. These parameters are read-only Text Text = Unique signal designation
rxxxx[y] or "xxxx" stands for the parameter number [aaaa.b] aaaa = Signal goes to target diagram aaa
rxxxx[y...z] or "[y]" specifies the applicable index, "[y...z]" specifies the index range b = Signal goes to signal path b
rxxxx[y].ww or ".ww" specifies the bit number (e.g. 0...15). Text Text = Unique signal designation
rxxxx.ww [cccc.d] cccc = Signal comes from source diagram cccc
"p" = setting parameter. These parameters can be changed. d = Signal comes from signal path d
pxxxx[y] or "xxxx" stands for the parameter number,
To "function diagram name" [aaaa.b] = binectors.
pxxxx[y...z] or "[y]" specifies the applicable index, "[y...z]" specifies the index range ".ww" specifies
pxxxx[y].ww or the bit number (e.g. 0...15).
© Siemens AG 2011 All Rights Reserved
pxxxx.ww
Value range. Cross references for control bits
from ... to Symbol Meaning
Parameter number (xxxx) with Index number [y] and bit number .ww.
pxxxx= Original parameter of signal
(xxxx[y].ww) pxxxx
aaaa = Signal comes from source diagram
Factory setting. [aaaa.b] aaaa
(Def) b = Signal comes from signal path b
Factory setting with bit number as prefix.
(Def.w)
Diagram references for setting parameters that occur a multiple number of times.
[aaaa.b] [Function diagram number, signal path]
*) For some parameters the value for the factory setting is calculated during commissioning for they are dependent on Power Module and motor (see Section 1.1.1 "Calculated").
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Explanations for the function diagrams FP_1020_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 1020 -
Explanation of the symbols (Part 1) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Symbols for logic functions Symbols for computational and closed-loop control functions
Fig. 2-2 S
1 Logical inversion
1 y Threshold value switch 1/0
AND element with logical inversion of an input x
& Outputs at y a logical "1" if x < S.
signal 0
S
1 OR element
x1 1 y Threshold value switch 0/1

y Exclusiv-OR/XOR x
=1 Outputs at y a logical "1" if x > S.
x2 y = 1 when x1 != x2 is. 0
S
R/S flip-flop
S Q S = setting input
R = reset input Threshold value 1/0 with hysteresis
R Q Q = non-inverted output 1
x y Outputs a logical "1" at y if x < S.
Q = inverted output
If x >= S + H then y returns to 0.
0
Symbols for computational and closed-loop control functions

H
x y Sign reversal
-1 S
y = -x
Threshold value 0/1 with hysteresis

x y Absolute value generator
1 Outputs a logical "1" at y if x > S.
y = |x| x y
If x <= S - H then y returns to 0.
0
x1
Divider
y x1

y= x
2
x2 H Limiter
LU MLU
x y
Comparator x is limited to the upper limit LU and the lower limit LL
>0 Output y = a logical "1", if the analog signal x y and output at y.
x > 0, i.e. is positive. or
The digital signals MLU and MLL have the value "1", if
the upper or lower limit is active.
dx Differentiator LL MLL
x y
dt dx
y=
dt
Sample & Hold element
Function diagrams
Symbol for monitoring SET
Sample and hold element.
x S&H y y = x if SET = 1
Axxxxx (not retentively saved at POWER OFF)
Monitoring or Monitoring
Fxxxxx
2-495
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 1021 -
Switch-on delay Switch symbol 2nd-order filter (bandstop/general filter)
2-496

Function diagrams
Fig. 2-3
pxxxx pxxxx
x y
T 0 Simple changeover switch Natural frequency, Damping, numerator
x T 0 y 0 numerator D_z
The switch position is shown according to fn_z pxxxx
pxxxx the factory setting pxxxx
1 (in this case, switch position 1 in the default
The digital signal x must have the value "1" without any interruption state on delivery).
during the time T before output y changes to "1".
T T T T
PT1 element |y| fs
pxxxx
x x y
f_B
y f
y 2nd Order Filter
Switch-off delay
pxxxx
x y t
0 T
Delay element, first order. Natural frequency, Damping,
x 0 T y denominator denominator
fn_n D_n
pxxxx pxxxx = time constant pxxxx pxxxx
The digital signal x must have the value "0" without interruption Used as bandstop filter
during the time T before output y changes to "0". - center frequency fs:fn_z = fs
fn_n = fs
T T T T PT2 low pass - bandwidth f_B: D_z = 0
x Natural frequency, Damping, f_B
D_n =
denominator denominator 2 fs
y fn_n D_n
pxxxx pxxxx Transfer function when used as general filter
s 2 2 . D_z .
+ s + 1
Delay (switch-on and switch-off) 2 fn_z 2 fn_z
H(s) =
pxxxx pxxxx
x y
s 2 2 . D_n .
+ s + 1
|y| 2 fn_n 2 fn_n
T1 T2
x D y
x T1 T2 y
pxxxx pxxxx fn
f
Analog adder can be activated
The digital signal x must have the value "1" without interruption
during time T1 or must have the value "0" during time T2 before
output y changes its signal state. Transfer function x1
The following applies to I = 1 signal: y = x1 + x2
T1 T1 T2 T2 y
1 x2
H(s) =
s .
2 2 D_n
.
The following applies to I = 0 signal: y = x1
x + s + 1
2 fn_n 2 fn_n I
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 1022 -
Handling BICO technology
Fig. 2-4
Binector: r0723.15
Connector: r0723 Connectors are "analog signals" that can be freely interconnected (e.g. percentage variables, speeds or torques).
1030 – Handling BICO technology
Connectors are also "CO:" display parameters (CO = Connector Output).
Parameterization:
At the signal destination, the required binector or connector is selected using appropriate parameters:
"BI:" parameter for binectors (BI = Binector Input)
or
"CI:" parameter for connectors (CI = Connector Input)
Example:
The main setpoint for the speed controller (CI: p1070) should be received from the output of the motorized potentiometer
(CO: r1050) and the "jog" command (BI: p1055) from digital input DI0 (BO: r0722.0, Terminal 5 (Kl.5)) on the CU.
Digital input 1 Control bit 8 r0967.8 Setpoint

DI0 channel
p1055[C]
Kl.5 r0722.0 722.0
[2220] [2501]
2
Main setpoint
p1070.[C] Speed controller

Raise
r1050 (755[0])
Lower
Jog setpoint 1
[3020] [3030]
Function diagrams
Parameterizing steps:
1 p1055[0] = 722.0 Terminal 5 (Kl.5) acts as "Jog bit 0".
2 p1070[0] = 1050 The output of the motorized potentiometer acts as main setpoint for the speed controller.
2-497
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 1030 -
Handling BICO technology 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Function diagrams
Overview
2.3 Overview
Function diagrams
1520 – PROFIdrive/PROFIBUS 2-499
1530 – Internal control/status words, data sets 2-500
1550 – Setpoint channel 2-501
1690 – Vector control, V/f control 2-502
1700 – Vector control, speed control and generation of the torque limits 2-503
1710 – Vector control, current control 2-504
1750 – Monitoring functions, faults, alarms 2-505

Interconnecting the permanently assigned receive telegrams.
Fig. 2-5 Signal Description Interconnection
... ... ...

... ... ...
1520 – PROFIdrive/PROFIBUS
Receive telegram
Header
Permanently assigned telegrams [2440] ... [2442] Netto data
Interconnecting the permanently assigned send telegrams
Trailer
PB address
1 ... 126 Signal Description Interconnection
p0918 (126)
... ... ...

LED
Monitoring
Axxxxx ... ... ...
Fxxxxx
Diagnostics rxxxx
[2450] ... [2452]
Interconnecting the free receive telegram
[2410] PROFIBUS address, diagnostics PROFIdrive
PZD1
PZD2
PD Telegr_sel
p0922 PZD3
...
Signal assignment
PZD1
Signal x PZD7
Free telegram PZD8
p0922 = 999 [2468] Send telegram

PZD8
Interconnecting the free send telegram Header
[2420] Telegrams and process data PZD1 Data
PZD2
Trailer
PZD3
...
Function diagrams
PZD7
PZD8
[2470] [2472]
Overview
2-499
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Overviews FP_1520_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 1520 -
PROFIdrive / PROFIBUS 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2 DP
Sequence control STW seq_ctrl
Current control ZSW I_ctrl CDS - Command Data Sets
2-500
Overview
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-6
r0898 r1408 CDS selected
r0898 r1408 r0836
0 0
STW ZSW r0836
0
Sequence control Current control STW
15 15
CDS selection
[2501] [2530] 31
ZSW seq_ctrl
1530 – Internal control/status words, data sets
r0899 [8560]
r0899 Monitoring functions ZSW monitor 1
0
ZSW r2197 DDS - Drive Data Sets
Sequence control r2197 DDS selected
15 0
ZSW r0837
[2503] Monitoring funct. 1 r0837
15 0
STW
[2534]
Setpoint Channel ZSW monitor 2
31
DDS selection
STW setpoint chan r2198
r1198 r2198 [8565]
STW3 r1198
0
ZSW
0
Monitoring funct. 2
STW 15
Setpoint Channel
15 [2536] ZSW monitor 3
[2505] r2199
r2199
0 ZSW
Speed controller Monitoring funct. 3
STW n_ctrl 15
r1406 [2537]
r1406
0
STW Faults/alarms STW fault/alarm
Speed controller r2138
15
r2138
[2520] 0
ZSW n_ctrl
r1407
STW
r1407 15 Faults/alarms
0
ZSW
[2546] ZSW fault/alarm 1

Speed controller r2139
15
r2139
[2522] 0
ZSW
15 Faults/alarms 1
Controller
ZSW cl-loop ctrl [2548] ZSW fault/alarm 2
r0056 r2135
r0056 r2135
0 0
ZSW ZSW
Controller Faults/alarms 2
15 15
[2526] [2548]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 1530 -
Internal control/status words, data sets 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-7
STW seq_ctrl
r0898
r0898 .8
STW seq_ctrl
r0898
Main setpoint r0898 .9
p1070 [C]
1550 – Setpoint channel
(755[0]) 0 0
Suppl setpoint
+
p1071 +
p1075 [C] 0 1 Setp after limit RFG setpoint
(0) n_set_1 [1/min] at the input
p1076 1 0
+/- r1114
Jog 1 n_set
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] pos
p1058 [D] (150.000)
Jog 2 n_set 1 1 neg
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] (-1)
p1059 [D] (-150.000)
[3030] Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint [3040] Direction of rotating [3050] Skip (suppression)
scaling, jogging limiting/changeover bandwidth and speed limiting
r1119
RFG setp at inp [1/min]
RFG selection RFG n_set at outp [1/min]
n_set_fixed eff [1/min] 0 ... 1
p1115 (1) r1150
r1024 n_ctrl n_set 1
n_set_4 p1155 [C] n_ctrl setp sum [1/
0 + min]
(0)
r1170
n_ctrl n_set 2 +
1 p1160 [C] + [1700.1]
[3010] Fixed speed setpoints
[3060] Basic ramp-function (0)
generator n_ctrl n_set [1/min]
raise r1438
+
RFG ZSW
r1199 n_act
Mop setp after RFG [1/min] ZSW
r1050 r1199
n_set_5
Ramp-function
generator M_limit
lower
tracking
[3020] Motorized potentiometer

[3070] Expanded ramp-function
Function diagrams
generator
[3080] Ramp-function generator selection,
status word, tracking
Simulate ramp-function generator
Overview
2-501
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 1550 -
Setpoint channel 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-502
Overview
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-8
Flying restart Slip Uf Res_damp

Vdc_ctrl config Speed actual
mode value calculation compensation gain
p1280
1690 – Vector control, V/f control
p1200 p1334, p1335 p1338

[6320] [6310] [6310]
n_ctrl setp sum [1/min]
r1170
RFG setp at inp [1/min]
Ramp-function
[6030.1] + + f_outp [Hz]
[3050.8] r1119 generator r0066
+ + + [6310]
[3060]
60
I_max_ctrl f_outp [1/min] f_outp smooth [Hz]
r1343 Mot PolePairNo act 100 ms r0024
r0313 [D]
I_max reduction
[8016.8] Transformat_angle [°]
I_outp max [Aeff] r0094
r0067 Imax closed-loop
I_max Power Module frequency control ZSW cl-loop ctrl
[6730.4] p1340 ... p1341
r0056 I_max_ctrl U_outp [Veff]
P_act [kW] MIN r0056.13 r1344
[6799.8] r0082[0] + Imax closed-loop
voltage control
p1345 ... P1346
PU P_rated [kW] <1>
r0206 [2]
I_act abs val [Aeff]

[6714.8] r0068[0] Soft starting
p1350
Control mode U_output [Veff]
p1300 r0072
V_boost perm
+
p1310
r0056 f_set
V_boost accelerate [6730.4]
.
.
p1311 [6300.8] +
. V_boost starting
p1312 U_outp smooth [Veff]
U/f Eco fac act v [%]
r0025
Eco mode r1348 100 ms
[2526] [6300]
<1> PM250, PM260: The current limit is calculated out of r0206 [2] in generative operation.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 1690 -
Vector control, V/f control 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
[6050] Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation M_suppl 1
Fig. 2-9
p1511 [C]
Kp-Adaption Tn-Adaption
n_ctrl SLVC Kp (0)
n_ctrl setp sum [1/min] n_ctrl SLVC Tn
Mot MomInert Ratio p1470 p1472 For Kp
r1170 p0342 M_suppl 1 scal
adaptation
p1512 [C]
[1550.8] Mot M_mom of inert
p0341 (0)
a_before scaling
p1496 M_suppl 2 scal
1700 – Vector control, speed control and generation of the torque limits
p1514 M_suppl total

M_suppl 2 r1515
n_set_filt 1 T p1513 [C]
p1416
(0)
n_ctrl n_set [1/min]
M_accel [Nm]
r1438
n_set after filter [1/min] r1518 [0]
r0062

Kp Tn p1300
Symmetrizing (r1407.1)
Droop input
p1488
[6030] Speed [6031] Acceleration model M_set total [Nm]

setpoint filter
r0079
r1508 [1710.1]
Integrator control M_set bef. M_suppl [Nm]
n_modell
n_act [1/min] [6060] Torque setpoint
r0063[0..2]
n_C n_act T_s SLVC

p1452
[6040] Speed controller

Changeov n/M_ctrl Current limit I_Ausg max
M_set p1501 [C] p0640
r0067
p1503 [C] (0)
M_max upper
(0) p1522 [C] M_max upper eff [Nm]
n_pre-control [1710.1] M_max upper
(1520[0]) r1538
p1520 [D] (0.00)
M_max lower Generating the
torque limits
p1523 [C] M_max lower eff [Nm]
M_max lower
p1400 p1401 r0056 r1408 (1521[0]) r1539
p1521 [D] (0.00)
Function diagrams
P_max mot P_max gen
[6490] Closed-loop speed control configuration p1530 p1531
[6491] Closed-loop flux control configuration
[2526] Status word closed-loop control [6630] Torque limit
Overview
[2530] Status word closed-loop current control [6640] Current-power limit
2-503
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 1700 -
Vector control, speed control and generation of the torque limits 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-504
Overview
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-10 I_ctrl Kp I_ctrl Tn
p1715 p1717 Vdc act val [V]
U_output [Veff]
Iq_set [Aeff] r0070
|y| r0072
r0077
Modulat_depth [%]
|y| U_set
K r0074
1710 – Vector control, current control
M_set total [Nm] +

f U_angle
r0079 P
[1700.8] f
iq controller + +
M
Iq
I_ctrl Kp I_ctrl Tn
[6710] Current setpoint filter p1715 p1717
U_output max [Veff] Id_set [Aeff]
r0071 r0075
[6722.1]
[6723.4] + Iq_act [Aeff]
[6724.4] Field weakening id controller

controller r0078
V_set
Flux setpoint
50.0 ... 200.0 [%]
p1570 [D] (100.0) Id_act [Aeff] I_phase actual value
Transformation
Efficiency opt. r0076
<1> 0 ... 100 [%]
+ +
p1580 [D] (80) Field weakening
M_set static characteristic
-200.0 ... 200.0 [%]
p1610 [D] (50.0) [6714] Current controller
M_suppl_accel
0.0 ... 200.0 [%]
p1611 [D] (30.0) Current calculation V_phase actual value
[6722] Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint

[6723] Field weakening control, flux controller for induction motors
(p0300 = 1) f_outp [Hz]
[6724] Field weakening controller for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2) r0066
n_pre-control
[1700.3]
+ + p1764 p1767 +
f_Slip [Hz] Motor model

Current r0065
model (Observer)
M
n_model Iq
[1700.1]
[6730] Interface to the Power Module for an induction motor (p0300 = 1)

<1> Value range and/or factory setting depend on Power Module [6731] Interface to the Power Module for a synchronous motor (p0300 = 2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 1710 -
Vector control, current control 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-11
Fxxxxx
n_act [1/min] Fyyyyy III r0945 r0949 r0948 r2109 III

n_act smth message [1/min] III
r0063[0] r2169[0]
[6010] [8012]
t_System relative Code Value coming going Fault cases qty
Fzzzzz 0 ... 4294967295 [ms]
faults 0 ... 65535
1750 – Monitoring functions, faults, alarms
p0969 (0) p0952 (0)

[8060] Fault buffer
n_ctrl setp sum

[1/min]
r1170 Axxxxx
[3080] Ayyyyy r2122 r2124 r2123 r2125 III
III
n_max
n_ctrl n_set [1/min]

Code Value Alarm counter
r1438 Azzzzz coming going 0 ... 65535
alarms p2111 (0)
[6031]
[8065] Alarm buffer
r2929
p2128
[0]
[8010] Speed messages 1 [8011] Speed messages 2
[15]
M_set total [Nm]
r0079
[8070] Fault/alarm trigger word
[6060]
Limit value monitor Changes the fault response Changes the message type
M_max upper eff [Nm]
r1538 [0] p2100 p2101 [0] p2118 p2119
[6640] [1] [1]
M_max lower eff [Nm] [19] [19]

M_act [Nm]
r1539
r0080[0]
[6640] [6714] Changing the acknowledge mode
n_act smth message [1/min] [0] p2126 p2127
r2169 [1]
Function diagrams
[8010] n_act smth message [1/min]
Motor locked r2169 [19]
[8010]
[8012] Torque messages [8013] load monitoring [8075] Fault/alarm configuration
Overview
2-505
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 1750 -
Monitoring functions, faults, alarms 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Function diagrams
Input/Output Terminals
2.4 Input/Output Terminals
Function diagrams
2221 – CU240B-2: Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI0 ... DI3) 2-507
2220 – CU240E-2: Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI0 ... DI5) 2-508
2223 – CU240B-2: Analog inputs as Digital inputs (DI11) 2-509
2222 – CU240E-2: Analog inputs as Digital inputs (DI11 ... DI12) 2-510
2231 – CU240B-2: Digital output (DO0) 2-511
2230 – CU240E-2: Digital outputs (DO0 ... DO2) 2-512
9567 – CU240B-2: Analog input 0 (AI0) 2-513
9566 – CU240E-2: Analog inputs 0 ... 1 (AI0 ... AI1) 2-514
9573 – CU240B-2: Analog output 0 (AO0) 2-515
9572 – CU240E-2: Analog outputs 0 ... 1 (AO0 ... AO1) 2-516

Fig. 2-12
External power supply NPN or PNP
24 V DC
Kl.9 +24 V OUT Kl.9 +24 V OUT
2221 – CU240B-2: Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI0 ... DI3)
Kl.28 GND Kl.28 GND

<1>
Kl.69 DI COM Kl.69 DI COM Kl.69 DI COM

1 = Simulation on
Kl.34 DI COM2 Kl.34 DI COM2 Kl.34 DI COM2 CU DI Simulation

p0795.0 CU DI Status inv
CU DI t_debounce
p0724 r0723
r0721.0
1 r0723.0
0 CU DI Status
T 0
Kl.5 DI0 Kl.5 DI0 Kl.5 DI0 r0722
p0796.0 r0722 .0
1

24 V CU DI t_debounce
p0724 r0723
r0721.1
1 r0723.1
0 CU DI Status
T 0
r0722
Kl.6 DI1 Kl.6 DI1 Kl.6 DI1
p0796.1 r0722 .1
1

CU DI t_debounce
r0721.2 p0724 r0723
1 r0723.2
0 CU DI Status
T 0
p0796.2 r0722 .2
1

CU DI t_debounce
p0724 r0723
5V r0721.3
1 r0723.3
0 CU DI Status
T 0
r0722
p0796.3 r0722 .3
1
Function diagrams
<1> Kl. = Terminal Sampling time of the DI : 2 ms
2-507
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External Interfaces FP_2221_97_02.vsd Function diagram
- 2221 -
Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI0 DI3) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B-2
External power supply NPN or PNP
2-508
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-13
24 V DC
Kl.9 +24 V OUT Kl.9 +24 V OUT
Kl.28 GND Kl.28 GND

<1> 1 = Simulation on
Kl.69 DI COM Kl.69 DI COM Kl.69 DI COM CU DI simulation
p0795.0 CU DI status inv
CU DI t_debounce
2220 – CU240E-2: Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI0 ... DI5)
Kl.34 DI COM2 Kl.34 DI COM2 Kl.34 DI COM2 p0724 r0723

r0721.0
1 r0723.0
0 CU DI status
T 0
p0796.0 r0722 .0
1
p0795.1 CU DI t_debounce CU DI status inv

p0724 r0723
r0721.1
1 r0723.1
24 V 0
T 0 CU DI status
r0722
p0796.1 r0722 .1
1

CU DI t_debounce
r0721.2 p0724 r0723
1 r0723.2
0 CU DI status
T 0
p0796.2 r0722 .2
1

CU DI t_debounce
p0724 r0723
r0721.3
1 r0723.3
0 CU DI status
T 0
r0722
p0796.3 r0722 .3
1
p0795.4 CU DI t_debounce CU DI status inv

r0721.4 p0724 r0723
1 r0723.4
0 CU DI status
T 0
Kl.16 DI4 Kl.16 DI4 Kl.16 DI4 r0722
p0796.4 r0722 .4
1
5V
CU DI t_debounce
r0721.5 p0724 r0723
1 r0723.5
0 CU DI status
T 0
Kl.17 Kl.17 Kl.17 r0722
DI5 DI5 DI5
p0796.5 r0722 .5
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2220 -
Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI0 DI5) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240E-2
Fig. 2-14
2223 – CU240B-2: Analog inputs as Digital inputs (DI11)
For Example:
<1>
Kl.1 +10 V OUT
Kl.2 GND
1 = Simulation on
CU DI simulation
1.6 V 4.0 V p0795.11 CU DI t_debounce
r0721.11 p0724
CU DI status inv
Kl.3 AI0+ (DI11) 1 r0723
0 CU DI status
T 0 1 r0723.11
Kl.4 AI0- 0 r0722
p0796.11 r0722 .11
1
Function diagrams
2-509
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2223 -
Analog inputs as Digital inputs (DI11) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B-2
2-510
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-15
2222 – CU240E-2: Analog inputs as Digital inputs (DI11 ... DI12)
For Example:
<1>
Kl.1 +10 V OUT
Kl.2 GND
1 = Simulation on
CU DI Simulation
r0721.11 p0724
CU DI Status inv
Kl.3 AI0+ (DI11) 1 r0723

0 CU DI Status
T 0 1 r0723.11
Kl.4 AI0- 0 r0722
p0796.11 r0722 .11
1

r0721.12 p0724
CU DI Status inv
Kl.10 AI1+ (DI12) 1 r0723
0 CU DI Status
T 0 1 r0723.12
Kl.11 AI1- r0722
0
p0796.12 r0722 .12
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2222 -
Analog inputs as Digital inputs (DI11 DI12) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240E-2
Fig. 2-16
2231 – CU240B-2: Digital output (DO0)
CU DO inv
p0748.0
CU DO status
CU S_src DO 0 r0747
p0730 0 <2>
(52.3) DO0
1
-1
NC
Kl.18
NO
Kl.19
COM Kl.20
Function diagrams
Sampling time of the DO : 2 ms <2> Kl. = Terminal
2-511
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2231 -
Digital output (DO0) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B-2
2-512
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-17
CU DO inv
p0748 .0
CU DO status
2230 – CU240E-2: Digital outputs (DO0 ... DO2)
CU S_src DO 0 r0747
p0730 0 <2>
(52.3) DO0
1
-1
NC
Kl.18
NO
Kl.19
COM Kl.20
CU DO inv
p0748.1
CU DO status
CU S_src DO 1 r0747
p0731 0
(52.7)
2
-1
1
DO1
24 V
NO Kl.21
0V
0
0V Kl.22
CU DO inv
p0748.2
CU DO status
CU S_src DO 2 r0747
p0732 0
(52.2) DO2
-1 NC
4 Kl.23
NO Kl.24
COM Kl.25
Sampling time of the DO : 2 ms <2> Kl. = Terminal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2230 -
Digital outputs (DO0 DO2) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240E-2
Fig. 2-18
<2> <3>
CU AI type
0 ... 8
[0] (4)(4)
p0756[0..1] <4>
CU WireBrkThresh CU wire brk t_del
9567 – CU240B-2: Analog input 0 (AI0)
CU AI status word
CU AI sim_mode 0.00 ... 20.00 0 ... 1000 [ms]
0 ... 1 [0] (2.00)
p0761[0..1] (2.00) p0762[0..1] r0751
(100)
[0] (100)
p0797[0..1]
[0] (0)(0)
20 mA 3
1 T 0 F03505
20 mA "Wire
3 breakage"
0
<2>
CU AI U/I_inp act <2> <2>
I Current r0752 CU AI char x1 CU AI char x2
-50.000 ... 160.000 -50.000 ... 160.000
AI0 U I CU AI sim_mode [0] (0.000)
p0757[0..1] [0] (10.000)
(0.000) p0759[0..1] (10.000) CU AI T_smooth
Kl.3 U Voltage 0 ... 1 0.0 ... 1000.0 [ms]
Hardware smoothing p0797[0..1]
[0] (0)(0) [0] (0.0)
p0753[0..1] (0.0)
100 μs y [%]
AI0 CU AI char y2
U I + A -1000.00 ... 1000.00 [%] y2
<1> Type switching 0 p0760[0..1] (100.00)
[0] (100.00) [%]
Analog input x y
- D x1 x2 x
1 CU AI char y1
Kl.4 -1000.00 ... 1000.00 [%] y1
p0758[0..1] (0.00)
[0] (0.00)
CU AI sim setp Scaling
0 20 mA -50.000 ... 2000.000
-10 +10 V p0798[0..1] (0.000)
[0] (0.000)
<2>
Bezugsgrößen x1 y
p2000...r2004
CU AI value in % [%]
r0755 [0] x1 • x 2
x2
100 %
<1> Differential input! <3> Possible settings p0756[0]:
For an input signal referred to ground, terminal 4 must be connected to reference potential M. = 0: 0 V ... +10 V
Function diagrams
Caution: = 1: +2 V ... +10 V with monitoring
The voltage between an input (Kl.3 (Kl.10) or Kl.4 (Kl.11)) and the ground point must not exceed 35 V. = 2: 0 mA ... +20 mA
When the load resistor is switched in (DIP switch in position I), the voltage between the input terminals = 3: 4 mA ... +20 mA with monitoring
must not exceed 10 V or the impressed current 80 mA. = 4: -10 V ... +10 V (Default for AI0)
<2> For p0756 = 2, 3 the units are mA. <4> Wire breakage sensing only activated when p0756 = 1, 3.
Kl. = Terminal For p0756 = 0, 1, 4 the units are V. Sampling time of the AI : 4 ms
2-513
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 9567 -
Analog input 0 (AI0) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B-2
2-514
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-19
<2> <3> <4>
CU AI type
0 ... 8
p0756[0..1] (4)
CU WireBrkThresh CU wire brk t_del
9566 – CU240E-2: Analog inputs 0 ... 1 (AI0 ... AI1)
CU AI status word
CU AI sim_mode 0.00 ... 20.00 0 ... 1000 [ms]
0 ... 1 p0761[0..1] (2.00) p0762[0..1] (100) r0751
p0797[0..1] (0)
20 mA 3
1 T 0 F03505
20 mA "Wire
3 breakage"
0
<2>
CU AI U/I_inp act <2> <2>
I Current
I r0752 CU AI char x1 CU AI char x2
-50.000 ... 160.000 -50.000 ... 160.000
AI0/1 U I p0757[0..1] (0.000) p0759[0..1] (10.000)
CU AI sim_mode CU AI T_smooth
Kl.3 U U Voltage 0 ... 1 0.0 ... 1000.0 [ms]
Hardware smoothing p0797[0..1] (0) p0753[0..1] (0.0)
(Kl.10) 100 μs y [%]
AI0/1 CU AI char y2
+ A -1000.00 ... 1000.00 [%]
U I Type switching 0 p0760[0..1] (100.00)
y2
<1> [%]
Analog input x y
- D x1 x2 x
1 CU AI char y1
Kl.4 -1000.00 ... 1000.00 [%] y1
p0758[0..1] (0.00)
(Kl.11) <5>
CU AI sim setp Scaling
0 20 mA -50.000 ... 2000.000
-10 +10 V p0798[0..1] (0.000)
<2>
Reference x1 y
quantities x
CU AI value in % [%] p2000 r2004 x1 x 2
r0755[0..1] x2 100 %
<1> Differential input! <3> Possible settings p0756[0] and p0756[1]:

For an input signal referred to ground, terminal 4 (11) must be connected to reference potential M. = 0: 0 V ... +10 V
Caution: = 1: +2 V ... +10 V with monitoring
The voltage between an input (Kl.3 (Kl.10) or Kl.4 (Kl.11)) and the ground point must not exceed 35 V. = 2: 0 mA ... +20 mA
When the load resistor is switched in (DIP switch in position I), the voltage between the input terminals = 3: 4 mA ... +20 mA with monitoring
must not exceed 10 V or the impressed current 80 mA. = 4: -10 V ... +10 V (Default for AI0 and AI1)
<2> For p0756 = 2, 3 the units are mA. <4> Wire breakage sensing only activated when p0756 = 1, 3.
Kl. = Terminal For p0756 = 0, 1, 4 the units are V. Sampling time of the AI : 4 ms <5> Values in brackets --> AI1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 9566 -
Analog inputs 0 ... 1 (AI0 ... AI1) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240E-2
Fig. 2-20
9573 – CU240B-2: Analog output 0 (AO0)
CU AO outp_val [%] <4>

r0772 [0] CU AO char x1 CU char x2
-1000.00 ... 1000.00 [%] -1000.00 ... 1000.00 [%] CU AO type
CU AO absVal act CU AO T_smooth [0] (0)
p0777 (0.00) p0779 [0]
(100.00)
(100) 0 ... 2
0 ... 1 0.0 ... 1000.0 [ms] p0776 [0]
(0) (0)
p0775 [0]
(0) (0) p0773 [0] (0)
(0.0) <1> <1>
CU char y2 y CU AO U/I_outp
CU AO S_src -20.000 ... 20.000 [V] 0, 1 r0774 [0]
y2
p0771 [0] 0 [0] (20)
p0780[0..1] (20.000) D
x 0 2 y AO0+ Kl.12
Voltage output
y (21[0])
x1 x2 x
0 20 mA
1 4 mA A
Current
CU char y1
0 10 V
[%]
output
-20.000 ... 20.000 [V] y1
Smoothing p0778[0..1]
[0] (0)(0.000)
<1> Scaling
GND
x1 % Kl.13
y
[%]
x2 x1• 100 %
x2
Reference quantities
p2000 r2004
<3>
Function diagrams
<4> Possible settings p0776[0]:
<1> For p0776 = 0, 2 the units are mA. = 0: 0 ... +20 mA
For p0776 = 1 the units are V. = 1: 0 ... +10 V
= 2: 4 ... +20 mA
<3> The input signals are referred to the reference quantities p2000 ... r2004 (100 % = p200x). Sampling time of the AO : 4 ms Kl. = Terminal
2-515
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 9573 -
Analog output 0 (AO0) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B-2
2-516
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-21
CU AO outp_val [%] <4>

-1000.00 ... 1000.00 [%] -1000.00 ... 1000.00 [%] CU AO type
9572 – CU240E-2: Analog outputs 0 ... 1 (AO0 ... AO1)
CU AO absVal act CU AO T_smooth [0] (0)

p0777 (0.00) p0779 [0]
(100.00)
(100) 0 ... 2
0 ... 1 0.0 ... 1000.0 [ms] p0776 [0]
(0) (0)
p0775 [0]
(0) (0) p0773 [0] (0)
(0.0) <1> <1>
CU AO S_src -20.000 ... 20.000 [V] 0, 1 r0774 [0]
y2
p0771 [0] 0 [0] (20)
p0780[0..1] (20.000) D
x 0 2 y AO0+ Kl.12
Voltage output
y (21[0])
x1 x2 x
0 20 mA
1 4 mA A
Current
CU char y1
0 10 V
[%]
output
-20.000 ... 20.000 [V] y1
Smoothing p0778[0..1]
[0] (0)(0.000)
<1> Scaling
GND
x1 % Kl.13
y
[%]
x2 x1• 100 %
x2
Reference quantities
p2000 r2004
<3>
CU AO outp_val [%]
-1000.00 ... 1000.00 [%] -1000.00 ... 1000.00 [%] CU AO type
CU AO absVal act CU AO T_smooth p0777 [1] (0)
(0.00) p0779 [1] (100)
(100.00) 0 ... 2
0 ... 1 0.0 ... 1000.0 [ms] p0776 [1]
(0) (0)
p0775 [1]
(0) (0) p0773 [1]
(0.0)
(0) <1> <1>
CU AO S_src -20.000 ... 20.000 [V] 0, 1 r0774[1]
y2
p0771 [1] 0 p0780[0..1] (20.000)
[1] (20) D
x 0 2 y AO1+ Kl.26
Voltage output
y (21[0])
(27[0])
x1 x2 x
0 20 mA
1 4 mA A
Current
0 10 V
CU char y1 [%]
output
-20.000 ... 20.000 [V] y1
Smoothing
p0778[0..1]
[1] (0)(0.000)
<1>
GND
Kl.27
<4> Possible settings p0776[0] and p0776[1]:

<1> For p0776 = 0, 2 the units are mA. = 0: 0 ... +20 mA
For p0776 = 1 the units are V. = 1: 0 ... +10 V
= 2: 4 ... +20 mA
<3> The input signals are referred to the reference quantities p2000 ... r2004 (100 % = p200x). Sampling time of the AO : 4 ms Kl. = Terminal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 9572 -
Analog outputs 0 1 (AO0 AO1) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240E-2
Function diagrams
Communication
2.5 Communication
2.5.1 Fieldbus Interface (USS, Modbus) (CU240B/E-2) 2-518
2.5.2 PROFIdrive / PROFIBUS (CU240B/E-2 DP) 2-525

Function diagrams
Communication
2.5.1 Fieldbus Interface (USS, Modbus) (CU240B/E-2)
Function diagrams
9310 – Configuration, addresses and diagnostics 2-519
9342 – STW1 control word interconnection 2-520
9352 – ZSW1 status word interconnection 2-521
9360 – Receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO 2-522
9370 – Send telegram, free interconnection via BICO 2-523
9372 – Status words, free interconnection 2-524

Fig. 2-22
Fieldbus t_monit Monitoring functions
0 ... 1999999 [ms]
p2040 (100)
Cyclic
telegrams from
9310 – Configuration, addresses and diagnostics
the master
T 0
Fieldbus configuration t
Field bus baud

44 ...
... 13
13
F01910 "Fieldbus IF: setpoint timeout"
p2020 (8)
Field bus address No telegrams from the master
00......247
30
p2021 (0) USS
Field bus USS PZD configuration
0 ... 8 Field bus protocol
p2022 (2) 0 ... 2
p2030 (0)
Field bus USS PKW
0 ... 127
p2023 (127)
1
0 Telegrams to
the master
2
Field bus baud

45 ...
... 13
13
p2020 (8) (7)
Field bus address
01 ...
... 247
247 Modbus
p2021 (0) (1) configuration
Fieldbus times
0 ... 10000 [ms]
p2024 (1000)
Field bus error

Diagnostic
parameters r2029
Function diagrams
Communication
2-519
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fieldbus Interface (USS, Modbus on RS485) FP_9310_97_66.vsd Function diagram
- 9310 -
Configuration, addresses and diagnostics 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Signal targets for fieldbus STW1 (p0700 = 6)
2-520
Communication
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-23 Interconnection [Function diagram] [Function diagram]
Signal Meaning internal control word signal target Inverted
parameters
= ON (pulses can be enabled)

STW1.0 p0840[0] = r2090.0 [2501.3] Sequence control -
0 = OFF1 (braking with ramp-function generator, then pulse cancellation & ready for switching on)
9342 – STW1 control word interconnection
1 = No OFF2 (enable is possible)

0 = OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)

0 = OFF3 (braking with the OFF3 ramp p1135, then pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
1 = Enable operation (pulses can be enabled)

0 = Inhibit operation (cancel pulses)
1 = Operating condition (the ramp-function generator can be enabled)

STW1.4 p1140[0] = r2090.4 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] [3080] -
0 = Inhibit ramp-function generator (set the ramp-function generator output to zero)
1 = Enable the ramp-function generator

STW1.5 p1141[0] = r2090.5 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] -
0 = Stop the ramp-function generator (freeze the ramp-function generator output)
1 = Enable setpoint p1142[0] = r2090.6

STW1.6 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] [3080] -
0 = Inhibit setpoint (set the ramp-function generator input to zero)
STW1.7 = Acknowledge faults p2103[0] = r2090.7 [2546.1] [8060] -
STW1.8 Reserved - - - -
STW1.10 1 = Control via PLC <1> p0854[0] = r2090.10 [2501.3] [2501] -
STW1.11 1 = Dir of rot reversal p1113[0] = r2090.11 [2505.3] [3040] -

STW1.13 1 = Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, raise p1035[0] = r2090.13 [2505.3] [3020] -
STW1.14 1 = Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, lower p1036[0] = r2090.14 [2505.3] [3020] -
<1> Bit 10 in STW1 must be set to ensure that the drive accepts the process data.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 9342 -
STW1 control word interconnection 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Signal sources for fieldbus ZSW1 (p0700 = 6)
Fig. 2-24 Interconnection [Function diagram] [Function diagram] Inverted

Signal Meaning <1>
parameters internal control word signal target
ZSW1.0 1 = Ready for switching on p2080[0] = r0899.0 [2503.7] Sequence control -

9352 – ZSW1 status word interconnection
ZSW1.1 1 = Ready for operation (DC link loaded, pulses inhibited) p2080[1] = r0899.1 [2503.7] Sequence control -
ZSW1.2 1 = Operation enabled (drive follows n_set) p2080[2] = r0899.2 [2503.7] Sequence control -
ZSW1.3 1 = Fault present p2080[3] = r2139.3 [2548.7] [8060] -
ZSW1.4 1 = No coast down active (OFF2 inactive) p2080[4] = r0899.4 [2503.7] Sequence control -
ZSW1.5 1 = No fast stop active (OFF3 inactive) p2080[5] = r0899.5 [2503.7] Sequence control -
ZSW1.6 1 = Switching on inhibited active p2080[6] = r0899.6 [2503.7] Sequence control -
ZSW1.7 1 = Alarm present p2080[7] = r2139.7 [2548.7] [8065] -
ZSW1.8 1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off p2080[8] = r2197.7 [2534.7] [8011] -
ZSW1.9 1 = Control requested <2> p2080[9] = r0899.9 [2503.7] [2503] -
ZSW1.10 1 = f or n comparison value reached/exceeded p2080[10] = r2199.1 [2536.7] [8010] -
ZSW1.11 1 = I, M, or P limit not reached p2080[11] = r1407.7 [2522.7] [6060]
ZSW1.12 1 = Open holding brake p2080[12] = r0899.12 [2503.7] [2701] -
ZSW1.13 1 = No motor overtemperature alarm p2080[13] = r2135.14 [2548.7] [8016]
ZSW1.14 1 = Motor rotates forwards (n_act 0) p2080[14] = r2197.3 [2534.7] [8011] -

0 = Motor rotates backwards (n_act < 0)
Function diagrams
ZSW1.15 1 = No alarm, thermal overload, power unit p2080[15] = r2135.15 [2548.7] [8014]
Communication
<1> The ZSW1 is generated using the binector-connector converter (BI: p2080[0...15], inversion: p2088[0].0...p2088[0].15)
<2> The drive is ready to accept data.
2-521
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 9352 -
ZSW1 status word interconnection 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
r2090.0
...
PZD1 recv bitw
2-522
Communication
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-25
r2090.15 PZD1 recv bitw
<1> PZD receive word 1 r2050 [0] PZD recv word
r2091.0
...
PZD2 recv bitw
r2092.0
...
PZD3 recv bitw
Fieldbus r2092.15 PZD3 recv bitw
r2050 [2]
9360 – Receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO
PZD receive word 3 PZD recv word

r2093.0
...
PZD4 recv bitw
PZD receive word 4 r2050 [3] PZD recv word
Receive telegram PZD recv word

PZD receive word 5 r2050 [4] 2 connector-binector converter
PZD recv word Con/bin outp inv
p2098[0].0
PZD receive word 6 r2050 [5]
<3>
PZD recv word Con/bin S_src
PZD receive word 7 r2050 [6] p2099 [0] 0 Con/bin outp
(0) r2094.0
PZD recv word 1 1

Con/bin outp inv
<4> p2098[0].15
Reference quantities for further

interconnection 0
p200x Con/bin outp
r2094.15
1 1
Con/bin outp inv

p2098[1].0
<3>
Con/bin S_src
p2099 [1] 0 Con/bin outp
(0) r2095.0
1 1
Con/bin outp inv

p2098[1].15
0 Con/bin outp
<1> The receive word 1 must be used as control word (STW1) (due to bit 10 "control requested"). r2095.15
The preconfiguration is set automatically via p0700 = 6.
1 1
<2> The preconfiguration with the speed setpoint is set automatically via p1000 = 6.
<3> Using the connector-binector converters, the bits can be extracted from two of the PZD receive words 3 to 8 and used as binectors.
<4> The following representation applies for words: 4000 hex = 100 %.
The reference variables p200x apply for the ongoing interconnection (100 % -> p200x).
The following applies for temperature values: 100° C -> 100 % = 4000 hex, 0° C -> 0 %.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 9360 -
Receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-26
9370 – Send telegram, free interconnection via BICO
Diag send word

r2053 [0 7]
PZD send word p2051 [0] <1> ...
(0) PZD send word 1 <1>
PZD send word p2051 [1]


(0) PZD send word 3

(0) PZD send word 4
p2051 [4] Send telegram

PZD send word
(0) PZD send word 5

(0) PZD send word 6
Fieldbus
(0) PZD send word 7

(0) PZD send word 8
<3>
Reference quantities for
further interconnection
p200x
Function diagrams
<1> The send word 1 must be used as status word (ZSW1). The preconfiguration is set automatically via p0700 = 6.
<2> The preconfiguration with the speed setpoint is set automatically via p1000 = 6.
Communication
<3> Physical word values are inserted in the telegram as referenced variables. p200x apply as reference variables (telegram contents = 4000 hex,
if the input variable has the value p200x).
The following applies for temperature values: 100° C -> 100 % = 4000 hex; 0° C -> 0%.
2-523
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 9370 -
Send telegram, free interconnection via BICO 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Bin/con ZSW inv
2-524
Communication
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-27
p2088 [2].0
5 binector-connector converter Bin/con ZSW3

p2082 [015] 0 Bin/con ZSW send
[0]
(0) r2089 [2]
(0.0)
[1] 1 1
Bin/con ZSW inv
p2088 [0].0
9372 – Status words, free interconnection
Bin/con ZSW inv

Bin/con ZSW1 p2088 [2].15
[0]
(0) r2089 [0]
(0.0)
[1] 1 1 0
[15]
(0.0)
1 1
Bin/con ZSW inv
p2088 [0].15
Bin/con ZSW inv
p2088 [3].0
0
[15]
(0.0) Bin/con ZSW4
1
1 p2083 [015] 0 Bin/con ZSW send

[0] r2089 [3]
(0)
(0.0) [1]
1 1
Bin/con ZSW inv

Bin/con ZSW inv p2088 [3].15
p2088 [1].0
Bin/con ZSW2 0
[15]
p2081 [015] 0 Bin/con ZSW send (0.0)
[0] 1
(0) r2089 [1] 1
(0.0) [1]
1 1
Bin/con ZSW inv Bin/con ZSW inv

p2088 [1].15 p2088 [4].0
Bin/con ZSW5
[15] [0] r2089 [4]
(0.0) (0)
1 (0.0) [1]
1 1
1
Bin/con ZSW inv

p2088 [4].15
0
[15]
(0.0)
1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 9372 -
Status words, free interconnection 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Function diagrams
Communication
2.5.2 PROFIdrive / PROFIBUS (CU240B/E-2 DP)
Function diagrams
2410 – PROFIBUS, addresses and diagnostics 2-526
2420 – Telegrams and Process Data (PZD) 2-527
2440 – PZD receive signals interconnection 2-528
2441 – STW1 control word interconnection 2-529
2442 – STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 2-530
2444 – STW3 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 2-531
2450 – PZD send652 signals interconnection 2-532
2451 – ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 2) 2-533
2468 – Receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 2-536
2470 – Send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 2-537
2472 – Status words, free interconnection 2-538

CU-specific functions Drive-specific functions
2-526
Communication
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-28
Setting the PROFIBUS address PB suppl t_monit Monitoring functions Alarms Faults
0 ... 20000 [ms]
p2047 (0)
Cyclic
telegrams from
2410 – PROFIBUS, addresses and diagnostics
PD PZD state the master

T 0
r2043.0 A01920 "PROFIBUS: Cyclic connection interrupted"
t > t_response <1>
t PD fault delay
No cyclic telegrams from the
master 0 ... 100 [s]
p2044 (0)
PB address
1 ... 126
p0918 (126) p0918 T 0 F01910 "PROFIBUS setpoint timeout"
S Q
DIP switch on the control unit No telegrams from the master
BUS ADDRESS Actual R Q
ON PROFIBUS
Memory address
1..126
1 2 4 8 16 32 64 SET
Significance
POWER ON
All DIP switches to ON or OFF
==> set the address using p0918
PB status
r2054
PB diag standard
r2055[0..2]
A01900 "PROFIBUS: Configuration telegram incorrect"
A01901 "PROFIBUS: Parameterizing telegram incorrect"
Diagnostic
parameters
<1> The response monitoring time t_An is automatically defined by

the configuration tool (e.g. HW Config made by Siemens) within
the framework of PROFIBUS configuration.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROFIdrive / PROFIBUS FP_2410_97_61.vsd Function diagram
- 2410 -
PROFIBUS (PB), addresses and diagnostics 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2 DP
Fig. 2-29
2420 – Telegrams and Process Data (PZD)
<1>
PD Telegr_sel
1 ... 999
p0922 (1)
Standard telegrams Manufacturer-specific telegrams Free telegram
Interconnec-
tion is made [2440] [2450] automatically
according to
Telegram 1 20 350 352 353 354 999

PZD1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1 STW1 <4> ZSW1 <4>
PZD2 NSOLL_A NIST_A NSOLL_A NIST_A_GL NSOLL_A NIST_A_GL NSOLL_A NIST_A_GL NSOLL_A NIST_A_GL NSOLL_A NIST_A_GL
Receive telegram length
length freely selectable

via central PROFIdrive
PZD3 IAIST_GL M_LIM IAIST_GL <3> IAIST_GL <3> IAIST_GL
freely selectable via

central PROFIdrive
configuration in the
configuration in the
Transmit telegram
PZD4 MIST_GL STW3 ZSW3 <3> MIST_GL <3> MIST_GL
PZD5 PIST_GL <3> WARN_CODE <3> WARN_CODE
PZD6 <2> <3> FAULT_CODE <3> FAULT_CODE
master
master
PZD7
Receive telegram from
PZD8
Send telegram to
PROFIdrive
PROFIdrive
Function diagrams
<1> If p0922 = 999 is changed to another value, the telegram is automatically assigned.
If p0922 unequal 999 is changed to p0922 = 999, the "old" telegram assignment is maintained!
Communication
<2> Freely interconnectable (pre-setting: MELD_NAMUR).
<3> Can be freely connected.
<4> In order to comply with the PROFIdrive profile, PZD1 must be used as control word 1 (STW1) or status word 1 (ZSW1).
p2037 = 2 should be set if STW1 is not transferred with PZD1 as specified in the PROFIdrive profile.
2-527
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2420 -
Telegrams and Process Data (PZD) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2 DP
2-528
Communication
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-30
2440 – PZD receive signals interconnection
PROFIBUS
<3> Signal receivers for PZD receive signals <1> <2>

PROFIdrive r2090...r2095 Bit
receive telegram
r2050[0...7] WORD Signal PROFIdrive Interconnection Function
Data type Scaling
Meaning Signal No. parameter diagram
Header ...
STW1 Control word 1 1 (bit serial) [2442] U16 -
Netto data
NSOLL_A Speed setpoint A (16-bit) 5 p1070 [3030.2] I16 4000 hex p2000
Trailer Telegram
assignment <4> M_LIM Torque limit 310 p1552,p1554 [6060.1] U16 4000 hex 100 %
according to p0922
[2420]
<4> STW3 Control word 3 304 (bit serial) [2444] U16 -
<1> When selecting a standard telegram or a manufacturer-specific telegram via p0922, these interconnection
parameters of the command data set CDS are automatically set to 0.
<2> Data type according to to the PROFIdrive profile: I16 = Integer16, U16 = Unsigned16.
<3> Display parameters for receive data according to [2460].
<4> Only SIEMENS telegram 350
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2440 -
PZD receive signals interconnection 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2 DP
Signal targets for STW1 in Interface Mode VIK-NAMUR (p2038 = 2) <1>
Fig. 2-31 Signal Meaning Interconnection [Function diagram] [Function diagram]

Inverted
parameters internal control signal target
word
2441 – STW1 control word interconnection




STW1.4 p1140[0] = r2090.4 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] [3080] -

STW1.5 p1141[0] = r2090.5 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] -
1 = Enable setpoint
STW1.6 p1142[0] = r2090.6 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] [3080] -
Function diagrams
p0810[0] = 2090.15
STW1.15 1 = CDS selection - [8565] -
<3>
Communication
<1> Used in telegram 20.
<3> Interconnection is not disabled.
2-529
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2441 -
STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 2) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2 DP
Signal targets for STW1 in Interface Mode SINAMICS (p2038 = 0)
2-530
Communication
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-32
<1>
Interconnection [Function diagram] [Function diagram]

parameters

2442 – STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0)




STW1.4 p1140[0] = r2090.4 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] [3080] -

STW1.5 p1141[0] = r2090.5 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] -
1 = Enable setpoint p1142[0] = r2090.6

STW1.6 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] [3080] -

STW1.13 1 = Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, raise p1035[0] = r2090.13 [2505.3] [3020] -
STW1.14 1 = Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, lower p1036[0] = r2090.14 [2505.3] [3020] -
<1> Used in telegrams 1, 350, 352, 353, 354.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2442 -
Signal targets for STW3 in Interface Mode SINAMICS (p2038 = 0) <1>
Fig. 2-33 Interconnection [Function diagram] [Function diagram]

parameters
STW3.0 1 = Fixed setp bit 0 p1020[0] = r2093.0 [3010.2] [3010.2] -

2444 – STW3 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0)
STW3.4 1 = DDS select. bit 0 p0820 = r2093.4 [2513.2] [8565.2] -
STW3.5 1 = DDS select. bit 1 p0821 = r2093.5 [2513.2] [8565.2] -
STW3.8 1 = Technology controller enable p2200[0] = r2093.8 [2513.2] [7958.4] -
STW3.9 1 = DC brake enable p1230[0] = r2093.9 [2513.2] [7017.1] -
STW3.11 1 = Droop enable p1492[0] = r2093.11 [2513.2] [6030.1] -
STW3.12 1 = Torque control active p1501[0] = r2093.12 [2513.2] [6060.1] -
STW3.13 0 = External fault 1 (F07860) p2106[0] = r2093.13 [2513.2] [8060.1] -
Function diagrams
STW3.15 1 = CDS bit 1 p0811[0] = r2093.15 [2513.2] [8560.3] -
Communication
<1> Used in telegrams 350.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2-531

- 2444 -
2-532
Communication
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-34
2450 – PZD send652 signals interconnection
Signal sources for PZD send signals <1> PZD send word 1...8
p2051[0...7] WORD PROFIdrive send
Signal PROFIdrive Interconnection Function
Scaling telegram
Description Signal No. parameter diagram Data type r2053[0...7] WORD
ZSW1 Status word 1 2 r2089[0] [2452] U16 - ... Header

NIST_A Actual speed A (16 bit) 6 r0063[0] - I16 4000 hex p2000 Data
IAIST_GLATT Absolute actual current, smoothed 51 r0068[1] [6799] I16 4000 hex p2002
Trailer
MIST_GLATT Actual torque smoothed 53 r0080[1] [6799] I16 4000 hex p2003 Telegram assignment
according to p0922
PIST_GLATT Power factor, smoothed 54 r0082[1] [6799] I16 4000 hex p2004 [2420]
NIST_A_GLATT Actual speed, smoothed 57 r0063[1] - I16 4000 hex p2000
MELD_NAMUR VIK-NAMUR message bit bar 58 r3113 - U16
FAULT_CODE Fault code 301 r2131 [8060] U16 PROFIBUS
WARN_CODE Alarm code 303 r2132 [8065] U16
ZSW3 Status word 3 305 r0053 [2454] U16
<1> Data type according to the PROFIdrive profile: I16 = Integer16, U16 = Unsigned16.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2450 -
PZD send signals interconnection 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2 DP
Signal sources for ZSW1 in Interface Mode VIK-NAMUR (p2038 = 2) <1>

Signal Meaning parameters internal control word signal target <2>

2451 – ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 2)
ZSW1.12 Reserved - - - -
1 = Motor rotates forwards (n_act 0)

ZSW1.14 0 = Motor rotates backwards (n_act < 0) p2080[14] = r2197.3 [2534.7] [8011] -
Function diagrams
p2080[15] = r0836.0
ZSW1.15 1 = Display CDS - - -
Communication
<4>
<1> Used in telegram 20. <3> The drive object is ready to accept data.
<2> The ZSW1 is generated using the binector-connector converter (BI: p2080[0...15], inversion: p2088[0].0...p2088[0].15) <4> Interconnection is not disabled.
2-533
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2451 -
ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 2) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2 DP
Signal sources for ZSW1 im Interface Mode SINAMICS (p2038 = 0) <1>
2-534
Communication
Function diagrams
Signal Meaning <2>
parameters internal control word signal target


ZSW1.12 1 = Open holding brake p2080[12] = r0899.12 [2503.7] [2701] -
ZSW1.14 1 = Motor rotates forwards (n_act 0) p2080[14] = r2197.3 [2534.7] [8011] -

0 = Motor rotates backwards (n_act < 0)
ZSW1.15 1 = No alarm, thermal overload, power unit p2080[15] = r2135.15 [2548.7] [8014]
<1> Used in telegrams 1, 350, 352, 353, 354.

<2> The ZSW1 is generated using the binector-connector converter (BI: p2080[0...15], inversion: p2088[0].0...p2088[0].15)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2452 -
Signal sources for ZSW3 im Interface Mode SINAMICS (p2038 = 0) <1>
Fig. 2-37 Signal Meaning

Interconnection [Function diagram] [Function diagram] Inverted
parameters internal status word signal source
1 = DC brake active
ZSW3.0 [2511.7] [7017.5] -
0 = DC brake not active
ZSW3.1 1 = |n_act| > p1226 (n_standstill) [2511.7] [2534.7] -
ZSW3.2 1 = |n_act| > p1080 (n_min) [2511.7] [2534.7] -
ZSW3.3 1 = I_act >= p2170 [2511.7] [2534.7] -
ZSW3.4 1 = |n_act| > p2155 [2511.7] [2534.7] -
ZSW3.5 1 = |n_act| <= p2155 [2511.7] [2534.7] -
ZSW3.6 1 = |n_act| >= r1119 (f_set) [2511.7] [2534.7] -
ZSW3.7 1 = Vdc <= p2172 [2511.7] [2534.7] -

p2051[3] = r0053
ZSW3.8 1 = Vdc > p2172 [2511.7] [2534.7] -
ZSW3.9 1 = Ramping finished [2511.7] [3080.7] -
ZSW3.10 1 = Techn. contr. out at lower limit [2511.7] [7958.7] -
ZSW3.11 1 = Techn. contr. out at upper limit [2511.7] [7958.7] -
ZSW3.12 Reserved - - -
Function diagrams
Communication
<1> Used in telegrams 350.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2-535

- 2454 -
r2090.0
...
PZD1 recv bitw
2-536
Communication
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-38
PROFIBUS r2091.0
...
PZD2 recv bitw
r2092.0
...
PZD3 recv bitw
PROFIdrive r2092.15 PZD3 recv bitw
2468 – Receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)
receive telegram r2093.0

...
PZD4 recv bitw
Header r2093.15 PZD4 recv bitw
Data PZD recv word
Trailer PZD receive word 5 r2050 [4]
2 connector-binector converter
PZD recv word Con/bin outp inv
PZD receive word 6 r2050 [5] p2098[0].0
<2>
PZD recv word Con/bin S_src
PZD receive word 7 r2050 [6] p2099 [0] 0 Con/bin outp
PZD recv word (0) r2094.0
1 1
<3> Con/bin outp inv

p2098[0].15
Reference quantities for further
interconnection
p200x 0 Con/bin outp
r2094.15
1 1
Con/bin outp inv

p2098[1].0
<2>
Con/bin S_src
p2099 [1] 0 Con/bin outp
(0) r2095.0
1 1
Con/bin outp inv

p2098[1].15
0 Con/bin outp
r2095.15
1 1
<1> In order to maintain the PROFIdrive profile, receive word 1 must be used as control word (STW1)
(due to bit 10 "control requested").
<2> Using the connector-binector converters, the bits can be extracted from two of the PZD receive words 3 to 8 and used as binectors.
<3> The following representation applies for words: 4000 hex = 100 %.
The reference variables p200x apply for the ongoing interconnection (100 % -> p200x).
The following applies for temperature values: 100° C -> 100 % = 4000 hex, 0° C -> 0 %.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2468 -
Receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2 DP
Fig. 2-39
2470 – Send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)
Diag send word

r2053 [0 7]
PZD send word p2051 [0] <1> ...

(0) PZD send word 2

PROFIdrive send
(0) PZD send word 3 telegram

PZD send word 4 Header
(0)
Data
(0) PZD send word 5 Trailer

(0) PZD send word 6

(0) PZD send word 7 PROFIBUS

(0) PZD send word 8
<3>
Reference quantities for
further interconnection
p200x
Function diagrams
Communication
<1> To comply with the PROFIdrive profile, send word 1 must be used as status word 1 (ZSW1).
<2> Physical word values are inserted in the telegram as referenced variables. p200x apply as reference variables (telegram contents = 4000 hex,
if the input variable has the value p200x).
The following applies for temperature values: 100° C -> 100 % = 4000 hex; 0° C -> 0%.
2-537
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2470 -
Send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2 DP
Bin/con ZSW inv
2-538
Communication
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-40
p2088 [2].0
5 binector-connector converter Bin/con ZSW3

[0]
(0) r2089 [2]
(0.0)
[1] 1 1
Bin/con ZSW inv
p2088 [0].0
2472 – Status words, free interconnection
Bin/con ZSW inv

Bin/con ZSW1 p2088 [2].15
[0]
(0) r2089 [0]
(0.0)
[1] 1 1 0
[15]
(0.0)
1 1
Bin/con ZSW inv
p2088 [0].15
Bin/con ZSW inv
p2088 [3].0
0
[15]
(0.0) Bin/con ZSW4
1

[0] r2089 [3]
(0)
(0.0) [1]
1 1
Bin/con ZSW inv

Bin/con ZSW inv p2088 [3].15
p2088 [1].0
Bin/con ZSW2 0
[15]
p2081 [015] 0 Bin/con ZSW send (0.0)
[0] 1
(0) r2089 [1] 1
(0.0) [1]
1 1
Bin/con ZSW inv Bin/con ZSW inv

p2088 [1].15 p2088 [4].0
Bin/con ZSW5
[15] [0] r2089 [4]
(0.0) (0)
1 (0.0) [1]
1 1
1
Bin/con ZSW inv

p2088 [4].15
0
[15]
(0.0)
1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2472 -
Status words, free interconnection 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2 DP
Function diagrams
Internal control/status words
2.6 Internal control/status words
Function diagrams
2501 – Control word, sequence control 2-540
2503 – Status word, sequence control 2-541
2505 – Control word, setpoint channel 2-542
2510 – Status word 1 (r0052) 2-543
2511 – Status word 2 (r0053) 2-544
2512 – Control word 1 (r0054) 2-545
2513 – Control word 2 (r0055) 2-546
2520 – Control word, speed controller 2-547
2522 – Status word, speed controller 2-548
2526 – Status word, closed-loop control 2-549
2530 – Status word, current control 2-550
2534 – Status word, monitoring functions 1 2-551
2546 – Control word, faults/alarms 2-554
2548 – Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2 2-555
2634 – Sequence control - Missing enable signals 2-556

PROFIdrive-Bit
2-540

Function diagrams
Fig. 2-41 STW seq_ctrl
OFF2 S_src 1
r0898
<2> p0844 [C] Bit Control word sequence control (r0898)
r0898
(1) No.
<3>
ON / OFF (OFF1) p0840 [C]
OFF2 S_src 2 = ON
<3> (722.0) 0 r0898.0 To the control unit
2501 – Control word, sequence control
p0845 [C] 0 = OFF1 active

(1)
1 = Operating condition, no coast down active (OFF2 inactive) To the control unit
1 r0898.1
0 = OFF2 active
OFF3 S_src 1
<2> p0848 [C] 2 1 = Operating condition, no fast stop active (OFF3 inactive) r0898.2 To the control unit
0 = OFF3 active
<3> (1)
Operation enable p0852 [C]
OFF3 S_src 2
<3> (1) 3 1 = Enable operation r0898.3 To the control unit
p0849 [C]
(1) RFG enable p1140 [C]
(1) To the setpoint channel
<3> 4 1 = Enable ramp-function generator r0898.4
[3060.6] [3070.7] [3080.5]
Continue RFG p1141 [C]
1 = Continue ramp-function generator
<3> (1) 5 r0898.5 To the setpoint channel [3060.1]

0 = Freeze ramp-function generator [3070.1]
Setpoint enable p1142 [C]
(1) To the setpoint channel
<3> 6 1 = Enable speed setpoint r0898.6
[3060.1] [3070.1] [3080.4]
Uncond open brake p0855 [C]
<3> (0) 7 1 = Command open brake r0898.7 To the brake control [2701.4]
Jog bit 0 p1055 [C]

<3> (0) 8 1 = Jog 1 r0898.8 To jog [3030.6]
Jog bit 1 p1056 [C]

<3> (0) 9 1 = Jog 2 r0898.9 To jog [3030.6]
Master ctrl by PLC p0854 [C]

<3> (1) 10 1 = Control via PLC <1> r0898.10
11 Reserved
n_ctrl enable p0856 [C]

<3> (1) 12 1 = Speed controller enable To the brake control [2701.4]
r0898.12
To the torque setpoint [6060.4]
<1> Bit 10 in STW1 must be set to ensure that
the drive accepts the process data. 13 Reserved
<2> PROFIdrive interconnection: For
PROFIdrive standard telegrams, the Uncond close brake p0858 [C]
upper inputs are connected with <3> (0) 14 1 = Command close brake r0898.14 To the brake control [2701.4]
PROFIdrive-STW1 [2420].
Only relevant for CDS0.
15 Reserved
<3> When the master control is retrieved, predefined by STARTER or AOP30.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Internal control/status words FP_2501_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 2501 -
Control word, sequence control 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
PROFIdrive-Bit
Fig. 2-42
ZSW seq_ctrl
r0899
Bit No. Status word sequence control (r0899)
r0899
From the control unit 0 1 = Ready for switching on r0899.0

2503 – Status word, sequence control
From the control unit 1 1 = Ready for operation (DC link loaded, pulses inhibited) r0899.1
From the control unit 2 1 = Operation enabled (drive follows n_set) r0899.2
From the control unit 3 1 = Jog active r0899.3

OFF2 S_src 2
p0845 [C]
From the control unit 4 1 = No coast down active (OFF2 inactive) r0899.4
(1)
OFF3 S_src 2
p0849 [C] From the control unit 5 1 = No fast stop active (OFF3 inactive) r0899.5
(1)
From the control unit 6 1 = Switching on inhibited active r0899.6
OFF1
& 7 1 = Drive ready r0899.7
OFF2
1 8 1 = Controller enable r0899.8
From the control unit
OFF3
Bit 9 = 1 --> Ready to exchange process data 9 1 = Control requested <1> r0899.9
Enable internal
missing or 10 Reserved
fault with
this reaction
From the control unit 11 1 = Pulses enabled r0899.11
From the brake control [2701.8] 12 1 = Open holding brake r0899.12

From the brake control [2701.8] 13 1 = Command close holding brake r0899.13
14 Reserved
Function diagrams
15 Reserved

2-541
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2503 -
Status word, sequence control 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-542

Function diagrams
Fig. 2-43
STW setpoint chan
r1198
Bit No. Control word, setpoint channel (r1198) r1198
n_set_fixed Bit 0 p1020 [C]
(0)
2505 – Control word, setpoint channel
0 1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 0 r1198.0 To fixed speed setpoints [3010.2]

(0) 1 1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 1 r1198.1 To fixed speed setpoints [3010.2]


4 Reserved
Inhib neg dir p1110 [C]

(0) To direction of rotation limiting and

5 1 = Inhibit negative direction of rotation r1198.5
direction of rotation reversal [3040.3]
Inhib pos dir p1111 [C]
(0) 6 1 = Inhibit positive direction of rotation r1198.6 To direction of rotation limiting and
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
9 Reserved
10 Reserved
Setp inv p1113 [C]

(722.1) 11 1 = Setpoint inversion r1198.11 To direction of rotation limiting and
12 Reserved
Mop raise p1035 [C]

(0) 13 1 = Motorized potentiometer, raise r1198.13 To the motorized potentiometer [3020.1]
Mop lower p1036 [C]

(0) 14 1 = Motorized potentiometer, lower r1198.14 To the motorized potentiometer [3020.1]
Bypass RFG p1122 [C]

(0) 15 1 = Bypass ramp-function generator r1198.15 To the setpoint channel [3060.1] [3070.3]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2505 -
Control word, setpoint channel 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-44
ZSW 1
r0052
Bit No. Status word 1 (r0052)
r0052
r0899
[2503.7] ZSW seq_ctrl 1 = Drive ready for switching on
r0899.0 0 r0052.0
0 = Drive not ready for switching on
2510 – Status word 1 (r0052)
r0899
[2503.7] ZSW seq_ctrl 1 = Drive ready for operation (DC link loaded, pulses disabled)
r0899.1 1 r0052.1
0 = Drive not ready for operation
r0899
[2503.7] ZSW seq_ctrl 1 = Drive running (voltage at output terminals)
r0899.2 2 r0052.2
0 = Pulses disabled
r2139 Signal "Fault active" is inverted if connected
[2548.7] ZSW fault/alarm 1 1 = Drive fault active (pulses disabled)
r2139.3 3 <1> r0052.3 to a digital output which means that the
0 = No fault
relay will be in the de-energised state.
r0899
[2503.7] ZSW seq_ctrl 0 = Coast down active (OFF2 active)
r0899.4 4 r0052.4
1 = No coast down active (OFF2 inactive)
r0899
[2503.7] ZSW seq_ctrl 0 = Fast stop active (OFF3 active)
r0899.5 5 r0052.5
1 = No fast stop active (OFF3 inactive)
r0899
[2503.7] ZSW seq_ctrl 1 = Switching on inhibited active
r0899.6 6 r0052.6
0 = No switching on inhibited (possible to switch on)
r2139
[2548.7] ZSW fault/alarm 1 1 = Drive warning active
r2139.7 7 r0052.7
0 = No warning
r2197
[2534.7] ZSW monitor 1 0 = Deviation setpoint / act. value
r2197.7 8 r0052.8
1 = No deviation setpoint / act. Value
r0899
[2503.7] ZSW seq_ctrl
r0899.7 9 1 = PZD control (always 1) r0052.9
r2197
[2534.7] ZSW monitor 1 1 = Maximum speed reached (f_act >= p1082 (f_max))
r2197.6 10 r0052.10
0 = f_act < p1082 (f_max)
r0056
[2526.7] ZSW cl-loop ctrl 0 = I,M,P limit reached
r0056.13 11 r0052.11
1 = Limit not reached
r0899
[2701.8] ZSW seq_ctrl
r0899.12 12 1 = Open motor holding brake r0052.12

r2135
[2548.7] ZSW fault/alarm 2 0 = Alarm motor overtemperature
r2135.14 13 r0052.13
1 = No motor overtemperature
r2197
[2534.7] ZSW monitor 1 1 = Motor runs right
r2197.3 14 r0052.14
0 = Motor does not run right
Function diagrams
r2135
[2548.7] ZSW fault/alarm 2 0 = Alarm drive converter overload
r2135.15 15 r0052.15
1 = No drive converter overload
<1> r0052.3 displays status bit r2139.3 or r1214.10, if p1210 > 0

2-543
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2510 -
Status word 1 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-544

Function diagrams
Fig. 2-45 ZSW 2
r0053
Bit No. Status word 2 (r0053)
r0053
r1239
[7017.5] DCBRK ZSW 1 = DC brake active
r1239.8 0 r0053.0
0 = DC brake not active
2511 – Status word 2 (r0053)
r2197
[2534.7] ZSW monitor 1
r2197.5 1 1 = |n_act| > p1226 (n_standstill) r0053.1
r2197
r2197.0 2 1 = |n_act| > p1080 (n_min) r0053.2
r2197
r2197.8 3 1 = I_act >= p2170 r0053.3
r2197
r2197.2 4 1 = |n_act| > p2155 r0053.4
r2197
r2197.1 5 1 = |n_act| <= p2155 r0053.5
r2197
r2197.4 6 1 = |n_act| >= r1119 (f_set) r0053.6
r2197
r2197.9 7 1 = Vdc <= p2172 r0053.7
r2197
r2197.10 8 1 = Vdc > p2172 r0053.8
r1199
[3080.7] RFG ZSW
r1199.2 9 1 = Ramping finished r0053.9
r2349
[7958.7] Tec_ctrl status
r2349.10 10 1 = Techn. contr. out at lower limit r0053.10
r2349
r2349.11 11 1 = Techn. contr. out at upper limit r0053.11
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2511 -
Status word 2 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-46
STW 1
OFF2 S_src 1
r0054
p0844 [C] Bit No. Control word 1 (r0054)
STW seq_ctrl r0054
(1)
ON / OFF (OFF1) p0840 [C] r0898 [2501.7]
OFF2 S_src 2 0 = OFF1, Shutdown via ramp, followed by pulse disable Sequence control
(722.0) r0898.0 0
p0845 [C] 1 = ON, operating condition (edge-controlled) Setpoint channel
2512 – Control word 1 (r0054)
(1) r0898 [2501.7]

0 = OFF2: Electrical stop, pulse disable, motor coasts down
r0898.1 1 Sequence control
1 = Operating condition
OFF3 S_src 1 r0898 [2501.7]
0 = OFF3: Fast stop Sequence control
p0848 [C] r0898.2 2
1 = Operating condition Setpoint channel
(1)
Operation enable p0852 [C] r0898 [2501.7]
OFF3 S_src 2
(1) r0898.3 3 1 = Operation enable Sequence control
p0849 [C] All bits = 1 -->
(1) RFG enable p1140 [C] r0898 [2501.7] drive runs
(1) r0898.4 4 1 = Ramp-function generator enable Setpoint channel
1. Acknowledge Continue RFG p1141 [C] r0898 [2501.7]

p2103 [C] (1) r0898.5 5 1 = Continue ramp-function generator Setpoint channel
(722.2) [2501.7]
Setpoint enable p1142 [C] r0898
(1) r0898.6 6 1 = Speed setpoint enable Setpoint channel
2. Acknowledge
p2104 [C] r2138 [2546.7]
(0) r2138.7 7 1 = Acknowledge fault Sequence control
3. Acknowledge Jog bit 0 p1055 [C] r0898 [2501.7]

r0898.8 8 Sequence control
p2105 [C] (0) 1 = Jog bit 0
Setpoint channel
(0)
Jog bit 1 p1056 [C] r0898 [2501.7]
Sequence control
Pulse generator (0) r0898.9 9 1 = Jog bit 1 Setpoint channel
Master ctrl by PLC p0854 [C] r0898 [2501.7] Bit 10 in STW1 must be set to
(1) r0898.10 10 1 = Master ctrl by PLC ensure that the drive accepts the
process data.
Setp inv p1113 [C] r1198 [2505.7]
(722.1) r1198.11 11 1 = Directions reversal (setpoint) Setpoint channel
12 Reserved

Mop raise p1035 [C] r1198 [2505.7]
(0) r1198.13 13 1 = Motorized potentiometer raise Setpoint channel
Mop lower p1036 [C] r1198 [2505.7]

(0) r1198.14 14 1 = Motorized potentiometer lower Setpoint channel
Function diagrams
r0836 [8560.7]
r0836.0 15 1 = CDS bit 0 Sequence control
2-545
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2512 -
Control word 1 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-546

Function diagrams
Fig. 2-47
Suppl STW
r0055
Bit No. Control word 2 (r0055)
r0055
r1198
[2505.7] STW setpoint chan
r1198.0 0 1 = Fixed setp bit 0 Fixed frequencies
r1198
2513 – Control word 2 (r0055)

r1198
r1198
r0837
[8565.7] DDS selected
r0837.0 4 1 = DDS select. bit 0 Sequence control
r0837
[8565.7] DDS selected
r0837.1 5 1 = DDS select. bit 1 Sequence control
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
r2349
r2349.0 8 1 = Technology controller enable Technology controller
r1239
[7017.7] DCBRK ZSW
r1239.11 9 1 = DC brake enable DC braking control
10 Reserved
r1406
[2520.7] STW n_ctrl
r1406.11 11 1 = Droop enable Speed control
r1406
[2520.7] STW n_ctrl

r1406.12 12 1 = Torque control active Speed/torque control
r2138
[2546.7] STW fault/alarm
r2138.13 13 0 = External fault 1 (F07860) Sequence control
14 Reserved
r0836
[8560.7] CDS selected
r0836.0 15 1 = CDS bit 1 Sequence control
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2513 -
Control word 2 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-48 STW n_ctrl

r1406
Bit No. Control word, speed controller (r1406) r1406
0 Reserved
2520 – Control word, speed controller
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
n_ctrl integ stop p1476 [C]

(0) 4 1 = speed controller, hold I component r1406.4 To the speed controller [6040.4]
n_ctrl integ set p1477 [C]

(0) 5 1 = speed controller, set I component r1406.5 To the speed controller [6040.4]
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
9 Reserved
10 Reserved
Droop enable p1492 [C]

(0) 11 1 = Droop enable r1406.11 To the speed setpoint, droop [6030.1]
Changeov n/M_ctrl p1501 [C]

(0) 12 1 = Closed-loop torque control active r1406.12 To the closed-loop speed control [6060.1]

13 Reserved
14 Reserved
Function diagrams
15 1 = Speed adaption controller set I-comp. r1406.15
2-547
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2520 -
Control word, speed controller 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-548

Function diagrams
Fig. 2-49 ZSW n_ctrl
r1407
Bit No. Status word, speed controller (r1407)
r1407
0 1 = V/f control active r1407.0

2522 – Status word, speed controller
From the changeover, closed-loop control types 1 1 = Sensorless operation active r1407.1 1 = Torque limit reached (without pre-control)
r1406
[2520.7] 1 = Torque control
r1406.12 To speed setpoint, droop [6030.5]
& 2 1 = Closed-loop torque control active r1407.2
To torque setpoint [6060.3]
STW n_ctrl Sensorless operation
From the control unit 3 1 = Closed-loop speed control active r1407.3
4 Reserved
From the speed controller [6040.7] 5 1 = Speed controller, I component held r1407.5
From the speed controller [6040.7] 6 1 = Speed controller, I component set r1407.6
Ramp-function generator tracking [3080.1]

From the torque setpoint [6060.7] 7 1 = Torque limit reached r1407.7 Speed controller [6040.4]
Motor locked/stalled [8012.5]
From the torque setpoint [6060.7] 8 1 = Torque limiting, upper, active r1407.8
From the torque setpoint [6060.4] [6060.7] 9 1 = Torque limiting, lower, active r1407.9
From the speed setpoint, droop [6030.3] 10 1 = Droop enabled r1407.10
From the speed setpoint, droop [6030.4][6030.5] 11 1 = Speed setpoint limited r1407.11
12 1 = Ramp-function generator set r1407.12
13 1 = Sensorless operation due to a fault r1407.13
14 Reserved
15 1 = Torque limit reached (without pre-control)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2522 -
Status word, speed controller 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-50
ZSW cl-loop ctrl
Bit No. Status word closed-loop control (r0056) r0056
r0056
0 1 = Initialization completed r0056.0

2526 – Status word, closed-loop control
1 1 = De-magnetization completed r0056.1
2 1 = Pulses enabled r0056.2
3 1 = Soft starting available <1> r0056.3
[6722.6] 4 1 = Magnetization completed r0056.4
5 1 = Starting boost active r0056.5
6 1 = Acceleration voltage active <1> r0056.6
[6730.5][6731.5][6732.4] 7 1 = Frequency, negative r0056.7
[6722.3] 8 1 = Field weakening active r0056.8
[6714.8] 9 1 = Voltage limit active r0056.9
[6310.8] 10 1 = Slip limiting active <1> r0056.10
[6730.5][6731.5][6732.4] 11 1 = Frequency limit active r0056.11
12 1 = Current limiting controller, voltage output active <1> r0056.12 [8012.5]

[6060.7] 13 1 = Current/torque limiting active <1> r0056.13
[6220.8][6320.8] 14 1 = Vdc_max controller active <2> r0056.14 [6031.6][6710.2]
Function diagrams
[6220.8][6320.8] 15 1 = Vdc_min controller active <3> r0056.15 [6710.2]
<1> Only for V/f control
<2> Only for Power Modules PM230/PM240
<3> Only for Power Modules PM240 and for PM230 with Vector Control
2-549
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2526 -
Status word, closed-loop control 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-550

Function diagrams
Fig. 2-51 ZSW I_ctrl
r1408
Bit No. Status word closed-loop current control (r1408)
r1408
0 1 = Closed-loop current control active r1408.0

2530 – Status word, current control
[6714.5] 1 1 = Id controller I comp. limitation r1408.1
2 Reserved
[6714.8] 3 1 = Voltage limitation r1408.3
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
9 Reserved
[6730.3] 10 1 = Speed adaption limitation r1408.10
11 Reserved
r2198
r2198.7 12 1 = Motor stalled r1408.12
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2530 -
Status word, current control 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-52
ZSW monitor 1
r2197
Bit No. Status word, monitoring functions 1 (r2197)
r2197
From extended signals [8020.8] 0 1 = |n_act| <= n_min p1080 r2197.0

2534 – Status word, monitoring functions 1
<1>
From speed signals [8010.8] 1 1 = |n_act| <= speed threshold value 2 (p2155) r2197.1
1 2 1 = |n_act| > speed threshold value 2 (p2155) <1> r2197.2
From speed signals [8011.8] 3 1 = n_act >= 0 r2197.3
From extended signals [8020.8] 4 1 = |n_act| >= n_set r2197.4
From extended signals [8020.8] 5 1 = |n_act| <= n_standstill p1226 r2197.5
From speed signals [8010.8] 6 1 = |n_act| > n_max r2197.6
From speed signals [8011.8] 7 1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off r2197.7
From extended signals [8020.8] 8 1 = I_act >= I_threshold p2170 r2197.8
From extended signals [8020.8] 9 1 = Vdc_act <= Vdc_threshold p2172 r2197.9
From extended signals [8020.8] 10 1 = Vdc_act > Vdc_threshold p2172 r2197.10
From extended signals [8020.8] 11 1 = Load missing r2197.11
From extended signals [8021.8] 12 1 = |n_act| > n_max (with delay) r2197.12

13 Reserved
14 Reserved
Function diagrams
15 Reserved
<1> n_act = smoothed speed actual value r2169 [8010.2].

2-551
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2534 -
Status word, monitoring functions 1 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-552

Function diagrams
Fig. 2-53 ZSW monitor 2
r2198
r2198
From extended signals [8021.8] 0 1 = |n_act| <= speed threshold 5 r2198.0

From extended signals [8021.8] 1 1 = |n_act| > speed threshold 5 r2198.1
From extended signals [8021.8] 2 1 = |n_act| <= speed threshold 6 r2198.2
From extended signals [8021.8] 3 1 = |n_act| > speed threshold 6 r2198.3
From speed signals [8011.8] 4 1 = |n_set| < p2161 r2198.4

From speed signals [8011.8] 5 1 = n_set > 0 r2198.5
From torque messages, motor locked/stalled [8012.8] 6 1 = Motor blocked r2198.6
From torque messages, motor locked/stalled [8012.8] 7 1 = Motor stalled r2198.7
From extended signals [8020.8] 8 1 = |I_act| < I_threshold p2170 r2198.8
From extended signals [8021.8] 9 1 = |M_act| > torque threshold 1 and n_set reached r2198.9
From torque messages, motor locked/stalled [8012.3] 10 1 = |M_set| < torque threshold 1 (p2174) r2198.10
From load monitoring [8013.8] 11 1 = Load monitoring signals an alarm r2198.11

From load monitoring [8013.8] 12 1 = Load monitoring signals a fault r2198.12
From extended signals [8021.8] 13 1 = |M_act| > torque threshold 1 r2198.13
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2536 -
PROFIdrive-Bit
Fig. 2-54
ZSW monitor 3
r2199
r2199
From speed signals [8010.8] 0 1 = |n_act| < speed threshold value 3 (p2161) <1> r2199.0
From speed signals [8010.8] 1 1 = f or n comparison value reached or exceeded (p2141) r2199.1
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
From speed signals [8011.8] 4 1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_on r2199.4
1 = Ramp-up/ramp-down completed
From speed signals [8011.8] 5 r2199.5 [8012.1]
0 = Ramp-function generator active
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
9 Reserved
10 Reserved
From speed signals [8012.5] 11 1 = Torque utilization < torque threshold value 2 (p2194) r2199.11
12 Reserved

13 Reserved
Function diagrams
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
<1> n_act = smoothed speed actual value r2169 [8010.2].

2-553
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2537 -
PROFIdrive-Bit
2-554

Function diagrams
Fig. 2-55 STW fault/alarm
r2138
Bit No. Control word, faults/alarms
r2138
0 Reserved
2546 – Control word, faults/alarms
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
1. Acknowledge
5 Reserved
p2103 [C]
<1> (722.2)
6 Reserved
2. Acknowledge
p2104 [C] To fault buffer [8060.1]
<1> (0) 7 = Acknowledge faults r2138.7
3. Acknowledge
p2105 [C] 8 Reserved
<1> (0)
Pulse generator 9 Reserved
External alarm 1 p2112 [C] To alarm buffer [8065.1]

<1> (1) 1 10 = External alarm 1 (A07850) r2138.10
External fault 3 Ext fault 3 t_on External alarm 2 p2116 [C] To alarm buffer [8065.1]
p2108 [C] 0 ... 1000 [ms] <1> (1) 1 11 = External alarm 2 (A07851) r2138.11
<1> p3110 (0)

(1) External alarm 3 p2117 [C] To alarm buffer [8065.1]
Ext fault 3 enab <1> (1) 1 12 = External alarm 3 (A07852) r2138.12
p3111 [C] T 0
<1> (1) External fault 1 p2106 [C] To fault buffer [8060.1]
<1> (1) 1 13 = External fault 1 (F07860) r2138.13
Ext flt 3 enab neg
p3112 [C] External fault 2 p2107 [C] To fault buffer [8060.1]
<1> (0) <1> (1) 1 14 = External fault 2 (F07861) r2138.14
To fault buffer [8060.1]

1 15 = External fault 3 (F07862) r2138.15
<1> These parameters refer to the Command Data Sets (CDS)..
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2546 -
Control word, faults/alarms 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-56
ZSW fault/alarm 1
r2139
Bit Status word, faults/alarms 1
No. r2139
0 1 = Acknowledgement running r2139.0
1
Reserved
2548 – Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2
From the fault buffer [8060.6] 3 1 = Fault present r2139.3
4
Reserved
5
6 1 = Internal signal 1 present r2139.6
From the alarm buffer [8065.4] 7 1 = Alarm present r2139.7
8 1 = Internal signal 2 present r2139.8
9
Reserved
10
11 Alarm class bit 0 r2139.11
12 Alarm class bit 1 r2139.12
13 - 15 Reserved
ZSW fault/alarm 2
r2135
Bit Status word, faults/alarms 2
No. r2135
0
... Reserved
11

From the thermal monitoring, motor [8016.8] 12 1 = Fault motor overtemperature r2135.12
From the thermal monitoring, power module [8014.8] 13 1 = Fault, thermal overload, power module r2135.13
Function diagrams
From the thermal monitoring, motor [8016.8] 14 1 = Alarm motor overtemperature r2135.14
From the thermal monitoring, motor [8016.8] 15 1 = Alarm, thermal overload, power module r2135.15
2-555
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2548 -
Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-556

Function diagrams
Fig. 2-57
Missing enable sig
r0046
Bit No. Missing enable signals (r0046)
r0046
0 1 = OFF1 enable missing r0046.0 [3020.5]
2634 – Sequence control - Missing enable signals
1 1 = OFF2 enable missing r0046.1
2 1 = OFF3 enable missing r0046.2 [3060.2]

0 = Internal fast stop [3060.4]
3 1 = Operation enable missing r0046.3 Fault with OFF3 response 1 [3070.2]
[3070.4]
4 1 = DC current brake, enable missing r0046.4
... Reserved
10 1 = Ramp-function generator enable missing r0046.10
11 1 = Ramp-function generator start missing r0046.11

12 1 = Setpoint enable missing r0046.12
... Reserved 1 = Internal RFG enable [3060.2]

r0046.16
1 [3070.2]
16 1 = OFF1 enable internal missing
17 1 = OFF2 enable internal missing r0046.17
18 1 = OFF3 enable internal missing r0046.18
19 1 = Pulse enable internal missing r0046.19
20 1 = DC current brake, internal enable missing r0046.20
21 1 = PU enable missing r0046.21
... Reserved
26 1 = Drive inactive or not operational r0046. 26

27 1 = Demagnetizing not completed r0046. 27
28 1 = Brake open missing r0046. 28
... Reserved
30 1 = Speed controller inhibited r0046.30
31 1 = Jog setpoint active r0046.31
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2634 -
Sequence control - Missing enable signals 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Function diagrams
Braking Control
2.7 Braking Control
Function diagrams
2701 – Basic braking control 2-558

STW seq_ctrl
p0858 r0898
2-558
Braking Control
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-58
Pulse suppr t_del 1 = Unconditionally close Close "normal" brake
0.000 ... 299.000 [s] r0898 .14
RESET [2501.3] the holding brake [2814.2]
p1228 (0.010) Q STW seq_ctrl
(Q=0) ZSW seq_ctrl
p0856 r0898
1 = Enable speed Close brake RESET r0899 <9>
r0898 .12
n_act [1/min] 1 T 0 controller (Q=0) Q r0899 .13 [2503.3]
SET <1>
[4715.7] r0063[0] Q p1215 = 0 1 = Command, close holding brake
(Q=1)
unsmoothed <2>
0 1
2701 – Basic braking control
Open brake SET 1 = Open the holding brake

Q [2503.3]
& (Q=1)
ZSW seq_ctrl
r0899 <6>
n_standst n_thresh <5> r0899 .12 [2503.3]
0.00 ... 210000.00 [1/min] n_standst t_monit 1 = Holding brake open
p1226 [D] (20.00) 0.000 ... 300.000 [s] <3>
p1227 (300.000) Brake t_close
0 ... 10000 [ms]
n_set before filt. p1217 (100)
[1/min] 1 T 0
[6030.2] r0060
0 T 0
&
RESET
OFF 1 present 1 (Q=0) Q
<8>
OFF 3 present 1
Pulse enable HW
ZSW seq_ctrl
& SET
Q
(Q=1)
r0899
1 = No coast down active
[2503.7] r0899.4
Pulse enable
<4> <3> <10>
STW seq_ctrl Brake t_open
STW seq_ctrl 1 = Unconditionally 0 ... 10000 [ms]
p0852 r0898 RESET open the holding
1 = Operation enabled 1 p0855 r0898 p1216 (100) Missing enable sig
[2501.3] r0898.3 (Q=0) Q brake
r0046
[2501.3] r0898 .7 RESET
ZSW seq_ctrl (Q=0) Q r0046.21 <7>
r0899 SET T 0 Stop 2 enable internal missing
[2503.7] r0899.6
1 = Switching on inhibited
active
& (Q=1)
Q 1
<1> p1215 = 2 SET
ZSW cl-loop ctrl & (Q=1)
Q
r0056 <2>
1 = Magnetizing completed
[2526.6] r0056.4
<1> Motor holding brake configuration (p1215) <5> For p1227 = 300 s, the monitoring function is deactivated.
0 = No motor holding brake being used. <6> If an external motor holding brake is used, p1215 should be set to 3 and r0899.12 should be interconnected as control signal.
1 = Motor holding brake acc. to sequence control.
2 = Motor holding brake always released. <7> r0046.21 = 0, as long as r0046.0 = 1 (OFF1 enable missing or switching on inhibited).
3 = Motor holding brake like sequence control, connection via BICO. r0046.21 = 1, if p0858 = 1 or p0856 = 0.
The signal generation is shown simplified.
<2> Priority assignment (high -> low): p1215, p0858, p0855, p0856, sequence control. <8> The internal signal includes signals that lead to OFF1 or OFF3 (e. g. BICO or fault response).
<3> If p1215 = 0, 2 -> t = 0 ms. <9> If the brake is permanently applied or released (p0855, p0858 or p1215), the drive does not wait while the brake is released or
Only if Safety Integrated is active. applied.
<4>
<10> Start frequency with V/f control: p1351, p1352 [6310.6]; Start torque with vector control: p1475 [6040.3]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Braking Control FP_2701_97_53.vsd Function diagram
- 2701 -
Basic braking control 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Function diagrams
Safety Integrated
2.8 Safety Integrated
Function diagrams
2800 – Basic Functions, Parameter Manager 2-560
2802 – Basic Functions, Monitoring functions and faults/alarms 2-561
2804 – Basic Functions, Status words 2-562
2810 – Basic Functions, STO: Safe Torque Off 2-563
2812 – Basic Functions, F-DI: Fail-safe Digital Input 2-564
2820 – SI Motion, SLS: Safely-Limited Speed 2-565
2825 – SI Motion, SS1: Safe Stop 1, Internal STOP A, B, F 2-566
2834 – SI Motion, Status words 2-567
2840 – SI Motion, PROFIsafe Control word and Status word 2-568
2846 – SI Motion, Parameter Manager 2-569
2850 – SI Motion, Fail-safe Digital Inputs (F-DI0 ... F-DI2) 2-570
2855 – SI Motion, Safe State selection 2-571

2-560
Safety Integrated
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-59 Changing safety parameters
Safety commissioning mode

[2802.1][2810.3] SI act chksm P1 SI setp_chksm P1
2800 – Basic Functions, Parameter Manager
--> select STO r9798 p9799

<3>
<1>
Safety parameterizing =
enable
Safety Integrated commissioning
p0010 = 95
Enter password
Safety parameters Safety parameters
SI password inp
p9761 & p9601 ... p9899 & p9601 ... p9899
can be changed are valid
SI password new x =
Checksum check
p9762 y
for safety
parameters
<1>
SET
= y=x Effective password
SI ackn password
p9763 <2>
<1>
= <1>
<3>
SI act_chksm P2 SI setp_chksm P2
r9898 p9899
Resetting safety parameters

p0010 unequal 95
Exit safety
commissioning mode
Inhibit safety functions

p9601 = 0 Safety parameters
[2810.3] p9601 ... p9899 can
p9801 = 0
& be reset to the factory
settings via p0970,
[2810.3]
<1> Comparator, refer to [1021]
p3900
<2> Analog signal memory, refer to [1021]
<3> The target checksum must be equal to the actual checksum. <**> Valid for all CU240E-2 variants
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Safety Integrated FP_2800_97_63.vsd Function diagram
- 2800 -
Basic Functions, Parameter Manager 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240E-2 <**>
Fig. 2-60
Safety Integrated version Monitoring clock cycle
SI version Drv P1 SI mon_clk cyc P1 [ms]

r9770 r9780
2802 – Basic Functions, Monitoring functions and faults/alarms
F01611
[2810.3] STO terminal P1 (r0722.4) Safety monitoring functions F30611
1 = Faults with response "NONE"
STOP F
[2810.1] STO terminal P2 (r0722.5) SI status P1
r9772
[2804.2]
Faults/alarms r9772 .15
[2800.3] Safety commissioning mode
P1: F/A01600 ... 01699 SI Status P2
P2: F/A30600 ... 30699 r9872 SI status P1
[2804.5] r9772
r9872 .15 1 [2804.2]
[2810.6] DIAG_U r9772 .10
1 = Faults with response "immediate pulse cancelation" SI Status P2

[2810.6] DIAG_L r9872 [2804.5]
r9872 .10
Additional diagnostics 1 = Faults with response "immediate pulse cancelation"

Information
that cannot be acknowledged
SI CDC_list P1 SI diag STOP F P1

r9794 r9795
1 = STOP A
Cross checking list Diagnostics for STOP F To Safe Torque Off
[2810.3]
F01600/F30600
1 "STOP A initiated"
SI status P1
r9772 [2804.2]
r9772 .9
SI Status P2
Function diagrams
Safety Integrated
r9872 [2804.5]
r9872 .9
<**> Valid for all CU240E-2 variants

2-561
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2802 -
Basic Functions, Monitoring functions and faults/alarms 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240E-2 <**>
2-562
Safety Integrated
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-61
Status word Safety Integrated Status word Safety Integrated Status word Safety Integrated
Processor 1 SI status P1 Processor2 SI Status P2 Processor 1 and Processor 2 SI status P1+P2
2804 – Basic Functions, Status words
r9772 r9872 r9773

Bit No. Status (Processor 1) Bit No. Status (Processor 2) Bit No. Status (Processor 1 + Processor 2)
r9772 r9872 r9773
[2810.3] 0 1 = STO selected on Processor 1 [2810.3] 0 1 = STO selected on Processor 2 & 0 1 = STO selected in drive
[2810.7] 1 1 = STO active on Processor 1 [2810.6] 1 1 = STO active on Processor 2 & 1 1 = STO active in drive
... Reserved ... Reserved ... Reserved
[2802.7] 9 1 = STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active [2810.5] 31 1 = The shutdown paths must be tested
[2802.8] 10 1 = STOP A active
... Reserved
[2802.5] 15 1 = STOP F active
16 1 = STO cause: Safety commissioning mode
[2810.3] 17 1 = STO cause: selection via terminal
18 Reserved
19 1 = STO cause: missing actual value

Functions available on Processor 1 und SI general fct P1
20 1 = STO cause: selection PROFIsafe Processor 2 r9771
Bit No. Functions available on Processor 1 und

Processor 2
0 1 = STO supported via terminals
...
Reserved
6 1 = PROFIsafe supported <1>
... Reserved
<1> only PROFIBUS variants

<**> Valid for all CU240E-2 variants
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2804 -
Basic Functions, Status words 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240E-2 <**>
Control Unit A01699
Fig. 2-62
+24 V SI status P1 SI FrcdCkProcTimer "Shutdown Power Module
Processor 1 [2804.1] r9772 0.00 ... 9000.00 [h] paths must
r9772.0 p9659 (8.00) be tested"
SI status P1 1 = STO selected on P1
[2804.1] r9772 SI status P1+P2 SI status P1
1 <1> T 0 r9773 [2804.2] r9772
r9772.17
CU DI status [2802.2] r9773.31 r9772.1
Kl.16 r0722 1 = STO active on
2810 – Basic Functions, STO: Safe Torque Off
Timer for forced 1 = Shutdown Control Unit

r0722 .4 paths must
checking 1
& be tested
procedure
1 = STOP A [2802.8] +5 V
1 Shutdown path
PM-IF
1 = Enable STO via p9601.0 fromP1
0 = STO_P1 Upper IGBT + Vdc
terminals (P1) 1
& <3>
bridge halve
1 = Enable PROFIsafe (P1) p9601.3 0 = Request Pulse cancelation P1
1 = Safety commissioning mode
[2800.3]
SI F-DI_chg tol P1
0.00 ... 2000.00 [ms]
p9650 (500.00)
Safe pulse Gating unit U
cancelation
Redundant functions <2> T 0 F01611 (P1)
=1 F30611 (P2) V
~
M
SI F-DI_chg tol P2 W
0.00 ... 2000000.00 [μs] +5 V
p9850 (500000.00) Shutdown
Monitoring for simultaneous
occurrence path from P2
0 = STO_P2 Lower IGBT
bridge halve
0 = Request pulse cancelation P2 <3>
Control Unit
PM-IF
Processor 2 SI Status P2
r9872
1 = "STO active" for
r9872.0
sequence control & - Vdc
1 = STO selected
1 on P2 [2802.1] DIAG_L
CU DI status
Kl.17 r0722 [2802.1] DIAG_U Gating unit
r0722 .5
&
1 = STOP A [2802.8]
1
1 = Enable STO via p9601.0
Function diagrams
terminals (P2) 1 &
Safety Integrated
1 = Enable PROFIsafe (P2) p9601.3
1 = Safety commissioning mode
[2800.3] <1> Switch-on delay starts when the "request pulse cancelation P1" is withdrawn.
PM-IF: Power Module Interface <2> Redundant functions in the Processor 1 (P1) and Processor 2 (P2).
<3> Transistors inhibited for a "0" signal.
2-563
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2810 -
Basic Functions, STO: Safe Torque Off 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240E-2/E-2 DP
2-564
Safety Integrated
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-63
2812 – Basic Functions, F-DI: Fail-safe Digital Input
SI STO t_debou P1
Kl.9 0.00 ... 100.00 [ms]
+24V OUT p9651 (1.00)
=1 [2810.4]
Kl.16 DI4
Kl.69 DI COM
Kl.17 DI5 & F-DI0
Kl.34 DI COM2
Kl.28
GND
SI STO t_debou P2
0.00 ... 100000.00 [μs]
p9851 (0.00)
F-DI: Fail-safe Digital Input
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2812 -
Basic Functions, F-DI: Fail-safe Digital Input 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240E-2/E-2 DP
Fig. 2-64
SI Mtn ramp t P1 SI Mtn rp t_del P2 SI Mtn ramp ref P1 SI Mtn ramp ref P2
10.00 ... 99000.00 [ms] 10000.00 ... 99000000.00 [μs] 600.0000 ... 24000.0000 [1/min] 600.0000 ... 24000.0000 [1/min]
p9582 (250.00) p9382 (250000.00) p9581 (1500.0000) p9381 (1500.0000)
2820 – SI Motion, SLS: Safely-Limited Speed
SI Mtn integ STW <2> <2>

SI Mtn integ diag
r9720 T 0
SLS deselection r9723
[2840.4] r9720 .4 1 Safe brake-ramp monitoring
r9723.16 Status of the
SBR function
<1> <2>
SI Mtn SLS t P1 SI Mtn SLS t P2 SI Mtn rp t_mon P1 SI Mtn rp t_mon P2

0.00 ... 600000.00 [ms] 0.00 ... 600000000.00 [μs] 0.50 ... 1000.00 [s] 500.00 ... 1000000.00 [ms]
p9551 (100.00) p9351 (100000.00) p9583 (10.00) p9383 (10000.00)
SI Mtn SLS lim P1

0.01 ... 100000.00 [1/min]
p9531 (2000.00)
SI Mtn integ stat

Safe speed monitoring r9722 [2840.8]
Safe acceleration monitoring r9722.4 SLS active
<1>
SI Mtn SLS lim P2

n_max 0.01 ... 100000.00 [1/min]
0.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] p9331 (2000.00)
p1082 [D] (1500.000)
SI Mtn SLS lim P1 SI Mtn SLS lim P2 SI Mtn gear num P1 SI Mtn gear num P2
0.01 ... 100000.00 [1/min] 0.01 ... 100000.00 [1/min] 1 ... 2147000000 1 ... 2147000000
p9531 (2000.00) p9331 (2000.00) p9522 (1) p9322 (1)
SI Mtn integ STW
r9720
Select SLS bit 0 0
[2840.4] r9720 .9 SI Mtn setp_lim [1/min]
r9733[0..2]
SI Mtn integ STW Conversion load side --> motor side
1
r9720
Select SLS bit 1
[2840.4] r9720 .10
SI Mtn SLS set_lim
0.000 ... 100.000 [%]
Function diagrams
p9533 (80.000)
Safety Integrated
SI Mtn gear den P1 SI Mtn gear den P2
1 ... 2147000000 1 ... 2147000000
<1> With p9306/p9506 = 3 p9521 (1) p9321 (1)
<2> With p9306/p9506 = 1
2-565
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2820 -
SI Motion, SLS: Safely-Limited Speed 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240E-2 F/DP F
2-566
Safety Integrated
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-65
2825 – SI Motion, SS1: Safe Stop 1, Internal STOP A, B, F
SI Mtn integ stat

r9722 [2840.4]
r9722 .1 SS1 active
SI Mtn ramp ref P1 SI Mtn rp t_mon P1

SI Mtn ramp t P1 600.0000 ... 24000.0000 [1/min] 0.50 ... 1000.00 [s]
10.00 ... 99000.00 [ms] p9581 (1500.0000) p9583 (10.00)
p9582 (250.00)
SI Mtn integ STW

r9720
SS1 deselection T 0
[2840.4] r9720 .1 1 Safe brake-ramp monitoring
STO initiate
SI Mtn rp t_del P2 [2830.2]
10000.00 ... 99000000.00 [μs] SI Mtn ramp ref P2 SI Mtn rp t_mon P2
p9382 (250000.00) 600.0000 ... 24000.0000 [1/min] 500.00 ... 1000000.00 [ms]
p9381 (1500.0000) p9383 (10000.00)
STOP F --> STOP B SI Mtn integ stat
r9722 [2840.8]
& r9722 .0 STO active
Actual value speed < p9360/p9560
STOP F --> STOP A
SI Mtn integ STW

r9720
STO deselection
[2840.4] r9720.0
SS1: Safe Stop 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2825 -
SI Motion, SS1: Safe Stop 1, Internal STOP A, B, F 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240E-2 F/DP F
Fig. 2-66
Status word Safety Integrated Status word Safety Integrated Status word Safety Integrated
Prozessor 1 SI status P1 Prozessor2 SI Status P2 Prozessor 1 and Prozessor 2 SI status P1+P2
r9772 r9872 r9773
Bit No. Status (Processor 1) Bit No. Status (Processor 2) Bit No. Status (Processor 1 + Processor 2)
r9772 r9872 r9773
[2810.3] 0 1 = STO selected on Prozessor 1 [2810.3] 0 1 = STO selected on Prozessor 2 & 0 1 = STO selected in drive
2834 – SI Motion, Status words
[2810.7] 1 1 = STO active on Prozessor 1 [2810.6] 1 1 = STO active on Prozessor 2 & 1 1 = STO active in drive
... Reserved 2 1 = SS1 delay time on P2 active ... Reserved
[2802.7] 9 1 = STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active ... Reserved [2810.5] 31 1 = The shutdown paths must be tested
[2802.8] 10 1 = STOP A active 5 1 = SS1 selected on processor 2
... Reserved 6 1 = SS1 active on processor 2

[2802.5] 15 1 = STOP F active ... Reserved
1 = STO cause: Safety commissioning mode 1 = STOP A cannot be acknowledged,

16 9 active
17 1 = STO cause: selection via terminal 10 1 = STOP A active
18 1 = STO cause: selection via SMM ... Reserved
15 1 = STOP F active Functions available on prozessor 1 und SI general fct P1

19 1 = STO cause: missing actual value prozessor 2 r9771
1 = STO cause: Safety commissioning
16 mode Functions available on prozessor 1 und
20 1 = STO cause: selection PROFIsafe Bit No.
prozessor 2
17 1 = STO cause: selection via terminal
0 1 = STO supported via terminals
18 1 = STO cause: selection via SMM
1 ... 3 Reserved
19 Reserved
4 1 = PROFIsafe supported (SI Motion) <1>
20 1 = STO cause: selection PROFIsafe
1 = Drive-based motion monitoring functions
21 Reserved 5 supported
22 1 = SS1 cause selection terminal 6 1 = PROFIsafe supported (Basic Functions) <1>
1 = Sensorless motion monitoring functions

23 1 = SS1 cause selection PROFIsafe 7 supported
Function diagrams
Safety Integrated
<1> only PROFIBUS variants
2-567
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2834 -
SI Motion, Status words 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240E-2 F/DP F
2-568
Safety Integrated
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-67
2840 – SI Motion, PROFIsafe Control word and Status word
SI Mtn integ STW SI Mtn integ stat

r9720 r9722
Bit No. PROFIsafe control word Bit No. PROFIsafe status word
r9720 r9722
[2855.3] 0 1 = STO deselection r9720.0 [2855.3] [2855.5] 0 1 = STO active r9722.0 [2855.5]
[2855.3] 1 1 = SS1 deselection r9720.1 [2855.3] [2855.5] 1 1 = SS1 active r9722.1 [2855.5]
2 Reserved 2 Reserved
[2855.3] 4 1 = SLS deselection r9720.4 [2855.3] [2855.5] 4 1 = SLS active r9722.4 [2855.5]
[2855.3] 7 1/0 = Acknowledgement r9720.7 [2855.3] [2855.5] 7 1 = Not a internal event r9722.7 [2855.5]
[2855.3] 9 1 = SLS selection bit 0 active r9720.9 [2855.3] [2855.5] 9 1 = Active SLS stage, bit 0 r9722.9 [2855.5]
[2855.3] 10 1 = SLS selection bit 1 active r9720.10 [2855.3] [2855.5] 10 1 = Active SLS stage, bit 1 r9722.10 [2855.5]
11 Reserved
[2865.8] 12 1 = SDI positive active r9722.12

[2865.8] 13 1 = SDI negative active r9722.13

r9722.10
14 Reserved
15 1 = SSM (Speed below limit) r9722.10

r9722.15 [2855.5]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2840 -
SI Motion, PROFIsafe Control word and Status word 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240E-2 F/DP F
Fig. 2-68
Changing safety parameters
SI Mtn act CRC P1 SI Mtn setp CRC P1

2846 – SI Motion, Parameter Manager
r9728 p9729
<3>
<1>
Safety parameterizing enable = Safety parameters
p9300 p9399
Safety Integrated commissioning Safety parameter p9500 ... p9599
p0010 = 95 p10002 ... p10152
Enter password
p9300 ... p9399
SI password inp are valid after
p9761 & p9500 ... p9599 & save.
p10002 ... p10152 STARTER issues a
SI password new x = can be changed message if a
Checksum check POWER ON is
p9762 y
for safety required
parameters
<1>
SET
= y=x Effective password
SI ackn password
p9763 <2>
<1>
= <1>
<3>
SI Mtn act CRC P2 SI Mtn setp CRC P2
r9398 p9399
Resetting safety parameters p0010 unequal 95

Exit safety
Inhibit safety functions commissioning mode
p9301 = 0
Safety parameter
p9501 = 0 p9300 p9399
p9500 ... p9599
& p10002 ... p10152
Function diagrams
p9601 = 0 can be reset to
Safety Integrated
[2810.3] factory settings via
<1> Comparator, refer to [1021] p0970, p3900
<2> Analog signal memory, refer to [1021] p9801 = 0
<3> The target checksum must be equal to the actual checksum. [2810.3]
2-569
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2846 -
SI Motion, Parameter Manager 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240E-2 F/DP F
SI discrp t_mon P1 SI discr t_mon P2
2-570
Safety Integrated
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-69
1.00 ... 2000.00 [ms] 1.00 ... 2000.00 [ms]
p10002 (500.00) p10102 (500.00)
SI DI t_debounceP1
Kl.9 0.00 ... 100.00 [ms] SI DI status P1
+24V OUT p10017 (1.00) r10051
T 0
r10051.0 =1 C01770 Discrepancy error
Kl.5 DI0
2850 – SI Motion, Fail-safe Digital Inputs (F-DI0 ... F-DI2)
F-DI0 F-DI0
Kl.6 DI1 & [2855.1]
SI DI status P2
r10151
SI DI t_debounceP2 r10151.0
0.00 ... 100.00 [ms]
p10117 (1.00) SI discrp t_mon P1 SI discr t_mon P2
1.00 ... 2000.00 [ms] 1.00 ... 2000.00 [ms]
p10002 (500.00) p10102 (500.00)
SI DI t_debounceP1
0.00 ... 100.00 [ms] SI DI status P1
p10017 (1.00) r10051
T 0
Kl.7 DI2
F-DI1
F-DI1
Kl.8 DI3 & [2855.1]
SI DI status P2
r10151
0.00 ... 100.00 [ms] SI discrp t_mon P1 SI discr t_mon P2
p10117 (1.00) 1.00 ... 2000.00 [ms] 1.00 ... 2000.00 [ms]
p10002 (500.00) p10102 (500.00)
SI DI t_debounceP1
0.00 ... 100.00 [ms] SI DI status P1
p10017 (1.00) r10051
T 0
Kl.16 DI4
F-DI2
F-DI2
Kl.17 DI5 & [2855.1]
SI DI status P2
Kl.69 DI COM
r10151
Kl.34 DI COM2 0.00 ... 100.00 [ms]
p10117 (1.00)
Kl.28 GND
F-DI: Fail-safe Digital Input
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2850 -
SI Motion, Fail-safe Digital Inputs (F-DI0 ... F-DI2) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240E-2 F/DP F
Fig. 2-70
2855 – SI Motion, Safe State selection
F-DI assignment
SI Motion
Statically active
[Source plan]
F-DI0
[2850.8]
F-DI1
[2850.8] SI Mtn integ stat
F-DI2 STO active
[2850.8] r9722 [2840.8]
Statically inactive r9722.0
[Source plan]
SI Mtn integ STW
SI STO F-DI P1 Deselection STO
0 ... 255 r9720 SS1 active
SI STO F-DI P2 p10022 (0) [2840.4] [2840.8]
r9720.0 r9722.1
0 ... 255
p10122 (0) SI SS1 F-DI P1 Safe motion
0 ... 255 Deselection SS1 monitoring
SI SS1 F-DI P2 p10023 (0) [2840.4]
r9720.1 SLS active
0 ... 255
p10123 (0) SI SLS F-DI P1 r9722.4
0 ... 255 Deselection SLS
SI SLS F-DI P2 p10026 (0) [2840.4] [2840.8]
0 ... 255 r9720.4
p10126 (0) SI SDI pos F-DI P1 Internal event
0 ... 255 Acknowledgement
SI SDI pos DI P2 p10030 (0) [2840.4] r9722.7
0 ... 255 r9720.12
p10130 (0) [2840.8]
SI SDI neg F-DI P1
SI SDI neg DI P2 p10031 (0) [2840.4]
0 ... 255 r9720.13
p10131 (0) SI ackn int evt P1
SI ackn int evt P2 p10006 (0) [2840.4]
r9720.7
0 ... 255
p10106 (0)
Function diagrams
Safety Integrated
2-571
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 2855 -
SI Motion, F-DI assignment 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240E-2 F/DP F
Function diagrams
Setpoint channel
2.9 Setpoint channel
Function diagrams
3010 – Fixed speed setpoints, binary selection (p1016 = 2) 2-573
3011 – Fixed speed setpoints, direct selection (p1016 = 1) 2-574
3020 – Motorized potentiometer 2-575
3030 – Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging 2-576
3040 – Direction limitation and direction reversal 2-577
3050 – Skip frequency bands and frequency limitations 2-578
3060 – Basic ramp-function generator 2-579
3070 – Extended ramp-function generator 2-580
3080 – Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking 2-581

Fig. 2-71
STW setpoint chan
p1020 r1198
[2505.2] r1198.0
STW setpoint chan 0.000 0 0 0 0 n_set_fixed No act

p1021 r1198 r1197
[2505.2] r1198.1 n_set_fixed 1
3010 – Fixed speed setpoints, binary selection (p1016 = 2)
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 0 0 0 1

STW setpoint chan p1001 [D] (0.000)
p1022 r1198 n_set_fixed 2
[2505.2] r1198.2 -210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 0 0 1 0
p1002 [D] (0.000)
STW setpoint chan n_set_fixed 3
p1023 r1198 -210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 0 0 1 1
p1003 [D] (0.000)
[2505.2] r1198.3
n_set_fixed 4
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 0 1 0 0
p1004 [D] (0.000)
n_set_fixed 5
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 0 1 0 1
p1005 [D] (0.000)
n_set_fixed 6
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 0 1 1 0
p1006 [D] (0.000)
n_set_fixed 7
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 0 1 1 1
p1007 [D] (0.000) n_set_fixed eff [1/min]
n_set_fixed 8 r1024
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 1 0 0 0
p1008 [D] (0.000)
n_set_fixed 9
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 1 0 0 1
p1009 [D] (0.000)
n_set_fixed 10
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 1 0 1 0
p1010 [D] (0.000)
n_set_fixed 11
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 1 0 1 1
p1011 [D] (0.000)
n_set_fixed 12
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 1 1 0 0
p1012 [D] (0.000)
n_set_fixed 13
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 1 1 0 1
p1013 [D] (0.000)
n_set_fixed 14
Function diagrams
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 1 1 1 0
Setpoint channel
p1014 [D] (0.000)
n_set_fixed 15
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 1 1 1 1
p1015 [D] (0.000)
2-573
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint channel FP_3010_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 3010 -
Fixed speed setpoints, binary selection (p1016 = 2) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-574
Setpoint channel
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-72
3011 – Fixed speed setpoints, direct selection (p1016 = 1)
p1020 r1198
STW setpoint chan
[2505.2] r1198.0
p1021 r1198
STW setpoint chan
[2505.2] r1198.1 n_setp_fix status
p1022 r1198 r1025
STW setpoint chan
[2505.2] r1198.2
p1023 r1198
STW setpoint chan
[2505.2] r1198.3
n_set_fixed 1
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 0001
p1001 [D] (0.000)
n_set_fixed 2
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 0010
p1002 [D] (0.000)
n_set_fixed 3
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 0100
p1003 [D] (0.000)
+ + + n_set_fixed eff [1/min]

n_set_fixed 4
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 1000 r1024
p1004 [D] (0.000) + + +
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 3011 -
Fixed speed setpoints, direct selection (p1016 = 1) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Data save active 0 The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p1040.
0
Fig. 2-73
1 The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a ashion after OFF and after ON set to the saved value.
Automatic mode 0 Without ramp generator in automatic mode (ramp-up/ramp-down time = 0).
1 Ramp-function generator active 1 With ramp generator in automatic mode.
Mop configuration
- ... - Initial rounding-off active 0 Without initial rounding.
2 1
p1030 [D] (0000 0110 bin) With initial rounding. The ramp-up/down time set is exceeded accordingly.
Save in NVRAM active 0 Not saved in the NVRAM (NVRAM = Non Volatile Random Access Memory).
3 1 Save in NVRAM active.
3020 – Motorized potentiometer
Ramp-function generator is 0 Ramp-up encoder inactive with pulse disable.

4 always active 1 The ramp-up encoder is calculated independently of the pulse enable.
STW setpoint chan

r1198
Mop raise r1198.13 Old value is kept 0
p1035 [C] [2505.7] -1
(0) 1
STW setpoint chan
r1198
Mop lower r1198.14 Mop manual/auto p1030.1
p1036 [C] [2505.7] p1041 [C] <2> <2>
(0) (0)
&
Mop ramp-up time Mop ramp-down time
00 0.000 ... 1000.000 [s] 0.000 ... 1000.000 [s]
p1047 [D] (10.000) p1048 [D] (10.000)
Mop n_set bef RFG [1/min]
MotP n_max r1045
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 01 y
p1037 [D] (0.000) p1082
<1>
0
0 1 Mop setp after
MotP n_min -1 1 x y RFG [1/min]
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 10 r1050
p1038 [D] (0.000) 1 0 x
<1> e.g. to [3030.1]
-p1082
11 y=0
MotP inv f_max (reference value for

ramp-function generator p1082)
p1039 [C] [3050.5] Mop start value
(0) Mop set val -210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min]
p1044 [C] p1040 [D] (0.000)
Mop auto setpoint
p1042 [C] (0)
<3>
(0) MotP acc set val
p1043 [C]
(0)
<1> For automatic commissioning, p1037 and p1038 are set to the p1030.4
Function diagrams
maximum motor frequency or to the rated motor frequency,
Setpoint channel
provided that f_max_mot has not been specified.
<2> If initial rounding-off is active (p1030.2 = 1), the selected ramp-up/ [2634.8] 1: OFF1 enable missing (r0046.0) 0
down times are exceeded accordingly.
0:
<3> Only effective if p1030.0 = 0. 1
2-575
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 3020 -
Motorized potentiometer 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-576
Setpoint channel
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-74
<1>
STW seq_ctrl
3030 – Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging
PcCtrl active p1055 r0898

r0807.0
[2501.7] r0898 .8
[2501.2]
Setpoint from external OP or operating tool STW seq_ctrl

p1056 r0898
[2501.7] r0898 .9
Main setpoint eff [1/min] Total setpoint eff [1/min]

Main setpoint r1073
<4> 1 r1078
p1070 [C]
(755[0])
+ 0 0 0
+ 0
Total setp 1
Jog 1 n_set
p1109 [C] -210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 0 1
Main setp scal p1058 [D] (150.000)
<3> (0)
p1071 [C]
(1) n_set_1
Total setp sel [3040.1]
p1108 [C] Jog 2 n_set
-210000.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 1 0
<2> (0)
p1059 [D] (-150.000)
1 1
Suppl setp scal
p1076 [C]
(1)
Keep old setpoint
Suppl setpoint
p1075 [C] <4> Suppl setpoint eff [1/min]
(0) r1077
<1> Jogging can only be activated in the operating state Ready for operation (S2).
<2> If technology controller is activated (p2200 > 0, p2251 = 0) connected with r2349.4.
<3> If technology controller is activated (p2200 > 0, p2251 = 0) connected with r2294.
<4> The connection to the source for the main and additional setpoint is estabished automatically via the setting in p1000.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 3030 -
Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-75
3040 – Direction limitation and direction reversal
STW setpoint chan STW setpoint chan STW setpoint chan

p1113 r1198 p1110r1198 p1111 r1198
[2505.2] r1198 .11 [2505.2] r1198.5 [2505.2] r1198 .6
1 = Direction reversal 1 = Inhibit negative direction of 1 = Inhibit positive direction of

rotation rotation
n_limit setp
0.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min]
p1063 [D] (210000.000)
0 0 0 Setp after limit [1/min]

n_set_1
[3030.8] 0 r1114 [3050.1]
-1 1
0 1 1
Function diagrams
Setpoint channel
2-577
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 3040 -
Direction limitation and direction reversal 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
n_skip 4 n_skip 3
2-578
Setpoint channel
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-76
0.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min]
p1094 [D] (0.000) n_skip 1 p1093 [D] (0.000) n_limit pos
<1> n_skip 2 0.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] p1085 [C]
0.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] p1091 [D] (0.000) <1>
(1083[0]) n_limit pos eff [1/min]
p1092 [D] (0.000) n_limit pos
<1>
<1>
0.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] Min r1084
p1083 [D] (210000.000) [6030.1]
0
3050 – Skip frequency bands and frequency limitations
[6640.5]
[8010.2]
-1 -1 -1 -1
n_Max <2>
0.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min]
y p1082 [D] (1500.000) Reference value [3020.6]
for the ramp- [3060.4]
function generator [3070.4]
w n_limit RFG pos

p1051 [C]
n_min (1083[0]) Maximum
limiting
0.000 ... 19500.000 [1/min] 1
w 0 active
p1080 [D] (0.000)
[3080.4]
-1 n_set n. min_lim [1/min]
w r1112
RFG setp at inp
Setp after limit [1/min] y [1/min]
r1114 r1119
w x
[3040.8] [3060.1]
[3070.1]
-1
w
n_limit RFG neg
p1052 [C] 0
w (1086[0])
w
<3> n_limit neg
p1088 [C] 0 n_limit neg eff [1/min]
n_skip bandwidth
0.000 ... 210000.000 [1/min] n_limit neg
(1086[0]) Max r1087
p1101 [D] (0.000) Limiting to negative [6030.1]
-210000.000 ... 0.000 [1/min] values
p1086 [D] (-210000.000) [6640.5]
<1> A suppression frequency of "0" de-activates the suppression frequency bandwidth. [8010.2]
<2> The setting range of p1082 is limited to f_max_mot.
<3> If the drive is not stopped via the input setpoint, but via controlled intervention, the
lower hysteresis branch is relevant after a subsequent run-up.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 3050 -
Skip speed bands and speed limitations 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
RFG ramp-up time RFG ramp-down time OFF3 t_RD
0.000 ... 999999.000 [s] 0.000 ... 999999.000 [s] 0.000 ... 5400.000 [s]
Fig. 2-77
p1120 [D] (10.000) p1121 [D] (10.000) <4> p1135 [D] (0.000)
0 1
0 = Internal fast stop
[2634.8]
3060 – Basic ramp-function generator
1 = Bypass ramp-function generator

STW setpoint chan 0 0
<3> p1122 r1198 0 1 0 1
[2505.7] r1198 .15
Ramp flattening-off
[3080.8]
STW seq_ctrl Tup Tdn
p1142 r0898
Freeze ramp-function generator
[2501.7] r0898 .6
1 = Enable frequency setpoint
x Tup Tdn
RFG setp at inp [1/min] [3050.8] 0 0
p1082 0 f_set_4
1 1
r1119 x y [3080.1]
From the setpoint limiting 1 1
0 0 t
0 0 -p1082 STW seq_ctrl
p1140 r0898
STW seq_ctrl 1 = Enable ramp-function <2>
y [2501.7] r0898.4 generator
<1> p1141 r0898 1
[2501.7] r0898 .5 p1082
0 = Freeze ramp-function generator
t
1 = Internal RFG enable -p1082
[2634.8] RFG acceleration [1/s²]
Tup Tdn
r1149
[2634.8]
RFG accept set v Other status bits
p1143 [C] 1
(0) x Ramp-up active
RFG setting value + 0
y
p1144 [C] Ramp-down active
(0)
p1082
Function diagrams
Ramp-function generator, status bits
[3050.5] n_max [3080.5]
Setpoint channel
RFG tol HL/RL act
<1> Inhibited during jogging. 0.000 ... 1000.000 [1/min]
<2> After a 0/1 signal the ramping is re-started. p1148 [D] (19.800)
<3> With activated Technology controller (p2200 > 0, p2251 = 0) the ramp-function generator is bypassed (r2349.5).
<4> Value range and/or factory setting depend on Power Module
2-579
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 3060 -
Basic ramp-function generator 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
RFG ramp-up time RFG ramp-down time OFF3 t_RD RFG t_start_round RFGOFF3 t_strt_rnd RFG t_end_delay RFG OFF3 t_end_del
2-580
Setpoint channel
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-78
0.000 ... 999999.000 [s] 0.000 ... 999999.000 [s] 0.000 ... 5400.000 [s] 0.000 ... 30.000 [s] 0.000 ... 30.000 [s] 0.000 ... 30.000 [s] 0.000 ... 30.000 [s]
p1120 [D] (10.000) p1121 [D] (10.000) <5> p1135 [D] (0.000) <5> p1130 [D] (0.000) p1136 [D] (0.000) p1131 [D] (0.000) p1137 [D] (0.000)
<5> <5> <5>
0 1 0 1 0 1
[2634.8]
3070 – Extended ramp-function generator
1 = Bypass ramp-function generator

STW setpoint chan 0 0
<4> p1122 r1198 0 1 0 1
[2505.7] r1198.15
1 = Enable frequency setpoint
STW seq_ctrl Ramp flattening-off
p1142 r0898 [3080.8]
[2501.7] r0898 .6
Freeze ramp-function generator
RFG setp at inp [1/min] 0 y IR FR
1 1
r1119 x Tup Tdn
[3050.8] 1
p1082 x Expanded ramp-function
0 0
0 0 generator y 1
f_set_5
STW seq_ctrl [3080.1]
y
<1> p1141 r0898
0 = Freeze ramp-
1 0
0
[2501.7] r0898 .5 function generator
1 = Internal RFG enable STW seq_ctrl
[2634.8]
p1140 r0898
[2501.7] r0898 .4
[2634.8] 1 = Enable ramp-function
<3> -p1082 generator
RFG round-off type dy/dt IR FR IR FR IR FR IR FR
RFG accept set v 0 ... 1
p1143 [C] p1134 [D] (0) RFG acceleration [1/s²]
(0) r1149
t
RFG setting value
p1144 [C]
Other status bits
(0)
Tup_eff <2> Tdn_eff <2>

1 Ramp-up active
x Ramp-down active
+ 0
<1> Inhibited during jogging. y
<2> Effective ramp-up time: Tup_eff = Tup + (IR/2 + FR/2) p1082
Effective ramp-down time: Tdn_eff = Tdn + (IR/2 + FR/2)
<3> p1134 = 0: Rounding-off is always active. n_max
t [3050.5]
Overshoots can occur. RFG tol HL/RL act
0.000 ... 1000.000 [1/min] [3080.5]
p1134 = 1: Final rounding-off is not effective Ramp-function generator, status bits
when the setpoint is suddenly p1148 [D] (19.800)
t
reduced during ramp-up. nsoll
t
<4> With activated Technology controller (p2200 > 0, p2251 = 0) the ramp-function generator is bypassed (r2349.5).
<5> Value range and/or factory setting depend on Power Module
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 3070 -
Extended ramp-function generator 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
r0898
Fig. 2-79
r0898.6
[2501.7] Hochlaufgeber freigeben (von STW Ablaufsteuerung)
STW seq_ctrl
r0898.4
n_ctrl n_set 1
[2501.7]
p1155 [C]
1
Ramp-function generator selection <2> (0)
1
<3>
0
3080 – Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking
n_ctrl n_set 2 0 x,y x

0 T1
p1160 [C] 0 + y n_ctrl n_set 1/2 [1/min]
x y <5>
<2> (0) r1169
+
t
Interpolator
RFG selection + n_ctrl setp sum [1/min]
p1115
n_set_4 r1170 [6030.1]
[3060.8] RFG n_set at outp [1/min] +
x,y T1 x
From the basic ramp-function generator 0 y
r1150
x y
n_set_5
[3070.8]
1
From the expanded ramp-function generator t
RFG track intens
0.0 ... 50.0 Interpolator
p1145 [D] (0.0)
<4>
ZSW n_ctrl Ramp-function generator tracking Ramp flattening-off [3060.1]
r1407 [3070.3]
[2522.7] r1407.7 RFG ZSW
r1199
r1199.5
Ramp-function generator status word

RFG ZSW
[3060.8] r1199
Bit Hochlaufgeber-Zustandswort
[3070.8]
0 Ramp-up active r1199
[3060.8] 1 Ramp-down active RFG ZSW
<1> For p1145 > 0, ramp-function generator tracking is activated when the torque limiting [3070.8] 2 Ramp-function generator active r1199
responds. This means that the speed controller output only exceeds the torque limit by a 1 3 Ramp-function generator set
deviation that can be set via p1145. r1199.2 (p2148)
4 Ramp-function generator held
<2> For OFF1/OFF3, the ramp-function generator ramp is active. The ramp-function generator is Ramp-function generator tracking active
set to the setpoint (r1170)) and stops the drive with the ramp-downtime (p1121 or p1135). [3080.8] 5 <1>
STW1.4 (enable ramp-function generator) is effective while the drive is stopped via the [3050.8] 6 Maximum limiting active
ramp-function generator. Depending on the p1115, the basic ramp-function generator [3060] 7 Reserved
or the extended ramp-function generator [3070] is effective. 8 Reserved
<3> If technology controller is activated (p2200 > 0, p2251 = 1) connected with r2294. 9 Reserved
<4> Behavior of the response ramp of the torque limiting: 10 Reserved
Function diagrams
p1145 = 0.0: No ramp-function generator tracking. The ramp-function generator ramp is no longer in the range of the 11 Reserved
frequency actual value.
Setpoint channel
p1145 = 1.0: The ramp-function generator ramp remains as close as possible to the speed actual value. 12 Reserved
p1145 > 1.0: The ramp-function generator ramp is steeper than for p1145 = 1.0 (higher "speed following error"). 13 Reserved
<5> The value is displayed correctly only with r0899.2 = 1 (operation enabled) 14 Reserved
15 Reserved
2-581
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 3080 -
Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Function diagrams
V/f control
2.10 V/f control
Function diagrams
6300 – V/f characteristic and voltage boost 2-583
6310 – Resonance damping and slip compensation 2-584
6320 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (PM230 / PM240) 2-585

Linear
Fig. 2-80
U_output max r0071 U_output max [Veff]
r0071
6300 – V/f characteristic and voltage boost Mot U_rated p0304
ECO Mode r1348 Op/cl-lp ctrl_mode

0 ... 22
Mot f_rated U/f Eco fac act v [%] p1300 [D] (0)
0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] Flux current control (FCC) Dependent on the load
p0310 [D] (0.00) current
U_output max [Veff]
U_output max r0071 r0071
Mot U_rated p0304 0/5
1/6
2
3 [1690.4]
4
Uf U_set independ. 7
U/f FCC f_start Mot f_rated p1330 [C]
0.00 ... 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] Parabolic 19
(0)
p1333 [D] (0.00) p0310 [D] (0.00)
U_output max r0071
Mot U_rated p0304
f_set
[1690.1]
Freely programmable
Mot f_rated
0.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] U_output max r0071
p0310 [D] (0.00)
Uf char U4 p1327
U_boost perm R_stator act Uf char U3 p1325

I_outp max [Aeff]
r0395
p1310 ZSW cl-loop ctrl r0067 U_boost total Uf char U2 p1323
RFG ZSW r0056 + r1315
r1199 r0056.6 Uf char U1 p1321
Mot I_rated
r1199.0 p0305
+
0
0 0 3
U_boost accel
1 0 +
p1311 0 <1>
+
Function diagrams
Uf char f1 Uf char f3
U_boost Anlauf ZSW cl-loop ctrl p1320 p1324
p1312 <2> 1 r0056
r0056.5
<1> For p1320 = 0, the voltage boost via p1310 is not effective. Uf char f2 Uf char f4
p1322 p1326
V/f control
<2> p1312 wirkt nur beim ersten Beschleunigen nach Impulsfreigabe.
2-583
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
V/f control FP_6300_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 6300 -
V/f characteristic and voltage boost 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-584
V/f control
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-81
V/f resonance damping V/f slip compensation
Uf Res_damp gain
6310 – Resonance damping and slip compensation
0.00 ... 100.00

p1338 [D] (0.00)
Brake f_start
Brake f_start p1352 [C]
<2>
f_res damp -300.00 ... 300.00 [%] (1351[0])
[1690.7]
p1351 [D] (0.00)
Uf Res_damp T +
1.00 ... 1000.00 [ms]
p1339 [D] (20.00)
Slip comp scal Slip comp lim val

Iq_act [Aeff] 0.00 ... 600.00 [%]
r0078 0.0 ... 600.0 [%]
p1335 [D] (0.0) p1336 [D] (250.00)
[6714.8] Mot slip_rated [Hz]

f_Slip [Hz]
r0330 [D]
r0065
Slip
compensation
[6730.2]
250 ms
[1690.6]
1 Mot slip_rated [Hz] 100 % Slip comp act val [%]
r0330 [D] r1337
-1
6% 10 % 95 % f/f Mot N 0
<1> ZSW cl-loop ctrl

Uf res_damp f_max 1 r0056
f_outp [Hz]
r0066 0.00 ... 3000.00 [Hz] r0056 .10
p1349 [D] (0.00) 0
[6730.4] [2526.2]
[6731.4]
p1334 f/f Mot N

p1334 + 4 %
<1> If p1349 = 0: the limit is 0,95 x f Mot N <= 45 Hz.

<2> Activation with r0056.4 = 1 till r0066 >= p1334 and p1216 has expired.
100 % equal r0330 (Rated motor slip)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 6310 -
Resonance damping and slip compensation 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-82
Vdc_ctrl Tn
0 ... 10000 [ms]
p1291 [D] (40)
Vdc_max (V/f control) Vdc_ctrl Kp Vdc_ctrl t_rate

0.00 ... 100.00 0 ... 1000 [ms]
Vdc_ctr config U/f p1290 [D] (1.00) p1292 [D] (10)
0 ... 3 <2> Vdc_min outp_lim
6320 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (PM230 / PM240)
p1280 [D] (1) 0

0.00 ... 600.00 [Hz]
<1> p1293 [D] (600.00)
Vdc act val [V] ZSW cl-loop ctrl
1,3
r0070 1 r0056
+
0 r0056 .14
0 0
0,2
[2526.2]
Calculate on_level
0
Vdc_max on_level [V]

r1282 Vdc_max dyn_factor
Vdc_max SenseOnLev 1 ... 10000 [%]
0 ... 1 p1283 [D] (100)
p1294 (0) Vdc_ctrl output [1/min]
r1298
V_connect
1 ... 63000 [V] 0
p0210 (400) [1690]
Vdc_min (V/f control)

(only for PM240)
Vdc_min on_level
65 ... 150 [%] Vdc_ctrl Tn
p1285 [D] (76) 0 ... 10000 [ms]
p1291 [D] (40)
Vdc_min on_level [V]
r1286 Vdc_ctrl Kp Vdc_ctrl t_rate
0.00 ... 100.00 0 ... 1000 [ms]
p1290 [D] (1.00) p1292 [D] (10)
Calculate on_level
0 0
Vdc act val [V] + 0

2,3 ZSW cl-loop ctrl
r0070 1 r0056
r0056 .15
0 0
0,1
[2526.2]
<1> p1280 Vdc_min outp_lim
Function diagrams
0: Inhib Vdc ctrl 0.00 ... 600.00 [Hz]
1: Enable Vdc_max controller p1293 [D] (600.00)
2: Enable Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) (only for PM240) Vdc_min dyn_factor
3: Enable Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller (only for PM240) 1 ... 10000 [%]
V/f control
<2> Value range and/or factory setting depend on Power Module p1287 [D] (100)
2-585
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 6320 -
Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (PM230 / PM240) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Function diagrams
Vector control
2.11 Vector control
Function diagrams
6030 – Speed setpoint, droop 2-587
6031 – Pre-control balancing, acceleration model 2-588
6040 – Speed controller 2-589
6050 – Kp_n/Tn_n adaption 2-590
6060 – Torque setpoint 2-591
6220 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (Vector control, PM230 / PM240) 2-592
6490 – Speed control configuration 2-593
6491 – Flux control configuration 2-594
6630 – Upper/lower torque limit 2-595
6640 – Current/power/torque limits 2-596
6710 – Current setpoint filter 2-597
6714 – Iq and Id controllers 2-598
6721 – Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2xx) 2-599
6722 – Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1) 2-600
6723 – Field weakening controller, flux controller (ASM, p0300 = 1) 2-601
6724 – Field weakening controller (PEM, p0300 = 2xx) 2-602
6730 – Interface to the Power Module (ASM, p0300 = 1) 2-603
6731 – Interface to the Power Module (PEM, p0300 = 2xx) 2-604
6799 – Display signals 2-605

Fig. 2-83
Droop input
Droop input source Droop M_comp scal
n_ctrl I-M_output [Nm] 0 ... 3 -2000.0 ... 2000.0 [%]
p1487 [D] (100.0) <1>
[6040.8] r1482 p1488 [D] (0)
Droop M_comp Droop scaling
M_set bef. M_suppl [Nm] p1486 [C] 0.000 ... 0.500
<2> p1489 [D] (0.050)
r1508 3 (0)
6030 – Speed setpoint, droop
[6060.5] 2 Droop n_reduction [1/min]

1 r1490
150 ms
M_set total [Nm]
0
[6060.8] r0079 0 nN
0 MN
STW n_ctrl
0 1 ZSW n_ctrl
p1492 r1406
r1407
[2520.7] r1406.11
r1407.10
[2522.3]
n_set before filt. [1/min] ZSW n_ctrl n_set_filt 1 T
r1407 0.00 ... 5000.00 [ms]
r0060
p1416 [D] (0.00)
[6799.1] r1407.11
[2522.3]
n_ctrl setp sum [1/min] n_set after filter [1/min]
r1170 r0062 [6031.1]
[3080.8] +
n_limit pos eff [1/min]

r1084
[3050.8]
n_limit neg eff [1/min]
r1087
[3050.8]
0
Mot M_mom of inert 1 = Sensorless vector control,
0.000000 ... 100000.000000 [kgm²] speed pre-control active 1 0
p0341 [D] (0.000000) n_ctrl config
p1400.15
Mot MomInert Ratio a for M_ctrl scal
1.000 ... 10000.000 0.0 ... 400.0 [%] ZSW n_ctrl
p0342 [D] (1.000) p1499 [D] (100.0) r1407
r1407.11 0
Pre-control speed
M_set total [Nm]
[2522.3]
r0079 [6730.1]
1
[6060.8]
ZSW n_ctrl
Function diagrams
r1407
r1407.2
Vector control
[6060.3]
<1> Scaling: p1489 = 0.100 - for a rated motor torque of r0333 - results in a speed setpoint reduction of 0.1 x p0311.
<2> Only active, if p1488 > 0
2-587
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Vector control FP_6030_97_54.vsd Function diagram
- 6030 -
Speed setpoint, droop 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-588
Vector control
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-84
6031 – Pre-control balancing, acceleration model
Mot M_mom of inert ZSW cl-loop ctrl

0.000000 ... 100000.000000 [kgm²] r0056
p0341 [D] (0.000000) [2526.6] r0056.14
Mot MomInert Ratio

1.000 ... 10000.000 a_before scaling
p0342 [D] (1.000) 0.0 ... 10000.0 [%]
p1496 [D] (0.0)
1
0 Calculated accelerating torque
[6060.1]
Acceleration calculation 0
n_C n_act T_s SLVC

0.00 ... 32000.00 [ms]
p1452 [D] (10.00) a_before scaling
0.0 ... 10000.0 [%]
n_set I_comp
p1496 [D] (0.0) r1439 [6040.1]
Pre-control balancing >0 n_ctrl n_set [1/min]

n_set after filter [1/min] r1438 [6040.1]
[6030.8] r0062
0
r1084
RFG setp at inp [1/min] Steady-state setpoint calculation PcCtrl active
r1119 r0807
r1084
r1087 n_set via PC
n_ctrl n_set 1 1
p1155 [C]
+ n_ctrl n_set stat
r1444
(0)
+ 0
+ r1087
n_ctrl n_set 2
p1160 [C]
(0)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 6031 -
Pre-control balancing, acceleration model 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
n_ctrl SLVC Kp n_ctrl SLVC Tn
0.000 ... 999999.000 0.0 ... 100000.0 [ms]
Fig. 2-85
p1470 [D] (0.300) p1472 [D] (20.0)
<1>
Kp_n_basic
To Kp/Tn adaptation
Tn_n_adapt Tn_n_basic [6050.3]
From Kp/Tn adaptation Kp_n_adapt
[6050.7]
6040 – Speed controller
[6490.7] 1 0 1 0
n_ctrl config 1 = Kp/Tn adaptation active
p1400.5
n_ctr Tn eff [ms]
n_ctrl config r1469
Dynamic reduction, field weakening
p1400.0
[6490.7] n_ctr Kp eff
1 = Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active
r1468
Speed
n_ctrl system dev [1/min] controller
Kp Kp Tn
r0064
n_ctrl n_set [1/min] Kp
M_set from speed controller
[6031.8] r1438 [6060.1]
+ + +
- M_max upper eff [Nm]
n_C n_act T_s SLVC
0.00 ... 32000.00 [ms] [6640.8] r1538
p1452 [D] (10.00)
M_max lower eff [Nm]
n_act [1/min] n_act smooth [1/min] [6640.8] r1539
Tn
r0063 r1445 n_ctrl sys dev Tn [1/min] Kp
- r1454 n_ctrl I-M_output [Nm]
n_set I_comp
[6031.8] r1482
+ Set [6030.1]
Enable speed controller
n_set I_comp [1/min] Hold Set Val ZSW n_ctrl
r1439 from sequence control S4: Operation r1407
STW n_ctrl [2522.3]
r1407.3
p1476 r1406
1 = Speed controller, hold I component 1 = Speed controller active
[2520.7] r1406.4
ZSW n_ctrl
p1477 r1406 r1407
1 = Speed controller, set I component [2522.3]
r1406.5 r1407.5
[2520.7] Integrator
n_ctrl I_val scal 1 = Speed controller, I component held
STW n_ctrl control
p1479 [C]
n_ctr integ_setVal (1) ZSW n_ctrl
p1478 [C] r1407
[2522.3]
(0) r1407.6
n_ctrl M_sv MHB 1 = Speed controller, I component set
Function diagrams
p1475 [C] n_ctrl config
Torque setting value, speed controller
(0) [6721.8] p1400.1 1 = Sensorless vector control, freeze I component
Vector control
ZSW n_ctrl [6490.7]
<1> For p1472 = 0.0 s or 100.0 s, the I component is r1407
1 = Torque limit reached
disabled (integral action time = infinite). [2522.7] r1407.7
2-589
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 6040 -
Speed controller 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-590
Vector control
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-86
Free Kp_n adaptation
Free Tn adaptation active (p1400.6)
[6490.7]
Adapt_factor upper
n_ctrl Adpt_sig Kp y 0
6050 – Kp_n/Tn_n adaption
0.0 ... 200000.0 [%] 1

p1455 [C] p1459 [D] (100.0) x
(0)
1
Adapt_factor lower
0.0 ... 200000.0 [%] x
p1458 [D] (100.0)
n_ctrl AdaptKpLow <1>
0.00 ... 400.00 [%]
p1456 [D] (0.00)
n_ctrl AdaptKp up <1>
0.00 ... 400.00 [%]
n_ctrl Kp scal p1457 [D] (0.00)
p1466 [C]
(1)
Speed-dependent Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation
Kp_n_basic Kp
[6040.8]
n_act [1/min]
n Kp Kp_n_adapt
r0063 [0]
n_ctrl Kp n upper To the speed controller
0.0 ... 200000.0 [%] n [6040.4]
p1461 [D] (100.0)
n_ctrl n upper <1>

0.00 ... 210000.00 [1/min]
p1465 [D] (210000.00)
n_ctrl n lower <1>

0.00 ... 210000.00 [1/min]

p1464 [D] (0.00)
n_ctrl Tn n upper
Tn
0.0 ... 200000.0 [%]
p1463 [D] (100.0) n Tn Tn_n_adapt
Tn_n_basic To the speed controller

[6040.8] n [6040.4]
<1> If the lower transition point exceeds the upper transition point, the Kp-adaptation also changes over.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 6050 -
Kp_n/Tn_n adaption 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
M_suppl 1 <5> 0
0
M_suppl total [Nm]
p1511 [C]
Fig. 2-87 (0) r1515

+ 1
p1400.14 1 = Torque pre-control <1>
M_suppl 1 scal + STW seq_ctrl [6490.7]
p1512 [C] M_suppl 2 scal r0898 1 = Speed controller enable 1
-2000.0 ... 2000.0 [%] [2501.7]
(0) r0898.8
p1514 [D] (100.0)
M_suppl 2 M_accel T_smooth
6060 – Torque setpoint
p1513 [C] <1> <2> 0.00 ... 100.00 [ms] <1> <2>
p1517 [D] (4.00)
(0) M_accel [Nm] M_accel [Nm]
<3>
r1518[0] r1518[1]
Calculated accelerating torque 0 +
[6031.8]
0 + M_suppl + M_accel [Nm]

1
M_max upper eff [Nm] r1516
[6640.8] r1538
M_max up w/o offs
ZSW cl-loop ctrl
p1552 [C]
r0056
(1)
r0056.13
M_max up w/o offs [Nm] M_max outp n_ctrl [Nm] [2526.2]
[6630.8] r1526 r1547 [0] ZSW n_ctrl
[6630.8] r1407
STW n_ctrl 0 = Speed control 1 r1407.7
p1501 r1406 1 = Torque control r1539 ZSW n_ctrl
ZSW n_ctrl [2522.3]
[2520.7] r1406.12 M_max lower eff [Nm] r1407
r1407 ZSW n_ctrl
p1300 = MReg 1 r1407.2
r1407.8
r1407
[2522.3] r1407.8
[6030.5]
M_set bef. M_suppl [Nm] [2522.3]
M_set r1508
p1503 [C] <5>
[6030.1] <4>
(0) 1 + M_set total [Nm]
[6722.1]
M_set from the speed controller r0079
[6040]
ZSW n_ctrl
+ [6030.1]
0
r1407 [6710.1]
r1407.15 [8012.1]
M_max low w/o offs M_max upper eff [Nm]
ZSW n_ctrl Torque limiting ZSW n_ctrl
p1554 [C] r1538
r1407 r1407
(1)
r1407.9 r1407.9
[2522.3] [2522.3]
M_max low w/o offs [Nm] M_max outp n_ctrl [Nm]
[6630.8]r1527 r1547 [1]
M_max lower eff [Nm]
Function diagrams
[6640.8] r1539
Vector control
<1> The signal is only effective after magnetization has been <3> Acceleration control is inhibited for p1517 = 100 ms. <5> The connection to the source for the torque setpoint is
completed (r0056.4 = 1). <4> M_set is also influenced by the speed limit controller. estabished automatically via the setting in p1500.
<2> No pre-control if the Vdc controller is active [6220.8].
2-591
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 6060 -
Torque setpoint 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-592
Vector control
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-88
Vdc_ctrl Tn
0 ... 10000 [ms]
p1251 [D] (0)
Vdc_ctrl Kp Vdc_ctrl t_rate
Vdc_max (Vector control) <1> 0.00 ... 100.00 0 ... 1000 [ms]
Vdc_ctr config vec p1250 [D] (1.00) p1252 [D] (0)
0 ... 3
p1240 [D] (1) <2>
6220 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (Vector control, PM230 / PM240)
Vdc act val [V] ZSW cl-loop ctrl

1,3
r0070 1 r0056
+
0 0 r0056 .14
0,2 0
[2526.2]
Calculate on_level
Vdc_max on_level [V]

r1242
Vdc_max dyn_factor
Vdc_max SenseOnLev 1 ... 10000 [%] Vdc controller
0 ... 1 1 active
p1243 [D] (100)
p1254 (1) <2> Vdc_ctrl output [Aeff] [6710.2]
r1258
Iq_max
V_connect Operating point [6710.2]
1 ... 63000 [V] 0
selection
p0210 (400) Iq_min
[6710.2]
Vdc_min (Vector control)

Vdc_min on_level
65 ... 150 [%] Vdc_ctrl Tn
p1245 [D] (76) <2> 0 ... 10000 [ms]
p1251 [D] (0)
Vdc_min on_level [V]
r1246 Vdc_ctrl Kp Vdc_ctrl t_rate
0.00 ... 100.00 0 ... 1000 [ms]
p1250 [D] (1.00) p1252 [D] (0)
Calculate on_level
Vdc act val [V] + 0

2,3 ZSW cl-loop ctrl
r0070 1 r0056
r0056 .15
0 0
0,1
<1> p1240 [2526.2]
0: Inhib Vdc ctrl
1: Enable Vdc_max controller
2: Enable Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) (only for PM240)
3: Enable Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller Vdc_min dyn_factor
<2> Value range and/or factory setting depend on Power Module 1 ... 10000 [%]
p1247 [D] (300)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 6220 -
Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller (PM230 / PM240) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
n_reg Konfig
Fig. 2-89
p1400[D]
Speed control configuration Factory setting
Bit No. Meaning
00 1 = Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active 1 [6040.3]

6490 – Speed control configuration
01 1 = Sensorless vector control, freeze I component 0 [6040.3]
02 Reserved
03 Reserved
04 Reserved
05 1 = Kp/Tn adaptation active 1 [6040.3]
06 1 = Free Tn adaptation active 0 [6050.6]
07 Reserved
08 Reserved
09 Reserved
10 Reserved
11 Reserved
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
1 = Torque pre-control always active
Function diagrams
14 0 [6060.4]
0 = Torque pre-control for n_ctrl enabled
Vector control
15 1 = Sensorless vector control, speed pre-control active 1 [6030.5]
2-593
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 6490 -
Speed control configuration 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Flux ctrl config
- ... -
2-594
Vector control
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-90
p1401 [D] (0000 0110 bin)
Flux control, configuration Factory setting
Bit No. Meaning
00 1 = Flux setpoint, soft starting active 0 [6722.3]

6491 – Flux control configuration
01 1 = Flux setpoint, differentiation active 1 [6723.7]
02 1 = Flux build-up control active [6723.6]
03 Reserved
04 Reserved
05 Reserved
06 1 = Quick magnetization 0 [6722.5]
07 Reserved
08 Reserved
09 Reserved
10 Reserved
11 Reserved
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 6491 -
Flux control configuration 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-91
Upper torque limit

M_max up w/o offs [Nm]
6630 – Upper/lower torque limit
r1526
M_max upper
!
M_max upper p1522 [C]
<1>
-1000000.00 ... 20000000.00 [Nm] (1520[0]) [6640.1]
p1520 [D] (0.00)
M M_max upper scal

2 1 M_max up/mot scal p1528 [C]
n -2000.0 ... 2000.0 [%] (1524[0])
p1524 [D] (100.0)
Lower torque limit M_max low w/o offs [Nm]

r1527
M_max lower
!
M_max lower p1523 [C]
<2>
-20000000.00 ... 1000000.00 [Nm] (1521[0]) [6640.1]
p1521 [D] (0.00)
M
M_max lower scal
n M_max lower scal p1529 [C]
3 4 -2000.0 ... 2000.0 [%] (1525[0])
p1525 [D] (100.0)
Function diagrams
Vector control
<1> Danger: Negative values at <1>
<2> ! positive values at <2>
represent a minimum torque for the other torque direction and can cause the motor to accelerate uncontrollably.
2-595
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 6630 -
Upper/lower torque limit 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-596
Vector control
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-92 Current limiting Mot L_leak total [mH] Speed limiting
r0377 [D]
U_output max [Veff] Kp from speed controller [6040.5]
r0071
[6722.1] Tn from speed controller [6040.6]
Iq stall
[6723.4] calculation
6640 – Current/power/torque limits
[6724.4] I_outp max [Aeff] n_limit pos eff [1/min]

Current limit +
r0067 [3050.8] r1084
0.00 ... 10000.00 [Aeff]
p0640 [D] (0.00) [6722.1] [3050.8] r1087
Iq_max total [Aeff] - +
I_max reduction x r1533 n_limit neg eff [1/min]
[8016.8] Min Speed limiting controller
[6730.4] I_max Power Module x2 y2 Sign <2>

[6731.4] + or -
y
Id_set total -1
[6723.8]
Id_setp total [Aeff]

r1624 Max Min
n_act [1/min]
r0063[0]
M_max up w/o offs [Nm] Isq_max stall [Aeff]
r1526 r1548[1]
Lower limit
[6630.8] + M_max upper eff [Nm]
[6721.8] M Min r1538
Isq_max stall [Aeff] +
M_max low w/o offs [Nm] [6730.1] [6060.1] [6040.4]
r1527
r1548[0] [6732.1] Iq [8012.1]
Upper limit
[6630.8] + M_max lower eff [Nm]
Max r1539
Power limiting + [6060.1] [6040.4]
[8012.1]
<1>
Iq
Min [6710.1]
P_max gen
-100000.00 ... -0.01 [kW] Isq_max [Aeff]
p1531 [D] (-0.01) r1536
n
P_max mot
0.00 ... 100000.00 [kW] Max [6710.1]
p1530 [D] (0.00)
<1> Isq_min [Aeff]
r1537
<1> Intervention by the Vdc controller.

<2> Intervention when the speed limit is exceeded + 2 % n_rated.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 6640 -
Current/power/torque limits 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-93
6710 – Current setpoint filter
ZSW cl-loop ctrl

r0056
[2526.6] r0056.14
Iq_max 1
[6220.8]
[6640.8]
0
Isq_max [Aeff]
r1536
ZSW cl-loop ctrl

r0056
[2526.6]
r0056.15
Iq_min 1
[6220.8]
[6640.8]
0
Isq_min [Aeff]
r1537
M_set total [Nm] Interpolator and Iq_set [Aeff]

r0079 smoothing for r0077
voltage limits
[6060.8] [6714.1]
M
[6721.1] Iq Isq_s T_smth FW
[6730.1] 0.1 ... 50.0 [ms]
p1654 [D] (4.8)
[6732.1]
Function diagrams
Vector control
2-597
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 6710 -
Current setpoint filter 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Transv_decpl scal TrnsvDecplVmaxScal
0.0 ... 200.0 [%] 0.0 ... 200.0 [%] <2>
2-598
Vector control
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-94
Mot L_leak total [mH]
r0377 [D] p1726 [D] (75.0) p1727 [D] (50.0) U_quad_decoupl [Veff]
r1729
Flux setp total [%]
<1> [6723.1] U_soll 1 [6723.1] <1>
r1598
<2> [6724.1] [6724.1] <2>
Pre-control, de-coupling and U_dir-axis_decoupl [Veff]
limiting U_max 1 [6723.4] <1>
6714 – Iq and Id controllers
r1728
[6724.4] <2>
Isd_ctrl I_limit [Veff]
r1725 ZSW cl-loop ctrl
Isd_ctr_prectrScal Isq_ctr_prectrScal r0056
0.0 ... 200.0 [%] 0.0 ... 200.0 [%] ZSW I_ctrl r0056.9 [2526.2]
p1702 [D] (70.0) p1703 [D] (60.0) r1408 Direct U set [Veff]
<2> r1408.1 r1732[0..1]
Id_set [Aeff] ZSW I_ctrl
Id current controller
r0075 r1408
Isd_ctrl I_comp [Veff]
r1724 r1408.3 [2530.2]
<1> [6723.5]
Id_set total + + +
<2> [6721.8] Symmetrizing
+ + + + U_set [6730.1] <1>
Kp_I Tn_I Isd_ctrl outp [Veff] K

[6731.1] <2>
r1723
Coordinate converter
I_ctrl Kp I_ctrl Tn
0.000 ... 100000.000 0.00 ... 1000.00 [ms]
p1715 [D] (0.000) p1717 [D] (2.00) p U_angle [6730.1] <1>
[6731.1] <2>
+ +
Isq_ctrl I_comp [Veff]

Iq_set [Aeff] + r1719 + + Quad U set [Veff]
<1> [6710.8]
r0077 Symmetrizing r1733[0..1]
<2> [6721.1]
+ + Isq_reg Ausg + +
Kp_I Tn_I r1718
Transformat_angle [°] Iq current controller
<1> [6730.1]
r0094
<2> [6731.1]
<1> [6730.4] Phase U

<2> [6731.4] Ia
3 I_act abs val [Aeff]
<1> [6730.4] Phase V x2 y2 r0068 [0] [6799.1]
<2> [6731.4]
VD -
Ib Iq_act [Aeff]
2
<1> [6730.4] Phase W r0078 [6310.1]
<2> [6731.4] [6799.6]
Id_act [Aeff]
r0076 [6799.6]
<1> For induction motors
<2> For synchronous motors
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 6714 -
Iq and Id controllers 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
I_set T_smooth
Fig. 2-95
4 ... 10000 [ms]
r1751.0 p1616 [D] (40)
from the model
From Id_field weakening control Id_setp total [Aeff]
[6724] r1624
Mot phi_load opt 0
0.0 ... 135.0 [°] MIN
p0327 [D] (90.0) [6714]
6721 – Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2xx)
Id_inject
1 To current controller
Iq_set [Aeff]
[6714] r0077 Load angle correction
Id_set
2 2
Iabs Iq
M
(r1407.2) Iq [6640.5]
0 = M-Ctrl [6710.2]
1 = n-Ctrl Mot kT_reluctance [6799.7]
kt
Mot t_excitation -1000.00 ... 1000.00 [mH]
Rel
0.000 ... 20.000 [s] p0328 [D] (0.00)
p0346 [D] (0.000)
Mot L_leak total
Lq
0 r0377 Iq
M_set static
-200.0 ... 200.0 [%] M
p1610 [D] (50.0) 0.9 x r0067 Mot L_stator_d
1 Ld
r0378
M_suppl_accel
0.0 ... 200.0 [%] Id
p1611 [D] (30.0) r1797 MotMod kT corr
Iabs [6731.3]
MAX from model control
r1538 M r0067
M adaptation
Iabspre
r1515 M_suppl total Torque setting value, speed controller
[6060.6] [6040.4]
r1518 M_acceleration
[6060.4] r1539
r1762 Mot mod dev comp 1

[6731.2]
Function diagrams
n-Ctrl = 1
Vector control
PEM: Permanent-magnet synchronous motor
2-599
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 6721 -
Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2xx) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Field weak T_smth
U_output max [Veff] 0 ... 20000 [ms]
2-600
Vector control
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-96
r0071 p1584 [D] (0)
Mot t_excitation
[6640.1] 0.000 ... 20.000 [s]
p0346 [D] (0.000)
Flux ctrl config ZSW cl-loop ctrl

p1401.1 r0056
1 = Flux setpoint soft starting active
6722 – Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1)
ZSW cl-loop ctrl r0056.4

Flux setpoint Flux ctrl config
y r0056
50.0 ... 200.0 [%] p1401.2 [2526.2]
r0056.8 1 = Flux build-up control active
p1570 [D] (100.0) Quick magnetizing active
[2526.2] Flux ctrl config
n_act [1/min] p1401.6
1 = Quick magnetizing [6723.8]
[6730.1] r0063[0] Magnetization control
f
Field weakening characteristic
MotMod status
Mot T_rotor/T_Dd [ms] r1751 [6730.3]
r0384 [D]
0
MIN Flux setp smooth [%]
Efficiency opt.
0 ... 100 [%] r1583

p1580 [D] (0) <0,3 s 1
[6723.1]
<1>
Flux setp T_smth
Efficiency optimization 4 ... 5000 [ms]
0,9 p1582 [D] (15)
I_outp max [Aeff] Id current limit

r0067
[6640.3] [6723.1]
M_set static
-200.0 ... 200.0 [%] I_set T_smooth
p1610 [D] (50.0) 4 ... 10000 [ms]
M_suppl_accel
+ p1616 [D] (40)
0.0 ... 200.0 [%]

p1611 [D] (30.0) +
M_set bef. M_suppl [Nm] Id_set calculation Flux setpoint
[6060.5] r1508 calculation
Mot I_mag_rtd act [Aeff]

r0331 [D]
<1> Value range and/or factory setting depend on Power Module ASM: Induction motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 6722 -
Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-97
Drv filt type mot Pulse freq setp Modulator mode Modulat depth max
0 ... 4 2.000 ... 16.000 [kHz] 0 ... 10 20.0 ... 150.0 [%]
p0230 (0) p1800 [D] (4.000) p1802 [D] (0) p1803 [D] (106.0)
6723 – Field weakening controller, flux controller (ASM, p0300 = 1)
<1> <1>
Calculation, max. modulation depth
U_max 1
[6714.8]
Modulat_depth max [%]
r0073 U_output max [Veff]
r0071
Field_ctrl Tn
U_reserve dyn 10 ... 10000 [ms]
0.0 ... 150.0 [Veff] p1596 [D] (300)
p1574 [D] (10.0)
[6640.1] 0
<1>
Vdc act val [V] Field_ctrl outp [%]
r0070 r1597
+ +
[6730.1]
-200 %
Flux ctrl config
2 Flux ctrl config p1401.1
p1401.2
U_set 1 0
0
[6714.8] Quick magnetizing active
1 [6722.8]
Flux setp total [%]
r1598
Id_set stationary [Aeff]
[6714.1] r1623 Id_setp total [Aeff]
r1624
+ +
Flux setp smooth [%] 0
r1583 + +
[6722.8] [6714.1]
1
Saturation characteristic -1
p0362 ... p0369
Id current limit
[6722.8]
Function diagrams
Vector control
<1> Value range and/or factory setting depend on p0500 ASM: Induction motor
2-601
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 6723 -
Field weakening controller, flux controller (ASM, p0300 = 1) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Drv filt type mot Pulse freq setp Modulator mode Modulat depth max
2-602
Vector control
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-98
0 ... 4 2.000 ... 16.000 [kHz] 0 ... 10 20.0 ... 150.0 [%]
p0230 (0) p1800 [D] (4.000) p1802 [D] (0) p1803 [D] (106.0)
<1> <1>
Calculation, max. modulation depth
U_max 1
6724 – Field weakening controller (PEM, p0300 = 2xx)
[6714.8] Mot I_mag_rtd act [Aeff]

U_output max [Veff] r0331 [D]
r0071
Field_ctrl Tn
Modulat_depth max [%] U_reserve dyn 10 ... 10000 [ms]
[6640.1] p1596 [D] (300)
r0073 0.0 ... 150.0 [Veff]
p1574 [D] (10.0)
<1> 0
Vdc act val [V] Field/Fl_ctrl outp [Aeff]
r0070 r1593[0..1]
+ +
[6731.1]
2 Mot U_rated
0 ... 20000 [Veff]
p0304 [D] (0)
U_set 1
[6714.8]
+
-
n_act [1/min] +
-nF nF Id_field weaken. Ctrl
r0063[0] [6721.1]
+
[6731.1]
I_FieldWeak prectr [Aeff]
r1589
Ld
Mot I_mag_rtd act [Aeff] ψnom
r0331 [D]
+
Flux setp total [%]
0.9 100 % r1598
+ Flux setp T_smth
I_outp max [Aeff] 4 ... 5000 [ms]
Min -1
r0067 p1582 [D] (15)
[6640.3]
Flux setp smooth [%]
r1583
<1> Value range and/or factory setting depend on p0500 PEM: Permanent-magnet synchronous motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 6724 -
Field weakening controller (PEM, p0300 = 2xx) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-99
Control Unit Power Module
Vdc act val [V]
[6723.1]
r0070 DC link voltage
[6799.1]
U_output [Veff]
r0072 Pulse enable HW +
Modulat_depth [%]
6730 – Interface to the Power Module (ASM, p0300 = 1)
[6799.1]
2 r0074
U_set [6799.1] U
[1690.8]
[6714.8] U_angle
ZSW cl-loop ctrl PWM
Gain res_damp V
p1740 r0056
f_Slip
r0056.11 ~
M
r0065 [2526.2] W
Current model Vibration damping
f_outp [Hz]
[6310.5] r0066
Precontrol speed
+ + [6310.1] [6799.1]
[6030.8] +
n_act [1/min] MotMod n_adapt Kp +
r0063[0..2] [1/min] + Sign
+ or -
p1764 p1767 r1770
ZSW cl-loop ctrl
r0056 PM-IF
Kp Tn
r0056.07
I_max Power Module I_max Power Module

+ + [1690.1]
[6640.1]
n_act Adaptation controller r1771

MotMod n_adapt Tn
R_stator act [1/min] I_phase act value [A]
r0395 r0069[0..6]
[6714.1]
[6799.1]
Cos phi act Motor model (observer) U_phase act val [V]
r1762, r1763, r1778 r0089[0..2]
r0087
Flux act val [%]
r0084
Outp_ph_seq rev
p1820
Stall monitoring
r1408.12 [8012.3]
Transformat_angle [°] p1745 P24 + BRP
[6714.1] r0094
Function diagrams
Model control
M p1750 ... p1759 [6722.7]
M - BRN
Iq
Vector control
[6640.5] MotMod Status
r1751 Brake control
[6710.2]
p1750 p1755 p1756 p1758 p1759
2-603
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 6730 -
Interface to the Power Module (ASM, p0300 = 1) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Control Unit Power Module
2-604
Vector control
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-100
Vdc act val [V]
[6724.1]
r0070 DC link voltage
[6799.1]
U_output [Veff]
Pulse enable HW
r0072 +
[6799.1] Modulat_depth [%]

6731 – Interface to the Power Module (PEM, p0300 = 2xx)
2 r0074
U_set [6799.1]
[6714.8] U
U_angle
[6714.8] PWM
ZSW cl-loop ctrl
Gain res_damp V
~
p1740 r0056 M
r0056.11
[2526.2] W
Current model Vibration damping f_outp [Hz]
r0066
Precontrol speed + + [6310.1]
[6030.8] n_act [1/min] [6799.1]
r0063[0]
+
p1764 p1767 r1770 + p1795
MotMod kT corr [Nm/A] Sign
r1797 [D] + or -
ZSW cl-loop ctrl

r0056 PM-IF
r0056 .7
r1771
Quad U set [Veff] I_max Power Module I_max Power Module
r1733
[6640.1]
kT estimator Direct U set [Veff]
p0328 r1732[0]
R_stator act [Ohm] p0316
r0395 [D] p0357 Id_act [Aeff]
p1780.3 r0076
Iq_set [Aeff]
From thermal motor model
r0077
Outp_ph_seq rev
p1820 I_phase act value [A]
r0069[0..6]
Transformat_angle [°] P24 + BRP
r0094 Motor model [6714.1]
r1762, r1778
M - BRN
Model control
U_phase act val Brake control
r0089
r1751
p1755 p1756
PEM: Permanent-magnet synchronous motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 6731 -
Interface to the Power Module (PEM, p0300 = 2xx) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
n_set before filt. [1/min] Modulat_depth [%]
Fig. 2-101
n_set smth [1/min] [6730.4] r0074 Mod_depth smth [%]
r0060 r0020 r0028
100 ms [6731.4] 100 ms
n_act [1/min] n_act smooth [1/min] Id_act [Aeff]

Id_act smooth [Aeff]
[6730.1] r0063[0] r0021 [6714.8] r0076 r0029
100 ms 300 ms
6799 – Display signals
T_smth display
p0045
Iq_act [Aeff]
[6714.8] r0078 Iq_act smooth [Aeff]
n_act [1/min] 300 ms r0030
r0063[1]
<1> [6730.1] M
<2> [6721.8] Iq
M_act [Nm]
f_outp [Hz] r0080 [0] [6799.6]
[6730.4] f_outp smooth [Hz] T_smth display
r0066 100 ms r0024
[6731.4] p0045
M_act [Nm]
U_output [Veff] U_outp smooth [Veff] r0080[1]
[6730.4] n_act [1/min]
r0072 r0025
[6731.4] 100 ms r0063 [0]
P_act [kW]
r0082 [0] [6799.6]
T_smth display
Vdc act val [V] Vdc smooth [V] p0045
[6730.1] r0070 r0026
[6731.1] 100 ms
P_act [kW]
r0082[1]
I_act abs val [Aeff] I_act abs val smth [Aeff]

[6714.8] r0068[0] r0027 M_act [Nm]
300 ms M_act smooth [Nm]
[6799.8] r0080[0]
100 ms r0031
T_smth display
p0045
P_act [kW] P_actv_act smth [kW]

I_act abs val [Aeff]
[6799.8] r0082[0] r0032
r0068 [1] 100 ms
Cos phi act

<1> [6730.1] r0087 U_output [Veff]
Function diagrams
r0072 3 Cos phi act
[6730.1] Cos phi smooth
<1> [6730.4] r0087 300 ms r0038
P_act [kW] [6731.1]
Vector control
r0082 [2]
<1> For induction motors
<2> For synchronous motors
2-605
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 6799 -
Display signals 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Function diagrams
Free Function Blocks
2.12 Free Function Blocks
Function diagrams
7200 – Run-time groups / Sampling times 2-607
7210 – AND (AND function block with 4 inputs) 2-608
7212 – OR (OR function block with 4 inputs) 2-609
7214 – XOR (XOR function block with 4 inputs) 2-610
7216 – NOT (inverter) 2-611
7220 – ADD (adder with 4 inputs), SUB (subtracter) 2-612
7222 – MUL (multiplier), DIV (divider) 2-613
7224 – AVA (absolute value generators) 2-614
7225 – NCM (numerical comparator) 2-615
7226 – PLI (scaling polyline) 2-616
7230 – MFP (pulse generator), PCL (pulse shortener) 2-617
7232 – PDE (switch-in delay) 2-618
7233 – PDF (switch-out delay) 2-619
7234 – PST (pulse extender) 2-620
7240 – RSR (RS flipflop), DFR (D flipflop) 2-621
7250 – BSW (binary changeover switch), NSW (numerical changeover switch) 2-622
7260 – LIM (limiter) 2-623
7262 – PT1 (smoothing element) 2-624
7264 – INT (integrator), DIF (differentiating element) 2-625
7270 – LVM (limit value monitor) 2-626

Fig. 2-102
7200 – Run-time groups / Sampling times
Run-time group
1 2 3 4 5 6
RTG sampling time [ms]
r20001[1] = 8 ms r20001[2] = 16 ms r20001[3] = 32 ms r20001[4] = 64 ms r20001[5] = 128 ms r20001[6] = 256 ms
r20001[0..9]
Logic function blocks
AND, OR, XOR, NOT
X X X X X X
Arithmetic function blocks
ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, AVA, NCM, PLI
- - - - X X
Time function blocks
MFP, PCL, PDE, PDF, PST
- - - - X X
Memory function blocks
RSR, DSR
X X X X X X
Switch function block
NSW
- - - - X X
Switch function block
BSW
X X X X X X
Control function blocks
LIM, PT1, INT, DIF
- - - - X X
Complex function blocks
LVM
- - - - X X

Function diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2-607
Free Function Blocks FP_7200_97_51.vsd Function diagram

- 7200 -
Run-time groups / Sampling times 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-608

Function diagrams
Fig. 2-103 AND 0 AND 2
AND 0 RTG AND 2 RTG

1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999
p20032 (9999) p20040 (9999)
7210 – AND (AND function block with 4 inputs)
AND 0 inputs AND 2 inputs

p20030 p20038
[0] I0 [0] I0
I1 AND 0 output Q I1 AND 2 output Q
[1] Q [1] Q
I2 r20031 I2 r20039
[2] [2]
[3] I3 [3] I3
AND 0 RunSeq AND 2 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20033 (10) p20041 (30)
AND 1 AND 3
AND 1 RTG AND 3 RTG

1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999
p20036 (9999) p20044 (9999)
AND 1 inputs AND 3 inputs

p20034 p20042
[0] I0 [0] I0
I1 AND 1 output Q I1 AND 3 output Q
[1] Q [1] Q
r20035 r20043
[2] I2 [2] I2
[3] I3 [3] I3
AND 1 RunSeq AND 3 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20037 (20) p20045 (40)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Logic function blocks FP_7210_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 7210 -
AND (AND function block with 4 inputs) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-104
OR 0 OR 2
OR 0 RTG OR 2 RTG
1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999
p20048 (9999) p20056 (9999)
7212 – OR (OR function block with 4 inputs)
OR 0 inputs OR 2 inputs
p20046 p20054
[0] I0 [0] I0
I1 OR 0 output Q I1 OR 2 output Q
[1] Q [1] Q
I2 r20047 I2 r20055
[2] [2]
[3] I3 [3] I3
OR 0 RunSeq OR 2 RunSeq
0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20049 (60) p20057 (80)
OR 1 OR 3
OR 1 RTG OR 3 RTG
1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999
p20052 (9999) p20060 (9999)
OR 1 inputs OR 3 inputs
p20050 p20058
[0] I0 [0] I0
I1 OR 1 output Q I1 OR 3 output Q
[1] Q [1] Q
I2 r20051 I2 r20059
[2] [2]
[3] I3 [3] I3
OR 1 RunSeq OR 3 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20053 (70) p20061 (90)
Function diagrams
2-609
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 7212 -
OR (OR function block with 4 inputs) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-610

Function diagrams
Fig. 2-105
XOR 0 XOR 2
XOR 0 RTG XOR 2 RTG

1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999
p20064 (9999) p20072 (9999)
7214 – XOR (XOR function block with 4 inputs)
XOR 0 inputs XOR 2 inputs

p20062 p20070
[0] I0 [0] I0
I1 XOR 0 output Q I1 XOR 2 output Q
[1] Q [1] Q
I2 r20063 I2 r20071
[2] [2]
[3] I3 [3] I3
XOR 0 RunSeq XOR 2 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20065 (110) p20073 (130)
XOR 1 XOR 3
XOR 1 RTG XOR 3 RTG

1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999
p20068 (9999) p20076 (9999)
XOR 1 inputs XOR 3 inputs

p20066 p20074
[0] I0 [0] I0
I1 XOR 1 output Q I1 XOR 3 output Q
[1] Q [1] Q
I2 r20067 I2 r20075
[2] [2]
[3] I3 [3] I3
XOR 1 RunSeq XOR 3 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20069 (120) p20077 (140)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 7214 -
XOR (XOR function block with 4 inputs) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-106 NOT 0 NOT 3
NOT 0 RTG NOT 3 RTG

1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999
p20080 (9999) p20092 (9999)
7216 – NOT (inverter)
NOT 0 input I NOT 3 input I

p20078 I Q NOT 0 inv output p20090 I Q NOT 3 inv output
(0) 1 r20079 (0) 1 r20091
NOT 0 RunSeq NOT 3 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20081 (160) p20093 (190)
NOT 1 NOT 4
NOT 1 RTG NOT 4 RTG

1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999
p20084 (9999) p20302 (9999)
(0) 1 r20083 (0) 1 r20301

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20085 (170) p20303 (770)
NOT 2 NOT 5
NOT 2 RTG NOT 5 RTG

1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999
p20088 (9999) p20306 (9999)

(0) 1 r20087 (0) 1 r20305
Function diagrams
0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20089 (180) p20307 (780)
2-611
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 7216 -
NOT (inverter) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-612

Function diagrams
Fig. 2-107
ADD 0 RTG
ADD 0 5 ... 9999
p20096 (9999)
ADD 0 inputs
p20094
X0
SUB 0
[0]
X1 ADD 0 output Y
7220 – ADD (adder with 4 inputs), SUB (subtracter)
[1] Y SUB 0 RTG

[2] X2 + r20095
5 ... 9999
X3 p20104 (9999)
[3]
SUB 0 inputs
ADD 0 RunSeq p20102
0 ... 32000 X1 SUB 0 difference Y
[0] Y
p20097 (210) [1] X2 X1 - X2 r20103
ADD 1 ADD 1 RTG

5 ... 9999
p20100 (9999) SUB 0 RunSeq
0 ... 32000
ADD 1 inputs p20105 (240)
p20098
[0] X0
X1 ADD 1 output Y
[1] Y
[2] X2 + r20099
X3
[3]
SUB 1
ADD 1 RunSeq
0 ... 32000
SUB 1 RTG
p20101 (220)
5 ... 9999
p20108 (9999)
ADD 2 ADD 2 RTG

SUB 1 inputs
5 ... 9999
p20310 (9999)
p20106
X1 SUB 1 difference Y
[0] Y
ADD 2 inputs [1] X2 X1 - X2 r20107
p20308
[0] X0
X1 ADD 2 output Y
[1] Y
[2] X2 + r20309
X3
[3] SUB 1 RunSeq
0 ... 32000
p20109 (250)
ADD 2 RunSeq
0 ... 32000
p20311 (800)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Arithmetic function blocks FP_7220_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 7220 -
ADD (adder with 4 inputs), SUB (subtracter) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-108
MUL 0 DIV 0
MUL 0 RTG DIV 0 RTG

5 ... 9999 5 ... 9999
p20112 (9999) p20121 (9999)
7222 – MUL (multiplier), DIV (divider)
MUL 0 inputs
DIV 0 inputs DIV 0 quotient
p20110 Y
X0 p20118 r20119 [0] DIV 0 Quotient
[0] YIN
X1 MUL 0 product Y [0] X1 [1] DIV 0 Multiple integer quotient
[1] Y MOD
X2 x r20111 [1] X2 X1 / X2 [2] DIV 0 Division remainder
[2]
X3 QF
[3] r20120
DIV 0 divisor=0 QF
MUL 0 RunSeq DIV 0 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20113 (270) p20122 (300)
MUL 1 DIV 1
MUL 1 RTG DIV 1 RTG

5 ... 9999 5 ... 9999
p20116 (9999) p20126 (9999)
MUL 1 inputs
DIV 1 inputs DIV 1 quotient
p20114 Y
X0 p20123 r20124 [0] DIV 0 Quotient
[0] YIN
X1 MUL 1 product Y [0] X1 [1] DIV 0 Multiple integer quotient
[1] Y MOD
X2 x r20115 [1] X2 X1 / X2 [2] DIV 0 Division remainder
[2]
X3 QF
[3] r20125
DIV 1 divisor=0 QF
MUL 1 RunSeq DIV 1 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20117 (280) p20127 (310)

Function diagrams
2-613
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 7222 -
MUL (multiplier), DIV (divider) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-614

Function diagrams
Fig. 2-109
AVA 0
7224 – AVA (absolute value generators)
AVA 0 RTG
5 ... 9999
p20131 (9999)
AVA 0 input X AVA 0 output Y

Y r20129
p20128 X
(0)
AVA 0 input neg SN
SN
r20130
AVA 0 RunSeq
0 ... 32000
p20132 (340)
AVA 1
AVA 1 RTG
5 ... 9999
p20136 (9999)
AVA 1 input X AVA 1 output Y

Y r20134
p20133 X
(0)
AVA 1 input neg SN
SN
r20135
AVA 1 RunSeq
0 ... 32000
p20137 (350)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 7224 -
AVA (absolute value generators) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-110
NCM 0
7225 – NCM (numerical comparator)
NCM 0 RTG
5 ... 9999
p20316 (9999)
NCM 0 inputs X1 > X2

p20312
X1
> QU r20313 NCM 0 output QU
[0] X1 = X2
[1]
X2 = QE r20314 NCM 0 output QE
X1 < X2
< QL r20315 NCM 0 output QL
NCM 0 RunSeq
0 ... 32000
p20317 (820)
NCM 1
NCM 1 RTG
5 ... 9999
p20322 (9999)
NCM 1 inputs X1 > X2

p20318
X1
> QU r20319 NCM 1 output QU
[0] X1 = X2
[1]
X2 = QE r20320 NCM 1 output QE
X1 < X2
< QL r20321 NCM 1 output QL
NCM 1 RunSeq
0 ... 32000

p20323 (830)
Function diagrams
2-615
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 7225 -
NCM (numerical comparator) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-616

Function diagrams
Fig. 2-111 PLI 0
PLI 0 RTG
5 ... 9999
p20376 (9999)
7226 – PLI (scaling polyline)
PLI 0 X-coordinate
-340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 A18/B18 Breakpoint 0 (A0/B0 = p20374[0]/p20375[0]) ... Breakpoint 19 (A19/B19 = p20374[19]/p20375[19])
p20374 (0.0000) Y
A19/B19
PLI 0 input X
p20372 PLI 0 output Y
X Xn Y
(0) X r20373
PLI 0 Y-coordinate A0/B0

Yn
-340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 A1/B1
p20375 (0.0000)
PLI 0 RunSeq
0 ... 32000
p20377 (980)
PLI 1
PLI 1 RTG
5 ... 9999
p20382 (9999)
PLI 1 X-coordinate
-340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 A18/B18 Breakpoint 0 (A0/B0 = p20380[0]/p20381[0]) ... Breakpoint 19 (A19/B19 = p20380[19]/p20381[19])
p20380 (0.0000) Y
A19/B19
PLI 1 input X
p20378 PLI 1 output Y

X Xn Y
(0) X r20379
PLI 1 Y-coordinate A0/B0 Note:

Yn
-340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 A1/B1 This function block randomly adapts output variable Y to input variable X by means of up to 20 breakpoints in 4
p20381 (0.0000) quadrants.
Interpolation is carried out linearly between the breakpoints. Outlying the area A0 to A19, the characteristic curve runs horizontally.
PLI 1 RunSeq During configuration, you must ensure that the values of A0 to A19 are arranged in ascending order. Otherwise the
0 ... 32000 values at the output will not be correct. The values B0 to B19 can be selected at random, i.e., independently of the
p20383 (990) previous value.
If breakpoints are not needed (e.g., A16/B16 and higher), the following values of the X- and Y-coordinates (A16/B16 to
A19/B19) must be assigned the same values as A15/B15.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 7226 -
PLI (scaling polyline) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-112
MFP 0 MFP 2 PCL 0

7230 – MFP (pulse generator), PCL (pulse shortener)
MFP 0 RTG MFP 0 pulse_dur ms MFP 2 RTG MFP 2 pulse_dur ms PCL 0 RTG PCL 0 pulse_dur ms
5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 60000.00 5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 60000.00 5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 60000.00
p20141 (9999) p20139 (0.00) p20357 (9999) p20355 (0.00) p20151 (9999) p20149 (0.00)
T T T
MFP 0 inp_pulse I MFP 2 inp_pulse I PCL 0 inp_pulse I
p20138 T MFP 0 output Q p20354 T MFP 2 output Q p20148 T PCL 0 output Q
I Q I Q I Q
(0) r20140 (0) r20356 (0) r20150
MFP 0 RunSeq MFP 2 RunSeq PCL 0 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20142 (370) p20358 (950) p20152 (400)
MFP 1 MFP 3 PCL 1
MFP 1 RTG MFP 1 pulse_dur ms MFP 3 RTG MFP 3 pulse_dur ms PCL 1 RTG PCL 1 pulse_dur ms
5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 60000.00 5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 60000.00 5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 60000.00
p20146 (9999) p20144 (0.00) p20362 (9999) p20360 (0.00) p20156 (9999) p20154 (0.00)
T T T
MFP 1 inp_pulse I MFP 3 inp_pulse I PCL 1 inp_pulse I
p20143 T MFP 1 output Q p20359 T MFP 3 output Q p20153 T PCL 1 output Q
I Q I Q I Q
(0) r20145 (0) r20361 (0) r20155

MFP 1 RunSeq MFP 3 RunSeq PCL 1 RunSeq
0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
Function diagrams
p20147 (380) p20363 (960) p20157 (410)
2-617
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Time function blocks FP_7230_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 7230 -
MFP (pulse generator), PCL (pulse shortener) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-618

Function diagrams
Fig. 2-113
PDE 0 PDE 2
PDE 0 RTG PDE 0 t_del ms PDE 2 RTG PDE 2 t_del ms

7232 – PDE (switch-in delay)
5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 60000.00 5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 60000.00
p20161 (9999) p20159 (0.00) p20337 (9999) p20335 (0.00)
T T
PDE 0 inp_pulse I PDE 2 inp_pulse I
p20158 T 0 PDE 0 output Q p20334 T 0 PDE 2 output Q
I Q I Q
(0) r20160 (0) r20336
PDE 0 RunSeq PDE 2 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20162 (430) p20338 (890)
PDE 1 PDE 3
PDE 1 RTG PDE 1 t_del ms PDE 3 RTG PDE 3 t_del ms
5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 60000.00 5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 60000.00
p20166 (9999) p20164 (0.00) p20342 (9999) p20340 (0.00)
T T
PDE 1 inp_pulse I PDE 3 inp_pulse I
p20163 PDE 1 output Q p20339 PDE 3 output Q
I T 0 Q I T 0 Q
(0) r20165 (0) r20341
PDE 1 RunSeq PDE 3 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20167 (440) p20343 (900)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 7232 -
PDE (switch-in delay) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-114
PDF 0 PDF 2
PDF 0 RTG PDF 0 t_ext ms PDF 2 RTG PDF 2 t_ext ms

7233 – PDF (switch-out delay)
5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 60000.00 5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 60000.00
p20171 (9999) p20169 (0.00) p20347 (9999) p20345 (0.00)
T T
PDF 0 inp_pulse I PDF 2 inp_pulse I
p20168 0 T PDF 0 output Q p20344 0 T PDF 2 output Q
I Q I Q
(0) r20170 (0) r20346
PDF 0 RunSeq PDF 2 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20172 (460) p20348 (920)
PDF 1 PDF 3
PDF 1 RTG PDF 1 t_ext ms PDF 3 RTG PDF 3 t_ext ms
5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 60000.00 5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 60000.00
p20176 (9999) p20174 (0.00) p20352 (9999) p20350 (0.00)
T T
PDF 1 inp_pulse I PDF 3 inp_pulse I
p20173 0 T PDF 1 output Q p20349 0 T PDF 3 output Q
I Q I Q
(0) r20175 (0) r20351
PDF 1 RunSeq PDF 3 RunSeq

0 ... 32000 0 ... 32000
p20177 (470) p20353 (930)
Function diagrams
2-619
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 7233 -
PDF (switch-out delay) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-620

Function diagrams
Fig. 2-115
PST 0
PST 0 RTG PST 0 pulse_dur ms
7234 – PST (pulse extender)
5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 60000.00

p20181 (9999) p20179 (0.00)
T
PST 0 inputs
p20178 T
Input pulse I Q PST 0 output Q
[0]
Reset input R r20180
[1]
PST 0 RunSeq
0 ... 7999
p20182 (490)
PST 1
PST 1 RTG PST 1 pulse_dur ms
5 ... 9999 0.00 ... 60000.00
p20186 (9999) p20184 (0.00)
T
PST 1 inputs
p20183
Input pulse I T PST 1 output Q

[0] Q
r20185
[1] Reset input R
PST 1 RunSeq
0 ... 7999
p20187 (500)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 7234 -
PST (pulse extender) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-116 RSR 0 RSR 0 RTG

1 ... 9999
DFR 0 DFR 0 RTG
1 ... 9999
p20191 (9999) p20201 (9999)
DFR 0 inputs
RSR 0 inputs p20198
RSR 0 output Q Trigger input I DFR 0 output Q
p20188 Q [0] Q
Set r20189 D input D r20199
7240 – RSR (RS flipflop), DFR (D flipflop)
[0] S [1]
Reset Set S
[1] R RSR 0 inv outp QN [2] DFR 0 inv outp QN
QN [3] Reset R QN
r20190 r20200
RSR 0 RunSeq DFR 0 RunSeq

0 ... 7999 0 ... 32000
p20192 (520) p20202 (550)
RSR 1 RSR 1 RTG DFR 1 DFR 1 RTG

1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999
p20196 (9999) p20206 (9999)
DFR 1 inputs
RSR 1 inputs p20203
p20193 Q [0] Q
Set S r20194 [1] D input D r20204
[0] Set
Reset R [2] S
[1] RSR 1 inv outp QN Reset DFR 1 inv outp QN
QN [3] R QN
r20195 r20205

0 ... 7999 0 ... 32000
p20197 (530) p20207 (560)
RSR 2 RSR 2 RTG DFR 2 DFR 2 RTG

1 ... 9999 1 ... 9999
p20327 (9999) p20332 (9999)
DFR 2 inputs
RSR 2 inputs p20329
p20324 Q [0] Q
Set S r20325 [1] D input D r20330
[0] Set S
Reset R [2]
[1] RSR 2 inv outp QN Reset DFR 2 inv outp QN
QN [3] R QN
r20326 r20331

Function diagrams
0 ... 7999 0 ... 32000
p20328 (850) p20333 (870)
2-621
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Flipflop function blocks FP_7240_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 7240 -
RSR (RS flipflop), DFR (D flipflop) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-622

Function diagrams
Fig. 2-117
BSW 0 NSW 0
BSW 0 RTG BSW 0 RunSeq NSW 0 RTG NSW 0 RunSeq

7250 – BSW (binary changeover switch), NSW (numerical changeover switch)
1 ... 9999 0 ... 7999 5 ... 9999 0 ... 32000

p20211 (9999) p20212 (580) p20221 (9999) p20222 (610)
BSW 0 inputs NSW 0 inputs

p20208 I0 0 BSW 0 output Q p20218 X0 0 NSW 0 output Y
[0] r20210 [0] r20220
[1] I1 Q [1] X1 Y
1 1
I I
BSW 0 sw_setting NSW 0 sw_setting
p20209 p20219
(0) (0)
BSW 1 NSW 1
BSW 1 RTG BSW 1 RunSeq NSW 1 RTG NSW 1 RunSeq

1 ... 9999 0 ... 7999 5 ... 9999 0 ... 32000
p20216 (9999) p20217 (590) p20226 (9999) p20227 (620)
BSW 1 inputs NSW 1 inputs

p20213 I0 0 BSW 1 output Q p20223 X0 0 NSW 1 output Y
[0] r20215 [0] r20225
[1] I1 Q [1] X1 Y
1 1
I I
BSW 1 sw_setting NSW 1 sw_setting
p20214 p20224
(0) (0)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Switch function blocks FP_7250_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 7250 -
BSW (binary changeover switch), NSW (numerical changeover switch) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-118
LIM 0
7260 – LIM (limiter)
LIM 0 RTG
5 ... 9999
p20234 (9999)
LIM 0 upper lim LU LU QU LIM 0 QU

LIM 0 input X -340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 r20232
p20228 p20229 (0.0000) X Y LIM 0 output Y
(0) r20231
LIM 0 lower lim LL LIM 0 QL
LL QL
-340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 r20233
p20230 (0.0000)
LIM 0 RunSeq
0 ... 32000
p20235 (640)
LIM 1
LIM 1 RTG
5 ... 9999
p20242 (9999)
LIM 1 upper lim LU LU QU LIM 1 QU

LIM 1 input X -340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 r20240
p20236 p20237 (0.0000) X Y LIM 1 output Y
(0) r20239
LIM 1 lower lim LL LIM 1 QL
LL QL
-340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 r20241
p20238 (0.0000)
LIM 1 RunSeq
0 ... 32000

p20243 (650)
Function diagrams
2-623
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Control function blocks FP_7260_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 7260 -
LIM (limiter) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-624

Function diagrams
Fig. 2-119
7262 – PT1 (smoothing element)
PT1 0 PT1 1
PT1 0 T_smooth ms PT1 1 T_smooth ms

0.00 ... 340.28235E36 0.00 ... 340.28235E36
p20246 (0.00) p20252 (0.00)
PT1 0 RTG PT1 0 RunSeq PT1 1 RTG PT1 1 RunSeq
5 ... 9999 0 ... 32000 5 ... 9999 0 ... 32000
p20248 (9999) p20249 (670) p20254 (9999) p20255 (680)
T T
PT1 0 inputs PT1 1 inputs
p20244 PT1 0 output Y p20250 PT1 1 output Y
Input X Y Input X Y
[0] r20247 [0] r20253
Set value SV Set value SV
[1] [1]
PT1 0 acc set val S PT1 1 acc set val S

p20245 p20251
(0) (0)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 7262 -
PT1 (smoothing element) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
INT 0
Fig. 2-120
INT 0 RTG INT 0 RunSeq
5 ... 9999 0 ... 32000
p20264 (9999) p20265 (700)
7264 – INT (integrator), DIF (differentiating element)
INT 0 T_Integr ms
0.00 ... 340.28235E36
p20259 (0.00)
TI
INT 0 inputs INT 0 upper lim LU INT 0 QU
LU QU
p20256 -340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 r20262
Input X p20257 (0.0000) Y INT 0 output Y
[0]
Set value SV r20261
[1] INT 0 QL
INT 0 lower lim LL LL QL
-340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 r20263
INT 0 acc set val p20258 (0.0000)
S
p20260
(0)
Integrating algorithm: Y(n) = Y(n-1) + (T_sample / Ti) * X(n)
DIF 0
DIF 0 T_diff ms
0.00 ... 340.28235E36
p20285 (0.00)
DIF 0 input X TD
p20284 d DIF 0 output Y
X Y
(0) dt r20286
DIF 0 RTG DIF 0 RunSeq

5 ... 9999 0 ... 32000
p20287 (9999) p20288 (750)

Function diagrams
Differentiating algorithm: Y(n) = (X(n) - X(n-1)) * (TD / T_sample)
2-625
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 7264 -
INT (integrator), DIF (differentiating element) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
2-626

Function diagrams
Fig. 2-121
LVM 0 LVM 1
7270 – LVM (limit value monitor)
LVM 0 avg value M LVM 1 avg value M

-340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 -340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36
p20267 (0.0000) p20276 (0.0000)
LVM 0 limit L LVM 0 hyst HY LVM 1 limit L LVM 1 hyst HY
-340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 -340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 -340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36 -340.28235E36 ... 340.28235E36
p20268 (0.0000) p20269 (0.0000) p20277 (0.0000) p20278 (0.0000)
LVM 0 RTG LVM 0 RunSeq LVM 1 RTG LVM 1 RunSeq
5 ... 9999 0 ... 7999 5 ... 9999 0 ... 7999
p20273 (9999) p20274 (720) p20282 (9999) p20283 (730)
L M HY L M HY
LVM 0 X above QU LVM 1 X above QU

1 QU 1 QU
r20270 r20279
0 0
1 1
LVM 0 input X LVM 0 X within QM LVM 1 input X LVM 1 X within QM
p20266 QM p20275 QM
X r20271 X r20280
(0) 0 (0) 0
1 1
LVM 0 X below QL LVM 1 X below QL
QL QL
r20272 r20281
0 0
M-L M M+L M-L M M+L
HY HY HY HY
L L L L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Complex function blocks FP_7270_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 7270 -
LVM (limit value monitor, double-sided with hysteresis) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Function diagrams
Technology functions
2.13 Technology functions
Function diagrams
7017 – DC brake (p0300 = 1) 2-628

<1> <2>
2-628
Technology functions
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-122
Mot t_de-excitat. DCBRK I_brake DCBRK time DCBRK n_start Current actual values I_act abs val [Aeff]
0.000 ... 20.000 [s] 0.00 ... 10000.00 [Aeff] 0.0 ... 3600.0 [s] 0.00 ... 210000.00 [1/min] [6714] r0068[0..1]
p0347 [D] (0.000) p1232 [D] (0.00) p1233 [D] (1.0) p1234 [D] (210000.00)
n_act Pulse disable The parameters of the

DCBRK config
n_set I_max current controller are also used.
0 ... 14
7017 – DC brake (p0300 = 1)
p1231 [D] (0) To pulse disable

p1234 To sequencer I_max_U_ctrl Kp I_max_U_ctrl Tn
DCBRK Akt 0.000 ... 100000.000 0.000 ... 50.000 [s]
p1230 [C] DCBRK ZSW p1345 [D] (0.000) p1346 [D] (0.030)
<3> 14
4
(0) t r1239
|I_set| p0347 r1239.10
OFF U_output [Veff]
0 Kp Tn
r0072
p1232
DCBRK ZSW |I_set|
|I_act|
r1239 MIN
From I²t control [8014]
r1239 p1233 t To control [6730]
To V/f characteristic
[6300]
Pulse disable
n_act
n_set I_ctrl Kp I_ctrl Tn
0.000 ... 100000.000 0.00 ... 1000.00 [ms]
p1715 [D] (0.000) p1717 [D] (2.00)
p1231 = 4 (control command) t To pulse disable

p0347 To sequencer
DCBRK ZSW |I_set|
r1239
r1239 p1232
|I_act|
t
Braking response
n_act Pulse disable
p1231 = 5 (OFF1/OFF3)
n_set
p1234
DCBRK ZSW
r1239 To pulse disable
r1239 To sequencer
t
|I_set| p0347 DCBRK ZSW
DC brake fault response r1239
p1232 r1239 .8
|I_act|
p1233 t
<1> The de-magnetization time is determined during automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, 3).
<2> The DC braking current is determined during automatic calculation (p0340 = 1).
<3> DC braking when starting speed for DC braking (p1234) is fallen below.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology functions FP_7017_97_54.vsd Function diagram
- 7017 -
DC brake (p0300 = 1) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Function diagrams
2.14 Technology controller
Function diagrams
7950 – Fixed values, binary selection (p2216 = 2) 2-630
7951 – Fixed values, direct selection (p2216 = 1) 2-631
7954 – Motorized potentiometer 2-632
7958 – Closed-loop control 2-633

Tec_ctrl sel bit 0
2-630
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-123
p2220 [C]
(0)
23 20 0 ... 15
Tec_ctrl sel bit 1 0.00 % 0000 Tec_ctrl No. act
p2221 [C] r2229
(0) Tec_ctr fix val 1
7950 – Fixed values, binary selection (p2216 = 2)
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0001

Tec_ctrl sel bit 2 p2201 [D] (10.00)
p2222 [C] Tec_ctr fix val 2
(0) -200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0010
p2202 [D] (20.00)
Tec_ctrl sel bit 3 Tec_ctr fix val 3
p2223 [C] -200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0011 Tec_ctr FixVal ZSW
(0) p2203 [D] (30.00) r2225
Tec_ctr fix val 4 r2225
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0100
p2204 [D] (40.00)
Tec_ctr fix val 5
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0101
p2205 [D] (50.00)
Tec_ctr fix val 6

-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0110
p2206 [D] (60.00)
Tec_ctr fix val 7
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0111
p2207 [D] (70.00) Tec_ctr FixVal eff [%]
Tec_ctr fix val 8 r2224
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 1000
p2208 [D] (80.00)
Tec_ctr fix val 9
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 1001
p2209 [D] (90.00)
Tec_ctr fix val 10
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 1010
p2210 [D] (100.00)
Tec_ctr fix val 11
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 1011
p2211 [D] (110.00)
Tec_ctr fix val 12

-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 1100
p2212 [D] (120.00)
Tec_ctr fix val 13
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 1101
p2213 [D] (130.00)
Tec_ctr fix val 14
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 1110
p2214 [D] (140.00)
Tec_ctr fix val 15
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 1111
p2215 [D] (150.00)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Technology controller FP_7950_97_51.vsd Function diagram
- 7950 -
Fixed values, binary selection (p2216 = 2) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Fig. 2-124
7951 – Fixed values, direct selection (p2216 = 1)
Tec_ctrl sel bit 0 p2220 [C]

(0)

(0) Tec_ctr FixVal ZSW
r2225
Tec_ctrl sel bit 2 p2222 [C] r2225
(0)

(0)
Tec_ctr fix val 1

-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0001
p2201 [D] (10.00)
Tec_ctr fix val 2
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0010
p2202 [D] (20.00)
Tec_ctr fix val 3
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0100
p2203 [D] (30.00)
+ + + Tec_ctr FixVal eff [%]
Tec_ctr fix val 4
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 1000 r2224
p2204 [D] (40.00) + + +
Function diagrams
2-631
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 7951 -
Fixed values, direct selection (p2216 = 1) 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Tec_ctr mop config
p2230 [D] (0000 0100 bin)
2-632
Function diagrams
Fig. 2-125
Data save active 0 The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p2240.
0 1 The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved after OFF and after ON is entered using r2231.
1
Initial rounding-off active 0 Without initial rounding.
7954 – Motorized potentiometer
2 1 With initial rounding. The ramp-up/down time set is exceeded accordingly.

Non-volatile data save active 0 Non-volatile data save not activated
3
1 The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a non-volatile fashion (for p2230.0 = 1)
Ramp-function generator is always active 0 Ramp-up encoder inactive with pulse disable.
4 1 The ramp-up encoder is calculated independently of the pulse enable.
Tec_ctrl mop raise Old value is kept

p2235 [C]
(0)
Tec_ctrl mop lower <2> <2>

p2236 [C]
(0) Tec_ctr mop t_r-up Tec_ctrMop t_rdown

0.0 ... 1000.0 [s] 0.0 ... 1000.0 [s]
p2247 [D] (10.0) p2248 [D] (10.0)
0 0
y
Tec_ctrl mop max p2237
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 0 1 Tec_ctr mop befRFG [%]
p2237 [D] (100.00) r2245
x y Tec_ctr mop aftRFG [%]
r2250
Tec_ctrl mop min x
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 1 0
p2238 [D] (-100.00)
-p2238
y=0
1 1
Tec_ctrl mop start

Missing enable sig -200.00 ... 200.00 [%]
r0046 p2240 [D] (0.00)
1 = OFF1, enable missing
r0046.0 <1>
Tec_ctrl mop mem [%]

r2231
<1> For p2230.0 = 0, this setpoint is entered after ON.

<2> If initial rounding-off is active (p2230.2 = 1), the selected ramp-up/down times are exceeded accordingly.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 7954 -
Motorized potentiometer 13.12.2010 V4.4 G120 CU240B/E-2
Tec_ctr integ stop Tec_ctrl outp scal
Fig. 2-126
r0056 p2286 [C] <3> Tec_ctrl outp scal p2296 [C]
Tec_ctrl set1 scal
0.00 ... 100.00 [%] r0056.13 (56.13) -100.00 ... 100.00 [%] (2295[0])
p2255 (100.00) p2295 (100.00)
ZSW cl-loop ctrl
Tec_ctrl setp 1 Tec_ctr set aftRFG [%] Tec_reg Vorsteuer
p2253 [C] r2260 p2289[C]
(0) Tec_ctr set aftFlt [%] Tec_ctrl error [%] (0)
7958 – Closed-loop control
r2262 r2273
Tec_reg Kp Tec_reg Tn
Tec_ctrl t_ramp-up Tec_ctrl set T Tec_ctrl fault inv p2263 = 1 0.000...1000.000 0.000...60.000 s Tec_ctrl status
Tec_ctrl set2 scal 0.00 ... 650.00 [s] 0.000 ... 60.000 [s] 0 ... 1
p2257 (1.00) p2261 (0.000) p2280 (1.000) p2285 (0.000) r2349
0.00 ... 100.00 [%] p2306 (0)
p2256 (100.00) r2349 .11 Tec_ctr start val
<1> <1> 0.00 ... 200.00 [%]
Tec_ctrl setp 2 <7> p2302 (0.00)
p2254 [C] + 1
-1
+
(0)
+ + 0 + +
+ + Tec_ctrl status
1 Tec_ctrl error [%] r2349
Tec_ctrl t_ramp-dn r2273 r2349.10
0.00 ... 650.00 [s] -1 0 p2263 = 0 r2349.1
p2258 (1.00) <2>
1 0 Tec_ctrl
Tech_ctrl act inv Tech_ctrl flt resp
Tec_ctrl u_lim act n_setp_sm
0 ... 1 Tec_ctrl type RFG n_set at 0 ... 2
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] [%]
p2271 (0) 0 ... 1 outp [1/min] r2344 p2345 (0)
p2267 (100.00)
p2263 (0) r1150 Tec_ctrl
Tec_ctrl act T Tech_ctrl gain act Tec_ctr ActVal fct 10 s 0 outp_sig [%]
0.000 ... 60.000 [s] 0.00 ... 500.00 [%] 0 ... 3 1
p2265 (0.000) r2294
p2269 (100.00) p2270 (0) Tech_ctrl act Tec_ctr fix val 15
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] 1
scal [%] 2
Tec_ctrl act val y p2215 [D] (150.00)
r2272
p2264 [C]
r2349 <5>
(0)
x -1 Tec_ctrl status
r2349.12
F07426
Tec_ctrl D comp T
0.000 ... 60.000 [s]
Tec_ctrl status p2274 (0.000) n_limit pos eff [1/min] Tec_ctrl m_lm s_sc
Tec_ctrl l_lim act r2349 <1> r1084 p2297 [C]
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%] r2349 .12 <5> (1084[0])

0000 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

0000 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SINAMICS G120

Operating instructions · 01 2011

Control Units ___________________

Edition 01/2011, Firmware V4.4

Siemens AG A5E02299792B AB Copyright © Siemens AG 2010,

Important changes with respect to the manual, edition 07/2010

New functions in firmware V4.4 In Chapter

Revised descriptions In Chapter

Inverter with CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

Inverter with CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

Change history .......................................................................................................................................... 3

Inverter with CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

4.2.1 Collecting motor data .................................................................................................................. 59

Inverter with CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

6.2.2.1 Setting the address ....................................................................................................................123

Inverter with CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

7.7.4 Overcurrent protection .............................................................................................................. 178

Inverter with CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

8.2 Replacing the Control Unit .........................................................................................................242

Inverter with CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

Inverter with CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

Who requires the operating instructions and what for?

What is described in the operating instructions?

Inverter with CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

1.2 Guide through this manual

All information relating to the commissioning of

 $GDSWDWLRQWRWKHDSSOLFDWLRQ ④ • Commissioning (Page 55)

Inverter with CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

1.3 Adapting the inverter in line with the application

1.3.1 General basics

Adapting the inverter to the drive task

Use the factory settings (where possible)

Only basic commissioning is required ... for simple, standard applications

Inverter with CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

1.4 Frequently required parameters

Parameters that in many cases help

Table 1- 1 How to switch to commissioning mode or restore the factory setting

Table 1- 2 How to determine the firmware version of the Control Unit

Table 1- 4 This is how you parameterize the up and down ramps

Inverter with CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

Table 1- 5 This is how you set the closed-loop type

Inverter with CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

1.5 Extended scope for adaptation

1.5.1 BICO technology: basic principles

Principle of operation of BICO technology

Inputs Parameter Output

MOP enable (higher)

Figure 1-1 Example of a BICO block: Motorized potentiometer (MOP)

Binectors and connectors

Inverter with CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

Definition of BICO technology

BICO block rxxxx %LQHFWRUFRQQHFWRU

Figure 1-3 BICO symbols

Inverter with CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

1.5.2 BICO technology: example

Example: Shifting a basic PLC functionality into the converter

p20161 = 5 p20159 = 5000 [ms]

Figure 1-4 Example: Signal interconnection for interlock

Table 1- 7 Parameterizing an interlock

Inverter with CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

Explanation of the example using the ON/OFF1 command

Figure 1-5 Interconnecting two BICO blocks by setting p0840[0] = 20031

Principle when connecting BICO blocks using BICO technology

Control Units ___________________

$GDSWDWLRQWRWKHDSSOLFDWLRQ ④ • Commissioning (Page 55)

BICO block rxxxx %LQHFWRUFRQQHFWRU

7KHUPDO 'HSWK &RQWURO8QLW :LGWK E

'HSWK &RQWURO8QLW :LGWK E

8 9 : 3(

/ಬ /ಬ /ಬ 3(ಬ /ಬ /ಬ /ಬ 3(ಬ